SewerGEMS V8i User's Guide PDF

Chapter
Welcome to Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i Help
Getting Started on page 1-1
Using Scenarios and Alternatives on page 9-811
Learn about Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, how to install and uninstall the
product, and how to contact Bentley Systems.
Learn how to define calculation options, calculate your model, and

review your results.
Introducing the Workspace on page 2-15
Presenting Your Results on page 10-905
Learn about the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i workspace, including

menus, toolbars and dockable managers.
Learn how present results in graphs, profiles and reports.
Quick Start Lessons on page 3-65
Working in ArcGIS Mode on page 11-1067
Perform these tutorials to learn the basics of using Bentley

SewerGEMS V8i.
Learn how to use Bentley SewerGEMS V8i ArcGIS-specific features
Using Modelbuilder on page 5-233
Working in AutoCAD Mode on page 13-1111
Learn how to use ModelBuilder in ArcGIS mode or the Stand-Alone

Editor.
Learn how to use Bentley SewerGEMS V8i in AutoCAD mode.
Starting a Project on page 4-173
Editing Attributes in the Property Editor on

page 15-1305
Learn how to set up a new project, manage existing project and set
project and other global options.
Learn about all the element attributes you can edit in Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i.
Creating Your Model on page 6-275
Theory on page 14-1123
Learn how to use Bentley SewerGEMS V8i layout and editing tools to
build your model.
Learn about the theory behind Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.
Loading on page 7-601
Frequently Asked Questions on page 16-1417
Learn how to use Bentley SewerGEMS V8i data loading features to

extend your model.
Learn the answers to some common questions about using Bentley

SewerGEMS V8i.
Calculating Your Model on page 8-727
About Bentley Systems on page A-1423
Learn how to create and manage "what-if" scenarios.
Learn about other Haestad Methods products available from Bentley

Systems.
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Users Guide
1-1
Getting Started on page 1-1
Using Scenarios and Alternatives on page 9-811
Learn about Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, how to install and uninstall the
product, and how to contact Bentley Systems.
Learn how to define calculation options, calculate your model, and review
your results.
Introducing the Workspace on page 2-15
Presenting Your Results on page 10-905
Learn about the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i workspace, including menus,

toolbars and dockable managers.
Learn how to present results in graphs, profiles, and reports.
Working in AutoCAD Mode on page 13-1111
Perform these tutorials to learn the basics of using Bentley SewerGEMS

V8i.
Learn how to use Bentley SewerGEMS V8i in AutoCAD mode.
Using Modelbuilder on page 5-233
Editing Attributes in the Property Editor on

page 15-1305
Learn how to use ModelBuilder.
Learn about all the element attributes you can edit in Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i.
Starting a Project on page 4-175
Theory
Learn how to set up a new project, manage existing project and set project
and other global options.
Learn about the theory behind Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.
Creating Your Model on page 5-225
Frequently Asked Questions on page 16-1417
Learn how to use Bentley SewerGEMS V8i layout and editing tools to
build your model.
Learn the answers to some common questions about using Bentley

SewerGEMS V8i.
Learn how to use Bentley SewerGEMS V8i data loading features to

extend your model.
Learn about other Haestad Methods products available from Bentley

Systems.
Calculating Your Model on page 8-727

Learn how to create and manage "what-if" scenarios.
1-2
Welcome to Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Help 1

Getting Started 1
What is Bentley SewerGEMS V8i? 1
Whats New in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i SELECTseries 3? 2
What is CivilStorm? 5
Installation, Upgrades, and Updates 7
Municipal License Administrator Auto-Configuration 7
Software Updates via the Web and Bentley SELECT 7
Troubleshooting 8
License Check 8
Documentation 9
Quick Start Lessons 10
Contacting Us 11
Sales 11
Technical Support 11
Introducing the Workspace 15

Workspace 15
Stand-Alone Editor 15
MicroStation Mode 17
ArcGIS Mode 17
AutoCAD Mode 17
Menus 18
File Menu 18
USING SEED FILES 21
Edit Menu 21
Analysis Menu 22
Components Menu 24
View Menu 27
Tools Menu 30
Report Menu 33
Help Menu 33
Toolbars 34
Standard Toolbar 35
Edit Toolbar 36
Components Toolbar 36
Scenarios Toolbar 39
Analysis Toolbar 40
Compute Toolbar 41
View Toolbar 42
1-i
Help Toolbar 43
Layout Toolbar 44
Zoom Toolbar 48
Report Toolbar 48
Tools Toolbar 49
Select Toolbar 50
Customizing the Toolbars 52
Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons 52
Controlling Toolbars 53
Dynamic Manager Display 53
Opening Managers 54
Customizing Managers 56
Using Named Views 58
Copying and Pasting Data To and From Tables 59
Quick Start Lessons 65

Overview 65
Lesson 1: Overview of the SewerGEMS V8i Workspace 66
Part 1: Workspace Components Overview 66
Part 2: Working With the Drawing Pane 67
PANNING 68
ZOOMING 68
Part 3: Working With Toolbars 68
ADDING AND REMOVING TOOLBAR BUTTONS 69
REPOSITIONING TOOLBARS 70
Part 4: Working With Dockable Manager Components 70
Lesson 2: Laying Out a Network 74
Part 1: Laying Out Catchments and Ponds 75
Part 2: Laying Out Nodes and Links 76
Part 3: Moving Element Labels 80
Lesson 3: Entering Data 81
Part 1: Entering Element Input Data 81
Part 2: Entering Global Project Data 89
DEFINING PROJECT PROPERTIES 89
DEFINING STORM DATA 91
DEFINING GLOBAL STORM DATA 94
ADDING SANITARY LOADS 94
Lesson 4: Validating and Calculating a Model 99
Lesson 5: Presenting Calculated Results 106
Part 1: Generating Preformatted Reports 107
Part 2: Generating Custom Tabular Reports 113
Part 3: Using Graphs 118
1-ii
Part 4: Generating Profiles 124

Part 5: Applying Element Annotation 129
Part 6: Applying Color Coding 134
Lesson 6: Creating Multiple Storm Data 140
Part 1: Creating Unique Storm Data for Design Storms 141
Part 2: Creating Rainfall Runoff Alternatives to Reference Storm Data 144
Part 3: Creating Scenarios to Reference Rainfall Runoff Alternatives 147
Lesson 7: Working With the ArcMap Client 152
Part 1: Customizing the ArcMap Interface 153
Part 2: Creating a New Project in ArcMap 154
Part 3: Laying out a Model In ArcMap 157
Part 4: Creating A New ArcMap Project From An Existing Bentley SewerGEMS
V8i Project 159
Part 5: Using GeoTables 159
Lesson 8: Adding Hydrographs Using the RTK Runoff Method 164
Starting a Project 173

Welcome Dialog Box 173
Projects 173
Setting Project Properties 174
Setting Options 175
Options Dialog Box - Global Tab 175
STORED PROMPT RESPONSES DIALOG BOX 179
Options Dialog Box - Project Tab 179
Options Dialog Box - Drawing Tab 181
Options Dialog Box - Units Tab 182
Options Dialog Box - Labeling Tab 184
Options Dialog Box - ProjectWise Tab 185
Using ProjectWise 187
General Guidelines for using ProjectWise 187
SETTING UP PROJECTWISE INTEGRATION FOR STANDALONE 187
WORKING WITH PROJECTWISE IN STANDALONE 188
Considerations for ProjectWise Users 191
Using ProjectWise with Bentley SewerGEMS V8i for AutoCAD 192
Using ProjectWise with Bentley SewerGEMS V8i for MicroStation 192
Importing Data From Other Models 192
Importing Data from SWMM V5 193
FLOW DIVIDERS 193
IMPORTING PRESSURE PIPES 194
IImporting Data from Bentley Wastewater 195
BENTLEY WASTEWATER IMPORT WIZARD 195
Step 1: Bentley Wastewater Import 196
Step 2: Bentley Wastewater Data Source 196
1-iii
Step 3: Data Source Table Names 197

Step 4: Unit Options 197
Step 5: Import Options 198
Importing a Submodel 198

Importing a Bentley InRoads Storm and Sanitary V8i Model into SewerGEMS V8i
199
INROADS DRAINAGE IMPORT DIALOG BOX 218
Importing from LandXML 218
LANDXML ATTRIBUTE MAPPINGS 219
Import / Export Bentley MX Drainage (LandXML Format) 222
Exporting Data 226
Exporting a .DXF File 226
Exporting to SWMM 5 227
Exporting a Submodel 228
Exporting to Bentley InRoads Storm and Sanitary V8i 228
Exporting to Shapefile 229
Exporting to LandXML 229
Long Term Continuous Simulations in SewerGEMS V8i Using the SWMM Engine 230
Using Modelbuilder 233

Preparing to Use ModelBuilder 234
ModelBuilder Connections Manager 235
Specify Datasource Location 238
ModelBuilder Wizard 238
ModelBuilder Wizard 239
Step 1Specify Data Source 240
Step 2Specify Spatial Options 242
Step 3 - Specify Element Create/Remove/Update Options 244
Step 4Additional Options 246
Step 5Specify Field mappings for each Table/Feature Class 249
Step 6Build operation Confirmation 253
GIS-IDs 254
GIS-IDs Collection Dialog Box 256
Reviewing Your Results 256
Multi-select Data Source Types 257
Exporting X/Y Coordinates 257
ModelBuilder Warnings and Error Messages 257
Warnings 258
Error Messages 259
Esri ArcGIS Geodatabase Support 260
1-iv
Geodatabase Features 261

Geometric Networks 261
ArcGIS Geodatabase Features versus ArcGIS Geometric Network 261
Subtypes 262
SDE (Spatial Database Engine) 262
Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder 262
ModelBuilder Data Source Format 264
Handling Collection and Curve Data in Modelbuilder 265
Oracle as a Data Source for ModelBuilder 266
Using ModelBuilder to Import Time Series Data 268
Creating Your Model 275

Elements and Element Attributes 275
Link Elements 276
ENTERING ADDITIONAL DATA TO LINK ELEMENTS 277
Defining a Control Structure in a Conduit 277
Depth-Flow Curve Dialog Box 282
Adding a Minor Loss Collection to a Pressure Pipe 283
Defining the Geometry of a Link Element 285
Defining the Cross-Sectional Shape of a Link Element 286
C-Depth Table Dialog Box 288
DEPTH WIDTH CURVE DIALOG BOX 289

DIVERSION RATING CURVE DIALOG BOX 291
PROFILE IN A DIVERSION LINK 291
SECTIONS RESULTS DIALOG BOX 292
WHAT HAPPENS WHEN THE WATER LEVEL EXCEEDS THE TOP ELEVATION OF AN
OPEN CHANNEL? 293
HOW DO CROSS SECTION NODES CONTROL THE SHAPE OF CHANNEL CROSSSECTIONS? 293
PRESSURE ELEMENTS IN THE GRADUALLY VARIED FLOW SOLVER 294
GUTTERS IN THE SEWERCAD GRADUALLY VARIED FLOW SOLVER 295
PARABOLIC GUTTERS IN THE SEWERGEMS DYNAMIC WAVE SOLVER 295
CROSS SECTIONS IN THE GRADUALLY VARIED FLOW SOLVER 295
PIPE-ARCH AND ARCH CONDUIT SHAPES 295
Catch Basins 296
INLET TYPE 297
ADDING INFLOW VS. CAPTURE DATA TO A CATCH BASIN 297
CATCH BASINS IN THE SEWERCAD GRADUALLY VARIED FLOW SOLVER 299
FLOW (LOCAL SURFACE) AT CATCH BASINS 299
Manholes 301
ADDING SURFACE DEPTH VS. AREA DATA TO A CATCH BASIN OR A MANHOLE 301
FLOW HEADLOSS CURVES DIALOG BOX 303
OVERFLOW IN THE SEWERGEMS DYNAMIC WAVE SOLVER 305
Cross Sections 305
1-v
Junctions 306
Pressure Junctions 306
Pond Outlet Entrances 307
DEFINING COMPOSITE OUTLET STRUCTURES 308
STORE ELEVATION-FLOW-TAILWATER TABLE 320
IRREGULAR WEIR DIALOG BOX 322
ELEVATION-FLOW CURVE DIALOG BOX 323
SPOT ELEVATIONS (HEADWATER) DIALOG BOX 323
SPOT ELEVATIONS (TAILWATER) DIALOG BOX 324
ELEVATION-FLOW-AREA CURVE DIALOG BOX 325
IRREGULAR WEIR CROSS SECTION DIALOG BOX 325
Outfalls 326
ADDING TIME VS. ELEVATION DATA TO AN OUTFALL 327
ADDING ELEVATION VS. FLOW DATA TO AN OUTFALL 328
ADDING CYCLIC TIME VS. ELEVATION DATA TO AN OUTFALL 330
Wet Wells 331
ADDING DEPTH VS. AREA DATA TO A WET WELL 332
TRANSITIONING FROM GRAVITY CONDUITS TO PRESSURE PIPES 333
Pumps 335
PUMP DEFINITIONS DIALOG BOX 337
PUMP CONTROLS 348
PUMP CURVE DIALOG BOX 349
PUMP CURVE COMBINATIONS 349
Pump Curve Combination Editor 350
FLOW-EFFICIENCY CURVE DIALOG BOX 353

SPEED-EFFICIENCY CURVE DIALOG BOX 354
Efficiency Points Table 356
Variable-Speed Pumps (VSP or VFD) 356
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS 357

PUMPS AND WET WELLS IN THE GVF-RATIONAL SOLVER 358
Variable Speed Pump Battery 358
VARIABLE SPEED PUMP BATTERIES IN SEWERGEMS 359
Pump Stations 361
PUMP STATIONS DIALOG BOX 363
PUMPS DIALOG BOX 365
PUMP STATIONS AND PUMP STATION ELEMENTS 365
Catchments 368
HYDROGRAPH METHODS 368
Snowmelt and Groundwater 369
SPECIFYING A TIME OF CONCENTRATION (TC) METHOD FOR A CATCHMENT 369

DEFINING THE GEOMETRY OF A CATCHMENT OR A POND 374
Low Impact Development Controls 374
LID CONTROL AND PARENT CATCHMENT NETWORK REPRESENTATION 375
Ponds 378
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF PONDS 378
Outdoor Ponds 381
Elevation vs. Area 382
1-vi
Elevation vs. Volume 383

Percent Void Space (%) 384
Pipe Volumes 384
Functional (Equation) 385
ADDING ELEVATION VS. AREA DATA TO A POND 385

ADDING ELEVATION VS. VOLUME DATA TO A POND 387
PONDS IN STORMCAD 389
PONDS IN SEWERCAD 390
Air Valves 391
Other Tools 392
Adding Elements to Your Model 394
Modeling Curved Pipes 395
Connecting Elements 396
Layout Context Menus 400
Available Nodes When Splitting a Link 400
Allowable Node Morphing 401
Link Morphing 402
Connectivity Rules for Storm and Sanitary Models 402
When To Use a Conduit vs. a Channel vs. a Gutter 404
Virtual Links 405
How Do I Get Rainfall from a Catchment Into the Rest of My Model? 406
How Do I Model Weirs in Conduits? 406
Manipulating Elements 407
Splitting Pipes 410
Disconnecting and Reconnecting Pipes 411
How Do I Model a Split in a Channel? 412
Merge Nodes in Close Proximity 412
Batch Pipe Split Dialog Box 414
BATCH PIPE SPLIT WORKFLOW 415
Editing Element Attributes 416
Property Editor 416
RELABELING ELEMENTS 419
SET FIELD OPTIONS DIALOG BOX 419
What Length is Used for Conduits, Channels, and Gutters When I Don't Enter a
User-defined Length? 421
What is the Difference Between a User Defined Unit Hydrograph and a
Hydrograph Entered in the Inflow Collection Editor? 422
Changing the Drawing View 423
Panning 423
Zooming 424
USING THE ZOOM CENTER COMMAND 426
Using Selection Sets 427
Selection Sets Manager 428
Viewing Elements in a Selection Sets 431
Creating a Selection Set from a Selection 431
1-vii
Creating a Selection Set from a Query 432

Adding Elements to a Selection Set 434
Removing Elements from a Selection Set 435
Performing Group-Level Operations on Selection Sets 435
Using the Network Navigator 437
Query Parameters Dialog Box 440
Using Prototypes 441
Creating Prototypes 441
Engineering Libraries 444
Working with Engineering Libraries 445
SHARING ENGINEERING LIBRARIES ON A NETWORK 448
Minor Loss Coefficients 448
Using the Totalizing Flow Meters 450
Totalizing Flow Meters Manager Dialog 450
Totalizing Flow Meter Editor Dialog 451
Inlet Catalog Dialog Box 453
Design Grating Types Dialog Box 457
Design Lengths Dialog Box 458
Gutter Depth Vs Captured Flow Dialog Box 459
Gutter Catalog Dialog Box 459
Conduit Catalog Dialog Box 463
Defining Mannings n vs. Depth Curves 468
Defining Mannings n vs. Flow Curves 470
Vortex Valves 472
Head-Flow Curve Dialog Box 475
Using the SWMM Solver 476
Water Quality 477
SWMM Hydrology 479
SWMM Snow Packs (SWMM Snow Pack Editor) 480
SNOW PACK PARAMETERS TAB 481
SNOW REMOVAL PARAMETERS TAB 482
Climatology Dialog Box 482
TEMPERATURE TAB 483
EVAPORATION TAB 483
WIND SPEED TAB 484
SNOWMELT TAB 484
AREAL DEPLETION TAB 486
CLIMATE FILES 487
Aquifers Dialog Box 487
Control Sets Dialog Box 489
CONTROL SET FORMATS 492
Pollutants Dialog Box 496
1-viii
Adding Pollutographs to a Node 497

POLLUTOGRAPH COLLECTION DIALOG BOX 501
POLLUTANTS RESULTS DIALOG BOX 502
Land Uses Dialog Box 502
LAND USE GENERAL TAB 504
LAND USE BUILDUP TAB 504
LAND USE WASHOFF TAB 509
LAND USES COLLECTION DIALOG BOX 513
Adding Treatment to a Node 514
Initial Buildup Collection Dialog Box 516
Low Impact Development Controls 517
LID Control Modeling Overview 518
LID Control Types 519
Hydrologic Model Representation of LID Controls 519
Low Impact Development Controls Manager 521
LID Validations 527
Adding Hyperlinks to Elements 528
Adding a Hyperlink 530
Editing a Hyperlink 531
Deleting a Hyperlink 531
Using Queries 532
Queries Manager 533
QUERY PARAMETERS DIALOG BOX 535
Creating Queries 535
USING THE LIKE OPERATOR 539
USING QUERIES TO EDIT/VIEW RESULTS FOR A SELECTED GROUP OF ELEMENTS
541
Controls 541
Controls Tab 543
Conditions Tab 548
Actions Tab 552
Control Sets Tab (GVF-Convex Solver) 556
LOGICAL CONTROL SETS DIALOG BOX 557
Controls in the GVF-Convex Solver 557
User Data Extensions 558
User Data Extensions Dialog Box 560
User Data Extensions Import Dialog Box 565
FORMULA DIALOG BOX 565
Sharing User Data Extensions Among Element Types 567
Shared Field Specification Dialog Box 568
1-ix
Enumeration Editor Dialog Box 568

External Tools 569
Hydraulic Reviewer Tool 570
TRex Wizard 574
Property Grid Customizations 578
Customization Editor Dialog Box 579
Element Property Inferencing 580
Element Property Inferencing Dialog 583
NEW ELEMENT LAYOUT SUMMARY DIALOG 589
EXISTING PATH INTERPOLATION RESULTS SUMMARY DIALOG 589
i-Models 589
Publishing an i-model 590
CELL LIBRARIES 592
SEED FILES 593
Viewing an i-model 593
Automatic Design 594
Using Automatic Constraint Based Design 594
Default Design Constraints 596
Conduit and Inlet Catalog Templates 600
Loading 601
Loading 601
Methods for Entering Loads 602
SIMULATING DRY WEATHER 604
Types of Loads 604
Adding Fixed Loads 607
Hydrograph vs. Pattern Loads 607
Adding User Defined Hydrographs 608
Pattern Loads 610
WORKING WITH PATTERNS 611
DEFINING PATTERNS 612
Pattern Curve Dialog Box 615
DEFINING PATTERN SETUPS 616

TRANSIENT VALVE CURVE DIALOG BOX 618
TRANSIENT PUMP CURVE DIALOG BOX 619
TRANSIENT TURBINE CURVE DIALOG BOX 620
VALVE RELATIVE CLOSURE CURVE DIALOG BOX 621
Unit Sanitary Loading 622
TYPES OF UNIT SANITARY (DRY WEATHER) LOADS 623
ADDING UNIT SANITARY (DRY WEATHER) LOADS 624
Composite Hydrographs 631
Composite Hydrograph Window 631
1-x
Composite Hydrograph Data Table Window 632

Inflows 633
Flow Definitions for Node Elements 633
Defining Inflow Collections 639
Inflow Control Center 641
APPLY INFLOW TYPE TO SELECTION DIALOG 645
Sanitary Load Control Center 646
APPLY SANITARY LOAD TO SELECTION DIALOG 650
Defining CN Area Collections for Catchments 650
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collections 653
LoadBuilder 656
Rainfall Derived Infiltration and Inflow (RDII) 657
Stormwater Flow 657
Adding Storm Data 658
Storm Data and Runoff Methods 662
Storm Data Dialog Box 664
GENERATE STORM DATA DIALOG BOX 675
BUILD RAINFALL FROM IDF STORM GROUP DIALOG BOX 676
NEW STORM DATA SETTINGS DIALOG BOX 676
TIME SETTINGS DIALOG BOX 677
STORM DATA DIALOG BOX 678
RAINFALL CURVE IMPORT SETTINGS DIALOG BOX 679
RAINFALL CURVE DICTIONARY DIALOG BOX 680
RATIONAL METHOD IDF CURVE DIALOG BOX 681
User Defined IDF Table Dialog Box 682
IDF CURVE DIALOG BOX 683
IDF Curve Equation Input Dialog Box 683
IDF Polynomial Log Equation Dialog Box 684
Storm Data Dialog Box 685
Adding Global Storm Data 685
Weir Depth Coefficient Table Dialog Box 687
WEIR DEPTH COEFFICIENT TABLE LIBRARY EDITOR 688
Weir Submergence Table Dialog Box 690
Catchment Characteristics 692
ENTERING AREA 692
Defining CN Area Collections for Catchments 693
Runoff Method 695
ADDING GENERIC UNIT HYDROGRAPHS 697
EPA SWMM 699
SINGLE LOSS METHOD FOR EPA-SWMM CATCHMENTS 700
ADDING HYDROGRAPHS BASED ON THE RTK METHOD 701
Assembling RTK Parameters 703
Creating an RTK Table and Assigning it to a Catchment 704
RTK Tables Dialog Box 706
SWMM RTK Unit Hydrograph Dialog Box 708
1-xi
USING THE SCS UNIT HYDROGRAPH RUNOFF METHOD 710

Adjusting the Q/Qp-T/Tp Unit Hydrograph 710
Dimensionless Unit Hydrographs Dialog 711
Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph Curves Library Editor 716
MODIFIED RATIONAL 716

Time of Concentration 717
Pipeline Infiltration 717
Hydrograph Curve Dialog Box 718
Pond Infiltration 719
Extreme Flows 719
Extreme Flows Dialog 720
Extreme Flow Setups Dialog 724
BASE LOAD TABLE DIALOG BOX 725
Calculating Your Model 727

Steady State/Extended Period Simulation 727
Steady State Simulation 727
Extended Period Simulation 728
TIME BROWSER 729
TIME BROWSER OPTIONS DIALOG BOX 730
Long Term Continuous Simulations (LTCS) in SewerGEMS /CivilStorm Using the
SWMM Engine 731
Compute Center 733
Calculation Options Manager 735
Creating Calculation Options 736
Calculation Option Attributes 737
WHAT IS THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE IMPLICIT AND SWMM ENGINES? 757
SWMM TREATS PUMP AND THEIR DISCHARGE LINES DIFFERENTLY THAN THE IMPLICIT ENGINE. HOW DO I HANDLE THE DIFFERENCES, ESPECIALLY IF I WANT TO
USE BOTH ENGINES? 758
BENTLEY HYDROLOGY MEMORY LIMITATIONS 758
TIME STEPS AND RUNOFF METHODS 759
TIME STEP CONSIDERATIONS IN BENTLEY STORM AND SANITARY SEWER MODELS
759
INLET TRANSITION DEPTH 762
CONTROLLING RESULTS OUTPUT 762
Reporting Time Steps Dialog Box 763
Compute Center 764

Solvers (Numerical) 765
Overview of GVF-Convex Solver Network Connectivity Rules 766
Switching Between Solvers in Bentley Storm and Sanitary Sewer Models 767
1-xii
Hydrology (Rainfall-Runoff) Solvers 772

Calculation Executive Summary Dialog Box (Implicit Solver) 774
Calculation Detailed Summary Dialog Box (Implicit Solver) 775
Calculation Options Tab 776
Catchment Summary Tab 778
General Summary Tab 778
Node Summary Tab 779
Gutter Summary Tab 780
Detailed Calculation Summary Dialog Box (GVF-Convex Solver) 781
Executive Summary Tab 781
Pressure Summary Tab 787
Pipe Report Tab 788
Node Report Tab 788
Calculation Executive Summary Dialog Box (GVF Rational Solver) 789
Calculation Detailed Summary Dialog Box (GVF Rational Solver) 790
Catchment Summary Tab 792
Conduit Summary Tab 792
Node Summary Tab 793
Inlet Summary Tab 794
SWMM Engine Summary Report 795
SWMM Results File 795
User Notifications 795
User Notifications Manager 796
Statistics 798
Statistics Manager 799
STATISTICS RESULTS 799
Statistics Editor 804
Troubleshooting DynamicWave Model Calculations 806
Using the Totalizing Flow Meter 808
Totalizing Flow Meters Manager Dialog 808
Totalizing Flow Meter Editor Dialog 809
Using Scenarios and Alternatives 811

Understanding Scenarios and Alternatives 811
Advantages of Automated Scenario Management 812
A History of What-If Analyses 812
BEFORE HAESTAD METHODS - DISTRIBUTED SCENARIOS 812
WITH HAESTAD METHODS: SELF-CONTAINED SCENARIOS 814
Scenario Cycle 814
Scenario Properties and Alternatives 816
1-xiii
A Familiar Parallel 816

Inheritance 817
OVERRIDING INHERITANCE 818
DYNAMIC INHERITANCE 818
Local and Inherited Values 818
Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance 819
Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance 820
Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution System 821
Building the Model (Average Day Conditions) 822
Analyzing Different Demands (Maximum Day Conditions) 822
Another Set of Demands (Peak Hour Conditions) 823
Correcting an Error 823
Analyzing Improvement Suggestions 824
Finalizing the Project 825
Summary 825
Scenarios 826
Base and Child Scenarios 827
Creating Scenarios 827
Editing Scenarios 828
Running Multiple Scenarios at Once (Batch Runs) 829
Scenario Manager 830
Alternatives 832
Types of Alternatives 833
Base and Child Alternatives 833
Creating Alternatives 834
Editing Alternatives 834
Alternatives Manager 835
Alternative Editor Dialog Box 837
Active Topology Alternative 837
CREATING AN ACTIVE TOPOLOGY CHILD ALTERNATIVE 838
ACTIVE TOPOLOGY SELECTION DIALOG BOX 839
Physical Alternatives 840
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR PUMPS 841
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR MANHOLES 842
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR CATCH BASINS 844
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR OUTFALLS 845
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR POND OUTLET STRUCTURES 846
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR CROSS SECTION NODES 846
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR WET WELLS 849
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR PRESSURE JUNCTIONS 850
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR JUNCTION CHAMBERS 850
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR CONDUITS 851
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR CHANNELS 860
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR GUTTERS 862
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR PONDS 863
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR PRESSURE PIPES 865
1-xiv
Boundary Condition Alternatives 867

Initial Settings Alternative 869
INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE FOR MANHOLES 869
INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE FOR CATCH BASINS 870
INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE FOR WET WELLS 870
INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE FOR PONDS 870
INITIAL SETTINGS ALTERNATIVE FOR PUMPS 871
Hydrology Alternatives 871
Output Alternatives 878
OUTPUT ALTERNATIVE FOR CONDUITS 878
OUTPUT ALTERNATIVE FOR CHANNELS 879
Infiltration and Inflow Alternatives 879
INFLOW ALTERNATIVE FOR MANHOLES 880
INFLOW ALTERNATIVE FOR CATCH BASINS 880
INFLOW ALTERNATIVE FOR OUTFALLS 880
INFLOW ALTERNATIVE FOR CATCHMENTS 881
INFLOW ALTERNATIVE FOR PONDS 881
INFLOW ALTERNATIVE FOR CROSS SECTION NODES 882
INFLOW ALTERNATIVE FOR WET WELLS 882
INFILTRATION AND INFLOW ALTERNATIVE FOR PRESSURE JUNCTIONS 882
Rainfall Runoff Alternative 883
RAINFALL RUNOFF ALTERNATIVE FOR GLOBAL RAINFALL 883
RAINFALL RUNOFF ALTERNATIVE FOR OUTFALLS 884
RAINFALL RUNOFF ALTERNATIVE FOR CATCHMENTS 884
RAINFALL RUNOFF ALTERNATIVE FOR PONDS 885
RAINFALL RUNOFF ALTERNATIVE FOR WET WELLS 886
Water Quality Alternative 886
WATER QUALITY ALTERNATIVE FOR MANHOLES 886
WATER QUALITY ALTERNATIVE FOR CATCH BASINS 887
WATER QUALITY ALTERNATIVE FOR OUTFALLS 887
WATER QUALITY ALTERNATIVE FOR CATCHMENTS 888
WATER QUALITY ALTERNATIVE FOR PONDS 889
WATER QUALITY ALTERNATIVE FOR WET WELLS 889
Headloss Alternative 890
Operational Alternative 891
Sanitary Loading Alternative 891
SANITARY LOADING ALTERNATIVE FOR MANHOLES 891
SANITARY LOADING ALTERNATIVE FOR CATCH BASINS 892
SANITARY LOADING ALTERNATIVE FOR WET WELLS 892
SANITARY LOADING ALTERNATIVE FOR PRESSURE JUNCTIONS 893
User Data Extensions Alternative 893
Design Alternative 894
System Flows Alternatives 898
Calculation Options 899
Scenario Comparison 899
Scenario Comparison Options Dialog Box 903
1-xv
Scenario Comparison Collection Dialog Box 903
Presenting Your Results 905

Using Background Layers 905
Background Layer Manager 906
Working with Background Layer Folders 908
Adding Background Layers 909
Deleting Background Layers 910
Editing Background Layers 910
Renaming Background Layers 911
Turning Background Layers On and Off 912
Image Properties Dialog Box 912
Shapefile Properties Dialog Box 914
DXF Properties Dialog Box 915
Annotating Your Model 916
Element Symbology Manager 917
Using Folders in the Element Symbology Manager 920
Adding Annotations 921
Deleting Annotations 922
Editing Annotations 923
Renaming Annotations 923
Annotation Properties Dialog Box 924
FREE FORM ANNOTATION DIALOG BOX 926
Symbology Definitions Manager 927
Zoom Dependent Visibility 928
Color Coding Your Model 929
Adding Color-Coding 929
Deleting Color-Coding 930
Editing Color-Coding 931
Renaming Color-Coding 931
Color Coding Properties That Are Not In The List of Field Names 932
Color-Coding Properties Dialog Box 932
Using Profiles 935
Profiles Manager 936
Viewing Profiles 937
Animating Profiles 937
TIME BROWSER OPTIONS DIALOG BOX 939
TIME AND DATE FORMATS 940
Creating a New Profile 941
CREATE PROFILE DIALOG BOX 942
Editing Profiles 942
Deleting Profiles 943
Renaming Profiles 943
Profile Setup 944
1-xvi
Profile Viewer Dialog Box 946

AXIS OPTIONS DIALOG BOX 947
Engineering Profile Viewer Dialog Box 948
ENGINEERING PROFILE OPTIONS 950
GROUND PROFILE OPTIONS 951
ANNOTATION PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX 951
LINK ANNOTATION PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX 952
TEXT PROPERTIES 952
ANNOTATION PROPERTIES 953
Control Structures in Profiles 954
Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables 957
FlexTables Manager 958
Working with FlexTable Folders 960
FlexTable Dialog Box 961
STATISTICS DIALOG BOX 963
Opening FlexTables 963
Creating a New FlexTable 964
Deleting FlexTables 964
Naming and Renaming FlexTables 964
Editing FlexTables 965
Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data 967
CUSTOM SORT DIALOG BOX 970
Customizing Your FlexTable 970
FlexTable Setup Dialog Box 971
Element Relabeling Dialog Box 973
Copying, Exporting, and Printing FlexTable Data 974
Using Predefined Tables 976
Reporting 976
Using Standard Reports 976
CREATING A PROJECT INVENTORY REPORT 977
CREATING A SCENARIO SUMMARY REPORT 977
Reporting on Element Data 977
Report Options 978
Graphing 979
Graph Manager 980
ADD TO GRAPH DIALOG BOX 981
Creating a Graph 982
Printing a Graph 982
Working with Graph Data: Viewing and Copying 983
Graph Dialog Box 984
GRAPH SERIES OPTIONS DIALOG BOX 988
FILTER DIALOG BOX 989
OBSERVED DATA DIALOG BOX 990
1-xvii
Sample Observed Data Source 991
Chart Options Dialog Box 993

Chart Options Dialog Box - Chart Tab 994
SERIES TAB 994
PANEL TAB 995
AXES TAB 998
GENERAL TAB 1004
TITLES TAB 1005
WALLS TAB 1010
PAGING TAB 1011
LEGEND TAB 1012
3D TAB 1018
Chart Options Dialog Box - Series Tab 1019
FORMAT TAB 1019
POINT TAB 1020
GENERAL TAB 1021
DATA SOURCE TAB 1022
MARKS TAB 1023
Chart Options Dialog Box - Tools Tab 1027
Chart Options Dialog Box - Export Tab 1028
Chart Options Dialog Box - Print Tab 1030
Border Editor Dialog Box 1031
Gradient Editor Dialog Box 1032
Color Editor Dialog Box 1033
Color Dialog Box 1033
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box 1034
HATCH BRUSH EDITOR DIALOG BOX - SOLID TAB 1034
HATCH BRUSH EDITOR DIALOG BOX - HATCH TAB 1035
HATCH BRUSH EDITOR DIALOG BOX - GRADIENT TAB 1035
HATCH BRUSH EDITOR DIALOG BOX - IMAGE TAB 1036
Pointer Dialog Box 1037
Change Series Title Dialog Box 1038
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box 1038
CHART TOOLS GALLERY DIALOG BOX - SERIES TAB 1038
CHART TOOLS GALLERY DIALOG BOX - AXIS TAB 1042
CHART TOOLS GALLERY DIALOG BOX - OTHER TAB 1045
TeeChart Gallery Dialog Box 1050
SERIES 1050
FUNCTIONS 1050
Customizing a Graph 1050
Time Series Field Data 1058
SELECT ASSOCIATED MODELING ATTRIBUTE DIALOG BOX 1060
Print Preview Window 1060
Contours 1062
Contour Definition 1063
Contour Plot 1065
1-xviii
Contour Browser Dialog Box 1065

Using Aerial View 1066
Working in ArcGIS Mode 1067

GIS Basics 1067
GIS Terms and Definitions 1068
ArcGIS Integration 1070
ARCGIS INTEGRATION WITH BENTLEY SEWERGEMS V8I 1071
ArcGIS Applications 1071
Using ArcCatalog with a Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Database 1071
ArcCatalog Geodatabase Components 1072
The Bentley SewerGEMS V8i ArcMap Client 1072
Getting Started with the ArcMap Client 1073
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Toolbar 1074
Managing Projects In ArcMap 1079
Attach Geodatabase Dialog 1080
Laying out a Model in the ArcMap Client 1081
Using LoadBuilder to Assign Loading Data 1081
LoadBuilder Manager 1082
LoadBuilder Wizard 1082
STEP 1: LOAD METHOD TO USE 1083
STEP 2: INPUT DATA 1085
STEP 3: CALCULATION SUMMARY 1091
STEP 4: RESULTS PREVIEW 1092
STEP 5: COMPLETING THE LOADBUILDER WIZARD 1092
LoadBuilder Run Summary 1093
Generating Thiessen Polygons 1093
Thiessen Polygon Input Dialog Box 1096
Creating Boundary Polygon Feature Classes 1098
ModelBuilder 1099
Using GeoTables 1099
Features of the MicroStation Version 1101

MicroStation Environment 1102
MicroStation Mode Graphical Layout 1102
MicroStation Project Files 1103
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Element Properties 1103
Element Properties 1104
Levels 1104
ELEMENT LEVELS DIALOG 1104
Text Styles 1105
1-xix
View Associations 1105

Working with Elements 1106
Edit Elements 1106
Deleting Elements 1107
Modifying Elements 1107
CHANGE PIPE WIDTHS 1107
EDIT ELEMENTS 1107
Working with Elements Using MicroStation Commands 1107
BENTLEY SEWERGEMS V8I CUSTOM MICROSTATION ENTITIES 1108
MICROSTATION COMMANDS 1108
MOVING ELEMENTS 1108
MOVING ELEMENT LABELS 1108
Snap Menu 1109
Polygon Element Visibility 1109
Import Bentley SewerGEMS V8i 1109
Annotation Display 1109
Use SewerGEMS V8i Z Order Command 1109
Working in AutoCAD Mode 1111

The AutoCAD Workspace 1112
AutoCAD Integration with SewerGEMS V8i 1112
AutoCAD Integration with CivilStorm 1113
AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout 1113
Menus 1113
Toolbars 1114
Drawing Setup 1114
Symbol Visibility 1115
AutoCAD Project Files 1115
Drawing Synchronization 1116
Saving the Drawing as Drawing*.dwg 1116
Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands 1117
SewerGEMS Custom AutoCAD Entities 1117
CivilStorm Custom AutoCAD Entities 1118
AutoCAD Commands 1118
Explode Elements 1119
Moving Elements 1119
Moving Element Labels 1119
Snap Menu 1119
Polygon Element Visibility 1120
Contour Labeling 1120
Importing SewerGEMS Data 1121
Importing CivilStorm Data 1121
Working with Proxies 1122
1-xx
Theory 1123
Fundamental Solution of the Gravity Flow System 1123
Basic Hydrodynamic Equations 1123
Numerical Solution Scheme 1125
Network Algorithms 1127
Internal and External boundaries 1129
Pressure (surcharged) flow and Overflow (street flooding) 1132
Pumps and Force Main System(s) 1133
Special Numerical Techniques 1135
Explicit Hydraulic Equations in GVF Solvers 1136
Surface gutter and networks 1138
BRANCHES 1138
SECTION COUNT 1139
Implicit Solver Special Considerations 1139
PRESSURIZED FLOW 1140
MIXED (TRANSCRITICAL) FLOW 1141
DRY BED (LOW FLOW) 1143
STEEP REACHES 1143
FLOODING 1144
Convex Routing 1145
Section Hydraulics 1146
CONDUIT SHAPES 1147
Circular Channel 1148
Trapezoidal Channel 1148
Basket Handle 1149
Ellipse 1150
Horseshoe 1150
Egg 1151
Semi-ellipse 1152
Arch 1153
Pipe-Arch 1154
Semi-Circle 1155
Catenary 1156
Gothic 1156
Modified Basket Handle 1157
Triangle 1157
Rectangular Channel 1158
Irregular Open Channel 1158
Irregular Closed Section 1159
Rectangular-Rounded 1159
Rectangular-Triangular 1160
Power 1160
Parabola 1161
NATURAL REACH SHAPES 1161

VIRTUAL CONDUITS 1162
VIRTUAL PRESSURE PIPES 1162
ROUGHNESS MODELS 1163
1-xxi
Implementations 1164
Surface (Gutter) System 1166

Fundamental Solution of the Gutter System 1166
Inlet Hydraulics 1167
HEC-22 Inlet Capacity Calculations 1168
Inlet Openings 1168
INLETS ON GRADE 1170
Grate Inlet on Grade 1171
Curb Inlet on Grade 1173
Slot Inlet on Grade 1176
Combination Inlet on Grade 1176
INLETS IN SAG 1177

Grate Inlet in Sag 1177
Curb Inlet in Sag 1178
Weir Flow 1179
Orifice Flow 1180
Transition Flow 1181
Slot Inlet in Sag 1181
Combination Inlet in Sag 1182
GUTTER SYSTEM HYDRAULICS 1184

Conventional Gutters 1185
Flow in Ditch or Median Section on Grade 1188

V-Shaped Gutter Cross Section 1190
Parabolic Gutter Cross Section 1192
Flows at Catchbasins 1192
SURFACE CATCHMENT LOADS 1196
SURFACE CARRYOVER LOADS 1196
INLET APPROACH LOADS 1196
INLET CAPTURED (INTERCEPTED) LOADS 1197
INLET BYPASSED LOADS 1197
SUBSURFACE PIPED LOADS 1197
SUBSURFACE EXTERNAL LOADS 1197
SUBSURFACE TOTAL PIPED LOAD 1197
KNOWN FLOW 1198
Hydraulic Boundaries 1198
External Boundaries 1199
Internal Boundaries 1200
MANHOLES AND SEWER JUNCTIONS 1200
MANHOLES 1201
Junction Headloss Methods 1201
HEC-22 Junction Energy Loss Method 1202
Minor Losses 1204
FLOW CONTROL STRUCTURES 1205

Weirs 1205
In-Line (Rectangular) Weir 1207
Trapezoidal Weir 1208
V-Notch (Triangular) Weir 1209
Side Weir 1211
1-xxii
Orifices 1212
Rating Curves 1212
CULVERTS 1213
Culvert Calculations in GVF Convex and GVF Rational Solvers 1214
Dynamic Storage Routing 1214

Riser Structures 1215
FLOW STAGES ON A RISER 1215
Weir Stage 1215
Orifice Stage 1216
Full Riser Barrel Flow Stage 1217
Orifices 1217
SUBMERGED ORIFICE HYDRAULICS 1218
CIRCULAR UNSUBMERGED HYDRAULICS 1218
ORIFICE AREA UNSUBMERGED HYDRAULICS 1219
ORIFICE ORIENTATION 1220
Weirs at Pond Outlets 1220
RECTANGULAR WEIRS 1220
V-NOTCH WEIRS 1221
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IRREGULAR WEIRS 1222
Broad-Crested Weir 1222
Pumps 1225
Storage Elements 1228
WET WELLS 1228
PONDS 1229
CATCH BASINS, MANHOLES, AND SURFACE STORAGE 1231
Hydrograph Methods 1232
Rainfall 1234
DESIGN STORMS 1234
I-D-F DATA 1235
I-D-F Curves 1235
I-D-F Tables 1237
I-D-F e, b, d Equation 1237
RAINFALL CURVES 1238

Gauged (Time versus Depth) 1238
Rainfall Tables 1242
Synthetic Rainfall Distributions 1243
Dimensionless Depth: SCS Distributions 1244
Modeling Storms with SCS Distributions 1246
Dimensionless Depth and Time 1247
Example: Dimensionless Time and Depth Curves 1248
Synthetic Rainfall Tables 1249
Bulletins 70/71 1250
Rainfall Time-Distribution Information 1250
Watershed Area 1251
Rainfall Duration 1252
Data Sources 1252
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Format 1253
Bulletin 70/71 Data 1254
1-xxiii
Circular 173 Data 1254

Rainfall Curves: Build from I-D-F Data 1255
Snowmelt 1255
Time of Concentration 1256
MINIMUM TIME OF CONCENTRATION 1258
USER-DEFINED 1259
CARTER 1259
EAGLESON 1260
ESPEY/WINSLOW 1261
FEDERAL AVIATION AGENCY 1262
KIRPICH (PA) 1263
KIRPICH (TN) 1264
LENGTH AND VELOCITY 1265
SCS LAG 1266
TR-55 SHEET FLOW 1266
TR-55 SHALLOW CONCENTRATED FLOW 1268
TR-55 CHANNEL FLOW 1269
Rational Method 1270
WEIGHTING C VALUES 1271
BASIC ASSUMPTIONS ABOUT RATIONAL METHOD 1271
Modified Rational Method 1272
SCS CN Runoff Equation 1273
RUNOFF CURVE NUMBER 1275
Definition of SCS Hydrologic Soil Groups 1275
RUNOFF VOLUME (CN METHOD) 1276

CN WEIGHTING 1277
Antecedent Runoff Condition 1277
Urban Impervious area Modifications 1277
Connected Impervious Areas 1278
Unconnected Impervious Areas 1278
SCS Peak Discharge 1279

TR-55 GRAPHICAL PEAK DISCHARGE (SCS GRAPHICAL PEAK) 1279
Initial Abstraction, Ia (in) 1280
Ia/P Ratio 1280
Unit Discharge, qu (csm/in.) 1280
Runoff, Q (in.) 1281
Pond and Swamp Adjustment Factor 1281
Peak Discharge, qp (cfs) 1281
TR-55 POND STORAGE ESTIMATE (SCS STORAGE ESTIMATE) 1282

Theory for Computed Spreadsheet Values 1282
Hydrograph Methods 1283

Q/QP HYDROGRAPHS 1284
UNIT HYDROGRAPH METHODOLOGY 1286
Generic Unit Hydrographs 1287
Soil Conservation Service (SCS) 1289
Unit Hydrograph Runoff Methods 1292
RTK Methods 1297
Thiessen Polygon Generation Theory 1301
1-xxiv
Nave Method 1301

Plane Sweep Method 1302
Editing Attributes in the Property Editor 1305

Pressure Pipe Attributes 1306
Pressure PipeGeneral 1306
Pressure PipeGeometry 1307
Pressure PipePhysical 1308
Pressure PipePhysical: Minor Losses 1309
Pressure PipeActive Topology 1309
Pressure PipeResults 1310
Conduit Attributes 1310
ConduitGeneral 1311
ConduitGeometry 1312
ConduitInfiltration 1312
ConduitGeneric 1313
ConduitOutput Filter 1314
ConduitPhysical 1315
ConduitPhysical: Additional Losses 1319
ConduitPhysical: Control Structure 1320
ConduitPhysical: Section Type: Culvert 1320
ConduitActive Topology 1323
ConduitResults 1324
ConduitResults: Capacities 1325
ConduitResults: Engine Parsing 1326
Channel Attributes 1327
ChannelGeneral 1327
ChannelGeometry 1328
ChannelOutput Filter 1329
ChannelPhysical 1329
ChannelPhysical: Control Structure 1331
ChannelActive Topology 1331
ChannelResults 1332
ChannelResults: Engine Parsing 1333
Gutter Attributes 1333
GutterGeneral 1334
GutterGeometry 1335
GutterPhysical 1335
GutterActive Topology 1337
GutterResults 1338
GutterResults (Flow) 1338
GutterResults (Hydraulic Summary) 1339
GutterResults (Maximum Values) 1339
1-xxv
GutterResults (Profile) 1339

Manhole Attributes 1340
ManholeGeneral 1340
ManholeGeometry 1341
ManholePhysical 1342
ManholePhysical: Structure Losses 1343
ManholePhysical: Surface Storage 1344
ManholeSanitary Loading 1344
ManholeSWMM Extended Data 1345
ManholeActive Topology 1345
ManholeInflow 1346
ManholeResults 1346
ManholeResults: Engine Parsing Attributes 1347
ManholeResults (Extended Node) 1347
ManholeResults: Flows Attributes 1348
Catch Basin Attributes 1348
Catch BasinGeneral 1349
Catch BasinGeometry 1349
Catch BasinPhysical 1350
Catch BasinPhysical: Structure Losses 1351
Catch BasinPhysical: Surface Storage 1353
Catch BasinInflow (Sanitary Loading) 1354
Catch BasinSWMM Extended Data 1354
Catch BasinActive Topology 1354
Catch BasinInflow (Wet) 1355
Catch BasinInlet 1355
Catch BasinInlet Location 1356
Catch BasinResults 1356
Catch BasinResults (Engine Parsing) 1357
Catch BasinResults (Extended Node) 1357
Catch BasinResults (Flow) Attributes 1358
Catch BasinResults: Inlet Capture 1359
Outfall Attributes 1359
OutfallGeneral 1360
OutfallGeometry 1360
OutfallBoundary Condition 1361
OutfallPhysical 1363
OutfallSWMM Extended Data 1363
OutfallActive Topology 1364
OutfallInflow 1364
OutfallResults 1364
OutfallResults: Flows 1365
Pond Outlet Structure Attributes 1366
Pond Outlet StructureGeneral 1366
Pond Outlet StructureGeometry 1367
1-xxvi
Pond Outlet StructurePond Outlet 1367

Pond Outlet StructureActive Topology 1367
Pond Outlet StructurePhysical 1368
Pond Outlet StructureResults 1368
Cross Section Attributes 1368
Cross SectionGeneral 1369
Cross SectionGeometry 1369
Cross SectionGeneric 1370
Cross SectionPhysical 1370
Cross SectionActive Topology 1374
Cross SectionInflow 1374
Cross SectionResults 1374
Cross SectionResults: Engine Parsing Attributes 1375
Cross SectionResults: Flows 1375
Pump Attributes 1375
PumpGeneral 1376
PumpGeometry 1376
PumpPhysical 1377
PumpActive Topology 1377
PumpResults 1378
PumpResults: Engine Parsing Attributes 1378
Wet Well Attributes 1378
Wet WellGeneral 1379
Wet WellGeometry 1380
Wet WellPhysical 1380
Wet WellSanitary Loading 1382
Wet WellInitial Condition 1382
Wet WellSWMM Extended Data 1383
Wet WellActive Topology 1383
Wet WellInflow 1383
Wet WellResults 1384
Wet WellResults (Extended Node) 1385
Wet WellResults: Flows 1385
Catchment Attributes 1386
CatchmentGeneral 1386
CatchmentGeometry 1387
CatchmentCatchment 1388
CatchmentRunoff 1388
CatchmentSWMM Extended Data 1392
CatchmentSWMM Results 1394
CatchmentActive Topology 1394
CatchmentInflow 1394
CatchmentRainfall 1395
CatchmentResults 1395
CatchmentResults (Extended Catchment) 1396
1-xxvii
CatchmentResults: Flows 1396

Low Impact Development Control Attributes 1397
LID ControlGeneral 1397
LID ControlGeometry 1398
LID ControlActive Topology 1398
LID ControlOutput 1398
LID ControlHydrology 1399
LID ControlResults 1400
LID ControlResults (Misc) 1401
Pond Attributes 1401
PondGeneral 1402
PondGeometry 1402
PondPhysical 1403
PondSimulation Initial Condition 1404
PondSWMM Extended Data 1405
PondActive Topology 1405
PondInflow 1405
PondResults 1406
PondResults: Engine Parsing Attributes 1406
PondResults (Extended Node) 1407
PondResults: Flows 1407
Junction Chamber Attributes 1408
Junction ChamberGeneral 1409
Junction ChamberGeometry 1409
Junction ChamberPhysical 1410
Junction ChamberPhysical: Structure Losses 1410
Junction ChamberActive Topology 1411
Junction ChamberResults 1411
Junction ChamberResults: Engine Parsing Attributes 1411
Junction ChamberResults: Flows 1412
Pressure Junction Attributes 1413
Pressure JunctionGeneral 1413
Pressure JunctionGeometry 1414
Pressure JunctionPhysical 1414
Pressure JunctionSanitary Loading 1414
Pressure JunctionActive Topology 1414
Pressure JunctionInflow 1415
Pressure JunctionResults 1415
Pressure JunctionResults: Engine Parsing Attributes 1416
Pressure JunctionResults: Flows 1416
1-xxviii
Frequently Asked Questions 1417

What Project Files Does Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Maintain? 1417
What Project Files does CivilStorm Maintain? 1418
What Kind of Graphs Can I Create and How Do I Create Them? 1420
How Do I Enter the Scale of a Background Image If it is a File Type without an
Inherent Scale? 1421
What is the Difference Between a Drop Manhole and a Regular Manhole? 1421
How Do I Manage the Size of My Database Files? 1422
About Bentley Systems 1423

Software 1423
CivilStorm 1424
SewerGEMS 1425
WaterGEMS 1426
WaterCAD 1426
SewerCAD 1426
StormCAD 1427
PondPack 1427
FlowMaster 1427
CulvertMaster 1428
HAMMER 1428
Bentley Institute Press 1428
Training 1430
Accreditations 1430
Reference Tables 1433

Mannings n Coefficients 1433
Inlet Design Coefficients 1436
Headloss Coefficients for Junctions 1439
Roughness ValuesMannings Equation 1441
References 1443
1-xxix
1-xxx
Chapter
Getting Started
Thank you for purchasing Bentley SewerGEMS V8i. At Bentley Systems, we pride
ourselves in providing the very best engineering software available. Our goal is to
make software that is easy to install and use, yet so powerful and intuitive that it anticipates your needs without getting in your way.
When you first use Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, use the intuitive interface and interactive dialog boxes to guide you. If you need more information, use the online help by
pressing the F1 key or selecting Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Help from the Help menu.
A help topic describing the area of the program in which you are working appears.
What is Bentley SewerGEMS V8i? on page 1-1
Documentation on page 1-7
Contacting Us on page 1-9
What is Bentley SewerGEMS V8i?

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i is the first and only fully-dynamic, multi-platform (GIS,
CAD, and Stand-Alone) sanitary and combined sewer modeling solution. With
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, you will analyze all sanitary and combined sewer system
elements in one package and have the option of performing the analyses with the
SWMM algorithm or our own implicit solution of the full Saint Venant equations.
Simply put, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i offers the most comprehensive solution available for optimizing Best Management Practice (BMP) designs and meeting sanitary
sewer overflow (SSO) and combined sewer overflow (CSO) regulations.
With Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, you can:
Develop system master plans
Assess the impact of inflow and infiltration on SSOs
Develop SSO and CSO remediation programs
1-1
Whats New in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i SELECTseries 3?
Perform system evaluations associated with US EPA CMOM and NPDES
Optimize lift station and system storage capacities
Determine developer connection fees
Implement real-time control strategies
Model relief sewers, overflow diversions, and inverted siphons
Accurately simulate operations with variable-speed pumping and logical controls
Simulate out-of-service or proposed sewers within the same model
Whats New in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i

SELECTseries 3?
Data Managment
Unified schema and one common data file format
In addition to SewerGEMS projects, users have the ability to open other

Bentley storm and sewer (CivilStom, SewerCAD, StormCAD) projects within
SewerGEMS and save them in one common data file format.
Automated field filters
Input and results fields are automatically filtered according to the numerical
solver used.
Keyword search in property grid
Users can find the property they want quickly in the property grid using
keyword search.
Selection based filtering in inflow and sanitary loading control centers
Users can filter the Inflow and Sanitary Loading Control Centers based on the
current selection of node elements.
More user control in DXF export
SewerGEMS offers more control over layer/level assignment during DXF

export.
Bentley DTM support in TREX
In addition to previously supported file formats, the TREX tool in SewerGEMS now supports the Bentley DTM file format.
Solver Update
1-2
Multiple numerical solvers under one hood
Getting Started
The Gradually varied flow-Convex and Gradually varied flow-Rational

(SewerCAD and StormCAD solvers respectively) are now included in SewerGEMS, making SewerGEMS a full superset of SewerCAD, StormCAD, and
CivilStorm. SewerGEMS Sanitary is no more required and has been eliminated.
Support for SWMM version 5.00.022
The explicit hydraulic solvers in SewerGEMS are updated to SWMM

5.00.022.
HEC-22 inlet calculations
HEC-22 inlet capture efficiency calculations can be performed when using the
enhanced SWMM solver in SewerGEMS with the added ability to handle
flow backup from the subsurface piping out through the inlet.
Improved SWMM solver performance
The enhanced SWMM dynamic wave solver used in SewerGEMS has significant improvements in computational performance.
Pond support in GVF solvers
GVF solvers now support ponds as elements.
Enhanced element type support
All numerical solvers included in SewerGEMS have the ability to handle all
element types, gravity as well as pressure.
Inlet controlled culvert support in GVF solvers
The GVF-Convex and GVF-Rational solvers now support inlet controlled

culverts.
Unified inflow support in GVF solvers
The GVF-Convex solver now supports dry and wet weather inflow loading.
The GVF-Rational solver supports known and wet weather inflow while
ignoring sanitary loading.
Hydraulics
Low Impact Development (LID) elements
Low-impact development (LID) controls can now be analyzed in SewerGEMS.
Automated design
SewerGEMS now offers automated constraint-based design capabilities for

sanitary and storm sewers.
Support for new gutter shapes
Support for v-shaped and parabolic gutters is now available in SewerGEMS.
1-3
Whats New in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i SELECTseries 3?
1-4
Improved gutter results
Support for advanced upstream and downstream results.
New gutter catalog
SewerGEMS supports gutter calculations using catalog referencing.
Support for cross section catalog referencing
Users can use catalog referencing when setting up channel data through cross
section property grid.
HEC-22 3rd Edition headloss
Node headloss calculations in accordance with HEC-22 3rd Edition are now
available in SewerGEMS.
Improvements to calculation options
Additional calculation options give users the ability to apply global settings in
one location and simplifies model setup. SewerGEMS allows user input for
the convex coefficient to achieve convex routing improvements.
Easier Model Management
Additional flexibility in model layout
SewerGEMS offers more flexibility to users in connecting different element

types and morphing of one element type into another.
Improved user notifications
Users can quickly fix modeling errors using the improved user notifications.
Common category in graphing
SewerGEMS offers a new category of common graph properties for each

element type to enable the user to quickly find and use the most commonly
graphed properties.
New Compute Center
Users can now perform all actions related to model runs through one common
location using the Compute Center.
Improved flex tables field selection
Users can choose to display fields specific to the active numerical solver or all
fields available in the product.
Improved controls conflict handling
SewerGEMs handles controls conflict better with improved validation and

user notifications.
Updated pump station flextable
Users can edit the Pump collection field from the Pump Station flex table.
Getting Started
Profiling support for virtual elements and diversions
Users can now generate profiles for virtual links and diversions.
Enhanced Interoperability
Updated support for ArcGIS
Users can run SewerGEMS from within ArcGIS 10 and 10.1.
An ArcGIS license is required - if you don't have an ArcGIS license, you can
choose to run SewerGEMS in its stand-alone mode.
Updated support for MicroStation
Users can run SewerGEMS from within MicroStation V8i (SELECTseries 3).
A MicroStation license is required - if you don't have a MicroStation license,

you can choose to run SewerGEMS in its stand-alone mode.
Updated support for AutoCAD
Users can run SewerGEMS from within AutoCAD 2013 (32- and 64-bit).
An AutoCAD license is required - if you don't have an AutoCAD license, you

can choose to run SewerGEMS in its stand-alone mode.
i-model publishing
SewerGEMS can now publish i-models (containers for the open exchange of
infrastructure information) in 2D or 3D.
View associations for MicroStation
Users can now open multiple different views of the model simultaneously
within MicroStation.
Interoperability with other Bentley products
SewerGEMS now offers support for interoperability with the latest releases of
InRoads, GeoPAK, LandXML, Bentley MX Drainage, and ProjectWise.
Installation, Upgrades, and Updates

For instructions on installing, registering, activating, and updating the software please
refer to the Readme.pdf in the Program Files/Bentley/SewerGEMS V8i directory.
Municipal License Administrator Auto-Configuration

At the conclusion of the installation process, the Municipal License Administrator will
be executed, to automatically detect and set the default configuration for your product,
if possible. However, if multiple license configurations are detected on the license
server, you will need to select which one to use by default, each time the product
1-5
Installation, Upgrades, and Updates

starts. If this is the case, you will see a Warning screen. Simply press OK to clear the
Warning dialog, then press Refresh Configurations to display the list of available
configurations. Select one and press Make Default, then exit the License Administrator. (You only need to repeat this step if you decide to make a different configuration the default in the future.)
Software Updates via the Web and Bentley SELECT

Note:
Your PC must be connected to the Internet to use the Check for

Updates button.
Bentley SELECT is the comprehensive delivery and support subscription program

that features product updates and upgrades via Web downloads, around-the-clock
technical support, exclusive licensing options, discounts on training and consulting
services, as well as technical information and support channels. Its easy to stay up-todate with the latest advances in our software. Software updates can be downloaded
from our Web site, and your version of Bentley SewerGEMS V8i can then be
upgraded to the current version quickly and easily. Just click the Check for Updates
button on the toolbar to launch your preferred Web browser and open our Web site.
You can also access our Knowledgebase for answers to your Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs).
For more information, see Technical Support on page 1-9.
Troubleshooting
Because of the multitasking capabilities of Windows, you may have applications
running in the background that make it difficult for software setup and installations to
determine the configuration of your current system. If you have difficulties during the
installation or uninstallation process, please try these steps before contacting our technical support staff:
1. Shut down and restart your computer.
2. Verify that there are no other programs running. You can see applications
currently in use by pressing Ctrl+Shift+Esc in Windows XP and Vista. Exit any
applications that are running.
3. Disable any antivirus software that you are running.
Caution:
After you install Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, make certain that

you restart any antivirus software you have disabled. Failure
to restart your antivirus software leaves you exposed to
potentially destructive computer viruses.
4. Try running the installation or uninstallation again (without running any other
program first).
1-6
Getting Started
If these three steps fail to successfully install or uninstall the product, contact our
Technical Support staff. For more information, see Contacting Us on page 1-9.
License Check
The type of check for a license is based on the product (e.g. SewerGEMS) and not on
the solver (e.g. implicit). The checks on the size of the model and the types of
elements that are included in the number are summarized below:
Table 1-1:
Product
Element Type Checked (Active elements only)
SewerGEMS
Conduits + Pressure Pipes + Channels + Gutters
CivilStorm
Conduits + Pressure Pipes + Channels + Gutters
SewerCAD
Conduits + Pressure Pipes
StormCAD
Catchbasins (Inlets)
The checks are made whenever a compute operation is initiated. If an adequate license
is not available, the run will not execute and an error message is issued.
To check on the Status and Size of a license, the user should pick Help > About
(product name).
Only active elements are included when computing the size.
In the case of a batch run, the size of each scenario is checked before each is run. If
different active topologies are used, it may be possible for some scenarios to run while
other cannot.
In the case of a WaterObjects program, the license is checked before each time the
solver is executed.
Documentation
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i documentation comes in three parts:
Online help:
The online help is accessible from the Help menu or

by pressing F1. Additionally, when you are using
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, you can call the online
help at any time by clicking a help button in any
dialog box or window.
1-7
Quick Start Lessons

The context-sensitive online help is designed to make
it easy for you to quickly find specific information
about a feature you are using in Bentley SewerGEMS
V8i. The online help makes extensive use of
hyperlinks and provides a table of contents, index,
and keyword search to help you locate the
information you need.
Online PDF Book:
Note:
The content in the online help is also available in .pdf

format and is available at docs.bentley.com. This pdf
contains the same content as the online help, but
includes hypertext and is designed to be printed by
you from a local printing device. As well as being
more easily printable than the online help, the online
book also uses hypertext and is searchable.
On-screen display of graphics in .pdf files is dependent on the

zoom level you use. For more optimal viewing of graphics in
Adobe Acrobat Reader, try using 167% and 208% zoom.
Related Topics
Quick Start Lessons

The lessons quickly introduce you to specific features of Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.
To access the lessons, select Quick Start Lessons from the Help menu. Run a lesson
by selecting one of the entries in the list.
Related Topics
1-8
Getting Started
Contacting Us
Contact Bentley Systems if you want product information, to upgrade your software,
or need technical support.
Related Topics
Sales on page 1-9
Technical Support on page 1-9
Addresses on page 1-12
Sales
Bentley Systems professional staff is ready to answer your questions. Contact your
account manager or use any of the methods below for any questions regarding Bentley
Systems latest products and prices.
Toll-free U.S. Phone:
1-800-BENTLEY
Worldwide Phone:
+1-203-755-1666
Email:
sales@bentley.com
Internet:
http://www.bentley.com/en-US/Products
Technical Support
We hope that everything runs smoothly and you never have a need for our technical
support staff. However, if you do need support, our highly-skilled staff offers their
services seven days a week, and may be contacted by phone, chat, and the Internet.
For information on the various levels of support that we offer, contact our sales team
today and request information on our Bentley SELECT program, or visit our Web site.
1-9
Contacting Us
You can contact our technical support team at: http://selectservices.bentley.com where
the following options are available:
Service Ticket Manager: Open a new service ticket or monitor the status of your own
or your entire company's service tickets. You can review work notes added to the incident by our staff, or update the incident yourself for our input. A variety of search
tools are also available that can let you narrow in on a specific solution that was
answered in the past.
Live Chat: Provides Bentley SELECT subscribers access to technical support
personnel through the use of Internet chat. Hours for Live Chat are 24 hours a day,
Sundays at 6 p.m. through Fridays at 5 p.m. Eastern Time (EST/EDT).
Phone: Call a local technical support analyst via the toll-free number for your region.
When calling for support, in order to assist our technicians in troubleshooting your
problem, please be in front of your computer and have the following information
available:
1-10
Your computers operating system.
Name and build number of the Bentley Systems, Inc. software you are calling
about. The build number can be determined by clicking Help > About Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i. The build number is the number in brackets located in the
lower-left corner of the dialog box that opens.
A note of exactly what you were doing when you encountered the problem.
Any error messages or other information displayed on your screen.
Getting Started
When contacting support, please provide the following details, in addition to the
above, to enable us to provide a more timely and accurate response:
Company name, address, and phone number
A detailed explanation of your concerns
If you are submitting a service ticket, the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.log files
located in the product directory (e.g., C:\Documents and Settings\<User
Name>\Local Settings\Application Data\Bentley\CivilStorm\8)
Note:
When sending files, it is best to zip the model files and not
include any model output files such as .out or .rpc.
1-11
Contacting Us
1-12
Chapter
Introducing the
Workspace
Click one of the following links to learn more about the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i
workspace.
Workspace on page 2-15
Menus on page 2-18
Toolbars on page 2-34
Customizing the Toolbars on page 2-52
Dynamic Manager Display on page 2-53
Workspace
You use Bentley SewerGEMS V8i in one of these modes:
Stand-Alone Editor on page 2-15
MicroStation Mode on page 2-17
ArcGIS Mode on page 2-17
AutoCAD Mode on page 2-17
Stand-Alone Editor
The Stand-Alone Editor is the workspace that contains the various managers, toolbars,
and menus, along with the drawing pane, that make up the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i
interface. The Bentley SewerGEMS V8i interface uses dockable windows and toolbars, so the position of the various interface elements can be manually adjusted to suit
your preference.
2-15
Workspace
By default, the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i environment looks like this:
MicroStation Mode
MicroStation mode lets you create and model your network directly within your
primary drafting environment. This gives you access to all of MicroStations drafting
and presentation tools, while still enabling you to perform Bentley SewerGEMS V8i
modeling tasks like editing, solving, and data management. This relationship between
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i and MicroStation enables extremely detailed and accurate
mapping of model features, and provides the full array of output and presentation
features available in MicroStation. This facility provides the most flexibility and the
highest degree of compatibility with other CAD-based applications and drawing data
maintained at your organization.
Note:
2-16
For more information about runnning Bentley SewerGEMS V8i in

MicroStation mode, see MicroStation Environment on page 121102.
Introducing the Workspace
ArcGIS Mode
ArcGIS mode lets you create and model your network directly in ArcMap. Each mode
provides access to differing functionalitycertain capabilities that are available
within ArcGIS mode may not be available when working in the Bentley SewerGEMS
V8i Stand-alone Editor. All the functionality available in the Stand-alone Editor are,
however, available in ArcGIS mode.
Note:
For more information about running SewerGEMS V8i in ArcGIS

mode, see Working in ArcGIS Mode on page 11-1067.
AutoCAD Mode
AutoCAD mode lets you create and model your network directly within your primary
drafting environment. This gives you access to all of AutoCADs drafting and presentation tools, while still enabling you to perform Bentley SewerGEMS V8i modeling
tasks like editing, solving, and data management. This relationship between Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i and AutoCAD enables extremely detailed and accurate mapping of
model features, and provides the full array of output and presentation features available in AutoCAD. This facility provides the most flexibility and the highest degree of
compatibility with other CAD-based applications and drawing data maintained at your
organization.
Note:
For more information about runnning Bentley SewerGEMS V8i in

AutoCAD mode, see Working in AutoCAD Mode on page 13-1111.
Menus
Menus are located at the top of Bentley SewerGEMS V8i stand-alone editor window
and provide access to program commands, which are broken down by type of functionality.
The following menus are available:
File Menu on page 2-18
Edit Menu on page 2-21
Analysis Menu on page 2-22
Components Menu on page 2-24
View Menu on page 2-27
Tools Menu on page 2-30
Report Menu on page 2-33
Help Menu on page 2-33
2-17
Menus
File Menu
The File menu contains the following commands:
2-18
New
Creates a new project. When you select this

command, a new untitled project is created.
Open
Opens an existing project. When you select this

command, the Open dialog box appears, allowing
you to browse to the project to be opened.
Close
Closes the current project without exiting the

program.
Close All
Closes all currently open projects.
Save
Saves the current project.
Save As
Saves the current project under a new project name

and/or to a different directory location.
Save All
Saves all currently open projects.
Update Server Copy
Updates the ProjectWise server copy of the current

project.
Import
Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
SWMM v5Opens a Windows Browse dialog

box, allowing you to choose the SWMM v5 file
to import.
LandXMLLets you import a LandXML file.
SewerGEMS DatabaseLets you import a

SewerGEMS V8 project database file.
SubmodelsLets you import a submodel.
Bentley WastewaterLets you import a model

.mdb and geometry data file (.dat) that was
previously exported from Bentley Wastewater
application.
InRoadsLets you import InRoads drainage

database files.
Bentley MX Drainage (LandXML format)

Lets you import MX Drainage database files.
Export
Seed

commands:
DXFLets you export the current network

layout as a DXF drawing.
SubmodelsLets you export the currently

selected portion of the model as a submodel.
SWMM v5Lets you export the current project

to SWMM format.
LandXMLLets you export the current project

to LandXML format.
InRoadsLets you export the current project

to InRoads format.
Bentley MX Drainage (LandXML format)

Lets you export the current project to MX
Drainage format.
Publish i-modelLets you publish the current

project as an i-model.
Seed files allow you to save project settings and

data as a template (the seed file has an .cds
extension). You can then reuse these settings/data
while creating new projects using the data from the
previously saved seed file. Selecting the Seed
command opens a submenu containing the
following commands:
New from Seed: Allows you to create a new

project using the previously saved seed file you
specify.
Save to Seed: Saves the current project

settings and data as a seed file for reuse in
future projects.
See Using Seed Files on page 2-21 for more

information.
Page Setup
Defines the print settings that will be used when the

current view is printed.
2-19
Menus
Print Preview

commands:
Fit to Page - The view will be zoomed in or out

so that the current view fits to a single page of
the default page size.
Scaled - The view will be scaled so that it

matches the user-defined drawing scale (this is
defined on the Drawing Tab of the Options
dialog: Tools > Options).
Print
Prints the current view.
Project Properties
Opens the Project Properties dialog.
Recent Files
When the Recent Files Visible option is selected in

the Options dialog box, the most recently opened
files will appear in the File menu. See Options
Dialog Box - Global Tab on page 4-175 for more
information.
Exit
Closes the program.
Using Seed Files

When a seed file is created from a model file, it contains all of the information from
the mdb and stsw file. Therefore, if you want to use the seed file to only save items
such as color coding, project options, graph settings, etc., based on an existing model
but not the actual elements, you should remove all elements from the existing model,
save it under a new name, and make that the basis for a seed file. Otherwise the new
model file created from the seed file will just be a copy of the prior model file.
Edit Menu
The Edit menu contains the following commands:
2-20
Undo
Cancels the last data input action on the currently

active dialog box. Clicking Undo again cancels
the second-to-last data input action, and so on.
Redo
Cancels the last undo command.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted element.
Select By Polygon
Lets you select elements in your model by

drawing a polygon in the drawing pane. Click in
the drawing pane to draw each side of the
polygon. After the polygon has been drawn, rightclick to select from the following options:
As Selected - All elements contained within

the polygon will be selected. Elements that
were selected before the Select By Polygon
opperation will be de-selected.
Add to Selection - All elements contained

within the polygon will be selected in addition
to any elements that were selected before the
Select By Polygon operation were performed.
Invert Selection - All elements contained

within the polygon that were selected before
the operation will be de-selected; all elements
contained within the polygon that were not
selected before the operation will be selected
Remove From Selection - All elements

contained within the polygon that were
selected before the operation will be deselected.
Select All
Selects all of the elements in the network.
Invert Selection
Selects all currently unselected elements and

deselects all currently selected ones.
Select by Element
Opens a submenu listing all available element

types. Select one of the element types from the
submenu to select all elements of that type in the
model. Note that less commonly used element
types can be found under the Other -...
submenu.
Select by Attribute
Opens a menu listing all available attribute types.

Select one of the attribute types from the menu
and the Query Builder dialog box opens. Note that
less commonly used element types can be found
under the Other -... submenu.
Clear Selection
Deselects the currently selected element(s).
Clear Highlight
Removes Network Navigator highlighting for all

elements.
2-21
Menus
Find Element
Lets you find a specific element by entering the

elements label.
Analysis Menu
The Analysis menu contains the following commands:
2-22
Compute Center
Opens the Compute Center, which enables you to

quickly select the most commonly used options to
set up a run.
Scenarios
Opens the Scenario Manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage project scenarios.
Alternatives
Opens the Alternatives Manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage alternatives.
Calculation Options
Opens the Calculation Options Manager, which

lets you create, view, and manage calculation
settings for the project.
Statistics
Opens the Statistics Manager, which allows you to

perform statistical analysis.
Time Browser
Opens the Time Browser dialog box, which lets

you manipulate the currently displayed time step
and to animate the drawing pane.
Totalizing Flow Meter
Opens the Totalizing Flow Meters manager,

allowing you to create and view totalizing flow
meters.
Calculation Summary
Opens the calculation summary report, which

reports the details of the calculations performed
on your model.
User Notifications
Opens the User Notifications Manager, allowing

you to view warnings and errors uncovered by the
validation process.
Validate
Runs a diagnostic check on the network data to

alert you to possible problems that may be
encountered during calculation. This is the manual
validation command, and it checks for input data
errors. It differs in this respect from the automatic
validation that SewerGEMS V8i runs when the
compute command is initiated, which checks for
network connectivity errors as well as many other
things beyond what the manual validation checks.
Pressing CTRL+F7 also selects this command.
Compute Hydrology
Lets you perform the hydrologic calculations for

the current scenario. Pressing CTRL+F8 also
selects this command.
Compute
Calculates the network. Before calculating, an

automatic validation routine is triggered, which
checks the model for network connectivity errors
and performs other validation. For more
information, see Calculating Your Model on
page 8-727. Pressing F9 also selects this
command.
Always Compute
Hydrology
Lets you turn hydrology calculations on and off

whenever the model is calculated. Turning
hydrology computation off improves performance
and is recommended when the hydrology input
will not change.
Components Menu
The Components menu contains the following commands:
Storm Data
Opens the Storm Data dialog box, which lets you

create, edit, and delete storm data. These storms
are available for you to select for a catchment. For
more information, see Adding Storm Data on
page 7-658.
Global Storm Data
Opens the Global Storm Data Settings dialog box,

which lets you define project-wide global storm
data data. For more information, see Adding
Global Storm Data on page 7-685.
2-23
Menus
2-24
Dimensionless Unit
Hydrographs
Opens the Dimensionless Unit Hydrographs

dialog box, Which lets you create, edit, and delete
dimensionless unit hydrographs.
SWMM RTK Unit

Hydrographs
Opens the SWMM RTK Unit Hydrographs

manager, allowing you to create, edit, and define
RTK unit hydrographs.
RTK Tables
Opens the RTK Tables dialog box, which lets you

create wet weather flow hydrographs using the
RTK method. For more information, see Adding
Hydrographs Based On the RTK Method on
page 7-701.
Low Impact
Development Controls
Opens the Low Impact Development Controls

Manager on page 6-517 where you can create,
edit, and manage the LID controls in the model.
Default Design
Contraints
Opens the Default Design Constraints on

page 6-591 manager, where you can edit the
design contraints for automated design runs.
Controls
Opens the Controls on page 6-537 manager

where you can create, edit, and manage the
controls in the model.
Inlet Catalog
Opens the Inlet Catalog dialog box, which lets you

create, edit, and view catalog inlets. Catalog inlets
are an efficient way to reuse common physical
inlet definitions. For more information, see Inlet
Catalog Dialog Box on page 6-450.
Gutter Catalog
Opens the Gutter Catalog dialog box, which lets

you create, edit, and view catalog gutters. Catalog
gutters are an efficient way to reuse common
physical gutter definitions. For more information,
see Gutter Catalog Dialog Box on page 6-456.
Conduit Catalog
Opens the Conduit Catalog dialog box, which lets

you create, edit, and view catalog conduits.
Catalog conduits are an efficient way to reuse
common physical conduit definitions. For more
information, see Conduit Catalog Dialog Box
on page 6-460.
Extreme Flows
Opens the Extreme Flows on page 7-719.
Extreme Flows Setups
Opens the Extreme Flow Setups Dialog on

page 7-724.
Pump Definitions
Opens the Pump Definitions dialog box, which

lets you view, edit, and create Pump Definitions.
Composite Outlet
Structures
Opens the Composite Outlet Structures manager,

allowing you to define composite outlet structures.
Conduit Control
Structures
Opens the Conduit Control Structures manager.
Flow-Headloss
Curves
Opens the Head-Flow Curve Dialog Box on

page 6-472.
Minor Loss
Coefficients
Opens the Minor Loss Coefficients on page 6445 manager.
Weir Depth
Coefficient Table
Opens the Weir Depth Coefficient table manager.
Weir Submergence
Table
Opens the Weir Submergence Table manager.
Vortex Valves
Opens the Vortex valves manager.
2-25
Menus
SWMM Extensions

SWMM-specific commands:
ClimatologyOpens the Climatology dialog

box, allowing you to view and edit climatology
data for use in SWMM calculations.
Snow PackOpens the Snow Pack dialog

box, allowing you to view and edit snow pack
data for use in SWMM calculations.
AquifersOpens the Aquifers dialog box,

allowing you to view and edit aquifer data for
use in SWMM calculations.
Control SetsOpens the Control Sets dialog

box, allowing you to view, edit, and create
control sets for use in SWMM calculations.
PollutantsOpens the Pollutants dialog box,

allowing you to view and edit pollutant data for
PollutographsOpens the Pollutograph

dialog box, allowing you to view and edit pollutograph data for use in SWMM calculations.
Land UsesOpens the Land Use dialog box,

allowing you to view and edit land use data for
For more information, see Using the SWMM

Solver on page 6-473.
2-26
Unit Sanitary (Dry

Weather) Loads
Opens the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads

dialog box, which lets you create, edit, and delete
unit sanitary loads. For more information, see
Adding Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads on
page 7-624.
Patterns
Opens the Pattern Manager where you can create

and edit diurnal loading patterns for use with
extended period simulations. For more
information, see Defining Patterns on page 7612.
Pattern Setups
Opens the Pattern Setup Manager where you can

associate diurnal patterns with the appropriate unit
sanitary loads for a given scenario. For more
information, see Defining Pattern Setups on
page 7-616.
Time Series Field

Data
Opens the Time Series Field Data dialog, which

allows you to define time series field data for the
elements in the model.
Engineering Libraries
Opens the Engineering Libraries Manager.
View Menu
The View menu contains the following commands:
Element Symbology
Opens the Element Symbology Manager, which

lets you create, view, and manage annotation and
color-coding in your project.
Background Layers
Opens the Background Layers Manager, which

lets you create, view, and manage the background
layers associated with the project.
Network Navigator
Opens the Network Navigator.
Selection Sets
Opens the Selection Sets Manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage selection sets associated
with the project.
Queries
Opens the Query Manager, which lets you create

SQL expressions for use with selection sets and
FlexTables. For more information, see Using
Queries on page 6-528
Prototypes
Opens the Prototypes Manager, which lets you

enter default values for elements in your model.
Prototypes can reduce data entry requirements
dramatically if a group of network elements share
common data. For more information, see Using
Prototypes on page 6-437.
FlexTables
Opens the FlexTables Manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage the tabular reports for
the project.
Graphs
Opens the Graph Manager, which lets you create,

view, and manage graphs for the project.
2-27
Menus
2-28
Profiles
Opens the Profile Manager, which lets you create,

view, and manage the profiles for the project.
Contours
Opens the Contours manager where you can create

and edit contour definitions.
Named Views
Opens the Named Views manager where you can

create, edit, and use Named Views.
Aerial View
Opens the Aerial View navigation window.
Properties
Turns the Properties Editor display on or off.
Property Grid
Customizations
Opens the Customizations Manager.
Auto-Refresh
Turns automatic updates to the main window view

on or off whenever changes are made to the
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i datastore. When
selected, a check mark appears next to this menu
command, indicating that automatic updates are
turned on.
Refresh Drawing
Updates the main window view according to the

latest information contained in the Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i datastore.
Zoom

commands:
Zoom ExtentsSets the view so that the

entire network is visible in the drawing pane.
Zoom WindowActivates the manual zoom

tool, which lets you specify a portion of the
drawing to enlarge.
Zoom InEnlarges the size of the model in

the drawing pane.
Zoom OutReduces the size of the model in

the drawing pane.
Zoom RealtimeEnables the realtime zoom

tool, which lets you zoom in and out by
moving the mouse while holding down the left
mouse button.
Zoom CenterOpens the Zoom Center

dialog box, which lets you enter drawing coordinates that will be centered in the drawing
pane.
Zoom to SelectionEnables you to zoom to

specific elements in the drawing. You must
select the elements to zoom to before you
select the tool.
Zoom PreviousResets the zoom level to

the last setting.
Zoom NextResets the zoom level to the

setting that was active before a Zoom
Previous command was executed.
Pan
Activates the Pan tool, which lets you move the

model within the drawing pane. When you select
this command, the cursor changes to a hand,
indicating that you can click and hold the left
mouse button and move the mouse to move the
drawing.
Toolbars
Opens a submenu that lists each of the available

toolbars. Select one of the toolbars in the submenu
to turn that toolbar on or off. For more
information, see Toolbars on page 2-34.
Reset Workspace
Resets the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i workspace

so that the dockable managers appear in their
default factory-set positions.
2-29
Menus
Tools Menu
The Tools menu contains the following commands:
2-30
Active Topology
Selection
Opens a Select dialog to select elements in the

drawing to make them Inactive or Active.
Thiessen Polygon
Opens the Thiessen Polygon Creator, which allows

you to quickly create polygon layers for use with the
LoadBuilder demand allocation module.
LoadBuilder
Opens the LoadBuilder manager where you can assign

demands to model nodes using data from outside
sources.
Hyperlinks
Lets you associate external files, such as pictures or

movie files, with elements. For more information, see
Adding Hyperlinks to Elements on page 6-524.
ModelBuilder
Opens the ModelBuilder Connections Manager, which

lets you create, edit, and manage ModelBuilder
connections to be used in the model-building/modelsynchronizing process. For more information, see
ModelBuilder Connections Manager on page 5-235.
TRex
Opens the TRex Wizard, which steps you through the

process of automatically assigning elevations to
specified nodes based on data from a Digital Elevation
Model or a Digital Terrain Model.
User Data Extensions
Opens the User Data Extension dialog box, which lets

you add and define custom data fields. For example,
you can add new fields such as the pipe installation
date. For more information, see User Data
Extensions on page 6-554.
Hydraulic Reviewer
Opens the Hydraulic Reviewer tool, which allows you

to quickly assess the convergence and stability of the
model.
Element Property
Inferencing
Opens the Element Property Inferencing tool, which

lets you tell SewerGEMS V8i how to draw
"inferences" about missing values from the property
values of nearby elements
Inflow Control Center
Opens the Inflow Control Center, allowing you to

create, edit, and delete sanitary inflow definitions.
Sanitary Load Control

Center
Opens the Sanitary Load Control Center, allowing you

to create, edit, and delete sanitary load definitions.
Scenario Comparison
The scenario comparison tool enables you to compare

input values between any two scenarios to identify
differences quickly.
Batch Pipe Split
Opens the Batch Pipe Split dialog.
2-31
Menus
Database Utilities

commands:
Compact DatabaseWhen you delete data from

a Bentley SewerGEMS V8i project, such as
elements or alternatives, the database store that
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i uses can become fragmented, causing unnecessarily large data files,
which impact performance substantially.
Compacting the database eliminates the empty
data records, thereby defragmenting the datastore
and improving the performance of the file.
Note:
2-32
Every tenth time a file is saved,

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i will
automatically prompt you to
compact the database. If you open
a file without saving it, the count
does not go up. If you open and
save a file multiple times in the
same session, the count only goes
up on the first save. If you open,
save, and close the file, the count
goes up. Click Yes to compact the
database, or no to close the prompt
dialog box without compacting.
Since compacting the database can
take time, especially for larger
models, you may want to postpone
the compact procedure until a later
time. You can modify how Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i compacts the
database in the Options dialog box.
For more information, see Options
Dialog Box - Global Tab on page 4175.
Synchronize DrawingSynchronizes the current

model drawing with the project database.
Update Database CacheEnsures consistency

between the database and the model by recalculating and updating certain cached information.
Normally this operation is not required to be used.
Update Results From Project DirectoryThis

command copies the model result files (if any)
from the project directory (the directory where the
project .mdb file is saved) to the custom result file
directory. The custom result directory is specified
in Tools>Options>Project tab. This allows you to
make a copy of the results that may exist in the
model's save directory and replace the current
results being worked on with them.
Copy Results
to Project
DirectoryThis
Bentley
SewerGEMS
V8i Users Guide
command copies the result files that are currently
being used by the model to the project directory
(where the project .mdb is stored).
Update Conduit DescriptionsUpdate the conduit
Layout
Opens a submenu that lists each of the available

element types. Select one of the element types in the
submenu to place that element in your model. Note
that less commonly used element types can be found
under the Other -... submenu.
External Tools
Run an existing external tool or create a new one by

opening up the External Tools manager.
Options
Opens the Options dialog box, which lets you change

global settings such as display pane settings, drawing
scale, units, display precision and format used, and
element labeling.
Report Menu
The Report menu contains the following commands:
Element Tables
Opens a submenu that lets you display FlexTables

for any link or node element. These predefined
FlexTables contain most of the input data and
results for each instance of the selected element in
the model.
Scenario Summary
Opens the Scenario Summary Report.
Project Inventory
Opens the Project Inventory Report, which

contains the number of each of the various
element types that are in the network.
Report Options
Opens the Report Options box where you can set

Headers and Footers for the predefined reports.
Help Menu
The Help menu contains the following commands:
Bentley SewerGEMS
V8i Help
Opens the online help Table of Contents.
Quick Start Lessons
Opens the online help to the Quick Start Lessons

Overview topic.
2-33
Toolbars
Welcome Dialog
Opens the Welcome dialog box.
Check for SELECT

Updates
Opens your Web browser to the SELECT area of

our Web site, allowing you to check for updates.
Bentley Institute
Training
Opens your browser to the Bentley Institute

Training web site.
Bentley Professional
Services
Opens your browser to the Bentley Professional

Services web site.
Bentley SELECT
Support
Opens your browser to the SELECTservices area

of the Bentley web site.
Bentley Communities
Opens your browser to to theBentley

Communities area of the Bentley web site.
Bentley.com
Opens the home page on the Bentley web site.
About Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i
Opens the About Bentley SewerGEMS V8i dialog

box, which displays copyright information about
the product, registration information, and the
current version number of this release.
Toolbars
Toolbars provide access to frequently used menu commands and are organized by the
type of functionality offered. Many of the toolbars have additional buttons available
that are not displayed by default. You can display these additional buttons by
following the procedure in Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons on page 2-52.
The following toolbars are available:
2-34
Standard Toolbar on page 2-35
Edit Toolbar on page 2-36
Components Toolbar on page 2-36
Scenarios Toolbar on page 2-39
Analysis Toolbar on page 2-40
Compute Toolbar on page 2-41
View Toolbar on page 2-42
Help Toolbar on page 2-43
Layout Toolbar on page 2-44
Zoom Toolbar on page 2-48
Report Toolbar on page 2-48
Tools Toolbar on page 2-49
Select Toolbar on page 2-50
Click on the following links to learn how to customize the toolbars:
Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons on page 2-52
Controlling Toolbars on page 2-53
Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar contains the following buttons:
New
Creates a new Bentley SewerGEMS V8i project.

When you select this command, the Select File to
Create dialog box appears, allowing you to
define a name and directory location for the new
project.
Open
Opens an existing Bentley SewerGEMS V8i

project. When this command is initialized, the
Select Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Project to Open
dialog box appears, allowing you to browse to the
project to be opened.
Save
Saves the current project.
Print Preview
Opens the Print Preview window, displaying the

current view exactly as it will be printed.
Print
Prints the current view of the network as

displayed in the drawing pane.
2-35
Toolbars
Edit Toolbar
The Edit toolbar contains the following buttons:
Undo
Cancels your most recent action.
Redo
Lets you redo the last cancelled action.
Find Element
Lets you find a specific element by choosing it

from a menu containing all elements in the
current model.
Components Toolbar
The Components toolbar contains the following buttons:
2-36
Controls
Opens the Controls dialog box, which lets you

create, edit, and delete controls.
Storm Data
Opens the Storm Data dialog box, which lets

you create, edit, and delete storm data.
Global Storm
Data
Opens the Global Storm Data Settings dialog

box, which lets you define project-wide global
storm data data.
Dimensionless
Unit
Hydrographs
Opens the Dimensionless Unit Hydrographs

dialog box, Which lets you create, edit, and
delete dimensionless unit hydrographs.
SWMM RTK
Unit
Hydrographs
Opens the SWMM RTK Unit Hydrographs

manager, allowing you to create, edit, and define
RTK unit hydrographs.
RTK Tables
Opens the RTK Tables dialog box, which lets

you create wet weather flow hydrographs using
the RTK method.
Low Impact
Development
Controls
Opens the Low Impact Development Controls

dialog, allowing you to create, edit, and manage
the LID controls for the project.
Default Design
Constraints
Opens the Default Design Constraints dialog,

allowing you to specify the design constraints
for automated design runs.
Inlet Catalog
Opens the Inlet Catalog dialog box, which lets

you create, edit, and view catalog inlets.
Conduit
Catalog
Opens the Conduit Catalog dialog box, which

lets you create, edit, and view catalog conduits.
Catalog conduits are an efficient way to reuse
common physical conduit definitions.
Gutter
Catalog
Opens the Gutter Catalog dialog box, which lets

you create, edit, and view catalog gutters.
Catalog gutters are an efficient way to reuse
common physical gutter definitions.
Extreme
Flows
Opens the Extreme Flows dialog box, which lets

you view, edit, and create extreme flows.
Extreme Flow
Setups
Opens the Extreme Flows Setups dialog box,

which lets you view, edit, and create extreme
flow setups.
Pump
Definitions
Opens the Pump Definitions dialog box, which

lets you view, edit, and create Pump Definitions.
Composite
Outlet
Structures
Opens the Composite Outlet Structures

manager, allowing you to define composite
outlet structures.
Conduit
Control
Structures
Opens the Conduit Control Structures manager.
Flow-Headloss
Curves
Opens the Flow-Headloss Curves manager,

allowing you to define flow headloss curves.
Minor Loss
Coefficients
Opens the Minor Loss Coefficients manager,

allowing you to define minor loss coefficients.
2-37
Toolbars
2-38
Weir Depth
Coefficient
Table
Opens the Weir Depth Coefficient table

manager.
Weir
Submergence
Table
Opens the Weir Submergence Table manager.
Vortex Valves
Opens the Vortex valves manager.
Pollutographs
Opens the Pollutographs manager.
Land Uses
Opens the SWMM Land Uses manager.
Time Series
Field Data
Opens the Time Series Field Data dialog, which

allows you to define time series field data for the
Engineering
Libraries
Opens the Engineering Libraries Manager.
Patterns
Opens the Pattern Manager where you can

create and edit diurnal loading patterns for use
with extended period simulations.
Unit Sanitary
(Dry Weather)
Loads
Opens the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads

dialog box, which lets you create, edit, and
delete unit sanitary loads.
Pattern Setups
Opens the Pattern Setup Manager where you can

associate diurnal patterns with the appropriate
unit sanitary loads for a given scenario. This
button does not appear in the toolbar by default,
but can be added. For more information, see
Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons on
page 2-52.
Scenarios Toolbar
The Scenario toolbar contains the following buttons:
Scenario List
Box
Lets you quickly change the current scenario.
Scenarios
Opens the Scenario manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage project scenarios.
Alternatives
Opens the Alternatives Manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage project alternatives.
Calculation
Options
Opens the Calculation Options manager, which

lets you create different profiles for different
calculation settings.
2-39
Toolbars
Analysis Toolbar
The Analysis toolbar contains the following button:
2-40
Statistics
Opens the Statistics manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage statistical analysis
runs.
Totalizing
Flow Meters
Opens the Totalizing Flow Meters manager,

which lets you create, view, and manage
totalizing flow meters.
Compute Toolbar
The Compute toolbar contains the following buttons:
Compute
Center
Opens the Compute Center, which enables you

to quickly select the most commonly used
options to set up a run.
Validate
Runs a diagnostic check on the network data to

alert you to possible problems that may be
encountered during calculation. This is the
manual validation command, and it checks for
input data errors. It differs in this respect from
the automatic validation that SewerGEMS V8i
runs when the compute command is initiated,
which checks for network connectivity errors as
well as many other things beyond what the
manual validation checks.
Compute
Hydrology
Performs hydrology calculations.
Compute
Calculates the network. Before calculating, an

automatic validation routine is triggered, which
checks the model for network connectivity
errors and performs other validation. For more
information, see Calculating Your Model on
page 8-727.
Calculation
Summary
Opens the calculation summary report, which

reports the details of the calculations performed
on your model.
Time Browser
Opens the Time Browser manager, allowing you

to manipulate the currently displayed time step
and to animate the drawing pane.
User
Notifications
Opens the User Notifications Manager, allowing

you to view warnings and errors uncovered by
the validation process. This button does not
appear in the toolbar by default, but can be
added. For more information, see Adding and
Removing Toolbar Buttons on page 2-52.
2-41
Toolbars
View Toolbar
The View toolbar contains the following buttons, which give you easy access to many
of the managers in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.:
2-42
Element
Symbology
Opens the Element Symbology manager,

allowing you to create, view, and manage the
element symbol settings for the project.
Background
Layers
Opens the Background Layers manager,

allowing you to create, view, and manage the
background layers associated with the project.
Selection Sets
Opens the Selection Sets Manager, allowing you

to create, view, and modify the selection sets
associated with the project.
Network
Navigator
Opens the Network Navigator dialog box.
Queries
Opens and closes the Query Manager.
Prototypes
Opens and closes the Prototypes Manager.
FlexTables
Opens the FlexTables manager, allowing you to

create, view, and manage the tabular reports for
the project.
Graphs
Opens the Graph manager, allowing you to

create, view, and manage the graphs for the
project.
Profiles
Opens the Profile manager, allowing you to

create, view, and manage the profiles for the
project.
Contours
Opens the Contours manager, allowing you to

create, view, and manage the contours for the
project.
Aerial View
Opens the Aerial View window, which provides

a graphical overview of your entire drawing.
Properties
Opens and closes the Property Editor.
Help Toolbar
The Help toolbar provides quick access to the same commands that are available in
the Help menu. The Help toolbar contains the following buttons.
Check for
SELECT
Updates
Opens your web browser to the

SELECTservices page of our web site, allowing
you to check for updates.
Training
Opens your web browser to the Training page of

our web site.
Bentley.com
Opens your web browser to the home page of

our web site.
Help
Opens the online help.
2-43
Toolbars
Layout Toolbar
You use the Layout toolbar to lay out your model in the drawing pane.
Note:
Less commonly used elements are not displayed in the Layout

toolbar by default but are still available for use. For instructions
on adding these elements to the toolbar see Customizing the
Toolbars on page 2-52.
The Layout toolbar contains the following buttons:

Select
2-44
Changes your mouse cursor into a selection

tool. The selection tool behavior varies
depending on the direction in which the mouse
is dragged after defining the first corner of the
selection box, as follows:
If the selection is made from left-to-right, all
elements that fall completely within the
selection box that is defined will be selected.
If the selection is made from right-to-left, all
elements that fall completely within the
selection box and that cross one or more of the
lines of the selection box will be selected.
Layout
Catch Basin
Changes your mouse cursor into a network

layout tool. Right-click to change the type of
element and the type of link.
Pressure PipeLets you place an

element through which water moves under
pressure. Pressure pipes typically
discharge from a pumping station located
upstream in the sewer collection system.
ConduitLets you place a closed section

element through which water moves. A
conduit has a constant roughness and
cross section shape along its entire length.
Available conduit shapes consist of both
open and closed cross sections.
ChannelLets you place an open-section

element through which water moves. The
shape of the channel is defined by the
cross-section at one or both ends, so a
channel does not have a constant roughness or cross section shape, because
these attributes are interpolated along the
length of the channel according to the
respective values defined at the adjacent
cross section nodes.
GutterLets you place an open-section

element that models overflow. A gutter
accepts the inflows that are not being taken
in by an inlet because of capacity
constraints. In addition, a gutter also takes
in the overflow from an inlet due to
flooding. There can only be one gutter
downstream of any element and the gutter
cannot be the only way water can leave an
element, there must also be a channel or a
conduit. Gutters are only used for routing;
no dynamic calculations are performed for
gutter elements.
Changes your mouse cursor into a catch basin

element symbol. Clicking the left mouse button
while this tool is active causes a catch basin
element to be placed at the location of the
mouse cursor.
2-45
Toolbars
Manhole
Transition
Cross Section
Node
Outfall
Catchment
Low Impact
Development
Control
Pond
Pond Outlet
Structure
Pump
2-46
Changes your mouse cursor into a manhole

while this tool is active causes a manhole
mouse cursor.
Changes your mouse cursor into a transition
while this tool is active causes a transition
mouse cursor.
Changes your mouse cursor into a cross section
node element symbol. Clicking the left mouse
button while this tool is active causes a cross
section element to be placed at the location of
the mouse cursor.
Changes your mouse cursor into an outfall
while this tool is active causes an outfall
mouse cursor.
Changes your mouse cursor into a catchment
element symbol. When this tool is active, click
in the drawing pane to begin drawing a polygon
that represents the catchment.
Changes your mouse cursor into a LID control
that represents the LID control.
Changes your mouse cursor into a pond
that represents the pond.
Changes your mouse cursor into a pond outlet
structure element symbol. Clicking the left
mouse button while this tool is active causes a
pond outlet structure element to be placed at
the location of the mouse cursor.
Changes your mouse cursor into a pump
while this tool is active causes a pump element
to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
Wet Well
Pressure
Junction
Pump Station
Variable Speed
Pump Battery
Air Valve
Border
Text
Line
Changes your mouse cursor into a wet well

while this tool is active causes a wet well
mouse cursor.
Changes your mouse cursor into a pressure
junction element symbol. Clicking the left
mouse button while this tool is active causes a
pressure junction element to be placed at the
location of the mouse cursor.
Changes your mouse cursor into a Pump
Station element symbol. When this tool is
active, click in the drawing pane to begin
drawing a polygon that represents the pump
station.
Changes your mouse cursor into a variable
speed pump battery element symbol. Clicking
the left mouse button while this tool is active
causes a variable speed pump battery element
to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
Changes your mouse cursor into an air valve
while this tool is active causes a air valve
mouse cursor.
Changes your mouse cursor into a border
symbol. When the border tool is active, you can
draw a simple box in the drawing pane using
the mouse. For example, you might want to
draw a border around the entire model.
Changes your mouse cursor into a text symbol.
When the text tool is active, you can add
simple text to your model. Click anywhere in
the drawing pane to display the Text Editor
dialog box, which lets you enter text to be
displayed in your model.
Changes your mouse cursor into a line symbol.
When this tool is active, you can draw lines and
polygons in your model using the mouse.
2-47
Toolbars
Zoom Toolbar
The Zoom toolbar provides access to the zooming and panning tools. It contains the
following buttons:
Zoom Extents
Sets the view so that the entire model is visible in

the drawing pane.
Zoom Window
Activate the manual zoom tool, where you can

specify a portion of the drawing to enlarge.
Zoom In
Magnifies the current view in the drawing pane.
Zoom Out
Reduces the current view in the drawing pane.
Zoom
Realtime
Enables the realtime zoom tool, which lets you

zoom in and out by moving the mouse while the
left mouse button is depressed.
Pan
Activates the Pan tool, which lets you move the

model within the drawing pane. When you select
this command, the cursor changes to a hand,
indicating that you can click and hold the left
mouse button and move the mouse to move the
drawing.
Refresh
Drawing
Updates the main window view according to the

latest information contained in the Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i datastore.
Report Toolbar
The Report toolbar provides quick access to commands that are available in the
Report menu. The Report toolbar contains the following buttons.
2-48
Scenario
Summary
Opens the Scenario Summary report.
Project
Inventory
Opens the Project Inventory report.
Report
Options
Opens the Report Options dialog.
Tools Toolbar
The Tools toolbar provides quick access to commands that are available in the Tools
menu. The Report toolbar contains the following buttons.
Active
Topology
Selection
Opens the Select toolbar.
ModelBuilder
Opens the ModelBuilder Connections Manager,

which lets you create, edit, and manage
ModelBuilder connections to be used in the
model-building/model-synchronizing process.
TRex
Opens the TRex Wizard, which steps you

through the process of automatically assigning
elevations to specified nodes based on data from
a Digital Elevation Model or a Digital Terrain
Model.
LoadBuilder
Open the LoadBuilder manager where you can

create and manage Load Build templates.
Thiessen
Polygon
Open the Wizard used to create a Thiessen

polygon.
2-49
Toolbars
Element
Property
Inferencing
Opens the Element Property Inferencing tool,

which lets you tell CivilStorm V8i how to draw
"inferences" about missing values from the
property values of nearby elements.
Inflow
Control
Center
Opens the Inflow Control Center, allowing you

to create, edit, and delete inflow definitions.
Sanitary Load
Control
Center
Opens the Sanitary Load Control Center,

allowing you to create, edit, and delete sanitary
load definitions.
Scenario
Comparison
The scenario comparison tool enables you to

compare input values between any two
scenarios to identify differences quickly.
Select Toolbar
The Select toolbar provides quick access to commands that allow you to select
elements in the drawing using a variety of methods. The Select toolbar contains the
following buttons.
2-50
Select By
Polygon
Lets you select elements in your model by

drawing a polygon in the drawing pane. Click in
the drawing pane to draw each side of the
polygon.
Select All
Selects all of the elements in the network.
Select By
Element
Opens a submenu listing all available element

types. Select one of the element types from the
submenu to select all elements of that type in the
model.
Select By
Attribute
Opens a menu listing all available attribute

types. Select one of the attribute types from the
menu and the Query Builder dialog box opens.
Clear
Selection
Deselects the currently selected element(s).
Invert
Selection
Selects all of the currently unselected elements

and deselects the currently selected element(s).
2-51
Customizing the Toolbars
Customizing the Toolbars

You can customize Bentley SewerGEMS V8i toolbars in any of the following ways:
Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons

Toolbar buttons represent Bentley SewerGEMS V8i menu commands. You can
remove buttons from any toolbar, and add commands to any toolbar on the Commands
tab of the Customize dialog box.
To add or remove a button from a toolbar:
1. Click the down arrow on the end of the toolbar you want to customize. A series of
submenus appear, allowing you to select or deselect any button in that toolbar.
2. Click Add or Remove Buttons then move the mouse cursor to the right until all
of the submenus appear, as shown in the following figure:
3. Click the space to left of the toolbar button you want to add. A check mark
appears in the submenu and the button appears in the toolbar.
or
Click the check mark next to the toolbar button you want to remove. The button
will no longer appear in the toolbar.
Related Topic
2-52
Controlling Toolbars
You can control toolbars in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i on the Toolbars tab of the
Customize dialog box. You can turn toolbars on and off, or move the toolbar to a
different location in the workspace.
To turn toolbars off:
Click View > Toolbars, then click the check mark next to the toolbar you want to turn
off.
To turn toolbars on:
Click View > Toolbars, then click in the space to the left of the toolbar you want to
turn on.
To move a toolbar to a different location in the workspace:
Move your mouse to the vertical dotted line on the left side of any toolbar, then drag
the toolbar to the desired location. If you move a toolbar away from the other toolbar,
the toolbar becomes a floating dialog box.
Related Topic
Dynamic Manager Display

You access most of the features in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i through a system of
dynamic windows called managers. For example, the look of the elements is
controlled in the Element Symbology manager while animation is controlled in
the Time Browser manager.
When you first start Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, only two managers are displayed: the
Element Symbology and Background Layers managers. This is the default workspace.
You can display as many managers as you want and move them to any location in the
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i workspace.
To return to the default workspace:
Click View > Reset Workspace.
If you return to the default workspace, the next time you start Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, you will lose any customizations you might have made to the
dynamic manager display.
2-53
Related Topics
Opening Managers on page 2-54
Customizing Managers on page 2-56
Opening Managers
To open a manager:
1. Do one of the following:
Select the desired manager from the View menu.
Click a managers button on one of the toolbars.
Press the keyboard shortcut for the desired manager.
2. If the manager is not already docked, you can drag it to the top, left- or right-side,
or bottom of the SewerGEMS V8i window to dock it. For more information on
docking managers, see Customizing Managers on page 2-56.
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Managers

The following table lists all the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i managers, their toolbar
buttons, and keyboard shortcuts.

Toolbar
Button
2-54
Keyboard
Shortcut
Manager
Scenarioslets you build a model run
from alternatives. For more information,
see Scenario Manager on page 9-830.
ALT+1
Alternativeslets you create and manage

alternatives. For more information, see
Alternatives Manager on page 9-835.
ALT+2
Calculation Optionslets you set

parameters for the numerical engine. For
more information, see Calculation Options
Manager on page 8-735.
ALT+3
Statisticslets you perform statistical

frequency analysis on any of the variables
of each element in model. For more
information, see Statistics on page 8-798.
ALT+4
Toolbar
Button
Manager
Keyboard
Shortcut
Element Symbologycontrols how

elements look and what attributes are
displayed. For more information, see
Element Symbology Manager on
page 10-917.
CTRL+1
Background Layerslets you control the

display of background layers. For more
information, see Background Layer
CTRL+2
Selection Setslets you create and

manage selection sets. For more
information, see Selection Sets Manager
on page 6-425.
CTRL+3
Network Navigatorhelps you find nodes

in your model. For more information, see
Using the Network Navigator on page 6433.
CTRL+4
Querieslets you create SQL expressions
CTRL+5
for use with selection sets and FlexTables

For more information, see Using Queries
on page 6-528.
Prototypeslets you create and manage
prototypes. For more information, see
Using Prototypes on page 6-437.
CTRL+6
FlexTableslets you display and edit

tables of elements. For more information,
see FlexTables Manager on page 10958.
CTRL+7
Graphslets you create and manage

graphs. For more information, see Graph
CTRL+8
Profiles lets you draw profiles of parts of

your network. For more information, see
Profiles Manager on page 10-936.
CTRL+9
2-55
Toolbar
Button
Keyboard
Shortcut
Manager
ContoursLets you visually display
calculated results for many attributes using
contour plots. For more information, see
Contours on page 10-1062.
CTRL+0
Property Editordisplays properties of

individual elements or managers. For more
information, see Property Editor on
page 6-413.
F4
Time Browsercontrols animated

displays. For more information, see
Animating Profiles on page 10-937.
F7
User Notificationspresents error and

warning messages resulting from a
calculation.
F8
Note:
Although the toolbar

button for this manager
does not appear by
default, you can add it to
the Compute toolbar.
Related Topics
Customizing Managers on page 2-56
Customizing Managers
When you first start Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, you will see the default workspace, in
which a limited set of dockable managers are visible. You can decide which managers
will be displayed at any time and where they will be displayed. You can also return to
the default workspace any time.
There are four states for each manager:
FloatingA floating manager sits above the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i workspace
like a dialog box. You can drag a floating manager anywhere and continue to work.
2-56

You can also:
Resize a floating manager by dragging its edges.
Close a floating manager by clicking on the x in the top right-hand corner of the
title bar.
Change the properties of the manager by right-clicking on the title bar.
Switch between multiple floating managers in the same location by clicking the
managers tab.
Dock the manager by double-clicking the title bar.
Docked staticA docked static manager attaches to any of the four sides of the
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i window. If you drag a floating manager to any of the four
sides of the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i window, the manager will attach or dock itself
to that side of the window. The manager will stay in that location unless you close it or
make it dynamic. A vertical pushpin in the managers title bar indicates its static state;
click the pushpin to change the managers state to dynamic. When the push pin is
pointing downward (vertical push pin), the manager is docked.
You can also:
Close a docked manager by left clicking on the x in the upper right corner of the
title bar.
Change a docked manager into a floating manager by double-clicking the title bar,
or by dragging the manager to the desired location (for example, away from the
side of the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i window).
Change a static docked manager into a dynamically docked manager by clicking

the push pin in the title bar.
Switch between multiple docked managers in the same location by clicking the
managers tab.
Docked dynamicA docked dynamic manager also docks to any of the four sides of
the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i window, but remains hidden except for a single tab.
Show a docked dynamic manager by moving the mouse over the tab, or by clicking
the tab. When the manager is showing (not hidden), a horizontal pushpin in its title bar
indicates its dynamic state.
You can also:
Close a docked manager by left clicking on the x in the upper right corner of the
title bar.
2-57
Using Named Views
Change a docked dynamic manager into a docked static manager by clicking the
push pin (converting it from vertical to horizontal).
Switch between multiple docked managers in the same location by moving the
mouse over the managers tab or by clicking the managers tab.
ClosedWhen a manager is closed, you cannot view it. Close a manager by clicking
the x in the right corner of the managers title bar. Open a manager by selecting the
manager from the View menu (for example, View > Element Symbology), or by
selecting the button for that manager on the appropriate toolbar.
Using Named Views

The Named View dialog box is where you can store the current views X and Y coordinates. When you set a view in the drawing pane and add a named view, the current
view is saved as the named view. You can then center the drawing pane on the named
view with the Go To View command.
Choose View > Named Views to open the Named View dialog box.
2-58

The toolbar contains the following controls:
New
Contains the following commands:
Named ViewOpens a Named View

Properties box to create a new named
view.
FolderOpens a Named Views Folder

Properties box to enter a label for the
new folder.
Delete
Deletes the named view or folder that is

currently selected.
Rename
Rename the currently selected named view

or folder.
Go to View
Centers the drawing pane on the named

view.
Shift Up and Shift

Down
Moves the selected named view or folder up

or down.
Expand All or
Collapse All
Expands or collapses the named views and

folders.
Help
Displays online help for Named Views.
Related Topics
View Menu on page 2-27
Copying and Pasting Data To and From Tables

This topic describes the best practices used to copy and paste data from and to the
various tables.
Copying data from a table
2-59

There are generally 3 ways to copy data from tables.
1. The first is to highlight (or select) the data by clicking in the top-left corner of the
table.
This will highlight all the data in the table including the column headers:
When you use the windows short combination, CTRL-C, it will copy the highlighted data to the windows clipboard. The data copied will include the column
headers (in this case Time (hours) and Flow (ft^3/s)) and the rows below it. This
also includes the last row which is blank.
It will not copy the row headers (numbered 1 - 5 in this case).
2-60

2. The second approach is to highlight the two columns (in this case).
This is similar to the first approach except it does not highlight the row headers.
When you use the CTRL-C combination it will again copy the header data along
with the row data including the last blank row.
3. The best approach for copying the data is to highlight just the rows you want to
copy without highlighting the column headers. To do this you can just click on
the first row (#1 here) and drag your mouse down while holding the left mouse
button. This will highlight the table as follows:
2-61

When you use the CTRL-C combination in this case it will copy only the data that
you want. The column and row headers will not be copied. You can also use the
CTRL-<left click> approach to copy non-consecutive rows.
Pasting data into a table

When you paste data into one of our tables you want to make sure you do not include
any header data. If you include any non-numerical data a row will be inserted and the
default values for the columns will be used in place of any text or non-numerical data
that was pasted.
For example, if you copy using the first approach described above, you will get the
following results:
The first row is the row that represents the column headers that were pasted into the
table. The last row of 0's is the blank row at the end of the table.
2-62

Note:
We advise that you delete any rows containing 0 values that

may be inadvertently created during a copy-paste operation.
If you used the 3rd approach described above by just highlighting the rows you want
to copy and then paste, you will get a more desirable result as follows:
As a result, the first row is exactly what you wanted along with the last row. There are
no unexpected values pasted into the grid.
2-63
2-64
Chapter
Quick Start Lessons
Overview
The Quick Start lessons give you hands-on experience with many of the features and
capabilities of SewerGEMS V8i. These detailed lessons will help you get started
exploring and using the software.
Lesson 1: Overview of the SewerGEMS V8i Workspace on page 3-66
Lesson 2: Laying Out a Network on page 3-74
Lesson 3: Entering Data on page 3-81
Lesson 4: Validating and Calculating a Model on page 3-99
Lesson 5: Presenting Calculated Results on page 3-106
Lesson 6: Creating Multiple Storm Data on page 3-140
Lesson 7: Working With the ArcMap Client on page 3-152
Lesson 8: Adding Hydrographs Using the RTK Runoff Method on page 3-164
Another way to become acquainted with Bentley SewerGEMS V8i is to run and
experiment with the included sample files, located in the C:\Program
Files\Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Samples directory. To open one of these existing examples:
From the Welcome to Bentley SewerGEMS V8i dialog, click the Open Existing
project button and browse to the C:\Program Files\Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Samples
directory. Highlight a sample file and click Open.
If the Welcome to Bentley SewerGEMS V8i dialog is not open, click the File pulldown menu and select the Open command. Then browse to the C:\Program
Files\Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Samples directory. Highlight a sample file and click
Open.
Remember, you can right-click or press the F1 key to access the context-sensitive
online help at any time.
3-65
Lesson 1: Overview of the SewerGEMS V8i Workspace
Lesson 1: Overview of the SewerGEMS V8i

Workspace
SewerGEMS has an extensively customizable user interface. In this lesson you will
learn how to personalize SewerGEMSs toolbars, managers, and other interface
elements. The following lessons guide you through the process of setting up the
SewerGEMS interface in an alternate configuration, starting from the default configuration that is in use when the software is first installed. The advantage of the alternate
configuration is that it increases the size of the drawing pane.
To return the interface to the default component placement settings, click View >
Reset Workspace.
Part 1: Workspace Components Overview

The SewerGEMS workspace contains three different types of components: the
drawing pane, toolbars, and dockable managers. The behavior and use of these
components is discussed in the following parts of this lesson. When starting Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i for the first time, the default interface settings will be used.
Lets begin by starting up Bentley SewerGEMS V8i. If SewerGEMS V8i is already
open, skip step one and click the File pulldown menu and select the Open command
instead, then proceed to step two.
1. In the Welcome to Bentley SewerGEMS V8i dialog that appears, click the Open
Existing Project button.
2. Browse to the C:\Program Files\Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Lessons folder, highlight Lesson_1.stsw, then click Open.
Note:
If you're using a 64-bit operating system, the folder path will be

C:\Program Files (x86)\Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Lessons.
The example network will appear in the drawing pane, and the interface will look like
this:
3-66
Quick Start Lessons
Part 2: Working With the Drawing Pane

The drawing pane is where you create and view your model. You can pan and zoom
your model in this pane.
If you have already completed Part 1 of this lesson, proceed to the Panning section
below. Otherwise, complete the following steps before proceeding to the Panning
section:
1. Start Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.
3-67

Note:

Panning
You can change the position of the drawing view in the network by using the
Pan tool. Alternatively, if your mouse is equipped with a mousewheel, you can
pan by simply holding down the mousewheel and moving the mouse to reposition the current view. This changes the mouse cursor to the Pan icon, allowing you to
reposition the current view in the same mannerclick on the drawing, hold down the
mouse button, and move the mouse to reposition the current view.
Zooming
You can perform a number of zooming operations in the drawing pane to change the
current view of your model. You can click on the toolbar icons or you can navigate to
View pull-down menu and Zoom.
The simple Zoom In and Zoom Out commands let you increase or
decrease, respectively, the zoom level of the current view by one step per
mouse click.
The Zoom Extents command automatically changes the zoom level so that the
entire network is displayed in the drawing pane.
The Zoom Realtime command lets you dynamically scale up and down the
zoom level. The zoom level is defined by the magnitude of mouse movement
while the tool is active.
The Zoom Center command opens the Zoom Center dialog, allowing you to
center the drawing pane view on the coordinates you enter, at the zoom level
you specify in the Zoom menu.
Click the Zoom Center button, and enter 75 in the X field, 30 in the Y field, and
choose 200 in the Zoom menu, then click OK. The drawing pane will center on the
manhole element MH-5 at a magnification of 200%.
Part 3: Working With Toolbars

Toolbars provide efficient access to frequently used commands. All of the toolbars in
SewerGEMS are customizable both in terms of the buttons that they display and in the
position that they occupy within the interface.
3-68
Quick Start Lessons

If you have already completed Part 2 of this lesson, proceed to the Adding and
Removing Toolbar Buttons section below. Otherwise, complete the following steps
before proceeding to the following section:
Note:

Adding and Removing Toolbar buttons

You can add and remove buttons to/from toolbars to suit your preference.
Lets begin by adding a button to the Standard toolbar:
1. Click the arrow button that is located on the far right of the Standard toolbar (the
one with New, Open, Save, etc.) and move the mouse cursor over the Add or
Remove Buttons command that appears.
2. In the shortcut menu that appears, move the mouse cursor over the Close All
command.
3. Your toolbar should now look like this:
Now lets remove a button from the Zoom toolbar.

4. Click the arrow button that is located on the far right of the Zoom toolbar (the
Zoom toolbar is the one with the zoom and pan buttons) and move the mouse
cursor over the Add or Remove Buttons command that appears.
3-69

5. Note that in the submenu that appears, there is a menu item for each of the buttons
available to the Zoom toolbar. Most of the items have a checked box next to them,
indicating that they are all visible on the toolbar. Click the Zoom Realtime menu
item.
6. The Zoom Realtime button disappears from the toolbar, and the corresponding
menu item loses its check.
Your toolbar should now look like this:
Repositioning Toolbars
You can reposition any toolbar so that the toolbar is floating (not docked, or attached,
to the toolbar areas of the interface), and you can move any toolbar to a new docked
location.
Reposition the Layout toolbar (the Layout toolbar is the one along the left side of the
interface that contains all of the element layout tools) so that it is situated horizontally
underneath the other toolbars.
1. Hover the mouse cursor over the top edge of the toolbar, in the textured area
indicated by a line of dots.
2. When the mouse cursor changes to a four-directional arrow icon, click and hold
down the mouse button.
3. Drag the mouse to the area beneath the set of horizontal toolbars along the top of
the interface and release the mouse button.
Part 4: Working With Dockable Manager Components

By default, the dockable managers occupy the majority of the interface. They are
called dockable managers because they can be docked, or attached, to the edges of the
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i window. You can position any of the managers along the
top, bottom, left, or right of the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i window, and when more
than one manager is situated in the same spot, the docked pane becomes tabbed,
allowing you to switch between all of the managers that are docked in the same area.
3-70
Quick Start Lessons

If you have already completed Part 3 of this lesson, proceed to the paragraph starting
In this part of the lesson... below. Otherwise, complete the following steps before
proceeding to the following section:
Browse to the C:\Program Files\Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Lessons folder, highlight
Lesson_1.stsw, then click Open.
Note:

In this part of the lesson, we will create an alternate interface setup that makes certain
frequently used interface components more accessible. Specifically, we will add the
Time Browser dialog as a floating window, and add the Property Editor to the interface as a dockable manager.
1. Open the Time Browser dialog box. Click Analysis > Time Browser.
2. Click the Time Browser tab (top border area) and hold the mouse, and drag the
window, represented by a grey outline, to the bottom left corner of the drawing
pane.
3. Hover the mouse cursor over the bottom right corner of the Time Browser dialog
box, until the mouse cursor turns into diagonal two-headed arrow and resize the
dialog box until it is as small as possible while still accommodating all of the
controls, like this:
3-71
4. Open the Property Editor. Click View > Properties.

5. Click the heading of the Property Editor, and, while holding down the mouse
button, drag the mouse to the upper-right corner of the interface, just below the
bottom toolbar. The dialog box is correctly positioned when the grey outline
representing the dialog box occupies the length of the right side of the interface,
like this:
3-72
Quick Start Lessons
6. Resize the width of the dockable managers on the left and the Property Editor on
the right so that the drawing pane is larger, displaying more of the network at
once. Hover the mouse cursor over the right and left edges, respectively, until the
mouse cursor changes to the double-headed horizontal arrow cursor, then click,
hold, and drag the mouse until the desired size is obtained.
7. Click the Zoom Extents button to view the entire network in the drawing pane.
8. The Property Editor will be gray, with the message Select a single element. Click
on an element to see the attributes associated with it in the Property Editor.
9. Your interface should now look like this:
3-73
Lesson 2: Laying Out a Network
When the managers are docked, they can be in static

or dynamic
mode.
When in static mode, the managers are always visible. When a manager is in dynamic
mode, it isnt visible unless the mouse cursor is hovered over the associated tab. When
the mouse cursor is moved away from the tab, the manager retracts. To switch
between the two, click the pushpin toggle button in the top-right corner of the
manager. A horizontal pushpin indicates that the manager is in dynamic mode. When
the pushpin is vertical, the manager is in static mode.

SewerGEMS is an extremely efficient tool for laying out a storm or sanitary sewer
network. It is easy to prepare a schematic or scaled model and let SewerGEMS take
care of the link-node connectivity.
3-74
Quick Start Lessons

In constructing the network for this lesson, you do not need to be concerned with
assigning labels to pipes and nodes, because the software assigns labels automatically.
A schematic drawing is one in which pipe lengths are entered manually, in the userdefined length field. In a scaled drawing, pipe lengths are automatically calculated
from the position of the pipes bends and start and stop nodes in the drawing pane. For
the purposes of this lesson, we will build a schematic model.
Part 1: Laying Out Catchments and Ponds

Lets begin by starting up Bentley SewerGEMS V8i. If you already have SewerGEMS
V8i open from the previous lesson, click the Open button and skip ahead to step 2.
1. In the Welcome to Bentley SewerGEMS V8i dialog box that appears, click the
Open Existing Project button.
2. Browse to the C:\Program Files\Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Lessons folder, highlight Lesson_ 2_1.stsw, then click Open.
Note:

Catchments and ponds are polygon elements that graphically depict the area
represented by the element. Begin by laying out the two catchments by tracing the
catchment outlines shown in the .dxf background, as follows:
3. Select the Catchment layout tool.
4. Click on one of the corners of the catchment outline for CM-1. Drag the
mouse to the next corner, and click again.
5. Continue laying out the catchment boundaries by clicking each corner until you
click the last one. Right-click and select Done from the submenu that appears.
3-75

Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the remaining catchment. Your model should now look
like this:
6. In a schematic model, where the shape isnt necessarily important, SewerGEMS

V8i provides a shortcut for laying out catchments and ponds. Rather than drawing
a polygon line-by-line, you can also use a default shape by holding down the Ctrl
key while clicking to define the center point of the element, then dragging the
mouse to define the size and orientation of the pentagon. Clicking again places the
element.
This concludes this part of the lesson. The next part of the lesson continues where
this part leaves off, so you can keep the same project open if you plan to continue
immediately. If you plan to begin the next lesson at a later time, you can either
save the current project, or use the Lesson_2_2.stsw project located in the
C:\Program Files\Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Lessons folder.
Note:

Part 2: Laying Out Nodes and Links

The term Nodes refers to any of the available point element types:
3-76
Catch Basins
Manholes
Transitions
Cross Section Nodes
Junction Chambers
Pressure Junctions
Outlet Structures
Outfalls
Quick Start Lessons
Pond Outlet Entrances
Wet Wells
Pumps
The term links refers to any of the available line elements:
Pressure Pipes
Conduits
Channels
Gutters
In this part of the lesson, well begin by laying out all of the nodes, and then connect
them using links.
If youve already completed Part 1 of this lesson, you can continue using the same
model. Otherwise, begin by clicking the Open button; then, browse to the
C:\Program Files\Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Lessons folder, highlight
Lesson_2_2.stsw, then click Open.
1. Select the Catchbasin layout tool and click in the lower-right corner of
CM-1 to place a catch basin node there, at the spot indicated on the dxf
background. Place another as indicated in the background in CM-2.
2. Select the Manhole layout tool and click each of the locations indicated
by the dxf background, 6 in all. Note that the element labeled Diversion
Chamber in the background is also a manhole.
3. Select the Outfall layout tool and click each of the locations indicated by
the dxf background, 2 in all. In the dxf background, the outlets are labeled
Treatment and Overflow.
Your model should now look like this (when the dxf background is turned off click the checkbox next to LessonLayout in the Background Layers manager,
accessed from the View menu, to turn off the background):
3-77
Now lay out link elements to connect the nodes, as follows:

4. Click the Layout tool and select the Conduit tool
from the submenu that appears.
5. Click on MH-1 and drag the mouse to MH-2, and
click again to lay out the conduit. Right-click and
select Done from the submenu to complete the
conduit.
6. Click CB-1, drag the mouse to MH-2, and click to lay out a second conduit. The
conduit tool is still active, so drag the mouse to MH-3 and click again to lay out a
third conduit. Drag and click on MH-4 to lay out a fourth. Right-click and select
Done from the submenu.
7. Click CB-2 drag the mouse to MH-4, and click. Drag the mouse to MH-5 and
click again. Drag to and click on MH-6. Right-click and select Done from the
submenu.
8. Click OF-1, drag the mouse to MH-6, and click again. Drag the Mouse to OF-2
and click to lay out the final conduit. Right-click and select Done from the
submenu.
3-78
Quick Start Lessons

Your model should now look like this:
The last step in laying out the network is establishing the connectivity between the
polygon elements and the node elements.
9. Click the View pulldown menu and select the Properties command.
10. Dock the Property Editor dialog that appears to the right side of the SewerGEMS V8i window (For a description of how to do this, see Lesson 1, Part 4, Step
5).
11. Highlight CM-1. The attributes associated with the catchment will appear in the
Property Editor.
12. Click the pulldown menu in the Outflow Element field, and choose the <Select
Outflow Element> command.
13. Your mouse cursor changes into a Pick Element tool. Click on CB-1.
14. Highlight CM-2, click the pulldown menu in the Outflow Element field,
and choose the <Select Outflow Element> command. Click on CB-2.
Your model should now look like this:
3-79

Note the dashed lines indicating the connectivity between the polygon and node
elements.
This concludes this part of the lesson. The next part of the lesson continues where this
part leaves off, so you can keep the same project open if you plan to continue immediately. If you plan to begin the next part of the lesson at a later time, you can either save
the current project, or use the Lesson_2_3.stsw project located in the C:\Program
Files\Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Lessons folder.
Note:

Part 3: Moving Element Labels

model. Otherwise, begin by clicking the File/Open button; then, browse to the
C:\Program Files\Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Lessons folder, highlight Lesson
_2_3.stsw, then click Open.
Note:

As you can see, the default placement of the element labels can sometimes interfere
with the visibility of other elements and labels. You can manually move the labels by
clicking on them until just the label is highlighted. Note that when an element is highlighted, the label is highlighted as well. To move the label, make sure that only the
label is highlighted.
When the label is highlighted, you will see a small square, or grip, near the label, as
shown below:
Click on this grip and move the label to the new position, such that it doesnt interfere
with the visibility of other labels and elements. Repeat this process with the other
element labels in the model.
3-80
Quick Start Lessons

When you have done so, the model should look like this:
By default, labels for link elements are positioned so that they are placed at an angle
parallel to the link. You can change the angle of orientation by right-clicking a label
and selecting the Rotate command from the submenu that appears. By moving your
mouse up and down while this command is active, you can rotate the label angle
around a pivot point. When you are finished rotating the label, right-click and select
Done from the submenu that appears.
This concludes Lesson 2. The next lesson continues where this one leaves off, so you
can keep the same project open if you plan to continue immediately. If you plan to
begin the next lesson at a later time, you can either save the current project or use the
Lesson_3_1.stsw project located in the C:\Program
Note:

Lesson 3: Entering Data

Input data in SewerGEMS V8i can be divided into two categories: element input data
and global project data. This lesson explains the difference between the two and
describes how to define both types of data.
Part 1: Entering Element Input Data

Element input data refers to the data associated with the elements in the model. It can
be entered using the Property Editor, as described in Lesson 2, through FlexTables, or
through the Alternatives Editor, as described in the Editing Alternatives topic.
Each method offers different advantages:
3-81
The Property Editor is easily accessible and can be positioned next to the drawing
pane so you can see the visual context of the element whose data is being modified.
The FlexTables are categorized according to element type, so they are best suited
for entering data for large groups of elements at once. They also provide global
editing and filtering functionality to allow you to enter data common to a large
number of elements quickly and easily.
The Alternatives Editor allows you to use data inheritance functionality

(discussed in Editing Alternatives) and the categorized nature of the data (alternatives are grouped according to the type of data they contain, such as physical
data, inflow data, hydrologic data, etc.), can be useful.
Lets begin by using the Property Editor to define the attributes for the individual
If youve already completed Lesson 2, you can continue using the same model. Otherwise, begin by clicking the File/Open button, then browse to the C:\Program
Files\Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Lessons folder, highlight Lesson_3_1.stsw, then click
Open.
Note:

1. Highlight CB-1.
2. The fields that are available for a given element type vary depending on the
settings in other fields. Change the Structure Type to Box Structure. Note that
the Diameter field disappears, and a Length field and a Width field appear in its
place.
3. Change the Inlet Type to Inflow-Capture Curve.
4. Click the ellipsis button in the Inflow-Capture Curve field to open the Inflow
Capture Curve dialog.
5. Using Windows Explorer, browse to the C:\Program
Files\Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Lessons folder and open the text document entitled
CB Inlet Data.txt. Highlight all of the data in the text file, and press Ctrl+C on
your keyboard to copy the data.
3-82
Quick Start Lessons

6. Back in the Inflow-Capture Curve dialog, press Ctrl+V to copy the data into the
dialog. (If the copy command doesnt work immediately, click the first column
heading, hold down the mouse button, and drag the cursor over to the second
column to highlight both columns, then press Ctrl+V).
7. Click OK in the Inflow-Capture Curve dialog to close it.

8. Enter the following data in the specified fields:
Table 3-1: CB-1 Attribute Values
Field Name
Value
Elevation (Ground)
106.00 ft.
Elevation (Invert)
102.00 ft.
9. Highlight CB-2.
10. Change the Structure Type to Box Structure, leaving the default values for
Length and Width at 3.00 ft.
11. Change the Inlet Type to Inflow-Capture Curve.
12. Click the ellipsis button in the Inflow-Capture Curve field to open the Inflow
Capture Curve dialog. Press Ctrl+V to copy the data you copied during step 5
into the dialog.
3-83

Table 3-2: CB-2 Attribute Values
Field Name
Value
Ground Elevation
101.00 ft.
Invert Elevation
97.00 ft.
14. Highlight MH-1.

15. Enter a local inflow (local inflow is inflow that occurs at a specific element, as
opposed to the inflow from global storm data, which is applied over the whole
model). Click the ellipsis button in the Inflow (Wet) Collection field.
16. In the Inflow Collection dialog that appears, click the New button, then click
Hydrograph Load in the submenu that appears.
MH1 Inflow Collection.txt. Highlight all of the data in the text file, and press
Ctrl+C on your keyboard to copy the data.
18. Back in the Inflow-Collection dialog, press Ctrl+V to copy the data into the
dialog. (If the copy command doesnt work immediately, click the first column
heading, hold down the mouse button, and drag the cursor over to the second
column to highlight both columns, then press Ctrl+V).
19. Click OK in the Inflow Collection dialog to close it.
3-84
Quick Start Lessons

Table 3-3: MH-1 Attribute Values
Field Name
Value
Ground Elevation
107.00 ft.
Invert Elevation
103.00 ft.
Diameter
3.00 ft.
For the other elements in the model, of which there are more than one of each
type, lets enter the data using FlexTables.
21. Click the View pulldown menu and select the FlexTables command.
22. Under the Tables - Predefined node, double-click the Manhole Table.
23. Enter the following data in the Manhole Table dialog that appears:
Table 3-4: Manhole Attributes
Element
Ground
Elevation
Invert
Elevation
Diameter)
MH-2
105.00 ft
101.00 ft
3.00 ft.
MH-3
103.00 ft
99.00 ft
3.00 ft.
MH-4
100.00 ft
96.00 ft
3.00 ft.
MH-5
99.00 ft
95.00 ft
3.00 ft.
MH-6
97.00 ft
93.00 ft
3.00 ft.
24. Change the Label for MH-6 to Diversion Chamber. When you have entered the
data, close the Manhole Table.
25. Double-click CM-1 to open the properties grid. Change the Loss Method to SCS
CN and change the Unit Hydrograph Method to SCS Unit Hydrograph.
Repeat this step with CM-2.
26. In the FlexTables dialog, double-click the Catchment Table node.
3-85

27. Enter the following data in the Catchment Table dialog that appears (if one or
more attributes does not appear in the FlexTable by default, you will have to add
them to the FlexTable. For instructions on adding attributes to a FlexTable, see
Editing FlexTables):
Table 3-5: Catchment Attributes
Element
Area (acres)
SCS CN
Time of
Concentration
(hours)
CM-1
10.000
80.000
0.400
CM-2
13.000
82.000
0.500
28. When you have entered the data, close the Catchment Table. In the FlexTables
dialog, double-click the Conduit Table node.
29. Enter the following data in the Conduit Table that appears (note that the stop and
start inverts are defined by the values of the adjacent nodes, since the Set Invert
To Start/Stop Node fields are set to True by default):
Table 3-6: Conduit Attributes
3-86
Element
Has User
Defined
Length?
User
Defined
Length (ft.)
Conduit
Diameter
(in)
Start Invert
(ft.)
CO-1
True
250.00
24.0
Automatically
Assigned
CO-2
True
50.00
24.0
Automatically
Assigned
CO-3
True
500.00
30.0
Automatically
Assigned
CO-4
True
500.00
30.0
Automatically
Assigned
CO-5
True
50.00
24.0
Automatically
Assigned
Quick Start Lessons

Table 3-6: Conduit Attributes
Element
Has User
Defined
Length?
User
Defined
Length (ft.)
Conduit
Diameter
(in)
Start Invert
(ft.)
CO-6
True
500.00
36.0
Automatically
Assigned
CO-7
True
300.00
36.0
Automatically
Assigned
CO-8
True
300.00
30.0
Automatically
Assigned
CO-9
True
300.00
30.0
Automatically
Assigned
30. When you have entered the data, close the Conduit Table.
31. Click on CO-9 in the drawing pane.
32. In the Properties Editor, change the Has Start Control Structure? value to
True. Click on the dropdown for Start Control Structure and select <Edit
Conduit Control Structure>.
33. In the Conduit Control Structure dialog that appears, click the New button and
select Weir from the submenu.
3-87

34. Change the Crest Elevation to 94.50 ft. Change the Structure Top Elevation to
97.00 ft. Change the Weir Length to 2.00 ft. Click the Close button.
35. Click the dropdown in the Start Control Structure field and select the new control
structure.
36. In the drawing pane, an icon appears on the upstream end of CO-9 to indicate that
a control is present.
3-88
Quick Start Lessons

37. In the FlexTables dialog, double-click the Outfall Table node.
38. In the Outfall Table dialog that appears, enter the following data:
Table 3-7: Outfall Attributes
Element
Ground
Elevation
(ft.)
Elevation
(Invert) (ft.)
Change
Label To
OF-1
95.00
91.00
Treatment
OF-2
95.00
91.00
Overflow
This concludes this part of the lesson. The next part continues where this part leaves
off, so you can keep the same project open if you plan to continue immediately. If you
plan to begin the next part at a later time, you can either save the current project or use
the Lesson_3_2.stsw project located in the C:\Program
Note:

Part 2: Entering Global Project Data

Global project data refers to information that applies to the project as a whole. This
includes project properties, storm data, and global storm data.
Defining Project Properties

Project Properties are purely informational data that store the Project Title, Engineers
Name, Company Name, and the Date, along with any notes associated with the project
This data, if entered, will be added to the footer of any of the preformatted reports that
are generated by SewerGEMS V8i, with the exception of the data entered in the Notes
field, which will not be displayed.
3-89

Note:

1. Click the File menu and select the Project Properties command.
2. In the Project Properties dialog that appears, enter the following information in
the specified fields:
Table 3-8: Project Properties
Field Name
Value
Title
Lesson Model
Engineer
<Your Name Here>
Company:
<Your Company
Name Here>
3. The date is automatically entered using the information in your system calendar.
The dialog should now look like this:
4. Click the OK button.
3-90
Quick Start Lessons

5. To see how the information will appear on the preformatted reports, click the
Report pulldown menu and select the Project Inventory command.
6. In the Project Inventory report dialog, scroll to the bottom of the page to view
the footer.
Defining Storm Data

Storm data consist of a single curve that represents one rainfall event for a given recurrence interval. Once the Storm Data is created it can either be used locally at a catchment, or it can be used globally, as discussed in the next section of this part of the
lesson.
This example shows how to retrieve and paste an external rainfall data source file into
SewerGEMS as a cumulative rainfall data table. See Lesson 7 for a detailed example
on how to set up multiple return events from synthetic rainfall data (such as SCS Type
I, IA, II, III distributions).
1. Click the Components pulldown menu and select the Storm Data command.
2. In the Storm Data dialog that appears, click the New button and select TimeDepth from the submenu that appears.
3. In the Storm Data Input tab, click the New button and select New Return Event
4. In the New Storm Data Settings dialog that appears, enter the following data:
Table 3-9: New Storm Data Settings
Field Name
Value
Curve Label
10 Year Storm
Return Event
10 (yrs)
Depth Type
Cumulative
Start
0.000 (hrs)
Increment
0.100 (hrs)
End
24.000 (hrs)
3-91

5. The start and end times define the duration of the storm data, while the increment
defines the amount of time between each ordinate when the storm is calculated.
Click the OK button to close the New Storm Data Settings dialog.

Storm Data Data.txt. Highlight all of the data in the text file, and press Ctrl+C
on your keyboard to copy the data.
This procedure demonstrated how you can copy storm data from a predefined
storm data, created from external rainfall data sources. Lesson 6 describes a
detailed example on how to set up multiple return events from synthetic rainfall
data (such as SCS Type I, IA, II, III distributions)
3-92
Quick Start Lessons

7. Back in the Storm Data dialog, highlight the 2nd cell of the Depth column of the
Time vs. Depth table on the right side of the dialog and press Ctrl+V on your
keyboard to paste the data into the table.
8. Click the Close button to close the Storm Data dialog.
3-93
Defining Global Storm Data

As mentioned in the last section, once a storm data is created, it can be assigned
locally to one or more catchments, or assigned to the project globally. When a storm
data is defined as a global event, it applies the storm data to every catchment in the
scenario that does not have localized rainfall.
1. To apply the storm data we just created globally, click the Components pulldown
menu and select the Global Storm Data command.
2. In the Global Storm Data dialog that appears, click the arrow button in the
Global Storm Data field. Select the only event in the list, Storm Data - 1.
3. Note that the other fields in the dialog, colored yellow to denote their read-only
status, are filled in automatically with the data associated with the selected storm
data. Click the Close button to close the Global Storm Data dialog.
Adding Sanitary Loads

In this part of the lesson, we will set up a unit sanitary load and a pattern sanitary load.
A unit sanitary load can be set up once and then used at multiple nodes, and can also
be saved as an engineering library for use in other models (see Adding Unit Sanitary
(Dry Weather) Loads on page 7-624). A pattern sanitary load is a load that varies
over time.
1. To create a new unit sanitary load, click the Components menu and select the
Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads command.
2. In the dialog that appears, click the New button and select Area Based from the
submenu that appears.
3. Right-click the unit label to the right of the Unit Load field and select the Units
and Formatting command from the submenu that appears.
4. In the Set Field Options dialog that appears, change the Unit value to gal/day.
Click OK.
3-94
Quick Start Lessons

5. Back in the Unit Sanitary Loads dialog, enter 720 in the Unit Load field. Click
the Close button.
6. Highlight (or double-click) MH-3 in the drawing pane.

7. In the Properties Editor, click the ellipsis button in the Sanitary Loads field.
8. In the Sanitary Loads dialog that appears, click the New button and select the
Unit Load - Unit Type and Count command from the submenu that appears.
9. Enter 6.5 in the Loading Unit Count field.
10. Click the Unit Sanitary Load pulldown menu and select Unit Sanitary Load - 1.
Click OK.
3-95

11. Highlight MH-4 and repeat steps 7 - 10.
12. Highlight MH-3.
13. In the Properties Editor, click the ellipsis button in the Sanitary Loads field.
14. In the Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow dialog that appears, click the New button
and select the Pattern Load - Base Flow and Pattern command from the
15. Enter 7200 in the Base Flow field.
16. Click the ellipsis button next to the Pattern field. In the Patterns dialog that
appears, click the New button (make sure Hydraulic folder is highlighted in the
list on the left hand side of the Patterns window). Enter 0.5 for the Starting Multiplier.
Sanitary Load Pattern.txt. Highlight all of the data in the text file, and press
Ctrl+C on your keyboard to copy the data.
3-96
Quick Start Lessons

18. Back in the Patterns dialog, click the Time From Start column heading, hold
down the mouse button, and drag the cursor over to the Multiplier column to
highlight both columns (or click on the very first cell of the table), then press
Ctrl+V. Click the Close button.
3-97

19. Back in the Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow dialog, click the Pattern pulldown
menu and select Pattern - 1. Click OK.
20. To apply the pattern to the unit load we created, you must create a Pattern Setup.
Click the Components pulldown menu and select the Pattern Setups command.
21. In the Pattern Setups dialog, click the New button to create a new pattern setup.
22. Click the pulldown menu in the Setup Pattern column and select Hydraulic Pattern
- 1.
23. Click the Close button.

24. Finally, change the calculation option so that the Pattern Setup is applied. Click
the Analysis pulldown menu and select the Calculation Options command.
Double click Base Calculation Options in the Calculation Options window to
view the properties.
3-98
Quick Start Lessons

25. Change the Pattern Setup value to Pattern Setup - 1.
Lesson_4.stsw project located in the C:\Program
Lesson 4: Validating and Calculating a Model

In Lessons 2 and 3 we created the model and entered the required input data. The
model is now ready to be calculated. When you execute the Compute command,
SewerGEMS V8i performs a validation routine to detect any errors or input data that
will interfere with the successful calculation of the model. Alternatively, you can also
validate your model at any time, without calculating.
3-99

Files\Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Lessons folder, highlight Lesson_4.stsw, then click
Open.
Note:

1. Click the Validate button in the toolbar, or click the Analysis menu and
select the Validate command.
2. A Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Problem dialog appears, informing you that one or
more validation errors were found. Click OK in this box.
3. The User Notifications dialog appears. This dialog lists data entry errors that
prevent the model from calculating successfully. These types of errors are marked
with a red icon. The model will not compute until the red icon errors are rectified.
4. Double-click the first message in the list, Outfall is boundary element type, no
boundary element selected...
5. The drawing pane centers on the element referenced by the error message, and the
element is highlighted. In the Property Editor, change the Boundary Condition
Type to Free Outfall.
6. Repeat the above step with the second message in the list.
7. Close the User Notifications dialog.
3-100
Quick Start Lessons

8. Click the Compute button. When the model has been computed, the
Calculation Executive Summary appears. This dialog displays some of
the important calculated results.
9. You can generate an executive summary report by clicking the Report button in
this dialog.
10. Close the report dialog.
3-101

11. Click the Detailed Summary button in the Calculation Executive Summary
window. The Detailed Summary dialog appears. The Detailed summary contains
information divided by category:
3-102
Calculation Detailed Summary - Calculation Options (see Calculation

Options Tab on page 8-776 for more details).
Calculation Detailed Summary - Catchment Summary (see Catchment

Summary Tab on page 8-778 for more details).
Quick Start Lessons
Calculation Detailed Summary - General Summary (see General Summary

Tab on page 8-778 for more details).
3-103
3-104
Calculation Detailed Summary - Node Summary (see Node Summary Tab

on page 8-779 for more details).
Quick Start Lessons
Calculation Detailed Summary - Gutter Summary (see Gutter Summary Tab on

page 8-780 for more details).
3-105
Lesson 5: Presenting Calculated Results

12. As with the Executive Summary, you can generate a report using the Report
button.
13. Click the Analysis menu and select User Notifications. Note that there are still
messages listed here, although the model did compute successfully. These
messages, marked with an orange icon, are warnings (in contrast with errors,
marked in red). Warnings do not interfere with the calculations, and do not necessarily invalidate the results. They simply call attention to certain conditions within
the network that may be a result of incorrect input data, or that the user might not
be immediately aware of.
Note:


An important feature in all software is the ability to present results clearly. This lesson
outlines several of Bentley SewerGEMS V8is reporting features, including:
3-106
Reports, which display and print information on any or all elements in the
system.
Tabular Reports (FlexTables), for viewing, editing, and presentation of selected

data and elements in a tabular format.
Graphs, to display calculated result attribute values over time for any element in
the model.
Profiles, to graphically show, in a profile view, how a selected attribute, such as

hydraulic grade, varies along an interconnected series of pipes over time.
Quick Start Lessons
Element Annotation, for dynamic presentation of the values of user-selected

variables in the plan view.
Color Coding, which assigns colors based on ranges of values to elements in the
plan view. Color coding is useful in performing quick diagnostics on the network.
Part 1: Generating Preformatted Reports

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i has the ability to generate a number of different preformatted reports. Two of these reports were mentioned in the previous lesson, the Calculation Executive Summary and the Calculation Detailed Summary.
Open.
3-107

Note:

1. Click the Compute button, then close the Calculation Executive

Summary dialog.
2. Right-click a Manhole and select Report from the shortcut menu that appears.
You can use this function for any element in the model, allowing you to quickly
generate a report detailing a single elements input and output data, as shown
3-108
Quick Start Lessons

below.
3. Close the Print Preview window.

4. You can also generate reports that detail input and output data for all elements of a
single type. Click the Report menu, move the mouse cursor over Element
Tables, and click the Conduit command from the submenu that appears.
3-109

5. In the FlexTable dialog (FlexTables will be discussed further in the next part of
this lesson) that appears, click the Report button and select Current Time Step
from the submenu.
6. Close the Print Preview and FlexTable windows.
3-110
Quick Start Lessons

7. The Scenario Summary Report details the calculation options that are associated
with the current scenario, along with the alternatives that it is comprised of
(Scenarios are discussed in the next lesson). Click the Report menu and select the
Scenario Summary command.
8. Close the Print Preview window.

9. The Project Inventory Report details all of the information contained in the
Scenario Summary Report mentioned above, along with a count of the number of
each element type in the model. Click the Report menu and select the Project
Inventory command.
3-111
10. Close the Project Inventory report window.

3-112
Quick Start Lessons

Note:

Part 2: Generating Custom Tabular Reports

In Lesson 3, we saw how FlexTables can be used as an efficient means of data entry.
They are also useful for creating customized reports of calculated results, as demonstrated in this part of the lesson.
Note:


Summary dialog.
2. Click the Analysis menu, select the Time Browser command. A FlexTable
displays the calculated results for the current time step. The Time Browser allows
you to control the time step that is displayed.
3. Click the View menu and select the FlexTables command.

4. In the FlexTables dialog, highlight the Tables-Project node,
then click the New button and select Folder from the
3-113

5. A folder is created in the tree view of the FlexTables dialog. This allows
you to organize your custom tables. Highlight the newly created folder and
click the Rename button. Rename the folder to Conduit Results.
6. Click the New button and select FlexTable from the

7. The FlexTable setup dialog appears. Change the Table
Type to Conduit.
The Available Columns list pane on the left side of the dialog displays all of the
attributes that are available for display in the custom table. The Selected Columns
list pane, which is currently empty, displays all of the attributes that will be
displayed in the custom table. You define a custom table by moving the attributes
that you want the table to display from the Available Columns list to the Selected
Columns list.
Input data attributes are denoted by a blue icon.
Output data (result) attributes are denoted by a yellow icon.
8. Double-click Label to move it to the Selected Columns list.
9. Double-click each of the yellow result attributes in the Available
Column list to move them to the Selected Columns list. Alternatively, you can highlight the attributes and click the Add button.
3-114
Quick Start Lessons

10. When you have finished moving all of the output attributes to the Selected
Columns list, click the OK button.
11. The FlexTable display dialog appears. The table currently displays the results for
each of the conduits in the model for the 00:00:00 hour timestep. Resize the
FlexTable dialog so that more columns are visible, and position the FlexTable
dialog so that the Time Browser dialog is also visible.
3-115

12. Click and hold the Time Slider control, then slowly drag the control to the right.
Note that the values for most of the result attributes in the table vary over time.
Move the slider to around the halfway point.
13. The rows in the FlexTable can be sorted according to any attribute. Right-click the
Flow column heading and select the Sort...Descending command from the
shortcut menu that appears. The table rows will be arranged so that the element
with the highest flow during the current time step is at the top and the element
with the lowest flow is at the bottom.
14. You can apply filters to any FlexTable. Filters let you change the table so
that only rows that match the specified criteria will appear. Tables can be
filtered according to any attribute. Click the Edit button.
15. In the FlexTable setup dialog, double-click the Diameter attribute in the Available Columns list. Click OK.
16. In the FlexTable display dialog, scroll to the Diameter column. Right-click the
column heading and select the Filter...Custom command from the shortcut menu
that appears.
3-116
Quick Start Lessons

17. In the Filter dialog, scroll to the Diameter attribute in the Fields pane and
double-click it to add it to the query pane at the bottom of the dialog. Click the <=
operator button. Click the refresh button above the Unique Values pane and
double-click 24.0 in the list that appears. The dialog should now look like this:
18. Click the Apply button, click OK in the Query Successful prompt, then click OK
to close the Query Builder dialog.
19. In the FlexTable display dialog, note that there are only three elements displayed,
and a message has appeared along the bottom of the dialog: 3 of 9 elements
displayed and a FILTERED notification appears to the right of the message.
Only the elements with a diameter of 24 inches or less are shown in the table
because of the filter we created.
20. Close the FlexTable display dialog, then close the FlexTables manager dialog.
3-117

Note:

Part 3: Using Graphs

Graphs display calculated result attribute values over time for any element in the
model. For elements with more than one attribute available for graphing, you can
display all of the attributes on the same graph.
Note:


Summary dialog.
2. Right-click on CM-1 and select Graph from the shortcut menu that appears.
3. Close the Graph Series Options dialog that appears. The Graph dialog opens,
displaying the plot of total outflow over time (the default attribute for catchment
graphs) for CM-1 for the duration of the simulation.
3-118
Quick Start Lessons
4. You can view the data on which the graph is based by clicking the Data tab.
3-119

5. Switch back to the Graph tab and click the Graph Series Options button.
6. The Graph Series Options dialog that appears allows you to control what
is displayed by the graph, including scenarios, elements, and attributes.
Scenarios will be discussed in the next lesson, and we will revisit graphs at that
time.
7. In the Fields list, clear the Flow (Out to links) checkbox (under the Results
folder) and click the Precipitation (Cumulative) checkbox (under the Results
(Extended Catchment) folder), then click the OK button.
8. You can also display more than one attribute simultaneously on the same graph.
Click the Graph Series Options button.
9. Click the Total Outflow checkbox in the Fields pane, then click the OK button.
10. The graph now displays both outflow and cumulative precipitation for CM-1.
Click the Add to Graph Manager button to save the Graph and enter the name
CM-1 Outflow and Cumulative Precipitation in the Create Graph dialog that
appears. Close the Graph view dialog.
3-120
Quick Start Lessons
11. You can graph multiple elements on the same graph. Hold down the Ctrl key on
your keyboard and click both of the catchment elements in turn.
12. Right-click on one of the catchments and select the Graph command from the
shortcut menu. Close the Graph Series Options dialog.
3-121
13. You can zoom in on any area of the graph using the Zoom tool. Click the
Zoom tool to activate it. The zoom tool behaves like the Zoom Window
tool for the drawing pane; you define the area to be zoomed by clicking on
3-122
Quick Start Lessons

the graph to define the top-left corner of the zoom area, then hold down the mouse
button and drag down and to the right, releasing the mouse button when the cursor
is positioned at the bottom-right corner of the zoom area.
14. To zoom back out, click, hold, and drag to the left, then release the mouse
button. This returns the view to the full extent zoom level, displaying the
entire graph. Alternatively, you can click the Zoom Extents button.
15. Click the Save button and enter the name All Catchments Outflow in the Create
Graph dialog, then click OK. Close the Graph dialog.
16. Click the View menu and select the Graphs command.
17. In the Graphs manager dialog that appears, note the saved graphs.
18. Close the Graphs manager dialog.
3-123

Note:

Part 4: Generating Profiles

Profiles graphically show how a selected attribute, such as hydraulic grade, varies
along an interconnected series of network elements over time.
Note:


Summary dialog.
2. Click the View menu and select the Profiles command.
3. In the Profiles manager that appears, click the New button.
4. In the Profile Setup dialog that appears, click the Select From Drawing
button.
5. The mouse cursor changes to an Element Selection tool. Click on CB-1
and MH-3. MH-2, which is the intermediate node between them, is also
highlighted, along with the link elements that join these elements. Rightclick and select Done from the shortcut menu that appears.
3-124
Quick Start Lessons

6. This returns you to the Profile Setup dialog. Note that the list pane now contains
the elements that were highlighted in the drawing pane. These are the elements
that will be displayed in the profile, in the order they will appear from left to right
in the profile view. Click the Open Profile button.
7. The Profile view dialog appears, displaying the three nodes and two links that
were highlighted. The blue line represents the calculated HGL. The green line
represents the ground elevation. The parallel vertical lines represent the node
elements. The red marks superimposed over the node elements represent the
maximum HGL calculated for that node. Click the Play button to see how the
HGL changes over the course of the simulation.
8. Close the Profile display dialog. In the Profiles manager dialog, highlight
Profile-1 and click the Edit button.
3-125

9. This opens the Profile Setup dialog for the highlighted profile. Click the Reverse
button, then click the Open Profile button.
10. Note that the direction of the profile has been reversed. Close the Profile view
dialog.
11. In the Profiles manager, highlight Profile-1 and click the Rename button.
Enter the name Upstream Of MH-3.
12. Click the New button. In the Profile Setup dialog, click the Select From
Drawing button.
3-126
Quick Start Lessons

13. In the drawing pane, click on CB-2, MH-5, Diversion Chamber, and Treatment.
Right-click and select Done from the shortcut menu.
14. In the Profile Setup dialog, click the Open Profile button.
15. You can zoom in on any area of the profile using the Zoom tool. Click the
Zoom tool to activate it. The zoom tool behaves like the Zoom Window
tool for the drawing pane; you define the area to be zoomed by clicking on
3-127

the graph to define the top-left corner of the zoom area, then holding down the
mouse button and dragging down and to the right, releasing the mouse button
when the cursor is positioned at the bottom-right corner of the zoom area.
16. To zoom back out, click, hold, and drag to the left, then release the mouse
button. This returns the view to the full extent zoom level, displaying the
entire profile. Alternatively, you can click the Zoom Extents button.
17. Close the Profile view dialog. In the Profiles manager, highlight Profile-1 and
click the Rename button. Enter the name Downstream of MH-3.
18. Close the Profiles manager dialog.

3-128
Quick Start Lessons

Note:

Part 5: Applying Element Annotation

Element annotation functionality allows the display of values for user-selected
attributes in the drawing pane. These values are dynamically updated when the current
time step is changed.
Note:


Summary dialog.
2. Annotation is assigned through the Element
Symbology manager. If you are using the default
workspace configuration, the Element Symbology
manager is located directly below the toolbars on
the left side of the dialog. If not, click the View
menu and select the Element Symbology
command. Highlight Conduit and click the New
button, then select New Annotation from the
shortcut menu that appears.
3-129

3. In the Annotation Properties dialog that appears, change the Field Name to
Velocity. In the Prefix field, type in Vel: (with a space after the colon).
4. The X and Y Initial offset fields allow you to define, respectively, the horizontal
and vertical distance between the element and the annotation. A positive value for
Initial X Offset will cause the annotation to be placed to the right of the element at
the distance specified; a negative value will cause the annotation to be placed to
the left of the element. A positive value for Initial Y Offset will cause the annotation to be placed above the element; a negative value will cause the annotation to
be placed below it. Enter a value of -5.00 feet for the Y Offset.
5. The Height Multiplier allows you to increase the size of text used for the annotation. Change this value to 0.750. The Selection Set control allows you to apply
the current annotation to only those elements contained within a previously
defined selection set. Leave this value at <All Elements>. Click the OK button.
3-130
Quick Start Lessons

6. In the Time Browser, click and slowly drag the time slider to the right. Note that
the velocity annotation values display the updated value for the current time step
as it changes.
7. In the Element Symbology manager, click the New button and select New Annotation from the shortcut menu that appears.
8. Change the Field Name to Hydraulic Grade. Enter HGL: (with a space after the
colon) in the Prefix field. Change the Y Offset to -8.00. Change the Initial
Height Multiplier value to 0.750. Click the OK button.
9. Note that the hydraulic grade line value is now displayed below the
velocity annotation. However, the two annotations slightly overlap. Highlight the Hydraulic Grade annotation node in the Element Symbology
manager and click the Edit button.
10. In the Annotation Properties dialog that appears, highlight Hydraulic Grade in
the list pane on the left side of the dialog. Change the Y Offset to -11.00 and click
the Apply button.
Note the Initial Offset and Initial Multiplier checkboxes. When these are checked,
the settings for the annotation that is currently highlighted in the list pane will be
applied to all of the elements with that particular annotation (in this case, all
conduits). If you have manually moved some of the annotations in the drawing
pane, you should clear the Initial Offset checkbox so that the new settings wont
interfere with your manually repositioned annotations.
3-131
11. In the Time Browser, click and slowly drag the time slider to the right to see how
the values change over time.
12. In the Element Symbology manager, you can create Theme Folders to organize
the various annotations for an element type. Highlight Conduit and click the New
button, then select New Folder from the shortcut menu that appears.
13. Highlight the newly created folder and click the Rename button. Enter the
name Calculated Results.
3-132
Quick Start Lessons

14. Click on the Velocity annotation label and hold down the mouse button,
then drag the mouse cursor to the Calculated Results folder. Your mouse
cursor will change to a drag object icon. Release the mouse button to
place the Velocity annotation in the folder. Repeat this procedure with the HGL
annotation.
15. The checkboxes next to each node in the Element Symbology manager list control
the visibility of the associated object in the drawing pane, as follows:
The checkbox next to the Conduit node (and the corresponding checkboxes next
to each of the other element types) controls the visibility of conduit elements in
the drawing pane.
The checkbox next to the Label node controls the visibility of conduit element
labels in the drawing pane.
The checkbox next to a folder controls the visibility of all annotation definitions
within that folder. In the case of the Calculated Results folder, it controls the visibility of the Velocity and HGL annotations for conduit elements in the drawing
pane.
16. Clear the checkbox next to the Calculated Results folder. Note that both the
Velocity and HGL annotations disappear from the drawing pane, while the Label
annotation is still displayed. Click the checkbox next to the Calculated Results
folder to turn the annotations back on.
3-133

17. The results annotations may now interfere with the visibility of other elements and
labels. Manually reposition the element labels if this is the case, so that all of the
labels are clearly visible (To learn how to manually reposition labels, see Part 3:
Moving Element Labels on page 3-80). Your model should now look like this:
Note:

Part 6: Applying Color Coding

Color Coding allows you to assign colors based on ranges of values for a specified
attribute to elements in the plan view. Color coding is useful in performing quick diagnostics on the network.
3-134
Quick Start Lessons

Note:


Summary dialog.
2. Color Coding is assigned through the Element
Symbology manager. If you are using the default
workspace configuration, the Element Symbology
manager is located directly below the toolbars on
the left side of the dialog. If not, click the View
menu and select the Element Symbology
command. Highlight Conduit and click the New
button, then select New Color Coding from the shortcut menu that appears.
3. In the Color Coding Properties dialog that appears, change the Field Name to
Velocity. The Selection Set control allows you to apply the current color coding
to only those elements contained within a previously defined selection set. Leave
this value at <All Elements>.
4. Click the Calculate Range button and select Full Range from the submenu that
appears.
5. This fills in the Min. and Max. fields using the highest and lowest calculated
values (over the duration of the entire simulation, not just the current time step)
for the attribute specified in the Field Name menu. The Steps field lets you
specify how many intermediate points are created between the minimum and
maximum values defined by the Min. and Max. fields (with the min and max
values each representing a point counting towards the total as well). Leave the
Steps value at 5.
3-135

6. Under Color Maps, leave the Options field set to Color. Click the
Initialize button. The Color Maps table is now populated with 5 rows
(because there were 5 steps in the range) and a different color has been
assigned to each step.
7. Click the arrow button in the Color column of the first row and select
Yellow. Click the Ramp button. The three middle colors are changed to
various shades of orange. The Ramp button assigns colors to the intermediate rows to create a gradient between the first and last colors in the table. Click
the OK button.
the color of the conduit elements change according to the calculated velocity
value for the current time step.
You can also set up color coding to change the size of an element type in the
drawing pane according to the value of a specified attribute.
3-136
Quick Start Lessons

9. In the Element Symbology manager, click the New button and select New Color
Coding from the shortcut menu that appears.
10. In the Color Coding Properties dialog, change the Field Name to Hydraulic
Grade. Leave the Selection Set value at <All Elements>. Click the Calculate
Range button. Leave the Steps value at 5.
11. Under Color Maps, change the Options value to Size. Click the Initialize button.
For the first row, leave the Size value in the Color Maps table at 1, the value for
the second row at 2, the third at 3, the fourth at 4, and the fifth at 5. The Size
values are a multiplier of the default element symbol size. In the case of link
elements like conduits, the value is a multiplier of the default line weight (width).
So a Size value of 5 for a conduit means that a conduit displayed at that value will
be five times wider than a default conduit. Click the OK button.
3-137

the color of the conduit elements change according to the calculated velocity
value, while at the same time the size of the conduits changes according to the
calculated HGL for the current time step.
13. In the Element Symbology manager, you can create Theme Folders to organize
the various color coding definitions for an element type. Highlight Conduit and
click the New button, then select New Folder from the shortcut menu that
appears.
14. Highlight the newly created folder and click the Rename button. Enter the
name Color Coding Definitions.
3-138
Quick Start Lessons

15. Click on the Velocity color coding label and hold down the mouse button,
then drag the mouse cursor to the Color Coding Definitions folder. Your
mouse cursor will change to a drag object icon. Release the mouse button
to place the Velocity color coding definition underneath the folder. Repeat this
procedure with the HGL color coding definition.
16. The checkboxes next to each node in the Element Symbology manager list control
the visibility of the associated object in the drawing pane, as follows:
The checkbox next to the Conduit node (and the corresponding checkboxes next
to each of the other element types) controls the visibility of conduit elements in
the drawing pane.
The checkbox next to the Label node controls the visibility of conduit element
labels in the drawing pane.
The checkbox next to a folder controls the visibility of all annotation definitions
within that folder. In the case of the Color Coding folder, it controls the visibility
of the Velocity and HGL color coding definitions for conduit elements in the
drawing pane.
17. Clear the checkbox next to the Color Coding Definitions folder. Note that both
the Velocity and HGL color codings disappear from the drawing pane, leaving the
conduits displayed in the default color and size. Click the checkbox next to the
Color Coding Definitions folder to turn the color coding definitions back on.
3-139
Lesson 6: Creating Multiple Storm Data

Note:


In Lesson 3, we used a predefined storm data for ease of data entry. In this lesson, we
will set up multiple return events from synthetic rainfall data and apply them to the
model by creating a new scenario using a new Rainfall Runoff alternative.
It is common for engineers to consider multiple storm data when designing drainage
facilities. Multiple rainfall events are modeled in SewerGEMS via rainfall alternatives and scenario management.
This lesson describes the process for defining and applying multiple rainfall events.
Two 24-hour events will be applied to the SCS Type II dimensionless rainfall distributions. This procedure can be applied to an unlimited number of design storms for use
with different scenarios.
General Organization of Storm Data
It is important to understand the overall hierarchy of design storm data in the context
of scenario management. There are basically three major levels of design storm data
that you must create and assign:
Storm Data - This tabular data represents the raw data for a single storm data. This
data can come from applying rainfall depth to dimensionless rainfall distributions
(such as SCS Type I, IA, II, III), or from actual gauged data. Storm Data is entered
using the main menu option Components / Storm Data.
Rainfall Runoff Alternatives - Each rainfall alternative references an individual Storm
Data. Rainfall Runoff alternatives are created and edited by clicking the Alternatives
button on the main tool bar to access the Alternatives manager.
Scenarios - Any scenario can reference any Rainfall Runoff Alternative. This hierarchy provides maximum flexibility for use with scenario management. Scenarios are
edited by clicking the Scenario button on the main toolbar.
The overall hierarchy discussed here can be illustrated as:
Scenario references > Rainfall Runoff Alternative that references > Storm Data
EXAMPLE: ENTER MULTIPLE STORM DATA FOR THE FOLLOWING DATA, THEN
REFERENCE WITH RAINFALL RUNOFF ALTERNATIVES AND SCENARIOS:
10-Year, 24-Hour Depth = 4.8 inches, SCS Type II Dimensionless Distribution
100-Year, 24-Hour Depth = 7.1 inches, SCS Type II Dimensionless Distribution
3-140
Quick Start Lessons
Part 1: Creating Unique Storm Data for Design Storms

We must first establish our raw data for each unique rainfall event. Follow the
sequence below to enter 2 SCS rainfall events.
If youve already completed Lesson 5, you can continue using the same model. Otherwise, begin by clicking the File/Open button; then, browse to the C:\Program
Open.
Note:

1. Click the Components menu and select Storm Data. This will display the Storm
Data manager window.
We will now enter a SCS rainfall 10-year event.
2. In the Storm Data manager
dialog, click the New button
and select the Time-Depth
command from the submenu
that appears.
3. In the Storm Data Input tab,
click the Add Return Event
button and select Add Return
Event from Dimensionless
Curve.
3-141

4. In the Engineering Libraries dialog that appears, the Dimensionless Rainfall
Curves library will be displayed. Expand the Dimensionless Rainfall Curves
node in the list pane on the left by clicking the Plus button, then expand the
SCSTYPES.xml node so that all four distributions are shown (Types I, IA, II, III).
Select Type II 24hr, then click the Select button.
5. In the Generate Storm Data dialog that appears, change the Curve Label field to
10 yr Event, enter 10 in the Return Event field, and change the Depth Type to
Cumulative. Enter a value of 4.800 in the Depth field, then click OK.
3-142
Quick Start Lessons

6. SewerGEMS V8i will generate a cumulative rainfall curve by multiplying 4.8
inches (the depth that was specified in step 4) by the SCS Type II dimensionless
distribution (the curve type that was selected in Step 3). The resulting cumulative
depth table will be displayed in the Data table on the right side of the Storm Data
dialog.
7. Highlight the newly created storm in the list pane on the left side of the dialog and
click the Rename button. Type in 10 yr Event.
8. Repeat steps 2 - 4.
9. In the Generate Storm Data dialog that appears, change the Curve Label field to
100 yr Event, enter 100 in the Return Event field, change the Depth Type to
Cumulative, enter a value of 7.100 in the Depth field, then click OK.
3-143

10. Highlight the newly created storm in the list pane on the left side of the dialog and
click the Rename button. Type in 100 yr Event.
11. Close the Storm Data manager dialog.

Note:

Part 2: Creating Rainfall Runoff Alternatives to Reference Storm

Data
In Part 1 of this lesson, we created our raw rainfall storm data data. In this part of the
lesson, we will reference these storms by creating Rainfall Runoff Alternatives.
3-144
Quick Start Lessons

Note:

1. Click the Analysis menu and select the Alternatives command.

2. In the Alternatives manager dialog that appears, expand the Rainfall
Runoff alternative node by clicking the plus button next to it. Highlight
the Base Alternative and click the Rename button. Type in 10 yr Storm.
3. Double-click the 10 yr Storm alternative to open up the Rainfall Runoff alternative editor. Click the Global Rainfall list box. You should see the 2 events that
were defined in Part 1 of this lesson, along with Storm Data - 1, which was used
in the earlier lessons. Select the 10 yr Event. Close the Rainfall Runoff alternative editor.
4. In the Alternatives manager, highlight the Rainfall Runoff alternative

node, then click the New button.
3-145

5. Highlight the newly created base alternative and click the Rename button. Type in
100 yr Storm.
6. Double-click the 100 yr Storm alternative to open up the Rainfall Runoff Alternative editor. Click the Global Storm Data list box and select the 100 yr Event.
Close the Rainfall Runoff Alternative editor.
7. Close the Alternatives manager.

8. Click the Components menu and select the Global Storm Data command. The
Global Storm Data dialog that appears provides a summary of global storm data,
their depth, duration, and their original source of distribution data. Close the
Global Storm Data dialog.
3-146
Quick Start Lessons
Note:

Part 3: Creating Scenarios to Reference Rainfall Runoff

Alternatives
In Part 2 of this lesson, we created Rainfall Runoff Alternatives using Storm Data
defined in Part 1. In this lesson, we will create scenarios that reference the Rainfall
Runoff Alternatives.
You can reference a single Rainfall Runoff Alternative from an unlimited number of
scenarios. For example, you may want to apply the same 100-yr design storm to predeveloped conditions, and two different proposed designs. In each of these three
cases, you would reference the same 100-year Rainfall Runoff Alternative. This organization maximizes your flexibility for sharing storm data across different scenarios.
Note:

1. Click the Analysis pulldown menu and select Scenarios.

2. In the Scenarios manager, highlight the Base scenario,
then click the New button and select Child Scenario
3-147

3. Highlight the newly created scenario and click the Rename button. Type
in 10 yr Storm.
Tip:
When creating design storm scenarios, it is important to include

the return event description AND scenario description as part of
the child scenario name. By using this convention, you can
reference the same design storm from multiple scenarios, while
clearly differentiating between each scenario when you click the
fall down scenario list on the main tool bar. If you do not add a
description in addition to the return event, you could potentially
see several "100-Year" events in the fall down scenario list, even
though they reference different topological or physical
alternatives.
4. Double-click the 10yr Storm scenario to bring up the scenario Property Editor
dialog.
3-148
Quick Start Lessons

5. In the Property Editor, make sure the Rainfall Runoff Alternative is set to 10yr
Storm.
6. In the Scenarios manager, highlight the Base scenario, then click the New button
and select Child Scenario from the submenu that appears.
7. Highlight the newly created scenario and click the Rename button. Type in 100 yr
Storm.
3-149

8. Making sure that the 100 yr Storm scenario is still highlighted in the Scenarios
manager, set the Rainfall Runoff Alternative to 100 yr Storm in the Property
Editor.
9. The Base Rainfall Runoff Alternative has been renamed and revised to be a 10 yr
Event, so highlight the Base scenario in the Scenarios manager and click the
Rename button. Type in 10 yr Base Design.
3-150
Quick Start Lessons

10. In the Scenarios manager, click the Compute button
and select the Batch Run command from the submenu
that appears.
11. The Batch Run dialog that appears allows you to calculate a number of scenarios at the same time. Click the
checkboxes next to 10 yr Storm and 100 yr Storm.
Click the Batch button.
12. In the Please Confirm dialog that appears, click the Yes button. After both
scenarios have been calculated, click OK in the Information box that appears.
13. Close the Scenarios manager.
14. In the Drawing Pane, right-click the last conduit before the Treatment outfall,
CO-8, and select the Graph command from the shortcut menu that appears.
15. In the Graph Series Options dialog that appears, click the 10 yr Storm and 100
yr Storm checkboxes in the Scenarios list pane. Click the Base checkbox to clear
it. Click the OK button.
16. The Graph view dialog now displays the flow for each of the scenarios we
computed during the batch run, allowing you to compare the two.
3-151
Lesson 7: Working With the ArcMap Client
This concludes Lesson 6. The next lesson will use different model files, so save your
model even if you plan to continue immediately. Click the File pulldown menu and
select the Save As command. Browse to the Program Files/Bentley/SewerGEMS8/
Lessons folder and enter the name Lesson_7.stsw, then click Save.
Note:


In this lesson, we will discuss using the ArcMap client to:
3-152
Customize the ArcMap interface
Create a new project
Lay out a model
Create a project from an existing Bentley SewerGEMS V8i project
Use GeoTables to perform ArcMap functions on live Bentley SewerGEMS V8i

data
Quick Start Lessons
Part 1: Customizing the ArcMap Interface

In this part of the lesson, we will customize the ArcMap interface to display important
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i dialogs while providing a large area in the display pane for
model layout and viewing.
1. Start ArcMap.
2. The first time you start ArcMap after installing Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, the
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i toolbar will be floating (undocked). Dock it in the area
of the ArcMap toolbars by clicking on the heading bar and holding the mouse
button, then drag it to an empty area of the ArcMap toolbar area and release the
mouse button.
3. Click the SewerGEMS V8i menu on the SewerGEMS V8i toolbar and hover the
mouse cursor over the View menu, then select the Project Manager command.
4. Click the heading bar of the Project Manager dialog, hold down the mouse
button, and drag the dialog over the middle of the ArcMap Display/Source/Selection dialog, then release the mouse button. Your interface should now look like
this:
3-153

mouse cursor over the View menu, then select the Properties command.
6. Click the heading bar of the Properties dialog, hold down the mouse button, and
drag the dialog to the right edge of the ArcMap window, then release the mouse
button. Your interface should now look like this:
off, so you can keep ArcMap open if you plan to continue immediately. If you plan to
begin the next part at a later time, you can close ArcMap and the interface changes
you made will be retained next time you open ArcMap.
Part 2: Creating a New Project in ArcMap

An ArcMap Bentley SewerGEMS V8i project consists of:
3-154
A Bentley SewerGEMS V8i .mdb filethis file contains all modeling data, and
includes everything needed to perform a calculation.
A Bentley SewerGEMS V8i .stsw filethis file contains data such as annotation
and color-coding definitions.
A geodatabase associationa project must be linked to a new or existing geodatabase.
Quick Start Lessons

In this part of the lesson, we will be creating an entirely new project and associating it
to a new geodatabase. If ArcMap is not already open, start it up now. If you have not
yet completed Part 1 of this lesson, do so now so that all of the necessary SewerGEMS
V8i tools and dialogs are available to you.
1. In the Project Manager, click the Add Project
button and select Add New Project from the
2. In the Save As dialog that appears, browse to
the Bentley/SewerGEMS8/Lessons folder
and enter the name Lesson8_ArcMap.
Note:

3. Click the Save button.

4. In the Attach Geodatabase dialog that appears, click the Attach Geodatabase button.
5. The Import Into or Create New Geodatabase dialog that appears allows you to
either select an existing geodatabase to associate the new project with, or to create
a new one. Create a new geodatabase for the project by entering the file name
Lesson8_ArcMap_GDB, then click the Save button.
6. In the Attach Geodatabase dialog, leave the default Dataset Name of
Lesson8_ArcMap.
3-155

8. ArcMap layers for each Bentley SewerGEMS V8i element type are automatically
created.
9. In addition, the project is listed in the Project Manager.
10. Note the icon next to the project name. This icon indicates that the project is
the current project. Only one project can be the current project at one time; if
there were more than one project open, only one would display this icon.
begin the next part at a later time, you can close ArcMap - the project we will use for
the next part of the lesson has been created and there is no need to save the ArcMap
.mxd because the project is empty.
3-156
Quick Start Lessons
Part 3: Laying out a Model In ArcMap

Laying out a model in the ArcMap client differs from laying one out in Stand-Alone in
a couple of different respects. This part of the lesson describes the procedure for
laying out polygon, node, and link elements in ArcMap.
If ArcMap is not already open, start it up now. If you have not yet completed Parts 1
and 2 of this lesson, do so now so that all of the necessary Bentley SewerGEMS V8i
tools and dialogs are available to you, and so that you have a new project to work
with.
1. Click the Add Data button.
2. In the Add Data dialog that appears, browse to the Bentley/
SewerGEMS8/Lessons directory. Highlight LessonLayout.dxf. The Add
Data dialog will display two separate files with this name - use the one with
the icon pictured to the right.
Note:

3. Click the Add button.
3-157

4. To add or move elements, you must be in an edit session. Click the
Editor button and select the Start Editing command from the
5. Note that the SewerGEMS V8i toolbar becomes active. Click the Catchment button.
6. Click on one of the corners of the catchment outline for CM-1. Drag the mouse to
the next corner, and click again.
7. Continue laying out the catchment boundaries by clicking each corner until you
click the last one. Right-click and select Finish Sketch from the submenu that
appears.
8. Click the Manhole button.
9. Click on the location indicated by the dxf background for MH-1 to place a
manhole there.
10. Click on the location indicated by the dxf background for MH-2 to place a
manhole there.
11. Click the Conduit button.
12. Click on MH-1, then click on MH-2. Right-click and select Finish Sketch
to lay out the conduit.
13. Click the Editor button and select the Stop Editing command. A prompt will
appear, asking Do you want to save your edits? Click the Yes button.
14. We wont be using this project for the remainder of the lesson. In the Project
Manager, highlight Lesson8_ArcMap.stsw and click the Remove Project
button.
15. Note the warning that appears. Be careful with the Remove Project command,
because as the warning indicates, the operation irreparably breaks the geodatabase
connection. You will still be able to open the project in Stand-Alone mode, but not
in ArcMap.
16. Right-click the Layers node in the ArcMap Display dialog and click the Select
All Layers command.
17. Right-click one of the selected layers and click the Remove command to delete
the layers and clear the map.
begin the next part at a later time, you can close ArcMap - well be starting a new
project so there is nothing that needs to be saved.
3-158
Quick Start Lessons
Part 4: Creating A New ArcMap Project From An Existing Bentley

SewerGEMS V8i Project
In this part of the lesson, we will be creating a new project in the ArcMap client and
associating it to a new geodatabase. If ArcMap is not already open, start it up now. If
you have not yet completed Part 1 of this lesson, do so now so that all of the necessary
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i tools and dialogs are available to you.
1. Click the Add Project button and select the
Add Existing Project command from the
2. In the Open dialog that appears, browse to the
Bentley/SewerGEMS8/Lessons folder, highlight Lesson_7_Final.stsw, and click the Open button.
Note:

3. In the Attach Geodatabase dialog that appears, click the Attach Geodatabase button.
4. The Import Into or Create New Geodatabase dialog that appears allows you to
either select an existing geodatabase to associate the new project with, or to create
a new one. Create a new geodatabase for the project by entering the file name
Lesson7_Final_ArcMap.mdb, then click the Save button.
5. In the Attach Geodatabase dialog, leave the default Dataset Name of
Lesson_7_Final.
7. ArcMap layers are created for each element type, and the network is displayed in
the drawing pane.
begin the next part at a later time, you can close ArcMap - the project we will use for
the next part of the lesson has been created and there is no need to save the ArcMap
.mxd since no changes were made to the map settings.
Part 5: Using GeoTables

GeoTables allow you to use the viewing and rendering tools provided by the ArcMAP
environment on all of your Bentley SewerGEMS V8i data, including both calculated
results and input.
3-159

If ArcMap is not already open, start it up now. If you have not yet completed Parts 1
and 4 of this lesson, do so now so that all of the necessary Bentley SewerGEMS V8i
tools and dialogs are available to you, and so that you have a completed project to
work with.
mouse cursor over the Analysis menu, then select the Compute command.
mouse cursor over the View menu, then select the FlexTables command. Leave
the FlexTable manager dialog floating (not docked), and position it so that you can
still see the map display.
3. In the FlexTables dialog, scroll down to the GeoTables node and expand it if
necessary by clicking the plus button. Double-click the Conduit node under the
GeoTables heading.
4. In the GeoTables: Conduit Table dialog that appears, note the attributes
that are currently included. The attributes in the GeoTable are the only
ones that are available for use with ArcGIS functions and commands.
Click the Edit button.
3-160
Quick Start Lessons

5. The GeoTables: Conduit Table dialog that appears allows you to add and remove
attribute columns to/from the GeoTable. To add attributes to the GeoTable, you
must move the desired attributes from the Available list to the Selected list. Find
Hydraulic Grade in the Available list and double-click it to move it to the
Selected list.
6. Click OK.
7. Note that the GeoTables: Conduit Table dialog now contains a column for
Hydraulic Grade, and the calculated HGL is displayed for each conduit. Close
the dialog.
8. The calculated Hydraulic Grade is now available for use with ArcMap commands.
Click the ArcMap Selection menu and choose the Select By Attributes
command.
9. In the Select By Attributes dialog that appears, click the Layer pulldown menu
and select Conduit. Double-click Hydraulic_Grade in the Fields list to add it
to the query statement pane. Click the >= button to add it to the query. Click the
Get Unique Values button, then double-click 100.040534973145 in the Unique
Values list.
3-161

10. Click the Verify button; you should receive the message The expression was
successfully verified. Click the Apply button.
11. Click the Close button. Note that three of the conduits in the drawing pane are
selected.
12. Click the ArcGIS Selection menu and choose the Clear Selected Features
command.
3-162
Quick Start Lessons

13. You can also apply ArcMap symbology settings based on Bentley SewerGEMS
V8i attributes that have been added to the appropriate GeoTable. Double click the
Conduit layer in the ArcMap Layers dialog.
14. In the Layer Properties dialog that appears, click the Symbology tab.
15. Click Quantities in the Show: list, then highlight Graduated Colors. Click the
Value: pulldown menu and select Hydraulic_Grade. Change the Color Ramp
setting if desired. Leave the Normalization and Classes fields set to their
defaults.
3-163
Lesson 8: Adding Hydrographs Using the RTK Runoff Method

17. Note that the conduits are now color-coded according to their calculated hydraulic
grade.
Lesson 8: Adding Hydrographs Using the RTK

Runoff Method
The RTK method is used to generate a hydrograph based on precipitation data. It
forms the hydrograph by combining triangular hydrographs from three components of
flow:
Rapid inflow
Moderate infiltration
Slow infiltration
In this lesson, we will define RTK tables and assign them to the catchments in a
model.
Lets begin by starting up Bentley SewerGEMS V8i. If SewerGEMS V8i is already
open, skip step one and click the File pulldown menu and select the Open command
instead, then proceed to step two.
2. Browse to the Bentley\SewerGEMS8\Lessons folder, highlight Lesson_8.stsw,
then click Open.
3-164
Quick Start Lessons

Note:

First, create the RTK tables that will be applied to the catchments in the model. The
RTK parameters are a property of each catchment. However, it is not uncommon for
many catchments with similar characteristics to share the same RTK parameters.
Therefore, the RTK parameters are entered in a named RTK table and that table can be
shared among many catchments.
3. Click the Components menu and select the RTK Tables command.
4. In the RTK Tables dialog that appears, click the New button.
5. Click the newly created table to select it if its not already highlighted, and
click the Rename button.
3-165

6. Enter the name CM-1.
7. With CM-1 still highlighted, enter the RTK values for the rapid inflow component
of flow. The R, T, and K values for rapid inflow represent the following attributes:
RFraction of precipitation that enters the collection system for rapid inflow.
TThe time from the precipitation pulse to the peak of rapid inflow of the
hydrograph.
KThe ratio of the time to peak to time to end of hydrograph for rapid
inflow.
Enter the values of R, T, and K for the rapid inflow component of flow in the
corresponding fields of the RTK Tables dialog as follows:
Table 3-10: Rapid Inflow RTK Values for CM-1
Attribute
Value
Rapid Inflow
R
0.020
Rapid Inflow
T
2.000
Rapid Inflow
K
1.400
8. Next, with CM-1 still highlighted, enter the RTK values for the moderate infiltration component of flow. The R, T, and K values for moderate infiltration represent
the following attributes:
3-166
RFraction of precipitation that enters the collection system for moderate

infiltration.
TThe time from the precipitation pulse to the peak of moderate infiltration
of the hydrograph.
KThe ratio of the time to peak to time to end of hydrograph for moderate
infiltration.
Quick Start Lessons

9. Enter the values of R, T, and K for the moderate infiltration component of flow in
the corresponding fields of the RTK Tables dialog as follows:
Table 3-11: Moderate Infiltration RTK Values for CM-1
Attribute
Value
Moderate
Infiltration R
0.050
Moderate
Infiltration T
3.000
Moderate
Infiltration K
1.600
10. Finally, with CM-1 still highlighted, enter the RTK values for the slow infiltration
component of flow. The R, T, and K values for slow inflow represent the
following attributes:
RFraction of precipitation that enters the collection system for slow infiltration.
TThe time from the precipitation pulse to the peak of slow infiltration of
the hydrograph.
KThe ratio of the time to peak to time to end of hydrograph for slow infiltration.
11. Enter the values of R, T, and K for the slow infiltration component of flow in the
corresponding fields of the RTK Tables dialog as follows:
Table 3-12: Slow Infiltration RTK Values for CM-1
Slow
Infiltration R
0.010
Slow
Infiltration T
4.000
Slow
Infiltration K
1.750
3-167

12. The RTK table for CM-1 should now look like this:
13. Follow steps 4-11 to create three more tables for CM-2, CM-3, and CM-4 using
the following values:
Table 3-13:
Attribute
CM-2 Value
CM-3 Value
CM-4 Value
Rapid Inflow R
0.001
0.120
0.200
Rapid Inflow T
0.200
1.000
1.000
Rapid Inflow K
2.000
1.500
1.500
Moderate Infiltration R
0.002
0.040
0.040
Moderate Infiltration T
1.000
2.000
2.000
Moderate Infiltration K
2.000
1.500
1.500
Slow Infiltration R
0.140
0.020
0.020
Slow Infiltration T
2.000
3.000
3.000
Slow Infiltration K
1.750
1.500
1.500
14. Rename the RTK tables CM-2, CM-3, and CM-4 respectively.
3-168
Quick Start Lessons

15. The RTK Tables dialog should now look like this:
16. The RTK tables can now be assigned to the catchments in the model. Click the
Close button to close the RTK Tables dialog. In the drawing pane, highlight catchment CM-1.
3-169

17. With CM-1 highlighted, find the Unit Hydrograph Method attribute in the
Property Editor. Click the pulldown menu and change the value to RTK Unit
Hydrograph.
3-170
Quick Start Lessons

18. Click the pulldown menu in the RTK Table attribute field of the Property Editor
and select CM-1.
19. Repeat steps 15-17 for catchments CM-2, CM-3, and CM-4, assigning the correspondingly named RTK tables to each catchment.
20. Click the Compute button and review the results using Reports, FlexTables, Graphs, Profiles, Annotation, and Color Coding as described in
Lesson 5: Presenting Calculated Results on page 3-106.
This concludes the QuickStart Lessons. For more information on any of Bentley
SewerGEMS V8is functions, you can right-click or press the F1 key to access the
context-sensitive online help at any time.
3-171
3-172
Chapter
Starting a Project
Welcome Dialog Box

When you first start Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, the Welcome dialog box appears. The
Welcome dialog box contains the following controls:
Quick Start Lessons
Opens the online help to the Quick Start Lessons

Overview topic.
Create New Project
Creates a new Bentley SewerGEMS V8i project.

When you click this button, an untitled Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i project is created.
Open Existing Project
Opens an existing project. When you click this

button, the Windows Select Bentley SewerGEMS
V8i Project to Open dialog box appears, allowing
you to browse to the project to be opened.
Show This Dialog at

Start
When selected, the Welcome dialog box appears

whenever you start Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.
Clear this box if you do not want the Welcome
dialog box to appear whenever you start Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i.
You can access the Welcome dialog box at any time from the Help menu in Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i.
Projects
All data for a model are stored in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i as a project. Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i project files have the file name extension stsw. Bentley SewerGEMS V8i lets you open more than one project at a time. You can assign a title, date,
notes and other identifying information about each project using the Project Properties
dialog box. You can have up to five Bentley SewerGEMS V8i projects open at one
time.
4-173
Setting Project Properties

Starting with the SELECTseries 3 release, SewerGEMS V8i, SewerCAD V8i, CivilStorm V8i and StormCAD V8i all share the same project file format. This means that
a *.stsw file created in SewerGEMS V8i can be opened in any of the other three products, and vice versa, without data loss or conversion.
SewerGEMS V8i SELECTseries 3 can also open SewerGEMS (*.swg), SewerCAD
(*.swc), CivilStorm (*.csd) and StormCAD (*.stc) project files created in releases
prior to V8i SELECTseries 3.
Starting a New Project
To start a new project, select File > New or press Ctrl+N. An untitled project is
opened in the drawing pane.
Opening an Existing Project
To open an existing project, select File > Open or press Ctrl+O. A dialog box appears
allowing you to browse for the project you want to open.
Displaying Multiple Projects
To switch between multiple open projects, click the appropriate tab at the top of the
drawing pane. The file name of the project is displayed on the tab.
Related Topic
Setting Project Properties on page 4-174
Setting Project Properties

The Project Properties dialog box let you enter project-specific information to help
identify the project. Project properties are stored with the project.
To set project properties:
Select File > Project Properties, enter information in the Project Properties dialog
box and click OK.
Project Properties Dialog Box

The dialog box contains the following text fields and controls:
Title
4-174
Lets you type a title for the project.
Starting a Project
File Name
Displays the file name for the current project. If

you have not saved the project yet, the file name is
listed as Untitled.stsw.
Engineer
Lets you type name of the project engineer.
Company
Lets you type the name of your company.
Date
Click this field to display a calendar, which lets

you use your mouse to set a date for the project.
Notes
Lets you type additional information about the

project.
Setting Options
You can change global settings for Bentley SewerGEMS V8i in the Options dialog
box. The Options dialog box contains four tabs, each of which lets you change a
different group of global settings.
Click one of the following links to learn more about the Options dialog box:
Options Dialog Box - Global Tab on page 4-175
Options Dialog Box - Project Tab on page 4-179
Options Dialog Box - Drawing Tab on page 4-181
Options Dialog Box - Units Tab on page 4-182
Options Dialog Box - Labeling Tab on page 4-184
Options Dialog Box - ProjectWise Tab on page 4-185
Options Dialog Box - Global Tab

The Global tab lets you change general program settings for the Bentley SewerGEMS
V8i stand-alone editor, including whether or not to display the status pane, as well as
window color and layout settings.
4-175
Setting Options
The Global tab contains the following controls:
General Settings
Backup Levels
Indicates the number of backup copies that

are retained when a project is saved. The
default value is 1.
Note:
4-176
The higher this number, the

more .BAK files (backup
files) are created, thereby
using more hard disk space
on your computer.
Show recently used

files
The checkbox turns the list of recently opened

files on and off. The File menu has the ability
to display a list of recently opened files,
providing shortcuts that let you quickly access
projects. When this check box is cleared,
these shortcuts are not available from the File
menu. When the box is checked, you can
specify a number of files between 1 and 15 to
show by typing the number in the adjacent
field.
Compact Database
After
When selected, the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i

database is automatically compacted when
you save a particular file the specified number
of times.
Status Pane
When selected, activates the Status Pane

display at the bottom of the Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i stand-alone editor. This
check box is selected by default.
Show Welcome
Page on Startup
When selected, activates the Welcome dialog

that appears when you first start Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i. This check box is selected
by default.
Zoom Extents on
Open
When this box is checked a Zoom Extents

operation is performed upon file open, so that
the entire network is displayed in the drawing
pane.
Starting a Project
Use Accelerated
Redraw
Some video cards use "triple buffering", which

we do not support at this time. If you see
anomalies in the drawing (such as trails being
left behind from the selection rectangle), then
you can shut this option off to attempt to fix the
problem. However, when this option is off, you
could see some performance degradation in
the drawing.
Prompts
Opens the Stored Prompt Responses Dialog

Box on page 4-179, which allows you to
change the behavior of the default prompts
(messages that appear allowing you to
confirm or cancel certain operations).
Window Color Settings
Background Color
Displays the color that is currently assigned to

the drawing pane background. You can
change the color by clicking the ellipsis button
(...) to open the Color dialog box.
Foreground Color

elements and labels in the drawing pane. You
can change the color by clicking the ellipsis
button (...) to open the Color dialog box.
Read Only
Background Color

data field backgrounds. You can change the
color by clicking the ellipsis button (...) to open
the Color dialog box.
Read Only
Foreground Color

data field text. You can change the color by
clicking the ellipsis button (...) to open the
Color dialog box.
Selection

elements that are selected in the drawing
pane. You can change the color by clicking the
ellipsis button (...) to open the Color dialog
box.
Layout Settings
4-177
Setting Options
4-178
Display Inactive
Topology
When selected, activates the display of

inactive element in the drawing pane in the
color defined in Ithe adjacent color box. When
not selected, inactive elements will not be
visible in the drawing pane. This check box is
selected by default.
Auto Refresh
Activates Auto Refresh. When Auto-Refresh is

active, the drawing pane automatically
updates whenever changes are made to the
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i datastore. This
check box is selected by default.
Sticky Tool Palette
When selected, activates the Sticky Tools

feature. When Sticky Tools is activated, the
drawing pane cursor does not reset to the
Select tool after you create a node or finish a
pipe run in your model, allowing you to
continue dropping new elements into the
drawing without re-selecting the tool. When
Sticky Tools is not activated, the drawing pane
cursor resets to the Select tool after you
create a node. This check box is selected by
default.
Select Polygons by
Edge
When selected, lets you select polygons in

your model at their edges instead of anywhere
inside the polygon. This check box is cleared
by default.
Selection Handle
Size In Pixels
Specifies, in pixels, the size of the handles

that appear on selected elements. Enter a
number from 1 to 10.
Default Drawing
Style for New
Projects
Choose the style in which elements are

displayed in the drawing pane. Under GIS
style, the size of element symbols in the
drawing pane will remain the same regardless
of zoom level. Under CAD style, element
symbols will appear larger or smaller
depending on zoom level.
Starting a Project
Stored Prompt Responses Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to change the behavior of command prompts back to their
default settings. Some commands trigger a command prompt that can be suppressed
by using the Do Not Prompt Again check box. You can turn the prompt back on by
accessing this dialog and unchecking the box for that prompt type.
Options Dialog Box - Project Tab

Geospatial Settings
Spatial Reference
Used for integration with Projectwise Geospatial.

You can leave the field blank if there is no spatial
information.
Element Labeling Options
Element Identifier
Format
Specifies the format in which reference fields are

used. Reference fields are fields that link to
another element or support object (pump
definitions, patterns, controls, zones, etc.).
Result Files
4-179
Setting Options
Specify Custom
Results File Path?
When this box is checked, the result files are

placed in the directory as specified in the Path
field described below. When this option is
checked, the result files are moved (as opposed to
copied) to a temp directory when the project is
opened. They are moved back to the custom
location when the project is closed (not when the
project is saved). When this box is unchecked, the
result files get saved to the project directory
Root Path
This field allows you to specify a directory for

making the building of a custom path easier. You
can type the path manually or choose the path
from a Browse dialog by clicking the ellipsis (...)
button.
Path Format
This field allows you to build up the Path option

by placing the pieces of the path together as
symbols. These can include the root path, the
project directory, etc. You can type the path
manually and use predefined attributes from the
menu accessed with the [>] button..
Path
Displays a dynamically updated view of the

custom result file path based on the settings in the
Root Path and Path Format fields. This field is not
editable.
Pipe Length
Round Pipe Length to

Nearest
When this box is checked, the program will round

to the nearest unit specified in this field when
calculating scaled pipe length.
Results Files and the Temp Directory

When you compute, the generated result files are stored in the [temp]\Bentley\SewerGEMS V8i directory, where [temp] is the temporary directory for the current user. If
the user saves this model, the result files are, by default, copied from the temp directory to the model's directory. When a model is opened, the result files are copied from
the model directory to the temp directory, where they are opened from. When a model
is closed, the model and result files are deleted from the temp directory. However in
some rare cases if an error occurs, the files may not be deleted. It is therefore good
practice to periodically delete all files from the [temp]\Bentley\SewerGEMS V8i
directory, but only when SewerGEMS V8i is not running.
4-180
Starting a Project
Options Dialog Box - Drawing Tab

This tab contains drawing layout and display settings. You can set the scale that you
want to use as the finished drawing scale for the plan view output. Drawing scale is
based upon engineering judgment and the destination sheet sizes to be used in the final
presentation. The Drawing tab contains the following controls:
Drawing Scale Settings
Drawing Mode
Drop-down list that lets you select either Scaled or

Schematic mode for models in the drawing pane.
Horizontal Scale
Factor 1 in. =:
Controls the scale of the plan view. This value

affects the text height when printing-to-scale and
does not affect the scaled length or area results.
Annotation Multipliers Settings
Symbol Size Mulitplier
Increases or decreases the size of your symbols by

the factor indicated. For example, a multiplier of 2
would result in the symbol size being doubled.
The program selects a default symbol height that
corresponds to 4.0 ft. (approximately 1.2 m) in
actual-world units, regardless of scale.
Text Height Multiplier
Increases or decreases the default size of the text

associated with element labeling by the factor
indicated. The program automatically selects a
default text height that displays at approximately
2.5 mm (0.1 in) high at the user-defined drawing
scale. A scale of 1.0 mm = 0.5 m, for example,
results in a text height of approximately 1.25 m.
Likewise, a 1 in. = 40 ft. scale equates to a text
height of around 4.0 ft.
Pipe Text Setting
Align Text with Pipes
Turns text alignment on and off. When this check

box is selected, labels are aligned to their
associated pipes. When the check box is cleared,
labels are displayed horizontally near the center of
the associated pipe.
Color Element
Annotations
When this box is checked, color coding settings

are applied to the element annotation.
4-181
Setting Options
Options Dialog Box - Units Tab

The Units tab lets you modify the unit settings for the current project. The Units tab
contains the following controls:
4-182
Save As
Lets you save the current unit settings as a separate

.xml file. This file allows you to reuse your Units
settings in another project. When the button is clicked,
a Windows Save As dialog box appears, allowing you
to enter a name and specify the directory location of
the .xml file.
Load
Lets you load a previously created Units project .xml

file, thereby transferring the unit and format settings
that were defined in the previous project. When the
button is clicked, a Windows Load dialog box appears,
allowing you to browse to the location of the desired
.xml file.
Reset Defaults - SI
Resets the unit and formatting settings to the original

factory defaults for the System International (Metric)
system.
Reset Defaults - US
Resets the unit and formatting settings to the original

factory defaults for the Imperial (U.S.) system.
Default Unit System

for New Project
Lets you specify the unit system that is used globally

across the project. Note that you can locally change
any number of attributes to use system other than the
one specified here.
Starting a Project
Units Table
The units table contains the following columns:
LabelDisplays the parameter measured by the

unit.
UnitDisplays the type of measurement. To

change the unit of an attribute type, click the
choice list and click the unit you want. This option
also allows you to use both U.S. customary and SI
units in the same worksheet.
Display PrecisionSets the rounding of

numbers and number of digits displayed after the
decimal point. Enter a negative number for
rounding to the nearest power of 10: (-1) rounds to
10, (-2) rounds to 100, (-3) rounds to 1000, and so
on. Enter a number from 0 to 15 to indicate the
number of digits after the decimal point.
Format MenuLets you select the display format

used by the current field. Choices include:
ScientificConverts the entered value to a

string of the form "-d.ddd...E+ddd" or "d.ddd...e+ddd", where each 'd' indicates a
digit (0-9). The string starts with a minus sign
if the number is negative.
Fixed PointAbides by the display precision

setting, and automatically enters zeros after
the decimal place to do so. With a display
precision of 3, an entered value of 3.5
displays as 3.500.
GeneralTruncates any zeros after the

decimal point, regardless of the display precision value. With a display precision of 3, the
value that would appear as 5.200 in Fixed
Point format displays as 5.2 when using
General format. The number is also rounded.
So, an entered value of 5.35 displays as 5.4,
regardless of the display precision.
NumberConverts the entered value to a

string of the form "-d,ddd,ddd.ddd...", where
each 'd' indicates a digit (0-9). The string
starts with a minus sign if the number is negative. Thousand separators are inserted
between each group of three digits to the left
of the decimal point.
4-183
Setting Options
Options Dialog Box - Labeling Tab

The Element Labeling tab is used to specify the automatic numbering format of new
elements as they are added to the network. You can save your settings to an .xml file
for later use. The Element Labeling tab contains the following controls:
4-184
Save As
Lets you save your element labeling settings to an

element label project file, which is an. xml file.
Load
Lets you open an existing element label project

file.
Reset
Fills in the Next column for each element based

on the labels already used in the model and the
increment value that has been set. So, for example,
if the model contains conduits CO-1, CO-2, and
CO-3 and the Increment value is 1, clicking Reset
will fill in the Next column with CO-4 for the
Conduit row.
Starting a Project
Labeling Table
The labeling table contains the following columns:
ElementShows the type of element to

which the label applies.
OnLets you turn automatic element labeling

on and off for the associated element type.
NextThe integer you want to use as the

starting value for the ID number portion of the
label. Bentley SewerGEMS V8i generates
labels beginning with this number and
chooses the first available unique label.
IncrementThe integer that is added to the

ID number after each element is created to
yield the number for the next element.
PrefixThe letters or numbers that appear in

front of the ID number for the elements in your
network.
DigitsThe minimum number of digits that

the ID number has. For instance, 1, 10, and
100 with a digit setting of two would be 01, 10,
and 100.
SuffixThe letters or numbers that appear

after the ID number for the elements in your
network.
PreviewLets you see what the label looks

like, based on the information you have
entered in the previous fields.
Options Dialog Box - ProjectWise Tab

Note:
These settings affect ProjectWise users only.
The ProjectWise tab contains options for using SewerGEMS V8i with ProjectWise.
4-185
Setting Options
This tab contains the following controls:
Default Datasource
Displays the current ProjectWise datasource. If

you have not yet logged into a datasource, this
field will display <login>. To change the
datasource, click the Ellipsis (...) button to open
the Change Datasource dialog box. If you click
Cancel after you have changed the default
datasource, the new default datasource is retained.
Update server on Save
When this is checked, any time you save your

SewerGEMS V8i project locally using the File >
Save menu command, the files on your
ProjectWise server will also be updated and all
changes to the files will immediately become
visible to other ProjectWise users. This option is
turned off by default.
Note:
This option, when turned on,

can significantly affect
performance, especially for
large, complex projects.
For more information about using SewerGEMS V8i with ProjectWise, see Using
ProjectWise on page 4-187.
4-186
Starting a Project
Using ProjectWise
Bentley ProjectWise provides managed access to SewerGEMS V8i content within a
workgroup, across a distributed organization, or among collaborating professionals.
When ProjectWise is integrated with SewerGEMS V8i, project files can be accessed
quickly, checked out for use, and checked back in directly from within SewerGEMS
V8i.
If ProjectWise is installed on your system, SewerGEMS V8i automatically installs all
the components necessary for you to use ProjectWise to store and share your SewerGEMS V8i projects.
To learn more about ProjectWise, refer to the ProjectWise online help.
To learn more about using ProjectWise with SewerGEMS V8i, see the following
topics:
General Guidelines for using ProjectWise on page 4-187
Performing ProjectWise Operations on page 4-192
General Guidelines for using ProjectWise

Setting up ProjectWise integration for Standalone
In Standalone, ProjectWise integration is enabled using an xml file. The default xml
file is located at the following locations:
For Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Bentley\<appname>\8\ProjectWiseIntegrationLocalOptions.xml
For Windows Vista/7: C:\ProgramData\Bentley\<appname>\8\ProjectWiseIntegrationLocalOptions.xml
This file applies to all users. If the ProjectWise configuration varies among users on
the same machine, a user specific version of the file can be copied into the following
directory, which if present will override the file from the All Users directory.
For Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\<username>\Local Settings\Application Data\Bentley\<appname>\8\ ProjectWiseIntegrationLocalOptions.xml
For Windows Vista/7: C:\Users\<username>\AppData\Local\Bentley\<appname>\8\ ProjectWiseIntegrationLocalOptions.xml
The file must be edited manually to change the configuration. The xml file has two
entries.
4-187
Using ProjectWise
PWDIR/PWDIR64: Set either of them to point to the local directory where a compatible ProjectWise Explorer is installed. If the directory is not set or is invalid then
ProjectWise integration is considered to be disabled.
UseCaptiveEnvironment: This flag can be set to true or false.
If set to true and project file is opened from ProjectWise, then all subsequent
prompt (file open/save dialog) during application interaction is to/from ProjectWise Only.
If set to false and project is opened from ProjectWise, then all subsequent prompt
shows ProjectWise dialog first. Upon canceling ProjectWise dialog, a local file
dialog is opened.
If set to false and project is opened locally, then settings doesn't have any affect.
The subsequent prompt are always local referring to local files.
Working with ProjectWise in Standalone

Once the integration is enabled, user has the following options to perform on ProjectWise.
Login to ProjectWise: The first prompt that user gets during ProjectWise interaction is to log into a ProjectWise datasource.
The datasource the users log into remains the current datasource until you change
it from Tools > Options >ProjectWise > ellipsis button.
4-188
Creating a new Project: Use File > New command to create a new project. The
project is not stored in ProjectWise until you select File > Save. User is prompted
to save the project on ProjectWise. Upon cancel, the user is given an option to
save project locally.
Starting a Project
Opening a Project: Use File > Open command shows ProjectWise prompt first
to open a project from ProjectWise. Upon cancel, local prompt is given to open a
project locally. The user can quickly tell whether or not the current project is in
ProjectWise or not by looking at the title bar and the status bar of the window. If
the current project is in ProjectWise, "pwname://" will appear in front of the file
name in the title bar, and a ProjectWise icon will appear on the far right side of the
status bar.
Saving a Project: Use File > Save command to save a copy of the current project
to either on ProjectWise or locally, depends upon from where it was opened in the
first place.
Saving a local project to ProjectWise:
Select File > Save As.
If you haven't already logged into ProjectWise, you are prompted to do so.
Select a ProjectWise datasource, type your ProjectWise user name and password, then click Log in.
In the ProjectWise Save Document dialog box, enter the following information:
Click Select next to the Folder field, then select a folder in the current ProjectWise datasource in which to store your project.
Type the name of your SewerGEMS V8i project in the Name field. We recommend that you keep the ProjectWise name the same as or as close to the
SewerGEMS V8i project name as possible.
Keep the default entries for the rest of the fields in the dialog box
Click Save.
To copy an open project from one ProjectWise datasource to another:
Select File > Open to open a project stored in ProjectWise.
Select File > Change Datasource.
In the ProjectWise Log in dialog box, select a different ProjectWise datasource, then click Log in.
Select Tools > Options->ProjectWise and click ellipsis button.
A prompt is appeared to change to other available Datasource.
Click OK to change the default DataSource. User is asked to log in to ProjectWise.
OK to close Options dialog.
In the File-> Save, change information about the project as required, then
click OK.
To make a local copy of a project stored in a ProjectWise datasource:
4-189
Using ProjectWise
Select File > Open.
If the user hasn't already logged into ProjectWise, he is prompted to do so.

Select a ProjectWise datasource, type ProjectWise user name and password,
then click Log in.
Select File > Save As.
Cancel ProjectWise Save As dialog.
Save the project to a folder on local computer
To change the default ProjectWise datasource:
Start program .
Select Tools->Options > Change Datasource.
In the ProjectWise Log in dialog box, type the name of ProjectWise datasource to log into, then click Log in
Closing a Project::
When you Close a project already stored in ProjectWise using File > Close, you
are prompted to select one of the following options:
4-190
Check In-Updates the project in ProjectWise with your latest changes and
unlocks the project so other ProjectWise users can edit it.
Unlock-Unlocks the project so other ProjectWise users can edit it but does not
update the project in ProjectWise. Note that this will abandon any changes
you have made since the last server update.
Leave Out-Leaves the project checked out so others cannot edit it and retains
any changes you have made since the last server update to the files on your
local computer. Select this option if you want to exit but continue working on
the project later.
Importing files: User can also import files (e.g. Submodel, SWMM, LandXML,
InRoads, etc) before any model is opened from File > Import. These import
prompts will refer to files saved using ProjectWise simply based on if ProjectWise
integration is enabled. The model that is created during this import is considered
as a local model unless and until it is saved to ProjectWise.
Updating Server copy: In the Tools > Options dialog box, there is a ProjectWise
tab with the Update server on Save check box. This option, when turned on, can
significantly affect performance, especially for large, complex projects. When this
is checked, any time you save your project locally using the File > Save menu
command, the files on the ProjectWise server will also be updated and all changes
to the files will immediately become visible to other ProjectWise users. This
option is turned off by default.
Opening a recent file: Projects associated with ProjectWise appear in the Most
Recently Used Files list (at the bottom of the File menu) in the following format:
pwname://PointServer:_TestDatasource/Documents/TestFolder/example.stsw
Starting a Project
Working with background layers:
Using File > Save As-If there are background files, the user is prompted with
two options, the user can copy the background layer files to the project folder
for use by the project, or remove the background references and manually
reassign them once the project is in ProjectWise to other existing ProjectWise
documents.
Using File > Open-This works the same as the normal Open command,
except that background layer files are not locked in ProjectWise for the
current user to edit. The files are intended to be shared with other users at the
same time.
To add a background layer file reference to a project that exists in Project

Wise-The ProjectWise Select Document dialog box opens, and user can
choose any existing ProjectWise document. The user must have previously
added these background layer files as described in the first bullet above, or by
using the ProjectWise Explorer.
When a user removes a background layer file reference from a project that
exists in ProjectWise, the reference to the file is removed but the file itself is
not deleted from ProjectWise.
Using File > Save As-When the user uses File > Save As on a project that is
already in ProjectWise and there are background layer files, the user
prompted with two options: copy all the files to the local project folder for use
by the project, or remove the background references and manually reassign
them after the project locally is saved locally.
In the SELECTseries release, calculation result files are not managed inside ProjectWise. A local copy of results is maintained on the local computer, but to ensure accurate results, the user should recalculate projects when the user first opens them from
ProjectWise.
Considerations for ProjectWise Users

Bentley ProjectWise provides managed access to model content within a workgroup,
across a distributed organization, or among collaborating professionals. When ProjectWise is integrated with a model product such as SewerGEMS V8i, project files can be
accessed quickly, checked out for use, and checked back in directly from within
SewerGEMS V8i.
If ProjectWise is installed, the installation automatically installs all the components
necessary for you to use ProjectWise to store and share projects.
To learn more about ProjectWise, refer to the ProjectWise online help.
To learn more about using ProjectWise with hydraulic model, see the following
topics:
4-191
Importing Data From Other Models

General Guidelines for using ProjectWise on page 4-187
Using ProjectWise with Bentley SewerGEMS V8i for AutoCAD

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i for AutoCAD maintains a one to one relationship between
the AutoCAD drawing (.dwg) and the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i project file. When
using ProjectWise with this data, we recommend that you create a Set in the ProjectWise Explorer. Included in this set should be the AutoCAD drawing (example.dwg),
the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i database (example.stsw.mdb), the Bentley SewerGEMS
V8i project file (example.stsw), and optionally for stand-alone, the stand-alone
drawing setting file (example.stsw.dwh).
If you use the Set and the ProjectWise Explorer for all of your check-in / check-out
procedures, you will maintain the integrity of this relationship. We recommended that
you do not use the default ProjectWise integration in AutoCAD, as this will only work
with the .dwg file.
Using ProjectWise with Bentley SewerGEMS V8i for MicroStation

When using ProjectWise with a MicroStation SewerGEMS V8i project, we recommend that you create a Set in the ProjectWise Explorer. Included in this set should be
the MicroStation drawing (example.dgn), the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i database
(example.stsw.mdb), the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i project file (example.stsw), and
optionally for stand-alone, the stand-alone drawing setting file (example.stsw.dwh).
If you use the Set and the ProjectWise Explorer for all of your check-in / check-out
procedures, you will maintain the integrity of this relationship. We recommended that
you do not use the default ProjectWise integration in MicroStation, as this will only
work with the .dgn file.

Click one of the following links to learn more:
4-192
Importing Data from SWMM V5 on page 4-193
Importing a Submodel on page 4-198
IImporting Data from Bentley Wastewater on page 4-195
Importing a Bentley InRoads Storm and Sanitary V8i Model into SewerGEMS
V8i on page 4-199
Importing from LandXML on page 4-218
Starting a Project
Importing Data from SWMM V5

You can import data from a SWMM model into SewerGEMS V8i.
To import SWMM data into SewerGEMS V8i:
1. Click the File menu and select Import > SWMM v5.
2. In the Select SWMM 5 File to Import dialog, browse to the .inp file for the
SWMM model you are importing. Highlight the file and click the Open button.
Flow Dividers
SewerGEMS V8i imports SWMM Flow Dividers by taking the properties associated
with the SWMM flow divider nodes and applying them to a set of conduit properties
for diversion links. These properties are located under the Diversion heading of the
Conduit Properties grid:
4-193

Conduits with a diversion are marked in the drawing pane with a symbol as shown in
the screenshot below:
Importing Pressure Pipes

The following rules and considerations govern the importing of pressure pipe
elements from SWMM:
Import Rules
1. All Conduits of the type force main will be imported as pressure pipes regardless of their position in the SWMM network.
2. A SWMM junction is converted to a pressure junction if all bounding links are
pressure links. Pressure links are as follows:
a. Conduits of shape force main.
b. SWMM pump links.
3. If a catchment is emptying into a SWMM junction, that junction will be turned
into a manhole regardless of its position in the system. A user notification will be
generated.
4. On the import of a SWMM pump link, two links are created to connect the pump
node to the system:
a. If the discharge node is a pressure junction - two virtual pressure links are
created;
b. Otherwise two virtual conduits are created.
Pressure Pipe Considerations
4-194
Diameter directly translates.
Starting a Project
The roughness value will be entered into Manning's, DarcyWeisbach, or Hazen

Williams depending on which SWMM Pressure Roughness method is selected in
the calculation options.
Number of Barrels data is NOT imported.
Presssure Junction Considerations
The invert directly translates.
Inflow and Sanitary Flows are directly translated.
Ground Elevation will equal Max Depth + Invert
RDII flow data will NOT be imported.
Importing Data from Bentley Wastewater

You can import data from a Bentley Wastewater data source into SewerGEMS V8i.
Before importing this data into SewerGEMS V8i, you must first export it from
Bentley Wastewater into a set of output files. These output files can then be imported
into a SewerGEMS V8i model.
To export Bentley Wastewater data to a set of output files:
1. In the Bentley Wastewater toolbar, click the Export > Data command.
2. In the dialog that appears, select all of the listed element types.
3. Click the File button and select a destination output file.
4. Use the MicroStation Place Fence tool and draw a fence surrounding the model.
5. Click on the Start button in the Export Data dialog and click inside the fence you
created in step 4.
To import Bentley Wastewater data into SewerGEMS V8i from a set of output
files:
1. In SewerGEMS V8i, click the File menu and select the Import > Bentley Wastewater Import command.
2. Follow the steps in the Bentley Wastewater Import Wizard that appears.
Bentley Wastewater Import Wizard

The Bentley Wastewater Import Wizard will guide you through the process of configuring the settings needed to import the data contained in the Bentley Wastewater
output files into a SewerGEMS V8i model.
The wizard consists of the following steps:
4-195
Step 1: Bentley Wastewater Import on page 4-196
Step 2: Bentley Wastewater Data Source on page 4-196
Step 3: Data Source Table Names on page 4-197
Step 4: Unit Options on page 4-197
Step 5: Import Options on page 4-198
Step 1: Bentley Wastewater Import

This step displays the filename and directory location of the target SewerGEMS V8i
model for the import operation. No user input is required for this step.
RELATED TOPICS
Bentley Wastewater Import Wizard on page 4-195
Step 2: Bentley Wastewater Data Source

This step allows you to specify the data source and geometry file that contains the
Bentley Wastewater data to be imported.
The step consists of the following controls:
Select A Data Source TypeThis control consists of two pulldown menus. The
value selected in the first pulldown menu will determine the choices available in the
second menu. For most of the Data Source Types, only one option will be available in
the second menu. When the OLEDB data source type is chosen, the second menu will
contain a number of OLEDB database types.
Select Data SourceThis control allows you to choose the data source of the type
selected in the Select A Data Source Type menus. Click the Browse button to bring up
an Open dialog that will allow you to specify the data source.
Select Geometry Data FileThis control allows you to choose the .dat file that
contains the Bentley Wastewater geometry data. Click the Browse button to bring up
an Open dialog that will allow you to specify the data file.
4-196
Starting a Project
Note:
The Select Geometry Data File field is optional. If the user

wishes to import pipe geometry data which contains the pipe
vertices (bends) into the model, then this field should point to
the data file that can be created during the export pipe geometry
data process. However, if the user chooses not to import
geometry data, this field can be left blank and the pipes will be
imported without any bends associated with them.
Update only the elements specified in the geometry data fileWhen this box is
checked, only data for those elements contained within the specified geometry data
file will be imported. This option allows you to import just a subset of the original
Bentley Wastewater model.
Step 3: Data Source Table Names
This step allows you to specify the tables within the Bentley Wastewater data source
that correspond to the various SewerGEMS V8i element types. Each of the menus in
this step allow you to choose a database table that contains the data for each of the
associated elements.
Step 4: Unit Options

This step allows you to define the units used for various attributes of the model and
the network elements. The units specified should match those used in the Bentley
Wastewater model being imported.
4-197

Step 5: Import Options
This step allows you to specify other options that will be applied to the SewerGEMS
V8i model. The menu allows you to specify the friction method that will be used.
Bentley Wastewater models can contain point nodes. If the checkbox in this step is
checked, these point nodes will be imported as SewerGEMS V8i manhole elements.
Importing Data from SewerCAD on page 4-204
Importing a Submodel
Using the Submodel Import feature, you can import another model, or any portion
thereof, into your project. Input data stored in the Alternatives as well as any
supporting data will also be imported. It is important to notice that existing elements
in the model you want to import the submodel into (i.e. the target model) will be
matched with incoming elements by using their label. Incoming input data will override existing data in the target model for any element matched by its label. That also
applies to scenarios, alternatives, calculation options and supporting data. Furthermore, any element in the incoming submodel that could not be matched with any
existing element by their label, will be created in the target model.
For example, the submodel you want to import contains input data that you would like
to transfer in two Physical Alternatives named "Smaller Pipes" and "Larger Pipes".
The target model contains only one Physical Alternative named "Larger Pipes". In that
case, the input data in the alternative labeled "Larger Pipes" in the submodel will
replace the alternative with the same name in the target model. Moreover, the alternative labeled "Smaller Pipes" as well as its input data will be added to the target model
without replacing any existing data on it because there is no existing alternative with
the same label. Notice that imported elements will be assigned default values in those
existing alternatives in the target model that could not be matched.
Notice that regular models can be imported as a submodel of a larger model as their
file format and extension are the same.
For more information about input data transfer, see Exporting a Submodel on
page 4-228l.
4-198
Starting a Project
Note:
The label-matching strategy used during submodel import will

be applied to any set of alternatives, including Active Topology
alternatives. Therefore, if no Active Topology alternative stored
in the submodel matches the existing ones in the target model,
the imported elements will preserve their active topology values
in the alternatives created from the submodel, but they will be
left as "Inactive" in those previously existing alternatives in the
target model. That is because the default value for the "Is
Active?" attribute in active topology alternatives other than the
one that is current is "False".
User-defined data is not transferred during submodel import and export operations.
To import a submodel
1. Click the File menu and select Import...Submodel.
2. In the Select Submodel File to Import dialog box, select the submodel file to be
imported. Click the Open button.
Importing a Bentley InRoads Storm and Sanitary V8i Model into

SewerGEMS V8i
The following tables describe how various InRoads element attributes are mapped to
their SewerGEMS V8i counterparts.
4-199
4-200
Note:
You can import an InRoads file to both new and existing

projects; however, you can only import to existing projects that
contain no elements in the model.
Note:
If the SDB file being imported uses imperial units, you will
receive a prompt asking if you want to use Survey Feet as the
unit. If so, the coordinate values for the project are set
appropriately. Conversely, if the display unit on coordinates is
survey feet, then that is what is written to the SDB file on export
(coordinate values only).
Starting a Project
4-201
4-202
Starting a Project
4-203
4-204
Starting a Project
4-205
4-206
Starting a Project
4-207
4-208
Starting a Project
4-209
4-210
Starting a Project
4-211
4-212
Starting a Project
4-213
4-214
Starting a Project
4-215
4-216
Starting a Project
Unsupported Elements During Export

Bentley InRoads doesn't support all of the storm sewer elements. Therefore, certain
elements are ignored during the export to Bentley InRoads. When elements are
ignored, User Notfications are generated for them. Following is the list of such
elements:
Variable Speed Pump Battery
Pump Station
Air Valve
LID
Pond
Pressure Pipe
4-217
Pressure Junction
Cross Section
Pond Outlet Strcuture (exported as manhole)
WetWell (exported as manhole)
InRoads Drainage Import Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to import optional InRoads files and an InRoads Drainage
Database. The dialog consists fo the following controls:
Project Configuration: Allows you to select a project configuration.
Preferences: Click the button to open a browse dialog that allows you to select
the Preferences file (.xin) to be imported. Click the Open Preferences button to
open a browse dialog that allows you to select the Preferences file (.xin) to be
imported.
Structures: Click the button to open a browse dialog that allows you to select the
Structures file (.dat) to be imported. Click the Open Structures button to open a
browse dialog that allows you to select the Structures file (.dat) to be imported.
Rainfall Data: Click the button to open a browse dialog that allows you to select
the Rainfall Data file (.idf) to be imported. Click the Open Rainfall Data button to
open a browse dialog that allows you to select the Rainfall Data file (.idf) to be
imported.
InRoads Drainage Database: Click the button to open a browse dialog that
allows you to select the InRoads Drainage Database file (.sdb) to be imported.
Click the Open InRoads File button to open a browse dialog that allows you to
select the InRoads Drainage Database file (.sdb) to be imported.
Importing from LandXML

You can import a model from a LandXML format .xml file. LandXML is a nonproprietary data standard for the persistence of civil engineering and survey measurement data commonly used in the Land Development and Transportation Industries.
SewerGEMS V8i utilizes the PipeNetworks functionality of the LandXML file.
SewerGEMS V8i is primarily concerned with the overall physical structure and
connectivity of the pipe network; hence some of the available hydrologic and
hydraulic data necessary for a hydraulic analysis is not transferred during export/
import.
4-218
Starting a Project
To import a LandXML .xml file:
1. Select File > Import > LandXML.
2. In the Select LandXML File to Import dialog, browse to the LandXML file to be
imported, highlight it, and click Open.
Note:
You can import a LandXML file to both new and existing

projects; however, you can only import to existing projects that
contain no elements in the model.
LandXML Attribute Mappings

The following topic describes how various LandXML element attributes are mapped
to their SewerGEMS V8i counterparts.
LandXML Import
Structs
Structs are either imported as Transitions or Gravity Junctions depending on the
following subelements it contains.
Struct.Connection > Becomes a CrosSection
Struct.RectStruct > Becomes a rectangular gravity junction whose shape parameters are based on:
Struct.RectStruct.Length
Struct.RectStruct.Width
Struct.CircStruct > Becomes a circular gravity junction whose shape parameter is

based on:
Struct.CircStruct.diameter.
Pipes
All pipes are brought in as gravity conduits.
LandXML Export
Catchments
Ponds are ignored.
Gravity Junction (CatchBasins or Manholes)
4-219
Circular > Struct.CircStruct
Diameter > Struct.CircStruct.diameter
Box > Struct.RectStruct
Length > Struct.RectStruct.Length
Width > Struct.RectStruct.Width
Elevation (Invert) > Struct.elevSump
Elevation (Rim) > Struct.elevRim
Hydraulic Grade Line (In) > Struct.StructFlow.hglIn
Hydraulic Grade Line (Out) > Struct.StructFlow.hglOut
CrossSection > Struct.Connection
Elevation (Top) > Struct.elevRim
Hydraulic Grade Line > Struct.StructFlow.hglIn
Hydraulic Grade Line > Struct.StructFlow.hglOut
PondOutletStructure > Struct.Connection
Elevation (Top) > Struct.elevRim
Outfall > Struct.OutletStruct
Elevation (Rim) > Struct.elevRim
Wet Well > Struct.Connection
4-220
Elevation (Minimum) > Struct.elevSump
Elevation (Maximum) > Struct.elevRim
Starting a Project
Conduit
Start ID > Pipe.refEnd
Stop ID > Pipe.refStart
Length (Unified) > Pipe.length
Slope > Pipe.slope
Circular > Pipe.CircPipe
Diameter > Pipe.CircPipe.Diameter
HazenWilliams > Pipe.CircPipe.hazenWilliams
Mannings > Pipe.CircPipe.mannings
Material > Pipe.CircPipe.material
Ellipse > Pipe.ElliPipe
Rise > Pipe.ElliPipe.height
Span > Pipe.ElliPipe.span
HazenWilliams > Pipe. ElliPipe.hazenWilliams
Mannings > Pipe. ElliPipe.mannings
Material > Pipe. ElliPipe.material
Rectangular > Pipe.RectPipe
Rise > Pipe. RectPipe.height
Span > Pipe.RectPipe.width
HazenWilliams > Pipe. RectPipe.hazenWilliams
Mannings > Pipe. RectPipe.mannings
Material > Pipe. RectPipe.material
Trapezoidal > Pipe.Channel
Rise > Pipe.Pipe.Channel.height
Bottom Width > Pipe.PipeChannel.widthBottom
Pipe.PipeChannel.widthTop is computed based on rise, side slopes and

bottom width.
HazenWilliams > Pipe. PipeChannel.hazenWilliams
4-221
Mannings > Pipe. PipeChannel.mannings
Material > Pipe. PipeChannel.material
Flow > Pipe.PipeFlow.FlowIn
Hydraulic Grade Line (In) > Pipe.PipeFlow.hglUp
Hydraulic Grade Line (Out) > Pipe.PipeFlow.hglOut
Channels are exported as trapezoidal conduits

Gutters are ignored.
Pressure Pipes are not supported
Pump > Struct.Connection
Elevation > Struct.elevSump
Elevation (Ground) > Struct.elevRim
Hydraulic Grade (Intake) > Struct.StructFlow.hglIn
Hydraulic Grade (Discharge) > Struct.StructFlow.hglOut
Note:
Units
The units landxml project will be exported based on the unit
system for new projects attribute in the project options dialog.
Import / Export Bentley MX Drainage (LandXML Format)

Note Bentley MX Drainage import/export is the same as the LandXML import/export
(see Importing from LandXML on page 4-218 and Exporting to LandXML on
page 4-229) with the following additional properties read and written.
LandXML Feature Additions to Support Bentley MX

Custom Attributes
LandXML supports "extra" data to be added to the file via a Feature element. A
feature element may contain any number of properties. These properties are defined
below for each of our different Element Types in StormCAD.
Example of a custom attribute in LandXML:
For a "carryoverflow" custom attribute, the data should be written like this:
<Feature code="Bentley Drainage">
4-222
Starting a Project
<Property label="carryoverflow" value="0.005"/>
</Feature>
Sample:
<Watershed name="I-4 Catchment" area="13939.2000047138">
<PntList2D>577.824884792627 260.035263474254 587.824884792627
260.035263474254 587.824884792627 270.035263474254 577.824884792627
270.035263474254</PntList2D>
<Property label="TimeOfConcentration" value="5.000000"/>
<Property label="PerviousPercentage" value="0.000000"/>
<Property label="PerviousRationalC" value="1.000000"/>
<Property label="PerviousRoughnessC" value="0.150000"/>
4-223

<Property label="PerviousConnection" value="Pipe"/>
<Property label="ImperviousPercentage" value="100.000000"/>
<Property label="ImperviousRationalC" value="1.000000"/>
<Property label="ImperviousRoughnessC" value="0.017000"/>
<Property label="ImperviousConnection" value="Inlet"/>
<Property label="OutflowNetwork" value="Network 1"/>
<Property label="OutflowNode" value="SEP-1"/>
</Feature>
</Watershed>
Sample:
<Struct name="I-6" elevRim="320.78" elevSump="315.015" oID="4" desc="">
<Center>482.332197956321 483.378080544981</Center>
<InletStruct />
<Property label="externalcarea" value="43560.0000147306" />
<Property label="externaltc" value="5" />
<Property label="additionalflow" value="3" />
4-224
Starting a Project
</Feature>
<Invert refPipe="P-4" elev="315.015" flowDir="in" />
<Invert refPipe="P-8" elev="315.015" flowDir="out" />
<Invert refPipe="P-9" elev="315.015" flowDir="in" />
</Struct>
Circular Inlets:
Diameter
Rectangular Inlets:
Length
Width
Gully connection pipes:

These are written in the same format as any other pipe. The "<Pipe name=" attribute
needs to be "Gully Connection Pipe <gully number>". Gully pipes in MX connect
directly to a pipe. Since both StormCAD and the LandXML format require a node
connection at both ends of a pipe, the gully pipe definition in this file format will
connect to the upstream node.
4-225
Exporting Data
Depending on the sump of the upstream node and the invert elevations of the gully
pipe, StormCAD may issue a warning if the invert is lower than the sump.
Exporting Data
You can export your SewerGEMS V8i data as a SWMM .INP file, you can export all
or a part of a model as a submodel, or export the graphical representation of your
model as a .DXF file.
Exporting a .DXF File on page 4-226
Exporting a Submodel on page 4-228
Exporting to SWMM 5 on page 4-227
Exporting to Bentley InRoads Storm and Sanitary V8i on page 4-228
Exporting to Shapefile on page 4-229
Exporting to LandXML on page 4-229
Exporting a .DXF File

A project can be saved in .dxf format for use by AutoCAD and other CAD-based
applications. When you use the Export command, you first specify the drive, directory, and file name of the .DXF file to be saved; then the Export to DXF Layer
Settings window opens, allowing you specify the names of the .dxf layers on a perelement type basis.
4-226
Starting a Project
The Export to DXF Layer Settings dialog is divided into tabs for Link Layers, Node
Layers, and Polygon Layers.
Each tab contains a table that allows you to specify a prefix and suffix for the associated dxf layer. The Preview field displays how the label will appear.
Note that specifying a prefix or suffix also creates new layers for each prefix/suffix. If
no prefix or suffix is specified all links/nodes/polygons will be exported to the same
DXF layer.
The Link Layers tab has additional controls: Entering a value in the Pipe Size Significant Digits field allows you to organize the pipe layer into multiple layers taking the
pipe sizes into account using the Layer by Pipe Size checkbox.
Exporting to SWMM 5
You can export your SewerGEMS V8i model data to a SWMM 5 .INP file.
To export the current project to a SWMM 5 file:
1. Select File > Export > SWMM v5.
2. In the Select SWMM v5 File to Export dialog that appears, browse to the directory that you want to save the file to.
3. Type the name of the .INP file, then click Save.
4-227
Exporting Data
Note:
Only catchments using the EPA SWMM Runoff Method will be

exported using this command.
Exporting a Submodel
You can export any portion of a model as a submodel for import into other projects.
Input data is also stored in the file that is created in the process of Exporting a
Submodel. This input data will be imported following a label-matching strategy for
any element, alternative, scenario, calculation option or supporting data in the
submodel. For more information about input data transfer, see Importing a
Submodel on page 4-198.
To export a submodel
1. In the drawing view, highlight the elements to be exported as a submodel. To
highlight multiple elements, hold down the Shift key while clicking elements.
2. Click the File menu and select Export...Submodel.
3. In the Select Submodel File to Export dialog box, specify the directory to which
the file should be saved, enter a name for the submodel and click the Save button.
Note:
User-defined data is not transferred during submodel import and

export operations.
Exporting to Bentley InRoads Storm and Sanitary V8i

You can export your SewerGEMS V8i model data to a InRoads Drainage file (.sdb).
Note:
If the model has conduits with user defined lengths, the InRoads
plan length will be set to the SewerGEMS V8i pipe length.
To export the current project to an InRoads Drainage file:

1. Select File > Export > InRoads.
2. In the Export to InRoads dialog that appears, browse to the directory that you
want to save the file to.
3. Type the name of the .sdb file, then click Save.
4-228
Starting a Project
Exporting to Shapefile
It is possible to export model elements and data to create a shapefile. Unlike the other
export features in SewerGEMS V8i, the export to shapefile operation occurs in a
FlexTable as opposed to the File > Export menu. Shapefiles must be created one
element type at a time. That means there will be a separate shapefile to junctions,
pipes, tanks, etc.
To create a shapefile, open the FlexTable for the type of element. Use selection sets or
filtering to reduce the size of the FlexTable to what is desired in the shapefile. Use the
table edit feature to eliminate any columns that are not desired.
When the FlexTable is in the correct form, pick the first button at the top left of the
table which is the Export button. A drop down list will appear, pick Export to Shapefile. The user is asked for the name of shapefile and path. When the user names the file
and hits Save, the dialog below appears.
It is important to ensure that any shapefile field names are less than or equal to 10
characters. The default name for shapefile field is the name of the column in the
FlexTable. (If the user changes the name to something different from the FlexTable
column name, the editor remembers it when other shapefiles are created from this
table.) Once the names are acceptable, hit OK to create the shapefile. A shapefile
consisting of .dbf, .shx and .shp files are created.
Exporting to LandXML
You can export a model to LandXML format. See Importing from LandXML on
page 4-218 and LandXML Attribute Mappings on page 4-219 for information about
the data that will be exported.
4-229
Long Term Continuous Simulations in SewerGEMS V8i Using the SWMM Engine
To export the current project to a LandXML .xml file:
1. Select File > Export > LandXML.
2. Type the name of the xml file , then click Save.
You may now open the .xml file in another program.
Long Term Continuous Simulations in SewerGEMS

V8i Using the SWMM Engine
SewerGEMS V8i can now more easily leverage SWMM's ability to run simulations
over very long durations (years vs. days). Here are few notes to keep in mind when
attempting to work through the process.
Rainfall
Commonly, Long Term Continuous Simulations (LTCS) are used to test sewer models
with many years worth of rainfall data.
Note:
SWMM/Explicit engine runs are limited to a maximum of 68

years.
Although, you can manually enter in this data directly into the Storm Data Group
Library, CivilStorm and SewerGEMS now have the capability to reference external
rainfall files when using the SWMM engine. This functionality eliminates the necessity of entering years worth of rainfall data into the CivilStorm/SewerGEMS Storm
Libraries and allows you to directly access rainfall stored in many common formats
including:
DSI-3240
DSI-3260
HLY03, HLY21
FIF21
And a generic SWMM specific format which works as follows where each line of
the file contains the station ID, year, month, day, hour, minute, and non-zero
precipitation reading, all separated by one or more spaces.
STA01 2004 6 12 00 00 0.12
STA01 2004 6 12 01 00 0.04
STA01 2004 6 22 16 00 0.07
4-230
Starting a Project
For more information on how SWMM utilizes external rain files see the SWMM user
manual section 11.3 at: http://www.epa.gov/ednnrmrl/models/swmm/
epaswmm5_user_manual.pdf
When setting up a reference to a rainfall file in the Storm Data dialog, note that not all
data is required for all data types. For example when using the SWMM specific
format, you will need to set the Rain Data File Type, the Station ID and the interval,
for other file types this data may be implicit in the file. Also, if the Rain Data File
contains multiple stations you can create multiple references to the same file, by
clicking the add button in the Rain File Storm Data section.
Note:
Rainfall Files only work when using the SWMM engine.
Runoff Calculations
The SWMM engine only directly supports the EPA-SWMM runoff method when
computing runoff off of catchments. When using other runoff methods, the hydrographs are computed using a separate engine and passed into the SWMM engine as
opposed to the SWMM engine computing the hydrographs directly. Therefore, it is
highly recommended, if not necessary in most cases to use the EPA-SWMM runoff
method when performing a LTCS for these reasons:
1. You will be able to take into account Climate Data, Snow Melt, and Groundwater,
all of which play a more active role in runoff computations over longer durations.
2. When computing the hydrographs independently of SWMM you are restricted to
32,000 points per catchment. This may require you to use larger time steps than
desired to span larger periods of time.
3. If you have many catchments with large number of runoff points, not using the
EPA-SWMM runoff method could overly bloat the SWMM input data.
When running a LTCS with a SewerGEMS V8i model using the SWMM engine, you
can save considerable time during the overall runs by saving the calculated hydrology
data using a Runoff Interface file through the SWMM calc options. This procedure is
useful once catchment and rainfall data has been well established in the model and
only data associated with the sewer needs adjusting. To perform the procedure:
1. In the SWMM Calculation Options change the Runoff File Mode from None to
Save, and select a location to save the Runoff File.
2. Compute the model.
3. Change the Runoff File Mode from Save to Use.
From now on when you compute the model SWMM will use the runoff hydrographs
stored in the Runoff File instead of recomputing them. If any of your catchment or
climate data changes you will need to rebuild the Runoff File.
4-231
Long Term Continuous Simulations in SewerGEMS V8i Using the SWMM Engine
Restricting Results
Running a LTS with the SWMM engine has the potential to generate an unwieldy
amount of results. In some cases it might be worthwhile to restrict results generated to
a few proxy elements then for every element in the model, especially for very large
models over long periods of time. You can do this by setting the Catchments, Nodes,
and Links Results Type in the SWMM calculation options. You can set the type to
either All Results, No Results, or choose a selection set. If the Selection Set is chosen,
results will be generated for elements of the appropriate type in the selection set.
Note:
4-232
Because of the number of time steps in the SWMM-based

simulation, using the LTCS Customization is recommended. See
Property Grid Customizations on page 6-573 for information
about how to use customizations.
Chapter
Using Modelbuilder
ModelBuilder lets you use your existing GIS asset to construct a new Bentley SewerGEMS V8i model or update an existing Bentley SewerGEMS V8i model. ModelBuilder supports a wide variety of data formats, from simple databases (such as
Access and DBase), spreadsheets (such as Excel or Lotus), GIS data (such as shapefiles, coverages, Esri ArcGIS Geodatabases, and ArcGIS Geometric Networks), to
high end data stores (such as Oracle, and SQL Server), and more.
Using ModelBuilder, you map the tables and fields contained within your data source
to element types and attributes in your Bentley SewerGEMS V8i model. The result is
that a Bentley SewerGEMS V8i model is created, either in stand-alone mode or in an
existing ArcMap project.
Note:
ModelBuilder lets you bring a wide range of data into your

model. However, some data is better suited to the use of the
more specialized Bentley SewerGEMS V8i modules. For
instance, LoadBuilder offers many powerful options for
incorporating loading data into your model.
ModelBuilder is the first tool you will use when constructing a model from GIS data.
The steps that you take at the outset will impact how the rest of the process goes. Take
the time now to ensure that this process goes as smoothly and efficiently as possible.
The following topics are included:
Preparing to Use ModelBuilder on page 5-234
ModelBuilder Connections Manager on page 5-235
ModelBuilder Wizard on page 5-237
Reviewing Your Results on page 5-255
Multi-select Data Source Types on page 5-256
ModelBuilder Warnings and Error Messages on page 5-256
Esri ArcGIS Geodatabase Support on page 5-259
Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder on page 5-261
Handling Collection and Curve Data in Modelbuilder on page 5-264
5-233
Preparing to Use ModelBuilder
Preparing to Use ModelBuilder
Determine the purpose of your modelOnce you establish the purpose of your
model, you can start to make decisions about how detailed the model should be.
Get familiar with your dataIf you obtained your GIS data from an outside
source, you should take the time to get acquainted with it. Review spatial and
attribute data directly in your GIS environment. Do the nodes have coordinate
information, and do the pipes have start and stop nodes specified? If not, the best
method of specifying network connectivity must be determined.
Contact those involved in the development of the GIS to learn more about the GIS
tables and associated attributes. Find out the purpose of any fields that may be of
interest, ensure that data is of an acceptable accuracy, and determine units associated with fields containing numeric data.
Ideally, there will be one GIS source data table for each Bentley SewerGEMS V8i
element type. This isnt always the case, and there are two other possible
scenarios:
Many GIS tables for one element typeIn this case, there may be several tables
in the GIS/database corresponding to a single GEMS modeling element . In this
case each data source table must be individually mapped to the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i element, or the tables must be combined into a single table in the GIS/
database before running ModelBuilder.
One GIS table containing many element typesIn this case, there may be
entries that correspond to several Bentley SewerGEMS V8i modeling elements in
one GIS/database table. You should separate these into individual tables before
running ModelBuilder. The one case where a single table can work is when the
features in the table are ArcGIS subtypes. ModelBuilder handles these subtypes
by treating them as separate tables when setting up mappings. See Subtypes on
page 5-261 for more information.
Note:
5-234
If you are working with an ArcGIS data source, see Esri ArcGIS
Geodatabase Support on page 5-259 for additional information.
Preparing your dataWhen using ModelBuilder to get data from your GIS into
your model, you will be associating rows in your GIS to elements in Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i. Your data source needs to contain a Key/Label field that can be
used to uniquely identify every element in your model. The data source tables
should have identifying column labels, or ModelBuilder will interpret the first
row of data in the table as the column labels. Be sure data is in a format suited for
use in ModelBuilder. Use powerful GIS and Database tools to perform Database
Joins, Spatial Joins, and Update Joins to get data into the appropriate table, and in
the desired format.
Using Modelbuilder
Note:
When working with ID fields, the expected model input is the

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i ID. After creating these items in your
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i model, you can obtain the assigned ID
values directly from your Bentley SewerGEMS V8i modeling file.
Before synchronizing your model, get these Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i IDs into your data source table (e.g., by
performing a database join).
One area of difficulty in building a model from GIS data is the fact that unless the GIS
was created solely to support modeling, it most likely contains much more detailed
information than is needed for modeling. This is especially true with regard to the
number of piping elements. It is not uncommon for the GIS to include every service
line and hydrant lateral. Such information is not needed for most modeling applications and should be removed to improve model run time, reduce file size, and save
costs.
ModelBuilder Connections Manager

ModelBuilder is available within both the Stand-Alone and ArcMap client interfaces.
To access the ModelBuilder Connections Manager:
In Stand-Alone: Click the Tools menu and select the ModelBuilder command.
In ArcMap: Click the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i menu, click the Tools menu, then
select the ModelBuilder command.
The ModelBuilder Connections manager allows you to create, edit, and manage
ModelBuilder connections to be used in the model-building/model-synchronizing
process.
At the center of this window is the Connections List which displays the list of
connections that you have defined.
There is a toolbar located along the top of the Connections list.
5-235
ModelBuilder Connections Manager

The set of buttons on the left of the toolbar allow you to manage your connections:
New
Create a new connection using the

ModelBuilder Wizard.
Edit
Edit the selected connection using the

ModelBuilder Wizard.
Rename
Rename the selected connection.
Duplicate
Create a copy of the selected connection.
Delete
Permanently Remove the selected connection.
The button on the right of the toolbar allows you to either build or synchronize
a model. Click the menu arrow associated with this button to access the
following options:
Build New ModelStarts the ModelBuilder build process using the selected
connection. You will be prompted to interactively specify a new filename.
Synchronize Existing ModelStarts the ModelBuilder synchronize process

using the selected connection. You will be prompted to interactively specify an
existing Bentley SewerGEMS V8i model filename.
Note:
If you set up a ModelBuilder mapping to an Access mdb, it

requires a primary key for that table.
After specifying your target, ModelBuilder will perform the selected operation.
During the process, a progress-bar will be displayed indicating the step that ModelBuilder is currently working on.
When ModelBuilder completes, you will be presented with a summary window that
outlines important information about the build process. We recommend that you save
this summary so that you can refer to it later.
5-236
Using Modelbuilder
Specify Datasource Location

This dialog allows you to specify the associated datasource when you import a ModelBuilder connection.file (.mbc). Click the Browse button to open a windows Open
dialog, allowing you to select the datasource.
ModelBuilder Wizard
The ModelBuilder Wizard assists in the creation of ModelBuilder connections. The
Wizard will guide you through the process of selecting your data source and mapping
that data to the desired input of your model.
Tip:
The ModelBuilder Wizard can be resized, making it easier to

preview tables in your data source. In addition, Step 1 and Step 3
of the wizard offer a vertical split bar, letting you adjust the size
of the list located on the left side of these pages.
There are 6 steps involved:
Step 1Specify Data Source on page 5-239
Step 2Specify Spatial Options on page 5-241
Step 3 - Specify Element Create/Remove/Update Options on page 5-243
Step 4Additional Options on page 5-245
Step 5Specify Field mappings for each Table/Feature Class on page 5-248
Step 6Build operation Confirmation on page 5-252
5-237
ModelBuilder Wizard
ModelBuilder Wizard
The ModelBuilder Wizard assists in the creation of ModelBuilder connections. The
Wizard will guide you through the process of selecting your data source and mapping
that data to the desired input of your model.
Tip:
The ModelBuilder Wizard can be resized, making it easier to

preview tables in your data source. In addition, Step 1 and Step 3
of the wizard offer a vertical split bar, letting you adjust the size
of the list located on the left side of these pages.
There are 6 steps involved:
5-238
Step 1Specify Data Source on page 5-239
Step 2Specify Spatial Options on page 5-241
Step 3 - Specify Element Create/Remove/Update Options on page 5-243
Step 4Additional Options on page 5-245
Step 5Specify Field mappings for each Table/Feature Class on page 5-248
Step 6Build operation Confirmation on page 5-252
Using Modelbuilder
Step 1Specify Data Source

In this step, the data source type and location are specified. After selecting your data
source, the desired database tables can be chosen and previewed.
The following fields are available:
Data Source type (drop-down list)This field allows you to specify the type of
data you would like to work with.
Note:
If your specific data source type is not listed in the Data Source
type field, try using the OLE DB data source type. OLE DB can be
used to access many database systems (including ORACLE, and
SQL Server, to name a few).
Data Source (text field)This read-only field displays the path to your data
source.
Browse (button)This button opens a browse dialog box that allows you to interactively select your data source.
5-239
ModelBuilder Wizard
Note:
Some Data Source types expect you to choose more than one
item in the Browse dialog box. For more information, see Multiselect Data Source Types on page 5-256.
Table/Feature Class (list)This pane is located along the left side of the form
and lists the tables/feature classes that are contained within the data source. Use
the check boxes (along the left side of the list) to specify the tables you would like
to include.
Tip:
The list can be resized using the split bar (located on the right
side of the list).
Right-click to Select All or Clear the current selection in the list.
Duplicate Table (button)

The duplicate table button is located along the
top of the Table/Feature Class list. This button allows you to make copies of a
table, which can each be mapped to a different element type in your model. Use
this in conjunction with the WHERE clause.
Remove Table (button)

table from the list.
WHERE Clause (field)Allows you to create a SQL query to filter the tables.
When the box is checked, only tables that meet the criteria specified by the
The remove table button can be used to remove a
WHERE clause will be displayed. Click the

to refresh the preview table.
5-240
button to validate the query and
Preview PaneA tabular preview of the highlighted table is displayed in this

pane when the Show Preview check box is enabled.
Using Modelbuilder
Note:
If both nodes and pipes are imported in the same ModelBuilder

connection, nodes will be imported first regardless of the order
they are listed here.
Step 2Specify Spatial Options

In this step you will specify the spatial options to be used during the ModelBuilder
process. The spatial options will determine the placement and connectivity of the
model elements. The fields available in this step will vary depending on the data
source type.
Specify the Coordinate Unit of your data source (drop-down list)This field
allows you to specify the coordinate unit of the spatial data in your data source.
The default unit is the unit used for coordinates.
5-241
ModelBuilder Wizard
Create nodes if none found at pipe endpoint (check box)When this box is
checked, ModelBuilder will create a pressure junction at any pipe endpoint that:
a) doesnt have a connected node, and b) is not within the specified tolerance of an
existing node. This field is only active when the Establish connectivity using
spatial data box is checked. (This option is not available if the connection is
bringing in only point type geometric data.)
ModelBuilder will not create pipes unless a valid start/stop node exists. Choose
this option if you know that there are nodes missing from your source data. If you
expect your data to be complete, then leave this option off and if this situation is
detected ModelBuilder will report errors for your review. For more information
see Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder on page 5-261.
5-242
Establish connectivity using spatial data (check box)When this box is

checked, ModelBuilder will connect pipes to nodes that fall within a specified
tolerance of a pipe endpoint. (This option is available if the connection is bringing
in only polyline type geometric data.) Use this option, when the data source does
not explicitly name the nodes at the end of each pipe. For more information, see
Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder on page 5-261.
Tolerance (numeric field)This field dictates how close a node must be to a pipe
endpoint in order for connectivity to be established. The Tolerance field is only
available when the Establish connectivity using spatial data box is checked. (This
option is available if the connection is bringing in only polyline type geometric
data.) Tolerances should be set as low as possible so that unintended connections
are not made. If you are not sure what tolerance to use, try doing some test runs.
Use the Network Review queries to evaluate the success of each trial import.
Using Modelbuilder
Note:
Pipes will be connected to the closest node within the specified

tolerance.
The unit associated with the tolerance is dictated by the Specify
the Coordinate Unit of your data source field.
For more information, see Specifying Network Connectivity in
ModelBuilder on page 5-261.
Step 3 - Specify Element Create/Remove/Update Options

Because of the variety of different data sources and they way those sources were
created, the user has a wide variety of options to control the behavior of ModelBuilder.
How would you like to handle synchronization between source and destination?:
5-243
ModelBuilder Wizard
Add objects to destination if present in source (check box)-When this box is

checked, ModelBuilder will automatically add new elements to the model for
"new" records in the data source when synching in (or vice-versa when synching
out).
This is checked by default since a user generally wants to add elements to the
model (especially if this is the initial run of ModelBuilder). This should be
unchecked if new elements have been added to the source file since the model was
created but the user does not want them in the model (e.g. proposed piping).
Prompt before adding objects (check box)-When this box is checked,

ModelBuilder will pause during the synchronization process to present a
confirmation message box to the user each time an element is about to be
created in the model or data-source.
Remove objects from destination if missing from source (check box)-When

this box is checked, ModelBuilder will delete elements from the model if they do
not exist in the data source when synching in (or vice-versa when synching out).
This option can be useful if you are importing a subset of elements.
This is used if abandoned pipes have been deleted from the source file and the
user wants them to automatically be removed from the model by ModelBuilder.
Prompt before removing objects (check box)-When this box is checked,

deleted from the model.
Update existing objects in destination if present in source (check box) - If

checked, this option allows you to control whether or not properties and geometry
of existing model elements will be updated when synching in (or vice-versa when
synching out). Turning this option off can be useful if you want to synchronize
newly added or removed elements, while leaving existing elements untouched.
Prompt before updating objects (check box)-When this box is checked,

updated.
If an imported object refers to another object that does not yet exist in the model,
should ModelBuilder:
5-244
Create referenced element automatically? (check box)-When this box is

checked, ModelBuilder will create any domain and/or support elements that are
referenced during the import process.
Using Modelbuilder
Prompt before creating referenced elements (check box)-When this box is

checked, ModelBuilder will pause during model generation to present a
confirmation message box to the user each time a specified referenced
element could not be found, and is about to be created for the model.
"Referenced elements" refers to any support or domain element that is referenced by another element. For example, Pumps can refer to Pump Definition
support-elements, Junctions can refer to Zone support-elements, and Pumps
can refer to a downstream Pipe domain-element. Node domain-elements that
get created as a result of being referenced during the ModelBuilder process
will use a default coordinate of 0, 0.
Note:
These options listed above apply to domain elements (pipes and

nodes) as well as support elements (such as Zones or Controls).
Step 4Additional Options
How would you like to import incoming data? (drop-down list) - This refers to
the scenario (and associated alternatives) into which the data will be imported.
The user can import the data into the Current Scenario or a new child scenario. If
the latter is selected, a new child scenario (and child alternatives) will be created
for any data difference between the source and the active scenario.
5-245
ModelBuilder Wizard
Note:
If there is no data change for a particular alternative, no child

alternative will be created in that case.
New scenario and alternatives will be automatically labeled
"Created by ModelBuilder" followed by the date and time when
they were created.
Specify key field used during object mapping (drop-down list) - The key field
represents the field in the model and data source that contains the unique identifier
for associating domain elements in your model to records in your data source.
Refer to the "Key Field (Model)" topic in the next section for additional guidance
on how this setting applies to ModelBuilder. ModelBuilder provides three
choices for Key Field:
Label - The element "Label" will be used as the key for associating model
elements with data source records. Label is a good choice if the identifier
field in your data-source is unique and represents the identifier you commonly
use to refer to the record in your GIS.
<custom> - Any editable text field in your model can be used as the key for
associating model elements with data source records. This is a good choice if
you perhaps don't use labels on every element, or if perhaps there are duplicate labels in your data source.
GIS-IDs - The element "GIS-IDs" field will be used as the key for associating
model elements with data source elements. The GIS-IDs field offers a
number of advanced capabilities, and is the preferred choice for models that
you plan to keep in sync with your GIS over a period of time.
Refer to the section The GIS-ID Property for more information.
The following options only apply when using the advanced GIS-IDs key field option.
If several elements share the same GIS-IDs, then apply updates to all of
them? (check box) - When using the GIS-IDs option, ModelBuilder allows you to
maintain one-to-many, and many-to-one relationships between records in your
GIS and elements in your Model.
For example, you may have a single pipe in your GIS that you want to maintain as
multiple elements in your Model because you have split that pipe into two pipes
elements in the model. You may accomplish this using the native SewerGEMS
V8i layout tools to split the pipe with a node; the newly created pipe segment will
be assigned the same GIS-IDs as the original pipe (establishing a one-to-many
relationship). By using this option, when you later synchronize from the GIS into
your model, any data changes to the single pipe record in your GIS can be
cascaded to both pipes elements in your model (e.g. so a diameter change to a
single record in the GIS would be reflected in both elements in the model).
5-246
Prompt before cascading updates (check box) - When this box is checked,
ModelBuilder will pause during model generation to present a confirmation
message box to the user each time a cascading update is about to be applied.
Using Modelbuilder
How would you like to handle add/removes of elements with GIS-IDs

mappings on subsequent imports? - These options are useful for keeping your
GIS and Model synchronized, while maintaining established differences.
Recreate elements associated with a GIS-IDs that was previously deleted

from the model (check box) - By default, ModelBuilder will not recreate
elements you remove from your model that are associated with a records
(with GIS-IDs mappings) that are still in your GIS. This behavior is useful
when you want to perform GIS to model synchronizations, but have elements
that exist in your GIS that you do not want in your model.
For example, after creating your model from GIS, you may find redundant
nodes when performing a Network Navigator, "Nodes in Close Proximity"
network review query. You may choose to use the "Merge Nodes in Close
Proximity" feature to make the correction in your model (deleting the redundant nodes from your model). Normally, when you later synchronize from
your GIS to your model, missing elements would be recreated and your
correction would be lost. However, SewerGEMS V8i now maintains the
history of elements (with GIS-IDs's) that were removed from your model; this
option allows you to control whether or not those elements get recreated.
When removing objects from destination if missing from source, only

remove objects that have a GIS-IDs. (check box) - This option is useful
when you have elements that are missing from your GIS that you want to keep
in your model (or vice-versa).
For example, if you build your model from your GIS (using the GIS-IDs
option, a GIS-IDs will be assigned to newly created elements in your model.
If you later add elements to your model (they will not be assigned a GIS-IDs);
on subsequent synchronizations, this option (if checked) will allow you to you
retain those model specific elements that do not exist in your GIS. For
example, you may have a proposed land development project in your model
that does not exist in the GIS. These elements will not have a GIS-IDs
because they were not imported from the GIS. If this box is checked, the new
elements will not be removed on subsequent runs of ModelBuilder.
5-247
ModelBuilder Wizard
Note:
This setting only applies if the "Remove objects from destination

if missing from source" option is checked.
When you do make connectivity changes to your model, it is
often beneficial to make those same changes to the GIS.
However, this is not always possible; and in some cases is not
desirable -- given the fact that Modeling often has highly
specialized needs that may not be met by a general purpose GIS.
Step 5Specify Field mappings for each Table/Feature Class

In this step, data source tables are mapped to the desired modeling element types, and
data source fields are mapped to the desired model input properties. You will assign
mappings for each Table/Feature Class that appears in the list; Step 1 of the wizard can
be used to exclude tables, if you wish.
Tables (list)-This pane, located along the left side of the dialog box, lists the data
source Tables/Feature Classes to be used in the ModelBuilder process. Select an
item in the list to specify the settings for that item.
Note:
The tables list can be resized using the splitter bar.
There are two toolbar buttons located directly above Tables list (these buttons can
be a great time saver when setting up multiple mappings with similar settings).
5-248
Using Modelbuilder
Copy Mappings (button)-This button copies the mappings (associated with

the currently selected table) to the clipboard.
Paste Mappings (button)-This button applies the copied mappings to the

currently selected table.
Settings Tab-The Settings tab allows you to specify mappings for the selected
item in the Tables list.
The top section of the Settings tab allows you to specify the common data
mappings:
Table Type (drop-down list)-This field, which contains a list of all of the
CivilStorm V8i element types, allows you to specify the target modeling
element type that the source table/feature class represents. For example, a
source table that contains pipe data should be associated with the Conduit
element type.
There are three categories of Table Types: Element Types, Components, and
Collections. For geometric data sources, only Element Types are available.
However with tabular data sources all table types can be used. The categorized menu accessed by the [>] button assists in quicker selection of the
desired table type.
Element Types-This category of Table Type includes geometric elements

represented in the drawing view such as conduits, catch basins, manholes,
etc.
Components-This category of Table Type includes the supporting data

items in your model that are potentially shared among elements such as
patterns, pump definitions, and controls.
Collections-This category of Table Type includes table types that are

typically lists of 2-columned data. For instance, if one table in your
connection consists of a list of (Time From Start, Multiplier) pairs, use a
Pattern collection table type selection.
Key Fields - This pair of key fields allows you to control how records in your
data source are associated with elements in the model. The Key Fields
element mapping consists of two parts, a data-source part and a model part:
-
Key Field (Data Source) (drop-down list)-Choose the field in your data
source that contains the unique identifier for each record.
5-249
ModelBuilder Wizard
Note:
If you plan to maintain synchronizations between your model

and GIS, it is best to define a unique identifier in your data
source for this purpose. Using an identifier that is unique
across all tables is critical if you wish to maintain explicit pipe
start/stop connectivity identifiers in your GIS.
When working with ArcGIS data sources, OBJECTID is not a
good choice for Key field (because OBJECTID is only unique for
a particular Feature Class).
For one-time model builds -- if you do not have a field that can be
used to uniquely identify each element -- you may use the
<label> field (which is automatically generated by ModelBuilder
for this purpose).
Key Field (Model) (drop-down-list) - This field is only enabled if you

specified <custom> in the "Specify key field to be used in object
mapping?" option in the previous step. If you specified "GIS-IDs' or
"Label" the field will be disabled.
If you specified <custom>, then you will be presented with a list of the
available text fields for that element type. Choose a field that represents
the unique alphanumeric identifier for each element in your model.
Note:
You can define a text User Data Extensions property for use as
your <custom> model key field.
The <custom> key field list is limited to read-write text fields.
This is because during import, the value of this field will be
assigned as new elements in your model are created. Therefore,
the models internal (read-only) element ID field cannot be used
for this purpose.
The following optional fields are available for Pipe element types:
-
Note:
Start/Stop - Select the fields in a pipe table that contain the identifier of
the start and stop nodes. Specify <none> if you are using the spatial
connectivity support in ModelBuilder (or if you want to keep connectivity
unchanged on update). For more information, see Specifying Network
Connectivity in ModelBuilder.
When working with an ArcGIS Geometric Network data source,
these fields will be set to <auto> (indicating that ModelBuilder
will automatically determine connectivity from the geometric
network).
These fields are available for Node element types:

-
5-250
X/Y Field - These fields are used to specify the node X and Y coordinate
data. This field only applies to point table types.
Using Modelbuilder
Note:
The Coordinate Unit setting in Step 2 of the wizard allows you to

specify the units associated with these fields.
When working with ArcGIS Geodatabase, shape file and CAD
data sources, these fields will be set to <auto> (indicating that
ModelBuilder will automatically determine node geometry from
the data source).
These optional fields are available for Pump element types:

-
Suction Element (drop-down list)-For tables that define pump data,

select a pipe label or other unique identifier to set the suction element of
the Pump.
Downstream Edge (drop-down list)-For tables that define pump or valve

data, select a pipe label or other unique identifier to set the direction of the
pump or valve.
The bottom section of the Settings tab allows you to specify additional data
mappings for each field in the source.
Field - Field refers to a field in the selected data source. The Field list
displays the associations between fields in the database to properties in
the model.
Property (drop-down list)-Property refers to a Bentley SewerGEMS V8i

property. Use the Property drop-down list to map the highlighted field to
the desired property.
Unit (drop-down list)-This field allows you to specify the units of the
values in the database (no conversion on your part is required). This field
only applies if the selected model property is unitized.
Preview Tab-The Preview tab displays a tabular preview of the currently highlighted source data table when the Show Preview check box is checked.
To map a field in your table to a particular Bentley SewerGEMS V8i property:

1. In the Field list, select the data source field you would like to define a mapping
for.
2. In the Property drop-down list, select the desired Bentley SewerGEMS V8i target
model property.
3. If the property is unitized, specify the unit of this field in your data source in the
Unit drop-down list.
To remove the mapping for a particular field:
1. Select the field you would like to update.
2. In the Property drop-down list, select <none>.
5-251
ModelBuilder Wizard
Step 6Build operation Confirmation

In this step, you are prompted to build a new model or update an existing model.
To build a new model, click the Yes radio button under Would you like to build the
model now?.
If you choose No, you will be returned to the ModelBuilder Manager dialog. The
connection you defined will appear in the list pane. To build the model from the
ModelBuilder Manager, highlight the connection and click the Build Model button.
Create Selection Set options: Often a user wants to view the elements that have been
affected by a ModelBuilder operation. To do this, ModelBuilder can create selection
sets which the user can view and use within the application.
5-252
To create a selection set containing the elements added during the ModelBuilder,
check the box next to "Create selection set with elements added."
To create a selection set containing the elements for which the properties or geometry were modified during the ModelBuilder, check the box next to "Create selection set with elements modified."
Using Modelbuilder
Note:
Selection sets created as a result of these options will include

the word "ModelBuilder" in their name, along with the date and
time (e.g. "Elements added via ModelBuilder - mm/dd/yyyy
hh:mm:ss am/pm")
GIS-IDs
All domain elements in SewerGEMS V8i have an editable GIS-IDs property which
can be used for maintaining associations between records in your source file and
elements in your model. These associations can be one-to-one, one-to-many, or
many-to-one.
ModelBuilder can take advantage of this GIS-IDs property, and has advanced logic for
keeping your model and GIS source file synchronized across the various model to GIS
associations.
The GIS-IDs is a unique field in the source file which the user selects when ModelBuilder is being set up. In contrast to using Label (which is adequate if model
building is a one time operation) as the key field between the model and the source
file, a GIS-IDs has some special properties which are very helpful in maintaining long
term updating of the model as the data source evolves over time.
In addition, SewerGEMS V8i will intelligently maintain GIS-IDs as you use the
various tools to manipulate elements (Delete, Morph, Split, Merge Nodes in Close
Proximity).
When an element with one or more GIS-IDss is deleted, ModelBuilder will not
recreate it the next time a synchronization from your GIS occurs if the "Recreate
elements associated with a GIS-IDs that was previously deleted from the model"
option is left unchecked.
When an element with one or more GIS-IDss is morphed, the new element will
preserve those GIS-IDss. The original element will be considered as "deleted with
GIS-IDss", which means that it will not be recreated by default (see above).
When a link is split, the two links will preserve the same GIS-IDss the original
pipe had. On subsequent ModelBuilder synchronizations, any data-change occurring for the associated record in the GIS can be cascaded into all the split link
segments (see Step 4Additional Options on page 5-245).
When nodes in close proximity are merged, the resulting node will preserve the
GIS-IDss of all the nodes that were removed. On subsequent ModelBuilder
synchronizations into the model, if there are data-update conflicts between the
records in the GIS associated with the merged node in the model, updates from the
5-253
GIS-IDs
first GIS-IDs listed for the merged node will be preserved in the model. Note that
in this case, the geometry of the merged node can't be updated in the model. For
synchronizations going from the model to the GIS, data-updates affecting
merged-nodes can be cascaded into all the associated records in the GIS (see Step
4Additional Options on page 5-245).
To support these relationship (specifically one to many), GIS-IDs are managed as a
collection property (capable of holding any number of GIS identifiers).
A variety of model element(s) to GIS record(s) associations can be specified:
5-254
If the GIS-IDs collection is empty, there is no association between the GIS and
this element.
If there is a single entry, this element is associated with one record in the GIS.
If there are multiple entries, this element is associated with multiple records in the
GIS.
More than one element in the model can have the same GIS-IDs, meaning
multiple records on the model are associated with a single record in the GIS.
Using Modelbuilder
Note:
You can also manually edit the GIS-IDs property to review or

modify the element to GIS association(s).
GIS-IDs Collection Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to assign one or more GIS-IDss to the currently selected
element.
Reviewing Your Results

At the end of the ModelBuilder process, you will be presented with statistics, and a list
of any warning/error messages reported during the process. You should closely review
this information, and be sure to save this data to disk where you can refer to it later.
5-255
Multi-select Data Source Types

Note:
Refer to the section titled ModelBuilder Warnings and Error

Messages on page 5-256 to determine the nature of any
messages that were reported.
Multi-select Data Source Types

When certain Data Source types are chosen in Step 1 of the ModelBuilder Wizard (see
Step 1Specify Data Source on page 5-239), multiple items can be selected for
inclusion in your ModelBuilder connection.
After clicking the Browse button to interactively specify your data source, use standard Windows selection techniques to select all items you would like to include in the
connection (e.g., Ctrl+click each item you would like to include).
The following are multi-select Data Source types:
ArcGIS Geodatabase Features
Shapefiles
DBase, HTML Export, and Paradox.
Exporting X/Y Coordinates

SewerGEMS V8i X/Y coordinates can be exported to an external data tables, such as
spreadsheets, using ModelBuilder.
1. Add fields to the external data table to accept the coordinate data.
2. In Step 5Specify Field mappings for each Table/Feature Class on page 5-248
of the ModelBuilder Wizard, click the No radio button under Build Model Now?,
then click Finish.
3. In the ModelBuilder Manager, highlight the connection and click the Sync Out
button.
ModelBuilder Warnings and Error Messages

Errors and warnings that are encountered during the ModelBuilder process will be
reported in the ModelBuilder Summary.
5-256
Using Modelbuilder
For more information, see:
Warnings on page 5-257
Error Messages on page 5-258
Warnings
Warning messages include:
1. Some rows were ignored due to missing key-field values.
ModelBuilder encountered missing data (e.g., null or blank) in the specified Key/
Label field for rows in your data source table. Without a key, ModelBuilder is
unable to associate this source row with a target element, and must skip these
items. This can commonly occur when using a spreadsheet data source. To determine where and how often this error occurred, check the Statistics page for the
message <x> row(s) ignored due to missing key-field values.
2. Unable to create pipe <element>; start and/or stop node could not be found.
Pipes can only be created if its start and stop nodes can be established. If you are
using Explicit connectivity, a node element with the referenced start or stop label
could not be found. If you are using implicit connectivity, a node element could
not be located within the specified tolerance. For more information, see Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder on page 5-261.
3. Unable to update pipe <element> topology; (start or stop) node could not be
found.
This error occurs when synchronizing an existing model, and indicates that the
pipe connectivity could not be updated. For more information, see warning
message #2 (above).
4. The downstream edge for <element> could not be found.
ModelBuilder was unable to set a Pump direction because a pipe with the referenced label could not be found.
5. Directed Node <element> direction is ambiguous.
ModelBuilder was unable to set the direction of the referenced pump or valve
because direction could not be implied based on the adjacent pipes (e.g. there
should be one incoming and one outgoing pipe).
5-257
ModelBuilder Warnings and Error Messages
Error Messages
Note:
If you encounter these errors or warnings, we recommend that

you correct the problems in your original data source and re-run
ModelBuilder (when applicable).
Error messages include:

1. Unable to assign <attribute> for element <element>.
Be sure that the data in your source table is compatible with the expected Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i format. For more information, see Using Modelbuilder on
page 5-233.
2. Unable to create <element type> <element>.
This message indicates that an unexpected error occurred when attempting to
create a node element.
3. Unable to create pipe <element> possibly due to start or stop connectivity
constraints.
This message indicates that this pipe could not be created, because the pump or
valve already has an incoming and outgoing pipe. Adding a third pipe to a pump
or valve is not allowed.
4. Unable to update pipe <element> topology; possibly due to start element connectivity constraints.
This error occurs when synchronizing. For more information, see error message
#3 (above).
5. Operation terminated by user.
You pressed the Cancel button during the ModelBuilder process.
6. Unable to create < element>; pipe start and stop must be different.
This message indicates that the start and stop specified for this pipe refer to the
same node element.
7. Unable to update <element> topology; pipe start and stop must be different.
This message indicates that the start and stop specified for this pipe refer to the
same node element.
8. Unable to update the downstream edge for <element>.
An unexpected error occurred attempting to set the downstream edge for this
pump or valve.
9. Nothing to do. Some previously referenced tables may be missing from your data
source.
5-258
Using Modelbuilder
This data source has changed since this connection was created. Verify that tables/
feature-classes in your data source have not been renamed or deleted.
10. One or more input features fall outside of the XYDomain.
This error occurs when model elements have been imported into a new geodatabase that has a different spatial reference from the elements being created.
Elements cannot be created in ArcMAP if they are outside the spatial bounds of
the geodatabase.
The solution is to assign the correct X/Y Domain to the new geodatabase when it
is being created:
a. In the Attach Geodatabase dialog that appears after you initialize the Create
New Project command, click the Change button.
b. In the Spatial Reference Properties dialog that appears, click the Import
button.
c. Browse to the datasource you will be using in ModelBuilder and click Add.
d. Back in the Spatial Reference Properties dialog, click the x/Y Domain tab.
The settings should match those of the datasource.
e. Use ModelBuilder to create the model from the datasource.
Esri ArcGIS Geodatabase Support

ModelBuilder was built using ArcObjects, and supports the following Esri ArcGIS
Geodatabase functionality. See your ArcGIS documentation for more information
about ArcObjects. For more information, see:
Geodatabase Features on page 5-260
Geometric Networks on page 5-260
ArcGIS Geodatabase Features versus ArcGIS Geometric Network on page 5260
Subtypes on page 5-261
SDE (Spatial Database Engine) on page 5-261
5-259
Esri ArcGIS Geodatabase Support
Geodatabase Features
ModelBuilder provides direct support for working with Geodatabase features. A
feature class is much like a shapefile, but with added functionality (such as subtypes).
The geodatabase stores objects. These objects may represent nonspatial real-world
entities, such as manufacturers, or they may represent spatial objects, such as pipes in
a network. Objects in the geodatabase are stored in feature classes (spatial) and tables
(nonspatial).
The objects stored in a feature class or table can be organized into subtypes and may
have a set of validation rules associated with them. The ArcInfo system uses these
validation rules to help you maintain a geodatabase that contains valid objects.
Tables and feature classes store objects of the same typethat is, objects that have the
same behavior and attributes. For example, a feature class called WaterMains may
store pressurized water mains. All water mains have the same behavior and have the
attributes ReferenceID, Depth, Material, GroundSurfaceType, Size, and PressureRating.
Geometric Networks
ModelBuilder has support for Geometric Networks, and a new network element type
known as Complex Edge. When you specify a Geometric Network data source,
ModelBuilder automatically determines the feature classes that make up the network.
In addition, ModelBuilder can automatically establish model connectivity based on
information in the Geometric Network.
ArcGIS Geodatabase Features versus ArcGIS Geometric Network

Note:
See your ArcGIS documentation for more information about

Geometric Networks and Complex Edges.
When working with a Geometric Network, you have two options for constructing your
modelif your model contains Complex Edges, then there is a distinct difference. A
Complex Edge can represent a single feature in the Geodatabase, but multiple
elements in the Geometric Network.
For example, when defining your Geometric Network, you can connect a lateral to a
main without splitting the main line. In this case, the main line will be represented as a
single feature in the Geodatabase but as multiple edges in the Geometric Network.
5-260
Using Modelbuilder
Depending on the data source type that you choose, ModelBuilder can see either
representation. If you want to include every element in your system, choose ArcGIS
Geometric Network as your data source type. If you want to leave out laterals and you
want your main lines to be represented by single pipes in the model, choose ArcGIS
Geodatabase Features as your data source type.
Subtypes
Tip:
Shapefiles can be converted into Geodatabase Feature Classes

if you would like to make use of Subtypes. See your ArcGIS
documentation for more information.
If multiple types of Bentley SewerGEMS V8i elements have their data stored in a
single geodatabase table, then each element must be a separate ArcGIS subtype. For
example, in a valve table PRVs may be subtype 1, PSVs may be subtype 2, FCVs may
be subtype 3, and so on. With subtypes, it is not necessary to follow the rule that each
GIS/database feature type must be associated with a single type of GEMS model
element. Note that the subtype field must be of the integer type (e.g., 1, 2) and not an
alphanumeric field (e.g., PRV). For more information about subtypes, see ArcGIS
Help.
ModelBuilder has built in support for subtypes. After selecting your data source,
feature classes will automatically be categorized by subtype. This gives you the ability
to assign mappings at the subtype level. For example, ModelBuilder allows you to
exclude a particular subtype within a feature class, or associate each subtype with a
different element type.
SDE (Spatial Database Engine)

ModelBuilder lets you specify an SDE Geodatabase as your data source. See your Esri
documentation for more information about SDE.
Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder

When importing spatial data (ArcGIS Geodatabases or shapefile data contain spatial
geometry data that ModelBuilder can use to establish network connectivity by
connecting pipe ends to nodes, creating nodes at pipe endpoints if none are found.),
ModelBuilder provides two ways to specify network connectivity:
5-261
Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder
Explicit connectivitybased on pipe Start node and Stop node (see Step 4
Additional Options on page 5-245).
Implicit connectivitybased on spatial data. When using implicit connectivity,

ModelBuilder allows you to specify a Tolerance, and provides a second option
allowing you to Create nodes if none found (see Step 2Specify Spatial
Options on page 5-241).
The method that you use will vary depending on the quality of your data. The possible
situations include (in order from best case to worst case):
You have pipe start and stop informationExplicit connectivity is definitely the
preferred option.
You have some start and stop informationUse a combination of explicit and
implicit connectivity (use the Spatial Data option, and specify pipe Start/Stop
fields). If the start or stop data is missing (blank) for a particular pipe, ModelBuilder will then attempt to use spatial data to establish connectivity.
You do not have start and stop informationImplicit connectivity is your only
option. If your spatial data is good, then you should reduce your Tolerance
accordingly.
You do not have start and stop information, and you do not have any node data
(e.g., you have GIS data that defines your pipes, but you do not have data for
nodes)Use implicit connectivity and specify the Create nodes if none found
option; otherwise, the pipes cannot be created.
Note:
If pipes do not have explicit Start/Stop nodes and Establish

connectivity using spatial data is not checked, the pipes will not
be connected to the nodes and a valid model will not be
produced.
Other considerations include what happens when the coordinates of the pipe ends do
not match up with the node coordinates. This problem can be one of a few different
varieties:
1. Both nodes and pipe ends have coordinates, and pipes have explicit Start/
Stop nodesIn this case, the node coordinates are used, and the pipe ends are
moved to connect with the nodes.
2. Nodes have coordinates but pipes do not have explicit Start/Stop nodesThe
nodes will be created, and the specified tolerance will be used to connect pipe
ends within this tolerance to the appropriate nodes. If a pipe end does not fall
within any nodes specified tolerance, a new node can be created using the Create
nodes if none found option.
3. Pipe ends have coordinates but there are no junctionsNew nodes must be
created using the Create nodes if none found option. Pipe ends are then
connected using the tolerance that is specified.
5-262
Using Modelbuilder
Another situation of interest occurs when two pipes cross but arent connected. If, at
the point where the pipes cross, there are no pipe ends or nodes within the specified
tolerance, then the pipes will not be connected in the model. If you intend for the pipes
to connect, then pipe ends or junctions must exist within the specified tolerance.
ModelBuilder Data Source Format

Note:
Database formats (such as MS Access) are preferable to simple

spreadsheet data sources. The sample below is intended only to
illustrate the importance of using expected data formats.
Here are two examples of possible data source tables. The first represents data that is
in the correct format for an easy transition into ModelBuilder, with no modification.
The second table will require adjustments before all of the data can be used by ModelBuilder.
Table 5-1: Correct Data Format for ModelBuilder

Label
Roughness_C
Diam_in
Length_ft
Material_ID
Subtype
P-1
120
120
P-2
110
75
P-3
130
356
P-4
100
10
729
Table 5-2: Data Format Needs Editing for ModelBuilder

P-1
120
.5
120
PVC
Phase2
P-2
110
.66
75
DuctIron
Lateral
P-3
130
.5
356
PVC
Phase1
P-4
100
.83
729
DuctIron
Main
P-5
100
1029
DuctIron
Main
In Table 5-2: Data Format Needs Editing for ModelBuilderon page 5-263, no
column labels have been specified. ModelBuilder will interpret the first row of data in
the table as the column labels, which can make the attribute mapping step of the
ModelBuilder Wizard more difficult unless you are very familiar with your data
source setup.
5-263
Handling Collection and Curve Data in Modelbuilder

Table 5-1: Correct Data Format for ModelBuilderon page 5-263 is also superior to
Table 5-2: Data Format Needs Editing for ModelBuilderon page 5-263 in that it
clearly identifies the units that are used for unitized attribute values, such as length
and diameter. Again, unless you are very familiar with your data source, unspecified
units can lead to errors and confusion.
Finally, Table 5-2: Data Format Needs Editing for ModelBuilderon page 5-263 is
storing the Material and Subtype attributes as alphanumeric values, while ModelBuilder uses integer ID values to access this input. This data is unusable by ModelBuilder in alphanumeric format, and must be translated to an integer ID system in
order to read this data.
Handling Collection and Curve Data in Modelbuilder

ModeBuilder has the ability to import Collection and Curve data, such as pump
curves, hydrographs, and IDF curves, among others. In the model, these data types are
always associated to either Domain elements (pumps, pipes, ) or Components
(pump definitions, hydrographs, ). You can just import the collection data, and
ModelBuilder will create a default domain/component element if it doesn't yet exist,
and if the creation option to automatically create referenced elements is enabled. But a
better technique would be to import the domain/component element from an external
table, and then import the collection data into those created domain/component
elements. This gives you the ability to import the most amount of detail.
The external tabular data for a collection curve must have a label field, where the label
field contains string values that match the label of the associated domain/component
element. For example, if two pattern curves are defined in an external table, the table
would look something like the following:
Table 5-3: Sample Tabular Data
Label
5-264
Time from Start
Multiplier
Order
Normal
1.2
.8
Normal
1.7
.7
Normal
12
.2
Normal
17
.5
High
1.0
High
19
.85
High
12
.65
Using Modelbuilder
This would assign 4 entries to the 'Normal' pattern, and 3 entries to the 'High' pattern.
The Order field is optional, and is discussed below. The same approach applies to
nodes, for such things as a variable area tank curve, or junction demands. In these
cases, the label field would contain the name of the node that collection entries are
being added into.
ModelBuilder also includes an advanced feature to allow precise ordering of the
collection records. For some collections, the order of the records does not matter and
this feature isn't needed. For other cases, order of the records is meaningful. For these
types of collections, there is a Sort By Field in the ModelBuilder mapping form. By
default, it uses the record order as the records exist in the external data source. If the
records are not ordered correctly in the data source, then the external table must have
an additional field that contains numeric values. These values will represent the order
that the records should be imported. So for the above example data, normally the
records would be imported in the order entered (5, 19, then 12 for the High pattern).
However the user can set the Sort By Field in the ModelBuilder form to use the 'Order'
external field, and this will import the records based on either Ascending 'Order'
values (5, 12, 19) or Descending 'Order' values (19, 12, 5).
Oracle as a Data Source for ModelBuilder

SewerGEMS V8i makes it possible to import data to create a model from an Oracle
database. To use this database, the user must have Oracle 11g Client software installed
on the same computer in which SewerGEMS V8i is running and it must be connected
t the Oracle Server.
The user needs to understand the nature of the data stored in Oracle and the way it is
stored. For example, the user must know if the data are stored as simple tabular data or
whether the data are spatial data associated with polygons, lines, and points. The user
needs to decide which fields in the database are to be imported into SewerGEMS V8i.
It is possible to connect to an Oracle database from SewerGEMS V8i using any
supported CAD/GIS platform. Start ModelBuilder the same as with any other data
source (see ModelBuilder Connections Manager on page 5-235). However, when
the user browses for a data source some additional information is required.
When the user Browses for an Oracle datasource, ModelBuilder opens an Oracle login
form. The user can enter just a service name if they have setup an alias on their system
for the Oracle datasource. The user should contact their administrator for details on
how to setup this alias. Otherwise, the user must enter all of the connection informa-
5-265
Oracle as a Data Source for ModelBuilder

tion, which includes the computer/host that Oracle is running on, the network port
number that Oracle is using, and the raw Oracle service name. Again, the user should
contact their administrator for those details. The user must also supply a valid Oracle
username and password to log into the data source.
5-266
Using Modelbuilder
On the mapping form in ModelBuilder, there is a Generator (Sync out) combo-box.
The user only needs to select a sequence generator in this box if they plan to sync out
to Oracle and have ModelBuilder create new records in Oracle. The Oracle sequence
generator is an object that is created in Oracle by the administrator. It allows Oracle to
create records with unique Oracle identifiers, which is may be required when creating
new records. ModelBuilder will display the available sequence generators that are
available for use.
Using ModelBuilder to Import Time Series Data

Time Series data maps onto the following two table types in ModelBuilder: Time
Series, and Time Series Collection. The Time Series" mapping represents entries in
the TreeView along the left of the form (including the simple "Start Date Time",
"Element", and "Notes" values shown on the right). The "Time Series Collection"
mapping represents the tabular data shown in the table at the bottom right of the form.
Export Sample Time Series Data

To automatically determine the appropriate values for handling Pipe Flow time series
data, we're going to first export a sample from SewerGEMS V8i to Excel.
First, create a sample Pipe Flow time series in SewerGEMS V8i as shown above.
5-267

Next, create a new Excel .xls file. We'll need two "sheets" to receive the data (the
default "Sheet1" and "Sheet2" will do).
Note:
We recommend that you choose MSAccess over MSExcel if

possible; there is no explicit way to specify the data-type of a
column in Excel, which can result in some problems. You
mentioned Excel in your post (and I didn't encounter any datatype problems), so I'll go with that here.
Time Series: This is the more difficult of the two Excel sheets we need to set up. To
determine the columns to define in Excel, create a temporary ModelBuilder connection and get to the "Specify Field Mappings" step (you won't be saving this connection, so to get past Step 1 of the Wizard, just pick any data source). Navigate to this
step, choose the Time Series table type, and click on the "Property" drop-down field,
5-268
Using Modelbuilder
Click on the Sheet1 tab in Excel to define the necessary columns for the "Time Series"
table (You don't need all of these columns for Flow Data, but go ahead and define
them all to be sure we don't miss any that are required for your use-case). It should
look something like this:
Time Series Collection

Again, get to the "Specify Field Mappings" step in ModelBuilder, choose the "Time
Series Collection" table type, and click on the "Property" drop-down field to determine the columns to define.
Click on the Sheet2 tab in Excel and define the necessary columns for the "Time
Series Collection" table. It should look something like this:
Save and close your spreadsheet.

Define the ModelBuilder Connection
Now we're ready to create the ModelBuilder connection to this spreadsheet.
Open ModelBuilder and create a new Connection.
5-269

In step 1 of the Wizard, choose "Excel" as the data source type, browse to the Excel
spreadsheet that you created to select it. You should see Sheet1 and Sheet2 in the list
of available tables, select those (and unselect any others that appear).
Navigate through the next few steps, just use the defaults there.
5-270
Using Modelbuilder
When you reach the Mapping Step, set things up for Sheet1 and Sheet2 as shown
below:
5-271
Navigate to the end of the Wizard.

On the last step, click "No" for the "Would you like to build a model now?" prompt
and click [Finish].
Synchronize Out from ModelBuilder

Choose the connection you just defined (be sure to close the Excel spreadsheet you
just defined), and click the Sync Out toolbar button.
The sample time series data from SewerGEMS V8i will now be available in the Excel
spreadsheet you created.
5-272
Using Modelbuilder
Using that as a go-by, you should be able to enter the data in the appropriate format to
import in to SewerGEMS V8i.
5-273
5-274
;polChapter
Creating Your Model
Click one of the following links to learn how to create your model using Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i layout and editing tools:
Elements and Element Attributes on page 6-275
Adding Elements to Your Model on page 6-390
Connecting Elements on page 6-393
Manipulating Elements on page 6-404
Editing Element Attributes on page 6-413
Changing the Drawing View on page 6-420
Using Selection Sets on page 6-424
Using the Network Navigator on page 6-433
Using Prototypes
Engineering Libraries on page 6-440
Using the SWMM Solver on page 6-473
Adding Hyperlinks to Elements on page 6-524
Using Queries on page 6-528
User Data Extensions on page 6-554
Elements and Element Attributes

You use the Layout toolbar to add elements to your model and edit the attributes of
elements using the Property Editor, one of the dockable managers in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i stand-alone editor.
To learn about the different elements available in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, click one
of the following links:
Link Elements on page 6-276
6-275
Catch Basins on page 6-296
Manholes on page 6-301
Junctions on page 6-305
Cross Sections on page 6-305
Outfalls on page 6-324
Catchments on page 6-365
Ponds on page 6-375
Pond Outlet Entrances on page 6-306
Pumps on page 6-333
Wet Wells on page 6-329
Pressure Junctions on page 6-306
Pump Stations on page 6-358
Variable Speed Pump Battery on page 4-331
Air Valves on page 6-388
Other Tools on page 6-389
Link Elements
Layout tool
Link elements connect the other elements to form the sewer network. The link
elements are the conveyance elements that carry flow through the network to its eventual discharge point at an outlet. You can add any of the following link elements to
your model, depending on the link elements location within the network:
6-276
Pressure pipes
Conduits
Channels
Gutters
Creating Your Model

When you click the Layout tool on the Layout toolbar, you select the type of link
element to add (pressure pipe, conduit, channel, or gutter), then select an element. You
can place multiple elements with different kinds of connections using the Layout tool.
Related Topics
Entering Additional Data to Link Elements on page 6-277
Pressure Pipe Attributes on page 15-1306
Conduit Attributes on page 15-1310
Channel Attributes on page 15-1327
Gutter Attributes on page 15-1333
Depth Width Curve Dialog Box on page 6-289
What Happens When the Water Level Exceeds the Top Elevation of an Open
Channel? on page 6-293
How Do Cross Section Nodes Control the Shape of Channel Cross-Sections? on

page 6-293
Entering Additional Data to Link Elements

There are several dialog boxes that are available from the Property Editors that let you
enter additional data for link elements.
Defining a Control Structure in a Conduit on page 6-277
Adding a Minor Loss Collection to a Pressure Pipe on page 6-283
Defining the Geometry of a Link Element on page 6-285
Defining the Cross-Sectional Shape of a Link Element on page 6-286
Defining Mannings n vs. Depth Curves on page 6-465
Defining Mannings n vs. Flow Curves on page 6-467
Defining a Control Structure in a Conduit

In SewerGEMS V8i, you can attach a control structure, such as a weir or orifice, at
either the upstream end or the downstream end of a conduit, or at both ends of the
conduit. A control can also have a flap gate which allows flow to travel in only one
direction. You define control structures for conduits in the Conduit Control Structures
dialog box, which is accessible from the Property Editor for a conduit.
6-277

Note:
For more information about control structures in SewerGEMS

V8i, see Flow Control Structures on page 14-1203.
To define a control structure in a conduit:

1. Click a conduit in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a
conduit and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. If the conduit has a start control structure, do the following:
a. In the Physical: Control Structure section of the Property Editor for the
conduit, select the type of start control structure by selecting Side or Inline
from the Start Control Structure Type submenu.
a. If the conduit contains a start control structure, set the Has Start Control
Structure? field to True.
3. If the control structure contains a flap gate, set the Flap Gate field to True.
4. If the conduit contains a stop control structure, set the Has Stop Control Structure?
field to True.
5. To define a control structure, click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Start
Control Structure field and/or the Stop Control Structure, then perform the
following steps:
a. In the Conduit Control Structure dialog box, click the New button, then select
the type of control structure you want to create from the submenu (Functional,
Orifice, Depth-Flow Curve, or Weir).
b. For a Functional control structure, specify whether the structure has a flap
gate or not, then enter values for Crest Elevation, Coefficient, and Exponent.
c. For an Orifice control structure, specify whether the structure has a flap gate
or not, enter values for Crest Elevation and Orifice Coefficient, select the
Orifice Type (Bottom Outlet or Side Outlet) and Orifice Shape (Circular or
Rectangular), then enter values for Diameter for a Circular orifice or Height
and Width for a Rectangular orifice.
d. For a Depth-Flow Curve orifice, specify whether the structure has a flap gate
or not, enter a value for Crest Elevation, then enter Depth and Flow values in
the Depth-Flow table.
e. For a Weir control structure, specify whether the structure has a flap gate or
not, enter values for Crest Elevation, Weir Coefficient, and Structure Top
Elevation, then select the Weir Type (Inline, Side, V-Notch, or Trapezoidal)
and enter values for the selected Weir Type.
f.
Repeat Steps a - e for each additional component you want to add to the
control structure, then click Close.
6. Perform the following optional steps:
6-278
Creating Your Model
To delete a component from the control structure, select the item in the list
pane then click Delete.
To rename a control structure, select the control structure you want to rename,
click Rename, then type the new name.
To view a report on the control structure, click Report.
To view a graph of a Depth-Flow curve, click Graph above the Depth-Flow

curve table.
Conduit Control Structure Dialog Box

The Conduit Control Structure dialog box lets you add and edit control components to
the control structure of a conduit.
Note:
Only one control structure can be assigned to a conduit.
New
Lets you create a new component for

your control structure. These attributes
are Functional, Orifice, Depth-Flow
Curve, and Weir.
Delete
Lets you delete the selected attribute.
Rename
Lets you rename the control structure. By

default, the structure is given a unique
name, but you can set any other unique
name that you prefer.
Duplicate
This button allows you to create a copy

of the currently highlighted control
structure.
Expand All
Expands all of the branches in the

hierarchy displayed in the list pane.
Collapse All
Collapses all of the branches in the

Report
Lets you create and view a report of the

control structure.
Depending on the type of control structure you select, the Conduit Control Structure
dialog box contains the following controls:
6-279
Functional
Has Flap Gate?
Select this check box if the component includes a

flap gate, clear it if not. When checked, reverse
flow is not allowed through the structure.
Crest Elevation
The structure elevation at which flow starts to

occur.
Depth or Head?
Define flow as a function of either freeboard depth

or head across the outlet.
Coefficient
Set the coefficient.
Exponent
Set the exponent.
Orifice
Crest Elevation
Set the orifice crest elevation.
Has Flap Gate?

Orifice Coefficient
Set the coefficient.
Time to Open/Close
The time to open a closed (or to close an open)

gated orifice. If 0 then time is not applied to the
simulation.
Orifice Type
Select the type of orifice from the drop-down list:

Side Outlet or Bottom Outlet. A Bottom Outlet
type refers to a drop orifice (flow drops through
it). A Side Outlet type refers to a normal flow-by
orifice
Orifice Shape
Choose a circular or rectangular orifice.
Orifice Diameter
Set the diameter of a circular orifice.
Orifice Height
Set the height for a rectangular orifice.
Orifice Width
Set the width for a rectangular orifice.
Depth-Flow Curve
6-280
Creating Your Model
Has Flap Gate?

Depth or Head?
Define flow as a function of either freeboard depth

or head across the outlet.
Depth-Flow Curve
Set the depth and flow values that define the

depth-flow curve. The depth-flow curve consists
of a table of the depth and pairs that define the
depth-flow curve. Depth in this case refers to the
water depth above the invert on the upstream side
of the control structure and flow is the flow
through/over the control structure.
New
Click this button to add new rows to the depthflow table.
Delete
Click this button to remove selected rows from the

depth-flow table. You can only remove one row at
a time, if you have selected more than one row,
only the last row you selected is removed
Graph
Click this button to view a graph of the DepthFlow curve.
Weir
Has Flap Gate?

flap gate, clear it if does not. When checked,
reverse flow is not allowed through the structure.
Side Slope
Set the side slope of the weir.
Weir Coefficient
Set the weir coefficient, which is also known as

the coefficient of flow. This value is used to
account for variables that are not otherwise
directly accounted for in the weir equation (e.g.,
vena contracta). The weir coefficient is unitless for
V-Notch weirs, with a standard value around 0.58.
The weir coefficient is unitized for the other weir
types.
Structure Top
Elevation
Set the structure top elevation for the weir.
6-281
Weir Type
Select the type of weir from the drop-down list:

inline, side, V-notch, or trapezoidal.
Number of
Contractions
Set the number of contractions for an inline weir.

This field is available only when you select Inline
Weir as the Weir Type.
Weir Length
Set the length of the weir.
Weir Angle
Set the weir angle for a V-notch weir. This field is

available only when you select V-Notch Weir as
the Weir Type.
Weir End Coefficient
Discharge coefficient for flow through the

triangular ends of a trapezoidal weir. Typical
values are 2.4 - 2.8 US (1.35 - 1.55 SI). This field
is available only when you select Trapezoidal
Weir Side Slope
Set the slope of the side of a trapezoidal weir. This

field is available only when you select Trapezoidal
Note:
The implicit solver may not be able to handle a structure when

its crest elevation is higher than the pipes' crown elevation.
A note on the V-Notch weir coefficient with SWMM:

In SewerGEMS V8i the weir coefficient (Cv) is Unitless and has a typical value
around 0.58. However, in SWMM the v-notch weir coefficient (C) is unitized. In
order to account for this the unitless value is converted to the unitized value upon
export using the following equation.
C = (8/15)*Sqrt(2*g) * Cv
Alternativly, on import from SWMM C is converted to Cv:
Cv = (15/8) * C/(Sqrt(2*g))
Depth-Flow Curve Dialog Box
The Depth-Flow Curve dialog box lets you enter points on a depth-flow curve for a
conduit control structure.
The dialog box contains the depth vs.flow table and the following controls:
6-282
Creating Your Model
New
This button creates a new row in the depthflow table.
Delete
This button deletes the currently highlighted

row from the depth-flow table.
Report
Opens a print preview window containing a

report that details the input data for this
dialog box.
Help
The table contains the following columns:

Column
Description
Depth
Lets you define the depth of the curve point.
Flow
Lets you define the flow in the conduit at the

specified depth.
Adding a Minor Loss Collection to a Pressure Pipe

Pressure pipes can have an unlimited number of minor loss elements associated with
them. SewerGEMS V8i provides an easy-to-use table for editing these minor loss
collections in the Minor Loss Collection dialog box.
Note:
For more information on minor losses, see Minor Losses on

page 14-1202.
To add a minor loss collection to a pressure pipe:

1. Click a pressure pipe in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a
pressure pipe and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Physical: Minor Losses section of the Property Editor, click the Ellipses
(...) button next to the Minor Loss Coefficient field.
3. In the Minor Loss Collection dialog box, each row in the table represents a single
minor loss type and its associated headloss coefficient. For each row in the table,
perform the following steps:
6-283

a. Type the number of minor losses of the same type to be added to the
composite minor loss for the pipe in the Quantity column, then press the Tab
key to move to the Minor Loss column.
b. Click the Ellipses (...) button in the Minor Loss column to display the Minor
Loss Libraries in the Engineering Libraries.
c. Click the plus signs to expand the Minor Loss Libraries, then select the
desired minor loss type and click the Select button. The minor loss type and
its associated headloss coefficient appears in the table in the Minor Loss
Collection dialog box. Note that the Headloss Coefficient column in the table
is not editable.
Note:
You can edit the values of a minor loss type in the Engineering
Libraries in the Editor pane.
4. When you are finished adding minor losses to the table, click Close. The
composite minor loss coefficient for the minor loss collection appears in the Property Editor.
To delete a row from the table, select the row label then click Delete.
To view a report on the minor loss collection, click Report.
6. You can override the headloss coefficient for the minor loss collection by typing a
custom value in the Minor Loss Coefficient field of the Property Editor.
Minor Loss Collection Dialog Box
The Minor Loss Collection dialog box contains buttons and a minor loss table. The
New
This button creates a new row in the table.
Delete

row from the table.
Report

dialog box.
6-284
Creating Your Model
Column
Description
Quantity
The number of minor losses of the same type to be

added to the composite minor loss for the pipe.
Minor Loss
The type of minor loss element. Clicking the

Ellipses button next to this field displays the
Minor Loss Engineering Libraries, where you
select an existing minor loss type to be included in
your minor loss collection.
Headloss Coefficient
The headloss coefficient for a single minor loss

element of the specified type.
Defining the Geometry of a Link Element

You define the geometry of a link element by entering the location and angle of bends
for the selected link element. You enter X vs. Y points that plot the shape of the
polyline that represents the element in the Polyline Vertices dialog box .
To define the geometry of a link element:
1. Click a link element in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a
link element and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Geometry section of the Property Editor, click the Ellipses (...) button next
to the Geometry field.
3. In the Polyline Vertices dialog box, click the New button to add a new row to the
table.
4. Type values for X and Y points for each row in the table.
5. To remove rows from the table, click the Delete button.
6. Click OK.
Polyline Vertices Dialog Box
This dialog box contains the X vs. Y table that allows you to define any number of
points that plot the shape of the polyline representing the selected link element.
The dialog box contains the following controls:
6-285
New
Delete

row from the table.
Defining the Cross-Sectional Shape of a Link Element

You define the cross-sectional shapes of link elements in their respective Property
Editor as follows:
Define the cross-sectional shape of a conduit section by entering data in the Physical section of the elements Property Editor.
Define the cross-sectional shape of an irregular conduit section by entering

Station vs. Depth data in the Station-Depth Curve dialog box.
Define the cross-sectional shape of an irregular channel or gutter section by

entering Station vs. Elevation data in the Station-Elevation Curve dialog box.
Define the cross-sectional shape of a trapezoidal channel or gutter section by

entering data in the Physical section of the elements Property Editor.
Define the circular shape of a pressure pipe by entering data in the Physical
section of the elements Property Editor.
You access the curve dialog boxes in the selected link elements Property Editor.
Note:
Although you can have complex channels, the algorithm does

not support split flows or bridges. If you split the channel within
the cross section, a constant water surface across the cross
section is assumed.
When the elevation of the water surface exceeds the highest
elevation in the table, the last two unsubmerged points are
linearly extrapolated to create a new, wider channel.
To define the cross-sectional shape of a link element:

1. Display the Property Editor for the link element:
a. For a conduit, gutter, or pressure pipe, click the link element in your model, or
right-click the link element and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
b. For a channel, click the connecting cross-section node in your model, or rightclick the channel and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
6-286
Creating Your Model

2. In the Physical section of the Property Editor for the selected link element, define
the cross-section of the selected link element as follows:
For a cross-section (channel link element) or a gutter, select either Trapezoidal Channel or Irregular Channel as the Section Type. For trapezoidal
channels, enter data in the appropriate fields. If you select Irregular Channel,
the Station-Elevation Curve field becomes available. Click the Ellipses (...)
button next to the Station-Elevation Curve field to display the Station-Elevation Curve dialog box, then type values for station and elevation in the table.
For a conduit, select a section type, then enter data in the appropriate fields. If
you select Irregular Channel as the Section Type, the Station-Depth Curve
field becomes available. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the StationDepth Curve field to display the Station-Depth Curve dialog box, then type
values for station and depth in the table.
For a pressure pipe, which always has a circular section shape, enter data in
the appropriate fields.
Station-Elevation Curve/Depth Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to enter Station vs. Elevation data for the cross-sectional
shape of a cross-section or a gutter element, or Station vs. Depth data for the crosssectional shape of a conduit.
The dialog box contains the station vs. elevation table along with the following
controls:
New
This button creates a new row in the stationelevation table.
Delete

row from the station-elevation table.
Report

dialog box.
Graph
Opens a graph window plotting the stationelevation curve defined by the points in the
table
6-287

Column
Description
Station
This field allows you to define the cross-sectional

distance at the current curve point. You can enter
these in any order that defines the channel (e.g.,
from left-to-right, from right-to-left, with an
upstream or downstream perspective).
Elevation/Depth
This field allows you to define the elevation for

the current curve point for a cross-section or
gutter, or depth for a conduit. The value here is
relative, i.e. you can define it based on the bottom
of the gutter being 0 feet and the top being 1 foot,
and it will perform identically as using the actual
elevation of one endpoint for the bottom of the
gutter, and the top sides of the gutter being the
bottom+1ft. This value can be a negative number.
Related Topics
Roughness Models on page 14-1163
C-Depth Table Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to enter Depth vs. C data for a weir associated with a
conduit.
The dialog box contains the Depth vs. C table along with the following controls:
6-288
New
This button creates a new row in the Depth

vs. C table.
Delete

row from the Depth vs. C table.
Report

dialog box.
Graph
Opens a graph window plotting the Depth vs.

C curve defined by the points in the table.
Creating Your Model

Column
Description
Depth
This field allows you to define the depth at the

current curve point. You can enter these in any
order that defines the weir (e.g., from left-to-right,
from right-to-left, with an upstream or
downstream perspective).
This field allows you to define the C value for the

current curve point.
Depth Width Curve Dialog Box

A depth-width curve is a method of describing a closed conduit that is not a standard
shape. The Depth Width Curve dialog box lets you enter points on a depth-width
curve for a conduit whose Section Type is defined as Irregular Closed Section.
The dialog box contains the depth vs. width table and the following controls:
New
This button creates a new row in the depthwidth table.
Delete

row from the depth-width table.
Report

dialog box.
Graph
Opens a graph window plotting the depthwidth curve defined by the points in the table

Column
Description
Elevation (Relative)
Lets you define the depth of the curve point.
Width
Lets you define the width of the conduit at a

specific depth.
6-289
Irregular Channel
The Irregular Channel dialog box contains buttons and a station vs. elevation table.
New
Delete

row from the table.
Report
Generates a preformatted report containing

the data in the table.
Help

Column
Description
Station
Allows you to select whether the associated values

define the Left Bank, Right Bank, or the Main
Channel.
Elevation (Relative)
Allows you to define the depth at which the

Manning's n you define will be applied.
Elevation-Roughness Data Dialog Box

The Elevation-Roughness dialog box contains buttons and a elevation-roughness
table. The dialog box contains the following controls:
New
Delete

row from the table.
6-290
Creating Your Model
Column
Description
Channel Bank
Location
Allows you to select whether the associated values

define the Left Bank, Right Bank, or the Main
Channel.
Depth
Allows you to define the depth at which the

Manning's n you define will be applied.
Mannings n
Allows you to define the Manning's n at the

associated depth.
Interpolate
Allows you to define interpolation zones for the

variations in Manning's n.
Diversion Rating Curve Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define the rating curve using Upstream Flow vs. Diverted
Flow points. The rating curve determines the flow into the associated conduit. At each
upstream flow point, you define how much of the flow is diverted.
Profile in a Diversion Link

In both SewerCAD and StormCAD, a conduit can be designated as a diversion link by
selecting "Is Diversion" as true. In a diversion conduit link the flow is determined by
a flow diversion curve that specifies the flow amount diverted from the upstream node
total inflow. The profile in the diversion link is then computed by gradually varied
flow backwater calculations, using the downstream node hydraulic grade as the downstream control elevation, and working upstream.
6-291

The upstream hydraulic grade in a diversion link is the result of the backwater profile
calculation moving up the diversion link, thus it has no impact on the upstream node
hydraulic grade since the upstream node hydraulic grade is determined from the
primary (non-diversion) conduit profile calculation, not the diversion profile.
Because of such profile calculation treatment, sometimes a discontinuity of the diversion profile with the upstream node hydraulic grade can be observed (i.e. the profile at
the upstream end of the diversion link will be different than the profile at the upstream
end of the non-diversion link and the upstream node). Usually this difference is small.
If the diversion links upstream hydraulic grade is higher than the upstream node
hydraulic grade, it indicates that either the diverted flow is too big or the diversion
conduit is undersized. The reverse case is also true. For multiple diversions, such as
those seen in a wastewater treatment plant, the multiple diversion profiles provide a
clue to adjust the multiple diversion curves so that the resulting profiles are continuously connected to the upstream node hydraulic grade. If the upstream heads in the
diversion links are significantly different than that at the upstream node, the user may
wish to modify the flow split or modify the hydraulic characteristics of the system
downstream of the split.
Sections Results Dialog Box

The Section Results dialog box shows the calculated flow variables at the start, middle
and end of a pipe, conduit, or channel section. You can view the data but you cannot
edit it while in the dialog.
The dialog box contains a table displaying the section results and the following
control:
Report

report of the sections results.
The table displays the following section results:
6-292
Section Distance
Section Velocity
Section Flow
Section Hydraulic Grade
Section Depth
Section Flow-Width
Section Flow-Area
Section Is Overflowing?
Section Froude Number
Creating Your Model

To open this dialog box, go to the Results section of the Property Editor for a pipe,
conduit, or a channel after the model has been calculated. Then click the Ellipsis ()
button in the Section Results field.
To find flow results for more than 3 points in a conduit, under Analysis -> Calculation
Options, choose an appropriate computational distance (that divides the conduit in
more than 2 sections).
1. To view the section results for all conduits, do the following:
2. Open the FlexTables for Conduits.
3. Click on Edit and Add the Output Options Column to the FlexTable.
4. Choose Global Edit & Choose Detailed Results.
5. Once this is done, run your model.
6. Now, use animation control to go to the time step you're interested in.
7. Click on a pipe and open the Properties grid.
8. Under Results, look at the "Sections Results" collection.
What Happens When the Water Level Exceeds the Top Elevation of
an Open Channel?
When the hydraulic grade line (HGL) exceeds the channel top elevation, the last width
defined for the channel (or the cross section node) is extended vertically to no limit.
So there is no overflow for these. When the channel is bounded by a manhole, overflow occurs at the manhole.
How Do Cross Section Nodes Control the Shape of Channel

Cross-Sections?
When you connect a channel between two cross section nodes, the cross-section of the
channel is interpolated between the two cross section nodes. When there is only one
cross-section node at either the upstream or downstream end of a channel, then the
channel will have a constant cross-section, as defined by that one cross-section node.
If there is a cross section node at each end of a channel, then the channel will start with
a cross section as defined in the upstream cross-section node, and will make a transition to the cross-section defined in the downstream cross section node.
6-293

When you connect a channel to a conduit at a cross-section node, a transition is added
between the channel and the conduit. You can specify the type of transition in the
Property Editor for the cross-section node as either Gradual or Abrupt. If you specify
Abrupt, the top width of the channel cross-section is used as the length of the transition part. If you select Gradual, you enter a value for the Transition Length. If the
Transition Length is larger than the top width of the cross-section node, the Transition
Length value is used as the length of the transition part.
Pressure Elements in the Gradually Varied Flow Solver

The Gradually Varied Flow (GVF) rational solver does not directly support pressure
pipes or pressure junctions. To runthe GVF-Rational solver on a model, the software
internally converts pressure pipes and pressure junctions to conduits and manholes
during calculation, respectively. To protect the original data, the pressure pipe and
pressure junction elements are not changed in the model, only invisibly during GVF
solver loading .
Pressure pipes are treated as circular conduits and are solved with Mannings equation
with the following rules applied to the converted conduit:
The converted conduit has the same diameter as the pressure pipe.
Pressure pipe roughness is converted to an equivalent conduit roughness value

based on the pressure friction method and gravity friction method as follows:
Manning's n = 1.3/C, where C is Hazen Williams C
Manning's n = 0.0952/(|ln(e/7.4 + 0.000182)|), where e is Darcy Weisbach e
Manning's n = Kutter's n
Virtual pipes are treated as physical pipes, using the original data.
Number of Barrels is set to 1.
Design Conduit is set to False.
Pressure junctions are treated as manholes with the following rules applied to the
converted manhole:
6-294
Manhole diameter is set to zero.
Manhole rim elevation is set to the highest crown elevation of connected pressure
pipes.
Manhole is set to Bolted.
Manhole Design is set to False.
Creating Your Model
Gutters in the SewerCAD Gradually Varied Flow Solver

When computing with the GVF-Convex (SewerCAD) Solver, gutter surface flows are
ignored and not computed. Inlet capture calculations are not performed, and catchbasin nodes are treated as if they were a 'Full Capture' inlet type (see Inlet Type).
Therefore, no bypass gutter flow exists. This also means that, like manholes, catchments with a catch basin outflow node accept all runoff.
Parabolic Gutters in the SewerGEMS Dynamic Wave Solver

The Dynamic Wave solver approximately models a gutter as a depth vs. width rating
table based channel. Therefore, the solved depth and spread results for the gutter link
will not be as accurate as the StormCAD Gradually Varied Flow-Rational solver
implementation of HEC-22 gutters.
Note:
When gutter is connected to a catchbasin with an inlet type for

which depth and spread arent calculated, some results will be
reported as N/A.
Cross Sections in the Gradually Varied Flow Solver

For a node, the Flow (In) result is all flows from incoming pipes, but does not include
local inflow into the node. It is otherwise the same as Flow (Out) since the Gradually
Varied Flow calculations have no storage effect.
The following input data will not be used by the GVF-Rational Solver, and user notifications will be generated on compute or validate:
Roughness Type: If the Roughness Type is a value of Manning's n - Depth Curve

or Manning's n -Flow Curve.
Transition Type: If the Transition Type is Gradual and the Transition Length is
greater than zero.
Pipe-Arch and Arch Conduit Shapes

In SewerGEMS and CivilStorm for the Implicit and Explicit solvers you have the
option of the "Arch" shape type. This is simply defined by a rise and span. For the
Explicit solver you have the additional option of the Arch Data Type.
In SewerCAD and StormCAD for the GVF-Convex and GVF-Rational solvers you
can only use a Pipe-Arch shape as a Catalog Conduit reference. If the conduit is user
defined you do not have the option of either Pipe-Arch or Arch.
If you set the conduit type to "Catalog Conduit" you can select, if available, the PipeArch conduit shape which will in turn filter any catalog conduits that are of that type.
6-295

Note that if you have SewerGEMS/CivilStorm SELECTseries 2 model which references a Pipe-Arch from the Catalog Conduit library, upon conversion to SELECTseries 3 those references will be converted to User-Defined Arch shapes local to each
relevant conduit. The more complex Pipe-Arch shape is only supported by the
Rational and GVF-Convex engines. A validation error will occur if the Pipe-Arch
shape is used with the Implicit or Explicit engines.
Conversely, if you set up a StormCAD or SewerCAD SELECTseries 3 model (or
within SewerGEMS or CivilStorm using the appropriate GVF solver) and the conduit
is set to user defined with the Arch conduit shape you will get an error message that
will prevent the model from computing. If you receive this error, change the conduit to
catalog conduit and select a pipe-arch reference.
Catch Basins
Catch basin element
Catch basins convey surface water into a storm sewer pipe system. A catch basin
(a.k.a., storm drain inlet, curb inlet) is an inlet to the storm drain system that typically
includes a grate or curb inlet where stormwater enters the catch basin and a sump to
capture sediment, debris and associated pollutants. They are also used in combined
sewer watersheds to capture floatables and settle some solids.
When you click the catch basin element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a catch basin element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this
tool is active causes a catch basin element to be placed at the location of the mouse
cursor.
CivilStorm V8i now supports HEC-22 inlet capacity calculations. You can set up
inlets (grate, combination, curb opening, etc.) and CivilStorm V8i will compute inlet
capacity based on flow to the inlet, as well as inlet and gutter geometry.
Related Topics
6-296
Adding Inflow vs. Capture Data to a Catch Basin on page 6-297
Inlet Type on page 6-297
Adding Surface Depth vs. Area Data to a Catch Basin or a Manhole on page 6301
Catch Basin Attributes on page 15-1348
Creating Your Model
Inlet Type
The inflow to a catch basin does not all enter the basin. The flow that actually enters
the basin is referred to as its capture.
A catch basin may:
Capture all the flow that comes to it, which is referred to as full capture.
Capture all of the flow up to a maximum capacity, and you specify the
maximum flow.
Capture flow in accordance with some curve called an inflow vs. capture curve.
For more information on inflow vs. capture curves, see Adding Inflow vs.
Capture Data to a Catch Basin on page 6-297.
When Inlet Type is set to Catalog Inlet, with the Inlet attribute you can select
a Catalog Inlet reference. By referencing a catalog inlet, the capture is computed
instead of defined by the user. For more information on Catalog Inlets see Inlet
Catalog Dialog Box.
Capture a percentage of flow that comes to it, which is referred to as "percent

capture.
Any inflow that is not captured goes to a gutter. If there is no gutter, the inflow that is
not captured is lost from the system.
Adding Inflow vs. Capture Data to a Catch Basin

You can add an Inflow vs. Capture curve to any catch basin in your model. The Inflow
vs. Capture curve plots the total inflow against the total captured flow for a series of
data points that you define.
To add Inflow vs. Capture data to a catch basin:
1. Click a catch basin in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a
catch basin and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Inlet section of the Property Editor, select Inflow-Capture Curve as the
Inlet Type. The Inflow-Capture Curve field becomes available.
3. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Inflow-Capture Curve field.
4. In the Inflow-Capture Curve dialog box, each row in the table represents a data
point on the Inflow-Capture curve. Type values for the Total Inlet Flow and Inlet
Capture for each row. Click the New button to add a row or press the Tab key to
advance to the next field in the table.
To delete a row from the table, select the row then click Delete.
6-297
To view a report on the curve, click Report.
To view a plot of the curve, click Graph.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box and save your curve data in the Property Editor.
Inflow-Capture Curve Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define Total Inflow vs. Inlet Capture tables for catchments. The dialog box contains the inflow vs. capture table along with the following
controls:
New
Creates a new row in the inflow-capture

curve table.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted row

from the inflow-capture curve table.
Report
Opens a print preview window

containing a report that details the input
data for this dialog box.
Graph
Opens a graph window plotting the

inflow-capture curve defined by the
points in the table.
6-298
Column
Description
Total Inlet Inflow
Lets you define the inflow at the current curve

point. Total inlet flow is the cumulative flow from
all catchments and other loads that actually
reaches the catch basin.
Inlet Capture
Lets you define the total captured flow for the

current curve point. Inlet capture is the portion of
the total inlet flow that actually enters the catch
basin and is passed downstream.
Creating Your Model
Catch Basins in the SewerCAD Gradually Varied Flow Solver

When computing with the GVF-Convex (SewerCAD) Solver, gutter surface flows are
ignored and not computed. Inlet capture calculations are not performed, and catchbasin nodes are treated as if they were a 'Full Capture' inlet type (see Inlet Type).
This also means that, like manholes, catchments with a catch basin outflow node
accept all runoff.
Flow (Local Surface) at Catch Basins

The "Flow (Local Surface)" attribute represents all surface flows to the inlet of a catch
basin. This includes runoff flow from catchments, flow derived from the Inflow (Wet
Weather) collection on the catch basin, and upstream carry over flow in gutters.
Sanitary Loads on Catch Basins should be added directly into the system, and should
not be applied as surface flow.
SWMM Engine
Sanitary Loads will be applied to a catch basin when using the SWMM engine in a
different manner depending on which routing method (Dynamic, Kinematic, Uniform)
is used.
Sanitary Loading at Catch Basins when using Kinematic, Uniform:

When using these routing methods the sanitary loading will be applied to the
Catch Basin differently depending on the inlet type, which determines whether or
not the catch basin is split into two nodes upon export to SWMM.
HEC-22 in Sag, Inflow-Capture Flow Curve, Percent Capture with Non

Dynamic:
For these inlet types, catch basins are split into two nodes upon export; a
surface node, and a subsurface node. In other words the sanitary loads on the
catch basin will be applied to the subsurface node.
Full Capture:
If the inlet type is full capture, then the catch basin will be exported as two
nodes. All wet weather flows will be applied to the main node, whereas the
sanitary loads will be applied to a dummy node connected to the main node
by a virtual link. This allows surface flow to be differentiated from internal
flow.
Sanitary Loading at Catch Basins when using Dynamic Routing:

When using the dynamic routing method, and a sanitary load exists on the catch
basin, the load will be applied to the node differently depending on the inlet type
that is used.
6-299
Full Capture, HEC-22 on Grade, Inflow-Capture Flow Curve, Percent

Capture:
For these inlet types, internal SWMM engine modifications handle the inlet/
flow split calculations. A separate injection node is created and connected to
the catch basin node with a dummy/virtual conduit.
For example, in the following system with two catch basins. CB-1 has an
applied sanitary load, whereas CB-2 does not. CB-1 and CB-2 have HEC-22
style inlets.
Upon export to SWMM a junction is created connected to CB-1 with the

name CB-1-SAN, where all sanitary loads are applied.
Dynamic Wave (Implicit) Solver

The Dynamic Wave (Implicit) solver treats the dry weather flow (sanitary load) the
same for all type of sanitary loads; it creates a separate inflow for the load and the
solver knows that the inflow is a dry weather flow (a new inflow type is added in the
input file).
For the calculation, the solver will not include the dry weather flow when calculating
the inlet capture/bypass flows, so the dry weather flow is always added to the pipe
system and there is no bypass flow for them.
All other calculations are unaffected.
6-300
Creating Your Model
Manholes
Manhole element
Manholes are placed in a sewer system to provide access for inspection, maintenance,
and emergency service. Manholes should be placed at sewer junctions (i.e., tees, wyes,
and crosses), upstream terminal ends of sewers, and locations where there is a change
in sewer grade or direction. Manholes are locations where loads enter the gravity
portion of the sewer system.
When you click the manhole element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a manhole element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool
is active causes a manhole element to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
Related Topics
Manhole Attributes on page 15-1340
What is the Difference Between a Drop Manhole and a Regular Manhole? on

page 16-1421
Adding Surface Depth vs. Area Data to a Catch Basin or a Manhole

You can add a Surface Depth vs. Area curve to any catch basin or manhole in your
model. The Surface Depth vs. Area curve plots depth against area for a series of data
points that you define.
To add Surface Depth vs. Area data to a catch basin or a manhole:
1. Display the Property Editor for a catch basin or manhole by clicking the element
in the Drawing Pane, or by right-clicking the element then selecting Properties
from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Physical: Surface Storage section of the Property Editor, select Surface
Depth- Area Curve as the Surface Storage Type. The Surface Depth-Area Curve
field becomes available.
3. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Surface Depth-Area Curve field.
4. In the Surface Depth-Area Curve dialog box, each row in the table represents a
data point on the Surface Depth-Area curve. Type values for the Depth and Area
for each row. Click the New button to add a row or press the Tab key to advance
to the next field in the table.
6-301
Surface Depth-Area Curve Editor

This dialog box allows you to define Depth vs. Area tables for manholes and catch
basins. The dialog box contains the depth-area table and the following buttons:
New
Creates a new row in the depth-area table.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted row from

the depth-area table.
Report

dialog box.
Graph
Opens a graph window plotting the surface

depth-area curve defined by the points in the
table.

Column
Description
Depth
The depth data for the curve.
Area
The area data for the curve.
Flow Headloss Curves Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to enter flow vs. headloss data for a manhole or transition
element.
The dialog box contains the Flow vs. Headloss table along with the following
controls:
6-302
New: This button creates a new Flow-Headloss Curve.
Duplicate: Creates a copy of the currently selected Flow-Headloss Curve.
Creating Your Model
Delete: This button deletes the currently highlighted Flow-Headloss Curve.
Rename: This button allows you to rename the currently highlighted Flow-Headloss Curve.
Report: Opens a print preview window containing a report that details the input
Synchronization Options: Clicking this button opens a submenu containing the

following commands:
Browse Engineering LibraryOpens the Engineering Library manager

dialog, allowing you to browse the Flow-Headloss Curve Library.
Synchronize From LibraryLets you update a flow-headloss curve previously imported from a Flow-Headloss Curve Library. The updates reflect
changes that have been made to the library since it was imported.
Synchronize To LibraryLets you update an existing Flow-Headloss Curve

Library using current flow-headloss curves that were initially imported but
have since been modified.
Import From LibraryLets you import a flow-headloss curve from an

existing Flow-Headloss Curve Library.
Export To LibraryLets you export the current flow-headloss curve to an

existing Flow-Headloss Curve Library.
Flow: This field allows you to define the flow at the current curve point.
Headloss: This field allows you to define the headloss for the current curve point.
The tab section is used to define the settings for the flow-headloss curve that is
currently highlighted in the flow-headloss curve list pane. The following controls are
available:
Data Tab
This tab consists of input data fields that allow you

to define the points that make up the flowheadloss curve.
Flow
Enter the flow data point.
Headloss
Headloss at the associated flow data point value.
6-303
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the flowheadloss curve that is currently highlighted in the
flow-headloss curve list pane. If the curve is
derived from an engineering library, the
synchronization details can be found here. If the
curve was created manually for this project, the
synchronization details will display the message
Orphan (local), indicating that the curve was not
derived from a library entry.
Notes Tab
This tab contains a text field that is used to type

descriptive notes that will be associated with the
flow-headloss curve that is currently highlighted
in the flow-headloss curve list pane.
To assign a Flow-Headloss curve to a node element:

1. Double-click the node element in your model to display the Property Editor, or
right-click a node and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Physical (Structure Losses) section of the Property Editor, select FlowHeadloss Curve as the Headloss Method. The Flow-Headloss Curve field
becomes available.
3. Click the <Select...> list item in the Flow-Headloss Curve field.
4. In the Flow-Headloss Curves Dialog Box, all of the Flow-Headloss Curves that
have been created for the model are listed in the left pane. Create a new Curve by
clicking the New button.
5. The data for each Flow-Headloss Curve is displayed in the table on the right. Each
row in the table represents a data point on the Flow-Headloss Curve curve. Type
values for the Flow and Headloss for each row. Click the New button to add a row
or press the Tab key to advance to the next field in the table.
a. To delete a row from the table, select the row then click Delete.
b. To view a report on the curve, click Report.
Overflow in the SewerGEMS Dynamic Wave Solver

The behavior of manhole overflow when using the SewerGEMS Dynamic Wave
solver varies depending on which Surface Storage Type you choose as follows:
No Storage: overflow at rim elevation
6-304
Creating Your Model

Default Storage Equation: overflow at 0.4 ft above the rim
Ponded Area: no overflow
Surface Depth-Area Curve: overflow at the highest depth in the table
Cross Sections
Cross section element
When you click the cross section element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a cross section element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this
tool is active causes a cross section element to be placed at the location of the mouse
cursor.
You can model an open channel with the combination of a channel link and a cross
section network element. The transect of the channel is defined by the upstream cross
section node attributes. You have the option to define the channel shape as User
Defined or using a Conduit Catalog reference. The user defined 'Section Types' are
Trapezoidal Cross Section and Irregular Channel. If the Cross Section Type is Catalog
Cross Section, you may select a Conduit Catalog reference that is a trapezoidal or
irregular channel shape. The other catalog conduit shapes are not applicable to cross
section nodes.
Related Topics
Cross Section Attributes on page 15-1368
Junctions
Junction element
Junction chambers are locations where upstream flows in a gravity system combine.
No loads enter the sewer at these points.
6-305

When you click the junction chamber element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse
cursor changes into a junction chamber element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane
while this tool is active causes a junction chamber element to be placed at the location
of the mouse cursor.
Related Topics
Junction Chamber Attributes on page 15-1408
Pressure Junctions
Pressure junction element
Pressure junctions are connections between two or more pressure pipes of varying
characteristics. Loads may enter a pressure portion of a network through a pressure
junction.
When you click the pressure junction on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a pressure junction element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while
this tool is active causes a pressure junction element to be placed at the location of the
mouse cursor.
Related Topics
Pressure Junction Attributes on page 15-1413
Pond Outlet Entrances
Outlet structure element
When you click the outlet structure element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a outlet structure element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while
this tool is active causes a outlet structure element to be placed at the location of the
mouse cursor.
6-306
Creating Your Model

Note:
If there are multiple discharges locations serving a pond then

they must all be modeled in the same manner; that is, they must
either all be modeled with outlet control structures, or all
modeled without outlet control structures.
The outlet control structure hydraulics normally result in relationships (as we

expressed and internally used in the form of E-Q-T), however in some unusual conditions, characterized by an extremely undersized downstream conduit from the control,
the use of EQT can result in instabilities for extreme flows (as compared with the
downstream conduit capacity). In order to prevent such instability from happening,
the model adds a flow filter to limit the flow from the control if the flow exceeds overflow level. The overflow level is:
Q(over) = 1.5 * Q(capacity) +0.5 (cfs)
If the Q given by EQT, Q(eqt), exceeds the overflow level, the model uses the
following filtered new flow:
Q(new) = Q(over) + 0.05 * ( Q(eqt) Q(over))
Related Topics
Defining Composite Outlet Structures on page 6-307
Irregular Weir Cross Section Dialog Box on page 6-323
Pond Outlet Structure Attributes on page 15-1366
Defining Composite Outlet Structures

SewerGEMS V8i lets you define composite outlet structures for pond outlet structures
in your model. A composite outlet structure can contain any combination of orifices,
risers, and weirs. You define these outlet structures in the Composite Outlet Structures
dialog box.
6-307
Composite Outlet Structures Dialog Box

The Composite Outlet Structures dialog lets you create complex outlet structures.
The dialog consists of a tree view pane and property editor on the left and a tabbed
section on the right. The tree view displays all of the outlet structure definitions associated with the project. The property editor allows you to define the attributes of the
element currently highlighted in the tree view. Above the tree view are the following
buttons:
New: Creates a new entry in the list pane.
Delete: Removes the entry that is currently highlighted in the list pane
Rename: Allows you to enter a new label for the entry that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
Duplicate: Creates a copy of the entry that is currently highlighted in the list
pane.
6-308
Creating Your Model
Expand All: Expands each of the nodes in the tree view, so that all entries
are displayed.
Collapse All: Collapses each of the nodes so that only the top-level nodes
are visible.
Report: Generates a preformatted report that details the data associated with
the entry that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
Compute: When you click this button a submenu opens. The submenu
contains the following commands:
Validate: Click this button to perform a validation on the entry that is

currently highlighted in the list pane.
Compute: Click this button to compute the entry that is currently highlighted
in the list pane.
Compute All: Click this button to compute all of the entries in the list pane.
Help: Opens the online help associated with this dialog.
The attributes displayed in the property editor section below the tree view will change
depending on the type of node that is currently highlighted in the tree view. Depending
on the node type, the property grid allows you to define the following attributes:
Composite Structure Node (Top Level Node): When a top level node is highlighted in the tree view, the following properties are available:
ID: Unique identifier assigned to this element.
Label: Descriptive label for this element.
Notes: Additional informkation about this element.
Headwater Type: The type of headwater range to use.
Pond: The pond to use for headwater range.
6-309

Note:
The <Automatic> headwater/tailwater calculation only works if

you access this dialog through the Properties grid. If you access
it from the components menu (where topology is not known and
the range has already been set by a previous calculation) the
standard validation is executed.
The headwater and tailwater elements do not need to be userdefined to determine the ranges. If edited from the Properties
grid of the pond outlet structure node the ranges will
automatically be determined ( in the same way as if you
computed the entire hydraulic model).
6-310
Minimum (Headwater): The minimum pond surface elevation to use in the

headwater range.
Increment (Headwater): The step value represents the step increment for the
rating table. As a general rule, interpolation precision between table points
increases as the step increment is decreased.
Maximum (Headwater): The maximum pond surface elevation to use in the

headwater range.
Spot Elevations (Headwater): The spot elevations for the headwater range.
Tailwater Range Type: Select the type of tailwater range to specify. You can
specify a user defined range or automatically determine the range by selecting
a pond or outfall.
Downstream Element ID: Specify the domain element in which to determine

the tailwater range or leave it set to Automatic and let the application figure it
out automatically.
Minimum (Tailwater): The minimum tailwater elevation to use in the range.
Increment (Tailwater): Set the step used to compute the rating curve for the
elevation beginning at the minimum tailwater and increment by this tailwater
step elevation until the maximum tailwater is reached. In general, smaller tailwater step increments yield more precise routing interpolation.
Maximum (Tailwater): The maximum tailwater elevation to use in the range.
Spot Elevations (Tailwater): The spot elevations for the tailwater range.
Store Elevation-Flow-Tailwater Table: Determines if the elevation-flowtailwater curves are stored. This option can be used in conjunction with the
Store Elevation-Flow-Tailwater Table? Calculation Option. See Store Elevation-Flow-Tailwater Table for more details.
Elevation-Flow-Tailwater Table: The E-Q-TW table to save results to.
Maximum Iterations: During iterative tailwater convergence procedures,

computations will stop after exceeding the specified maximum iterations.
Creating Your Model
Headwater Tolerance (Minimum): If SewerGEMS V8i is checking

computed headwater (HW) elevations during the iterative HW convergence
computations, minimum headwater tolerance and maximum headwater tolerance values specify the minimum target convergence and the maximum
allowable difference between the computed value and the known headwater
value.
Headwater Tolerance (Maximum): If SewerGEMS V8i is checking

computed headwater (HW) elevations during the iterative HW convergence
computations, minimum headwater tolerance and maximum headwater tolerance values specify the minimum target convergence and the maximum
allowable difference between the computed value and the known headwater
value.
Tailwater Tolerance (Minimum): If SewerGEMS V8i is checking computed

tailwater (TW) elevations during the iterative TW convergence computations,
minimum tailwater tolerance and maximum tailwater tolerance values specify
the minimum target convergence and the maximum allowable difference
between the computed value and the known tailwater value.
Tailwater Tolerance (Maximum): If SewerGEMS V8i is checking

computed tailwater (TW) elevations during the iterative TW convergence
computations, minimum tailwater tolerance and maximum tailwater tolerance
values specify the minimum target convergence and the maximum allowable
difference between the computed value and the known tailwater value.
Flow Tolerance (Minimum): If SewerGEMS V8i is checking computed flow

during the iterative TW convergence computations, these tolerance values
specify the minimum target convergence and the maximum allowable difference between the computed value and the known flow value. Iterative computations on flow are ended when either the solution converges within the
minimum flow tolerance, or when more than the specified maximum iterations are performed. In general, smaller flow tolerances yield more precise
convergence.
Flow Tolerance (Maximum): If SewerGEMS V8i is checking computed

flow during the iterative TW convergence computations, these tolerance
values specify the minimum target convergence and the maximum allowable
difference between the computed value and the known flow value. Iterative
computations on flow are ended when either the solution converges within the
minimum flow tolerance, or when more than the specified maximum iterations are performed. In general, smaller flow tolerances yield more precise
convergence.
Orifice Attributes: When an Orifice is selected in the tree view the following
attributes are available:
Elevation: Structures invert elevation.
Outlet ID: Upstream structure ID.
Flow Direction: Defines the direction in which flow is considered.
6-311
Downstream ID: Downstream Structure ID.
Notes: Additional information about this element.
Elevation (On): Elevation (On) is the lower elevation of range over which to
use this structure. No flows will be computed for elevations less than this
value. If 0.0 then this value is ignored.
Elevation (Off): Elevation (Off) is the upper elevation of range over which to
use this structure. No flows will be computed for elevations equal to or greater
than this number. If 0.0 then this value is ignored.
Orifice: The type of orifice this structure represents.
Number of Openings: Set the number of openings the orifice uses.
Orifice Coefficient: The orifice coefficient for this structure.
Orifice Diameter: The orifice diameter for this structure.
Orifice Area: The orifice area for this structure.
Orifice Orientation: The orientation of this orifice structure.
Datum Elevation: The datum elevation for this orifice structure.
Top Elevation: The top elevation of this orifice structure.
Riser Attributes: When a Riser is selected in the tree view the following
Riser: The type of riser for this structure.
Diameter: The stand pipe diameter for this structure.
Weir Coefficient: The coefficient of discharge multiplied by other constants

in the weir flow equation. For example, flow over a rectangular weir with no
end contractions can be determined using the following equation:
2
Q --- C d 2gLH 3 2
3
6-312
Creating Your Model

Where:
-
Q = discharge (cfs, m3/s)
Cd = coefficient of discharge
g = gravitational constant (32.2 ft/s2, 9.81 m/s2)
L = length of the weir crest (ft, m)
H = height of the energy grade above weir crest (ft, m)
In this case the Weir Coeffcient, Q --- C d 2g (ft0.5/s, m0.5/s), simpli3

fying the weir equation to: Q CLH 3 2 .
A typical value for the Weir Coefficient is 3.3 (ft0.5/s) or 1.8 (m0.5/s).
Orifice Coefficient: The orifice coefficient for this structure.
Orifice Area: The orifice area of this riser structure.
Transition Elevation: The transition elevation for this structure.
Transition Height: The transition height for this structure.
K Reverse: The K reverse coefficient for this structure.
Weir Length: The weir length of this riser structure.
Use Orifice Depth to Crest?: There are two methods available to calculate
the headwater depth of a fully charged riser orifice. The default method
measures the headwater depth from the riser crest to the headwater elevation.
The other method measures the headwater depth from the tailwater elevation
to the headwater elevation. To use the first method, this value should be set to
True (the default). To use the second method, set this property to False.
If the Use Orifice Depth to Crest property is set to True, then Head Across
Orifice = Pond Elevation - Riser Crest Elevation.
If the Use Orifice Depth to Crest property is set to False, then Head Across
Orifice = Pond Elevation - Tailwater Elevation.
Use Submerged Weir Equation?: There are two methods available to calculate a fully-charged riser weir flow: non-submerged weir and submerged weir.
The non-submerged weir method is used when this property is set to False
(the default method). When this property is set to True, the submerged weir
method is used.
If the Use Submerged Weir Equation? property is set to False, then:
Qw = Kwc * Lw * (Pond Elevation - riser crest)1.5
Where:
-
Qw = weir flow through the riser
6-313

-
Kwc = riser weir flow coefficient
Lw = riser weir length
If the Use Submerged Weir Equation? property is set to True, then

Qws = Qw * (1 - (H2/H1)1.5)0.385
Where:
6-314
Qw = weir flow through the riser
Qws = weir flow through riser (weir is submerged)
H1 = Pond Elevation - Riser Crest Elevation
H2 = Tailwater Elevation - Riser Crest Elevation
Culvert Attributes: When a Culvert is selected in the tree view the following
Culvert Type: The type of culvert.
Convergence Tolerance: Performance can be greatly increased by increasing

the convergence tolerance. However, since this parameter affects the calculation precision, the results should be checked to see if this assumption
produces results within an acceptable precision.
Specify Number of Backwater Sections: Specify to use a user defined

number of backwater sections.
Number of Backwater Sections: Calculation performance can usually be

greatly increased by setting the number of backwater sections to three. Results
should be checked to see if this assumption produces results with an acceptable precision.
Inlet Description: The description of the culvert coefficients.
Chart: The inlet chart that this set of coefficients appears on.
Nomograph: The culvert nomograph this set of coefficients belongs to.
Equation Form: The type of equation form to use for this culvert.
K: K and M are equation coefficients used in both forms of the unsubmerged

inlet control equation.
M: K and M are equation coefficients used in both forms of the unsubmerged

inlet control equation.
Creating Your Model
C: C and Y are equation coefficients used in the submerged inlet control equation.
Y: C and Y are equation coefficients used in the submerged inlet control equation.
Mannings n: The Mannings n coefficient for this culvert.
Ke: The Ke coefficient.
Kr: The Kr coefficient.
Slope Correction Factor: The slope correction factor to use for this culvert.
Number of Barrels: The number of barrels for this culvert.
Length: The length of this culvert.
Upstream Invert: The upstream invert of the culvert.
Downstream Invert: The downstream invert of the culvert.
Diameter: The culvert diameter.
Width: The culvert width.
Height: The culvert height.
Specify Transitions: Defines whether user defined transitions are used.
HW/D End Unsubmerged: The user defined HW end unsubmerged value.
HW/D Begin Submerged: The user defined HW begin submerged value.
Compute Outlet Control Only: Determines if inlet control only is considered during calculations.
Weir Attributes: When a Weir is selected in the tree view the following attributes
are available:
Weir: The type of weir for this structure.
6-315
Vary Coefficient with Depth: Determines if a depth-coefficient table is

considered.
Weir Coefficient: The coefficient of discharge multiplied by other constants

in the weir flow equation. For example, flow over a rectangular weir with no
end contractions can be determined using the following equation:
2
Q --- C d 2gLH 3 2
3
Where:
-
Q = discharge (cfs, m3/s)
Cd = coefficient of discharge
g = gravitational constant (32.2 ft/s2, 9.81 m/s2)
L = length of the weir crest (ft, m)
H = height of the energy grade above weir crest (ft, m)
In this case the Weir Coeffcient, Q --- C d 2g (ft0.5/s, m0.5/s), simpli3

fying the weir equation to: Q CLH 3 2 .
A typical value for the Weir Coefficient is 3.3 (ft0.5/s) or 1.8 (m0.5/s).
6-316
Weir-Depth Coefficient Table: The weir depth coefficient table to use for
this weir structure.
Coefficient of Discharge: The ratio of actual discharge to theoretical

discharge across a weir (the differences between actual and theoretical values
are generally due to contractions and energy losses). Note that the coefficient
of discharge is unitless and is different from a weir coefficient, and is typically on the order of 0.6. This property is only available for V-Notch Weirs.
V-Notch Angle: The angle for this v-notch weir structure.
User Defined Table: Determines if a weir submergence table is considered

for this weir structure.
Weir Submergence Table: The weir submergence table to use with this weir
structure.
Irregular Weir: The station-depth curve for this irregular weir section.
Creating Your Model
Rectangular Weir: The type of rectangular weir for this structure.
Weir Length: The weir length for this weir structure.
Rating Table Attributes: When a Rating Table is selected in the tree view the
following attributes are available:
Elevation-Flow Curve: The user defined depth-elevation curve for this structure.
Vortex Valve Attributes: When a Vortex Valve is selected in the tree view the
following attributes are available:
Vortex Valve: Allows you to select the vortex valve to use. Click the ellipsis
(...) button to open the Vortex Valve dialog.
The tabbed section on the right contains the following tabs:
Results Tab: This tab consists of a graph displaying the calculated results for the
element that is currently highlighted in the tree view pane.
6-317
Rating Table Tab: This tab displays a rating table of the calculated results for the
element that is currently highlighted in the tree view pane.
Store Elevation-Flow-Tailwater Table

The Store Elevation-Flow-Tailwater Table property in the Composite Outlet Structures dialog (well refer to this as Option 1) and the Store Elevation-Flow-Tailwater
Table? Calculation Option (well refer to this as Option 2) are related, but slightly
different.
Option 1 allows you to store the results of an interconnected outlet structure (which is
a composite outlet structure with a tailwater setting of "Interconnected Ponds") into an
Elevation-Flow-Tailwater curve.
You first set this option to "Yes" and then specify the table to store the data in. If there
is no table available yet you can select "<Create New EQTW Series>" which will
automatically create one for you with the label of the composite outlet structure.
The storing of the results into the Elevation-Flow-Tailwater curve is generally done
only when computing from the composite outlet structure dialog box. However, there
is an option in Bentley SewerGEMS V8ithat allows you to store these results when
you run the scenario.
Option 2 allows you to store the Elevation-Flow-Tailwater table when computing the
scenario that uses the calculation options you just modified. It tells the engine that if
the pond outlet link has the "Has Control Structure?" property set to "Yes" and an
assigned composite outlet structure that has a tailwater of "Interconnected Ponds" and
the "Store Elevation-Flow-Tailwater Table" set to "Yes" to store the results in the specified table.
These two options are used in conjunction with each other. You would not normally
set Option 2 to True if you are not using interconnected pond routing or have an outlet
structure that has "Store Elevation-Flow-Tailwater" set to No.
If, however, you have Option 2 set to False and Option 1 set to Yes and for the latter
have the "<Create New EQTW Series>" selected, a new blank Elevation-Flow-Tailwater Series table will be created with no data.
If you have Option 1 set to Yes with an actual table specified and Option 2 set to False
and you compute the scenario the data in the selected Elevation-Flow-Tailwater table
will NOT change.
Option 1 can be used alone but Option 2 should be used with Option 1.
6-318
Creating Your Model

EQT Curves
EQT curves refer to the relationship between the flow (Q) through a structure and the
elevation (E) of the water upstream of the structure and the water elevation in the tailwater (T) downstream of the structure. They consist of a family of curves with
upstream elevation on the horizontal axis, flow on the vertical axis and individual
curves for different tailwater elevations.
EQT curves are an intermediate step in the hydraulic calculations for pond outlets
(composite outlet structure), and (box and circular) conduits that are culverts.
To view the EQT curve for a structure (after an implicit or explicit solver run),,
1. Go to Components > Composite Outlet Structures.
2. Right clicking in a pond outlet structure and picking "Outlet Structure EQT"
graph.
3. Right clicking a conduit with a culvert and picking "Culvert EQT Graph".
When the GVF solver is used, the tailwater effect is ignored so there is only a single
EQ line. It usually corresponds to the lowest of the EQT curves.
6-319
Irregular Weir Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define the station-depth curve for an irregular weir section.
Click the New button to add a row. Click the Delete button to remove the currently
highlighted row. Click the Report button to generate a preformatted report containing
all of the curve data.
Enter the X vs. Y points to define the cross-sectional shape of the weir.
The graph pane dynamically plots the irregular weir.
6-320
Creating Your Model
Elevation-Flow Curve Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define a elevation-flow curve to use with a Rating Table
outlet structure.
all of the curve data.
Enter the Elevation vs. Flow points to define the curve.
The graph pane dynamically plots the elevation-flow curve.
Spot Elevations (Headwater) Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define the spot elevations for the headwater range.
6-321

highlighted row.
For each spot elevation enter the elevation.
Spot Elevations (Tailwater) Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define the spot elevations for the tailwater range.
highlighted row.
For each spot elevation enter the elevation.
6-322
Creating Your Model
Elevation-Flow-Area Curve Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define a elevation-flow-area curve to use with an outlet
structure using the Elevation-Flow-Area Curve Tailwater Type.
all of the curve data. Click the Graph button to generate a plot of the elevation-flowarea curve.
Enter the Elevation vs Flow vs Area points to define the curve.
Irregular Weir Cross Section Dialog Box

The Irregular Weir Cross Section dialog box allows you to define the cross-sectional
shape of an irregular weir in a composite outlet structure by entering X (Station) vs. Y
(Depth) data.
The Irregular Weir Cross Section dialog box is accessible only from within the
Composite Outlet Structures dialog box when a weir component is selected in the list
pane. For the selected weir, click the Cross Section button to display the Irregular
Weir Cross Section dialog box.
The dialog box contains the x vs. y table along with the following controls:
6-323
New
This button creates a new row in the x-y

table.
Delete
This button deletes the currently

highlighted row from the x-y table.

Column
Description
This field allows you to define the cross-sectional

distance at the current point.
This field allows you to define the depth (0 at the

weir crest) for the current point.
Outfalls
Outfall element
Outfalls represent the ultimate termination points in a sanitary sewer network.

When you click the outfall element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor changes
into a outfall element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active
causes a outfall element to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
Related Topics
Adding Time vs. Elevation Data to an Outfall on page 6-324
Adding Elevation vs. Flow Data to an Outfall on page 6-326
Adding Cyclic Time vs. Elevation Data to an Outfall on page 6-328
Outfall Attributes on page 15-1359
Adding Time vs. Elevation Data to an Outfall

You can define tidal curve tables for outfalls in SewerGEMS V8i. You define a tidal
curve for an outfall as a Time vs. Elevation curve.
6-324
Creating Your Model

Note:
You can also add a Cyclic Time vs. Elevation curve to an outfall.
For more information, see Adding Cyclic Time vs. Elevation Data
to an Outfall on page 6-328.
To add a Time vs. Elevation curve to an outfall:

1. Click an outfall in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click an
outfall and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Boundary Condition section of the Property Editor, select Time-Elevation
Curve in the Boundary Condition Type field. The Time-Elevation Curve field
becomes available.
3. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Time-Elevation Curve field.
4. In the Time-Elevation Curve dialog box, each row in the table represents a point
on the Time-Elevation curve. Type values for the Time and Elevation for each
row. Click the New button to add a row or press the Tab key to advance to the
next field in the table.
Time-Elevation Curve Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define tidal curve (time vs. elevation) tables for outfalls
when the Boundary Condition is set to Time-Elevation Curve.
6-325

The dialog box contains the time-vs.-elevation table and the following buttons:
New
This button creates a new row in the tidal

curve table.
Delete

highlighted row from the tidal curve
table.
Report
This button opens a print preview

window containing a report that details
the input data for this dialog box.
Graph
This button opens a graph window

plotting the time-elevation curve defined
by the points in the table.

Column
Description
Time
This field allows you to define the hour of the tidal

curve point.
Elevation

the tidal curve point.
Adding Elevation vs. Flow Data to an Outfall

You can add an Elevation-Flow (E-Q-T) curve to an outfall in SewerGEMS V8i. Each
series of Elevation-Flow (E-Q-T) curves represents the performance curves for a pond
outlet operating under various downstream tailwater (T) elevations.
To add an Elevation vs. Flow (E-Q-T) curve to an outfall:
2. In the Boundary Condition section of the Property Editor, select Elevation-Flow
Curve in the Boundary Condition Type field. The Elevation-Flow Curve field
becomes available.
3. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Elevation-Flow Curve field.
6-326
Creating Your Model

4. In the Elevation-Flow Curve dialog box, each row in the table represents a point
on the Elevation-Flow curve. Type values for Elevation and Outlet Flow for each
Elevation-Flow Curve Dialog Box

The dialog box contains the elevation vs. flow table and the following buttons:
New
This button creates a new row in the EQ-TW curve table.
Delete

highlighted row from the E-Q-TW curve
table.
Report

Graph

plotting the elevation-volume curve
defined by the points in the table.

Column
Description
Outlet Elevation
This field allows you to define the elevation of the

E-Q-TW curve point.
Outlet Flow
This field allows you to define the flow for the EQ-TW curve point.
6-327
Adding Cyclic Time vs. Elevation Data to an Outfall

SewerGEMS V8i lets you add tidal curves to outfalls in your model. You define a tidal
curve for an outfall as a Time vs. Elevation curve.
Note:
You can also add a Time vs. Elevation curve to an outfall. For
more information, see Adding Time vs. Elevation Data to an
Outfall on page 6-324.
To add a Cyclic Time vs. Elevation curve to an outfall:

2. In the Boundary Condition section of the Property Editor, select Tidal in the
Boundary Condition Type field. The Cyclic Time-Elevation Curve field becomes
available.
3. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Cyclic Time-Elevation Curve field.
4. In the Cyclic Time-Elevation Curve dialog box, each row in the table represents a
point on the Cyclic Time-Elevation curve. Type values for Time and Elevation for
each row. Click the New button to add a row or press the Tab key to advance to
the next field in the table.
Cyclic Time-Elevation Curve Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define tidal curve (time vs. elevation) tables for outfalls
when the Boundary Condition is set to Tidal.
6-328
Creating Your Model

The dialog box contains the time-vs.-elevation table and the following buttons:
New
This button creates a new row in the tidal

curve table.
Delete

highlighted row from the tidal curve
table.
Report

Graph

plotting the time-elevation curve defined
by the points in the table.

Column
Description
Time
This field allows you to define the hour of the tidal

curve point.
Elevation

the tidal curve point.
Wet Wells
Wet well element
Wet wells are required at a pumping station to store wastewater before it is pumped.
Wet wells represent boundary conditions between pressure and gravity portions of a
sewer network. They serve as collection points for gravity systems, and as an HGL
boundary node for the pressure system. Dry loads can also enter the sewer network at
these locations.
When you click the wet well element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a wet well element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool
is active causes a wet well element to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
6-329
Related Topics
Adding Depth vs. Area Data to a Wet Well on page 6-330
Wet Well Attributes on page 15-1378
Adding Depth vs. Area Data to a Wet Well

You can add Depth vs. Area data to a wet well in your model. You define the Depth vs.
Area curve for a wet well in the Wet Well Depth-Area Curve dialog box.
To add a Depth vs. Area curve to wet well:
1. Click a wet well in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a wet
well and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Physical section of the Property Editor, select Wet Well Depth-Area
Curve in the Wet Well Boundary Type field. The Wet Well Depth-Area Curve
field becomes available.
3. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Wet Well Depth-Area Curve field.
4. In the Wet Well Depth-Area Curve dialog box, each row in the table represents a
point on the Wet Well Depth-Area curve. Type values for Depth and Area for each
Wet Well Depth-Area Curve Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define Depth vs. Area tables for wet wells. The dialog
box contains the depth-area table and the following buttons:
6-330
Creating Your Model
New
Creates a new row in the depth-area

table.
Delete

from the depth-area table.
Report

Graph

surface depth-area curve defined by the
points in the table.

Column
Description
Depth
The depth data for the curve.
Area
The area data for the curve.
Transitioning From Gravity Conduits to Pressure Pipes

The only way to transition between a gravity conduit and a force main pressure pipe in
SewerGEMS and SewerCAD is through an intermediate wet well. This establishes a
boundary condition between the upstream gravity subnetwork and the downstream
pressure subnetwork. During a Steady State analysis the wet well level can be calculated based on generating the required HGL for the outflow to either match or exceed
the inflow, or the wet well level can be fixed to a user-specified level. During an
Extended Period Simulation the wet well level is determined for a time step by calculating the change in storage over time.
The inflow into the wet well is determined by summing all loads flowing to that wet
well.
Hydraulic (HGL) Transition from Gravity to Pressure Network
Gravity hydraulic calculations upstream of a wet well are based on the wet well
hydraulic grade, just as they are for standard calculations within gravity systems.
During a Steady State analysis there is a difference, however, in determining the
hydraulic grade within the wet well itself. The wet well level may be set by the user to
either be fixed or not fixed.
6-331

Fixed Wet Well Level during Steady State Analysis
If the wet well level is fixed, the wet well's starting hydraulic grade is used for pressure calculations. No adjustments are made, and this grade is used as the tailwater
grade for the upstream gravity systems.
Non-Fixed Wet Well Level during Steady State Analysis
If the wet well level is not fixed, the pressure calculations will attempt to balance the
wet well level such that the total flow out of the wet well is equal to or greater than the
total flow into the wet well.
The wet well's starting grade is used for the first iteration. If the calculated flows out
of each wet well are greater than or equal to each wet well's incoming flow, the iterations stop there. If not, the wet well levels are increased by the increment specified in
the calculation options, and the pressure subnetwork is recalculated. When the wet
well level is increased, it changes the static heads and increases the discharge for
connected pumps, and may also trigger additional pumps to turn on.
This process continues until the level in each non-fixed wet well either meets the flow
criteria, or is prevented by rising to the maximum elevation of the wet well.
Wet Well Level During Extended Period Simulations
During an Extended Period Simulation the fixed wet well level options are not available. The wet well level for a time step is actually determined by the change in storage
due to inflows and outflows over a single time step.
Hydrologic (Flow) Transition from Gravity to Pressure Network
In the hydrologic transition from a gravity system into a pressure system, gravity loads
upstream from the wet well are accumulated and combined with the wet well's local
load to determine the total load entering the pressure system at that location. This can
be imagined as the total load "dumping into" the wet well. The GVF solver will determine the impact of the wet well on the HGL upstream but the wet well will not back
flow up into the inflow conduit in the GVF solver. If the user wants to study this
occurrence, one of the dynamic wave solvers should be used.
Connecting Gravity Conduits to Pressure Pipes
If a user attempts to connect a gravity conduit to a pressure pipe, a user notification
"Gravity elements do not have downstream wet well or outfall. Cannot flow directly
to pressure pipes. Find with network navigator." will be issued. In complex systems, it
may be difficult to locate the node where this occurs. This can be found using the
Network Navigator query "Isolated Gravity Elements". This will identify the
elements in the gravity subnetwork connected to pressure subnetworks.
6-332
Creating Your Model

Users may want to model a gravity conduit discharging into a pressure pipe in an
inverted siphon. In that situation, it is best to model the pipes in the inverted siphon as
gravity conduits with bolted manhole covers.
Pumps
Pump element
In a wastewater collection system, pumps are placed where the hydraulic grade line
must be raised. Since sewage primarily flows by gravity, a pump transports sewage
from a low elevation to a higher elevation. The sewage then flows again by gravity to
the next pumping station or until it reaches its destination.
When you click the pump element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor changes
into a manhole pump symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active
causes a manhole pump to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
Note:
Since parallel pumps are a special case of looped network, they

are not supported in the StormCAD engine.
Related Topics
Defining Pump Settings on page 6-334
Pump Curve Dialog Box on page 6-346
Pump Attributes on page 15-1375
Pumps on page 14-1223
Applying a Zone to a Pump

You can group elements together by any desired criteria through the use of zones. A
Zone can contain any number of elements and can include a combination of any or all
element types. For more information on zones and their use, see Zones on page 4-301.
To Apply a Previously Created Zone to a Pump
1. Select the pump in the Drawing View.
2. In the Properties window, click the menu in the Zone field and select the zone
you want.
6-333
Defining Pump Settings

You define the settings for each pump in your model in the Pump Definitions dialog
box. You can define a collection of pump settings for each pump.
To define pump settings
1. Click a pump in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a pump
and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Physical section of the Property Editor, click the Ellipses (...) button next to
the Pump Definitions field. The Pump Definitions dialog box opens.
3. In the Pump Definitions dialog box, each item in the list represents a separate
pump definition. Click the New button to add a new definition to the list.
4. For each definition in the list, perform these steps:
a. Type a unique label for the pump definition.
b. Define a new pump definition by entering Head, Efficiency, and Motor data.
5. Click OK to close the Pump Definitions dialog box and save your data in the
Property Editor.
Elevation Controls in the SewerCAD Engine

When using the SewerCAD Gradually Varied Flow - Convex (GVF-Convex) engine,
user defined on/off elevations will toggle the pump setting based on the HGL at the
node immediately upstream of the pump.
Internally, two logical controls will be generated for each pump during the engine
loading phase.
For example:
1. If WW-1 HGL > (On Elevation) Then Pmp-1 is ON
2. If WW-1 HGL < (Off Elevation) then Pmp-1 is OFF
You also have the option of ignoring the on and off elevations on the pump using the
"Ignore On/Off Elevations?" property. When set to True this allows the user to create
more complex logical controls with the existing infrastructure, without worrying
about potential conflicting controls.
Pump Definitions Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to create pump definitions. There are two sections: the pump
definition pane on the left and the tab section on the right. The pump definition pane is
used to create, edit, and delete pump definitions. F
6-334
Creating Your Model

The following controls are available in the pump definitions dialog box:
New
Creates a new entry in the pump definition

Pane.
Duplicate
Creates a copy of the currently highlighted

pump definition.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted entry in the

pump definition Pane.
Rename
Renames the currently highlighted entry in

the pump definition Pane.
Report
Generates a pre-formatted report that contains

the input data associated with the currently
highlighted entry in the pump definition Pane.
Synchronization
Options
Clicking this button opens a submenu

containing the following commands:
Browse Engineering LibraryOpens

the Engineering Library manager dialog,
allowing you to browse the Pump Definition Libraries.
Synchronize From LibraryUpdates a

set of pump definition entries previously
imported from a Pump Definition Engineering Library. The updates reflect
changes that have been made to the
library since it was imported.
Synchronize To LibraryUpdates an
existing Pump Definition Engineering
Library using current pump definition
entries that were initially imported but
Import From LibraryImports pump

definition entries from an existing Pump
Definition Engineering Library.
Export To LibraryExports the current

pump definition entries to an existing
Pump Definition Engineering Library.
The tab section includes the following controls:
6-335
Head Tab
This tab consists of input data fields that allow you to

define the pump head curve. The specific fields vary
depending on which type of pump is selected in the
Pump Definition type field.
Pump Definition
Type
A pump is an element that adds head to the system as water passes

through it. This software can currently be used to model six
different pump types:
Constant PowerWhen selecting a Constant Power

pump, the following attribute must be defined:
6-336
Pump PowerRepresents the water horsepower,

or horsepower that is actually transferred from the
pump to the water. Depending on the pump's efficiency, the actual power consumed (brake horsepower) may vary.
Design Point (One-Point)When selecting a Design

Point pump, the following flow vs. head points must be
defined:
ShutoffPoint at which the pump will have zero

discharge. It is typically the maximum head point on
a pump curve. This value is automatically calculated for Design Point pumps.
DesignPoint at which the pump was originally

intended to operate. It is typically the best efficiency
point (BEP) of the pump. At discharges above or
below this point, the pump is not operating under
optimum conditions.
Max OperatingHighest discharge for which the

pump is actually intended to run. At discharges
above this point, the pump may behave unpredictably, or its performance may decline rapidly. This
value is automatically calculated for Design Point
pumps.
Standard (Three-Point)When selecting a Standard

Three-Point pump, the following flow vs. head points
must be defined:

a pump curve.

optimum conditions.

above this point, the pump may behave unpredictably, or its performance may decline rapidly.
Creating Your Model
Pump Definition
Type (contd)
Standard ExtendedWhen selecting a Standard

Extended pump, the following flow vs. head points must
be defined:

a pump curve.

optimum conditions.

Max ExtendedAbsolute maximum discharge at

which the pump can operate, adding zero head to
the system. This value may be computed by the
program, or entered as a custom extended point.
This value is automatically calculated for Standard
Extended pumps.
Custom ExtendedWhen selecting a Custom

Extended pump, the following attributes must be
defined:

a pump curve.

optimum conditions.

Max ExtendedAbsolute maximum discharge at

which the pump can operate, adding zero head to
the system. This value may be computed by the
program, or entered as a custom extended point.
Multiple Point (SWMM Type 3) When selecting a

Multiple Point pump, an unlimited number of Flow vs.
Head points may be defined defined relating the pump
flow and head as found in a pump head characteristics
curve. The points should be entered in increasing order
in terms of flow.
Volume vs. FlowThe user populates a table in

increasing order with respect to volume of the flow from
the pump as a stepwise function of volume in the wet
well.
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Users
Depth vs. Flow (SWMM Type 2) The user enters a
table in increasing order with respect to depth of the

flow from the pump as a stepwise function of depth in
Guide
the wet well.
Depth Flow (Simulated Variable Speed)Variable speed in-line pump where flow varies continuously
with inlet node depth. The user enters a table giving the
flow as a function of depth in the wet well. It can be used
6-337
Efficiency Tab
This tab allows you to specify efficiency settings for

the pump that is being edited.
Pump Efficiency
Allows you to specify the pump efficiency type for the

pump that is being edited. The following efficiency
types are available:
Constant EfficiencyThis efficiency type maintains the efficiency determined by the input value
regardless of changes in discharge. When the
Constant Efficiency type is selected, the input field
is as follows:
Best Efficiency PointThis efficiency type

generates a parabolic efficiency curve using the
input value as the best efficiency point. When the
Best Efficiency Point type is selected, the input
fields are as follows:
BEP FlowThe flow delivered when the

pump is operating at its Best Efficiency point.
BEP EfficiencyThe efficiency of the pump

when it is operating at its Best Efficiency
Point.
Define BEP Max FlowWhen this box is

checked the User Defined BEP Max Flow field
is enabled, allowing you to enter a maximum
flow for the Best Efficiency Point.
User Defined BEP Max FlowAllows you to

enter a maximum flow value for the Best Efficiency Point.
Multiple Efficiency PointsThis efficiency type

generates an efficiency curve based upon two or
more user-defined efficiency points. These points
are linearly interpolated to form the curve. When
the Multiple Efficiency Points type is selected, the
input field is as follows:
6-338
Pump EfficiencyThe Pump Efficiency

value is representative of the ability of the
pump to transfer the mechanical energy
generated by the motor to Water Power.
Efficiency Points TableThis table allows

you to enter the pump's efficiency at various
discharge rates.
Creating Your Model
Motor Tab
This tab allows you to define the pump's motor

efficiency settings. It contains the following controls:
Motor
Efficiency
The Motor Efficiency value is representative of the

ability of the motor to transform electrical energy to
rotary mechanical energy.
Is Variable
Speed Drive?
This check box allows you to specify whether or not

the pump is a Variable Speed Pump. Toggling this
check box On allows you to input points on the
Efficiency Points table.
Efficiency
Points Table
This table allows you to enter speed/efficiency points

for variable speed pumps. This table is activated by
toggling the "Variable Speed Drive" check box On.
Transient Tab
This tab allows you to define the pump's SewerGEMS

V8i-specific transient settings. It contains the
following controls:
Inertia (Pump
and Motor)
Inertia is proportional to the amount of stored

rotational energy available to keep the pump rotating
(and transferring energy to the fluid), even after the
power is switched off. You can obtain this parameter
from manufacturer's catalogs, or from pump curves, or
by using the Pump and Motor Inertia Calculator. To
access the calculator, click the ellipsis button.
Speed (Full)
Speed denotes thenumber of rotations of the pump

impeller per unit time, generally in revolutions per
minute or rpm. This is typically shown prominently on
pump curves and stamped on the name plate on the
pump itself.
Specific Speed
Specific speed provides four-quadrant characteristic

curves to represent typical pumps for each of the most
common types, including but not limited to: 1280,
4850, or 7500 (U.S. customary units) and 25, 94, or
145 (SI metric units).
Reverse Spin
Allowed?
Indicates whether the pump is equipped with a ratchet

or other device to prevent the pump impeller from
spinning in reverse.
6-339
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the pump that is

currently highlighted in the Pump Definitions Pane. If
the pump is derived from an engineering library, the
synchronization details can be found here. If the pump
was created manually for this project, the
synchronization details will display the message
Orphan (local), indicating that the pump was not
Notes Tab

descriptive notes that will be associated with the pump
that is currently highlighted in the Pump Definitions
Pane.
To create a pump definition

1. Select Components > Pump Definitions.
2. Click New to create a new pump definition.
3. For each pump definition, perform these steps:
a. Select the type of pump definition in the Pump Definition Type menu.
b. Type values for for the pump attributes as required. The available table
columns or fields change depending on which definition type you choose.
c. For Multiple Point pumps, click the New button above the curve table to add a
new row to the table, or press the Tab key to move to the next column in the
table. Click the Delete button above the curve table to delete the currently
highlighted row from the table.
d. Define efficiency and motor settings in the Efficiency and Motor tabs.
4. You can save your new pump definition in SewerGEMS V8i Engineering
Libraries for future use. To do this, perform these steps:
a. Click the Synchronization Options button, then select Export to Library.
The Engineering Libraries dialog box opens.
b. Use the plus and minus signs to expand and collapse the list of available
libraries, then select the library into which you want to export your new unit
sanitary load.
c. Click Close to close the Engineering Libraries dialog box.
6-340
To delete a pump definition, select the curve label then click Delete.
Creating Your Model
To rename a pump definition, select the label of the pump definition you want
to rename, click Rename, then type the new name.
To view a report on a pump definition, select the label for the pump definition,
then click Report.
6. Click Close to close the dialog box.
6-341

The following illustration shows the four different pump curve types.
Inline depth-Flow
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
Flow
Flow
Offline Volume-Flow
Depth
Volume
Inline VSD
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
Flow
Flow
Inline Head-Flow
Depth
Head
SewerGEMS V8i pump types correspond to the above pump types as follows:
6-342
Design Point -> Multiple Point (Type 3)
Standard (3 Point) -> Multiple Point (Type 3)
Standard Extended -> Multiple Point (Type 3)
Custom Extended -> Multiple Point (Type 3)
Volume vs. Flow -> (Type I)
Depth vs. Flow -> (Type 2)
Multiple Point -> (Type 3)
Depth vs. Flow (Simulated Variable Speed) -> (Type 4)
Creating Your Model

Some pump types only work with certain solvers as described below:
Table 6-1: Available Pump Types by Solver
Pump Type
Implicit
Explicit
Gradually Varied
Standard 3 Point
Design 1 Point
Multipoint
Standard Extended
Custom Extended
Volume vs. Flow
Depth vs. Flow
Depth Flow
In the GVF solver, the user can specify (in the Calculation Options) whether linear or
smooth interpolation is used with the multipoint pump curve. The implicit and explicit
solvers use linear interpolation between points.
You define pump curves in the Pump Definitions dialog box. You can also define
pump curves in the Engineering Library.
To create a pump definition:
1. Select Analysis > Pump Definitions.
2. Click New to create a new pump definition.
3. For each pump definition, perform these steps:
a. Select the type of pump curve in the Pump Curve Type submenu.
b. Type values in the curve table. The columns change depending on which
curve type you choose.
c. Click the New button above the curve table to add a new row to the table, or
press the Tab key to move to the next column in the table.
6-343

d. Click the Delete button above the curve table to delete the currently highlighted row from the table.
e. Click the Graph button above the curve table to view a plot of the curve.
4. You can save your new pump definition in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Engineering Libraries for future use. To do this, perform these steps:
The Engineering Libraries dialog box appears.
sanitary load.
To delete a pump definition, select the curve label then click Delete.
To rename a Pump Definition, select the label of the pump definition you
want to rename, click Rename, then type the new name.
To view a report on a pump definition, select the label for the pump definition,
then click Report.
6. Click Close to close the dialog box.

Related Topic
6-344
Pumps on page 14-1223
Creating Your Model
Pump Controls
There are several ways of controlling pump on/off status depending on the active
solver. There are three types of controls: on/off, SWMM control statements and GVF
pressure control statements and are summarized below and described in more detail in
the following paragraphs.
Table 6-2: Available Controls by Solver
Solver
On/Off
Implicit
Explicit
GVF-Convex
SWMM
GVF Pressure
X
X
GVF-Rational
The GVF-rational solver and steady runs in the GVF-convex solver do not have pump
controls because these solvers only perform a steady run only and the initial pump
status is all that is needed.
On/Off controls are a property of a given pump based on the hydraulic grade line
elevation at the node (usually a wet well) immediately upstream of the pump. These
controls will not be used if "Ignore On and Off Elevations" is set to True. If it is set to
false, these settings must be specified and the on elevation must be higher than the off
elevation.
This type of control setting is the simplest and works with all three solvers than use
controls which makes it easy to switch between solvers. However, it cannot consider
complicated control actions such as those based on time or flow rates.
On/off controls are stored in the operational alternative.
SWMM control statements can be established for any element when the explicit
solver is used. These can handle complex conditions and actions. They are set up
under Components > SWMM extensions > Control sets. See the help for [Control Sets
Tab and Control Sets Dialog Box] for details on setting up these controls.
GVF pressure control statements apply to pressure elements in a pressure subnetwork and are generally used for controlling pumps. These controls are set in Components > Controls. Like SWMM control statements, they can contain complex
conditions and actions. See the help for [Controls and Controls Tab] for details on
setting up these controls. When both GVF pressure controls and on/off controls are
provided for a pump, the GVF pressure controls have priority in case the two types of
controls try to set different pump status.
6-345
Pump Curve Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define the points that make up the pump curve that is associated with the Pump Definition Library entry that is currently highlighted in the Engineering Library Manager explorer pane.
The columns that are available in this dialog will vary depending on the Pump Curve
Type that is selected in the menu of the same name in the Engineering Library. For
descriptions of the various pump attributes, see Pump Definitions Dialog Box on
page 6-334.
Pump Curve Combinations

There are a number of ways to view pump curves including Components > Pump
Definition which shows all available pump curves, and right clicking on a pump and
selecting Pump Curves once a run is complete. Users also may want to view the
performance of multiple pumps running together in parallel in a pump station. The
display of multiple pump and system head curves is accomplished using the Bentley
pressure solver which is only available when the active solver is set to GVF-convex.
To view combination pump curves it is first necessary to include the pumps in a Pump
Station element. This can be done by opening the property grid for the pump, picking
the Pump Station property and selecting the pump station in which this pump is
located. It is usually advisable to draw the pump station polygon to include the pumps
within the polygon (See Pump Stations).
The pump head and efficiency characteristic curves are properties solely of the pump
and can be displayed even if the model only consists of the pump station with the
pumps. If the user wants to display system head curves, then the pump station must be
part of a valid hydraulic model.
To start the Combination Pump Curve feature to view the curves either
1. Select Analysis > Combination Pump Curve.
2. Right click on the Pump Station and select Combination Pump Curves.
6-346
Creating Your Model

Pump Curve Combination Editor
Upon opening a Combination Pump Curve dialog, the user must first select which
pump station is to be analyzed by either selecting one of the previously used pump
stations from the drop down or picking the ellipse (...) button and selecting the station
from the drawing.
6-347

Once the pump station has been selected, the dialog displays the possible pump
combinations in the top left pane and the head curves in the bottom pane.
The column marked "Active" is checked if the user wants that combination displayed
in the graph.
The column "ID" displays the index on the curve in the graph (e.g. Head[1] is the
curve corresponding to the head of the pump combination with ID = 1).
There is one column in the table for each pump definition referenced in that pump
station. The number in the cell indicates the number of pumps of that definition that
are running for the combination corresponding to that row. If there is a zero in a cell,
the pump is off for that combination.
6-348
Creating Your Model

The top middle pane determines which type of pump or system curve is displayed. By
default, only the Head characteristic curve is displayed. The user can also turn on the
(pump) efficiency or wire-to-water (overall) efficiency curves.
The system head curves are a property of the system calculated from the perspective
of a pump. When the System Head Curve box is checked, the user must specify which
pump is the Representative Pump which means which path through the station is head
loss calculated. Usually the results don't vary significantly depending on which pump
is selected.
The Maximum flow and Number of Intervals entries determine the horizontal extent
of the system head curve and the number of points along the curve that will be calculated.
The top right pane is used to account for the fact that the system head curve will
depend somewhat on the time of day. The user must select at least one time step to use
in determining the system head curve. If the user selects a time step in which the pump
is discharging into a closed system with no pressure dependent demands, the system
head curve may show very high or low values for head. Do not select time steps where
this occurs.
In order to run or rerun the pump combination graph, select the green Compute button
at the top left of the bottom pane.
6-349

The graph below shows an example with three different combinations for two time
steps (system head curves).
If the user wants to change the look of the graph such as the range of head values, use
the second button in the bottom pane. That opens the graphing manager. To change the
axis range, pick Chart > Axes > Left Axis > Maximum > Change and enter a new
value. See Graphing for more details.
Flow-Efficiency Curve Dialog Box

This dialog is used to define the points that make up the flow-efficiency curve that is
associated with the Pump Definition Library entry that is currently highlighted in the
Engineering Library Manager explorer pane.
6-350
Creating Your Model

The Flow-Efficiency Curve dialog is only available for the Multiple Efficiency Points
efficiency curve type. The curve is defined by entering points in the Flow vs. Efficiency table. Click the New button to add a new row and click the Delete button to
delete the currently highlighted row.
For more information about Engineering Libraries, see Engineering Libraries.
Speed-Efficiency Curve Dialog Box

This dialog is used to define the points that make up the speed-efficiency curve that is
associated with the Pump Definition Library entry that is currently highlighted in the
Engineering Library Manager explorer pane
6-351

The Speed-Efficiency Curve dialog is only available for Variable Speed Drive pumps
(Is Variable Speed Drive? is set to True). The curve is defined by entering points in the
Speed vs. Efficiency table. Click the New button to add a new row and click the
Delete button to delete the currently highlighted row.
For more information about Engineering Libraries, see Engineering Libraries.
6-352
Creating Your Model

Efficiency Points Table
A variable speed drive introduces some inefficiency into the pumping system. The
user needs to supply a curve relating variable speed drive efficiency to pump speed.
This data should be obtained from the variable speed drive manufacturer but is often
difficult to find. Variable frequency drives (VFD) are the most common type of variable speed drive used. The graph below shows the efficiency vs. speed curves for a
typical VFD: Square D (Schneider Electric) model ATV61:
Variable-Speed Pumps (VSP or VFD)

Variable speed pumps are used in wastewater collection systems, usually to have
pump outflow match wet well inflow to maintain a roughly constant wet well level.
Each of the Bentley solvers handles variable speed pumping somewhat differently.
Users need to be careful switching solvers for models with variable speed pumps.
With the implicit and explicit solvers, which solve the full St. Venant equations, the
discharge from the pumps is represented as a function relating flow rate from the
pump(s) to the water level in the adjacent wet well. Usually the function should span
the full range of water levels in the wet well such that when the wet well is empty, the
flow should be zero while if the wet well is full, it should be the maximum flow that
the pumps can deliver. When the wet well is at its typical level, the flow should
roughly match the average inflow to the wet well. These solvers do not directly use the
6-353

pump head characteristic curve, nor will they determine the actual pump speed. Under
the Components > Pump Definitions, this type of pump is referred to as a "Depth flow
(Simulated Variable Speed Pump)", which is sometimes called a "SWMM Type 4"
pump.
For the GVF-convex solver, variable speed pumps are solved with a true pressure
solver. The user would create a pump definition corresponding to the full speed pump
and assign that definition to a pump element. The definition could be any of those for
pressure elements including 1-pont, 3-point, multipoint, standard extended and
custom extended. In the pump element, the user would set "Is Variable Speed Pump"
to True, "VSP Type" to the appropriate type (usually Fixed head), "Control Node" to
the node controlling the pump speed (usually the wet well), "Hydraulic Grade
(Target)" to the level that will maintained in the wet well and "Control on Suction
Side" to True if the control node is on the suction side of the pump. When the target
element of a VSP is a wet well, the target HGL field is hidden and it assumes the
target is the initial wet well level. The convex solver will not only determine the flow
from the pump but will also calculate the pump's speed. It is also possible to set the
speed as a function of time (VSP Type = Pattern Based) to calculate the flow and head
given the speed, or alternatively specify a known flow (VSP Type = Fixed Flow) t
calculate speed and head. Usually one pump in a station is run as a variable speed
pump. When there are more than one running in parallel, the Variable Speed Pump
Battery element should be used.
In the GVF-Rational solver, the pump uses the pump curve provided in the pump definition without any adjustment for speed.
Because the different solvers use very different methods to compute pump flows, the
results will not exactly match between solvers but by adjusting input curves, some
reasonable agreement can be achieved in most cases.
Submersible Pumps
Wastewater collection systems frequently use submersible pumps. However, the
model needs a link to connect the suction side of the pump to a node (usually a wet
well). The pressure solver in the GVF-convex solver needs a suction pipe (pressure
pipe) connecting the pump to a suction node (a wet well for submersible pumps). To
simulate a submersible pump, the user should connect the wet well to the pump with a
short pipe to move the water into the pump with negligible head loss. It can even be a
virtual conduit. In the GVF-convex solver, this pipe must be a pressure pipe while in
the other solvers it can be a pressure pipe or conduit. If the user plans to switch
between solvers, it is bet to make it a pressure pipe.
The Elevation (Invert) for the submersible pump should be the low point of the pump
inlet.
6-354
Creating Your Model
Pumps and Wet Wells in the GVF-Rational Solver

Pumps in the GVF-rational solver must have a wet well immediately upstream of the
pump connected by a single conduit or pressure pipe with zero head loss; the exception being that a pond with no control structure can be connected to a downstream
pump - in this case the pond would not need to be connected to a wet well. This accurately models submersible pumps and the suction losses in dry well pumps are usually
small. Parallel pumps and variable speed pump batteries are not allowed. If detailed
analysis of pumping and force (rising) mains is required, one of the other solvers
should be used.
The following hydraulic and hydrologic behaviors apply to pumps and wet wells
when using the Gradually Varied Flow - Rational engine:
Flows:
When the status of the pump is ON, then pump discharge is equal to wet well inflow.
When the status is OFF, pump discharge is set to zero.
Profiles:
The pump curves specified in the other solvers are not used by the GVF solver.
Instead, the suction head of the pump is taken as the wet well level and the discharge
head on the pump is determined using the GVF backwater analysis from downstream
elements. The heads can be used to determine pump selection.
Variable Speed Pump Battery
Variable Speed Pump Battery element
A Variable Speed Pump Battery element represents multiple variable speed pumps
that meet the following criteria:
1. the VSPs are parallel with each other (not in-line)
2. the VSPs are sharing common upstream (inflow) and downstream (outflow) nodes
3. the VSPs are identical (have the same pump definition)
4. the VSPs are controlled by the same target node and the same target head.
6-355

Parallel variable speed pumps (VSPs) are operated as one group and led by a single
VSP, the so-called lead VSP, while the other VSPs at the same battery are referred as
to as lag VSPs. A lag VSP turns on and operates at the same speed as the lead VSP
when the lead VSP is not able to meet the target head and turns off when the lead VSP
is able to deliver the target head or flow.
From the standpoint of input data, Variable Speed Pump Batteries are treated exactly
the same as single pump elements that are defined as variable speed pumps of the
Fixed Head Type with one exception; number of Lag Pumps must be defined in the
Lag Pump Count field.
When simulating a Pump Battery in a transient analysis, the pump battery is converted
to an equivalent pump using the following conversion rules:
1. The Flow (Initial) of the equivalent pump is the total flow of all the running
pumps in the pump battery.
2. The Inertia of the Pump and Motor of the equivalent pump is the sum of all the
inertia values for all the running pumps.
3. The Specific Speed of the equivalent pump is the Specific Speed value that is
closest to the result of the following equation:
sqrt(number of running pumps) * Specific Speed of pump battery
Variable Speed Pump Batteries in SewerGEMS

A variable speed pump battery (VSPB) element represents a set of identical parallel
variable speed pumps which can be controlled to provide a fixed head or fixed flow or
follow a time pattern of speeds. This type of element is only available with the GVFconvex solver. SeeVariable Speed Pump Battery on page 6-355 for details.
The behavior of a VSPB in cannot be captured with the GVF-rational solver if the
pump is operated any way other than inflow matching outflow. However, there are
ways of mimicking VSPB behavior in the dynamic wave implict (DW) and explicit
(SWMM) solvers using the Depth-Flow (Variable Speed)" (Type 4) pump in the
pump definition. For example, suppose that a variable speed pump station with
several pumps is operated to maintain a wet well depth of 30 in. (outflow matching
inflow), and the normal inflow is roughly 0.5 cfs and the maximum the station can
6-356
Creating Your Model

pump is 2 cfs. The table of flow vs. depth in the pump definition might have values
like the ones below. The final point should correspond to the maximum pump battery
flow at the maximum wet well depth. It is advisable to cover the full range of wet well
depths.
Table 6-3: VSPB Pump Definition
Flow (cfs)
Depth (in.)
28
0.3
29
0.5
30
32
34
2.2
60
As soon as the inflow deviated from the previous value, the depth would change and
the outflow would respond.
6-357

If you want to switch between the GVF-convex and either SWMM or DW with a
VSPB, a different active topology must be used for the two types of models. Create an
active topology which contains a VSPB for GVF-convex scenarios and one which
contains a pump that simulates a VSPB for SWMM and DW scenarios. The model
should look something like the image below, which shows the case where the VSPB is
inactive.
If there is an active VSPB element in a solver other than GVF-convex a fatal error
message is issue and the run does not proceed.
Pump Stations
Pump Station element
A pump station element provides a way for a user to indicate which pumps are in the
same structure, serving the same pressure zone. It provides a graphical way to display
the pumps associated with the station. A pump station is not a hydraulic element in
that it is not directly used in a hydraulic analysis but rather it is a collection of pumps
which are the hydraulic elements.
6-358
Creating Your Model

A pump station is a polygon element which displays which pumps are in the station by
dashed lines connecting the pumps with the station polygon centroid. A pump does
not need to be inside the polygon to be a pump assigned to the station and pumps
inside the polygon still need to be assigned to the station. The only information saved
with a pump station is the geometry of the station and the list of pumps assigned to the
station.
A pump station element is useful in calculating and displaying an analysis of pump

combinations (see Pump Curve Combinations).
6-359

Usually the pumps and associated piping are laid out before the station is drawn.
However, the station polygon can be drawn first. The station element is created by
picking the pump station element icon
from the layout menu and drawing a
polygon around the extents of the station. When the polygon is complete, the user
right clicks and selects "Done".
Individual pump elements are assigned to a station by selecting the pump element and
in the Pump Station property, picking the pump station which the pump is associated.
A dashed line is drawn from the pump to the station. This also can be done in the
physical alternative for pumps. To assign several pumps at once, a global edit can be
used provided that at least one pump has already been assigned to that station.
Sometimes a pump station structure can house pumps pumping to more than one pressure zone (e.g. medium service and high service). For the purposes of SewerGEMS
V8i, this would be two (or more) pump station polygon elements, one for each pressure zone.
Pump Stations Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define a pump station by creating a collection of individual
pumps.
New
Creates a new pump station that uses an

automatically created label.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted pump

station.
Rename
Lets you rename the currently highlighted

pump station.
Report
Lets you generate a preformatted report

that contains the input data associated with
the currently highlighted pump station.
The tab section on the right includes the following controls:

Pump List Tab
6-360
Creating Your Model
New Button
Click the New button to add a pump to the

collection. When you click this button you are
returned to the drawing view and the Select
toolbar appears, allowing you to select the desired
pump.
Delete Button
Click the Delete button to remove the currently

highlighted pump from the collection.
Pump
This read-only field displays the element ID of the

pump.
Label
This read-only field displays the label of the

pump.
Status (Initial)
This field allows you to define whether the pump

is initially on or off when the simulation starts.
Pump Definition
This field allows you to select the pump definition

for the corresponding pump. Click the ellipsis
button to open the Pump Definitions manager.
Elevation (On)
This field allows you to define the water surface

elevation at the immediate upstream node at which
the pump turns on.
Elevation (Off)
This field allows you to define the water surface

elevation at the immediate upstream node at which
the pump turns off.
Notes Tab
This tab contains a text field that allows you to

enter descriptive notes that will be associated with
the currently highlighted pump station.
6-361
Pumps Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to view the collection of pumps assigned to a pump station
element.
Click the Report button to generate a report containing the list of pumps included in
the pump station as well as their associated pump definitions. Click the Zoom To
button to focus the drawing view on the pump that is highlighted in the list.
Pump Stations and Pump Station Elements

Most pumps are installed in pump stations with multiple pumps. However, for the
purpose of hydraulic calculations, pumps need to be considered as individual elements
and hydraulic data are assigned to pumps rather than pump stations.
The notion of pump stations changed significantly with the SELECT series 3 release
of the Bentley storm and sanitary sewer models. Pump stations are treated differently
in the GVF-convex solver vs. the implicit and explicit solvers.
6-362
Creating Your Model

Pump station elements are polygons and individual pumps are assigned to them by
assigning the "Pump station" property for each pump element in the property grid.
Pumps do not need to be assigned to pump stations for the model to run. Below, PMP1 and PMP-2 are assigned to pump station PS-1 as indicated by the dashed line.
In the GVF-convex solver, it is possible to right click on a pump station polygon and
analyze combination pump curves which can overlay pump head and efficiency
curves and when the station is part of a runable model, can overlay the system head
curve. See [combination pump curve help] for details.
Variable speed pump batteries can also be assigned to pump station but they are only
used in the GVF-convex solver.
In the explicit and implicit solver, the pump station element is used only for drawing
purposes and generally there is one pump element for each pump. (The ability to lump
multiple pumps into a single station using Components > Pump station only exists in
SELECTseries 1 and earlier. When importing an earlier model into a newer version,
the pump station properties (initial level and on/off settings) are assigned to the individual pumps not a pump station.)
6-363

In special cases in explicit and implicit solvers, a Volume vs. Flow or Depth vs. Flow
curve can be used to approximate multiple pumps turning on with a curve as shown
below.
6-364
Creating Your Model
Catchments
Catchment element
When you click the catchment element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a catchment element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this
tool is active causes a catchment element to be placed at the location of the mouse
cursor.
Related Topics
Hydrograph Methods on page 6-365
Specifying a Time of Concentration (Tc) Method for a Catchment on page 6366
Defining the Geometry of a Catchment or a Pond on page 6-371
Defining CN Area Collections for Catchments on page 7-650
Catchment Attributes on page 15-1386
Hydrograph Methods
With the exception of purely sanitary flow systems with no wet weather effects,
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i starts its hydraulic calculations from a hydrograph for each
catchment. There are numerous ways of generating those hydrographs. Most involve
starting with Storm Data (Adding Storm Data on page 7-658) then calculating a
runoff hydrograph using one of the following methods:
SCS
Unit Hydrograph
EPA SWMM
Modified Rational Method
RTK Unit Hydrograph Method
6-365

Virtually any hydrograph and loss method can be used with any numerical engine with
the following exceptions:
1. Modified rational method only works with Implicit engine and only with peak
intensity (IDF) rainfall (Local rainfall is not supported).
2. If you choose the SWMM engine and specify EPA-SWMM runoff method, then
all catchments must use that runoff method and the loss method specified on the
calculation options manager (only Green -Amt, Horton, or SCS).
However, it is also possible to directly enter a hydrograph by specifying a user-defined
hydrograph (Adding User Defined Hydrographs on page 7-608) for any catchment.
Snowmelt and Groundwater
SewerGEMS V8i can calculate the accumulation, re-distribution, and melting of
precipitation that falls as snow on a catchment. In addition, SewerGEMS V8i can
model groundwater flow between and aquifer underneath a catchment and a node of
the drainage system.
The snowmelt and groundwater calculations both require the catchment's Runoff
Method to be set to 'EPA-SWMM Runoff', and the Engine Type to be set to 'Explicit
(SWMM 5)' in the calculation options. For methods to determine snowmelt rates, the
user is referred to the Haestad Press publication Stormwater Conveyance Modeling
and Design (see Bentley Institute Press on page A-1428).
See also:
SWMM Hydrology on page 6-476
SWMM Snow Packs (SWMM Snow Pack Editor) on page 6-477
Climatology Dialog Box on page 6-479
Specifying a Time of Concentration (Tc) Method for a Catchment

You can add Time of Concentration (Tc) Methods to a catchment in your model.
SewerGEMS V8i supports 13 different methods, which are listed below. You define
the TC Method in the TC Data Collection dialog box. You can define both single and
multiple flow segments for a catchment.
Some types of Tc equations can apply to flow segments within a multiple-segment Tc
calculation. Other Tc methods are equations intended to model the entire average
subarea flow distance and slope in one single flow segment. When combining
multiple flow segments to compute Tc, it is up to you to only combine Tc methods that
can be modeled in combination with multiple flow segments.
6-366
Creating Your Model

To define the Tc Method for a catchment:
1. Click a catchment in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a
catchment and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Runoff section of the Property Editor, select Modified Rational Method in
the Runoff Method field. The Tc (hours) field becomes available.
3. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Tc (hours) field. The Tc Data Collection
dialog box appears.
4. Click New, then select a Tc Method from the submenu.
5. Different fields become available depending on which Tc Method you select. For
each Tc Method, type values in the appropriate fields.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box and save your Tc Collection data (time of
concentration in hours) in the Property Editor.
Tc Data Collection Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define the Time of Concentration method. Both single
and multiple flow segments can be modeled in this dialog box.
6-367

The dialog box contains the Tc Method display pane, which lists all of the methods
currently assigned to the catchment, a control section that allows you to edit the
attributes associated with the method currently highlighted in the table, and the
following buttons:
New
Displays a submenu that allows you to

specify the Tc method to be created.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted method

from the table.
Report

SewerGEMS V8i supports the following 13 methods, which are listed along with the
required input data for each:
User Defined TcThe user-defined time of concentration (Tc) is a method that

allows the direct input of the Tc rather than using an equation to calculate it. This
method would be used when the Tc needs to be calculated using a methodology
that is not supported by Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, or when a quick estimate of Tc
is sufficient for the analysis.
6-368
User Defined TcLets you explicitly define the Tc, rather than have it calculated for you using one of the other methods.
CarterThis method requires the following input data:
Hydraulic LengthLets you define the flow length of the catchment

section.
SlopeLets you define the slope of the catchment section.
EaglesonThis method requires the following input data:

section.
Mannings nThe Mannings roughness value of the catchment section.
Hydraulic RadiusLets you define the hydraulic radius of the catchment

section.
Espey/WinslowThis method requires the following input data:
Creating Your Model
Channel FactorLets you define the Espey channelization factor of the

catchment section.

section.
ImperviousLets you define the percentage of impervious area of the catchment section.
FAA EquationThis method requires the following input data:
Overland Flow LengthLets you define the length of the overland pipe
flow of the catchment section.
Rational Method CLets you define the rational C coefficient of the catchment section.
Kerby/HathawayThis method requires the following input data:

section.
Kirpich PAThis method requires the following input data:
Tc MultiplierLets you define the time-of-concentration adjustment multiplier.

section.
Kirpich TNThis method requires the following input data:

section.
Tc MultiplierLets you define the time-of-concentration adjustment multiplier.
Length and VelocityThis method requires the following input data:

section.
VelocityLets you define the velocity of flow in the catchment section.
6-369
6-370
SCS LagThis method requires the following input data:

section.
CNLets you define the SCS runoff curve number of the catchment section.
SlopeLets you define the slope of the catchment section of the catchment
section.
TR-55 Sheet FlowThis number represents the sheet flow time computed for
each column of sheet flow data. This method requires the following input data:

section.
2 yr. 24 hr. DepthDepth of 2 year 24 hour storm.
TR-55 Shallow Conc.This number represents the sheet flow time computed for
each column of shallow concentrated flow data. This method requires the
following input data:

section.
Is PavedLets you specify whether the catchment section is paved or

unpaved.
TR-55 Channel FlowThis number represents the channel flow time computed
for each column of channel flow data. This method requires the following input
data:
Flow AreaLets you define the flow area of the catchment section.

section.
Wetted PerimeterLets you define the wetted perimeter of the catchment

section.
Creating Your Model
Defining the Geometry of a Catchment or a Pond

You define the geometry of a polygonal element, such as a catchment or a pond, by
entering the location and angle of bends for the selected element. You enter X vs. Y
points that plot the shape of the polygon that represents the element in the Polygon
Vertices dialog box .
To define the geometry of a catchment or a pond:
1. Click a catchment or pond in your model to display the Property Editor, or rightclick a catchment or pond and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Geometry section of the Property Editor, click the Ellipses (...) button next
to the Geometry field.
3. In the Polygon Vertices dialog box, click the New button to add a new row to the
table.
4. Type values for X and Y points for each row in the table.
5. To remove rows from the table, click the Delete button.
6. Click OK.
Polygon Vertices Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you define X vs. Y points that plot the shape of the polygon that
represents the selected element. The dialog box contains the X vs. Y table that allows
you to define any number of points and the following buttons:
New
Creates a new row in the table.
Delete

the table.
Low Impact Development Controls
Low Impact Development Control element
6-371

In the network layout, a Low Impact Development Control element represents the area
of a catchment that is associated with a Low Impact Development (LID) control. A
LID control can be deployed throughout a study area to store, infiltrate, and evaporate
subcatchment runoff.
When you click the LID control element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a LID control element symbol. LID control elements are polygons.
Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active causes one point of the LID
control polygon to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor. Continue clicking to
define the other points that make up the polygon to define the shape of the LID
control. To finish placing the LID control, right-click and select Done.
If the shape of the LID control is not important, such as in a schematic drawing, you
can place a generic LID control by holding down the Ctrl button after clicking once,
then moving the mouse cursor to define the size of the LID control, then clicking
again to place it.
LID Controls are defined in the Low Impact Development Controls.
LID Control and Parent Catchment Network Representation

Every LID control element in the network must be associated with a "Parent" catchment. The Parent catchment contributes flow to the LID and receives LID outflow.
Once the Parent has been specified in the LID Properties (see LID Control-General),
the association is represented by a dotted line in the drawing.
Although a LID control can only be associated with a single Parent catchment, a
single catchment may be a "Parent" for multiple LID controls acting in parallel.
Further, a Parent catchment may represent only the area occupied by LID controls, or
it may include non-LID area. The catchment must have an outflow node, which, if
desired, can be another catchment.
The possibilities just described for configuring LID controls and Parent catchments
translate to two main options for how to approach your network configuration. The
benefits and limitations of each approach should be carefully considered against the
needs of a particular project.
Option 1: LID occupies full subcatchment (usually recommended)
With this approach, a new catchment is created for each LID control in the network. It
is the LID control's Parent Catchment, and represents only the area occupied by the
LID control.
Flow from additional catchment area(s) is directed to the LID control by designating
the LID's Parent Catchment as the additional catchment's "Outflow Node."
6-372
Creating Your Model

Under this scenario, in the Low Impact Development Control properties dialog, the
attribute "Occupies Full Subcatchment" will be set to True.
The advantages of this option are:
Multiple LIDs can be placed in series, if desired (i.e., upstream LID's parent
catchment and have downstream LID's parent catchment as its outflow node)
Explicit definition of a LID's contributing area (as opposed to defining as a

percentage of impervious area, which is in turn a percentage of total catchment
area)
Ability to direct upstream pervious area to the LID control. (With a parent catchment, only impervious non-LID area can be directed to the LID control.)
Avoids possible mistakes with parent catchment impervious area percentage and
characteristic width resulting from the addition of a LID control (see Option 2)
Enables more explicit hydrograph reporting to show LID control effects
A possible disadvantage of this option is a greater number of network elements in the

model.
Option 2: LID displaces an equal amount of non-LID catchment area
With this option, the Parent catchment Area includes the total area occupied by the
LID Control(s), as well as adjacent non-LID area. The LID Control attribute "Occupies Full Catchment?" is set to False, and the attributes "Area of Each Unit" and
"Number of "Replicate Units" define the area that a LID control displaces from the
Parent catchment.
This approach allows multiple LID controls to be associated with a single catchment.
If multiple LID controls are present, they act in parallel to each treat a different
portion of the runoff generated from the non-LID catchment area.
The advantage of this option is that it minimizes the number of network elements that
must be placed in the model, enabling a more uncluttered appearance and reducing
data entry in some cases.
The disadvantages of this approach are:
The catchment's LID controls cannot be considered in series (i.e., the outflow
from one LID control cannot be inflow for another downstream).
Only runoff from the impervious portion of the parent catchment can be directed
to the LID control(s).
Caution must be exercised with regard to parent catchment attributes for Percent
Impervious and Width. These values must reflect the non-LID portion of the
catchment only. For example, if the original Parent catchment is 40% impervious,
and in the course of design, 75% of this impervious area is changed to porous
6-373

pavement, then the percent impervious must be adjusted to (1 - 0.75)*40/(100 0.75*40) = 14.3%. Similarly, the catchment's "Characteristic Width" can be
affected. If estimating this value as area divided by overland flow length, the area
used would typically be the non-LID area only.
6-374
Creating Your Model
Ponds
Pond element
When you click the pond element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor changes
into a pond element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active
causes a pond element to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
Note:
If there are multiple discharges locations serving a pond then

they must all be modeled in the same manner; that is, they must
either all be modeled with outlet control structures, or all
modeled without outlet control structures.
Related Topics
Physical Characteristics of Ponds on page 6-375
Adding Elevation vs. Area Data to a Pond on page 6-385
Adding Elevation vs. Volume Data to a Pond on page 6-384
Pond Attributes on page 15-1401
Physical Characteristics of Ponds

There are categories of storage elements that can be modeled in Bentley SewerGEMS
V8i:
Outdoor ponds with a free surface
Large underground pipes built solely to store water during storms
Wet wells at pumping stations
The first two are modeled as ponds in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i. Any of these
elements may be used as the suction side of a pump.
The following pond volume options are available:
Elevation vs. Area
Elevation vs. Volume
Underground Pipe Volume
Functional
6-375

Not all of the physical properties are needed for each method of describing pond
(storage element) dimensions.
6-376
Creating Your Model

The type of attribute needed for each type of data entry is summarized in the table
below:
Table 6-4: Required Pond Attributes
Attribute
Elevation
-Volume
Curve
Elevation
-Area
Curve
Volume
Function
Pipe
Volume
Volume Type
Required
Required
Required
Required
Elevation (Invert)
Required
Required
Required
Required
Depth
(Maximum)
Required
Required
Required
Elevation-Area
Curve
Required
ElevationVolume Curve
Required
Percent Void
Space (%)
Required
Required
Number of
Barrels
Required
Length
Required
Invert (Start)
Required
Invert (Stop)
Required
Pipe Diameter
Pond Coefficient
A
Required
Pond Exponent
B
Required
Pond Constant C
Required
For more information on the physical characteristics of ponds, see the following help
topics:
Outdoor Ponds on page 6-378
Elevation vs. Area on page 6-379
6-377
Elevation vs. Volume on page 6-380
Percent Void Space (%) on page 6-381
Pipe Volumes on page 6-381
Functional (Equation) on page 6-382
Outdoor Ponds
The physical size of outdoor graded ponds is usually described using a depth vs. area
or depth vs. volume curve. A typical set of curves is shown below:
Related Topics
6-378
Creating Your Model

Elevation vs. Area
This approach is common for outdoor ponds. The Elevation vs. Area table represents
the grading plan contour information for the pond. The area column represents the
water surface area with respect to the corresponding water surface elevation on the
same row in the table. Bentley SewerGEMS V8i will calculate the cumulative volume
at each given elevation, based on the given Elevation vs. Area data.
Table 6-5: Pond Elevation vs. Area
Elevation (ft)
Area (ac)
Percent Void Space (%)
100
0.003
100
0.008
100
0.016
100
0.024
100
0.034
100
0.044
100
0.056
100
0.068
100
0.081
100
10
0.095
100
Related Topics
6-379

Elevation vs. Volume
This feature gives the user complete control over how to calculate pond volumes. The
Elevation vs. Volume table is typically used in situations where the standard elevation
vs. area or pipe volume calculations do not apply and the user desires to perform
custom calculations and enter the results. The volume column represents the water
volume being stored in the pond at the corresponding water surface elevation on the
same row in the table.
Table 6-6: Pond Depth vs. Volume
Depth (ft)
Volume (ac-ft)
Percent Void
Space (%)
0.000
100
0.001
100
0.007
100
0.019
100
0.038
100
0.067
100
0.106
100
0.156
100
0.217
100
0.292
100
10
0.379
100
Related Topics
6-380
Creating Your Model

Percent Void Space (%)
This option is available for both Elevation vs. Area and Elevation vs. Volume tables.
The default value is 100%. The percent void represents the amount of real storage
available at each elevation. For open ponds this value is 100%. This option is useful
for situation where the pond storage area is filled with impervious material, such as
stone or gravel. The percent void space represents the open pore areas that can store
water.
Example: For 50% void space, only of the calculated (or specified) total volume
would be available as water storage.
Related Topics
See Physical Characteristics of Ponds on page 375.
See Outdoor Ponds on page 378.
See Elevation vs. Area on page 379.
See Elevation vs. Volume on page 380.
See Pipe Volumes on page 381.
See Functional (Equation) on page 382.
Pipe Volumes
Another storage option models large, buried, sloped pipes. These are described to the
model using the diameter, length and number of pipe barrels (assuming parallel buried
pipes are of the same dimension). The stop invert elevation of the incoming pipe and
the start invert elevation of the outgoing pipe must also be specified in order to determine the slope of the pipe, which will affect the volume calculation at each water
surface elevation.
Related Topics
6-381

Functional (Equation)
Another approach for calculating pond volume is to enter the coefficients of the
following polynomial equation:
Area = Coeff * DepthExp + Constant
Where:
Area = Surface Area at given depth
Coeff = User input value which is derived from existing volume data
Depth = Distance from the invert of the pond
Exp = User input value which is derived from existing volume data
Constant = The area at the bottom of the pond and is a user input value
Note:
The function parameters are based on depths in feet and areas

in square feet.
Related Topics
Adding Elevation vs. Area Data to a Pond

You can add an elevation-area curve to a pond. The area-elevation points defined in
the curve are used to calculate pond volumes. You define elevation-area curves in the
Elevation-Area Curve dialog box.
To add an Elevation vs. Area curve to a pond:
1. Click a pond in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a pond
2. In the Physical section of the Property Editor, select Elevation-Area Curve in the
Volume Type field. The Elevation-Area Curve field becomes available.
3. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Elevation-Area Curve field.
6-382
Creating Your Model

4. In the Elevation-Area Curve dialog box, each row in the table represents a point
on the Elevation-Area curve. Type values for Elevation, Area, and Percent Void
Space for each row. Click the New button to add a row or press the Tab key to
advance to the next field in the table.
Elevation-Area Curve Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define elevation-area curves.
6-383

The dialog box contains the elevation-area table and the following buttons:
New
Creates a new row in the elevation-area

table.
Delete

from the elevation-area table
Report

Graph
Opens a graph window plotting the areaelevation curve defined by the points in
the table.

Column
Description
Elevation
The elevation data for the pond.
Area
The plan area at that elevation.
Percent Void Space
The void space volume data for the pond. Void

space is used on any volumes option to adjust the
effective storage volume for rock-filled or other
porous media filled basins or vaults. Set this to
100% if there are no rocks or fill to reduce the
available volume.
Adding Elevation vs. Volume Data to a Pond

You can add an elevation-volume curve to a pond. The area-volume points defined in
the curve are used to calculate pond volumes. The elevation-volume points defined in
the table are used to calculate total pond volume. It is important that this storage relation be single-valued. This means that any volumetric quantity occurs only once in the
table only, as Bentley SewerGEMS V8i interpolates linearly between any two values
in the table. You define elevation-area curves in the Elevation-Volume Curve dialog
box.
6-384
Creating Your Model

To add an Elevation vs. Volume curve to a pond:
1. Click a pond in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a pond
2. In the Physical section of the Property Editor, select Elevation-Volume Curve in
the Volume Type field. The Elevation-Volume Curve field becomes available.
3. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Elevation-Volume Curve field.
4. In the Elevation-Volume Curve dialog box, each row in the table represents a
point on the Elevation-Volume curve. Type values for Elevation, Volume, and
Percent Void Space for each row. Click the New button to add a row or press the
Tab key to advance to the next field in the table.
Elevation-Volume Curve Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define elevation-volume tables. The dialog box contains
the elevation-volume table and the following buttons:
New
Creates a new row in the elevationvolume table.
Delete

from the elevation-volume table
Report

Graph
Opens a graph window plotting the areavolume curve defined by the points in the
table.
6-385

Column
Description
Elevation
The cumulative volume from the bottom of the

pond to that elevation.
Volume
The volume data for the pond.
Void Space
The void space volume data for the pond. Void

space is used on any volumes option to adjust the
effective storage volume for rock-filled or other
porous media filled basins or vaults. Set this to
100% if there are no rocks or fill to reduce the
available volume.
Ponds in StormCAD
Ponds in StormCAD are treated similarly to a manhole node, however there are calculation differences based on how the pond is set up as follows:
1. If the pond outlet has no control structure(s):
For this pond data type, the pond is treated the same as a manhole node in the flow
calculation; all fixed and rational flow elements pass through the pond without
any change and downstream all related flow is calculated as normal, i.e. you
would expect the same flow results if the pond is replaced by a manhole node.
For the profile calculation, when the backwater calculated hydraulic grade line at
the pond is lower than the user specified initial pond elevation, the initial pond
elevation is used as the pond hydraulic grade line and for backwater calculation of
the upstream elements.
2. If the pond has control structure(s):
The control structures are normally used to reduce the peak flow, so StormCAD calculations on such pond settings consider the flow reduction through the pond control
structures.
You can use the pond initial elevation to control the outflow reduction; the solver uses
the specified pond initial elevation and performs hydraulic calculations for the outlet
control structures to determine the pond outflow. Once the pond outflow is determined it becomes a fixed flow (system additional flow) and all other fixed and rational
flow elements are terminated at the pond outlet and the new fixed outlet flow will
carry on to the downstream calculations.
6-386
Creating Your Model

The user-specified pond initial elevation will be the calculated pond hydraulic grade
line and is used for upstream profile calculations, regardless what the downstream
backwater profile gives at the pond.
Ponds in SewerCAD
If there is no control structure, a pond in SewerCAD is treated just like a manhole
node; the steady flow routing is passing through the pond the same as passing through
a manhole. All flow elements are passed through the pond and the steady routing
calculation is continued downstream.
The outlet control structures are ignored (no control hydraulics are performed).
Flow(in) = Flow(out).
If there is no control structure, the HGL is the value calculated by the gradually varied
flow profiler and the input pond initial elevation is ignored.
If there is a control structure and the initial elevation is larger than the one given by
the outlet pipe profile calculation then the initial elevation is set as the pond HGL.
The existing Inflow(Wet Collection) in the pond is kept and you caninput a Fixed load
for steady state simulations.
Results are the same as a manhole node in SewerCAD.
There is no head loss or infiltration for a pond.
During Extended Period Simulation:

The engine performs storage routing for a pond when the convex routing comes to the
pond node.
The pond initial elevation is the start pond HGL for the storage routing and the inflow
hydrograph is determined from the upstream convex routing.
AE-Q curve is loaded for the pond outlet (the first curve of the EQT curves based on
the fundamental GVF assumption that there are no backwater effects).
Then the Gradually Varied Flow (GVF) engine performs the storage routing to determine the pond outflow hydrograph and the pond elevations for each hydrologic time
step.
This pond outflow hydrograph continues the downstream convex routing.
For the profile, the pond elevation time series determined from the storage routing will
be compared with the HGL calculated by GVF profiler and the larger value will be
used as the pond HGL for the time.
6-387

In the case where the outlet has no control structures, the outlet conduit data is used to
generate an E-Q curve for the outlet.
The infiltration calculation assumes the pond has outlet control structures since there
is no pond routing without control structures. The behavior is the as same as the
Dynamic Wave engine.
If the pond type is of elevation-volume, there will be an error message for the average
type infiltration.
During Steady State Simulation:

This scenario is treated very similarly to the way it is handled in StormCAD (see
Ponds in StormCAD).
If there is no control structure, a pond is treated just like a manhole node; the steady
flow routing is passed through the pond the same as it would pass a manhole. All flow
elements are passed through the pond and the steady routing calculation is continued
downstream.
During steady state simulation, if there is a control structure:
1. The pond outflow will be determined by an EQT curve using the pond initial
elevation and assuming a very low tailwater.
2. The pond outflow will become a wet weather flow and all system unit flows are
set to 0 from this point.
3. The pond HGL will use the user-specified pond initial elevation.
Air Valves
Air Valve element
Air valves are placed at high points in piping systems, to bleed air during filling,
release air that accumulates over time and allow inflow of air to prevent negative pressure and possible pipe collapse.
In typical wastewater collection system piping, pressures are positive between the
pump station and a high point along the force main when the pumps are running.
When the pump turns off, the force main that was pressurized remains full while any
downward sloping pipes drain. The behavior of air valves becomes very important in
force mains with multiple high points.
6-388
Creating Your Model

No loads can be assigned to air valves. Air valve elements can only be attached to
pressure pipes, not on gravity conduits. They should be attached to two pipes. If they
are attached to more than two, an error will be issued. If they are placed at the end of a
dead end pipe, they will not do anything.
In the Bentley storm and sanitary sewer products, the behavior of air valve elements
depends on the active solver.
GVF-Convex Solver
The GVF-convex solver uses a true pressure solver where the pipes are generally
treated as full. When the hydraulic grade is above the valve elevation, the valve will
remain closed. When the hydraulic grade line drops to the valve elevation, the air
valve prevents the hydraulic grade from dropping below the valve and the pipe acting
as a siphon. The GVF solver enables the user the ability to see which pipes flow partly
full as those pipes will have a hydraulic grade line below the pipe on the downhill side
of a high point.
A user can force an air valve to be closed in a model run by setting the "Treat Air
Valves as Junction" property to True. The default setting in sewer models is False.
However, only those air valves than may reasonably open during a simulation need to
have that property set to False. This will make the simulations run faster as fewer
checks will need to be made on valve status.
If an air valve at a high point is closed or treated as a junction and the pressure
becomes negative (hydraulic grade drops below valve), the pipes will behave as a
siphon. This is usually undesirable because the pipe may collapse under the negative
pressure or gases may come out of solution and cause excess head loss at the high
point. The maximum that a high point of a pipe can be above the hydraulic grade is 32
ft (9.8 m) or a siphon cannot be formed.
Gravity Solvers -- Implicit (Dynamic Wave), Explicit (SWMM) and

GVF rational Solvers
These solvers do not have the unique air valve behavior as in the GVF convex solver
since none of these are true pressure solvers. An air valve, assigned to a model with
these solvers, is treated as a manhole with a bolted cover which is essentially the same
as an active air valve. It is not possible to solve for a high point as a siphon with these
solvers.
Other Tools
Although Bentley SewerGEMS V8i is primarily a modeling application, some additional drafting tools can be helpful for intermediate calculations and drawing annotation. AutoCAD, of course, provides a tremendous number of drafting tools. Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i provides the following tools:
6-389
Adding Elements to Your Model
Border tool
Text tool
Line tool
Border Tool
Border tool
The Border tool lets you add rectangles to the drawing pane.
Text Tool
Text tool
The Text tool lets you add text to the drawing pane.
Line Tool
Line tool
The Line tool lets you add lines and polylines (multisegmented lines) to the drawing
pane.

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i provides several ways to add elements to your model. They
include:
6-390
Adding individual elements
Adding elements using the layout tool
Replacing an element with another element
Creating Your Model

To add individual elements to your model:
1. Click an element symbol on the Layout toolbar. The mouse cursor changes to the
element symbol you selected.
2. Click in the drawing pane to add the element to your model.
3. Click again to add another element of the same type to your model.
4. To add a different element, click on the desired element symbol in the Layout
toolbar, then click in the drawing pane.
5. To stop adding an element, right-click in the drawing pane to display a shortcut
menu, then click Done.
To add elements using the layout tool:
The layout tool lets you quickly add new elements to your model without having to
select a new element button on the Layout toolbar. When the layout tool is active, you
can right-click in the drawing pane to select different elements and pipes to add to the
model.
Layout Tool
1. Click the Layout tool on the Layout toolbar. A shortcut menu appears.
2. Click the type of pipe you want to use to connect your elements in the model.
3. Right-click in the drawing pane, then select the type of element you want to add
from the shortcut menu. The shortcut menu displays only those element types that
are compatible with your pipe selection.
4. Click in the drawing pane to add the element.
5. Click again to add another of the same element type. The elements you add will
automatically be connected by the type of pipe you selected earlier.
6. To change the type of pipe, right-click and select a different type from the shortcut
menu.
7. To change the element, right-click and select a different element from the shortcut
menu.
8. To stop adding elements using the Layout tool, right-click anywhere in the
drawing pane and click Done.
6-391

Note:
In AutoCAD, you must hold down the mouse button to keep the
submenu open while selecting an element from the layout
toolbar. Alternate layout methods include using the right-click
menu to select elements or using the command line.
Related Topic
Modeling Curved Pipes on page 6-392
Modeling Curved Pipes

You can model curved pipes in SewerGEMS V8i by using the Bend command, which
is available by right-clicking in the Drawing Pane when placing a link element.
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i does not account for any additional head loss due to the
curvature because in most cases the increased head loss is negligible. If you feel the
extra head loss is significant, it is possible to increase the Manning's n value to
account for such losses.
To model a curved pipe:
1. Select the desired link element using the Layout button on the Layout
toolbar.
2. Place the first segment of the curved pipe in your model, then right click and
select Bend from the shortcut menu.
3. Repeat Step 2 for each segment in the curved pipe. Be sure to insert bends to
clearly show the curved alignment.
4. When the curved pipe is complete, right click and select the next downstream
element (for a conduit, this is usually a manhole).
Related Topic
6-392
Adding Elements to Your Model on page 6-390
Creating Your Model
Connecting Elements
When building your model, you must consider these rules of connectivity:The table
below and the help topic Connectivity Rules for Storm and Sanitary Models
describe which elements can be connected to one another. However, there are cases
where even if the layout tool allows elements to be connected, they may not be able to
be calculated depending on the solver. Some of those special cases are listed below. At
run time or during validation, illegal connections for a set of elements in a solver will
show up as User Notifications.
A network needs at least one outfall or a pond to end the network. A lone outfall
cannot be a boundary element type unless its draining into a pond.
Cross section nodes need at least one channel connected to it and a channel needs
at least one cross section.
Gutters cannot be the only link exiting a catch basin, or the catch basin is considered hydraulically disconnected.
In the GVF-convex solver, a pressure pipe cannot be downstream of a node that is

fed from a gravity conduit.
A pump can only be connected to a pressure pipe in the GVF-convex solver.
Air valves and variable speed pump batteries can only be used with the GVFconvex solver.
Low impact development control elements can only be used with SWMM
hydrology and have special rules for connectivity which can be found in
6-393
Connecting Elements
Table 6-7: Element Connectivity
6-394
Element
Permissible Upstream
Elements
Permissible Downstream
Elements
Catchment
Catchment
Catch basin, manhole, cross

section, transition, outfall, wet
well, pond
Manhole
Via a gutter: None

Via a channel: Cross section
Via a conduit: Manhole,
catch basin, cross section,
transition, wet well, pump,
outfall, pond outlet structure,
catchment
Via a pressure pipe:
Pressure junction, pump
Via a gutter: None

Via a conduit: Manhole, catch
basin, cross section, transition,
wet well, pump, outfall, pond
outlet structure
Via a pressure pipe: Pressure
junction, pump
Catch basin
Via a gutter: Catch basin,

cross section, outfall
catchment
Via a gutter: Catch basin, cross

section, outfall
outlet structure
junction, pump
Cross section
Via a gutter: Catch basin

Via a channel: Manhole,
wet well, outfall, pond outlet
structure
catchment

Via a channel: Manhole, catch
basin, cross section, wet well,
outfall, pond outlet structure
outlet structure
junction, pump
Creating Your Model

Element
Elements
Elements
Junction
chamber
Via a gutter: None

Via a channel: None
catchment
Via a gutter: None

Via a channel: None
outlet structure
junction, pump
Pressure
junction
Via a gutter: None

Via a channel: None
Via a conduit: None
Manhole, catch basin, cross
section, transition, pressure
junction, wet well, pump,
Via a gutter: None

Via a channel: None
Via a conduit: None
Via a pressure pipe: Manhole,
transition, pressure junction, wet
well, pump, outfall, pond outlet
structure
Wet well
Via a gutter: None

catchment
Via a gutter: None

outlet structure
junction, pump
6-395
Connecting Elements
Element
Elements
Elements
Pump
Via a gutter: None

Via a channel: None
Manhole, catch basin, cross
section, transition, pressure
junction, wet well, pump,
Via a gutter: None

Via a channel: None
outlet structure
Via a pressure pipe: Manhole,
transition, pressure junction, wet
well, pump, outfall, pond outlet
structure
Outfall

pond outlet structure,
catchment

wet well, pump, pond outlet
structure
junction, pump
When the Boundary Condition
Type is set to Boundary Element,
the flow coming into the outfall
can be discharged to a pond,
cross section, manhole, or catch
basin
6-396
Pond outlet
structure
Via a gutter: None

Pressure junction
Via a gutter: None

outlet structure
junction
Pond
Outfall, catchment
Pond outlet structures, pump.

Only outfalls can drain to a pond.
The only way to drain from a
pond is via a pond outlet
structure.
Creating Your Model
Layout Context Menus

While using a link layout, the following nodes are available in the layout context
menu:
Table 6-8: Layout Context Menus
Pressure Pipe
Layout Mode
Conduit Layout
Mode
Channel Layout
Mode
Gutter Layout
Mode
Default: Pressure
Junction
Default: Manhole
Default: Cross
Section
Default: Catch Basin
Pressure Junction
Catch Basin
Cross Section
Catch Basin
Pump
Manhole
Catch Basin
Cross Section
Variable Speed Pump

Battery
Junction Chamber
Manhole
Outfall
Air Valve
Cross Section
Junction Chamber
Wet Well
Pond Outlet Entrance
Pond Outlet Entrance
Manhole
Pump (Only
recommended for
SewerCAD)
Wet Well
Junction Chamber
Wet Well
Outfall
Outfall
Outfall
Available Nodes When Splitting a Link

You can split an existing link with the following nodes:
Table 6-9: Allowable Nodes for Splitting Links
Pressure Pipe
Conduit
Channel
Gutter
Manhole
Catch Basin
Catch Basin
Catch Basin
Junction Chamber
Manhole
Manhole
Cross Section
Pump
Junction Chamber
Cross Section
Outfall
6-397
Connecting Elements
Table 6-9: Allowable Nodes for Splitting Links
Pressure Pipe
Conduit
Channel
Wet Well
Cross Section
Outfall
Pressure Junction
Outfall
Outlet Structure
Variable Speed Pump

Battery
Outlet Structure
Wet Well
Air Valve
Wet Well
Gutter
If you attempt to split a link with an invalid element type you may receive a prompt
(similar to the one pictured below) if the split is going to result in invalid connectivity.
Answer "Yes" if you would like to continue with the split. You can correct the connectivity at a later time by selecting Analysis > Validate.
Allowable Node Morphing

When the node to be morphed is connected to a link you may receive a prompt
(similar to the one pictured below) if the morph is going to result in invalid connectivity.
Answer "Yes" if you would like to continue with the morph. You can correct the
connectivity at a later time by selecting Analysis > Validate.
6-398
Creating Your Model
Link Morphing
You can morph a conduit into a pressure pipe and vice versa. Any applicable data
associated with the link will be carried over to the new link after the morph.
When the node to be morphed is connected to a link you may receive a prompt
(similar to the one pictured below) if the morph is going to result in invalid connectivity.
To morph a conduit into a pressure pipe, right-click it and select the Morph Conduit
to Pressure Pipe command.
Connectivity Rules for Storm and Sanitary Models

While there are numerous node elements, there are only four link elements in the
Bentley Storm and Sanitary Sewer models. These include
Conduits
Pressure pipes
Channels
Gutters
Not all node elements can be connected to all link types. For example, a pump cannot
be expected to take suction from a gutter.
In the layout tool, in order to protect the user from building model that can't solve, the
user is limited in the elements that can be selected as the next node type. The downstream nodes that are allowed for each link type are listed below:
6-399
Connecting Elements
Conduit
Catch basin
Manhole
Transition
Cross section
Pond outlet entrance
Pump
Wet well
Outfall
Pressure pipe
Pressure junction
Pump
Variable speed pump battery
Air valve
Wet well
Catch basin
Manhole
Transition
Outfall
Channel
Cross section
Catch basin
Manhole
Pond outlet entrance
Wet well
Outfall
Gutter
6-400
Catch basin
Cross section
Outfall
Creating Your Model

In addition, even if the model allows a user to connect elements, their behavior may
depend on the active solver. For example, while a pump can be hooked to a conduit, it
will work in the implicit and explicit solvers but not in the GVF solvers which expect
the pump to be connected to a pressure pipe. For another example, air valve and variable speed pump battery elements were created for pressure pipes in the GVF-convex
solvers and require some considerations when used with the other solvers.
Polygon elements like catchments and pond outlets must be connected in special
ways. Inflows to a pond are modeled as outfalls where the Boundary Condition Type
for the outfall is a Boundary Element and the boundary element is the pond. Outflow
from a pond is modeled as a Pond Outlet Structure. Ponds cannot be connected to one
another pond.
Unlike ponds, catchments can be connected in series by making one catchment the
Outflow element of an upstream catchment. Catchments can also have LID (low
impact development) elements within them. The LID would then have the catchment
as its Parent Catchment.
Outfall elements cannot be connected downstream to links but must either be the
terminal node or associated with a pond. When using the explicit solver, only one
conduit can be connected to an outfall. An outfall cannot be connected to other
elements through a gutter.
Pumps can only have one link on the suction side and one on the discharge side. In the
GVF-rational solver, there can only be a single pump element representing a station,
with no pumps in parallel or in loops.
When To Use a Conduit vs. a Channel vs. a Gutter

Gutters are used in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i only to model the water which exceeds
the capacity of in catch basin inlet and must flow through a surface gutter to the next
catch basin. A Bentley SewerGEMS V8i gutter can only receive water from a catch
basin.
A conduit can refer to any prismatic channel or pipe that conveys flow. The cross
section of a conduit must remain constant from one end to the next.
A channel refers to a channel that changes geometry from the upstream cross section
to the downstream cross section. Channels can be used to model natural streams or
swales which are not prismatic in cross section. Channels must have a cross section
element at either end and properties are interpolated along the channel.
A uniform trapezoidal channel can either be modeled as a conduit with the shape
defined in a conduit element or a channel with the shape defined as a property of the
cross section elements at each end.
6-401
Connecting Elements
Related Topics
Connecting Elements on page 6-393
Virtual Links
A user can specify that a user defined conduit or pressure pipe has a section type of
"Virtual" by setting the section type to "Virtual" in the property grid for conduits or the
"Is virtual" property to True in the property grid for pressure pipes. The behavior of
a virtual link depends on the active solver and whether the link is a conduit or pressure
pipe. Gutters and channels cannot be virtual.
Virtual links pass the flow from the upstream node to the downstream nodes but do
not always calculate hydraulic properties such as velocity and head loss. Virtual links
usually have length but this is only to assist in plotting the link in a profile drawing.
Depending on the solver, the rise of the virtual link may not be shown in the profile. In
some solvers (e.g. GVF-convex), the "Is virtual = True" setting is ignored and
hydraulic properties are calculated. The behavior of different virtual links is summarized in the table below.
Table 6-10: Virtual Link Behavior
Case
Implicit
Explicit
GVF-Convex
GVF-Rational
Pressure Pipe
Not At Pump
No head loss or
velocity
calculation
Treated as not
virtual
Treated as not
virtual
Virtual not
allowed
Pump Suction
No head loss or
velocity
calculation
No head loss or
velocity
calculation
Treated as not
virtual
No head loss or
velocity
calculation
Pump Discharge
No head loss or
velocity
calculation
No head loss or
velocity
calculation
Treated as not
virtual
No head loss or
velocity
calculation
Conduit Not
Diversion
Must have
control structure
Must have start

control structure
Cannot use
unless diversion
Cannot use
unless diversion
Conduit As
Diversion
Ignore as virtual
Must have start

control structure
No head loss or
velocity
calculation
No head loss or
velocity
calculation
6-402
Creating Your Model

Virtual links enable the same model file to be used with different solvers even though
the solvers have very different ways of representing different physical facilities. The
explicit solver internally represents pumps as links with essentially no length while
the GVF solver represents pumps as points which must be connected to non-virtual
pipes at each end. To make these two solvers compatible, in a model (e.g. SewerGEMS, SewerCAD, CivilStorm or StormCAD) which represents pumps as points,
virtual links must be inserted on the suction and discharge side of pump nodes. These
virtual pipes and the pump node are combined into a single effective link when the
model is run in the explicit solver and the results are later applied to model elements.
Similarly, control structures (e.g. weirs, orifices) are represented as links in the
explicit solvers but are properties of links in the implicit and GVF solvers. The control
structures need to be associated with virtual links to work with the explicit solver.
For details on using virtual links as conduits or pressure pipes, see help topics Virtual
Conduits and Virtual Pressure Pipes
How Do I Get Rainfall from a Catchment Into the Rest of My Model?

To get rainfall to move from a catchment into the rest of your model, you must specify
an Outflow Node.
To set the outflow node for a catchment:
1. If the Property Editor is not open, click View > Properties (F4) to open it.
2. Click the catchment for which you want to set an outflow node.
3. In the Catchment section of the Property Editor, click the Outflow Node field to
enable the selection drop-down.
4. Click Select if you want to select the outflow node from the model, or select the
outflow node from the drop-down list.
For information on how to direct flow from a catchment to a LID control, see LID
Control and Parent Catchment Network Representation.
How Do I Model Weirs in Conduits?

Sharp crested weirs can be placed as control structures in conduits. Other control
structures include orifices, functional structures and depth discharge curves.
6-403
Manipulating Elements
To insert weirs into the start or stop ends of a conduit:
1. Set Has Start Control Structure? or Has Stop Control Structure? to True in
the Physical:Has Control Structure section of the Property Editor for the conduit.
2. Click the Ellipse () button that appears next to the Start Control Structure or
Stop Control Structure field. This opens the Conduit Control Structure dialog box.
3. Select New > Weir.
Weirs can be placed in any shape of conduit but the weir structure itself is treated as
being in a rectangular section. The weir length is the distance across this section
measured perpendicular to the flow (for all except side weirs).
Inlet
Plan View
Pipe
Manhole
Weir
Outlet
Pipe 2
Outlet
Pipe 1
Related Topics:
Weirs on page 14-1204
You can manipulate elements in your model in any one of the following ways:
6-404
Select elementsmanually select individual elements, manually select multiple

elements, select all elements, or select all elements of a single element type
Move elements
Creating Your Model
Delete elements
Split pipes
6-405
To manually select an element:
Click the element. Selected elements appear in red.
Note:
You can change the selection color in the Options dialog box,
which is accessible by selecting Tools > Options.
To manually select multiple elements:

Click the first element, then click additional elements while holding down Shift or
Ctrl.
To select all elements:
To select all of the elements in your model, select Edit > Select All.
To select all elements of the same type:
To select all elements of the same type (for example, all junction chambers), select
Edit > Select by Element, then click the desired element type.
All elements of the selected type appear in red, including connecting pipes.
To clear selected elements:
Click the Select tool then click any blank space in the drawing pane.
or
Click Edit > Clear Selection.
or
Press the Esc key.
You can also clear a selected element by clicking a different element.
To move an element in the model:
1. Click the Select tool on the Layout toolbar.
2. Select the element(s) you want to move, then drag it to its new location. Pipe
connections move with the element.
6-406
Creating Your Model

To delete an element:
Select the element, then press Delete.
or
Select Edit > Delete.
Related Topics
Splitting Pipes on page 6-407
Splitting Pipes
You may encounter a situation in which you need to add a new element in the middle
of an existing pipe. For example, you may want to insert a new manhole to maintain
maximum access hole spacing.
To split an existing pipe:
1. Select the desired element symbol on the Layout toolbar.
2. In the drawing pane, place the cursor over the pipe you want to split and click.
3. You are prompted to confirm that you want to split the pipe.
If you choose to split the pipe, the element will be inserted and two new pipes
will be created with the same characteristics as the original pipe (lengths are
split proportionally).
If you choose not to split the pipe, the new element will be placed on top of
the pipe without connecting to anything.
If you accidentally split a pipe, this action can be undone by selecting Edit > Undo.
You can also split an existing pipe with an existing element:
To do this in the Stand-Alone version, drag the element into position along the pipe to
be split, then right-click the node and select Split <Pipe Label> from the shortcut
menu (where <Pipe Label> is the name of the pipe to be split).
To do this in the MicroStation version, drag the element into position along the pipe to
be split. Hold down the Shift key, then right-click the node and select Split <Pipe
Label> from the shortcut menu (where <Pipe Label> is the name of the pipe to be
split).
Related Topics
6-407
Manipulating Elements on page 6-404
Disconnecting and Reconnecting Pipes

In certain circumstances, you may wish to disconnect a pipe from a node without
deleting and redrawing the pipe in question. For example, if the model was built from
a database and the Establish By Spatial Data option was used to determine pipe
connectivity, pipes may have been connected to the wrong nodes.
To disconnect and reconnect a pipe:
1. Right-click the pipe to be disconnected.
2. A context menu will appear. Two reconnect options will be displayed, one for
each of the end nodes of the pipe. Select the node from which you want to disconnect the pipe.
3. A broken line will appear, joining the node from which the pipe is being disconnected and your mouse cursor. Hover the mouse cursor over the junction to which
you would like to connect the pipe and click the left mouse button. The pipe will
now be connected to this junction.
Note:
When links that are a part of an existing profile are reconnected

such that the previously created profile does not remain
continuous, the profile may no longer show correct results. If
you reconnect links that are part of an existing profile, edit and
redefine a valid path to ensure correct results.
If you reconnect the start end of a link to an invalid element type you get the following
message:
6-408
Creating Your Model

If you reconnect the stop end of a link to an invalid element type you get the following
message:
Answer "Yes" if you would like to continue with the reconnect. You can correct the
connectivity at a later time by selecting Analysis > Validate.
How Do I Model a Split in a Channel?

If you have a channel with a control structure and you're trying to model a split in that
channel, you should put the control structure on the upstream end of the branching
links rather than the downstream end of the main link.
Merge Nodes in Close Proximity

This dialog allows you to merge together nodes that fall within a specified tolerance of
one another.
To access the dialog, right-click one of the nodes to be merged and select the Merge
nodes in close proximity command.
6-409
The dialog consists of the following controls:
Node to keep: Displays the node that will be retained after the merge operation.
Tolerance: Allows you to define the tolerance for the merge operation. Nodes that fall
within this distance from the Node to keep will be available in the Nodes to merge
pane.
Refresh: Refreshes the nodes displayed in the Nodes to merge pane. Click this
button after making a change to the tolerance value to update the list of nodes available for the merge operation.
Select nodes to merge: Toggle this button on to select the nodes that are selected in
the Nodes to merge pane in the drawing pane.
Nodes to merge: This pane lists the nodes that fall within the specified tolerance of
the Node to keep. Nodes whose associated boxes are checked will be merged with
the Node to keep when the Merge operation is initiated.
Merge: Performs the merge operation using the nodes whose boxes are checked in the
Nodes to merge list.
Close: Closes the dialog without performing the merge operation.
6-410
Creating Your Model
Batch Pipe Split Dialog Box

The Batch Pipe Split dialog allows you to split pipes with neighboring nodes that are
found within the specified tolerance.
Choose Features to
Process
Allows you to specify which pipes to include in

the split operation. The following options are
available:
All: All pipes in the model that have a neighboring node within the specified tolerance will
be split by that junction.
Selection: Only the pipes that are currently

selected in the drawing pane will be split by a
neighboring junction that lies within the specified tolerance.
Selection Set: Only those pipes that are

contained within the selection set specified in
the drop down list will be split by a neighboring
junction that lies within the specified tolerance.
Allow splitting with

inactive nodes
When this box is checked, nodes that are marked

Inactive will not be ignored during the split
operation.
Tolerance
This value is used to determine how close a pipe

must be to a node in order for the pipe to be split
by that junction.
Pipes will be split by every junction that falls within the specified tolerance. To
prevent unwanted pipe splits, first use the Network Navigators Network Review >
Pipe Split Candidates query to verify that the tolerance you intend to use for the
Batch Split operation will not include nodes that you do not want involved in the pipe
split operation.
6-411
To use the Network Navigator to assist in Batch Pipe Split operations
1. Open the Network Navigator.
2. Click the [>] button and select the Network Review...Pipe Split Candidates
query.
3. In the Query Parameters dialog box, type the tolerance you will be using in the
pipe split operation and click OK.
4. In the Network Navigator, highlight nodes in the list that you do not want to be
included in the pipe split operation and click the Remove button.
5. Open the Batch Pipe Split dialog.
6. Click the Selection button.
7. Type the tolerance you used in the Network Review query and click OK.
Batch Pipe Split Workflow

We recommend that you thoroughly review and clean up your model to ensure that the
results of the batch pipe split operation are as expected.
Note:
Cleaning up your model is something that needs to be done with

great care. It is best performed by someone who has good
familiarity with the model, and/or access to additional maps/
personnel/information that will allow you to make the model
match the real world system as accurately as possible.
We provide a number of Network Navigator queries that will help you find "potential"
problems (see Using the Network Navigator).
1. Review and clean up your model as much as possible prior to running the "batch
split" operation. Run the "duplicate pipes" and "nodes in close proximity" queries
first. (Click the View menu and select Queries. In the Queries dialog expand the
Queries-Predefined tree. The Duplicate Pipes and Nodes in Close Proximity
queries are found under the Network Review folder.)
2. Next, use the network navigator tool to review "pipe split candidates" prior to
running batch split.
a. Using the network navigator tool, run the "pipe split candidates" query to get
the list of potential batch split candidate nodes. Take care to choose an appropriate tolerance (feel free to run the query multiple times to settle on a tolerance that works best; jot down the tolerance that you settle on, you will want
to use that same tolerance value later when you perform the batch split operation).
b. Manually navigate to and review each candidate node and use the "network
navigator" remove tool to remove any nodes that you do not want to process
from the list.
6-412
Creating Your Model

c. After reviewing the entire list, use the network navigator "select in drawing"
tool to select the elements you would like to process.
d. Run the batch split tool. Choose the "Selection" radio button to only process
the nodes that are selected in the drawing. Specify the desired tolerance, and
press OK to proceed.
Editing Element Attributes

You edit element properties in the Property Editor, one of the dockable managers in
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.
To edit element properties:
Double-click the element in the drawing pane. The Property Editor displays the
attributes of the selected element.
or
Select the element whose properties you want to edit, then select View > Properties
or click the Properties button on the Analysis toolbar.
Property Editor
The Property Editor is a contextual dialog box that changes depending on the status of
other dialog boxes. For example, when a network element is highlighted in the
drawing pane, the Property Editor displays the attributes and values associated with
that element. When one of the manager dialog boxes is active, the Property Editor
displays the properties pertaining to the currently highlighted manager element.
Attributes displayed in the Property Editor are grouped into categories by default. An
expanded category can be collapsed by clicking the plus (+) button next to the category heading. A collapsed category can be expanded by clicking the minus (-) button
next to the category heading.
Note:
The available fields will also change depending on the currently

active solver. The currently active solver is determined by the
Active Numerical Solver Calculation Option.
You can change the sorting to alphabetical by clicking the Search button and selecting
Arrange Alphabetically.
6-413

For the most efficient data entry in Text Box style fields, instead of clicking on the
Field, click on the label to the left of the field you want to edit, and start typing. Press
Enter to commit the value, then use the Up/Down keyboard arrows to navigate to the
next field you want to edit. You can then edit the field data without clicking the label
first; when you are finished editing the field data, press the Enter key, and proceed to
the next field using the arrow keys, and so on.
Find Element
The top section of the Property Editor contains the Find Element tool. The Find
Element tool lets you:
Quickly find a recently-created or added element in your model. The Element

menu contains a list of the most recently-created and added elements. Click an
element in the Element menu to center the drawing pane around that element and
highlight it.
Find an element in your model by typing the element label or ID in the Element
menu then clicking the Find button or pressing Enter. The drawing pane centers
around the highlighted element.
Find all elements of a certain type by using an asterisk (*) as a wild-card character. For example, if you want to find all of the conduits in your model, you type
co* (this is not case-sensitive) then click the Find button. The drawing pane
centers around and highlights the first instance of a conduit in your model, and
lists all conduits in your model in the Element menu. Once the Element menu is
populated with a list of elements, you can use the Find Next and Find Previous
buttons to quickly navigate to the next or previous element in the list.
Note:
6-414
See the Using the Like Operator topic for more information about
wildcard symbols.
Creating Your Model

The following controls are included:
Element
Type an element label or ID in this field then

click the Find button to quickly locate it in
your model. The element selected in this menu
will be centered in the drawing pane when the
Zoom To command is initiated, at the
magnification level specified by the Zoom
Level menu. The drop-down menu lists
recently-created or added elements, elements
that are part of a selection set, and that are part
of the results from a recent Find operation.
Find Previous
This button allows you to find the previous

element in the list of results from a recent Find
operation.
Find
Zooms the drawing pane view to the element

typed or selected in the Element menu at the
magnification level specified in the Zoom
Level menu.
Find Next
This button allows you to find the next

element in the list of results from a recent Find
operation.
Help
Displays online help for the Property Editor.
Zoom Level
Allows you to specify the magnification level

at which elements are displayed in the drawing
pane when the Zoom To command is initiated.
Alphabetic
Displays the attribute fields in the Property

Editor in alphabetical order.
Categorized
Displays the attribute fields in the Property

Editor in categories. This is the default.
Related Topics
Editing Attributes in the Property Editor on page 15-1305
Relabeling Elements on page 6-416
6-415
Property Search
You can search for a specific attribute by typing the name of the attribute into the
search box and clicking the Search button
When you have entered one or more search terms, only those properties containing the
search term will be displayed in the property editor.
When the box contains search terms the Search button turns to a Clear button
Click this button to clear the terms from the search box.
To match multiple items, enter the desired list of terms separated by semicolon
without spaces in between.
A maximum of 12 search terms are stored in the search box. Click the down arrow to
view the last 12 search terms that were used; clicking an entry in this list will make
that search term active.
Relabeling Elements
You can relabel elements from within the Property Editor.
To relabel an element:
1. Select the element in the Drawing Pane then, if the Property Editor is not already
displayed, select View > Properties.
2. In the General section of the Property Editor, click in the Label field, then type a
new label for the element.
Set Field Options Dialog Box

The Set Field Options dialog box The units for a specific attribute without affecting
the units used by other attributes or globally.
To use the Set Field Options dialog box, right-click any numerical field that has units,
then select Units and Formatting.
6-416
Creating Your Model
Value
Displays the value of the currently selected item.
Unit
Displays the type of measurement. To change the

unit, select the unit you want to use from the dropdown list. This option also lets you use both U.S.
customary and S.I. units in the same worksheet.
Display Precision
Sets the rounding of numbers and number of digits

displayed after the decimal point. Enter a negative
number for rounding to the nearest power of 10: (-1)
rounds to 10, (-2) rounds to 100, (-3) rounds to
1000, and so on. Enter a number from 0 to 15 to
indicate the number of digits after the decimal point.
6-417
Format
Lets you select the display format used by the

current field.
Choices include:
ScientificConverts the entered value to a

string of the form "-d.ddd...E+ddd" or "d.ddd...e+ddd", where each 'd' indicates a digit
(0-9). The string starts with a minus sign if the
number is negative.
Fixed PointAbides by the display precision

setting, and automatically enters zeros after the
decimal place to do so. With a display precision
of 3, an entered value of 3.5 displays as 3.500.
GeneralTruncates any zeros after the

decimal point, regardless of the display precision value. With a display precision of 3, the
value that would appear as 5.200 in Fixed Point
format displays as 5.2 when using General
format. The number is also rounded. So, an
entered value of 5.35 displays as 5.4 regardless
of the display precision.
NumberConverts the entered value to a

string of the form "-d,ddd,ddd.ddd...", where
each 'd' indicates a digit (0-9). The string starts
with a minus sign if the number is negative.
Thousand separators are inserted between
each group of three digits to the left of the
decimal point.
What Length is Used for Conduits, Channels, and Gutters When I

Don't Enter a User-defined Length?
If you do not enter a user-defined length in the attributes for conduits, channels, and
gutters, the length used in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i is the plan view distance between
the coordinates at each end of the link element. This length is used as the actual length
in hydraulic calculations. However, as the slope increases, the difference between the
plan length and the actual length also increases as shown below.
The table below shows the difference between the actual and plan length as a function
of slope. Note that for most reasonable slopes, the difference between the actual and
plan view length is less than one percent. (100% slope is 1:1 slope.) As the slope
approaches vertical, you must enter the actual length.
6-418
Creating Your Model

Table 6-11: Actual and Plan Length as a Function of Slope
Slope, % *
Actual/Plan Length
1.000
10
1.005
20
1.020
30
1.044
* The models generalized friction formulation is only valid for slopes less than 10%.
If you are not satisfied with the plan view length, you can enter a user-defined length,
which you can determine using the following equation:
Actual Plan 2 (1 (% s lope / 100) 2 )
What is the Difference Between a User Defined Unit Hydrograph

and a
Hydrograph Entered in the Inflow Collection Editor?
Within Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, you can enter a hydrograph (in flow units) at any
node element (e.g. catch basin, manhole, catchment, cross section, wet well). You can
also enter a unit hydrograph, but only at a catchment node.
To enter a hydrograph (in flow units) using the Inflow Collection Editor:
1. Select the element in your model.
2. In the Property Editor, click the Ellipsis button (...) in the Inflow Collection field.
3. In the Inflow Collection dialog box, click the New button and select Hydrograph
Load.
4. Enter values into the table of flow vs. time, then click OK.
To enter a unit hydrograph at a catchment:
1. Select a catchment in your model.
2. In the Property Editor, select Unit Hydrograph as the Runoff Method.
3. In the Property Editor, select Generic Unit Hydrograph as the Unit Hydrograph
Method.
6-419
Changing the Drawing View

4. Click the Ellipsis button (...) in the Unit Hydrograph Data field.
5. In the Unit Hydrograph Data dialog box, enter values into the table of flows (for a
unit of rainfall) vs. time, then click OK.
Other hydrographs used by Bentley SewerGEMS V8i are calculated within Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i.

You change the drawing view of your model by using the pan tool or one of the zoom
tools:
Panning on page 6-420
Zooming on page 6-421
Panning
You can change the position of your model in the drawing pane by using the Pan tool.
Pan tool
To use the Pan tool:

1. Click the Pan button on the Tools toolbar.
The mouse cursor changes to the Pan icon.
2. Click anywhere in the drawing, hold down the mouse button and move the mouse
to reposition the current view.
or
If your mouse is equipped with a mousewheel, you can pan by simply holding down
the mousewheel and moving the mouse to reposition the current view.
or
Select View > Pan, then click anywhere in the drawing, hold down the mouse button
and move the mouse to reposition the current view
Related Topics
6-420
Creating Your Model
Using the Zoom Center Command on page 6-423
Zooming
You can enlarge or reduce your model in the drawing pane using one of the following
zoom tools:
Zoom In and Out
The simple Zoom In and Zoom Out commands allow you to increase or decrease,
respectively, the zoom level of the current view by one step per mouse click.
Zoom In
Zoom Out
To use Zoom In or Zoom Out, click the desired button on the Tools toolbar, or select
View > Zoom > Zoom In or View > Zoom > Zoom In.
If your mouse is equipped with a mousewheel, you zoom in or out by simply moving
the mousewheel up or down respectively.
Zoom Window
The Zoom Window command lets you zoom in on an area of your model defined by a
window that you draw in the drawing pane.
To use Zoom Window, select View > Zoom > Zoom Window button, then click and
drag the mouse inside the drawing pane to draw a rectangle. The area of your model
inside the rectangle will appear enlarged.
Note:
If you use the Zoom Window command frequently, you might

find it more convenient to add them to the Tools toolbar. See
Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons on page 2-52 for more
information.
Zoom Extents
6-421

The Zoom Extents command automatically sets the zoom level such that the entire
model is displayed in the drawing pane.
Zoom Extents
To use Zoom Extents, click the Zoom Extents button on the Tools toolbar. The entire
model is displayed in the drawing pane.
or
Select View > Zoom > Zoom Extents.
Zoom Realtime
The Zoom Realtime command lets you dynamically scale up and down the zoom
level. The zoom level is defined by the magnitude of mouse movement while the tool
is active.
Zoom Realtime
Zoom Previous and Zoom Next
Zoom Previous
Zoom Previous returns the zoom level to the most recent previous setting. To use
Zoom Previous, click the Zoom Previous button on the Tools toolbar.
or
Select View > Zoom > Zoom Previous.
Zoom Next returns the zoom level to the setting that was active before a Zoom
Previous command was executed. To use Zoom Previous, click View > Zoom >
Zoom Next.
6-422
Creating Your Model

Note:
If you use the Zoom Next command frequently, you might find it
more convenient to add them to the Tools toolbar. See Adding
and Removing Toolbar Buttons on page 2-52 for more information.
Related Topics
Using the Zoom Center Command on page 6-423
Using the Zoom Center Command

The Zoom Center command lets you enter drawing coordinates that will be centered
in the drawing pane.
To use the Zoom Center command:
1. Select View > Zoom > Zoom Center. The Zoom Center dialog box appears.
2. Enter the X and Y coordinates.
3. Select the zoom factor from the Zoom drop-down, then click OK.
Zoom Center Dialog Box

The Zoom Center dialog box contains the following options:
X
Defines the X coordinate of the point at which the

model will be centered.
Defines the Y coordinate of the point at which the

model will be centered.
Zoom Factor
Defines the zoom level that will be applied
when the zoom center command is initiated.

Available zoom levels are listed in percentages
of 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200 and 400.
Related Topics
6-423
Using Selection Sets

Selection sets are user-defined groups of network elements. They allow you to
predefine a group of network elements that you want to manipulate together. You
manage selection sets in the Selection Sets Manager.
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i contains powerful features that let you view or analyze
subsets of your entire model. You can find these elements using the Network Navigator (see Using the Network Navigator on page 6-433). The Network Navigator
lets you choose a selection set, then view the list of elements in the selection set or
find individual elements from the selection set in the drawing.
In order to use the Network Navigator, you must first create a selection set. There are
two ways to create a selection set:
From a selection of elementsYou create a new selection set in the Selection Sets
Manager, then use your mouse to select the desired elements in the drawing pane.
From a queryCreate a query in the Queries Manager, then use the named query
to find elements in your model and place them in the selection set.
The following illustration shows the overall process.
You can perform the following operations with selection sets:
6-424
Viewing Elements in a Selection Sets on page 6-428
Creating a Selection Set from a Selection on page 6-428
Creating a Selection Set from a Query on page 6-429
Creating Your Model
Adding Elements to a Selection Set on page 6-431
Removing Elements from a Selection Set on page 6-432
Selection Sets Manager

The Selection Sets Manager allows you to create, edit, and navigate to selection sets.
The Selection Sets Manager consists of a toolbar and a list pane, which displays all of
the selection sets that are associated with the current project.
6-425

The toolbar contains the following buttons:
New
Delete
6-426
Create from SelectionCreates a new

static selection set from elements you
select in your model.
Create from QueryCreates a new

dynamic selection set from existing
queries.
Deletes the selection set that is currently

highlighted in the list pane. This command
is also available from the short-cut menu,
which you can access by right-clicking an
item in the list pane.
Creating Your Model
Edit
When a selection-based selection set is

highlighted when you click this button,
opens the Selection Set Element
Removal dialog box, which lets you edit
the selection set. This command is also
available from the short-cut menu,
which you can access by right-clicking
an item in the list pane.
When a query-based selection set is

highlighted when you click this button,
opens the Selection By Query dialog
box, which lets you add or remove
queries from the selection set. This
command is also available from the
short-cut menu, which you can access
by right-clicking an item in the list pane.
Rename
Lets you rename the selection set that is

currently highlighted in the list pane. This
command is also available from the shortcut menu, which you can access by rightclicking an item in the list pane.
Select In Drawing
Lets you quickly select all the elements in

the drawing pane that are part of the
currently highlighted selection set. Once you
have selected the elements in a selection set
using Select In Drawing, you can delete
them all at once or create a report on them.
This command is also available from the
short-cut menu, which you can access by
right-clicking an item in the list pane.
Help
Displays online help for the Selection Sets

Manager.
You can view the properties of a selection in the Property Editor by right-clicking the
selection set in the list pane and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu.
Related Topics:
6-427
Viewing Elements in a Selection Sets

You use the Network Navigator to view the elements that make up a selection set.
To view the elements that make up a selection set:
1. Open the Network Navigator by selecting View > Network Navigator or clicking
the Network Navigator button on the View toolbar.
2. Select a selection set from the Selection Set drop-down list. The elements in the
selection set appear in the Network Navigator.
Tip:
You can double-click an element in the Network Navigator to

select and center it in the Drawing Pane.
Related Topics:
Selection Sets Manager on page 6-425
Performing Group-Level Operations on Selection Sets on page 6-432
Creating a Selection Set from a Selection

You create a new selection set by selecting elements in your model.
To create a new selection set from a selection:
1. Select all of the elements you want in the selection set by either drawing a selection box around them or by holding down the Ctrl key while clicking each one in
turn.
2. When all of the desired elements are highlighted, right-click and select Create
Selection Set.
6-428
Creating Your Model

3. Type the name of the selection set you want to create, then click OK to create the
new selection set. Click Cancel to close the dialog box without creating the selection set.
4. Alternatively, you can open the Selection Set Manager and click the New button
and select Create from Selection. Bentley SewerGEMS V8i prompts you to
select one or more elements.
Create Selection Set Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you create a new selection set. It contains the following
field:
New selection set name
Lets you type the name of the new selection set.
Related Topics:
Creating a Selection Set from a Query

You create a dynamic selection set by creating a query-based selection set. A querybased selection set can contain one or more queries, which are valid SQL expressions.
To create a new selection set from a query:
1. In the Selection Sets Manager, click the New button and select Create from
Query. The Selection by Query dialog box appears.
2. Available queries appear in the list pane on the left; queries selected to be part of
the selection set appear in the list pane on the right. Use the arrow buttons in the
middle of the dialog to add one or all queries from the Available Queries list to the
Selected Queries list, or to remove queries from the Selected list.
You can also double-click queries on either side of the dialog box to add them
to or remove them from the selection set.
6-429
Selection by Query Dialog Box

The Selection by Query dialog box lets you create selection sets from available
queries. The dialog box contains the following controls:
Available Queries
Contains all the queries that are available for your

selection set. The Available Columns list is
located on the left side of the dialog box.
Selected Queries
Contains queries that are part of the selection set.

To add queries to the Selected Queries list, select
one or more queries in the Available Queries list,
then click the Add button [>].
Query Manipulation
Buttons
Lets you select or clear queries to be used in the

selection set:
[ > ] Adds the selected items from the Available Queries list to the Selected Queries list.
[ >> ] Adds all of the items in the Available

Queries list to the Selected Queries list.
[ < ] Removes the selected items from the

Selected Queries list.
[ << ] Removes all items from the Selected

Queries list.
Note:
You can select multiple queries

in the Available Queries list by
holding down the Shift key or
the Control key while clicking
with the mouse. Holding down
the Shift key provides group
selection behavior. Holding
down the Control key provides
single element selection
behavior.
Related Topics:
6-430
Creating Your Model
Adding Elements to a Selection Set

You can add a single or multiple elements to a static selection set.
To add an element to a static selection set:
1. Right-click the element to be added, then select Add to Selection Set from the
shortcut menu.
2. In the Add to Selection Set dialog box, select the selection set to which you want
to add the element.
3. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the element to the selected selection set.
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without creating the selection set.
To add a group of elements to a static selection set all at once:
1. Select all of the elements to be added by either drawing a selection box around
them, or by holding down the Ctrl key while clicking each one in turn.
2. When all of the desired elements are highlighted, right-click and select Add to
Selection Set.
3. In the Add to Selection Set dialog box, select the selection set to which you want
to add the element.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the element to the selected selection set.
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without creating the selection set.
Add To Selection Set Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select the Add to Selection Set command. It
contains the following field:
Add to:
Drop-down menu that lets you select the selection

set to which the currently highlighted element or
elements will be added.
Related Topics:
6-431
Removing Elements from a Selection Set

You can easily remove elements from a static selection set in the Selection Set
Element Removal dialog box.
To remove an element from a static selection set:
1. Display the Selection Sets Manager by selecting View > Selection Sets or
clicking the Selection Sets button on the View toolbar.
2. In the Selection Sets Manager, select the desired selection set then click the Edit
button.
3. In the Selection Set Element Removal dialog box, find the element you want to
remove in the table. Select the element label or the entire table row, then click the
Delete button.
4. Click OK.
Selection Set Element Removal Dialog Box

This dialog appears when you click the edit button from the Selection Set Manager. It
allows you to remove elements from the selection set that is highlighted in the Selection Sets Manager when the Edit button is clicked.
Related Topics:
Performing Group-Level Operations on Selection Sets

SewerGEMS V8i lets you perform group-level deletions on elements in a selection set
using the Select In Drawing button in the Selection Sets Manager.
6-432
Creating Your Model

Note:
While it is not possible to directly edit groups of elements in a

selection set, you can use the Next button in the Network
Navigator to quickly navigate through each element in the
selection set and edit its properties in the Property Editor.
To delete multiple elements from a selection set:

1. Open the Selection Sets Manager by selecting View > Selection Sets or clicking
the Selection Sets button on the View toolbar.
2. In the Selection Sets Manager, highlight the selection set that contains elements
you want to delete.
3. Click the Select In Drawing button in the Selection Sets Manager to highlight all
of the selection sets elements in the drawing pane.
If there is only one selection set listed in the Selection Set Manager, you dont
have to highlight it before clicking the Select In Drawing button.
4. Shift-click (hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button) any selected
elements that you do not want to delete.
5. Right-click and select Delete. The highlighted elements in the selection set are
deleted from your model.
Related Topics:
Using the Network Navigator

The Network Navigator consists of a toolbar and a table that lists the Label and ID of
each of the elements contained within the current selection. The selection can include
elements highlighted manually in the drawing pane, elements contained within a
selection set, or elements returned by a query.
6-433

To open the Network Navigator, click the View menu and select the Network Navigator command, press <Ctrl+3>, or click the Network Navigator button
View toolbar.
on the
The following controls are included in Network Navigator:

Query Selection
List
Choose the element sets to use in the query.

Once a query is selected, it can be executed
when you click the > icon.
If there is already a Query listed in the list

box, it can be run when the Execute icon is
clicked.
6-434
Execute
Click to run the selected query.
Previous
Zooms the drawing pane view to the

element prior to the currently selected one in
the list.
Zoom To

selected element in the list.
Creating Your Model
Next

element below the currently selected
element in the list.
Copy
Copies the elements to the Windows

clipboard.
Remove
Removes the selected element from the list.
Select In Drawing
Selects the elements in the drawing pane and

performs a zoom extent based on the
selection.
Highlight
When this toggle button is on, elements

returned by a query will be highlighted in
the drawing pane to increase their visibility.
Refresh Drawing
Refreshes the current selection.
Help
Opens SewerGEMS V8i Help.
Predefined Queries
The Network Navigator provides access to a number of predefined queries grouped
categorically, accessed by clicking the [>] button. Categories and the queries
contained therein include:
Element types - finds all elements of a specified type (e.g. all manholes).
Network review - finds potential problems in the model (e.g. finding disconnected
elements). This is a very powerful tool for model cleanup.
Input - finds elements in model with specified properties (e.g. find elliptical conduits)
6-435

Results - finds elements in model with results that meet the query criteria (e.g.
manholes that are flooded in this time step).
Note:
The criteria to meet the Near Horizontally Sloped results query is

that the slope is:
slope > -.005 AND slope < 0.005
User Defined Queries

In addition to predefined queries, you can create your own queries in the Queries
Manager. These queries can be saved with the project or in a shared file.
Query Parameters Dialog Box

The Query Parameters dialog appears when you perform a Network Trace > Upstream
or a Network Trace > Downstream query. The network trace query will find all
elements that are upstream or downstream of the element chosen in this dialog.
To perform an Upstream Network Trace:

1. In the Network Navigator, click the Query Selection List button and select
Network Trace > Upstream.
2. In the Query Parameters dialog, click the Downstream Node field and choose
Select...
3. In the drawing pane, click the downstream element. The trace query will find all
elements that are upstream of the element chosen here.
4. Click OK.
6-436
Creating Your Model

To perform a Downstream Network Trace:
1. In the Network Navigator, click the Query Selection List button and select
Network Trace > Downstream.
2. In the Query Parameters dialog, click the Upstream Node field and choose
Select...
3. In the drawing pane, click the upstream element. The trace query will find all
elements that are downstream of the element chosen here.
4. Click OK.
Using Prototypes
Prototypes allow you to enter default values for elements in your network. These
values are used while laying out the network. Prototypes can reduce data entry
requirements dramatically if a group of network elements share common data.
For example, if a section of the network contains all three foot-diameter manholes ,
use the manhole prototype to set the Diameter field to 3.00 ft. When you create a new
manhole in your model, its diameter attribute will default to 3.00 ft.
Note:
Changes to the prototypes are not retroactive and will not affect
any elements created prior to the change.
If a section of your system has distinctly different
characteristics than the rest of the system, adjust your
prototypes before laying out that section. This will save time
when you edit the properties later.
For instructions on how to create prototypes, see Creating Prototypes on page 6437.
Creating Prototypes
Prototypes contain default values for Bentley SewerGEMS V8i elements. You create
prototypes in the Prototypes Manager.
To create a prototype:
1. Open your Bentley SewerGEMS V8i project or start a new project.
2. Select View > Prototypes or press Ctrl+6.
The Prototypes Manager opens. All Bentley SewerGEMS V8i element types are
displayed in an expanding and collapsing list.
6-437
Using Prototypes
3. Select the element type for which you want to create a prototype, then click the
New button.
The element type in the list expands to display all the prototypes that exist for that
element type.
Each element type contains a default prototype, which is not editable, and any
prototypes that you have created. The current set of default values for each
element type is identified by the Make Current icon.
4. Double-click the prototype you just created. The Property Editor for the element
type opens.
5. Edit the attribute values in the Property Editor as required.
6. To make the new prototype the default, click the Make Current button in the
Prototypes Manager.
The icon next to the prototype changes to indicate that the values in the prototype
will be applied to all instances of that element type that you add to your current
project.
6-438
To rename a prototype, select the prototype in the list and click the Rename
button.
To delete a prototype, select the prototype in the list and click the Delete
button.
To view a report of the default values in the prototype, select the prototype in
the list and click the Report button.
Creating Your Model
Prototypes Manager
The Prototypes Manager allows you to create prototypes, which contain default
common data for each element type. The Prototypes Manager consists of a toolbar and
a list pane, which displays all of the elements available in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.
Note that element types that are not used in the current model are marked with an icon
.
The list of elements in the Prototypes Manager list pane is expandable and collapsible.
Click on the Plus sign to expand an element and see its associated prototypes. Click on
the Minus sign to collapse the element.
Each element in the list pane contains a default prototype; you cannot edit this default
prototype. The default prototypes contains common values for each element type; if
you add elements to your model without creating new prototypes, the data values in
the default prototypes appear in the Property Editor for that element type.
6-439
New
Creates a new prototype of the selected

element.
Delete
Deletes the prototype that is currently

highlighted in the list pane.
Rename
Lets you rename the prototype that is

Make Current
Lets you make the prototype that is currently

highlighted in the list pane the default for
that element type. When you make the
current prototype the default, every element
of that type that you add to your model in
the current project will contain the same
common data as the prototype.
Report
Lets you view a report of the data associated

with the prototype that is currently
Help
Displays online help for the Prototypes

Manager.
Related Topics:
Using Prototypes
Engineering Libraries are powerful and flexible tools that you use to manage specifications of common materials, objects, or components that are shared across projects.
Some examples of objects that are specified through engineering libraries include pipe
materials, Storm Data, and unit sanitary loads. You can modify engineering libraries
and the items they contain by using the Engineering Libraries command in the
Components menu, or by clicking the ellipsis () buttons available next to the fields
in dialog boxes that make use of engineering libraries.
6-440
Creating Your Model

Note:
The data for each engineering library is stored in an XML file in

your Bentley SewerGEMS V8i program directory. We strongly
recommend that you edit these files only using the built-in tools
available by selecting Components > Engineering Libraries.
You work with engineering libraries and the items they contain in the Engineering
Libraries dialog box, which contains all of the projects engineering libraries. Individual libraries are compilations of library entries, along with their attributes. For
more information about working with engineering libraries, see Working with Engineering Libraries on page 6-441.
By default, each project you create in SewerGEMS V8i uses the items in the default
libraries. In special circumstances, you may wish to create custom libraries to use with
one or more projects. You can do this by copying a standard library or creating a new
library.
When you change the properties for an item in an engineering library, those changes
affect all projects that use that library item. At the time a project is loaded, all of its
engineering library items are synchronized to the current library. Items are synchronized based on their label. If the label is the same, then the items values will be made
the same.
The default libraries that are installed with Bentley SewerGEMS V8i are editable. In
addition, you can create a new library of any type, and can then create new entries of
your own definition.
Library types are displayed in the Engineering Library manager in an expanding/

collapsing tree view.
Library types can contain categories and subcategories, represented as folders in

the tree view.
Individual library entries are contained within the categories, subcategories, and
folders in the tree view.
Libraries, categories, folders, and library entries are displayed in the tree view
with their own unique icons. You can right-click these icons to display submenus
with different commands.
Working with Engineering Libraries

When you select a library entry in the tree view, the attributes and attribute values
associated with the entry are displayed in the editor pane on the right side of the dialog
box.
Working with Libraries
6-441
Right-clicking a Library icon in the tree view opens a shortcut menu containing the
following commands:
6-442
Create Library
Creates a new engineering library of the currently

highlighted type.
Add Existing Library
Lets you add an existing engineering library that

has been stored on your hard drive as an .xml file
to the current project.
Creating Your Model

Working with Categories
Right-clicking a Category icon in the tree view opens a shortcut menu containing the
following commands:
Add Item
Creates a new entry within the current library.
Add Folder
Creates a new folder under the currently

highlighted library.
Save As
Lets you save the currently highlighted category

as an .xml file that can then be used in future
projects.
Remove
Deletes the currently highlighted category from

the library.
Working with Folders

Right-clicking a Folder icon in the tree view opens a shortcut menu containing the
following commands:
Add Item
Creates a new entry within the current folder.
Add Folder
Creates a new folder under the currently

highlighted folder.
Rename
Lets you rename the currently highlighted folder.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted folder and its

contents.
Working with Library Entries

Right-clicking a Library Entry icon in the tree view opens a shortcut menu containing
the following commands:
Rename
Lets you rename the currently highlighted entry.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted entry from the

library.
6-443
Engineering Libraries Dialog Box

The Engineering Libraries dialog box contains an explorer tree-view pane on the left,
a library entry editor pane on the right, and the following buttons above the explorer
tree view pane:
New
Save

commands:
Create LibraryCreates a new engineering library.
Add Existing LibraryLets you add an

existing engineering library that has
been stored on your hard drive as an
.xml file to the current project.

commands:
Save AsLets you save the current

engineering library under a new name
and/or to a new location.
ProjectWise Check OutLets you

check out an existing engineering library
that has been stored in ProjectWise.
Remove
Removes the currently highlighted

engineering library from the current project.
Rename

engineering library.
Related Topics:
6-444
Sharing Engineering Libraries On a Network on page 6-445
Pipe Catalog Dialog Box on page 5-317
Rainfall Curve Dictionary Dialog Box on page 7-680
Rational Method IDF Curve Dialog Box on page 7-681
Creating Your Model
Sharing Engineering Libraries On a Network

You can share engineering libraries with other SewerGEMS V8i users in your organization by storing the engineering libraries on a network drive. All users who will have
access to the shared engineering library should have read-write access to the network
folder in which the library is located.
To share an engineering library on a network, open the Engineering Libraries in
SewerGEMS V8i and create a new library in a network folder to which all users have
read-write access.
Minor Loss Coefficients

The Minor Loss Coefficients dialog box allows you to create, edit, and manage minor
loss coefficient definitions.
The following management controls are located above the minor loss coefficient list
pane:
6-445
Minor Loss Coefficients
New
Creates a new Minor Loss Coefficient.
Duplicate

minor loss coefficient.
Delete
Deletes the minor loss coefficient that is

Rename
Renames the minor loss coefficient that is

Report
Opens a report of the data associated with

the minor loss coefficient that is currently
Synchronization
Options
Browses the Engineering Library,

synchronizes to or from the library, imports
from the library or exports to the library.
The tab section is used to define the settings for the minor loss that is currently highlighted in the minor loss list pane. The following controls are available:
6-446
Minor Loss Tab
This tab consists of input data fields that allow you

to define the minor loss.
Minor Loss Type
General type of fitting or loss element. This field

is used to limit the number of minor loss elements
available in choice lists. For example, the minor
loss choice list on the valve dialog box only
includes minor losses of the valve type. You
cannot add or delete types.
Minor Loss Coefficient
Headloss coefficient for the minor loss. This

unitless number represents the ratio of the
headloss across the minor loss element to the
velocity head of the flow through the element.
Creating Your Model
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the minor loss

that is currently highlighted in the minor loss list
pane. If the minor loss is derived from an
engineering library, the synchronization details
can be found here. If the minor loss was created
manually for this project, the synchronization
details will display the message Orphan (local),
indicating that the minor loss was not derived
from a library entry.
Notes Tab

descriptive notes that will be associated with the
minor loss that is currently highlighted in the
minor loss list pane.
Using the Totalizing Flow Meters

Totalizing flow meters allow you to view results of the total volume going through
your model for a specific selection of elements.
Note:
Totalizing Flow Meters can only be applied to pressure elements.

If no pressure elements are selected in the drawing when the
Totalizing Flow Meter dialog is opened, you will be prompted to
choose elements initially.
Totalizing Flow Meters Manager Dialog

The Totalizing Flow Meter manager consists of the following controls:
New
Create a new totalizing flow meter.
Delete
Delete the selected totalizing flow meter.
Rename
Rename the label for the current totalizing flow

meter.
Edit
Open the totalizing flow meter editor.
Refresh
Recompute the volume of the current totalizing

flow meter.
Help
Opens the online help for totalizing flow meter.
6-447
Using the Totalizing Flow Meters
To create a new Totalizing Flow Meter

1. Click Compute. (EPS settings must be on in order to utilize this feature.)
2. From the Analysis Menu click Totalizing Flow Meters.
3. Click New which will open up the Select box.

4. Select the elements to be calculated or click the Query box then click Done.
You can also create a totalizing flow meter by simply right-clicking a pressure pipe
and selecting the Totalizing Flow Meter command from the context menu that
appears.
Totalizing Flow Meter Editor Dialog

The Totalizing Flow Meter editor allows you to:
6-448
Define settings for new or existing flow meters
Creating Your Model

Display the calculated results for the current flow meter settings.
The Totalizing Flow Meter Summary tab displays the totals for each element type.
The Totalizing Flow Meter Details tab displays results for each individual element.
Note:
Totalizing flow meters can only be created for pressure

elements; if no pressure elements are selected, you will be
prompted to choose pressure elements using the Select toolbar
when creating a new meter.
To define flow meter settings

1. Set Start and Stop times. Once selected, the results are automatically updated.
2. Click the Report button to run a report or click Close.
To remove elements from the Totalizing Flow Meter definition
Highlight the element to be removed in the list and click the Delete button above the
list pane.
To add elements to the Totalizing Flow Meter definition
1. Click the Select From Drawing button above the element list pane.
2. In the Drawing View, click the element or elements to be added.
Click the Done button in the Select dialog.
6-449
Inlet Catalog Dialog Box

The Inlet Catalog dialog box allows you to create, edit, and delete inlet definitions that
can then be assigned to catchment elements in your model.
The following inlet types are available from this dialog:
Combination
Curb
Ditch
Grate
Slot
Flow to Inlet vs. Flow Captured
Gutter Depth vs. Captured Flow
You can also import an inlet definition from the Inlet Libraries Engineering Library,
and export inlet definitions to the Engineering Library for later use.
The dialog box contains a list pane on the left and a tabbed input data area on the right,
and includes the following controls:
New: Creates a new inlet defintion in the list pane on the left.
Duplicate: Copies the currently highlighted inlet definition.
Delete: Deletes the currently highlighted inlet definition.
Rename: Lets you rename the currently highlighted inlet definition.
Report: Lets you generate a preformatted report that contains the input data
associated with the currently highlighted inlet definition.
Synchronization Options: Clicking this button opens a submenu containing

6-450
Creating Your Model

dialog, allowing you to browse the Inlet Libraries.
Synchronize From LibraryLets you update a set of inlet defintions previously imported from one of the Inlet Libraries. The updates reflect changes
that have been made to the library since it was imported.
Synchronize To LibraryLets you update one of the existing Inlet Libraries
using current inlet definitions that were initially imported but have since been
modified.
Import From LibraryLets you import a inlet defintion from one of the
existing Inlet Libraries.
Export To LibraryLets you export the current inlet defintions to one of the
existing Inlet Libraries.
Connect to LibraryLets you create a connection between the inlet catalog
and the specified engineering library.
The fields and controls that appear in the tabbed area depend on which inlet type is
chosen. Not all fields will be available for all inlet types.
Inlet Tab
Structure Width: Define the width of the inlet structure. This field is available for
all inlet types.
Structure Length: Define the length of the inlet structure. This field is available for
all inlet types.
Curb Opening Height: Define the height of the curb opening. This field is available for Curb and Combination inlet types.
Default Curb Opening Length: Define the default length of the curb opening. This
field is available for Curb and Combination inlet types.
Local Depression: Define the depth of the gutter depression at the inlet, if any.
This field is available for Curb and Combination inlet types.
Depression Width: Define the width of the gutter depression at the inlet, if any.
This field is available for Curb and Combination inlet types.
Throat Type: Choose the throat type. The throat type defines the shape of curb
opening. This field is available for Curb and Combination inlet types.
Throat Angle: Define the angle of the inlet throat. This field is only available
when the Inclined Throat Type is chosen. This field is available for Curb and
Combination inlet types.
Grate Type: Choose the grating type. This field is available for Combination,
Ditch, and Grating inlet types.
Grate Width: Define the width of the grating. This field is available for Combination, Ditch, and Grating inlet types.
6-451
Default Grate Length: Define the default length of the grating. This field is available for Combination, Ditch, and Grating inlet types.
Slot Width: Define the default width of the slot. This field is available for Slot
inlet type.
Default Slot Length: Define the default length of the slot. This field is available
for Slot inlet type.
Flow to Inlet vs. Flow Captured Table: This table is only available when the Flow
to Inlet vs. Flow Captured Inlet type is selected. It allows you to define the amount
of Flow Captured at various Flow to Inlet points. Click the New button to add a
new row to the table. Click the Delete button to remove the currently highlighted
row from the table.
Gutter Depth vs. Captured Flow Table: This table is only available when the
Gutter Depth vs. Captured Flow Inlet type is selected. It allows you to define the
amount of Captured Flow at various Gutter Depth values. Click the New button to
add a new row to the table. Click the Delete button to remove the currently highlighted row from the table.
Design Tab
This tab contains a list of allowable design lengths. When performing a design analysis, the program will only be able to select inlets of one of lengths specified here. To
add a new length to the list click the New button and type in the length. To remove a
length from the list, highlight it and click the Delete button.
Notes Tab
This tab contains a text field that allows you to enter descriptive notes that will be
associated with the currently highlighted inlet definition.
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the inlet definition that is currently highlighted in
the list pane. If the inlet definition is derived from an engineering library, the synchronization details can be found here. If the inlet definition was created manually for this
project, the synchronization details will display the message Orphan (local), indicating that the inlet definition was not derived from a library entry.
To create a new Inlet:
1. Click the New button above the list pane.
2. Type a name for the inlet.
3. Choose an Inlet Type from the Inlet Type field in the tabbed section to the right.
6-452
Creating Your Model

4. Type in input data in the input fields in the tabbed section to the right. The available fields will vary according to the Inlet Type that is chosen.
5. Click Close when you have finished defining the inlet parameters.
To import an inlet from the Engineering Library:
1. Click the Synchronization Options button and select Import From Library from
the submenu.
2. Expand the Inlet Libraries node to view all of the existing Inlet Libraries. There
will be the default Inlets Library, along with any additional custom libraries
you've created.
3. Expand the desired library to view all of the inlet definitions within that library.
Click on the inlet definitions to view their properties on the right side of the
dialog.
4. When you have chosen the desired inlet definition click the Select button. The
new inlet will appear in the list pane.
To access the Inlet Catalog
In Stand-Alone and Microstation, click the Components menu and select the Inlet
Catalog command.
In AutoCAD mode, click the CivilStorm menu, then select Components > Inlet
Catalog.
Default Curb and Grate Lengths

When you assign a catalog inlet to a catch basin, SewerGEMS V8i will assign the
default curb and grate length values for that catalog inlet (as defined in the Default
Curb Opening Length and Default Grate Length fields) to the catch basins curb
opening length and grate length respectively. However, you can also manually change
the values for the catch basin so that it the catalog inlet values and catch basin values
are not in sync. When you perform an analysis computation run, the value in the catch
basin attribute is used. When you do a design run, the value of the catch basin
attribute is initially used, but then that catch basin attribute can be changed during
design to one of the available curb opening lengths listed in the design tab of the referenced catalog inlet.
6-453
Design Grating Types Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define the grating type classification(s) for entries in the
Inlet Engineering Library.
The following controls are available:
New: Creates a new row in the table.
Delete: Deletes the currently highlighted row from the table.
6-454
Creating Your Model
Design Lengths Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define the design lengths for Curb-type inlets in the Inlet
Engineering Library.
6-455
Gutter Catalog Dialog Box
Gutter Depth Vs Captured Flow Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define the gutter depth vs captured flow curve for inlet engineering library entries.

The Gutter Catalog dialog box allows you to create, edit, and delete gutter definitions
that can then be assigned to gutter or catchbasin elements in your model.
The following gutter shapes are available from this dialog:
6-456
Conventional
Irregular
Parabolic
Trapezoidal
V-Shaped
Creating Your Model

You can also import a gutter definition from the Gutter Catalogs Engineering Library,
and export gutter definitions to the Engineering Library for later use.
The dialog box contains a list pane on the left and a tabbed input data area on the right,
and includes the following controls:
New: Creates a new gutter defintion in the list pane on the left.
Delete: Deletes the currently highlighted gutter definition.
Rename: Lets you rename the currently highlighted gutter definition.
associated with the currently highlighted gutter definition.

dialog, allowing you to browse the Gutter Catalogs.
Synchronize From LibraryLets you update a set of gutter defintions
previously imported from one of the Gutter Catalogs. The updates reflect
Synchronize To LibraryLets you update one of the existing Gutter Catalogs using current gutter definitions that were initially imported but have
since been modified.
Import From LibraryLets you import a gutter defintion from one of the
existing Gutter Catalogs.
Export To LibraryLets you export the current gutter defintions to one of
the existing Gutter Catalogs.
Connect to LibraryLets you create a connection between the gutter
catalog and the specified engineering library.
The fields and controls that appear in the tabbed area depend on which gutter shape is
chosen. Not all fields will be available for all gutter types.
Gutter Tab
Gutter Shape: Select the shape of the gutter.
6-457
Road Cross Slope: Enter the transverse slope of the road. Applicable to Conventional and V-Shaped gutters.
Gutter Depression?: If this box is checked, the gutter slope differs from the road
cross slope. Applicable to Conventional and V-Shaped gutters.
Gutter Cross Slope: The transverse slope of the gutter. This value is typically
equal to or greater than the road cross slope. Applicable to Conventional and VShaped gutters.
Gutter Width: The horizontal width of the gutter. This is equal to the distance
from the curb face to the point at which the road cross slope begins. Applicable to
Conventional and V-Shaped gutters.
Material: The material of the gutter.
Mannings n: The Mannings n roughness value for the gutter.
Kutters n: The Kutters n roughness value for the gutter.
Darcy-Weisbach e: The Darcy-Wesibach e roughness value for the gutter.
Hazen Williams C: The Hazen Williams C roughness value for the gutter.
Station/Elevation (Relative) Table: This table allows you to define the shape of
an Irregular gutter by entering Station/Elevation points.
Station: The cross-sectional distance at the current point. You can enter these
in any order that defines the gutter (e.g., from left-to-right, from right-to-left,
with an upstream or downstream perspective).
Elevation (Relative): This field allows you to define the height above the
gutter invert at that cross section point. This value can be a negative number.
Note that the elevation defined here is used purely to define the shape of the
section, and it is not meant to represent a real elevation. In the calculations,
SewerGEMS V8i uses the irregular section shape defined here, as well as the
Invert (Upstream) and Invert (Downstream) properties of the conduit. To do
this, SewerGEMS V8i sets the lowest point on the irregular section equal to
the invert elevation at the upstream and downstream ends of the conduit, and
the elevation of other points in the irregular section are adjusted accordingly.
Height: The height of the parabolic gutter.
Width: The width of the parabolic gutter.
Bottom Width: The width along the bottom of the trapezoidal gutter.
Left Side Slope: The left side slope of the trapezoidal gutter.
Right Side Slope: The right side slope of the trapezoidal gutter.
Curb Cross Slope: The slope of the curb, specific to a V-Shaped gutter. Conventional gutters assume a vertically sloped curb.
Library Tab
6-458
Creating Your Model

This tab displays information about the gutter definition that is currently highlighted
in the list pane. If the gutter definition is derived from an engineering library, the
synchronization details can be found here. If the gutter definition was created manually for this project, the synchronization details will display the message Orphan
(local), indicating that the gutter definition was not derived from a library entry.
Notes Tab
associated with the currently highlighted gutter definition.
To create a new Gutter:
1. Click the New button above the list pane.
2. Type a name for the gutter.
3. Choose a Gutter Shape from the Gutter Shape field in the tabbed section to the
right.
4. Type in input data in the input fields in the tabbed section to the right. The available fields will vary according to the Gutter Shape that is chosen.
5. Click Close when you have finished defining the gutter parameters.
To import a gutter from the Engineering Library:
1. Click the Synchronization Options button and select Import From Library from
the submenu.
2. Expand the Gutter Catalogs node to view all of the existing gutter libraries. There
will be the default Gutter Catalogs, along with any additional custom libraries
you've created.
3. Expand the desired library to view all of the gutter definitions within that library.
Click on the gutter definitions to view their properties on the right side of the
dialog.
4. When you have chosen the desired gutter definition click the Select button. The
new gutter will appear in the list pane.
To access the Gutter Catalog
In Stand-Alone and Microstation, click the Components menu and select the Gutter
Catalog command.
In AutoCAD mode, click the SewerGEMS V8i menu, then select Components >
Gutter Catalog.
6-459
Conduit Catalog Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to create, edit, and view catalog conduits. Catalog conduits
are an efficient way to reuse common physical conduit definitions.
6-460
Creating Your Model

The dialog box contains a toolbar, a Conduit Catalog list pane, and two tabs. The
toolbar contains the following buttons:
New
Creates a new entry in the Conduit

Catalog List Pane.
6-461
Delete
Deletes the entry that is currently

highlighted in the Conduit Catalog List
Pane.
Rename
Lets you rename the entry that is

currently highlighted in the Conduit
Catalog List Pane.
Report

that contains the input data associated
with the entry that is currently
highlighted in the Conduit Catalog List
Pane.
Synchronize

Browse Engineering LibraryThis

command opens the Engineering Library
manager dialog, allowing you to browse
the Conduit Catalog Library.
Synchronize From LibraryThis

command allows you to update a Conduit
Catalog that was previously imported
from a Conduit Catalog Engineering
Library to reflect changes that have been
made to the library since it was imported.
Synchronize To LibraryThis
command allows you to update an
existing Conduit Catalog Engineering
Library using current Conduit Catalog
entries that were initially imported but
Import From LibraryThis command

allows you to import catalog entries from
an existing Conduit Catalog Engineering
Library.
Export To LibraryThis command

allows you to export the current catalog
entries to an existing Conduit Catalog
Connect To LibraryThis command

allows you to connect the current catalog
entries to an existing Conduit Catalog
The following table describes the rest of the controls in the Conduit Catalog dialog
box.
6-462
Creating Your Model
Conduit Catalog List

Pane
Located on the left side of the dialog box, displays

a list of all of the catalog pipes that have been
defined in the current project. Highlighting a
catalog pipe in this list causes the Cross Section
Shape and Roughness Sections to display the
associated information with the highlighted pipe.
Cross Section Shape
Located in the top-right corner of the Conduit

Catalog tab, contains controls that allow you to
define the size and shape of the catalog pipe
currently highlighted in the List Pane. The controls
that appear change according to the Cross
Section Type that is selected.
Conduit Shape
Lets you define the type of cross section for the

currently highlighted catalog pipe.
Diameter
Lets you define the diameter of the pipe. This field

is only available for Circular catalog pipes.
Rise
Lets you define the rise (height) of the catalog

pipe. This field is available for all cross section
types except Circular.
Span
Lets you define the span (width) of the catalog

pipe.
Power Exponent
Lets you define thepower exponent for Power

Channel conduit shapes.
Bottom Radius
(Rectangular-Round)
Lets you define the bottom radius of RectangularRound conduit shapes.
Triangle Height
(Rectangular-Triangle)
Lets you define the triangle height of RectangularTriangle conduit shapes.
Bottom Width
The width at the base of the cross section of the

conduit.
Left Side Slope
The left slope of the cross section of the conduit.
Right Side Slope
The right slope of the cross section of the conduit.
Channel Weighting
Method
Lets you select the channel weighting method to

use for Irregular Channel conduit shapes.
6-463
Irregular Channel
Table
6-464
This table allows you to define the follwoing

attributes when the Irregular Channel Conduit
Shape is selected:
Station - This field allows you to define the

cross-sectional distance at the current curve
point. You can enter these in any order that
defines the channel (e.g., from left-to-right,
from right-to-left, with an upstream or downstream perspective).
Depth - This field allows you to define the

depth for the current curve point for the
channel. The value here is relative, i.e. you
can define it based on the bottom of the
channel being 0 feet and the top being 1 foot,
and it will perform identically as using the
actual elevation of one endpoint for the bottom
of the channel, and the top sides of the
channel being the bottom+1ft. This value can
be a negative number.
Availability
Located in the mid-right corner of the Conduit

Catalog tab, lets you select whether or not the
current conduit is available for automated design.
Available for Design?
When this box is checked, the current conduit will

be available for use during an automated design
run.
Roughness
Located in the bottom-right corner of the Conduit

Catalog tab, lets you define the roughness
attributes of the catalog pipe currently highlighted
in the List Pane. The controls that are available
change depending on the Roughness Type
selected.
Roughness Type
Lets you specify which of the available roughness

methods to be applied to the catalog pipe currently
highlighted in the List Pane. The other controls
available in section are dependent on the
selection made in this box.
Material
Lets you enter a material label. This field is

informational only, and will not affect the
roughness properties of the associated catalog
entry.
Creating Your Model
Mannings n
Lets you define the roughness value for the

catalog pipe. This field is available only when the
Roughness Type is Single Mannings n.
Depth vs. Mannings

Table
Lets you define a depth vs. roughness curve for

the catalog pipe. This field is available only when
the Roughness Type is Mannings n-Depth Curve.
Mannings vs.
Discharge Table
Lets you define a flow vs. roughness curve for the

catalog pipe. This field is available only when the
Roughness Type is Mannings n-Flow.
Library Tab
Displays information pertaining to the catalog

entry that is currently highlighted in the List Pane,
including:
ID
Label
Modified Date
Library Source
Library Modified Date
Synchronization Status
Defining Mannings n vs. Depth Curves

You can define the roughness type for a conduit or a channel by creating a Mannings
n vs. Depth curve. You define the curve for a channel in the Property Editor for the
connecting cross section node.
To define a Mannings n vs. Depth curve for a conduit or a channel:
a. For a conduit, click the conduit in your model, or right-click the conduit and
select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Physical section of the Property Editor, select Mannings n - Depth Curve
as the Roughness Type. The Mannings n-Depth Curve field becomes available.
3. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Mannings n - Depth Curve field.
6-465

4. In the Mannings n - Depth Curve dialog box, each row in the table represents a
depth value and its associated Mannings n roughness value. For each row in the
table, perform the following steps:
a. Type the depth in the Depth column, then press the Tab key to move to the
Mannings n column.
b. Type a value in the Mannings n column or click the Ellipses (...) button in the
column to display the Material Libraries in the Engineering Libraries.
c. Click the plus signs to expand the Material Libraries, then select the desired
material and click the Select button. The Mannings n roughness value associated with the selected material appears in the table.
Note:
5. Click the New button to add a row to the table.

6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each new row of values in the table.
8. Click OK to close the dialog box and save the curve data in the Property Editor.
Mannings nDepth Curve Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you define a Mannings n vs. Depth table for conduits and channels. The dialog box contains the Depth vs. Mannings table and the following
buttons:
New
Delete

the table.
Report

dialog box.
6-466
Creating Your Model
Column
Description
Depth
Lets you define the depth of the depth vs.

Mannings curve point.
Manning n
Lets you define the roughness value at the

specified depth in the Depth vs. Mannings table.
Related Topics
Defining Mannings n vs. Flow Curves

You can define the roughness type for a conduit or a channel by creating a Mannings
n vs. Flow curve. You define the curve for a channel in the Property Editor for the
connecting cross section node.
To define a Mannings n vs. Flow curve for a conduit or a channel:
a. For a conduit, click the conduit in your model, or right-click the conduit and
select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Physical section of the Property Editor, select Mannings n - Flow as the
Roughness Type. The Mannings-Flow Curve field becomes available.
3. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Mannings n - Flow Curve field.
4. In the Mannings n - Flow Curve dialog box, each row in the table represents a
depth value and its associated Mannings n roughness value. For each row in the
table, perform the following steps:
a. Type the depth in the Flow column, then press the Tab key to move to the
Mannings n column.
b. Type a value in the Mannings n column or click the Ellipses (...) button in the
column to display the Material Libraries in the Engineering Libraries.
c. Click the plus signs to expand the Material Libraries, then select the desired
material and click the Select button. The Mannings n roughness value associated with the selected material appears in the table.
6-467

Note:
5. Click the New button to add a row to the table.

6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each new row of values in the table.
8. Click OK to close the dialog box and save the curve data in the Property Editor
Mannings nFlow Curve Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you define Flow vs. Mannings n tables for conduits and channels.
6-468
Creating Your Model

The dialog box contains the flow vs. Mannings table and the following buttons:
New
Delete

the table.
Report

dialog box.

Column
Description
Flow
Lets you define the flow of the flow vs. Mannings

curve point.
Manning n
Lets you define the roughness value at the

specified flow in the Flow vs. Mannings table.
Related Topics:
Vortex Valves
This dialog allows you to define vortex valve elements.
6-469
Vortex Valves
The dialog box contains a toolbar, a list pane, and two tabs. The toolbar contains the
following buttons:
6-470
New
Creates a new entry in the Vortex Valve

List Pane.
Delete

highlighted in theVortex Valve List Pane.
Duplicate

highlighted in the Vortex Valve List
Pane.
Creating Your Model
Rename

currently highlighted in the Vortex Valve
List Pane.
Report

highlighted in the Vortex Valve List
Pane.
Synchronize

Help

the Vortex Valve Library.

command allows you to update a valve
library that was previously imported from
a Vortex Valve Library to reflect changes
that have been made to the library since
it was imported.
existing Vortex Valve Library using
current valve entries that were initially
imported but have since been modified.

an existing Vortex Valve Library.

entries to an existing Vortex Valve
Library.
Opens the online help documentation.
To define a vortex valve, highlight it in the list pane, then enter points in the HeadFlow table of the Head-Flow Curve tab. Click the New button to add a row to the
table, or Delete to remove the currently highlighted row.
6-471
Vortex Valves
In addition to the Head-Flow Curve tab, the following tabs are also available:
Notes Tab

the valve that is currently highlighted in the Vortex
Valve List Pane.
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the valve that

is currently highlighted in the ortex Valve List
Pane. If the valve is derived from an engineering
library, the synchronization details can be found
here. If the valve was created manually for this
project, the synchronization details will display
the message Orphan (local), indicating that the
valve was not derived from a library entry.
Head-Flow Curve Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you define Head vs. Flow tables for vortex valves.
6-472
Creating Your Model

The dialog box contains thehead vs. flow table and the following buttons:
New
Delete

the table.

Column
Description
Head
Lets you define the head of the head vs. flow

curve point.
Flow
Lets you define the flow of the head vs. flow curve
point.
Using the SWMM Solver

This section contains the following topics:
Water Quality
SWMM Hydrology
SWMM Snow Packs (SWMM Snow Pack Editor)
Climatology Dialog Box
Aquifers Dialog Box
Control Sets Dialog Box
Pollutants Dialog Box
Adding Pollutographs to a Node
Land Uses Dialog Box
Adding Treatment to a Node
6-473

Initial Buildup Collection Dialog Box
Note:
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i uses SWMM engine version 5.0.022.
Water Quality
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i can perform water quality modeling using the SWMM
water quality solver. In order to make a water quality run choose the SWMM5
Explicit Engine from the Analysis > Calculation Options > Engine Type dialog.
You must then define the pollutant being modeled using the Component > SWMM
Extensions > Pollutants dialog (see Pollutants Dialog Box). In the Pollutants
dialog, the enter a name for the pollutant and define the properties.
If water quality data is present in a scenario, water quality calculations will be
performed.
There are two methods for loading pollutants in a water quality simulation.
1. Point (node) load, which involves assigning a pollutograph (see Adding Pollutographs to a Node) to a node element (such as a manhole or a cross section). This can
be done in the element property grid or under the water quality alternative of the
Alternatives Manager for that element. This method is used for point loads such as
industrial dischargers or normal domestic customers.
2. Catchment runoff, where the pollutant enters the system based on one of several
different washoff functions for each land use assigned to a catchment. Land uses and
washoff (and optional buildup/treatment) functions are defined under Components >
SWMM Extensions > Land Use. Then under, Alternatives > Water Quality >
Catchments, define what fraction of the catchment is associated with each land use
(see Land Uses Collection Dialog Box) and the initial buildup of pollutants (see
Initial Buildup Collection Dialog Box) at the start of the run. In long-term runs, you
can specify the rate at which pollutants build up on the catchment surface (and are
possibly removed by treatments such as street sweeping).
It is not possible to view the water quality results using the standard graphing. Instead,
you must open the property grid for the element, scroll down to Results > Pollutant
and open the collection by clicking on the ellipsis button. This will display a graph of
concentration vs. time. Switching to the Data tab will give tabular results.
6-474
Creating Your Model

An overview of the water quality modeling process is shown below.
Note:
When SewerGEMS V8i is running calculations using the Implicit

Engine Type (this setting is found in the Calculation Options
Manager), SWMM attributes and their associated values are not
considered. Only when the SWMM Engine Type is used will the
data contained in these dialog boxes have any effect on the
calculated results.
See also:
Evaporation Dialog Box on page 5-343
Aquifers Dialog Box on page 6-484
Control Sets Dialog Box on page 6-486
Pollutants Dialog Box on page 6-493
Adding Pollutographs to a Node on page 6-494
Land Uses Dialog Box on page 6-499
Adding Treatment to a Node on page 6-510
Initial Buildup Collection Dialog Box on page 6-512
6-475
SWMM Hydrology
You can use the Explicit (SWMM 5) engine in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i to route
flows through the system. However, in order to use SWMM hydraulics, you must load
the model through inflows at nodes, or you must select EPA-SWMM Runoff as the
runoff method for a catchment. If you are not familiar with SWMM hydrology, we
strongly recommend that you read SWMM 5 documentation for a detailed discussion
of the topic.
The overall process through which precipitation is converted to flow in conduits and
channels is summarized in the following figure.
Figure 6-1:
6-476
Conversion of Precipitation to Flow
Creating Your Model

The parameters used in determining runoff can be divided into two categories:
Parameters that are shared by the SWMM model and the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i/
SewerGEMS native hydrology calculations. These include SCS runoff curve number,
Horton max and min infiltration rates, etc. You can enter these parameters in the Property Editor or in the FlexTable for a specific catchment.
Parameters that are unique to the SWMM model. These include evaporation rates,
aquifer conductivity, and wilting point. To enter these parameters, you must select
Analysis > SWMM Extensions, then select the appropriate SWMM dialog.
SWMM Snow Packs (SWMM Snow Pack Editor)

Snow Pack objects contain parameters that characterize the buildup, removal, and
melting of snow over three types of sub-areas within a catchment:
The Plowable snow pack area consists of a user-defined fraction of the total
impervious area. It is meant to represent such areas as streets and parking lots
where plowing and snow removal can be done.
The Impervious snow pack area covers the remaining impervious area of a catchment.
The Pervious snow pack area encompasses the entire pervious area of a catchment.
Each of these three areas is characterized by the following parameters:
minimum and maximum snow melt coefficients
minimum air temperature for snow melt to occur
snow depth above which 100% areal coverage occurs
initial snow depth
initial and maximum free water content in the pack.
6-477

In addition, a set of snow removal parameters can be assigned to the Plowable area.
These parameters consist of the depth at which snow removal begins and the fractions
of snow moved onto various other areas.
Catchments are assigned a snow pack object through their Snow Pack property. A
single snow pack object can be applied to any number of catchments. Assigning a
snow pack to a catchment simply establishes the melt parameters and initial snow
conditions for that catchment. Internally, the SWMM solver creates a "physical" snow
pack for each catchment, which tracks snow accumulation and melting for that particular catchment based on its snow pack parameters, its amount of pervious and impervious area, and the precipitation history it sees.
The Snow Pack Editor contains a list view for the snow pack's name and two tabbed
pages, one for Snow Pack Parameters and one for Snow Removal Parameters.
Access the Snow Pack Editor by selecting Components > SWMM Extensions >
Snow Pack, or by selecting Edit in the Snow Pack field in the Properties Editor
when viewing the properties of a catchment (note: for the Snow Pack field to be
visible, Has Snow Pack? must be set to True).
Snow Pack Parameters Tab

The Snow Pack Parameters tab of the Snow Pack Editor dialog provides snow melt
parameters and initial conditions for snow that accumulates over three different types
of areas: the impervious area that is plowable (i.e., subject to snow removal), the
remaining impervious area, and the entire pervious area. The page contains a data
entry grid which has a column for each type of area and a row for each of the
following parameters:
Minimum Melt Coefficient: The degree-day snow melt coefficient that occurs on
December 21. Units are either in/hr-deg F or mm/hr-deg C.
Maximum Melt Coefficient: The degree-day snow melt coefficient that occurs on
June 21. Units are either in/hr-deg F or mm/hr-deg C. For a short term simulation of
less than a week or so it is acceptable to use a single value for both the minimum and
maximum melt coefficients.
The minimum and maximum snow melt coefficients are used to estimate a melt coefficient that varies by day of the year. The latter is used in the following degree-day
equation to compute the melt rate for any particular day: Melt Rate = (Melt Coefficient) * (Air Temperature - Base Temperature).
Base Temperature: Temperature at which snow begins to melt (degrees F or C).
Fraction Free Water Capacity: The volume of a snow pack's pore space which must
fill with melted snow before liquid runoff from the pack begins, expressed as a fraction of snow pack depth.
6-478
Creating Your Model

Initial Snow Depth: Depth of snow at the start of the simulation (water equivalent
depth in inches or millimeters).
Initial Free Water: Depth of melted water held within the pack at the start of the
simulation (inches or mm). This number should be at or below the product of the
initial snow depth and the fraction free water capacity.
Depth at 100% Cover: The depth of snow beyond which the entire area remains
completely covered and is not subject to any areal depletion effect (inches or mm).
Plowable Impervious Area: The fraction of impervious area that is plowable and
therefore is not subject to areal depletion.
Snow Removal Parameters Tab

The Snow Removal Parameters tab of the Snow Pack Editor dialog describes how
snow removal occurs within the Plowable area of a snow pack. The following parameters govern this process:
Depth at which snow removal begins: Depth which must be reached before any
snow removal begins.
Fraction transferred out of watershed: The fraction of snow depth that is

removed from the system (and does not become runoff).
Fraction transferred to the impervious area: The fraction of snow depth that is
added to snow accumulation on the pack's impervious area.
Fraction transferred to the pervious area: The fraction of snow depth that is
added to snow accumulation on the pack's pervious area.
Fraction converted to immediate melt: The fraction of snow depth that becomes
liquid water which runs onto any catchment associated with the snow pack.
Snow Transferred Outside Catchment: The fraction of snow depth which is

added to the snow accumulation on some other catchment.
Snow Catchment: The name of the catchment that receives the snow that is transferred outside of the snow pack.
The various removal fractions must add up to 1.0 or less. If less than 1.0, then
some remaining fraction of snow depth will be left on the surface after all of the
redistribution options are satisfied
Climatology Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define climatology conditions, including: temperature;
the evaporation that can occur for standing water on subcatchment surfaces, for
subsurface water in groundwater aquifers, and from water held in storage units; wind
speed data; snow melt; and areal depletion.
6-479

The dialog is divided into five tabbed pages, where each page provides a separate
editor for the following data categories:
Temperature Tab
Evaporation Tab
Wind Speed Tab
Snowmelt Tab
Areal Depletion Tab
Access this dialog box by selecting Components > SWMM Extensions > Climatology.
The data shown in this dialog box is linked to the active Rainfall-Runoff Alternative,
so differently climatology data can be used in different Scenarios.
Temperature Tab
The Temperature page of the Climatology Editor dialog is used to specify the source
of temperature data used for snow melt computations. There are three choices available:
No Data: Select this choice if snowmelt is not being simulated.
Time Series: Select this choice if the variation in temperature over the simulation
period will be described by a time series. Also enter (or import) the time series
data . Enter the data in the Date Time/Temperature table.
Climate File: Select this choice if min/max daily temperatures will be read from
an external climate file. Also enter the name of the file (or click the ellipsis button
to search for the file). If you want to start reading the climate file at a particular
date in time that is different than the start date of the simulation (as specified in
the Simulation Options), check the "Specify Climate File Start Date?" box and
enter a starting date (month/day/year) in the Climate File Start Date field below
it.
Evaporation Tab
The Evaporation page of the Climatology Editor dialog is used to supply evaporation
rates for a study area. There are six choices for specifying these rates; for all but the
No Evaporation option, check the Evaporate Only During Dry Periods? box to allow
evaporation only during periods with no precipitation. You may also define a Monthly
Soil Recovery Pattern to allow the infiltration recovery rate to be adjusted by a fixed
amount on a monthly basis to account for seasonal variation in evaporation rates. The
Evaporation Types are as follows:
6-480
No Evaporation: Use this choice if there is no evaporation for this scenario.
Creating Your Model
Constant Evaporation: Use this choice if evaporation remains constant over

time. Enter the value in the edit box provided.
Time Series Evaporation: Select this choice if evaporation rates will be specified
in a time series. Note that for each time specified in the time series, the evaporation rate remains constant at the value supplied for that date until the next date in
the series is reached (i.e., interpolation is not used on the series).
Climate File: This choice indicates that daily evaporation rates will be read from
the same climate file that was specified for temperature. Enter values for monthly
pan coefficients in the data grid provided to convert the pan evaporation data to
free water-surface values.
Climate File - Temperatures: Hargreaves method will be used to compute daily

evaporation rates from the daily air temperature record contained in the external
climate file specified on the Temperature page of the dialog. This method also
uses the sites latitude, which can be entered on the Snowmelt page of the dialog
even if snow melt is not being simulated.
Monthly Evaporation: Use this choice to supply an average rate for each month
of the year. Enter the value for each month in the data grid provided. Note that
rates remain constant within each month.
Wind Speed Tab

The Wind Speed page of the Climatology Editor dialog is used to provide average
monthly wind speeds. These are used when computing snowmelt rates under rainfall
conditions. Melt rates increase with increasing wind speed. Units of wind speed are
miles/hour for US units and km/hour for metric units. There are two choices for specifying wind speeds:
From Climate File: Wind speeds will be read from the same climate file that was
specified for temperature.
Monthly Averages: Wind speed is specified as an average value that remains constant
in each month of the year. Enter a value for each month in the data grid provided. The
default values are all zero.
Snowmelt Tab
Snowmelt parameters are climatic variables that apply across the entire study area
when simulating snowfall and snowmelt.
The Snowmelt page of the Climatology Editor dialog is used to supply values for the
following parameters related to snowmelt calculations:
Dividing Temperature Between Snow and Rain: Enter the temperature below
which precipitation falls as snow instead of rain.
6-481
6-482
Antecedent Temperature Index Weight: This parameter reflects to what degree

heat transfer within a snow pack during non-melt periods is affected by prior air
temperatures. Smaller values reflect a thicker surface layer of snow which result
in reduced rates of heat transfer. Values must be between 0 and 1, and the default
is 0.5.
Negative Melt Ratio: This is the ratio of the heat transfer coefficient of a snow
pack during non-melt conditions to the coefficient during melt conditions. It must
be a number between 0 and 1. The default value is 0.6.
Elevation Above Mean Sea Level: Enter the average elevation above mean sea
level for the study area, in feet or meters. This value is used to provide a more
accurate estimate of atmospheric pressure. The default is 0.0, which results in a
pressure of 29.9 inches Hg. The effect of wind on snow melt rates during rainfall
periods is greater at higher pressures, which occur at lower elevations.
Latitude: Enter the latitude, in degrees North, of the study area. This number is
used when computing the hours of sunrise and sunset, which in turn are used to
extend min/max daily temperatures into continuous values. It is also used to
compute daily evaporation rates from daily temperatures. The default is 50
degrees North.
Longitude Correction: This is a correction, in minutes of time, between true

solar time and the standard clock time. It depends on a location's longitude ( )
and the standard meridian of its time zone (SM) through the expression 4 ( SM). This correction is used to adjust the hours of sunrise and sunset when
extending daily min/max temperatures into continuous values. The default value
is 0.
Creating Your Model
Areal Depletion Tab

Areal depletion refers to the tendency of accumulated snow to melt non-uniformly
over the surface of a subcatchment. As the melting process proceeds, the area covered
by snow gets reduced. This behavior is described by an Areal Depletion Curve that
plots the fraction of total area that remains snow covered against the ratio of the actual
snow depth to the depth at which there is 100% cover. A typical ADC for a natural
area is shown below.
The Areal Depletion page of the Climatology Editor dialog is used to specify points
on the Areal Depletion Curves for both impervious and pervious surfaces within a
project's study area. These curves define the relation between the area that remains
snow covered and snow pack depth. Each curve is defined by 10 equal increments of
relative depth ratio between 0 and 0.9. (Relative depth ratio is the ratio of an area's
current snow depth to the depth at which there is 100% areal coverage).
Enter values in the data grid provided for the fraction of each area that remains snow
covered at each specified relative depth ratio. Valid numbers must be between 0 and 1
(0% and 100%), and be increasing with increasing depth ratio.
Values can be initialized for impervious or pervious area by click on the Initialize
Impervious or Initialize Impervious buttons. Clicking the Natural Area item fills the
grid with values that are typical of natural areas. Clicking the No Depletion item will
fill the grid with all 1's (100%), indicating that no areal depletion occurs. This is the
default for new projects.
6-483
Climate Files
CivilStorm can use an external Climate File that contains daily air temperature, evaporation, and wind speed data. The program currently recognizes the following
formats:
A DSI-3200 or DSI-3210 file available from the National Climatic Data Center at
www.ncdc.noaa.gov/oa/ncdc.html.
Canadian climate files available from Environment Canada at www.climate.weatheroffice.ec.gc.ca.
A user-prepared climate file where each line contains a recording station name, the
year, month, day, maximum temperature, minimum temperature, and optionally, evaporation rate, and wind speed. If no data are available for any of these items on a given
date, then an asterisk should be entered as its value.
When a climate file has days with missing values, SWMM will use the value from the
most recent previous day with a recorded value.
For a user-prepared climate file, the data must be in the same units as the project being
analyzed. For US units, temperature is in degrees F, evaporation is in inches/day, and
wind speed is in miles/hour. For metric units, temperature is in degrees C, evaporation
is in mm/day, and wind speed is in km/hour.
Aquifers Dialog Box

Aquifers are sub-surface groundwater areas used to model the vertical movement of
water infiltrating from the subcatchments which lie above them. They also permit the
infiltration of groundwater into the conveyance system, or exfiltration of surface water
from the conveyance system, depending on the hydraulic gradient that exists.
Access this dialog box by selecting Analysis > SWMM Extensions > Aquifers.
This dialog box contains a toolbar, a list pane on the left that displays all of the aquifers that have been defined in the current project, and the attribute fields on the right
that permit the values to be defined for the aquifer that is currently highlighted in the
list pane. The toolbar contains the following buttons:
6-484
Creating Your Model
New
Creates a new entry in the Aquifer List

Pane.
Delete

highlighted in the Aquifer List Pane.
Rename

currently highlighted in the Aquifer List
Pane.
Report

highlighted in the Aquifer List Pane.
The attribute fields along the right side of the dialog box include:
Porosity
Lets you define the volume of voids / total soil

volume for the currently highlighted aquifer.
Wilting Point
Lets you define soil moisture content at which

plants cannot survive for the currently highlighted
aquifer.
Field Capacity
Lets you define soil moisture content after all free

water has drained off for the currently highlighted
aquifer.
Aquifer Conductivity
Lets you define the soil's saturated hydraulic

conductivity for the currently highlighted aquifer.
Conductivity Slope
Lets you define the slope of conductivity vs. soil

moisture content curve for the currently
highlighted aquifer.
Tension Slope
Lets you define the slope of soil tension vs. soil

moisture content curve for the currently
Upper Evaporation
Fraction
Lets you define the fraction of total evaporation

available for evapotranspiration in the upper
unsaturated zone for the currently highlighted
aquifer.
6-485
Lower Evaporation
Depth
Lets you define the maximum depth into the lower

saturated zone over which evapotranspiration can
occur for the currently highlighted aquifer.
Lower Groundwater
Loss Rate
Lets you define the rate of percolation from the

saturated zone to deep groundwater when water
table is at ground surface for the currently
Elevation (Bottom)
Lets you define the elevation of the bottom of the

aquifer for the currently highlighted aquifer.
Water Table Elevation
Lets you define the elevation of the water table in

the aquifer at the start of the simulation for the
currently highlighted aquifer.
Unsaturated Zone
Moisture
Lets you define the moisture content of the

unsaturated upper zone of the aquifer at the start of
the simulation for the currently highlighted
aquifer.
Control Sets Dialog Box

Using the explicit solver, a user can control the behavior of elements based on the
condition in some other element using control rules set based on the SWMM program.
These control rules are based on the syntax rules presented below and in the Help
(Control Set Formats) and are not used by the other solvers.
A user indicates that a control set is to be used in a give scenario by setting "Apply
SWMM control set" to True in the Calculation options for that scenario, then picking
the appropriate control set from the drop down list in "SWMM Control Set". The
control set must already have been created.
6-486
Creating Your Model

It is best to only specify either a SWMM control set or on/off controls for a model but
not both as the two types of controls can conflict.
This dialog box allows you to create, view, and manage SWMM controls.
Access it by selecting Analysis > SWMM Extensions > Control Sets.
This dialog box contains a toolbar, a list pane on the left that displays all of the
controls that have been defined in the current project, and a control editor pane on the
right that allows you to enter and edit the currently highlighted SWMM control definition. The toolbar contains the following buttons:
New
Creates a new entry in the Control List

Pane.
Delete

highlighted in the Control List Pane.
Rename

currently highlighted in the Control List
Pane.
Report

highlighted in the Control List Pane.
The Control Editor Pane allows you to define SWMM controls. Each control rule is a
series of statements of the form:
RULE
ruleID
IF
condition_1
AND
condition_2
OR
condition_3
AND
condition_4
Etc.
THEN
action_1
6-487

AND
action_2
Etc.
ELSE
action_3
AND
action_4
Etc.
PRIORITY value
where keywords are shown in boldface and ruleID is an ID label assigned to the rule,
condition_n is a Condition Clause, action_n is an Action Clause, and value is a
priority value (e.g., a number from 1 to 5).
Only the RULE, IF and THEN portions of a rule are required; the other portions are
optional.
Blank lines between clauses are permitted and any text to the right of a semicolon is
considered a comment.
When mixing AND and OR clauses, the OR operator has higher precedence than
AND, i.e.,
IF A or B and C
is equivalent to
IF (A or B) and C
If the interpretation was meant to be
IF A or (B and C)
then this can be expressed using two rules as in
IF A THEN
IF B and C THEN
The PRIORITY value is used to determine which rule applies when two or more rules
require that conflicting actions be taken on a link. A rule without a priority value
always has a lower priority than one with a value. For two rules with the same priority
value, the rule that appears first is given the higher priority.
6-488
Creating Your Model

Note:
Expected Units for control sets are as follows: Flow: cfs; Length:
feet; Time: hours
Control Set Formats on page 6-489
Control Set Formats

Formats
Each control set consists of a series of statements of the form:
RULE
IF
AND
OR
AND
ruleID
condition_1
condition_2
condition_3
condition_4
THEN
AND
action_1
action_2
ELSE
AND
action_3
action_4
Etc.
Etc.
Etc.
PRIORITY value
where keywords are shown in boldface and ruleID is an ID label assigned to the rule,
condition_n is a Condition Clause, action_n is an Action Clause, and value is a
priority value (e.g., a number from 1 to 5).
6-489

Condition Clauses
A Condition Clause of a Control Rule has the following format:
object id attribute relation value
Where:
object = a category of object
id = the object's ID label
attribute = an attribute or property of the object
relation = a relational operator (=, <>, <, <=, >, >=)
value = an attribute value
Some examples of condition clauses are:
NODE N23 DEPTH > 10
PUMP P45 STATUS = OFF
SIMULATION CLOCKTIME = 22:45:00
The objects and attributes that can appear in a condition clause are as follows:
Table 6-12: Objects and Attributes in Condition Clauses
Object
6-490
Attribute
Value
NODE
DEPTH
HEAD
INFLOW
numerical value
numerical value
numerical value
LINK
FLOW
DEPTH
numerical value
numerical value
PUMP
STATUS
FLOW
ON or OFF
numerical value
ORIFICE
WEIR
SETTING
fraction open
SIMULATION
TIME
DATE
CLOCKTIME
elapsed time in decimal hours or

hr:min:sec
month/day/year
time of day in hr:min:sec
Creating Your Model

Action Clauses
An Action Clause of a Control Rule can have one of the following formats:
PUMP
ORIFICE
WEIR
id
id
id
STATUS
SETTING
SETTING
=
=
=
ON/OFF
value
value
Where SETTING is the fractional amount that an orifice is fully open or to the fractional amount of the original height between the crest and the top of a weir that
remains (i.e., weir control is accomplished by moving the crest height up and down).
Some examples of action clauses are:
PUMP P67 STATUS = OFF
ORIFICE O212 SETTING = 0.5
Only the RULE, IF and THEN portions of a rule are required; the other portions are
optional.
Blank lines between clauses are allowed, and any text to the right of a semicolon is
considered a comment.
When mixing AND and OR clauses, the OR operator has higher precedence than AND,
i.e.,
IF A or B and C
is equivalent to
IF (A or B) and C.
If the interpretation was meant to be
IF A or (B and C)
then this can be expressed using two rules as in
IF A THEN ...
IF B and C THEN ...
The PRIORITY value is used to determine which rule applies when two or more rules
require that conflicting actions be taken on a link. A rule without a priority value
always has a lower priority than one with a value. For two rules with the same priority
value, the rule that appears first is given the higher priority.
6-491

Examples
The following are examples of control rules.
Simple time-based pump control
RULE R1
IF SIMULATION TIME > 8
THEN PUMP 12 STATUS = ON
ELSE PUMP 12 STATUS = OFF ;
Multi-condition orifice gate control
RULE R2A
IF NODE 23 DEPTH
THEN ORIFICE R55
RULE R2B
IF NODE 23 DEPTH
THEN ORIFICE R55
RULE R2C
IF NODE 23 DEPTH
THEN ORIFICE R55
> 12 AND LINK 165 FLOW > 100

SETTING = 0.5
> 12 AND LINK 165 FLOW > 200
SETTING = 1.0
<= 12 OR LINK 165 FLOW <= 100
SETTING = 0 ;
Pump station operation (as in a SWMM4 Type5 pump)

RULE R3A
IF NODE N1 DEPTH > 5
THEN PUMP N1A STATUS = ON
RULE R3B
IF NODE N1 DEPTH > 7
THEN PUMP N1B STATUS = ON
RULE R3C
IF NODE N1 DEPTH <= 3
THEN PUMP N1A STATUS = OFF AND PUMP N1B STATUS = OFF
Note:
6-492
Expected Units for control sets are as follows: Flow: cfs; Length:
feet; Time: hours
Creating Your Model
Pollutants Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to track the generation, inflow and fate of any number of
user-specified pollutants. In addition, pollutant X can have a co-pollutant Y, meaning
that the runoff concentration of X will have some fixed fraction of the runoff concentration of Y added to it.
Pollutant buildup and washoff on subcatchment areas are determined by the Land
Uses assigned to those areas.
Input loadings of pollutants from external and dry weather inflows are supplied
through time series data associated with particular nodes of the collection system.
Access this dialog box by selecting Analysis > SWMM Extensions > Pollutants.
This dialog box contains a toolbar, a list pane on the left that displays all of the pollutants that have been defined in the current project, and the attribute fields on the right
that permit the values to be defined for the pollutant that is currently highlighted in the
list pane. The toolbar contains the following buttons:
New
Creates a new entry in the Pollutant List

Pane.
Delete

highlighted in the Pollutant List Pane.
Rename

currently highlighted in the Pollutant List
Pane.
Report

highlighted in the Pollutant List Pane.
6-493
Rain Concentration
Lets you define the concentration of the pollutant

in rain water for the currently highlighted
pollutant.
Groundwater
Concentration

in groundwater for the currently highlighted
pollutant.
Decay Coefficient
Lets you define the first-order decay coefficient

for the currently highlighted pollutant.
Co-Pollutant
Lets you define the name of another pollutant

runoff concentration the current pollutant is
dependent on for the currently highlighted
pollutant.
Co-Fraction
Lets you define the fraction of the co-pollutant's

runoff concentration that contributes to the runoff
concentration for the currently highlighted
pollutant.
I & I Concentration

in any Infiltration/Inflow.
Initial Buildup Collection Dialog Box on page 6-512
Adding Pollutographs to a Node

Pollutographs are plots of time vs. mass rate or time vs. concentration, depending on
which constituent inflow type you choose (mass or concentration). You create pollutographs in the Pollutographs dialog box and add them to individual manholes in your
model using the node's Property Editor.
6-494
Creating Your Model

To add a pollutograph to a node:
1. Change the engine type to Explicit (SWMM 5) by performing these steps:
a. Select Analysis > Calculation Options.
b. In the Calculation Options Manager, double-click Base Calculation Options
or any other calculation options profile you have created.
c. In Calculation Options section of the Property Editor, select Explicit
(SWMM 5) as the Engine Type.
2. Define a pollutant by performing these steps:
a. Select Components > SWMM Extensions > Pollutants.
b. In the Pollutants dialog box, click the New button to create a new pollutant,
then enter all the data that define the pollutant.
c. Click Close to close the Pollutants dialog box and save your pollutant(s).
3. Create a pollutograph by performing these steps:
a. Select Components > SWMM Extensions > Pollutographs.
b. In the Pollutographs dialog box, click the New button, then click Mass or
Concentration to create a new pollutograph.
c. Enter all the data that define the pollutograph.
For pollutographs based on mass, select a Pollutant, enter a Mass Conversion
Factor, then enter Time vs. Mass Rate data points.
For pollutographs based on concentration, select a Pollutant, then enter Time
vs. Concentration data points.
Note:
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i validates your data as you enter it and

displays errors and warnings in the status bar at the bottom of
the Pollutographs dialog box. Be sure to check this status bar
for any errors or warnings as you enter data.
d. Optionally, view a report or plot of your pollutograph.

e. Click Close to save the pollutograph.
4. Click the desired manhole in your model. The Property Editor for the manhole
appears. (If the Property Editor is not already displayed, you must double-click
the node in your model.)
5. In the SWMM Extended Data section of the Property Editor, click the Pollutographs field, then click the Ellipses (...) button.
6-495

6. In the Pollutograph Collection dialog box, add pollutographs to the pollutograph
collection by performing these steps:
a. Click the New button to add a row to the Pollutograph table.
b. Click the down arrow in the first row then select an existing pollutograph. If
there are no pollutographs in your project, you can click the Ellipses (...)
button to display the Pollutographs dialog box, where you can create new
pollutographs.
c. Repeat Steps a and b for every pollutograph you wish to add to the collection.
d. Press OK to close the dialog box and add the collection to the node.
7. Complete your model, then click the Compute button on the Compute toolbar.
8. When the model has been successfully computed, open the Property Editor for the
node the contains the Pollutograph Collection.
9. In the Results section of the Property Editor, click the Ellipses (...) button in the
Pollutants field to view pollutant results.
Pollutograph Dialog Box

This dialog box contains a toolbar, a list pane on the left that displays all of the pollutographs that have been defined in the current project, and attribute fields on the right
that let you enter values for the pollutograph that is currently highlighted in the list
pane.
6-496
Creating Your Model

New
Opens a submenu containing the

following options:
MassLets you create a plot of time

vs. mass rate.
ConcentrationLets you create a

plot of time vs. concentration.
Delete
Deletes the currently-highlighted

pollutograph from the list pane.
Rename
Lets you rename the currentlyhighlighted pollutograph.
Report

with the currently-highlighted
pollutograph.
Pollutant
Lets you select the pollutant for the pollutograph.

Select the pollutant from the drop-down menu or
click the Ellipses (...) button to open the SWMM
Pollutants dialog box, where you can define new
pollutants.
New
This button adds a new row to the pollutograph

table.
Delete
This button removes the current row from the

pollutograph table.
Report
Displays a report of the data in the pollutograph

table.
Graph
Displays a plot of the data in the pollutograph

table.
Mass Conversion
Factor
Lets you enter a mass conversion factor. . This

field is available only for pollutographs using
mass as the constituent inflow type.
6-497
Pollutograph Table
Lets you define the pollutograph by entering Time

vs. Mass Rate points for pollutographs using mass
as the constituent inflow type, or Time vs.
Concentration points for pollutographs using
concentration as the constituent inflow type.
There is also a status bar located at the bottom of the dialog box that displays any
errors and warnings that may occur when you enter data.
Pollutograph Collection Dialog Box on page 6-498
Pollutants Results Dialog Box on page 6-499
Pollutograph Collection Dialog Box

The Pollutograph Collection dialog box lets you add multiple pollutographs to a node
in your model. You access this dialog box from the SWMM Extended Data section of
the Property Editor for the selected node.
The dialog box contains the following toolbar buttons:
New
Adds a new row to the Pollutograph

table. Click in the row to select a
pollutograph from the drop-down menu,
or click the Ellipses (...) button to create
new pollutographs.
Delete
Deletes the current row from the table.
Report
Lets you view a report of the collection.
The dialog box also contains the following controls:
6-498
Creating Your Model
Pollutograph Table
Displays the pollutographs you have added to the

collection. You add a pollutograph to the
collection by clicking the New button, then
selecting a pollutograph from the drop-down
menu in the table row.
Pollutants Results Dialog Box on page 6-499
Pollutants Results Dialog Box

The Pollutants Results dialog box displays a plot for each pollutant after you successfully calculate your model. You access this dialog box by clicking the Ellipses (...)
button in the Pollutants field in the Results section of the Property Editor.
The Pollutants Results dialog box contains a list pane on the left that displays all the
pollutants assigned to the selected node, and a two tabs on the right:
Time vs. Concentration
Tab
Displays a plot of Concentration over Time for

each pollutant displayed in the list pane.
Data Tab
Displays the time (hours by default) vs.

concentration (ppm by default) data points for
each pollutant displayed in the list pane.
Land Uses Dialog Box

Land Uses are categories of activities or land surface characteristics that are assigned
to catchment elements. Examples of land use activities are residential, commercial,
industrial, and undeveloped. Land surface characteristics might include roof tops,
lawns, paved roads, undisturbed soils, etc. Land uses are used solely to allow spatial
variation in pollutant buildup and washoff rates.
6-499

You have complete freedom in defining land uses and assigning them to catchment
elements. One approach is to assign a mix of land uses to each subcatchment, in which
case all land uses in the subcatchment will have the same pervious/impervious characteristics. If this is not appropriate, the user can create subcatchments that have just a
single land use classification along with a set of pervious/impervious characteristics
that reflects the classification.
Access this dialog box by selecting Components > SWMM Extensions > Land
Uses.
This dialog box contains a toolbar, a list pane on the left that displays all of the land
uses that have been defined in the current project, and three tabs on the right that
together permit the values to be defined for the land use that is currently highlighted in
the list pane.
6-500
Creating Your Model

New
Creates a new entry in the Land Use List

Pane.
Delete

highlighted in the Land Use List Pane.
Rename

currently highlighted in the Land Use
List Pane.
Report

highlighted in the Land Use List Pane.
The right side of the dialog contains the following tabs:
Land Use General Tab
Land Use Buildup Tab
Land Use Washoff Tab
Land Use General Tab

The General tab contains controls related to street cleaning. Street cleaning can be
used on each land use category to periodically reduce the accumulated buildup of
particular pollutants. This tab contains the following controls:
Street Cleaning
Interval
Amount of time between cleaning.
Availability
The fraction of buildup of all pollutants that is

available for removal by cleaning
Last Cleaned
Amount of time since land use category has last

been cleaned.
Land Use Buildup Tab

Pollutant Buildup that accumulates over a category of land use is described by either a
mass per unit of subcatchment area or per unit of curb length, as specified by the
Normalizer field described below.
6-501

The buildup is usually given as mass of pollutant per unit area although they may be
given as counts (in the case of coliforms) per unit curb length. Therefore B (and C1 in
the functions below) can be given as lbs/acre, kg/hectare, coliform/acre, lbs/ft curb
length, etc. Time in the functions refers to the number of antecedent dry days. Buildup
is only used when the exponential washoff function is used to determine quality of
runoff quality from catchments.
Three different functions can be used to describe buildup. The functions are all monotonically increasing. The figure below gives their relative shape.
Figure 6-2:
Buildup Function Types
The amount of buildup as a function of days of dry weather can be computed using
one of the following functions:
Power Function: Pollutant Buildup (B) accumulates proportional to time (t)

raised to some power, until a maximum limit is achieved.
B = Min (C1 , C2 t c3 )
6-502
(6.1)
Creating Your Model
Where
buildup, mass(count/area(length)
C1
maximum possible build-up, mass (count)/

area(length)
C2
build-up rate
C3
time exponent
The effect of each coefficient is shown in the figure below.
Figure 6-3:
Effect of Power Function Coefficients
Exponential Function: Buildup follows an exponential growth curve that

approaches a maximum limit asymptotically.
B = C1 (1-e-c2t )
(6.2)
6-503
Where
buildup, mass(count)/area(length)
C1
maximum possible build-up, mass(count)/

area(length)
C2
build-up rate constant, 1/day
Figure 6-4:
Saturation Function: Buildup begins at a linear rate which proceeds to decline

constantly over time until a saturation value is reached.
B=
Where
6-504
Effect of Exponential Function Coefficients
C1t
C2 + t
(6.3)
buildup, mass(count)/area(length)
C1
maximum possible build-up, mass(count)/

area(length)
C2
build-up rate constant, 1/day
Creating Your Model

Figure 6-5:
Effect of Saturation Function Coefficients
This tab contains a table with the following attribute columns:

Column
Description
Pollutant
This menu contains all of the pollutants that have

been defined in the Pollutants dialog box for the
current project. Select the one that should be used
for the land use currently highlighted in the list
pane.
Max. Buildup
This field allows you to define the value of C1 in

the above equations.
Rate Constant
This field allows you to define C2 in the Power

and Exponential equations described above.
Buildup Function
This menu allows you to specify which of the

buildup functions described above will be used for
the land use currently highlighted in the list pane.
6-505
Power Constant
This field allows you to define C3 in the Power

equation described above.
Half Saturation
Constant
This field allows you to define C2 in the Saturation

equation described above.
Normalizer
Allows you to specify the method by which

pollutant buildup is described for the land use
currently highlighted in the list pane. Choices
include Area (mass per unit of subcatchment area)
or Curb (mass per unit of curb length).
Buildup Time Series
The name of the Time Series that contains buildup

rates (as mass per normalizer per day).
Scaling Factor
A multiplier used to adjust the buildup rates listed

in the time series.
Land Use Washoff Tab

Washoff refers to the amount of pollutants washed off from a catchment during a wet
weather period. The user can select any of the three washoff functions described
below:
Exponential Washoff: The washoff load (W) in units of mass per hour is proportional to the product of runoff raised to some power and to the amount of buildup
remaining.
W = C1q c2 B
Where
6-506
(6.4)
C1
washoff coefficient
C2
washoff exponent
runoff rate per unit area
pollutant build-up in a mass per unit area or curb

length
Creating Your Model

The effect of coefficients on washoff is shown in the following figure:
Figure 6-6:
Effect of Exponential Function Coefficients on Washoff
Rating Curve Washoff: The rate of washoff W in mass per second is proportional to the runoff rate raised to some power.
W = C1Q c2
Where
(6.5)
C1
washoff coefficient
C2
washoff exponent
runoff rate, cfs (m3/s)
Event Mean Concentration (EMC): This is a special case of Rating Curve

Washoff where the exponent (C2) is 1.0 and the coefficient C1 represents the
concentration of any and all runoff in mass per liter.
6-507

The effect of coefficients on washoff is shown in the following figure:
Figure 6-7:
Effect of Rating Curve Coefficients on Washoff
This tab contains a table with the following attribute columns:
6-508
Column
Description
Pollutant
This menu contains all of the pollutants that have

been defined in the Pollutants dialog box for the
current project. Select the one that should be used
for the land use currently highlighted in the list
pane.
Washoff Function
This menu allows you to specify which of the

buildup functions described above will be used for
the land use currently highlighted in the list pane.
Washoff Coefficient
This field allows you to define C1 in the equations

described above.
Creating Your Model
Washoff Exponent
This field allows you to define C2 in the

Exponential and Rating Curve equations described
above.
Cleaning Efficiency
The fraction of available buildup for each

pollutant removed by cleaning.
Removal Efficiency
Washoff loads for a given pollutant and land use

category can be reduced by a fixed percentage by
specifying a Removal Efficiency in this field
which reflects the effectiveness of any BMP
controls associated with the land use.
Land Uses Collection Dialog Box

The Land Uses Collection dialog box lets you add multiple land uses as a collection to
a catchment. You access the Land Uses Collection dialog box from the Property Editor
for a catchment that uses EPA-SWMM Runoff as the runoff method.
The dialog box contains the following buttons:
New
Adds a new row to the Land Uses

table. Each row in the table contains a
single land use entry.
Delete
Deletes the current row from the Land

Uses table.
The Land Uses Collection dialog box also contains a table with the following
columns:
Column
Description
Catchment Land Use
Lets you select a land use entry to include in the

collection. Click in the row to select a land use
entry from the drop-down menu, or click the
Ellipses (...) button to create new land uses.
Percent of Catchment
Area (%)
Lets you specify the percent of the catchment area

affected by the land.
6-509
Adding Treatment to a Node

You can model the removal of pollutants from the flow entering any drainage system
by assigning treatment functions to the node. In Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, you assign
treatment functions to a node by adding a treatment collection, which contains one or
more pollutants and their associated treatment expressions.
A treatment expression involves the pollutant concentration of the mixture of all flow
streams entering the node (use the pollutant name to represent a concentration), or the
removal of other pollutants (use R_ prefixed to the pollutant name to represent
removal).
Treatment expressions have the general form:
R = f(P, R_P, V)
or
C = f(P, R_P, V)
Where:
R = fractional removal
C = outlet concentration
P = one or more pollutant names
R_P = one or more pollutant removals, (add R_ to the front of the pollutant name)
V = one or more of the following process variables:
FLOW for flow rate into node (in user-defined flow units)
DEPTH for water depth above node invert (ft or m)
AREA for node surface area (ft2 or m2)
DT for routing time step (sec)
HRT for hydraulic residence time (hours)
The result of the treatment function can be either a concentration (denoted by the letter
C) or a fractional removal (denoted by R). For example, a first-order decay expression
for BOD exiting from a storage node might be expressed as:
C = BOD * exp(-0.05*HRT)
or the removal of some trace pollutant that is proportional to the removal of total
suspended solids (TSS) could be expressed as:
R = 0.75 * R_TSS
6-510
Creating Your Model

To add a treatment collection to a node:
Note:
Make sure you set the Engine Type to Explicit (SWMM 5) in the
Calculation Options for your project before computing results.
1. Add a node to your model or select an existing node, then display the Property
Editor for the node (double-click the node or press F4).
2. In the SWMM Extended Data section of the Property Editor, set Apply Treatment? to True. The Treatment field becomes available.
3. Click the Ellipses (...) button in the Treatment field (where <Collection: 0
items> is displayed) to display the Treatment Collection dialog box.
4. The Treatment Collection dialog box displays each pollutant and its associated
treatment expression as a row in a table. Click the New button to add a row to the
table.
5. Click in the Pollutant field, then select an existing pollutant from the drop-down
menu, or click the Ellipses (...) button to display the Pollutants dialog box, where
you define pollutants in your model.
6. Type a treatment expression in the Treatment column.
7. Repeat Steps 4 - 6 for each pollutant you wish to add to the treatment collection.
8. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the collection to the node.
Treatment Collection Dialog Box

The Treatment Collection dialog box lets you add multiple pollutants and their associated treatment expressions to a node for the purpose of removing pollutants in your
model. You access this dialog box from the SWMM Extended Data section of the
Property Editor for the selected node.
New
Adds a new row to the Pollutants table.

Click in the row to select an existing
pollutant from the drop-down menu, or
click the Ellipses (...) button to define
new pollutants.
Delete
Report
6-511

The dialog box also contains the following controls:
Column
Description
Pollutant
Lets you add a pollutant to the collection. Click

the down-arrow to select an existing pollutant
from the drop-down menu, or click the Ellipses
(...) button to define new pollutants.
Treatment
Lets you type a valid treatment expression to the

pollutant.
Initial Buildup Collection Dialog Box

The Initial Buildup Collection dialog box lets you specify the amount of pollutant
buildup existing over a catchment at the start of the simulation.
You access this dialog box from the SWMM Extended Data section of the Property
Editor for the selected catchment.
6-512
New
Adds a new row to the Initial Buildup

table. Click in the row to select an
existing pollutant from the drop-down
menu, or click the Ellipses (...) button to
define new pollutants.
Delete
Report
Creating Your Model

The dialog box also contains the following table:
Column
Description
Pollutant
Lets you add a pollutant to the collection. Click

the down-arrow to select an existing pollutant
from the drop-down menu, or click the Ellipses
(...) button to define new pollutants.
Initial Buildup
Lets you type an initial buildup value for the

pollutant in the table row. If no buildup value is
supplied for a pollutant, it is assumed to be 0.
CatchmentSWMM Extended Data on page 15-1392

Low-Impact Development (LID) is a term used in the US and Canada to describe a
more eco-friendly land planning and design approach to stormwater management. In
the United Kingdom, this approach is referred to sustainable urban drainage systems
(SUDS), and in Australia, it's called water-sensitive urban design (WSUD). The US
terminology is used in this software and its documentation.
LID controls help developed watersheds or sites to retain or enhance pre-development
hydrologic characteristics through the use of techniques that conserve natural systems
and hydrologic functions.
Some of the goals of LID are to:
Protect natural systems such as drainage ways, vegetation, and soils
Decentralize stormwater management, shifting it to small-scale practices at the

source location
Preserve open space
Minimize land disturbance and impervious area
Disconnect impervious surfaces
6-513
Increase flow path lengths and travel times
Customize site design to the needs of a particular site, instead of simply relying on
traditionally accepted practices
A number of government agencies, universities, and other groups publish educational

information, research and design guidance for implementing LID and LID controls.
Places to start include:
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's Low Impact Development website and

fact sheet on Low Impact Development (LID) and Other Green Design Strategies
Low Impact Development Center
Low Impact Development (LID) Urban Design Tools Website
LID Control Modeling Overview

The basic steps to implementing LID controls in a hydrologic model are:
1. Add generic LID controls to the project. This is done in the Low Impact Development Controls Manager.
2. Add LID and catchment elements to the network drawing (see Low Impact
Development Controls).
3. Enter element-specific LID control and catchment data in the Properties pane.
LID control attributes include designating a Parent Catchment and associating a
generic LID (created in step 1). For additional details, see Low Impact Development Control Attributes.
4. Proceed with the modeling project as you normally would (e.g., enter remaining
network and rainfall data, configure storm data, run the model, review results).
Implementation Notes
6-514
Low-Impact Development (LID) controls as implemented in the software are

based on the calculation methods used in EPA SWMM Version 5.0.
LID controls can only be used in conjunction with the EPA-SWMM Runoff
Method.
Only the hydrologic performance is modeled-pollutant removal impacts are not

considered.
A LID control element must be associated with a Parent Catchment. The Parent
Catchment is the source of stormwater input to the LID control, and also receives
discharge from the LID.
The effect of a LID control on runoff is seen in the computed hydrograph for the
LID control's Parent Catchment.
Creating Your Model
LID Control Types

LID controls are intended to intercept stormwater and control it through detention,
infiltration and/or evapotranspiration. The hydrologic performance of five basic LID
control types can be modeled in the software:
Bioretention cells include facilities such as rain gardens, planters, and green
roofs. They typically consist of surface storage and vegetation, and an engineered
soil layer with a gravel drainage layer beneath it. The gravel layer may include an
underdrain system.
Infiltration trenches are trenches filled with gravel that can store stormwater in
void spaces while it infiltrates into surrounding soils. There may also be an
underdrain system.
Porous pavement consists of a surface pavement layer (may be continuous

porous pavement or block pavers) over a layer of gravel. The porous surface
allows stormwater to enter and be stored in the gravel layer while it infiltrates into
surrounding soils. The gravel layer may include an underdrain system.
Rain barrels are containers that collect runoff from roofs. The captured stormwater can be released at a controlled rate later, or used for irrigation. (Cisterns are
also modeled using the "rain barrel" LID control type.)
Vegetative swales are channels or depressions covered with vegetation. They

allow time for a portion of intercepted stormwater to infiltrate the soil.
See Also
Hydrologic Model Representation of LID Controls
Low Impact Development Controls Manager
Hydrologic Model Representation of LID Controls

A LID control (see LID Control Types) is modeled as a combination of vertical
layers. The specific combination of layers present depends on the type of LID control,
but in general they are:
Surface Layer (may include vegetation)
Soil Layer or Pavement Layer
Storage Layer (typically gravel)
Underdrain Piping
6-515

The model performs a moisture balance that tracks how much water moves between
the layers and how much is stored within each layer. The figure below illustrates the
processes considered for a bioretention cell or porous block pavement system.
The physical and performance characteristics of LID controls are defined in the Low
Impact Development Controls Manager on a per-unit-area basis. Thus, the same LID
control design can easily be used in multiple locations in the network, over differently
sized areas.
6-516
Creating Your Model
Low Impact Development Controls Manager

The Low Impact Development Controls Manager dialog is used to define a Low
Impact Development (LID) control that can be deployed throughout a study area to
store, infiltrate, and evaporate subcatchment runoff.
The design of the control is made on a per-unit-area basis so that it can be placed in
any number of subcatchments at different sizes or number of replicates. The editor
consists of a list pane on the left that displays all of the LID controls that have been
defined for the project and a tabbed input data area on the right that displays attributes
for the selected LID control.
The buttons in the upper left are as follows:
New: Creates a new inlet definition in the list pane on the left.
6-517
Delete: Deletes the currently highlighted LID control.
Rename: Lets you rename the currently highlighted LID control.
associated with the currently highlighted LID control.

dialog, allowing you to browse the LID control libraries.
Synchronize From LibraryLets you update a set of LID control definitions previously imported from one of the LID control libraries. The updates
reflect changes that have been made to the library since it was imported.
Synchronize To LibraryLets you update one of the existing LID control
libraries using current data that was initially imported but have since been
modified.
Import From LibraryLets you import a LID control definition from one
of the existing LID control libraries.
Export To LibraryLets you export the current LID control definition to
one of the existing LID control libraries.
Connect to LibraryLets you create a connection between the LID control
definition and the specified engineering library.
Low Impact Development Controls Tab
6-518
Creating Your Model

The sections and fields that appear on the Low Impact Development Control tab
depend on which control type (see LID Control Types) is chosen. Each section of
this tab (e.g., Surface, Storage, etc.) corresponds to a layer in the LID control (see
Hydrologic Model Representation of LID Controls). The table below summarizes
which layers are available for each LID control:
Table 6-13: Available Layers by LID Control
Control
Type
Layer
Surface
Bioretention
Cell
Porous
Pavement
Infiltration
Trench
Pavement
X
Rain Barrel
Vegetative
Swale
Soil
Storage
Underdrain
Low Impact Development Control Type: Allows you to select the type of LID
Control.
Soil Layer Attributes

The soil layer attributes are only available when the "Bioretention Cell" LID
Control Type is selected.
Soil Thickness: The thickness of the soil layer.
Soil Porosity: The volume of pore space relative to total volume of soil (as a
fraction).
Field Capacity: Volume of pore water relative to total volume after the soil
has been allowed to drain fully (as a fraction). Below this level, vertical
drainage of water through the soil layer does not occur.
Soil Conductivity: Hydraulic conductivity for the fully saturated soil.
Conductivity Slope: Slope of the curve of log (conductivity) versus soil

moisture content (dimensionless). Typical values range from 5 for sands to 15
for silty clay.
6-519
Wilting Point: Volume of pore water relative to total volume for a well dried
soil where only bound water remains (as a fraction). The moisture content of
the soil cannot fall below this limit.
Suction Head: The average value of soil capillary suction along the wetting
front (inches or mm). This is the same parameter as used in the Green-Ampt
infiltration model.
Note:
Porosity, field capacity, conductivity and conductivity slope are

the same soil properties used for Aquifer objects when modeling
groundwater, while suction head is the same parameter used for
Green-Ampt infiltration. Except here they apply to the special
soil mix used in a LID unit rather than the site's naturally
occuring soil.
Pavement Layer Attributes

The pavement layer attributes are only available when the "Porous Pavement"
LID Control Type is selected.
Pavement Thickness: The thickness of the pavement layer (inches or mm).

Typical values are 4 to 6 inches (100 to 150 mm).
Pavement Void Ratio: The volume of void space relative to the volume of
solids in the pavement for continuous systems or for the fill material used in
modular systems. Typical values for pavements are 0.12 to 0.21. Note that
porosity = void ratio / (1 + void ratio).
Impervious Surface Fraction: Ratio of impervious paver material to total

area for modular systems; 0 for continuous porous pavement systems.
Permeability: Permeability of the concrete or asphalt used in continuous

systems or hydraulic conductivity of the fill material (gravel or sand) used in
modular systems (in/hr or mm/hr). The permeability of new porous concrete
or asphalt is very high (e.g., hundreds of in/hr) but can drop off over time due
to clogging by fine particulates in the runoff.
Pavement Clogging Factor: Number of pavement layer void volumes of

runoff treated it takes to completely clog the pavement. Use a value of 0 to
ignore clogging. Clogging progressively reduces the pavement's permeability
in direct proportion to the cumulative volume of runoff treated.
If one has an estimate of the number of years it takes to fully clog the system
(Yclog), the Clogging Factor can be computed as: Yclog * Pa * CR * (1 +
VR) * (1 - ISF) / (T * VR) where Pa is the annual rainfall amount over the
site, CR is the pavement's capture ratio (area that contributes runoff to the
pavement divided by area of the pavement itself), VR is the system's Void
Ratio, ISF is the Impervious Surface Fraction, and T is the pavement layer
Thickness.
6-520
Creating Your Model

As an example, suppose it takes 5 years to clog a continuous porous pavement
system that serves an area where the annual rainfall is 36 inches/year. If the
pavement is 6 inches thick, has a void ratio of 0.2 and captures runoff only
from its own surface, then the Clogging Factor is 5 x 36 x (1 + 0.2) / 6 / 0.2 =
180.
Storage Layer Attributes

The storage layer attributes are available for all LID Control Types except Vegetative Swale.
Height: This is the height of a rain barrel or thickness of a gravel layer (inches
or mm). Crushed stone and gravel layers are typically 6 to 18 inches (150 to
450 mm) thick while single family home rain barrels range in height from 24
to 36 inches (600 to 900 mm).
Storage Void Ratio: The volume of void space relative to the volume of
solids in the layer. Typical values range from 0.5 to 0.75 for gravel beds. Note
that porosity = void ratio / (1 + void ratio).
Storage Conductivity: Hydraulic conductivity for the fully saturated soil (in/
hr or mm/hr).
Storage Clogging Factor: Total volume of treated runoff it takes to

completely clog the bottom of the layer divided by the void volume of the
layer. Use a value of 0 to ignore clogging. Clogging progressively reduces the
Filtration Rate in direct proportion to the cumulative volume of runoff treated
and may only be of concern for infiltration trenches with permeable bottoms
and no under drains.
Surface Layer Attributes

The surface layer attributes are available for all LID Control Types except Rain
Barrel.
Surface Storage Depth: When confining walls or berms are present this is
the maximum depth to which water can pond above the surface of the unit
before overflow occurs (in inches or mm). For LID controls that experience
overland flow it is the height of any surface depression storage. For swales, it
is the height of its trapezoidal cross section.
Vegetative Cover Fraction: The fraction of the storage area above the
surface that is filled with vegetation (i.e., volume occupied by leaves, stems,
etc.).
Surface Mannings n: Manning's n for overland flow over the surface of

porous pavement or a vegetative swale. Use 0 for other types of LID controls.
Surface Slope: Slope of porous pavement surface or vegetative swale

(percent). Use 0 for other types of LID controls.
6-521
Swale Side Slope: Slope (run over rise) of the side walls of a vegetative
swale's cross section. This attribute is not presentfor other types of LID
controls.
Note:
If either Surface Roughness or Surface Slope values are 0 then

any ponded water that exceeds the storage depth is assumed to
completely overflow the LID control within a single time step.
Underdrain Attributes
An underdrain is available for all LID control types except Vegetative Swale. It is
required for Rain Barrels, and optional for other LID controls.
Drain Coefficient and Drain Exponent: C and exponent n that determines

the rate of flow through the underdrain as a function of height of stored water
above the drain height. The following equation is used to compute this flow
rate (per unit area of the LID unit):q C h H d
where q is outflow (in/hr or mm/hr), h height of stored water (inches or mm),

and Hd is the drain height. If the layer does not have an underdrain then set C
to 0. A typical value for n would be 0.5 (making the drain act like an orifice).
A rough estimate for C can be based on the time T required to drain a depth D
of stored water. For n = 0.5, C = 2D1/2/T.
Drain Offset Height: Height Hd of any underdrain piping above the bottom
of a storage layer or rain barrel.
Drain Delay: The number of dry weather hours that must elapse before the
drain line in a rain barrel is opened (the line is assumed to be closed once rainfall begins). This parameter is only available with Rain Barrels.
Notes Tab
associated with the currently highlighted LID control.
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the LID control that is currently highlighted in the
list pane. If the LID control is derived from an engineering library, the synchronization
details can be found here. If the LID control was created manually for this project, the
synchronization details will display the message Orphan (local), indicating that the
LID control was not derived from a library entry.
6-522
Creating Your Model
LID Validations
If the values set for the following attributes fall outside the specified valid range, an
error or user notification will be generated.
Surface Storage Depth: >= 0
Surface Vegetative Cover: >= 0
Surface Roughness: > 0
Surface Slope: >= 0
Surface Swale Side Slope: >= 0
Soil Thickness: > 0
Soil Porosity: > 0
Soil Field Capacity: > 0 & < Soil Porosity
Soil Wilting Point: > 0 & < Soil Field Capacity
Soil Conductivity: > 0
Soil Conductivity Slope: >= 0
Soil Suction Head: > 0
Storage Height: > 0
Storage Void Ratio: > 0
Storage Conductivity: >= 0
Storage Clogging Factor: >= 0
Drain Coefficient: >= 0
Drain Exponent: >= 0
Drain Offset Height: >= 0
Pavement Thickness: > 0
Pavement Void Ratio: > 0
Pavement Imp Surface Fraction: >= 0
Pavement Permeability: > 0
Pavement Clogging Factor: =0
6-523
Adding Hyperlinks to Elements

The Hyperlinks feature lets you associate external files, such as pictures or movie
files, with elements. You can perform the following operations with hyperlinks:
Adding a Hyperlink on page 6-526
Deleting a Hyperlink on page 6-527
To use hyperlinks, select Tools > Hyperlink. The Hyperlink dialog box opens.
The hyperlink tool enables the user to associate a photo, word processing document,
spreadsheet or other file with a given model element. Opening the hyperlink opens the
file using its associated program (Picture Manager, Word, Excel, etc.).
The hyperlink can also be opened from the Property grid by picking the Hyperlink
property from the grid and clicking the ellipse button which will open the hyperlink
tool.
If a model file is moved to a different computer, the hyperlink will no longer work
unless the associated file is moved to a comparable path on the same computer.
Hyperlinks Dialog Box

The Hyperlinks dialog contains a toolbar and a tabular view of all your existing hyperlinks.
6-524
Creating Your Model
New
Lets you create a new hyperlink.

Launches the Add Hyperlink dialog box.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlight hyperlink.
Edit
Lets you edit the currently highlighted

hyperlink. Launches the Edit Hyperlink
dialog box.
Launch
Launches the external file associated

with the currently highlighted hyperlink.

Column
Description
Element Type
Displays the element type of the element

associated with the hyperlink.
Element
Displays the label of the element associated with

the hyperlink.
Link
Displays the complete path of the hyperlink.
Description
Displays a description of the hyperlink, which you

can optionally enter when you create or edit the
hyperlink.
6-525
Adding a Hyperlink
To add a hyperlink:
Note:
You can add more than one associated file to an element using
the hyperlink feature, but you must add the associations one at a
time.
1. Select Tools > Hyperlink. The Hyperlink dialog box opens.

2. Click Add to add a hyperlink. The Add Hyperlink dialog box opens.
3. Select the element to which you want to associate an external file.
4. Browse to the external file you want to use. This might be something like a picture
of the element or a movie about the element.
Add Hyperlink Dialog Box

You create new hyperlinks in the Add Hyperlink dialog box. The dialog box contains
the following controls:
6-526
Element Type
Lets you select an element type from the dropdown list.
Element
Lets you select an element from a drop-down list

of specific elements from your model. Only those
element types selected in the Element Type dropdown list are displayed.
Link
The complete path of the external file you want to

associate with the selected element. You can type
the path yourself or click the Ellipsis (...) button to
search your computer for the file.
Once you have selected the file, you can
test the hyperlink by clicking the Launch
button.
Description
Lets you type a description of the hyperlink.
Editing a Hyperlink on page 6-527
Creating Your Model
Editing a Hyperlink
You can edit existing hyperlinks using the Edit Hyperlink dialog box.
To edit a hyperlink:
2. Select the hyperlink you want to edit.
3. Click Edit to modify a hyperlink. The Edit Hyperlink dialog box opens.
4. Select the element you want to edit.
5. Edit the hyperlink by adding or deleting an associated file.
Edit Hyperlink Dialog Box

You edit existing hyperlinks in the Edit Hyperlink dialog box. The dialog box contains
Link
Lets you edit the complete path of the external file

associated with the selected hyperlink. You can
type the path yourself or click the Ellipsis (...)
button to search your computer for the file.
Once you have selected the file, you can
test the hyperlink by clicking the Launch
button.
Description
Lets you edit an existing description of the

hyperlink or type a new description.
Related Topics
Deleting a Hyperlink
To delete a hyperlink:
2. Select the hyperlink you want to edit.
6-527
Using Queries
3. Click Edit to modify a hyperlink. The Edit Hyperlink dialog box opens.
4. Select the element you want to delete.
5. Click Delete.
Related Topics
Editing a Hyperlink on page 6-527
Using Queries
A query in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i is a user-defined SQL expression that applies to
a single element type. You use the Queries Manager to create and store queries; you
use the Query Builder dialog box to construct the actual SQL expression.
You can create the following types of queries:
Project queriesQueries you define that are available only in the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i project in which you define them.
Shared queriesQueries you define that are available in all Bentley SewerGEMS
V8i projects you create. You can edit shared queries.
Predefined queriesFactory-defined queries included with Bentley SewerGEMS

V8i that are available in all projects you create. You cannot edit predefined
queries.
You can also use queries in the following ways:
Create dynamic selection sets based on one or more queries. For more information, see Creating a Selection Set from a Query on page 6-429.
Filter the data in a FlexTable using a query. For more information, see Sorting
and Filtering FlexTable Data on page 10-967.
For more information on how to construct queries, see Creating Queries on page 6531.
6-528
Creating Your Model
Queries Manager
The Queries Manager is a docking manager that displays all queries in the current
project, including predefined, shared, and project queries. You can create, edit, or
delete shared and project queries from within the Queries Manager, as well as use it to
select all elements in your model that are part of the selected query.
.
The Queries Manager consists of a toolbar and a tree view, which displays all of the
queries that are associated with the current project. The toolbar contains the following
buttons:
6-529
Using Queries
New
QueryLets you create a new SQL

expression as either a project or shared
query, depending on which item is highlighted in the tree view.
FolderCreates a folder in the tree

view, allowing you to group queries. You
can right-click a folder and create
queries or folders in that folder.
Delete
Deletes the currently-highlighted query or

folder from the tree view. When you delete a
folder, you also delete all of its contents (the
queries it contains).
Rename
Lets you rename the query or folder that is

currently highlighted in the tree view.
Edit
Opens the Query Builder dialog box,

allowing you to edit the SQL expression that
makes up the currently-highlighted query.
Expand All and

Collapse All
Expands or collapses the named views and

folders.
Select in Drawing
Lets you quickly select all the elements in

the drawing pane that are part of the
currently highlighted query. Once you have
selected the elements in a selection set using
Select In Drawing, you can delete them all
at once.
Help
Displays online help for the Queries

Manager.
Related Topics
6-530
Creating Queries on page 6-531
Using the Like Operator on page 6-535
Creating Your Model
Query Parameters Dialog Box

Some predefined queries require that a parameter be defined. When one of these
queries is selected, the Query Parameters dialog box will open, allowing you to type
the parameter value that will be used in the query. For example, when the Pipe Split
Candidates query is used the Query Parameters dialog will open, allowing the Tolerance parameter to be defined.
Creating Queries
A query is a valid SQL expression that you construct in the Query Builder dialog box.
You create and manage queries in the Queries Manager. You also use queries to filter
FlexTables and as the basis for a selection set.
To create a query from the Queries Manager:
1. Open the Queries Manager by selecting View > Queries, clicking the Queries
button on the View toolbar, or by pressing CTRL+5.
6-531
Using Queries
2. Perform one of the following steps:
To create a new project query, highlight Queries - Project in the list pane,
then click the New button and select Query.
To create a new shared query, highlight Queries - Shared in the list pane,
then click the New button and select Query.
Note:
You can also right-click an existing item or folder in the list pane
and select New > Query from the shortcut menu.
3. In the Select Element Type dialog box, select the desired element type from the
drop-down menu. The Query Builder dialog box appears.
4. All input and results fields for the selected element type appear in the Fields list
pane, available SQL operators and keywords are represented by buttons, and
available values for the selected field are listed in the Unique Values list pane.
Perform the following steps to construct your query:
a. Double-click the field you wish to include in your query. The database
column name of the selected field appears in the preview pane.
b. Click the desired operator or keyword button. The SQL operator or keyword
is added to the SQL expression in the preview pane.
c. Click the Refresh button above the Unique Values list pane to see a list of
unique values available for the selected field. Note that the Refresh button is
disabled after you use it for a particular field (because the unique values do
not change in a single query-building session).
d. Double-click the unique value you want to add to the query. The value is
added to the SQL expression in the preview pane.
Note:
You can also manually edit the expression in the preview pane.
e. Check the Validate box above the preview pane to validate your SQL expression when the query is applied.
f.
Click the Apply button above the preview pane to execute the query. If the
expression is valid, the word VALIDATED is displayed in the lower right
corner of the dialog box.
g. Click OK.
6-532
Creating Your Model
Double-click the
desired field to add it
to the preview pane
Click the desired operator

or keyword button to add it
to the SQL expression in
the preview pane
Click the Refresh

button to display the
list of available
unique values
Double-click
the desired
unique value
to add it to the
SQL
expression in
Validate
checkbox
Preview
5. Perform these optional steps in the Queries Manager:
To create a new folder in the tree view, highlight the existing item or folder in
which to place the new folder, then click the New button and select Folder.
You can create queries and folders within folders.
To delete an existing query or folder, click the Delete button. When you delete
a folder, you also delete all of its contents (the queries it contains).
To rename an existing query or folder, click the Rename button, then type a
new name.
To edit the SQL expression in a query, select the query in the list pane, then
click the Edit button. The Query Builder dialog box appears.
To quickly select all the elements in the drawing pane that are part of the
currently highlighted query, click the Select in Drawing button.
Query Builder Dialog Box

You construct the SQL expression that makes up your query in the Query Builder
dialog box. The Query Builder dialog box is accessible from the Queries Manager and
from within a FlexTable.
6-533
Using Queries
The top part of the dialog box contains all the controls you need to construct your
query: a list pane displaying all available attributes for the selected element type, a
SQL control panel containing available SQL keywords and operators, and list view
that displays all the available values for the selected attribute. The bottom part of the
dialog box contains a preview pane that displays your SQL expression as you
construct it.
All the dialog box controls are described in the following table.
6-534
Fields
Lists all input and results fields

applicable to the selected element type.
This list displays the labels of the
fields, while the underlying database
column names of the fields become
visible in the preview pane when you
add them to the expression. Doubleclick a field to add it to your SQL
expression.
SQL Controls
These buttons represent all the SQL

operators and controls that you can use
in your query. They include =, >, <, _,
?, *, <>, >=, <=, [ ], Like, And, and
Or. Click the appropriate button to add
the operator or keyword to the end of
your SQL expression, which is
displayed in the preview pane.
Unique Values
When you click the Refresh button,

this list displays all the available
unique values selected field. Doubleclick a value in the list to add it to the
end of your SQL expression, which is
displayed in the preview pane. If you
select a different field, you must click
the Refresh button again to update the
list of unique values for the selected
field. When you first open the Query
Builder dialog box, this list is empty.
Refresh
Updates the list of unique values for

the selected field. This button is
disabled after you use it for a particular
field.
Copy
Copies the entire SQL expression

displayed in the preview pane to the
Windows clipboard.
Creating Your Model
Paste
Pastes the contents of the Windows

clipboard into the preview pane at the
location of the text cursor. For
example, if your cursor is at the end of
the SQL expression in the preview
pane and you click the Paste button,
the contents of your clipboard will be
added to the end of the expression.
Validate
Validates the SQL expression in the

preview pane. If the expression is not
valid, a message appears. When you
click this button and your SQL
expression passes validation, the word
VALIDATED appears in the lower
right corner of the dialog box.
Apply
Executes the query. The results of the

query are displayed at bottom of the
Query Builder dialog box in the form
x of x elements returned.
Preview Pane
Displays the SQL expression as you

add fields, operators and/keywords,
and values to it.
Related Topics
Queries Manager on page 6-529
Using the Like Operator on page 6-535
Using the Like Operator

The Like operator compares a string expression to a pattern in an SQL expression.
Syntax
expression Like pattern
The Like operator syntax has these parts:
Part
Description
expression
SQL expression used in a WHERE clause .
6-535
Using Queries
pattern
String or character string literal against which expression is

compared.
You can use the Like operator to find values in a field that match the pattern you
specify. For pattern, you can specify the complete value (for example, Like
Smith), or you can use wildcard characters to find a range of values (for example,
Like Sm*).
In an expression, you can use the Like operator to compare a field value to a string
expression. For example, if you enter Like C* in an SQL query, the query returns
all field values beginning with the letter C. In a parameter query , you can prompt the
user for a pattern to search for.
The following example returns data that begins with the letter P followed by any letter
between A and F and three digits:
Like P[A-F]###
To search for a string that contains a symbol that is normally a wildcard (*or #)
enclose it in brackets like this: [#].
To search using a user defined date field, enclose the date in # symbols like this:
Conduit_Field_1 > #1/1/2009#
The following table shows how you can use Like to test expressions for different
patterns.
6-536
Kind of match
Pattern
Match
(returns True)
No match
(returns False)
Multiple characters
a*a
aa, aBa, aBBBa
aBC
*ab*
abc, AABB, Xab
aZb, bac
Special character
a[*]a
a*a
aaa
Multiple characters
ab*
abcdefg, abc
cab, aab
Single character
a?a
aaa, a3a, aBa
aBBBa
Single digit
a#a
a0a, a1a, a2a
aaa, a10a
Range of characters
[a-z]
f, p, j
2, &
Outside a range
[!a-z]
9, &, %
b, a
Creating Your Model
Not a digit
[!0-9]
A, a, &, ~
0, 1, 9
Combined
a[!b-m]#
An9, az0, a99
abc, aj0
Using Queries to Edit/View Results for a Selected Group of

Elements
You can use queries to isolate a group of elements that meet specified criteria, and
then edit or view the results for only those elements.
1. Create a query to isolate the group of objects. (Go to View->Query->Create a
New Query under Query- Project)
2. Query for All Conduits with Diameter>12 inches.
3. Now go to the Conduit Flex Tables.
4. Right Click on any Column and Choose Filter By Query.
5. Choose the Newly Created Query.
6. The Flex Table will now display only the Group of Conduits with Diameter >12
inches.
Controls
Controls in the GVF Solver give the user a way to specify an action for virtually any
element in a pressure subnetwork based on almost any property of the system.
Controls are included in a scenario when the control set they are included in is specified in the Operational Alternative. The controls become part of an Operational Alternative when you specify the name of a Control Set to use in a given Operational
Alternative. The default control set is All control statements.
6-537
Controls
The Control Manager is the main work center for controls. The Control Manager
manages all controls, conditions, actions, and control sets in the system. The Control
manager allows the user to define controls using advanced IF, AND, and OR condition
logic, which can trigger any number of THEN or optional ELSE actions.
Choose Components > Controls to open the Control Manager.
The Controls manager consists of the following tabs:
6-538
ControlsManage all controls defined in the system. See Controls Tab on

page 6-539.
ConditionsDefine the condition that must be met prior to taking an action. See
Conditions Tab on page 6-544.
ActionsDefine what should be done to an element in the system in response to

an associated control condition. See Actions Tab on page 6-548.
Control SetsAssign groups of controls to Control Sets. See Control Sets Tab
(GVF-Convex Solver) on page 6-552.
Creating Your Model
Controls Tab
The Controls tab allows you to manage all controls defined in the system. Controls
can be one of two types: simple or logical. Simple controls are made up of an IF
condition and a THEN action statement. Logical controls are made up of an IF condition, a THEN action, and an optional ELSE action, and can be assigned a priority for
resolving potential conflicts between logical controls.
Controls, Conditions, and Actions are assigned a non-editable application-provided
ID (e.g., LC01).
The Controls tab is divided into sections:
The pane in the center of the dialog box is the Controls List. This list displays a list of
all Logical Controls defined in the system.
Located above the Controls List is a toolbar with the following buttons:
NewCreates a new control.
DeleteDeletes the highlighted control.
DuplicateCreates a copy of the highlighted control.
RefreshRefreshes the highlighted control.
Control WizardOpens the Control Wizard dialog.
ReportGenerates a summary of the selected control, listing the ID, conditions, actions, and elements incorporated into the control.
6-539
Controls
HelpOpens the online help.
Below the toolbar is a set of filters that allow you to only display controls that
meet criteria defined by the filter settings. The following filters are available:
TypeWhen a Type filter other than <All> is specified, only controls of that
type will be displayed in the Controls list.
PriorityWhen a Priority filter other than <All> is specified, only controls

of that priority will be displayed in the Controls list.
Condition ElementWhen a Condition filter other than <All> is specified,

only controls containing the selected Condition element will be displayed in
the Controls list.
Action ElementWhen an Action filter other than <All> is specified, only

controls containing the selected Action element will be displayed in the
Controls list.
You can edit or create controls consisting of an IF condition, a THEN action, and an
optional ELSE action. The lower pane is split into sections:
6-540
Evaluate as Simple ControlTurn on in order to evaluate the condition as a

simple control.
IF ConditionThe drop-down list allows you to choose from a list of conditions that have already been created in the Conditions tab.
THEN ActionThe drop-down list allows you to choose from a list of

actions that have already been created in the Actions tab.
ELSE Action (optional)The ELSE action is used when the conditions for
the control are not met. To specify an ELSE action, click the check box to
activate the drop-down list. The drop-down list allows you to choose from a
list of actions that have already been created in the Actions tab.
PriorityThis area of the dialog box is optional. To set a priority for the control
being created, turn on to activate the priority drop-down list. You can set a priority
of 1-5, 5 being the highest priority. If multiple controls meet a certain condition
and they have conflicting actions, the control with the highest priority will be
used.
Creating Your Model

Note:
At calculation time, the priority is used to determine the logical

control to apply when multiple controls require that conflicting
actions be taken. Logical controls with identical priorities will be
prioritized based on the order they appear in the Logical Control
Set alternative. A rule without a priority value always has a lower
priority than one with a value. For two rules with the same
priority value, the rule that appears first is given the higher
priority.
Relative speed pump patterns take precedence over any
controls (simple or logical) that are associated with the pump.
Hovering the mouse cursor over a control in the list will open a
tooltip which displays the conditions and actions that make up
that control.
When creating a new condition or action for a new control, the
condition and action input fields will be initialized with the data
used in the last condition or action that was created.
Once created, the Logical Control will be assigned an
application generated ID (e.g., LC04).
DescriptionThis area is preset with a default description. There is an option to

change the default description. To do so, turn on to activate the description field,
and enter your description in the text box.
SummaryThis area of the dialog box displays a description of the control.
Status PaneWhen one or more filters are active, the lower left corner of the
dialog will show the number of controls currently displayed out of the number of
total controls. Additionally, a FILTERED flag is displayed in the lower right
corner.
Note:
Logical Controls are not executed during Steady State analyses.
Logical controls consist of any combination of simple conditions and simple actions.
Controls are defined as:
IF:
Condition 1 AND condition 2 OR condition 3 AND

condition 4, etc., where condition X is a a condition
clause.
THEN:
Action 1 AND action 2, etc. where action X is an

action clause.
ELSE (Optional):
Action 3 AND action 4, etc. where action X is an

action clause.
Priority (Optional):
Priority where priority is a priority value (1 to 5, 5

being the highest priority).
6-541
Controls
In addition to the high level of flexibility provided by allowing multiple conditions
and actions, the functionality of Logical controls is also enhanced by the range of
Condition types that are available. You can activate the stated actions based on
element loads, element hydraulic grade or pressure, system load, clock time, time
from start, tank level, or time to fill or drain a tank.
The user can also create composite conditions and actions that can cause actions to be
performed when multiple conditions are met simultaneously, or when one or the other
conditions are met. The user can also activate multiple actions when a single condition
is met.
EXAMPLE:
To create a logical control in which a pump (PMP-1) is turned on when the level in a
Wet Well (WW-1) falls below a specified value (5 ft.) or when the system loads
exceed a certain level (5000 gpm):
ConditionsBecause this control needs to be triggered by multiple conditions, a Composite Condition is chosen. In this instance, the operator OR is
chosen to link the conditions, because the pump should be turned on if either
condition is true.
IF condition{WW-1 Level < 5 ft.}
OR condition{System Load > 5000 gpm}
ActionsBecause this control has a single desired outcome if one of the

conditions is met, a simple action is chosen. The first action in a logical
control is always linked to the conditions by a logical THEN statement. In this
instance, an ELSE action will also be used, to keep the pump off if neither of
the conditions is true.
THEN action{PMP-1 Status = On}
ELSE action{PMP-1 Status = Off}
The finished logical control looks like this:

IF {WW-1 Level < 5 ft.} OR {System Load > 5000 gpm} THEN {PMP-1 Status =
On} ELSE {PMP-1 Status = Off}
6-542
Creating Your Model

Tip:
Use the optional ELSE field to cause actions to be performed

when the conditions in the control are not being met. For
example, if you are creating a control that states, If the level in
WW 1 is less than 5 ft., Then turn Pump 1 On, use an ELSE
action to turn the pump off if the tank level is above 5 ft.
Note:
Logical Controls are not executed during Steady State analyses.

When defining a logical control, you have the option to share
conditions and/or actions. In other words, more than one control
can reference the same condition or action. Keep in mind that
when you change an underlying condition or action, it will affect
all controls that reference that condition or action.
Control Wizard
The Control Wizard allows you to quickly create pump controls based on wet well
HGL.
Click the New button to create a new row in the controls list.
Click the Delete button to remove the currently highlighted control.
Choose the controlled pump from the list box in the Pump column.
Choose the controlling wet well from the list box in the Wet Well column. Choose the
desired On and Off Operators and enter the HGL values that will turn the pump On
and Off.
Click the Create button to generate the control(s), or click the Cancel button to close
the wizard without creating a control.
6-543
Controls
Conditions Tab
Conditions allow you to define the condition that must be met prior to taking an
action. The Conditions tab provides a list of all conditions defined in the system.
There are two types of conditions: simple conditions and composite conditions.
The Conditions tab is divided into sections:
The pane in the middle of the dialog box is the Conditions List. The Conditions
List displays a list of all logical conditions defined in the system. The list contains
four columns: ID (the application defined id, e.g., C01 for simple, CC01 for
composite), Type (simple or composite), description, and references (logical
control references).
Located above the Conditions List is a toolbar with the following buttons:
6-544
NewCreate a simple or composite condition.
DuplicateCopy the selected condition.
DeleteDeletes the selected condition.
RefreshRefreshes the selected condition.
ReportGenerates a summary of the selected condition.
Creating Your Model
Control SetWhen a control set is specifed, only conditions that are a

component of that control set are displayed in the Conditions list.
TypeWhen a Type filter other than <All> is specified, only conditions of

that type will be displayed in the Conditions list.
Condition ElementWhen a Condition filter other than <All> is specified,

only conditions containing the selected Condition element will be displayed
in the Conditions list.
The controls used to create or edit a condition vary depending on whether the
condition is simple or composite:
Simple Conditions
The input fields for a simple condition change depending on the condition type that is
selected in the condition Type field. The Simple Condition Types and the corresponding input data are as follows:
ElementThis will create a condition based on specified attributes at a selected
element. The fields available when this condition type is selected are as follows:
ElementThe Element field allows you to specify which element the condition
will be based upon, and provides three methods of choosing this element. The
drop-down list displays elements that have been used in other logical controls, the
Ellipsis () button, which opens the Single Element Selection dialog box, and the
Select From Drawing button, which allows you to select the element using the
graphical Drawing view.
System DemandThis will create a condition based on the Demands for the entire
system. The fields available when this condition type is selected are:
OperatorThis field allows you to specify the relationship between the Attribute
and the target value for that attribute. The choices include Greater Than (>),
Greater Than Or Equal To (>=), Less Than (<), Less Than Or Equal To (<=),
Equal To (=), or Not Equal To (<>).
System DemandThis field lets you set a system-wide demand.
Clock TimeThis will create a condition based on the clock time during an extended
period simulation. If the extended period simulation is for a period longer than 24
hours, this condition will be triggered every day at the specified time.
6-545
Controls
Time From StartThis will create a condition based on the amount of time that has
passed since the beginning of an extended period simulation. The following fields are
available when this condition type is selected:
Target ValueThis fields label will change depending on the attribute that is
chosen. The value entered here is used in conjunction with the operator that is chosen
to determine if the condition has been met.
DescriptionThis area of the dialog box is preset with a default description. There is
an option to change the default description. To do so, click the check box to activate
the description field, and enter your description in the text box. Additionally, the
description field supports the following expandable masks:
%#
ID
%e
Element
%a
Attribute
%o
Operator
%v
Value
%u
Unit
Note:
Click the description list box to select one of the predefined

masks.
Aside from reducing the amount of data input, using these masks provides the additional benefit of automatically updating the corresponding information when changes
are made to the various condition components.
Summary This area of the dialog box displays an automatically updated preview of
the expanded description.
Composite Conditions
When a Composite Condition is being defined or edited, the lower part of the dialog
box is comprised of a two column table and two buttons. The buttons are as follows:
6-546
InsertAdds a new row to the Condition list.
Creating Your Model
DeleteDeletes the highlighted row from the Condition list.
RefreshUpdates the referenced conditions.
The table contains two columns, as follows:
OperatorThis column allows you to choose the way in which the related
Condition logic will be evaluated. The available choices are If, And, and Or.
Note:
The first condition in the list will use the If operator. Any
additional conditions will allow you to choose between AND and
OR.
Any combination of AND and OR clauses can be used in a rule.
When mixing AND and OR clauses, the OR operator has higher
precedence than AND. Therefore, IF A or B and C is equivalent
to IF (A or B) and C. If the interpretation was meant to be IF A
or (B and C), this can be expressed using two Logical Controls:
Logical Control 1: IF A THEN... and Logical Control 2: IF B
AND C THEN...
ConditionThe drop-down list allows you to choose a condition that was

already created beforehand.
%#
ID
%v
Value
are made to the various condition components.
Note:

masks.
SummaryThis area of the dialog box displays an automatically updated preview of

6-547
Controls
Actions Tab
Actions allow you to define what should be done to an element in the system in
response to an associated control condition. The Actions tab provides a list of all
actions defined in the system. There are two types of actions: simple actions and
composite actions. Actions have an application-provided non-editable ID (e.g., A01
for simple, AA01 for composite).
The Actions tab is divided into sections:
6-548
The Actions List displays a list of all logical actions defined in the system. The list
contains four columns: ID (the application defined ID, e.g., A01 for simple, AA01
for composite), Type (simple or composite), description, and references (logical
control references).
Located above the Conditions List is a toolbar with the following buttons:
-
NewOpens the New Logical Action dialog box, where you can create a
new logical action.
EditDepending on whether a simple or composite action is highlighted,

this button opens the Simple Logical Action or Composite Logical Action
dialog box, which allows you to edit the highlighted action.
DeleteDeletes the highlighted action. You will be prompted to confirm

this action.
Creating Your Model
FindOpens the Find Logical Action dialog box, which allows you to
find a particular action based on a variety of criteria.
ReportGenerates a summary of the highlighted action.
-
Control SetWhen a control set is specifed, only actions that are a

component of that control set are displayed in the Actions list.
TypeWhen a Type filter other than <All> is specified, only actions of

that type will be displayed in the Actions list.
Action ElementWhen an Action Element filter other than <All> is

specified, only actions containing the selected Element will be displayed
in the Actions list.
The controls used to create or edit an action vary depending on whether the action
is simple or composite:
Simple Actions
The following controls are used to define or edit Simple Actions:
ElementThe Element field allows you to specify which element the action will
be based upon and provides three methods of choosing this element. The dropdown list displays elements that have been used in other logical controls, the
Ellipsis () button, which opens the Single Element Selection box, and the Select
From Drawing button, which allows you to select the element using the graphical
Drawing view.
AttributeThis field displays the available attributes for the element type specified in the Element field. Not all attributes are available for all element types. The
available attributes include:
Status This attribute is used to change the status of a pipe, pump, or valve
when the related conditions are met. The available choices are dependant on
the element type.
SettingThis attribute is used to change the settings of a pump or valve

when the related conditions are met. The setting type varies depending on the
type of element.
6-549
Controls
Note:
Pipes can only utilize the Status Attribute, Pumps and all Valves
except for the GPV can utilize either the Status or Setting
Attribute. GPVs can only use the Status Attribute.
For all valves except for the GPV, there is no explicit Active
status with which to base a control uponthe status choices are
Inactive or Closed. After a control sets a valve to Inactive or
Closed, to reactivate the valve another control must be created
with a Setting attribute. This is because a valve cannot be set to
Active, but must have specific input data to work with.
For GPVs, there is no Inactive setting. GPVs can only be set to
Active or Closed. If the GPV is not closed, the valve will always
produce the headlosses associated with it through the HeadDischarge Points table.
OperatorThe operator for logical actions is always EQUAL TO (=).
Attribute ValueThis fields label will change depending on the attribute that is
chosen. Depending on the element type and the attribute that was chosen, the
input field may also change to a drop-down list, which contains the possible
settings for that element. Not all settings are available for all element types.
Note:
Pipes can be set to Open or Closed, Pumps can be set to On, Off,
or have their relative speed factors increase or decrease. GPVs
can be set to Active or Closed. All other valves can be set to
Inactive, Closed, or have their respective settings changed,
depending on the Valve type.
%#
ID
%e
Element
%a
Attribute
%o
Operator
%v
Value (and Unit, if applicable)
are made to the various control components.
6-550
Creating Your Model

Note:

masks.
SummaryThis area of the dialog displays an automatically updated preview of the

expanded description.
Composite Actions
When a Composite Action is being defined or edited, the lower section of the dialog
box is comprised of a single column table and two buttons. The Table contains a list of
the Actions to be used. Each row is a drop-down list that allows you to choose an
action that was already created beforehand.
InsertAdds a new row to the Action list
DeleteDeletes the highlighted row from the Action list.
%#
ID
%v
Value
are made to the various control components.
Note:

masks.
Composite logical actions consist of multiple simple logical
actions. These actions are linked with an AND statement.
SummaryThis area of the dialog box displays an automatically updated preview of

6-551
Controls
Control Sets Tab (GVF-Convex Solver)

The Control Sets tab allows you to create, modify and manage control set associated
with the GVF convex solver. Control sets are a way to organize your controls, and also
provide the means to use different controls in different scenarios.
A Control Set is made up of one or more control statements (called Controls) of the
form: If (condition) then (action) else (action). The actions and conditions are
defined under the Conditions or Actions tab under control.
The following options are available in this dialog box:
6-552
NewOpens the Logical Control Set editor dialog box. From this window, you
can add previously created logical controls to the new control set.
EditOpens the Logical Control Set editor dialog box, which allows you to edit
the highlighted control set.
DuplicatePrompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set editor to
allow you to add or remove controls from the control set.
DeleteDeletes the highlighted control set. You will be prompted to confirm this
action.
RenameAllows you to rename the highlighted control set.
ReportGenerates a summary of the highlighted control set, listing the ID,

conditions, actions, and elements for all of the logical controls contained within
the control set.
Creating Your Model
Logical Control Sets Dialog Box

The Logical Control Set Editor is divided into two panes.
The left pane, labeled Available Items, contains a list of all of the logical controls that
have been created in the current project. To add controls to the Selected Items pane on
the right, highlight the desired controls and click the [>] button under Add. To add all
of the controls to your Logical Control set, click the [>>] button under Add. To
remove a control from the Selected Items pane, highlight it and click the [<] button
under Remove. To remove all controls from the Selected Items pane, click the [<<]
button under Remove.
Note:
Priority is based upon the order that the controls appear in this
dialog box. The first control in the control set has the highest
priority, and so on. Any control with a set priority will overrule
any control with no set priority.
Controls in the GVF-Convex Solver

In the GVF-Convex solver, the user can use both logical controls and locally defined
on/off controls on the pumps Properties editor. In cases of a conflict between the two
types of control, the locally set on/off controls are ignored by the solver and a user
notification is generated.
Alternatively, the user can set the Ignore On and off Elevation? attribute in the Operational section of the pump properties grid to True.
6-553

User data extensions are a set of one or more attribute fields that you can define to
hold data to be stored in the model. User data extensions allow you to add your own
data fields to your project. For example, you can add a field for keeping track of the
date of installation for an element, or the type of area serviced by a particular element.
Note:
The user data does not affect the hydraulic model calculations.
However, their behavior concerning capabilities like editing,
annotating, sorting and database connections is identical to any
of the standard pre-defined attributes.
User data extensions exhibit the same characteristics as the predefined data used in
and produced by the model calculations. This means that user data extensions can be
imported or exported through database and shapefile connections, viewed and edited
in the Property Editor or in FlexTables, included in tabular reports or element detailed
reports, annotated in the drawing, color coded, and reported in the detailed element
reports.
Note:
The terms user data extension and field are used

interchangeably here. In the context of the User Data Extension
feature, these terms mean the same thing.
You define user data extensions in the User Data Extensions dialog box.
To define a user data extension:
1. Select Tools > User Data Extensions.
2. In the list pane on the left, select the element type for which you want to define a
new attribute field.
3. Click the New button to create a new user data extension. A user data extension
with a default name appears under the element type. You can rename the new field
if you wish.
4. In the Property Editor for the new field, enter the following:
6-554
Type the name of the new field. This is the unique identifier for the field. The
name field in the Property Editor is the name of the column in the data source.
Type the label for the new field. This is the label that will appear next to the
field for the user data extension in the Property Editor for the selected element
type. This is also the column heading if the data extension is selected to
appear in a FlexTable.
Click the Ellipses (...) button in the Category field, then use the drop-down
menu in the Select Category dialog box to select an existing category in which
the new field will appear in the Property Editor. To create a new category,
simply type the category name in the field.
Creating Your Model
Type a number in the Field Order Index field. This is the display order of
fields within a particular category in the Property Editor. This order also
controls the order of columns in Alternative tables. An entry of 0 means the
new field will be displayed first within the specified category.
Type a description for the field. This description will appear at the bottom of
the Property Editor when the field is selected for an element in your model.
You can use this field as a reminder about the purpose of the field.
Select an alternative from the drop-down menu in the Alternative field. This is
the alternative that you want to extend with the new field.
Select a data type from the drop-down menu in the Data Type field.
-
If you select Enumerated, an Ellipses (...) button appears in the Default

Value field. Enumerated user data extensions are fields that present
multiple choices.
Enter the default value for the new field. If the data type is Enumerated, click
the Ellipses (...) button to display the Enumeration Editor dialog box, where
you define enumerated members.
To import an existing User Data Extension XML File, click the Import
button, then select the file you want to import. User Data Extension XML
Files contain the file name extension .xml or .udx.xml.
To export existing user data extensions, click the Export to XML button, then
type the name of the udx.xml file. All user data extensions for all element
types defined in the current project are exported.
To share the new field among two or more element types, select the user data
extension in the list pane, then click the Sharing button or right-click and
select Sharing. In the Shared Field Specification dialog box, select the check
box next to the element or elements that will share the user data extension.
The icon next to the user data extension changes to indicate that it is a shared
field. For more information, see Sharing User Data Extensions Among
Element Types on page 6-563.
To delete an existing user data extension, select the user data extension you
want to delete in the list pane, then click the Delete button, or right-click and
select Delete.
To rename a the display label of an existing user data extension, select the
user data extension in the list pane, click the Rename button or right-click and
select Rename, then type the new display label.
To expand the list of elements and view all user data extensions, click the
Expand All button.
6-555
To collapse the list of elements so that no user data extensions are displayed,
click the Collapse All button.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box and save your user data extensions. The new
field(s) you created will appear in the Property Editor for every instance of the
specified element type in your model.
Related Topics
User Data Extensions Dialog Box on page 6-556
Sharing User Data Extensions Among Element Types on page 6-563
Shared Field Specification Dialog Box on page 6-564
Enumeration Editor Dialog Box on page 6-564
User Data Extensions Dialog Box

The User Data Extensions dialog box displays a summary of the user data extensions
associated with the current project. The dialog box contains a toolbar, a list pane
displaying all available Bentley SewerGEMS V8i element types, and a property
editor.
.
6-556
Creating Your Model

Import
Lets you merge the user data

extensions in a saved User Data
Extension XML file (.udx.xml or
.xml) into the current project.
Importing a User Data Extension
XML file will not remove any of the
other data extensions defined in your
project. User data extensions that
have the same name as those already
defined in your project will not be
imported.
Export to XML
Lets you save existing user data

extensions for all element types in
your model to a User Data Extension
XML file (.udx.xml) for use in a
different project.
New
Lets you create a new user data

extension for the currently
highlighted element type.
Sharing
Lets you share the current user data

extension with another element type.
When you click this button, the
Shared Field Specification dialog
box opens. For more information,
see Sharing User Data Extensions
Among Element Types on page 6563.
6-557
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted

user data extension
Rename
Lets you rename the display label of

the currently highlighted user data
extension.
Expand All
Expands all of the branches in the

Collapse All

The Property Editor contains the following controls:

Alphabetized
Displays the attribute fields in the

Property Editor in alphabetical
order.
Categorized
Displays the attribute fields in the

Property Editor in categories. This
is the default.
and the following fields, which define your new user data extension:
Table 6-14:
Attribute
Description
General
6-558
Name
The unique identifier for the field. The name field in the
Property Editor is the name of the column in the data source.
Label
The label that will appear next to the field for the user data
extension in the Property Editor for the selected element type.
This is also the column heading if the data extension is
selected to appear in a FlexTable.
Category
The section in the Property Editor for the selected element

type in which the new field will appear. You can create a new
category or use an existing category. For example, you can
create a new field for manholes and display it in the Physical
section of that elements Property Editor.
Creating Your Model

Table 6-14:
Attribute
Description
Field Order
Index
The display order of fields within a particular category in the

Property Editor. This order also controls the order of columns
in Alternative tables. An entry of 0 means the new field will be
displayed first within the specified category.
Field
Description
The description of the field. This description will appear at the

bottom of the Property Editor when the field is selected for an
element in your model. You can use this field as a reminder
about the purpose of the field.
Alternative
Lets you select an existing alternative to extend with the new

field.
Referenced
By
Displays all the element types that are using the field. For
example, if you create a field called "Installation Date" and you
set it up to be shared, this field will show the element types that
share this field. So for example, if you set up a field to be
shared by manholes and catch basins, the Referenced By field
would show "Manhole, Catch Basin".
Units
Data Type
Lets you specify the data type for the user data extension.
Click the down arrow in the field then select one of the
following data types from the drop-down menu:
IntegerAny positive or negative whole number.
RealAny fractional decimal number (for example, 3.14).

It can also be unitized with the provided options.
TextAny string (text) value up to 255 characters long.
Long TextAny string (text) up to 65,526 characters long.
Date/TimeThe current date. The current date appears

by default in the format month/day/year. Click the down
arrow to change the default date.
BooleanTrue or False.
EnumeratedWhen you select this data type, an Ellipses

button appears in the Default Value field. Click the
Ellipses (...) button to display the Enumeration Editor
dialog box, where you can add enumerated members and
their associated values. For more information, see
Enumeration Editor Dialog Box on page 6-564.
Real (Formula)Allows you to define a formula to populate the data value.
6-559

Table 6-14:
6-560
Attribute
Description
Default Value
The default value for the user data extension. The default
value must consistent with the selected data type. If you chose
Enumerated as the data type, click the Ellipses (...) button to
display the Enumeration Editor.
Dimension
Lets you specify the unit type. Click the drop-down arrow in the
field to see a list of all available dimensions. This field is
available only when you select Real as the Data Type.
Storage Unit
Lets you specify the storage units for the field. Click the dropdown arrow in the field to see a list of all available units; the
units listed change depending on the Dimension you select.
This field is available only when you select Real as the Data
Type.
Numeric
Formatter
Lets you select a number format for the field. Click the dropdown arrow in the field to see a list of all available number
formats; the number formats listed change depending on the
Dimension you select. For example, if you select Flow as the
Dimension, you can select Flow, Flow - Pressurized Condition,
Flow Tolerance, or Unit Load as the Numeric Formatter. This
field is available only when you select Real as the Data Type.
Creating Your Model
User Data Extensions Import Dialog Box

The Import dialog box opens after you initiate an Import command and choose the
xml file to be imported. The Import dialog displays all of the domain elements
contained within the selected xml file. Uncheck the boxes next to a domain element to
ignore them during import.
Related Topics
User Data Extensions on page 6-554
Sharing User Data Extensions Among Element Types on page 6-563
Shared Field Specification Dialog Box on page 6-564
Enumeration Editor Dialog Box on page 6-564
Formula Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define formulas for use with the Real (Formula) User Data
Extension type.
You construct the formula using the available fields, operators, and functions. All the
dialog box controls are described in the following table.
6-561
6-562
Fields
Lists all input and results fields applicable

to the selected element type. This list
displays the labels of the fields while the
underlying database column names of the
fields become visible in the preview pane
when you add them to the formula.
Double-click a field to add it to your
formula.
Operators
These buttons represent all of the

operators that can be used in the fomula.
Click the appropriate button to add the
operator to the end of your formula ,
which is displayed in the preview pane.
Besides the common options for options
for adding, subtracting, multiplying and
dividing values , there are also ( ) which
allows for more complex formulas, and
the caret (^) which is used for raising a
value to the power of a value
Available Math
Functions
Lists mathematical functions that can be

used in the formula. If you hover over a
function it will describe the number of
requied parameters and a brief description
of what the function does.
Copy
Copies the entire formula displayed in the

preview pane to the Windows clipboard.
Paste
Pastes the contents of the Windows

clipboard into the preview pane at the
location of the text cursor. For example, if
your cursor is at the end of the formula in
the preview pane and you click the Paste
button, the contents of your clipboard will
be added to the end of the formula.
Validate
Checks that the forumla is valid.
Preview Pane
Displays the formula as you add fields,

operators, and functions to it.
Creating Your Model
Sharing User Data Extensions Among Element Types

You can share user data extensions across multiple element types in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i. Shared user data extensions are displayed in the Property Editor for all
elements types that share that field.
The icons displayed next to the user data extensions in the User Data Extensions
dialog box change depending on the status of the field:
Indicates a new unsaved user data extension.
Indicates a user data extension that has been saved to the data source.
Indicates a user data extension that is shared among multiple element types
but has not been applied to the data source.
Indicates a user data extension that is shared among multiple element types
and that has been applied to the data source. Fields with this icon appear in
the Property Editor for any elements of the associated element types that appear in
your model.
Observe the following rules when sharing user data extensions:
You can select any number of element types with which to share the field. The list
is limited to element types that support the Alternative defined for the Field. For
example, the Physical Alternative may only apply to five of the element types. In
this case, you will only see these five items listed in the Alternative drop-down
menu.
You cannot use the sharing feature to move a field from one element type to
another. Validation is in place to ensure that only one item is selected and if it is
the same as the original, default selection. If it is not, a message appears telling
you that when sharing a field, you must select at least two element types, or select
the original element type.
To unshare a field that is shared among multiple element types, right-click the user
data extension you want to keep in the list pane, then select Sharing. Clear all the
element types that do not want to share the field with and click OK. If you leave
only one element type checked in the Shared Field Specification dialog box, it
must be the original element type for which you created the user data extension.
The fields that were located under the catch basin and conduit element type
root nodes will be removed completely.
You can also unshare a field by using the Delete button or right-clicking and
selecting Delete. This will unshare and delete the field.
6-563

To share a user data extension:
1. Open the User Data Extensions dialog box by selecting Tools > User Data Extensions.
2. In the list pane, create a new user data extension to share or select an existing user
data extension you want to share, then click the Sharing button.
3. In the Shared Field Specification dialog box, select the check box next to each
element type that will share the user data extension.
4. Click OK.
5. The icon next to the user data extension in the list pane changes to indicate that it
is a shared field.
Shared Field Specification Dialog Box

You select element types to share a user data extension in the Shared Field Specification dialog box. The dialog box contains a list of all possible element types with check
boxes.
Select element types to share the current user data extension by selecting the check
box next to the element type. Clearing a selection if you no longer want that element
type to share the current field.
Enumeration Editor Dialog Box

The Enumeration Editor dialog box appears when you select Enumerated as the Data
Type for a user data extension, then click the Ellipses (...) button in the Default Value
field. Enumerated fields are fields that contain multiple selections - you define these
as members in the Enumeration Editor dialog box.
For example, suppose you want to identify conduits in a model of a new subdivision
by one of the following states: Existing, Proposed, Abandoned, Removed, and
Retired. You can define a new user data extension with the label Pipe Status for
conduits, and select Enumerated as the data type. Click the Ellipses (...) button in the
Default Value field in the Property Editor for the user data extension to display the
Enumeration Editor dialog box. Then enter five members with unique labels (one
member for each unique pipe status) and enumeration values in the table. After you
close the User Data Extensions dialog box, the new field and its members will be
available in the Property Editor for all conduits in your model. You will be able to
select any of the statuses defined as members in the new Pipe Status field.
You can specify an unlimited number of members for each user data extension, but
member labels and values must be unique. If they are not unique, an error message
appears when you try to close the dialog box.
6-564
Creating Your Model

The dialog box contains a table and the following controls:
NewLets you add a new row to the table. Each row in the table represents a
unique enumerated member of the current user data extension.
DeleteDeletes the current row from the table. The enumerated member defined
in that row is deleted from the user data extension.
You define enumerated members in the table, which contains the following columns:
Enumeration Member Display LabelThe label of the member. This is the

label you will see in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i where ever the user data extension
appears (Property Editor, FlexTables, etc.).
Enumeration ValueA unique integer index associated with the member label.
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i uses this number when it performs operations such as
queries.
External Tools
Use the External Tool Manager to manage custom menu commands, which are then
located in the Tools menu for quick accessibility.
Click Tools>External Tools to create a custom menu command from any executable
file. Executable file types include:
.exe
.com
.pif
.bat
.cmd
The External Tool Manager consists of the following elements:
External Tool List PaneThis pane lists the external tools that have been
created. All of the tools listed in this pane will be displayed in the Tools >
External Tools menu.
NewCreates a new external tool in the list pane.
DeleteDeletes the currently highlighted tool.
RenameAllows you to rename the currently highlighted tool.
CommandThis field allows you to enter the full path to the executable file that
the tool will initiate. Click the ellipsis button to open a Windows Open dialog to
allow you to browse to the executable.
6-565
Hydraulic Reviewer Tool
ArgumentsThis optional field allows you to enter command line variables that
are passed to the tool or command when it is activated. Click the > button to open
a submenu containing predefined arguments. Arguments containing spaces must
be enclosed in quotes. The available arguments are:
Project DirectoryThis argument passes the current project directory to the

executable upon activation of the tool. The argument string is %(ProjDir).
Project File NameThis argument passes the current project file name to the
executable upon activation of the tool. The argument string is %(ProjFileName).
Project Store File NameThis argument passes the current project datastore
file name to the executable upon activation of the tool. The argument string is
%(ProjStoreFileName).
Working DirectoryThis argument passes the current working directory to

the executable upon activation of the tool. The argument string is %(ProjWorkDir).
Initial DirectorySpecifies the initial or working directory of the tool or

command. Click the > button to open a submenu containing predefined directory
variables. The available variables are:
Project DirectoryThis variable specifies the current project directory as

the Initial Directory. The variable string is %(ProjDir).
Working DirectoryThis variable specifies the current working directory as

the Initial Directory. The variable string is %(ProjWorkDir).
TestThis button executes the external tool using the specified settings.

This version of SewerGEMS V8i includes a hydraulic reviewer tool to quickly assess
the convergence and stability of the model. To begin using the tool click
Tools > Hydraulic Reviewer.
6-566
Creating Your Model

This opens a dialog which initially looks like this.
The user first selects the name of the scenario for which the hydraulic reviewer will be
performed using a drop down list of scenarios. The calculation of the scenario must
already have been run and the output file should not have been deleted.
Once the scenario has been selected, the user chooses between two tabs
Storage Element Volume Balance
The Storage Element Volume Balance tab determines the overall balance of flows at
any node which can have storage which can include
Wet Wells
Catch basins
Manholes
Ponds
The user can also use a drop down list of any previously created selection set of node
elements on which to perform the review. The default is All Active Nodes.
Picking the green Go arrow starts the calculation which for each node determines the
inflow, outflow and overflow volumes over the course of the runs and the percent
deviation from perfect flow balance as
Flow Deviation (node) = 100% (In - out - over - change in storage)/Duration
Deviation (node) = 100% (In - out - over - change in storage)/In
Deviation (system) = 100% (In - out - over - change in storage)/Total System Inflow
6-567

The results are presented in decreasing order based on Error. Any column can be
sorted, filtered or have the display format changed as with any other flex table.
On some occasions the Deviation (node) may appear large but this is primarily due to
the inflow volume being very small. Users may want to discount the importance of
any errors at nodes where the inflow rates (and deviations) are on the order of 0.1 cfs
or less.
Pipe Flow Statistics
The Pipe flow statistics tab provides an indication of the change of flow rates from
one time step to the next.
To use this tab, the user can chose All Pipes (the default) or any selection set of pipes.
The calculation is run by picking the green Go arrow. It will display a table like the
one below, sorted in order of decreasing Maximum Deviation.
6-568
Creating Your Model

High values for Maximum Deviation do not necessarily indicate that the model
contains errors or is unstable. Some pipe links have very large changes in flow from
one time step to another such as in the case of a pump cycling on an off. In some
cases, numerical models can overshoot the calculated flow when the flow rate changes
abruptly. This effect usually dies out after one or two time steps. Nevertheless, the
Maximum Deviation can serve as an indicator of locations with possible stability
issues.
Once the calculations have been performed, the user can export the values to a previously created User Defined Property so that the values can be used in color coding,
flex tables, etc. Click on Export to Model to reach the dialog below and select Export
to actually export the numerical values.
If the user defined property doesn't exist, the user can create one by picking the ellipse
button and following the instructions for user data extensions. Note that the user
defined property the data will be exported to must use the following settings
Data Type: Real
Dimension: Percent
Storage Unit: Percent
TRex Wizard
The TRex Wizard steps you through the process of automatically assigning elevations
to specified nodes based on data from a Digital Elevation Model or a Digital Terrain
Model.
6-569
TRex Wizard
Step 1: File Selection
The data source file, the SewerGEMS V8i model, and the features to which elevations
will be assigned are specified.
6-570
Data Source TypeThis menu allows you to choose the type of file that contains
the input data you will use. Ssupported data source types include: Bentley .tin,
Bentley .dtm, Bentley .fil, .dwg point, .dxf point, .dwg contour, .dxf
contour,LandXML .xml, and Esri .shp.
FileThis field displays the path where the data source file is located. Use the
browse button to find and select the desired file.
Spatial Reference (ArcGIS Mode Only)Click the Ellipsis (...) next to this
field to open the Spatial Reference Properties dialog box, allowing you to specify
the spatial reference being used by the elevation data file.
Select Elevation FieldSelect the elevation unit.
X-Y UnitsThis menu allows the selection of the measurement unit type associated with the X and Y coordinates of the elevation data file.
Z UnitsThis menu allows the selection of the measurement unit type associated
with the Z coordinates of the elevation data file.
Clip Dataset to ModelIn some cases, the data source contains elevation data
for an area that exceeds the dimensions of the area being modeled. When this box
is checked, TRex will calculate the models bounding box, find the larger dimension (width or height), calculate the Buffering Percentage of that dimension, and
increase both the width and height of the model bounding box by that amount.
Then any data point that falls outside of the new bounding box will not be used to
generate the elevation mesh. If this box isnt checked, all the source data points
are used to generate the elevation mesh. Checking this box should result in faster
calculation speed and use less memory.
Buffering PercentageThis field is only active when the Clip Dataset to Model
box is checked. The percentage entered here is the percentage of the larger dimension (width or height) of the models bounding box that will be added to both the
bounding box width and height to find the area within which the source data
points will be used to build the elevation mesh.
Spatial Reference (ArcGIS Mode Only)Click the Ellipsis (...) next to this
field to open the Spatial Reference Properties dialog box, allowing you to specify
the spatial reference being used by the SewerGEMS V8i model file.
Also update inactive elementsCheck this box to include inactive elements in

the elevation assignment operation. When this box is unchecked, elements that are
marked Inactive will be ignored by TRex.
AllWhen this button is selected, TRex will attempt to assign elevations to all
nodes within the SewerGEMS V8i model.
Creating Your Model
SelectionWhen this button is selected, TRex will attempt to assign elevations to

all currently highlighted nodes.
Selection SetWhen this is selected, the Selection Set menu is activated. When
the Selection Set button is selected, TRex will assign elevations to all nodes
within the selection set that is specified in this menu.
Note:
If the SewerGEMS V8i model (which may or may not have a

spatial reference explicitly associated with it) is in a different
spatial reference than the DEM/DTM (which does have a spatial
reference explicitly associated with it), then the features of the
model will be projected from the models spatial reference to the
spatial reference used by the DEM/DTM.
6-571
TRex Wizard
Step 2: Completing the TRex Wizard
The results of the elevation extraction process are displayed and the results can be
applied to a new or existing physical alternative.
6-572
Results Preview PaneThis tabular pane displays the elevations that were
calculated by TRex. The table can be sorted by label by clicking the Label column
heading and by elevation by clicking the Elevation column heading. You can filter
the table by right-clicking a column in the table and selecting the Filter...Custom
command. You can also right-click any of the values in the elevation column to
change the display options.
Use Existing AlternativeWhen this is selected, the results will be applied to

the physical alternative that is selected in the Use Existing Alternative menu. This
menu allows the selection of the physical alternative to which the results will be
applied.
New Alternative When this is selected, the results will be applied to a new
physical alternative. First, the currently active physical alternative will be duplicated, then the results generated by TRex will be applied to the newly created
alternative. The name of this new alternative must be supplied in the New Alternative text field.
Parent AlternativeSelect an alternative to duplicate from the menu, or select

<None> to create a new Base alternative.
Export ResultsThis exports the results generated by TRex to a tab or commadelimited text file (.TXT). These files can then be re-used by SewerGEMS V8i or
imported into other programs.
Click Finish when complete, or Cancel to close without making any changes.
Creating Your Model
Property Grid Customizations

The Property Grid Customizations manager allows you to create customization
profiles that define changes to the default user interface. Customization profiles allow
you to turn off the visibility of properties in the Properties Editor.
Customization Profiles can be created for a single project or shared across projects.
There are also a number of predefined profiles.
The Customization Manager consists of the following controls:
6-573
Property Grid Customizations
New
This button opens a submenu containing the

following commands:
Folder: This command creates a new

folder under the currently highlighted
node in the list pane.
Customization: This command creates a

new customization profile under the
currently highlighted node in the list
pane.
Delete

folder or customization profile.
Rename
This button allows you to rename the

currently highlighted folder or customization
profile.
Duplicate
This button allows you to create a copy of the

currently highlighted customization profile.
Edit
Opens the Customization Editor dialog

allowing you to edit the currently highlighted
customization profile.
Help
Customization Editor Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to edit the customization profiles that are created in the
Customization Manager. In the Customization editor you can turn off the visibility of
various properties in the Property Grid.
You can turn off any number of properties and/or entire categories of properties in a
single customization profile.
.
6-574
Creating Your Model

To remove a property from the property grid:
1. Select the element type from the pulldown menu.
2. Find the property you want to turn off by expanding the node of the category the
property is under.
3. Uncheck the box next to the property to be turned off.
4. Click OK.
To turn off all of the properties under a category:
1. Select the element type from the pulldown menu.
2. Uncheck the box next to the category to be turned off.
3. Click OK.
Element Property Inferencing

In building a model, a user occasionally runs into situations where there are gaps in
the modeling data for which it is difficult to fill in the information. For example elevation data may be missing form a manhole or some property may be missing from a
pipe. In such cases, it is desirable to let the model draw "inferences" about those
values from property values from nearby elements. For example, elevations from
upstream and downstream manholes can be used to interpolate values for manhole
elevations between those with known properties or the diameter or material from the
downstream conduit can be used to fill in the diameter and material for conduits for
which those properties are missing.
SewerGEMS V8i fills in elevation data such that the slopes of pipes being inferred are
constant along a reach and uses the downstream pipes as the basis for inferring
missing values for pipe properties. In the drawing below, the elevations are interpolated between the known elevations and the physical properties of the downstream
6-575

pipe are used to fill in the properties of the missing pipes. However, if the user has
manually entered some of the physical properties manually, these values will not be
overridden. Loading information (sanitary load/infiltration rate) and head loss type
(AASHTO, HEC-22) are not inferred but are taken from the manhole prototype.
Where:
Gu = upstream ground
Gd = downstream ground
Zu = upstream invert
Zd = downstream invert
N = number of additional manholes
D = diameter (rise) of downstream pipe
In SewerGEMS V8i, element property inferencing is only available for gravity

elements.
6-576
Creating Your Model

There are two general cases for this tool
1. Layout new manholes - In this case, the user knows the elevations of the manholes
at the beginning and end of a run and the physical properties of the downstream
conduit but has not yet placed the intervening manholes and pipes. The user indicates the number of manholes that will be places in the gap and they will automatically be inserted. This is useful in laying out new systems.
2. Follow existing path - In this case, the user has laid out the manholes and the
conduits between them. The user employs this tool to assign properties to the
elements between the upstream and downstream nodes. This is more useful in
filling in details of the system when the path is already determined whether for a
new or existing run of conduits.
6-577
Element Property Inferencing Dialog

To use the inferencing tool, click the Tools menu and select the Element Property
Inferencing command.
6-578
Layout Type: Identify whether the inferencing tool should Layout New Elements
or Follow Existing path.
Creating Your Model
Upstream Node and Downstream node: Pick the upstream and downstream
nodes between which element properties are to be inferred. Click on the Ellipse
() button to select the element from the drawing. Picking the element automatically returns control to this dialog. It is important that all data for the upstream and
downstream elements already be entered when opening this dialog. If for example
ground elevations are missing from a node, then the user should close this dialog
and enter that data before opening this dialog.
Downstream pipe: Field is automatically filled in when the user picks the Downstream Node. If the user has attached more than a single downstream conduit to
the downstream node, an error is generated.
Interpolate ground elevations, Interpolate invert elevations and Overwrite

pipe properties: If checked, the inference tool will overwrite default values in the
nodes and pipes between the upstream and downstream nodes. However, if the
user has manually assigned properties to these elements, those properties will be
retained. These check boxes are only available when Follow Existing Path has
been selected because for new elements (Layout New Elements), the user has no
choice but to accept inferred values. The default elevation is 0 and default pipe
size is 12 in. (300 mm). If the ground elevation has been set to 512 ft (156 m) and
the pipe size set to 18 in. (450 mm), then the inference tool will only interpolate
invert elevations for those elements.
Number of New Nodes: This field is only available when the user has selected
"Layout New Elements." If the user sets this value to N, the inference tool will
place N nodes and N+1 conduits (of equal length) in a straight line between the
upstream and downstream nodes. For example, if the distance is 1376 ft (419 m)
and the user wants 2 new elements, then the inferencing tool will add two
manholes and three pipes each 459 ft (140 m) long.
Create new scenario: If the user checks this box, the tool will prompt for the
name and the parent scenario for the scenario being created. If the user does not
check this box, then the new elements and properties will be placed in the current
scenario.
When a new scenario is created and the Parent Scenario is set to None, the alternatives that make up the scenario are selected based on the first scenario listed in the
Scenario Manager, usually the Base scenario. After the Element Property Inferencing tool creates a scenario, ensure that the other alternatives in the new
scenario are set up properly (double-check active topology, inflows, initial setting,
etc.).
Parent scenario: Name of parent scenario if new scenario is being created.
New scenario label: Name of new scenario if new scenario is being created.
Override alternative label: When a new scenario is being created, the user can
check this box if the user wants to control the name of the new physical alternative
being created. If not, then the default new name is used.
New alternative label: if the "Override alternative label" box is checked, then the
user provides the new name here.
6-579
Interpolate: Starts the inferencing calculations.
Close: Closes this dialog. Inferencing settings are saved for the project session.
Once the project is closed, all settings are lost. However, the user can open the
dialog, setup the reach and close this dialog if additional input information is
required. When the user reopens the dialog (as long as the project was not
closed), the settings will be restored.
Help: Opens this Help.

Note:
Note that no new Active Topology alternative is created by this

tool. This is not an issue for the Follow Existing Path option
since no new elements are created, but can be for the Layout
New Elements options. In the latter case, the user should
consider whether it is more desirable to create a new active
topology alternative before running the inferencing tool.
It is advisable to have all elements created and property data
entered before opening this tool. New data cannot be entered
when this dialog is open.
Example
Given the system below, and the values in the inferencing dialog, two new manholes
are created between MH-3 and MH-5.
6-580
Creating Your Model
6-581

The following summary is displayed after the run.
The resulting model looks like this:
6-582
Creating Your Model

If on the other hand, the system was already laid out with no elevation data for MH-7
and MH-8 and only default pipe sizes (12 in., 300 mm) for CO-6, CO-7 and CO-8, the
profile would initially look like this.
After running, Follow Existing Path, the profile looks like this with correct elevations
and pipe size set to 20 in. based on the downstream conduit properties.
6-583
i-Models
New Element Layout Summary Dialog

This dialog appears after an interpolation operation has completed. After a a
successful run the Statistics tab will display the results of the operation, including
how many nodes and pipes were created. The Messages tab displays any warnings or
errors.
Click the Save button to save the summary as a text file.

Click the Copy button to copy the summary to the clipboard.
Click the Help button to open the online help.
Existing Path Interpolation Results Summary Dialog

This dialog appears after a Follow Existing Path interpolation operation has
completed. After a a successful run the Statistics tab will display the results of the
operation. The Messages tab displays any warnings or errors.
Click the Save button to save the summary as a text file.
Click the Copy button to copy the summary to the clipboard.
Click the Help button to open the online help.
i-Models
The term i-models is used to describe a type of Bentley file (container) which can be
used to share data between applications. The formal definition of an i-model is:
6-584
Creating Your Model

An immutable container for rich multi-discipline information published from known
sources in a known state at a known time. It is a published rendition in a secure readonly container. It is a portable, self-describing and semantically rich data file.
i-models can be thought of as similar to shapefiles in that they provide ways to share
data. They are immutable in that they cannot be modified (they are read-only). They
reflect the state of the model file at the time the i-model was created.
i-model support is built on Bentley technology and is not automatically installed with
SewerGEMS V8i or other hydraulic products. The software to use i-models is
installed with Microstation and other Microstation based products (versions 08.11.07
or later). If a user attempts to create an i-model and the support for i-model creation is
not installed, an error message to download and install the necessary files is issued.
The i-model files can be installed from the Bentley SELECTdownload site.
An i-model can contain all the elements and their properties for a model for a given
scenario and time-step or the information can be filtered so that only a fraction of the
elements and their properties are incorporated in the i-model.
An i-model is generally much smaller than the .mdb file for the hydraulic model even
though it does contain results.
For details on publishing and viewing i-models, see Publishing an i-model and
Viewing an i-model.
Publishing an i-model
To create an i-model, select File > Export > Publish i-model once the desired scenario
and time-steps have been selected.
6-585
i-Models
The following dialog opens with the defaults set so that all elements and properties are
included in the i-model.
The top left pane is a summary of this element types are to be included in the i-model.
If a box by the element type is checked, that element type is included. The Table/Properties column reflects the selections on the right side of the dialog in terms of which
elements and properties are included.
The bottom left portion of the dialog is used to identify which elements are to be
included in the i-model. This can be specified individually for each element type.
If the "Publish a subset of elements based on the Flex Table filters" box is checked,
only those elements that are in the filtered flex table will be included in the i-model.
If the "Exclude topologically inactive elements" box is checked, only active elements
(Is active? = True) are included in the i-model.
The user will usually not need to include all element properties in the i-model. The
right side of the dialog is to identify which properties of the elements are going to be
included in the i-model. The default is "all properties". If the user wants to only
include a subset of properties, the user should create a flex table with only those properties and select that flex table from the drop down list. Because it is possible to have
multiple flex tables with the same name (e.g. Pipe Table can be a predefined table or a
6-586
Creating Your Model

Project table), the user can explicitly state the table path (e.g. Tables - Predefined or
Tables - Project). If the flex table is filtered, the filter is displayed in the Filter box and
in the left pane, the Is Filtered column is set to True for that element type. Note that
element types that are not used in the current model are marked with an icon
The Properties box on the right side of the dialog shows the properties that are
imported for that element type.
If the box for "Publish project elements in 3D" is selected, the elements will be
published in 3D.
The main motivation behind allowing publishing geometries in 3D is to enable clashdetection. That feature is expected to be more important for gravity hydraulic products, but it is included with pressure-based applications as well. The basic functionality regarding this topic can be summarized as:
Node cells' z-coordinates are assigned according to their elevation values, at their
cell's insertion point.
3D node cells in the cell-library are supported.
Pipes are exported as cylinders, with partial toroidal shapes at their vertices.
Pipe cylinder diameters match assigned diameter values.
Pipe elevations in pressure applications are assumed to be at center of cylinders.
Pipe elevations in gravity applications have more details to be aware of (e.g. rim,
invert and crown elevations).
References and any extra graphics published (e.g. annotations) are assigned a zcoordinate of 0.0.
When all settings are established for all element types, the user picks OK.
Upon starting the publishing, the user is asked for the file name for the .dgn file that
will contain the i-model. The user names the file and path as with any other Windows
application.
Cell Libraries
Two cell libraries are used during i-model publishing, one for 2D and one for
3D.Default cell libraries are installed with the product and these can be customized by
the user. The files are Sewer2D.cel and Sewer3D.cel, and can be found in the
Bentley\SewerGEMS8 directory.
If no cell library is found, default cells are used (e.g. a circle in 2D and a sphere in
3D).
6-587
i-Models
Seed Files
Users may want to customize the seed-file that will be used for the publishing of an imodel. In that case, one or more of the following files need to be created in the
Bentley\SewerGEMS8 directory:
Table 6-15: Seed Files
File Name
Description
hmimodelseed2dsi.dgn
2D / SI Units
hmimodelseed3dsi.dgn
3D / SI Units
hmimodelseed2dus.dgn
2D / US Units
hmimodelseed3dus.dgn
3D / US Units
If the appropriate user-customized seed file is not found, a default one will be used.
Viewing an i-model
It is anticipated that numerous applications will be able to view and use i-models.
Initially, i-models can be view using
Bentley View
ProjectWise Navigator
Microstation
In all of these applications, it is possible to open an i-model by browsing to the imodel when the ap starts and opening the file.
If the model is not visible, pick the "Fit View" button. This should make the model
visible. From this view, it is possible to use other commands such as zooming and
panning to navigate around the drawing.
To view the properties of individual elements, pick the Element Information button or
pick Edit > Information in Bentley View or Review > Information in ProjectWise
Navigator. The user can then select and element and its properties will be displayed.
The user can collapse or expand any category in the window.
In Microstation and Navigator, it is also possible to view tabular element data for each
element type by selecting File > Item browser. This opens the Items browser for
element types as shown below:
6-588
Creating Your Model

Double clicking on one of the element types or picking the "Show Details" button
from the top of the dialog, opens a table for that element type.
If the tree is expanded before selecting Show Details and an individual element is
selected, the user will see properties for the selected element.
Automatic Design
StormCAD allows you to design many parts of the sewer network, including gravity
piping and structures. The design is flexible enough to allow you to specify the
elements to be designed, from a single pipe size to the entire system.
Pipes and structures are designed to consider several constraints, such as allowable
ranges of slope, velocity, and cover. In general, the design algorithm attempts to minimize excavation, which is typically the most expensive part of installing sewer piping
and structures.
Changes suggested to the model by an automatic design calculation will be saved to
the Physical Alternative that you specify. This Physical Alternative should be
uniquely created just for the automatic design to avoid overwriting the data in your
other Physical Alternatives.
Using Automatic Constraint Based Design

StormCAD can automatically size conduits, set node invert elevations and determine
the size of inlets to pass a design storm while meeting user-specified constraints. To
use this feature: set up the model for analysis, specify which elements are to be sized
and the sizes available for use in the design, indicate the constraints to be met, and set
the scenario's Calculation Type (found in the calculation options) to Design as
opposed to Analysis.
Note:
Automated conduit sizing only relates to closed conduits such

as circular and elliptical pipes and box conduits, not open
channels.
The detailed steps are provided below:

1. Create a StormCAD model with all the elements to be designed. Make initial estimates of the decision variables such as conduit size and invert elevations. Run the
model to make sure that it is complete and will calculate without fatal errors.
2. Create a list of candidate conduit section sizes in the Conduit Catalog (click the
Components menu and select Conduit Catalog). These candidate conduits
should have the same conduit shape and material as the pipe in the original model.
There must be at least one conduit in the Conduit Catalog with the same shape
(e.g. circular) and material (e.g. PVC) as the conduit being designed. While the
6-589
Automatic Design
user can construct this list manually, it is generally recommended to build it using
the Import from Library command and then picking the shape and material from
the list in the library, then deleting those sizes that should not be considered in
design.
3. In the case of inlet sizing for catch basins, StormCAD can automatically design
the inlet opening length for the inlet at any catch basin element in the network.
However, there are three different Inlet Types in StormCAD: Percent Capture,
Maximum Capacity and Catalog Inlet. Of these, only Catalog Inlets have a configurable opening length, therefore, in order for StormCAD to design opening length,
the Inlet Type must be set to Catalog Inlet, and an Inlet must be selected. It may
be necessary to add a new inlet to Inlet Catalog (click the Component menu and
select Inlet Catalog), or import one or more from the Engineering Libraries.
StormCAD will select an opening length for a particular inlet from the list of
Design Lengths associated with that inlet in the Inlet Catalog. The Design
Lengths may be viewed or edited by clicking on the Design tab in the Inlet
Catalog. The design algorithm will determine the minimum available inlet length
that meets the design constraints.
StormCAD will not select a different Catalog Inlet during the design run, it will
only select a different opening length for the inlet specified.
4. Go to the Design Alternative (click the Analysis menu and select Alternatives)
and set up the options for the run. There are three decisions that need to be made
for conduits in terms of which properties should be adjusted during design:
Design Conduit?
Design Start Invert?
Design End Invert?

Checking any of these boxes means that these properties will be adjusted
during design. ("Design Conduits" means the software should determine the
size of the conduit.) Unchecking them means that the values set in the initial
model will be maintained.
For nodes, the choices are:
Design Structure Elevations?
Allow Drop Structure?
Note:
If you do not want to the Start (Upstream) and/or Stop

(Downstream) invert elevations to change during the design, you
must set the Design Start Invert? and/or Design Stop Invert?
property to False.
For catch basin inlets, the choice is:
6-590
Design Inlet Opening?
Creating Your Model

5. Next set up the design constraints.
For conduits, if you pick Simple as the type, the Minimum and Maximum
Velocity need to be specified (or the defaults kept). If Table is selected, you can
vary the constraints based on pipe Rise. If you do not want to use velocity
constraints, set the Minimum to zero and Maximum to a large number.
For inverts, decide whether to match Inverts or Crowns or specify an offset
through the structure.
For inlets, specify the Maximum Spread in Sag and the maximum Depth in Sag.
Note:
If you set up constraints under Default Design Constraints (click

the Components menu and select Default Design Constraints),
these constraints will be used for any new Design Alternative as
well as the alternative associated with the current scenario.
You can modify the constraints for just an individual element by checking Specify
Local Pipe (Inlet) Constraints box associated with that element.
6. You can specify some additional options under the Extended Design portion of the
alternative manager. In some cases, the pipes must be designed to carry the design
flow at less than 100% full (100% Full is the default). You can check Partly Full
Design and specify the design percent as either a constant (Simple) or a tabular list
as a function of conduit rise.
Note:
The design percentage is defined as a percentage of full depth.
You can also allow for multiple parallel pipe barrels or limit the maximum section
size by specifying maximum rise.
7. Create a new calculation option (click the Analysis menu and select Calculation
Options) with the Calculation Type set to Design (as opposed to Analysis).
8. Create a new scenario using the desired Design Alternative and Calculation
Options. Make that scenario the current scenario and start the design by picking
Compute.
9. When the design starts, it will indicate the (current) Physical Alternative in which
the results will be stored. If the user wants the results stored there, pick Yes. If the
user wants the new design properties stored in another Physical Alternative, this is
the place to specify that alternative by picking No. That Physical Alternative is
associated with the current scenario.
Default Design Constraints

Pipe diameters, invert elevations, node structures, and inlets can be all designed with
the same set of design constraints. You also have the option to adjust these values individually for each pipe or structure.
6-591
Automatic Design
The Default Design Constraints dialog is divided into the three following tabs:
Gravity Pipe
Node
Inlet
Gravity Pipe Tab

The Gravity Pipe tab allows you to enter default constraints to be used for the design
of pipes when performing a calculation run in design mode. The dialog is divided into
the following sections:
Default Constraints
Extended Design
Default Constraints Section

In this section, there is a Velocity tab, a Cover tab, and a Slope tab. You can specify
the following default constraints to be used for the design of gravity pipes:
6-592
Velocity Tab: The Velocity tab consists of the following controls:
Velocity Constraints TypeWhen Simple is chosen, a single minimum and

maximum Velocity value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Velocity (Minimum) vs Velocity (Maximum) points in
tabular format.
Velocity (Minimum)Specify the minimum allowable velocity value. This

control is only available when the Velocity Constraint Type is set to Simple.
Velocity (Maximum)Specify the maximum allowable velocity value. This

Cover Tab: The Cover tab consists of the following controls:
Cover Constraints TypeWhen Simple is chosen, a single minimum and

maximum Cover value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Cover (Minimum) vs Cover (Maximum) points in tabular
format.
Cover (Minimum)Specify the minimum allowable cover value. This

control is only available when the Cover Constraint Type is set to Simple.
Cover (Maximum)Specify the maximum allowable cover value. This

Slope Tab: The Slope tab consists of the following controls:
Creating Your Model
Slope Constraints TypeWhen Simple is chosen, a single minimum and

maximum Slope value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Slope (Minimum) vs Slope (Maximum) points in tabular
format.
Slope (Minimum)Specify the minimum allowable slope value. This control

is only available when the Slope Constraint Type is set to Simple.
Slope (Maximum)Specify the maximum allowable slope value. This control

Extended Design Section

This section lets you specify if the following design parameters are to be used. If they
are to be used, you can also specify the associated default value. The Extended Design
section is split into three tabs:
Part Full Design Tab: The Part Full Design tab consists of the following
controls:
Is Part Full Design?When checked, allows you to specify the Percent Full
target to be used by the design algorithm.
Percent Full Constraint TypeAllows you to specify how the Percent Full
constraints are defined. When Simple is chosen, a single Percentage Full
value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify multiple Rise vs
Percent Full points in tabular format.
Percentage FullSpecify the Percent Full value to be used when the Is Part
Full Design? box is checked. This control is only availble when the Percent
Full Constraint Type is set to Simple.
Number of Barrels Tab: The Number of Barrels tab consists of the following
controls:
Allow Multiple Barrels?When checked, allows the design algorithm to use

more than one identical section in parallel, up to the specified Maximum
Number of Barrels.
Maximum Number of BarrelsThe maximum number of identical sections

allowed to be used in parallel when the Allow Multiple Barrels? box is
checked.
Section Size Tab: The Section Size tab consists of the following controls:
Limit Section Size?When checked, limits the pipe section height to the
specified Maximum Rise value during the design process.
Maximum RiseThe maximum rise a section height is allowed to be used in

the design when the Limit Section Size? box is checked.
6-593
Automatic Design
Node Tab
This tab lets you specify the design constraints to be used by default for all gravity
structures when performing calculations in design mode. During an automatic design,
the program will adjust the elevations of the pipes adjacent to the structure according
to the structure's matching constraints. The two choices for matching are Inverts and
Crowns. Additionally, the downstream pipe can be offset from the upstream pipe(s) by
a specified amount. This value is called the Matchline Offset. Optionally, the program
supports the design of drop structures. In some situations, drop structures can minimize pipe cover depths while maintaining adequate hydraulic performance.
Inlet Tab
This tab lets you specify the design constraints to be used for all inlets when
performing a calculation run in design mode. During an automatic design, the
program will adjust the length of the inlet in order to meet the design constraints.
For an inlet in sag, the Default In Sag Design Constraints consist of maintaining
the gutter spread and water depth under a given value.
For an inlet on a grade, the Default on Grade Design Constraints consist of

ensuring that at least a given percentage of the gutter flow is intercepted.
Default In Sag Design Constraints Section

This section lets you specify the design constraints to be used for all inlets located in
sag when performing calculations in design mode. During an automatic design, the
program will adjust the length of the inlet in order to meet both design constraints:
Maximum Spread in SagThe maximum allowed spread of water at the inlet,

measured from the curb.
Maximum Depth in SagThe maximum depth of water allowed at the inlet.
Default On Grade Design Constraints

This section lets you specify the design constraints to be used for all inlets located on
a grade when performing a calculation run in design mode. During an automatic
design, the program will adjust the length of the inlet in order to meet a minimum inlet
efficiency, or percentage of gutter flow intercepted by the inlet, that you specify.
6-594
Creating Your Model
Conduit and Inlet Catalog Templates

When performing an Automatic Design, StormCAD suggests only conduit and inlet
types that are contained within the Conduit and Inlet Catalogs. A new project starts
with empty Conduit and Inlet Catalogs. You can populate the Inlet and Conduit Catalogs with pipes and inlets of your choosing, or you can open one of the predefined
Templates we have provided. The templates can be found in the Bentley/StormCAD8/
Templates folder. There is a template for US units and one for SI units.
Warning!
The predefined templates are Read-Only files. Do not modify

the read-only setting on these files.
You may also create new Templates and use those in future projects. To create a new
template, populate the inlet and conduit catalogs with the desired data and save the
project to the template folder. To use the new template, simply open it and save it as a
new file name to use it for a new project.
6-595
Automatic Design
6-596
Chapter
Loading
Click one of the following links to learn how to add loading data to your Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i model:
Types of Loads on page 7-604
Composite Hydrographs on page 7-631
Inflows on page 7-633
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collections on page 7-653
LoadBuilder on page 7-656
Rainfall Derived Infiltration and Inflow (RDII) on page 7-657
Stormwater Flow on page 7-657
For more information, see Specifying a Time of Concentration (Tc) Method for
a Catchment on page 6-369 on page 7-717
Time of Concentration on page 7-717
Loading
The word "loading" is used in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i to describe flow entering the
sewer system. Depending on the type of system, available data and level of detail,
there are numerous ways of loading Bentley SewerGEMS V8i models. Some of the
distinctions relate to whether the system is a combined or sanitary system, whether the
loads are existing with flow data or proposed loads with only land use descriptions,
whether the flow refers to dry weather sanitary flows or wet weather flow.
7-601
Loading
Note:
For more information on loading, see Chapter 6 "Dry weather

wastewater flows" and Chapter 7 "Wet weather wastewater
flows" in the book Wastewater Collection System Modeling and
Design" by Haestad Press.
With the exception of known fixed flows, the loading to the model consists of a table
of flow or pattern values vs. time. The generic word "collection" is used to describe
inputs to Bentley SewerGEMS V8i that are not a single value but are some type of
table. For example, you will see Inflow Collections, which are simply a table of inflow
vs. time.
Methods for Entering Loads

There are several methods for entering loads into Bentley SewerGEMS V8i. In
general, most of the methods described can be applied to any node type element (i.e.
manhole, cross section, catch basin, pond, pressure junction but not outfall). Some
such as stormwater loading must be applied to catchments and conduit infiltration can
only be applied to conduits. They are summarized below and described in more detail
later in this chapter.
Inflow consists of data which may be:
Known constant flow
Hydrograph - flow vs. time
Pattern Load - baseline flow times multiplier
In general, the hydrograph input is used for wet weather events while pattern
loads are used for sanitary flows which repeat from one day to the next. For more
information, see Inflows on page 7-633.
Sanitary loading consists of data which may be
Know constant flow
Hydrograph - flow vs. time
Pattern Load - baseline flow times multiplier
Unit loads - number of units (e.g. houses) times unit load (e.g. flow/house/
day)
Sanitary loads are generally used to describe dry weather contribution to flow
from domestic, commercial and industrial customers. For more information, see
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collections on page 7-653.
7-602
Loading
Load Builder consists of using the LoadBuilder model to place loads on nodes
using ArcGIS functions. Unlike the methods above which are applicable when the
loads are already known for each node, LoadBuilder is used when the loading data
is not yet associated with individual nodes. For example, the data can be in the
form of:
Customer water use billing data
Area-wide flow measurement
Load (e.g. population or land use assigned to polygons) times unit loading
factors (e.g. flow/day/area)
For more information, see LoadBuilder on page 7-656.
Rainfall Derived Infiltration and Inflow in Sanitary Systems (RDII) lets you load
sanitary systems with I/I flow based on flow monitoring data. This usually
involves entering a precipitation event and comparing the predicted catchment
outflow with the model results. You can adjust the catchment parameters to match
the observed outflow using generic unit hydrographs or RTK method. For more
information, see Rainfall Derived Infiltration and Inflow (RDII) on page 7-657.
Stormwater flow can be used to model inflow into a collection system based on
rainfall events and any number of hydrologic models including:
Generic unit hydrographs
SCS unit hydrograph
Modified rational method
SWMM runoff method
Losses (i.e. precipitation not entering runoff) can be modeled using several
methods including:
SCS
Green Ampt
Horton
fLoss
These methods can be used for modeling stormwater collection systems and
combined sewer systems but not sanitary systems because they do not account for
the defects which allow wet weather flow to enter sanitary systems. These
methods can only be applied to catchment elements, not other node elements. For
more information, see Stormwater Flow on page 7-657.
7-603
Loading
Conduit infiltration can be used to model infiltration into pipes along the length of
the pipe. This can be specified as:
Known unit flow based on Length, Area, Diameter-length, or Count.
Hydrograph
Pattern
For more information, see Pipeline Infiltration on page 7-717.

Summary
In general:
Dry weather load can be entered using Inflow, Sanitary Loading and LoadBuilder.
Wet weather flow in sanitary systems can be entered using inflow, RDII or conduit
infiltration.
Wet weather flow in stormwater and combined systems can be entered using
Inflow, Stormwater flow or Conduit infiltration.
Simulating Dry Weather

Sometimes the user may wish to simulate system performance during dry weather
periods. Depending on the model, there are several ways of doing this (unless Hydrographs are explicitly entered).
1. If the model has no catchments, then it is only a dry weather model.
2. If a model has catchments and does not wish to perform any hydrologic calculations, the user must set the Runoff method in all catchments to "None" in order to
simulate a dry weather period.
The user does not need to set up any storm data.
3. If the model has catchments and the catchments have runoff methods associated
with them, the user can set up a storm data with 0.0 cumulative depth of precipitation.
4. The user can also set all catchments to Inactive status in the Active Topology
Alternative and hydrologic calcuations will not be performed.
7-604
Loading
Types of Loads
Within each of the loading methods available in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, there are
several ways to enter (add) data. For example, under the method Inflow for loading
the model, there are three types of inflow - fixed, hydrograph and pattern load. These
loading types may be used by several methods. For example, pattern loading is used
by the Inflow, Sanitary and Pipeline Infiltration methods. The dialogs for each of these
types are the same regardless of the method being used.
7-605
Types of Loads
The following table illustrates which types of loads are available in each method.
Sanitary Load
SCS
SWMM
Modified Rational
RTK Method
Stormwater
Inflow
Unit Load
Pattern Load
Hydrograph
RDII Inflow
Method
Fixed
Unit Hydrograph
Table 7-1: Types of Loads
LoadBuilder *
Conduit infiltration *
*Conduit infiltrations uses fixed flows on a per length or area basis.
Related Topics
Adding Fixed Loads on page 7-607
Hydrograph vs. Pattern Loads on page 7-607
Adding User Defined Hydrographs on page 7-608
Pattern Loads on page 7-610
Unit Sanitary Loading on page 7-622
Adding Fixed Loads

A fixed load can be entered as a:
7-606
Known flow under sanitary loading
Pattern load with the multiplier set to 1
Hydrograph inflow with "fixed" specified
Loading
Related Topics
Hydrograph vs. Pattern Loads

Hydrographs and pattern loads are two distinct ways to describe how flow varies over
time. Ultimately, you can attain the same results using either type but there are some
behavioral and semantic differences that should be noted.
Pattern loads consists of a single average base load and a series of dimensionless
multipliers used to delineate how the load varies over time. A hydrograph, simply, is
a time-discharge series.
Hydrographs are usually applied as wet weather loads, and are generated using hydrologic methods, while patterns are more typically applied to sanitary loads. Pattern
multipliers are usually developed based on flow monitoring data for the system under
consideration. The multipliers are used to account for time-of-day variations in sewer
loads. Usually a handful of patterns are developed (e.g. residential area, commercial
area, large industry) and these patterns are assigned to the appropriate nodes. These
statements represent typical usage of both loading types; they do not represent hard
and fast rules.
During an extended period simulation if the duration of the simulation exceeds the
duration of a pattern then the pattern will repeat itself. If the duration of the simulation exceeds the duration of a hydrograph the last point of the hydrograph will remain
constant for the extent of the remaining time.
The following figure shows the difference between a hydrograph and pattern load.
7-607
Types of Loads
Figure 7-1:
Difference between a Hydrograph and Pattern Load
Related Topics
Adding User Defined Hydrographs

You can directly associate a user-defined unit hydrograph to any node element (e.g.
manhole, catchment, cross section, pressure junction) for runoff calculations.
To add a user defined hydrograph to a catchment:
1. Click a node in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a node
2. In the Runoff section of the Property Editor, select User Defined Hydrograph as
the Runoff Method.
3. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Runoff Hydrograph field. The User
Defined Hydrograph dialog box appears.
4. Click the New button to add a row to the Time vs. Flow table.
5. Enter Time vs. Flow data into the table. Press Enter after typing a value to add a
new row to the table (or click the New button to add a new row).
7-608
Loading
To insert a row at a time in between two other times, simply insert at the bottom of
the table. When you close the table then reopen it, the row will be in the correct
position.
Note:
Time and flow units must be consistent with time and flow units
used throughout the model.
6. Click the Graph button to view a plot of the Time vs. Flow data.
7. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the hydrograph to the Property Editor
for the node.
User Defined Hydrograph Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define Time vs. Flow unit hydrographs.
7-609
Types of Loads
The dialog box contains the time-vs.-flow table and the following buttons:
New
Creates a new row in the hydrograph

table.
Delete

from the hydrograph table.
Report

Graph
Opens a graph window plotting the unit

hydrograph defined by the points in the
table.

Column
Description
Time
Lets you define the hour of the hydrograph point.
Flow
Lets you define the flow for the hydrograph point.
Related Topics
Pattern Loads
A pattern load consists of a base flow and a pattern, which is a set of multipliers used
to adjust base flow over the course of a day (or some other period). Patterns can also
be used with unit loads by assigning a pattern setup for a particular scenario.
For more information on building patterns, see Defining Patterns on page 7-612.
For more information on pattern setups, see Defining Pattern Setups on page 7-616.
7-610
Loading
Related Topics
Working with Patterns

A dynamic analysis is actually a series of Steady State analyses run against time-variable loads such as sewer inflows, demands, or chemical constituents. Patterns allow
you to apply automatic time-variable changes within the system. The most common
application of patterns is for residential or industrial loads. Diurnal curves are patterns
that relate to the changes in loads over the course of the day, reflecting times when
people are using more or less water than average. Most patterns are based on a multiplication factor versus time relationship, whereby a multiplication factor of one represents the base value (which is often the average value).
Using a representative diurnal curve for a residence as illustrated below, we see that
there is a peak in the diurnal curve in the morning as people take showers and prepare
breakfast, another slight peak around noon, and a third peak in the evening as people
arrive home from work and prepare dinner. Throughout the night, the pattern reflects
the relative inactivity of the system, with very low flows compared to the average.
7-611
Types of Loads
Note:
This curve is conceptual and should not be construed as

representative of any particular network.
There are two basic forms for representing a pattern: stepwise and continuous. A stepwise pattern is one that assumes a constant level of usage over a period of time, and
then jumps instantaneously to another level where it remains steady until the next
jump. A continuous pattern is one for which several points in the pattern are known
and sections in between are transitional, resulting in a smoother pattern. For the
continuous pattern in the figure above, the multiplication factor and slope at the start
time and end times are the same. This is a continuity that is recommended for patterns
that repeat.
Because of the finite time steps used for calculations, this software converts continuous patterns into stepwise patterns for use by the algorithms. In other words for a
time step a multiplier is interpolated from the pattern curve. That multiplier is then
used for the duration of the time step, until a new multiplier is selected for the next
time step.
Patterns provide a convenient way to define the time variable aspects of system loads.
Note:
For steady state runs using the GVF-Convex solver, patterns are
ignored and the base flow is loaded as a constant inflow.
Click one of the following links to learn more about working with patterns:
Defining Patterns on page 7-612
Defining Pattern Setups on page 7-616
Defining Patterns
A pattern is a series of time step values, each having an associated multiplier value.
During a dynamic analysis each time step of the simulation uses the multiplier from
the pattern corresponding to that time. If the duration of the simulation is longer than
the pattern, the pattern is repeated. The selected multiplier is applied to any baseline
load that is associated with the pattern.
Patterns must begin and end with the same multiplier value. This is because patterns
will be repeated if the duration of the dynamic analysis is longer than the pattern duration. In other words, the last point in the pattern is really the start point of the pattern's
next cycle.
A dynamic analysis is actually a series of Steady State analyses for which the
boundary conditions of the current time step are calculated from the conditions at the
previous time step. This software will automatically convert a continuous pattern
format to a stepwise format so that the demands and source concentrations remain
constant during a time step.
7-612
Loading
An individual node can support multiple hydraulic demands. Furthermore, each load
can be assigned any hydraulic load pattern. This powerful functionality makes it easy
to combine two or more types of load patterns (such as residential and institutional) at
a single loading node.
To define a pattern:
1. Select Analysis > Patterns or click the Patterns button on the Analysis toolbar.
2. In the Patterns dialog box, click the New button to create a new pattern.
3. On the right side of the dialog box, enter values for Start Time and Starting Multiplier.
4. Select Stepwise or Continuous in the Pattern Type field.
5. In the time step points table, enter values for Time from Start and Multiplier.
The Time from Start for row 1 in the table (the first point in the pattern) must
be greater than zero.
The last point in the pattern must have the same multiplier as the starting
multiplier. This is how the pattern duration is defined, and it ensures an infinitely repeating pattern.
Note:
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i validates your data as you enter it and

displays errors and warnings in the status bar at the bottom of
the Patterns dialog box. Be sure to check this status bar for any
errors or warnings as you enter data.
To delete an existing pattern, select the pattern label in the list pane, then click
the Delete button.
To rename an existing pattern, select the pattern label in the list pane, then
click the Rename button and type the new name of the pattern.
To view a report on an existing pattern, select the pattern label in the list pane,
then click the Report button.
To view a plot of a pattern, select the pattern label in the list pane, then click
the Graph button above the time step points table.
To delete a row from the time step points table, select the row then click the
Delete button above the table.
7. Click Close.
Patterns Dialog Box

You create, edit, and delete patterns in the Patterns dialog box. The dialog box
contains a list pane on the left and several input fields and a table on the right:
7-613
Types of Loads
The dialog box contains the following controls above the list pane:
New
Creates a new pattern in the list pane.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted pattern.
Rename

pattern.
Report

the currently highlighted pattern.
The following fields and controls appear on the right side of the dialog box:
7-614
Start Time
The first time step in the pattern.
Starting Multiplier
The multiplier value of the first time step point in

your pattern. Any real number can be used for this
multiplier (it does not have to be 1.0).
Pattern Type
Lets you select the type of pattern you want to

create:
StepwiseThe multiplier values are considered to be the average value for the interval
between the specified time and the next time.
Patterns using this format will have a "staircase" appearance. Multipliers are set at the
specified time and held constant until the next
point in the pattern.
ContinuousThe multipliers are considered

to be the instantaneous values at a particular
time. Patterns using this format will have a
"curvilinear" appearance. Multipliers are set at
the specified time, and are linearly increased
or decreased to the next point in the pattern.
Loading
The following controls are located above the time step points table on the right:
New
Creates a new row in the time step points

table.
Delete

from the time step points table.
Graph
Displays a graph of a pattern that

represents the multiplier variable of the
pattern over time.
The time step points table contains the following columns:

Column
Description
Time from Start
Lets you specify the amount of time from the Start

Time of the pattern to the time step point being
defined.
Multiplier
Lets you specify the multiplier value associated

with the time step point.
Related Topic
Working with Patterns on page 7-611
Defining Pattern Setups on page 7-616
Pattern Curve Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define pattern curves for the Patterns Engineering Library.
7-615
Types of Loads
The following buttons are located above the time step points table on the left:
New
Creates a new row in the time step points

table.
Delete

from the time step points table.
The time step points table contains the following columns:

Column
Description
Time from Start

defined.
Multiplier
Lets you specify the multiplier value associated

Defining Pattern Setups

A pattern setup allows you to match unit sanitary (dry weather) loads with appropriate
loading patterns. A pattern setup is associated with each scenario as specified in the
Calculation Options Manager. Each scenario can use a different pattern setup, thus
allowing you to model different loading alternatives for different extended period
simulations.
Note:
You must have at least one unit sanitary (dry weather) load set
up in your model and at least one pattern defined before you can
define a pattern setup.
To define a pattern setup:

1. Define at least one unit sanitary (dry weather) load in your current project. For
more information, see Adding Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads on page 7624.
2. Define at least one pattern in your current project. For more information, see
Defining Patterns on page 7-612.
3. Select Analysis > Pattern Setups or click the Pattern Setups button on the Analysis toolbar.
4. In the Pattern Setups dialog box, click the New button to create a new pattern
setup.
7-616
Loading
5. The table on the right side of the dialog box displays all of the unit sanitary (dry
weather) loads currently associated with your current project. For each unit load
in the table, select an existing pattern from the Setup Pattern submenu.
To delete an existing pattern setup, select the pattern setup label in the list
pane, then click the Delete button.
To rename an existing pattern setup, select the pattern setup label in the list
pane, then click the Rename button and type the new name of the pattern
setup.
To view a report on an existing pattern setup, select the pattern setup label in
the list pane, then click the Report button.
7. Click Close.
Pattern Setups Dialog Box

The Pattern Setups dialog box lets you define a list of pattern setups. The dialog box
contains a list pane on the left and a table on the right:
7-617
Types of Loads
The dialog box contains the following controls above the list pane:
New
Creates a new pattern setup in the list pane.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted pattern

setup.
Rename

pattern setup.
Report

the currently highlighted pattern setup.
The right side of the dialog contains a table with the following fields:
Column
Description
Unit Load
Each row displays a unit sanitary (dry weather)

load in the current project.
Set Pattern
Lets you select an existing pattern to apply to the

unit load.
Related Topics
Defining Patterns on page 7-612
Transient Valve Curve Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define Transient Valve pattern curves for the Patterns Engineering Library.
7-618
Loading
The following buttons are located above the table on the left:
New
Delete

from the table.

Column
Description
Time from Start

defined.
Relative Closure
Lets you specify the relative closure percentage

associated with the time step point.
Transient Pump Curve Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define Transient Pump pattern curves for the Patterns Engineering Library.
7-619
Types of Loads
New
Delete

from the table.

Column
Description
Time from Start

defined.
Relative Speed
Multiplier
Lets you specify the relative speed multiplier

value associated with the time step point.
Transient Turbine Curve Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define Transient Turbine pattern curves for the Patterns
7-620
Loading
New
Delete

from the table.

Column
Description
Time from Start

defined.
Relative Gate Opening
Lets you specify the relative gate opening

percentage associated with the time step point.
Valve Relative Closure Curve Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define Valve Relative Closure pattern curves for the Patterns
7-621
Types of Loads
New
Delete

from the table.

Column
Description
Time from Start

defined.
Relative Closure
Lets you specify the relative closure associated

Unit Sanitary Loading

A unit loading consists of a unit (person, building, area) multiplied by a unit load (gal/
capita/day, litres/sq m/day, cfs/acre). The units are assigned to individual nodes
elements (manholes, pressure junctions) while the unit loads are created using the Unit
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads dialog box.
Unit loads are calculated as: Load (flow Units) = Unit load (flow/number) x number
of Loading units. For example: 100 gallons/capita/day x 40 people = 4000 gallons per
day.
If the unit loads are not assigned to nodes but to polygons in a GIS, then it is best to
use LoadBuilder to import the loads. For more information, see LoadBuilder on
page 7-656.
For more information, see Adding Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads on page 7624 and Types of Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads on page 7-623.
Unit loads correspond to a baseline load and time of day patterns can be assigned to
scenarios. For more information, see Defining Pattern Setups on page 7-616.
Default unit load information is not stored with the project but with a library that can
be shared between projects. Default values are provided in the library called "HMI
Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads.xml"
7-622
Loading
Related Topics
Types of Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads

The following types of unit sanitary loads are supported in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i:
Population-based
The most common way of specifying sanitary loads to a sewer system is to make them
proportional to the contributing population. Population-based unit sanitary loads
define loads as a function of adjusted contributing population. You can select the
population loading units that will be used and the unit load per population unit. For
example, the unit sanitary load, Home (Average), specifies Resident as the population
loading unit, and 280 l/d per Resident as the unit load per population unit.
Non-population-based
Non-population-based unit sanitary loads can be area-based (function of contributing
area), discharge-based (function of direct discharge), or count-based (function of a
user-defined count).
Area-based
Area-based unit sanitary loads are commonly used to specify industrial loads and
steady inflows. Use these unit sanitary loads whenever your load is specified as a
function of contributing area. For example, you may use "area residential" (in hectare)
as a property of each node and 400 L/day/hectare as the unit loading.
Discharge-based
Discharge-based unit sanitary loads are used to directly specify loads without specifying them on the basis of some other count, such as population or area.
There are two general ways to use discharge based loads:
7-623
Types of Loads
Specify 1.0 discharge unit (e.g. l/day, gpd, cfs, etc.) as the unit load. Then, when
using the load, specify the total desired load for the loading unit count. For
example, you can create a load called Liter per Day whose loading unit type is
Discharge, loading unit is l/day, and unit load is 1.0. When you use this load at a
manhole, a wet well, or a pressure junction, you specify 50.0 as the loading unit
count. This yields a base load of 50 l/day.
Specify total desired load as the unit load. Then, when using the load, only
specify 1.0 as the loading unit count. For example, you can create a load called
Industry XYZ whose loading unit type is Discharge, loading unit is l/day, and unit
load is 2000.0. When you use this load at the manhole, wet well, or pressure junction, you would specify 1.0 as the loading unit count. This yields a base load of
2000 l/day.
In other words, you can specify a unit load of 1.0 in the Unit Sanitary Load Library
and determine the total load at each node through the loading unit count, or you can
specify the total load in the Unit Sanitary Load Library and then have a loading unit
count of 1.0.
Count-based
Count-based unit sanitary loads should be used for any load that is not area, population, nor discharge-based. These loads allow you to specify any loading unit such as
loading per vehicle, machine, or anything else.
Loading units in user-defined counts are treated only as labels. Conversion between
these units is always 1 to 1.
Related Topic
Adding Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i defines unit sanitary loads in editable Engineering
Libraries, allowing you to edit predefined unit sanitary loads and insert new ones. A
unit sanitary load is used to specify loads to a sewer system for a user-selected loading
unit. Unit sanitary loads can be either population-based or non-population-based.
Population-based unit sanitary loads specify a load to the sewer system as a function
of the contributing population. Non-population-based loads specify loads based on
service area, discharge, or user-defined counts.
You add unit sanitary loads using the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads dialog box or
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Engineering Libraries.
7-624
Loading
To add a unit sanitary (dry weather) load:
1. Select Component > Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads, or click the Unit
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads button on the Components toolbar.
2. In the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads dialog box, click the New button, then
select the type of unit sanitary load you want to create from the submenu (Area,
Count, Discharge, or Population).
3. On the Unit Sanitary Load tab, enter the following data:
For area-based loads, select the desired unit from the Area Unit drop-down
menu.
For discharge-based loads, select the desired unit from the Discharge Units
drop down menu.
For count-based loads, type the base unit used to define the count-based load
in the Count Load Unit field. You can specify any unit you want, such as
loading per vehicle, machine, or anything else.
For population-based loads, select the desired unit from the Population Units
drop-down menu.
Type the amount of flow contributed per loading unit in the Unit Load field.
Type the count of adjusted population per loading unit in the Population
Equivalent field. For area based loads, this is essentially a population density,
or population per unit area.
Check the Report Adjusted Population check box to report the adjusted population with other populations. If you clear this check box, the adjusted population will not be reported as part of the total population.
4. You can save your new load in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Engineering Libraries
for future use. To do this, perform these steps:
The Engineering Libraries dialog box appears.
sanitary load.
To delete a load, select the load label then click Delete.
7-625
Types of Loads
To rename an load, select the load label you want to rename, click Rename,
then type the new name for the load.
To view a report on a load, select the load label for which you want a report
then click Report.
6. Click Close to close the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads dialog box.
To add a unit sanitary load in the Engineering Library:
1. Select Components > Engineering Libraries to display the Engineering
Libraries dialog box.
2. Click the plus sign next to the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads Library to
expand the list of items (categories and folders) included in that library. This
library includes a category entitled Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads.
Note:
You can add new items to a category or a folder, add new folders
to categories, and add new categories to libraries. For more
information, see Engineering Libraries on page 6-440.
3. Right-click the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads category (or a different category or folder) and select New Item.
4. Define the new unit sanitary load in the Editor pane on the right as described in
the following steps:
a. Type the unit load in the Unit Load field.
b. Select the load type from the Loading Unit Type drop-down (Area Based,
Count Based, Discharge Based, or Population Based).
c. Select the load units from the Sanitary Unit Load Units drop-down. For countbased loads, you can specify any unit you want, such as loading per vehicle or
machine.
d. For area-, count-, and discharge-based loads, type the count of adjusted population per loading unit in the Pop.Equivalent (Capita) field. For area based
loads, this is essentially a population density, or population per unit area.
e. For area-, count-, and discharge-based loads, select True from the Report
Adjusted Population drop down to report the adjusted population with other
populations. Select False if you dont want to report the adjusted population
as part of total population.
5. Click Close. Your new unit sanitary load is now part of the Engineering Libraries
and can be re-used any time.
7-626
Loading
Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Load Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to create unit sanitary (dry weather) loads. There are two
sections: the list pane on the left and the tab section on the right. The list pane lets you
create, edit, and delete unit sanitary loads and the tab section contains entry fields for
each type of unit sanitary load.
7-627
Types of Loads
The following controls are available in the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Load dialog
box:
New
7-628
Creates a new unit sanitary load that uses

an automatically created label.
AreaAdds a new area-based unit

sanitary load to the list pane. An areabased unit sanitary load is a function of
contributing service area.
CountAdds a new count-based unit

sanitary load. A count-based unit sanitary load is a function of a user-defined
count. Count-based unit sanitary loads
should be used for any load that is not
area-, discharge-, or population-based.
DischargeAdds a new dischargebased unit sanitary load. A dischargebased unit sanitary load is a function of
direct discharge.
PopulationAdds a new populationbased unit sanitary load. A populationbased unit sanitary load is a function of
adjusted contributing population.
Loading
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted unit

sanitary load.
Rename

unit sanitary load.
Report

the currently highlighted unit sanitary load.
Synchronization
Options

Browse Engineering Library

Opens the Engineering Library
manager dialog, allowing you to
browse the Unit Sanitary (Dry
Weather) Load Engineering Libraries.
Synchronize From LibraryLets you

update a set of unit sanitary loads
previously imported from a Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Load Engineering
Library. The updates reflect changes
that have been made to the library
since it was imported.
Synchronize To LibraryLets you

update an existing Unit Sanitary (Dry
Weather) Load Engineering Library
using current unit sanitary loads that
were initially imported but have since
been modified.
Import From LibraryLets you

import a unit sanitary load from an
existing Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather)
Load Engineering Library.
Export To LibraryLets you export

the current unit sanitary load to an
existing Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather)
Load Engineering Library.
Connect to LibraryOpens the Engineering Library, allowing you to select

a library to synchronize with the
current entry.
7-629
Types of Loads
Unit Sanitary Load Tab
7-630
Area Unit
Lets you specify the base unit used to define the

area-based load.
Unit Load
Lets you specify the amount of flow contributed

per loading unit.
Population Equivalent
Lets you specify the count of adjusted population

per loading unit. For area based loads, this is
essentially a population density, or population per
unit area. The Population equivalent field is
optional and simply converts area or count into
equivalent popultion, based on the Population
equivalent value.
Report Adjusted
Population
If this option is toggled ON, the adjusted

population will be reported with other
populations. If the option is OFF, adjusted
population will be not be reported as part of the
total population.
Count Load Unit

count-based load. You can specify any unit you
want, such as loading per vehicle, machine, or
anything else.
Discharge Units

discharge-based load.
Population Units

unit load.
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the unit

sanitary load that is currently highlighted in the
list pane. If the load is derived from an
can be found here. If the load was created
indicating that the pump was not derived from a
library entry.
Loading
Notes Tab

the currently highlighted defnition.
Composite Hydrographs
A composite hydrograph graphs the total flow over time from multiple defined fixed/
unit loads, hydrographs, and pattern loads.
You can access the composite hydrograph and its corresponding data table from the
Inflow Collection dialog boxand the Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor
dialog box, both of which are available from the Property Editor for selected elements.
For example, a manhole has properties for Inflow Collection and Sanitary Loading.
This graph is dynamic and is generated automatically each time it is requested.
The time step in a composite hydrograph is determined by going from time 0 to the
Duration divided by Calculation Time Step. You can define the Duration and Calculation Time Step values in the Calculation Options Manager. For more information, see
Calculation Options Manager on page 8-735.
Related Topics:
Composite Hydrograph Window on page 7-631
Composite Hydrograph Data Table Window on page 7-632
Composite Hydrograph Window

This window displays the composite hydrograph from multiple fixed/unit loads,
hydrographs, and pattern loads defined in either the Inflow Collection dialog box or
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor dialog box.
You access the Composite Hydrograph window by clicking the Graph button in the
Inflow Collection dialog box or Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor dialog
box. If you have only one load or hydrograph defined, the graph displays the data for
that single load or hydrograph.
The Composite Hydrograph window contains the following button:
Chart Settings
Opens the Chart Options dialog box,

allowing you to change graph display
settings.
7-631
Composite Hydrographs
Related Topics:
Composite Hydrograph Data Table Window on page 7-632
Composite Hydrograph Data Table Window

This window displays a table of all the data points in a composite hydrograph from
multiple fixed/unit loads, hydrographs, and pattern loads defined in either the Inflow
Collection dialog box or Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor dialog box.
The data table displays the same data used in the composite hydrograph in numerical
form. The table contains two columns: the first column displays the time steps and the
second column displays the flows. The values in this table can not be edited.
You access the Data Table window by clicking the Data Table button in the Inflow
Collection dialog box or Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor dialog box. If
you have only one load or hydrograph defined, the Data Table displays the data for
that single load or hydrograph.
The Composite Hydrograph Data Table window contains the following buttons:
Copy
Copies the contents of the data table to the

Windows clipboard. You can then paste the
data into a different application or document.
Paste
Pastes the contents of the Windows clipboard

into the data table. This is useful if youve
got the data defined in a different document
or application and want to simply copy and
paste it into a composite hydrograph.
Report

dialog box.
Related Topics:
7-632
Composite Hydrograph Window on page 7-631
Loading
Inflows
The word "inflow" is used in two ways in sewer modeling. It is used first to describe
wet weather flows to sewer systems that do not infiltrate through the ground and it is
used in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i to describe any flow which enters a node element
whether it is a fixed inflow, hydrograph or pattern load. The type of load available
depends on the element type. The descriptions below, refer to the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i definition of inflow.
Inflows can be specified at any node element except a pond outlet and an outfall.
Inflows are not a single value but are a collection (i.e. a table of flow vs. time) and as
such must be specified from Property Editor for an element. For more information, see
Defining Inflow Collections on page 7-639.
Inflow hydrographs are hydrographs with flow units and are not unit hydrographs. For
more information, see What is the Difference Between a User Defined Unit
Hydrograph and a Hydrograph Entered in the Inflow Collection Editor? on page 6419.
Flow Definitions for Node Elements

This topic describes the following flow results:
Flow (Total In) on page 7-633
Flow (Total Out) on page 7-634
Flow (Wet Weather Inflow) on page 7-635
Flow (To Inlet) on page 7-636
Flow (Local In) on page 7-636
Flow (Total In)

Flow (Total In) is the sum of all flows entering a node. This includes flows from:
Incoming from Adjacent Links (Locally Added)
Inflow (Wet) Collection
Sanitary Loads Collection
Captured Runoff
Captured Additional Carryover (Rational Only)
Known Flow (Rational and Convex)
Additional Flow (Rational Only)
7-633
Inflows
This result attribute is reported for the following element types:
Manhole
Catch Basin
Pond
Wet Well
Junction Chamber
Cross Section
And is calculated when using the following solvers:
Explicit (SWMM Solvers)
GVF-Convex (SewerCAD)
GVF-Rational (StormCAD)
Implicit (SewerGEMS Dynamic Wave)

Note:
When using the SewerCAD GVF-Convex solver, the nodes' Flow

(Total In) is only the sum of the upstream pipes' flow, and does
not include the local Inflow and Sanitary Inflow.
Flow (Total Out)

Flow (Total Out) is the sum of all flows:
exiting the node through links,
exiting the system at the outfall,
exiting the catchment as runoff flow.
Excluding all flow:
bypassed into downstream gutters,
lost at the node because of flooding.
7-634
Manhole
Catch Basin
Pond
Wet Well
Junction Chamber
Loading
Outfall
Cross Section
Catchment
GVF-Rational (StormCAD)
Flow (Wet Weather Inflow)

Flow (Wet Weather Inflow) is the flows to the inlet of the node generated from the
Inflow (Wet) Collection.
For Catch Basins, the Flow (Inflow Wet Collection) is not all necessarily captured by
the inlet of the node. Some of it could be bypassed depending on the structure of the
inlet.
Flow (Wet Weather Inflow) excludes catchment flow attached to the node.
Manhole
Catch Basin
Pond
Wet Well
Cross Section
Pressure Junction
Outfall
Flow (To Inlet)

Flow (To Inlet) is the total flow to the inlet of a node from the surface.
7-635
Inflows
It includes:
Inflow (Wet) Collection
Flow from upstream catchments.
Flow from bypass gutters.
Flow (To Inlet) is reported only for Catch Basin elements.

Flow (Local In)

Flow (Local In) is the sum total of all flows injected locally at the node at the current
time step.
This includes:
Captured Inflow Wet Collection
Sanitary Collection
Known Flows (Rational, Convex)
Additional Flow (Rational)
Captured Catchment Flow
7-636
Loading
Note:
The Implicit (SewerGEMS Dynamic Wave) and Explicit (SWMM)

solvers support dry weather (sanitary) inflows; it is treated as
additional flow and shown as additional flow in the results.
The GVF-Rational (StormCAD) solver does not support dry
weather (sanitary) inflows; a warning is given that sanitary
inflows are ignored by the solver.
Flow Diagrams
The following diagram defines various flows.
The values that appear in the property grid for the illustration are
Flow (total in) = 20 (conduits+catchment+sanitary+inflow)
Flow (total out) = 20 (conduits)
Flow (local from inflow collection) = 1 (inflow hydrograph)
Flow (local in) = 1 + 2 + 3 (capture + sanitary)
7-637
Inflows
Another common use case is that of a catch basin where less that all of the flow is
captured by the inlet. Given the flow in the illustration below and the assumption that
the downstream conduit is not backing up and overflowing the catch basin, the
following flows are defined:
The values that appear in the property grid for the catch basin are
Flow (Total in) = 37 (conduit in+capture+sanitary)
Flow (Local surface) = 18 (catchment+gutter+inflow collection)
Flow (Total out) = 37 (sum - gutter out))
Flow (Local in) = 17 (capture + sanitary)
Flow (Local from inflow collection) = 3 (inflow)
Flow (Captured) = 0.667 (5+3+10) (flow to inlet times capture fraction)
Flow (Overflow) = 0
For a more detailed description of flows at catch basins, see Location of Flows on
page 14-1139.
7-638
Loading
Defining Inflow Collections

You can define an inflow collection for any node element in SewerGEMS V8i. An
inflow collection can contain any combination of fixed, hydrograph, or pattern
inflows.
To define an inflow collection:
1. Click a node element in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a
node element and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Inflow Collection section of the Property Editor, click the Ellipses (...)
button. The Inflow Collection Editor appears.
3. Click the New button, then select the type of inflow you want to create from the
submenu (Fixed Inflow, Hydrograph Inflow, Pattern Inflow).
4. For a Hydrograph Inflow, enter the data points in the hydrograph table. For Fixed
and Pattern Inflows, enter the data in the appropriate fields.
Note:
For a hydrograph, if the last time in the table is less than the total
simulation time, the simulation time and last flow will be
appended to the hydrograph table.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each inflow you want to add to the collection.
6. Click the Composite Hydrograph button to see a graph of the composite
hydrograph.
7. Click the Composite Hydrograph Data Table button to see a tabular view of all
the data points in the composite hydrograph.
8. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the collection data to the Property
Editor.
Inflow Collection Editor

This dialog box lets you define fixed loads, hydrograph loads, and pattern inflows for
any node element. A node may have any combination of fixed loads, hydrograph
loads, and pattern inflows.
The dialog box contains an Inflow list pane and the following controls:
7-639
Inflows
New

options:
Fixed InflowAdds a new Fixed Load

inflow to the Inflow list pane.
Hydrograph InflowAdds a new

Hydrograph inflow to the Inflow list pane.
7-640
Delete
Lets you delete the currently highlighted

load.
Report

dialog box.
Composite
Graph
Opens a graph window plotting a curve of a

selected single sanitary load or the composite
hydrograph of all loads.
Composite
Hydrograph
Opens a window listing all the data points in

the curve of a selected single sanitary load or
in the composite hydrograph of all loads.
Loading
The Inflow Collection Editor also contains the following controls:
Hydrograph Table
Lets you define the hydrograph by entering Time

vs. Flow points. This table is available only when
a Hydrograph Load inflow is highlighted in the
Inflow list pane. If the last time in the table is less
than the total simulation time, the simulation time
and last flow will be appended to the hydrograph
table.
Fixed Load
Lets you define a fixed load value. This field is

available only when a Fixed Load inflow is
highlighted in the Inflow list pane. Set the fixed
flow that affects the manhole.
Base Inflow
The average inflow over the duration of the

simulation.
Inflow Pattern
Lets you select the pattern for the selected pattern

inflow. Patterns are selected, edited, and created in
the Pattern Manager, which you access by clicking
the ellipsis (...) button next to this field.
Inflow Control Center

The Inflow Control Center is an editor for manipulating all the inflows in your model.
Using the Inflow Control Center, you can add new inflows, delete existing inflows, or
modify the values for existing inflows using standard SQL select and update queries.
The Inflow Control Center provides demand editing capabilities which can:
open on all inflow nodes, or subset of inflow nodes,
sort and filter based on inflow criteria,
7-641
Inflows
add, edit, and delete individual inflows,
globally edit inflows.
The Inflow Control Center consists of a pane consisting of tabs for each element type
that list all of the inflows for all of the elements in the model and a pane that displays
Hydrograph Load collections for the currently highlighted element.
It also contains the following controls:
7-642
Loading
New
Clicking the New button opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
Add Fixed Load to ElementAdds a new Fixed Load to the element

currently selected in the list pane.
Add Hydrograph Load to ElementAdds a new Hydrograph Load to

the element currently selected in the list pane.
Add Pattern Load to ElementAdds a new pattern load to the

element currently selected in the list pane.
Add InflowsReturn the view to the drawing pane, allowing you to

select an element from the drawing. After an element has been
selected, the Apply Inflow Type to Selection dialog opens, allowing
you to enter a Fixed or Hydrograph Load to the element you selected.
Initialize Fixed Loads for All ElementsAdds a Fixed Load to each

element of the current type in the model that does not currently have
an inflow defined. The loads added by this command have an initial
value of 0.0.
Initialize Hydrograph Loads for All ElementsAdds a Hydrograph

Load to each element of the current type in the model that does not
currently have an inflow defined. The hydrographs added by this
command are initially blank.
Initialize Pattern Load for All ElementsAdds a Pattern Load to each

element of the current type in the model that does not currently have
an inflow defined. The loads added by this command have an initial
value of 0.0.
Initialize Fixed Load for SelectionAdds a Fixed Load to each

element that is currently selected in the list pane that does not
currently have an inflow defined. The loads added by this command
have an initial value of 0.0.
Initialize Hydrograph Load for SelectionAdds a Hydrograph Load to

each element that is currently selected in the list pane that does not
currently have an inflow defined. The hydrographs added by this
command are initially blank.
Initialize Pattern Load for SelectionAdds a Pattern Load to each

element that is currently selected in the list pane that does not
currently have an inflow defined.The loads added by this command
have an initial value of 0.0.
Note:
You can only use one type of Initialize operation

in any given element. For example, if you
perform an Initialize Fixed Loads for All
Elements operation, you will not then be able to
then perform an Initialize Hydrograph Loads for
All Elements on the model.
If you wish to add another inflow of a different
type than the one that was Initialized, you must
do so for each individual element.
Delete
Deletes the currently selected row from the list. Delete commands can not
be undone.
Report
Opens a report containing the inflow information displayed in each tab of

the list pane.
Create or Add to
a Selection Set
Clicking this button opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
Create Selection SetCreates a new selection set

consisting of the currently highlighted elements.
Add to Selection SetAdds the currently selected elements

to an existing selection set.
Remove from Selection SetRemoves the currently

selected elements from an existing selection set.
7-643
Inflows
Zoom To
Centers the drawing pane view on the currently selected element.
Find
Opens the Find Element dialog, allowing you to search for a

specific element.
Options

commands:
Help
SortOpens a submenu containing the following commands:
CustomOpens the Custom Sort dialog, allowing you to create

a custom sort method.
ResetChanges the sort method from the currently used

method to the default.
FilterOpens a submenu containing the following commands:
Current SelectionFilters out all elements except the ones

that are currently selected in the drawing pane.
CustomOpens the Filter dialog, allowing you to define a

custom filter.
ResetResets the active filter to the default.
Apply Sort/FilterIf a sort and/or filter has been defined, this

command applies them.
Apply Inflow Type to Selection Dialog

This dialog allows you to assign an inflow to the currently selected element or
elements. The dialog appears after you have used the Add Inflows command in the
Inflow Control Center. To add an inflow, choose the inflow type, then enter inflow
data and click OK for a Fixed Inflow or just click OK for a Hydrograph Inflow. If a
Hydrograph Inflow is selected, the hydrograph must then be defined in the hydrograph
pane of the Inflow Control Center.
7-644
Loading
Sanitary Load Control Center
The Sanitary Load Control Center consists of a pane consisting of tabs for each
element type that list all of the loads for all of the elements in the model and a pane
that displays Hydrograph Load collections for the currently highlighted element,
along with the following controls:
7-645
Inflows
7-646
Loading
New
Clicking the New button opens a submenu containing the

following commands:
Add Unit Load to ElementAdds a new Unit Load to the

element currently selected in the list pane.
Add Sanitary Hydrograph to ElementAdds a new sanitary

hydrograph to the element currently selected in the list pane.
Add Pattern Load to ElementAdds a new pattern load to

the element currently selected in the list pane.
Add Sanitary LoadsReturn the view to the drawing pane,

allowing you to select an element from the drawing. After an
element has been selected, the Apply Sanitary Load to
Selection dialog opens, allowing you to enter a Sanitary
Hydrograph, Unit Load, or Pattern Load to the element you
selected.
Initialize Unit Loads for All ElementsAdds a Unit Load to

each element of the current type in the model that does not
currently have an inflow defined. The loads added by this
command have an initial value of 0.0.
Initialize Hydrograph Loads for All ElementsAdds a

Hydrograph Load to each element of the current type in the
model that does not currently have an inflow defined. The
hydrographs added by this command are initially blank.
Initialize Pattern Load for All ElementsAdds a Pattern Load

to each element of the current type in the model that does
not currently have an inflow defined. The loads added by this
Initialize Unit Loads for SelectionAdds a Unit Load to each

element that is currently selected in the list pane that does
not currently have an inflow defined. The loads added by this
Initialize Hydrograph Load for SelectionAdds a

Hydrograph Load to each element that is currently selected
in the list pane that does not currently have an inflow defined.
The hydrographs added by this command are initially blank.
Initialize Pattern Load for SelectionAdds a Pattern Load to

each element that is currently selected in the list pane that
does not currently have an inflow defined.The loads added
by this command have an initial value of 0.0.
Note:
You can only use one type of Initialize

operation for any given element. For
example, if you perform an Initialize
Hydrograph Loads for All Elements
operation, you will not then be able to
then perform an Initialize Pattern Load for
All Elements on the model.
If you wish to add another load of a
different type than the one that was
Initialized, you must do so for each
individual element.
Delete
Deletes the currently selected row from the list. Delete commands
can not be undone.
7-647
Inflows
Report
Opens a report containing the load information displayed in each

tab of the list pane.
Create or Add
to a Selection
Set

commands:
Create Selection SetCreates a new selection set

consisting of the currently highlighted elements.
Add to Selection SetAdds the currently selected elements

to an existing selection set.
Remove from Selection SetRemoves the currently

selected elements from an existing selection set.
Zoom To
Centers the drawing pane view on the currently selected element.
Find
Opens the Find Element dialog, allowing you to search for a

specific element.
Options

commands:
Help
7-648
SortOpens a submenu containing the following commands:
CustomOpens the Custom Sort dialog, allowing you to create

a custom sort method.
ResetChanges the sort method from the currently used

method to the default.
FilterOpens a submenu containing the following commands:
Current SelectionFilters out all elements except the ones

that are currently selected in the drawing pane.
CustomOpens the Filter dialog, allowing you to define a

custom filter.
ResetResets the active filter to the default.
Apply Sort/FilterIf a sort and/or filter has been defined, this

command applies them.
Loading
Apply Sanitary Load to Selection Dialog

This dialog allows you to assign a sanitary load to the currently selected element or
elements. The dialog appears after you have used the Add Sanitary Loads command in
the Sanitary Load Control Center. To add a load, choose the load type, then enter load
data and click OK for a Sanitary Unit Load or Sanitary Pattern Load. Click OK for a
Sanitary Hydrograph. If a Sanitary Hydrograph is selected, the hydrograph must then
be defined in the hydrograph pane of the Sanitary Load Control Center.
Defining CN Area Collections for Catchments

SewerGEMS V8i lets you define infiltration for a catchment based on CN (SCS Curve
Number) and Area data that you specify. You define and save this data in a CN Area
collection.
In the SCS and EPA-SWMM methods in SewerGEMS V8i, the sub-basin runoff is
defined solely by the CN input for each watershed. The CN Area Collection dialog
box automatically computes weighted CN values as a function of soil hydrologic class
and cover characteristics, based on the CN Engineering Library entries that you select
when you create a CN Area collection.
Note:
The USDA has classified its soil types into four hydrologic soil
groups. For a complete description of the CN values for various
land uses and cover characteristics for each soil classification,
see The Runoff Curve Number on page 14-1228.
To define a CN Area collection for a catchment:

2. In the Runoff section of the Property Editor, select Unit Hydrograph as the
Runoff Method. The Loss Method field becomes available.
3. Select SCS CN as the Loss Method. the SCS CN field becomes available.
4. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the SCS CN field. The CN Area Collection
dialog box appears.
5. Type a description for the collection in the Description field, or click the Ellipses
(...) button to display the CN Libraries in the Engineering Libraries.
7-649
Inflows
6. Click the plus signs to expand the list of items in the CN Libraries until you find
the CN Value for the soil hydrologic class and cover characteristics that you want
to use.
7. Click Select to close the Engineering Libraries dialog box and add the CN Value
to the table in the CN Area Collection dialog box.
8. SewerGEMS V8i automatically fills in the values for SCS CN and Area. Type
values for Percent Connected Impervious Area and Percent Unconnected Impervious Area.
Note:
You can change the SCS CN value by clicking the Ellipses (...)
button next to the SCS CN field, then selecting a different CN
Value from the CN Engineering Libraries.
9. Repeat Steps 5 - 8 for each item you want to add to the CN Area collection.
10. Click OK.
7-650
Loading
CN Area Collection Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you define infiltration based on Cn and Area data. The dialog box
contains the Cn-Area table and the following buttons:
New
Creates a new row in the cn-area table.
Delete

from the cn-area table.
Report


Column
Description
Description
Lets you enter a description for the catchment.
CN
Lets you define the Cn value for the catchment.
Area
Lets you define the area for the catchment.
Percent Connected
Impervious Area
This field allows you to enter the percent

connected impervious area.
This value represents the percentage of the area
(for the current line of data) that contains directly
connected impervious cover. Precipitation that
falls on these types of impervious areas flow to the
outfall point without ever flowing over pervious
cover areas.
An adjustment to the Cn for this line of data is
made based on the % connected impervious areas
(0% yields no adjustment).
An example sequence of directly connected
impervious areas are rainfall drops onto a concrete
driveway, driveway drains to a paved gutter, gutter
drains into a storm sewer, and storm sewer into a
detention pond.
7-651
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collections
Column
Description
Percent Unconnected
Impervious Area
Enter the percent unconnected impervious area.

(for the current line of data) that contains
unconnected impervious cover. Precipitation
falling on these types of impervious areas
eventually flows over pervious areas before
reaching the outfall.
made based on the % unconnected impervious
areas (0% yields no adjustment).
An example sequence of directly unconnected
impervious areas are rainfall drops onto a paved
tennis court at a grassed park, water sheet flowing
across a paved tennis court, water flowing off the
tennis court onto a grass field in a park (there are
no inlet drains on the court), and some of the water
then being absorbed into the soil.
Related Topics
Inflows on page 7-633

You can define a sanitary (dry weather) flow collection for any node element in your
model. A sanitary flow collection can contain any combination of hydrograph, unit, or
pattern loads.
To define a sanitary (dry weather) flow collection:
1. Click an element in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click an
element and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Sanitary Loads section of the Property Editor, click the Ellipses (...) button.
The Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor appears.
3. Click the New button, then select the type of sanitary load you want to create from
the submenu (Hydrograph - Flow vs. Time, Unit Load - Unit Type and Count, or
Pattern Load - Base Flow and Pattern).
4. For a Hydrograph, enter the data points in the hydrograph table. For Unit and
Pattern Loads, enter the data in the appropriate fields.
7-652
Loading
Note:
For a hydrograph, if the last time in the table is less than the total
simulation time, the simulation time and last flow will be
appended to the hydrograph table.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each load you want to add to the collection.
6. Click the Composite Hydrograph button to see a graph of the composite
hydrograph.
7. Click the Composite Hydrograph Data Table button to see a tabular view of all
the data points in the composite hydrograph.
8. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the collection data to the Property
Editor.
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor

This dialog box lets you define collections of sanitary (dry weather) loads for the
selected element in your model. Sanitary loads correspond to loads produced by residential, commercial, recreational, and industrial activity. A sanitary load represents
the base load to the sewer system.
7-653

The dialog box contains a list pane and the following controls:
New

options:
Hydrograph - Flow vs. TimeAdds a

new hydrograph load to the list pane.
This is a flow vs. time distribution.
Unit Load - Unit Type and Count

Adds a new unit load to the list pane.
Unit Type refers to the type of Unit Load
and Count refers to the number of units
associated with the unit load. For
example, 5000 passengers at an airport.
Pattern Load - Base Flow and

PatternAdds a new pattern load to the
list pane. A pattern load is a direct,
known sanitary load with a set pattern.
Delete
Lets you delete the currently highlighted

load.
Report

dialog box.
Composite
Hydrograph
Opens a graph window plotting a curve of a

selected single sanitary load or the composite
hydrograph of all loads.
Composite
Hydrograph
Data Table
Opens a window listing all the data points in

the curve of a selected single sanitary load or
in the composite hydrograph of all loads.
Depending on the type of sanitary load you select in the list pane, the following
controls appear:
Hydrograph Table
7-654
Lets you define the hydrograph by entering Time

From Start vs. Sanitary Flow points. This table is
available only when a hydrograph load is
highlighted in the list pane. If the last time in the
table is less than the total simulation time, the
simulation time and last flow will be appended to
the hydrograph table.
Loading
Unit Sanitary Load
Lets you select the type of the load (for example

Apartment or Airport). Unit sanitary loads are
selected, edited, and created in the Unit Sanitary
(Dry Weather) Load dialog box, which you access
by clicking the ellipsis () button next to this
field.
Unit Sanitary Loading

Unit
The local count of loading units for the selected

unit sanitary load.
Unit Sanitary Base

Flow
The average inflow over the duration of the

simulation.
Pattern Load
Lets you select the pattern for the selected pattern

load. Pattern loads are selected, edited, and
created in the Pattern Manager, which you access
by clicking the ellipsis (...) button next to this
field.
Related Topics
Adding Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads on page 7-624
LoadBuilder
LoadBuilder is a tool used to assign flows to elements in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i. If
you already know what flows to assign to an element, then you should use the other
methods such as inflow, sanitary loads, or stormwater loading. The power of LoadBuilder is that it can take loading information from a variety of GIS based sources
such as customer meter data, system flow meter or polygons with known population
or land use and assign those flows to elements. LoadBuilder is oriented to the types of
data available to describe dry weather flows and other methods in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i are more amenable to wet weather flows.
For more information about using LoadBuilder, see Using LoadBuilder to Assign
Loading Data on page 11-1081.
7-655
Rainfall Derived Infiltration and Inflow (RDII)
Rainfall Derived Infiltration and Inflow (RDII)

Rainfall derived infiltration and inflow (RDII) is the flow contribution to sanitary
sewers from wet weather events. In Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, the most appropriate
method for loading that flow is to derive unit hydrographs based on flow monitoring
and enter them using the procedure described in Adding Generic Unit Hydrographs
on page 7-697. Other methods may be added in the future.
Stormwater Flow
While it is possible to directly specify an inflow hydrograph at virtually any node
element, users may wish to load models during wet weather with flow that are derived
from precipitation. For this approach to be workable, you must specify:
Storm Data
Catchment characteristics
Catchment size
Loss method
Hydrograph method
Flow calculated from stormwater runoff can only be placed on catchment elements.
The methods described in this section are primarily intended for stormwater runoff or
the wet weather contribution to combined sewer systems. For sanitary systems, Rainfall Derived Infiltration and Inflow (RDII) on page 7-657.
Snowmelt must be converted into equivalent precipitation to use the methods in this
section.
The steps in using loss methods and hydrograph methods to generate a hydrograph
from precipitation data are summarized in the following diagram.
7-656
Loading
Related Topics
Adding Storm Data on page 7-658
Adding Global Storm Data on page 7-685
Catchment Characteristics on page 7-692
Runoff Method on page 7-695
ComponentsStorm
Data and Runoff Methods
There are numerous methods for assigning wet weather flows to the models. You can
directly enter Inflow hydrographs as a table of flow vs. time. Usually, however, its
preferable to specify precipitation data and allow the hydrologic methods in the model
to determine outflow from the catchment. Storm data is entered under Components >
Storm Data.
7-657
Stormwater Flow
You have several methods for specifying storm data which can also include long term
precipitation data. Not all of the forms of storm data data are compatible with all of
the hydrology methods in the model. The table below summarizes compatibility
between storm data and hydrology methods.
Each storm data group has a list of storm data. These are the storms available in the
drop-down list in the global storm data dialog and local storm data setting on catchments.
You can create any number of storm data and these events can be used globally for all
catchments (Components > Global Storm Data); or, some catchments can override the
global event by selecting "Use Local Rainfall = True" and selecting an event other
than the global event in the Property Grid for that catchment. The global and local
storm data for each catchment can also be set in the Rainfall-Runoff Alternative.
In almost all cases, the storm data is assigned to a catchment (or globally to all catchments). The one exception is the SWMM RTK method where the rainfall and RTK
coefficients are assigned to a manhole.
Time-Depth data can be either Incremental or Cumulative.
If modified rational method is selected for the runoff method, then modified rational
hydrology must be used for all catchments.
IDF curves can be converted into Time-Depth tables.
7-658
Loading
Storm Data Dialog Box

The Storm Data dialog box allows you to create, edit, and delete the Storm Data definitions that will make up the Global Storm Data that is applied to the model.
A storm data definition can be created in any of the following ways, both from within
the Storm Data dialog box:
You can manually create a storm data definition by clicking the New button and
selecting one of the five methods in the Storm Data dialog.
You can import storm data definitions from a text file.
You can import a storm data definition from the associated Storm Data Group
engineering library. To do so Click the Engineering Libraries button and select
Import From Library in the Storm Data dialog.
The dialog box contains a list pane on the left, a tabbed input data area on the upper
right, and a graph pane on the lower right, and includes the following controls:
New: Creates a new storm data definition that uses an automatically created
label.
Time-DepthAdds a new storm data to the list pane of the type Time-Depth.
7-659
Stormwater Flow
Time-IntensityAdds a new storm data to the list pane of the type TimeIntensity.
User Defined IDF TableAdds a new storm data to the list pane of the type
User Defined IDF Table.
Hydro-35Adds a new storm data to the list pane of the type Hydro-35.
IDF Table EquationAdds a new storm data to the list pane of the type IDF
Table Equation.
IDF Curve EquationAdds a new storm data to the list pane of the type
IDF Curve Equation.
IDF Polynomial Log EquationAdds a new storm data to the list pane of
the type IDF Polynomial Log Equation.
Rain FileAdds a new storm data to the list pane of the type Rain File.
Delete: Deletes the currently highlighted storm data definition.
Rename: Lets you rename the currently highlighted storm data definition.
associated with the currently highlighted storm data definition.
Import: Opens a browse dialog, allowing you to select a text file from which to
import storm definition data.
Engineering Libraries: Clicking this button opens a submenu containing the

following commands:
7-660

dialog, allowing you to browse the Storm Data Groups Library.
Synchronize From LibraryLets you update a set of storm data definitions

previously imported from a Storm Data Groups Library. The updates reflect
Synchronize To LibraryLets you update an existing Storm Data Groups

Library using current storm data definitions that were initially imported but
Import From LibraryLets you import a storm data definition from an

existing Storm Data Groups Library.
Loading
Export To LibraryLets you export the current storm data definitions to an

existing Storm Data Groups Library.

a library to synchronize with the current entry.
The fields and controls that appear in the tabbed area depend on which definition type
is currently highlighted in the list pane on the left.
Time-Depth
When editing a definition of the Time-Depth definition type, the tabbed area of the
dialog contains the following controls:
Storm Data Input Tab

Add Return Event: Opens a submenu containing the following commands:
New Return Event: Opens the New Storm Data Settings dialog, allowing you to
define the parameters for the return event.
Add Return Event from Storm Data: Opens the Storm Data Engineering
Library, allowing you to select a predefined storm data to use.
Add Return Event from Dimensionless Curve: Opens the Dimensionless Rainfall Curve Engineering Library, allowing you to select a predefined dimensionless
curve to use.
Add Return Event from IDF: Opens the Build Rainfall from IDF Storm Group
dialog, allowing you to set the parameters for the IDF storm data.
Delete: Removes the currently highlighted storm from the list.
Edit: Allows you to edit the currently highlighted storm data.
Notes Tab
Library Tab
7-661
Stormwater Flow
This tab displays information about the storm data definition that is currently highlighted in the list pane. If the storm data definition is derived from an engineering
library, the synchronization details can be found here. If the storm data definition was
created manually for this project, the synchronization details will display the message
Orphan (local), indicating that the storm data definition was not derived from a library
entry.
Time-Intensity
When editing a definition of the Time-Intensity definition type, the tabbed area of the

Add Return Event: Opens a submenu containing the following commands:
New Return Event: Opens the New Storm Data Settings dialog, allowing you to
define the parameters for the return event.
Add Return Event from Storm Data: Opens the Storm Data Engineering
Library, allowing you to select a predefined storm data to use.
Add Return Event from Dimensionless Curve: Opens the Dimensionless Rainfall Curve Engineering Library, allowing you to select a predefined dimensionless
curve to use.
Delete: Removes the currently highlighted storm from the list.
Edit: Allows you to edit the currently highlighted storm data.
Notes Tab
Library Tab
entry.
7-662
Loading
User Defined IDF Table

When you create a definition of the User Defined IDF Table definition type, an empty
IDF Table is created with a single Duration Column and no Return Period rows. You
can add or remove Durations and Return Periods using the buttons above the table.
When editing a definition of the User Defined IDF Table definition type, the tabbed
area of the dialog contains the following controls:
Add/Remove Return Periods: Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
Add Return PeriodAdds a column to the table for the specified return
period. When you select this command an Add Return Period dialog will
open, allowing you to type the return period in years for the new column.
Add RangeAdds columns to the table for multiple return periods that are
specified in the Add Multiple Return Periods dialog that opens when this
command is selected. Push the Enter key after you type in your first return
period value.
Delete Return PeriodUse the Delete command to remove the currently highlighted column from the table.
Add/Remove Durations: Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
Add DurationAdds a row to the table for the specified duration. When you
select this command an Add Duration dialog will open, allowing you to type
the duration in minutes (by default, you may select another unit to use) for the
new row.
Add RangeAdds rows to the table for multiple durations that are specified
in the Add Multiple Durations dialog that opens when this command is
selected. Push the Enter key after you type in your first duration value.
Delete DurationUse the Delete command to remove the currently highlighted row from the table.
Notes Tab
7-663
Stormwater Flow
Library Tab
entry.
Hydro-35
When editing a definition of the Hydro-35 definition type, the tabbed area of the

Data Tables: When you create a definition of the Hydro-35 definition type, the dialog
will display 2 tables in the tabbed area:
The upper table is the input table. It includes input fields for depth for the 2
year and 100 year return periods at 5, 15, and 60 minutes.
The lower table is the non-editable results table. The results table displays the
rainfall intensity values for the 2, 5, 10, 25, 50 and 100 year return periods at
durations of 5, 10, 15, 30 and 60 minutes.
Notes Tab
Library Tab
entry.
7-664
Loading
IDF Table Equation

The IDF Table Equation definition type calculates the storm data using the following
equation:
Where
i = rainfall intensity
D = rainfall duration
Rp = return period
a, b, m, n = rainfall equation coefficients
When editing a definition of the IDF Table Equation type, the tabbed area of the

Equation Duration Unit: Specify the unit to be used for duration (D) value in the
equation.
Equation Intensity Unit: Specify the unit to be used for intensity (i) value in the
equation.
a: Specify the value to be used for the a coefficient in the equation.
m: Specify the value to be used for the m coefficient in the equation.
b: Specify the value to be used for the b coefficient in the equation.
n: Specify the value to be used for the n coefficient in the equation.
Results Table: This table displays the calculated rainfall intensity values for the 2, 3,
5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200, and 500 year return periods at durations of 5, 10, 15, 20, 30,
40, 50, 60, 80, 100, and 120 minutes.
Notes Tab
Library Tab
7-665
Stormwater Flow
entry.
IDF Curve Equation

The IDF Table Equation definition type calculates the storm data using the following
equation:
Where
a, b, n = rainfall equation coefficients
When editing a definition of the IDF Table Equation type, the tabbed area of the

equation.
equation.
Add Return Event Button: Adds another Return Period row to the table. When you
click this button an Add Return Period dialog appears, allowing you to specify the
return period for the new row.
Remove Return Event Button: Removes the currently highlighted Return Period
row from the table.
a (log): Specify the value to be used for the a coefficient in the equation for the associated return period.
b: Specify the value to be used for the b coefficient in the equation for the associated
return period.
n: Specify the value to be used for the n coefficient in the equation for the associated
return period.
7-666
Loading
Results Table: This table displays the calculated rainfall intensity values for the each
of the return periods in the table at durations of 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, 100,
and 120 minutes.
Notes Tab
Library Tab
entry.
IDF Polynomial Log Equation

The IDF Polynomial Log Equation definition type calculates the storm data using the
following equation:
Where
a, b, c, d = rainfall equation coefficients
When editing a definition of the IDF Polynomial Log Equation type, the tabbed area
of the dialog contains the following controls:

equation.
equation.
7-667
Stormwater Flow
Add Return Event Button: Adds another Return Period row to the table. When you
click this button an Add Return Period dialog appears, allowing you to specify the
return period for the new row.
Remove Return Event Button: Removes the currently highlighted Return Period
row from the table.
a (log): Specify the value to be used for the a coefficient in the equation for the associated return period.
b (log): Specify the value to be used for the b coefficient in the equation for the associated return period.
c (log): Specify the value to be used for the c coefficient in the equation for the associated return period.
d (log): Specify the value to be used for the d coefficient in the equation for the associated return period.
Results Table: This table displays the calculated rainfall intensity values for the each
of the return periods in the table at durations of 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, 100,
and 120 minutes.
Notes Tab
Library Tab
entry.
To Import a comma or space delimited ASCII text file:
1. Click Import in the Storm Data dialog, and select the location and name of the file
containing the rainfall table in ASCII format to import. You may see a prompt
warning you that any existing storm data will be overwritten - if you do not want
this, click Cancel.
2. Select Open to import the ASCII text file, or Cancel to exit without saving the
changes.
7-668
Loading
Note:
When importing an ASCII text file, the following format is

assumed: The first line of the imported text file contains the
return periods. The first entry in each succeeding line of the file
contains the storm duration. All other entries represent rainfall
intensities, which are assumed to be in the current display unit
(i.e. in/hr, mm/hr, etc.).
An example in comma separated format is given below for return periods of 1, 2, 5,

10, 20, 50 and 100 years, and durations of 5, 15, 30 and 60 minutes):
1 , 2 , 5 , 10 , 20 , 50 , 100
5 , 47.0 , 63 , 87 , 103 , 125 , 157 , 183
15 , 29.7 , 39.5 , 54 , 63 , 76 , 95 , 110
30 , 20.8 , 27.5 , 37.1 , 43.5 , 52 , 64 , 75
60 , 14.0 , 18.4 , 24.5 , 28.6 , 34.0 , 41.8 , 48.1
Rain File
When editing a definition of the Rain File type, the tabbed area of the dialog contains

Rain File: Allows you to select the desired SWMM rain file.
Rain Data File Type: Allows you to select the type of data stored in the selected rain
file.
Rain Units: Allows you to select the unit for the data in the selected rain file.
Rain File Storm Data Table: Click the New button to add a row to the table; click
Delete to remove the currently highlighted row from the table. The table consists of
the following columns:
Label: The label for the storm data.
Station ID: The station ID for the storm data.
Time Interval: The time interval for the storm data.
Snow Catch Factor: Allows you to enter the SWMM snow catch factor.
Notes Tab
7-669
Stormwater Flow
Library Tab
entry.
Generate Storm Data Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to generate a storm data from a dimensionless curve.
7-670
Curve Label: Enter a distinguishing label for the curve.
Return Event: Enter the frequency of the event.
Depth Type: Choose whether the curve is incremental or cumulative.
New Depth: This field allows you to enter a new depth to customize the dimensionless curve you selected.
Depth: This read-only field displays the depth associated with the dimensionless
curve you selected.
Start: Enter the time at which the storm begins.
New Duration: This field allows you to enter a new duration for the storm to
customize the dimensionless curve you selected.
Duration: This read-only field displays the depth associated with the dimensionless curve you selected.
Loading
Build Rainfall from IDF Storm Group Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to generate rainfall data from an IDF storm group.
IDF Storm Data Group: Select the storm data group, or click the ellipsis button
to browse the Storm Data Groups engineering library.
Minimum Td: Enter the minimum Td.
Number of Steps: Enter the number of time steps. You need at least 10 steps to
build the rainfall curve.
Duration: Enter the duration of the event.
New Storm Data Settings Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to set up parameters for a return event, including the curve
settings and the time settings.
7-671
Stormwater Flow
Curve Label: Enter a distinguishing label for the curve.
Return Event: Enter the frequency of the event.
Depth Type: Choose whether the curve is incremental or cumulative.
Start: Enter the time at which the storm begins.
Increment: Enter the time step.
End: Enter the time at which the storm ends.
Snow Catch Factor: Factor that corrects gage readings for snowfall.
Time Settings Dialog Box

You define the temporal attributes of a storm data in the Time Settings dialog box.
This dialog automatically appears when you select Cumulative, Incremental, or Intensity as a new storm data in the Storm Data dialog box. After you create one of these
storm data, you can access the Time Setting dialog box by clicking the Edit button that
appears above the table in the Storm Data dialog box.
This dialog box contains the following controls:
Start Time
Lets you define the time for the first ordinate in a

storm data.
Increment
Lets you define the duration of the time step

between ordinates in a storm data.
End Time
Lets you define the time for the last ordinate in a

storm data.
Related Topics
7-672
Storm Data Dialog Box on page 7-678
Rainfall Curve Import Settings Dialog Box on page 7-679
Loading

This dialog box lets you define Time vs. Depth and Time vs. Intensity storm data from
within Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Engineering Libraries.
Access the Storm Data dialog box by clicking the Ellipsis (...) button next to the
Depths or Intensities field when for a Storm Data entry in the Engineering Library
explorer pane.
The dialog box includes the following controls:
Edit
Opens the Time Settings dialog (see

Time Settings Dialog Box on page 7677 for more information), allowing you
to define the start time, stop time, and
increment for the current storm data.
Graph
Graphs a plot of the current storm data.
The Storm Data dialog box also includes the following controls:
Return Event
The return event, a value that reflects the average

time between similar storm data.
Time vs. Depth or

Intensity table
Allows you to define time vs. depth or time vs.

intensity points that describe the current storm
data. Which table is displayed in the dialog
depends on the Storm Data Type specified in the
library entry.
Related Topics
7-673
Stormwater Flow
Time Settings Dialog Box on page 7-677
Rainfall Curve Import Settings Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you create a new From Dimensionless Curve
storm data and after you select a dimensionless rainfall curve in the Engineering
Libraries to import into the Storm Data dialog box. The Rainfall Curve Import
Settings dialog box lets you define the data type, depth type, depth, and duration for a storm data created from a dimensionless curve.
Storm Data Data Type
Lets you specify the data type as Depth or

Intensity. If you select Intensity, the Storm Data
Type field becomes inactive.
Storm Data Depth

Type
Lets you specify the depth type as Cumulative or

Incremental. This field is unavailable if the Storm
Data Data Type is Intensity.
Depth
Lets you specify the depth of the storm data.
Start Time
Lets you specify the time at which the translated

dimensionless curve begins. The default and
suggested value is 0.00 hours.
Duration
Lets you specify the duration of the storm data.
Related Topics
7-674
Loading
Rainfall Curve Dictionary Dialog Box

This dialog lets you define dimensionless rainfall curves. These curves are stored in
the Dimensionless Rainfall Curves Engineering Library, and can be used to define
Global and local Storm Data (see Adding Global Storm Data on page 7-685 and
Adding Storm Data on page 7-658 for more information).
The Rainfall Curve Dictionary dialog box is accessible by clicking the Ellipsis button
of the Dimensionless Depths field when a Dimensionless Rainfall Curve entry is highlighted in the Engineering Library explorer pane.
The dialog contains the following controls:
Edit
Opens the Time Settings dialog box (see

Time Settings Dialog Box on page 7677 for more information), allowing you
to define the start time, stop time, and
increment for the current rainfall curve.
Graph
Graphs a plot of the current rainfall

curve.
The Rainfall Curve Dictionary dialog box also contains the following table:
Time vs. Depth table
lets you define time vs. depth points that describe

the current rainfall curve. The time column will be
either Synthetic Time or Time, depending on
whether the Dimensionless Time Type specified in
the library entry is Dimensionless Time or Time,
respectively.
Related Topics
7-675
Stormwater Flow
Rational Method IDF Curve Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define intensity-duration-frequency curves. These curves
are stored in the Storm Data Engineering Library, and can be used to define Global
and local Storm Data (see Adding Global Storm Data on page 7-685 and Adding
Storm Data on page 7-658 for more information).
The Rational Method IDF Curve dialog box is accessible by clicking the Ellipsis
button of the Depths field when a Rational Method IDF Curve entry is highlighted in
the Engineering Library explorer pane.
The dialog contains the following controls:
Return Event
The return event, a value that reflects the average

time between similar storm data.
Time vs. Intensity table
Allows you to define time vs. depth or time vs.

intensity points that describe the current storm
data. Which table is displayed in the dialog
depends on the Storm Data Type specified in the
library entry.
Related Topics
7-676
Loading
User Defined IDF Table Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define intensity-duration-frequency tables. These tables are
stored in the Storm Data Groups Engineering Library, and can be used to define
Global and local Storm Data (see Adding Storm Data for more information).

Label: Enter a label for the curve.
Return Event: The return event, a value that reflects the average time between similar
storm data.
IDF Curve: Opens the IDF Curve Dialog Box on page 7-683, which allows you to
define time vs. intensity curves that describe the current storm data.
7-677
Stormwater Flow
IDF Curve Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define time vs. intensity points to create IDF curves that are
used with User Defined IDF Tables.
The table consists of the following columns:

Time: The time for the associated intensity value.
Intensity: The intensity for the associated time.
IDF Curve Equation Input Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define the return event and the a, b, and n coefficients that
describe the storm using the following equation:
7-678
Loading
Where
a, b, n = rainfall equation coefficients
Enter the Return Event and the values for the a, b, and n coefficients. Click the New
button to add a row to the table, and Delete to remove the currently highlighted row.
IDF Polynomial Log Equation Dialog Box

The IDF Polynomial Log Equation definition type calculates the storm data using the
following equation:
Where
7-679
Stormwater Flow
a, b, c, d = rainfall equation coefficients
Enter the Return Event and the values for the a (log), b (log), and c (log), and d (log)
coefficients. Click the New button to add a row to the table, and Delete to remove the
currently highlighted row.

This dialog displays the storm data parameters in a read-only (non-editable) format.
To edit the storms, use the Storm Data Dialog Box on page 7-664.
The New and Delete buttons allow you to add and remove rows to/from the table.
Adding Global Storm Data

Individual catchments in your model can have local storm data assigned to them.
These are the storm data you create in the Storm Data dialog box or in the Storm Data
Engineering Library. For catchments that do not use local rainfall (Use Local Rainfall
setting in the Property Editor is set to False), project-wide global storm data apply.
Project-wide global storm data are associated with Hydrology alternatives.
7-680
Loading
You define project-wide global storm data in the Global Storm Data dialog box.
To add a global storm data:
1. Select Components > Global Storm Data or click the Global Storm Data
button on the Components toolbar.
2. In the Global Storm Data dialog box, each row in the table represents a Hydrology
alternative. In the Global Storm Data column, select the storm data from the
submenu or click the Ellipses (...) button to display the Storm Data dialog box,
where you can create a new storm data.
3. The rest of the data is automatically added to the table based on the settings of the
selected storm data. Click Close.
Global Storm Data Settings Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you define project-wide global storm data data. You access the
Global Storm Data Settings dialog box by selecting Components > Global Storm
Data or clicking the Global Storm Data button on the Components toolbar.
The dialog box a table with the following columns:
Alternative
Displays the name of the Hydrology alternative

that is used by the current scenario.
Global Storm Data
Lists all of the rainfall curves that have been

defined for the current project in the Storm Data
dialog box, which is accessible by clicking the
ellipsis button.
Source
Displays the location of the library file for storm

data that are derived from an engineering library
entry.
Return Event
Displays the return event that is associated with

the storm data. The return event is a value that
reflects the average time between similar storm
data.
Depth
Displays the rainfall depth of the storm as defined

by the currently selected storm data.
Duration
Displays the duration of the storm as defined by

the currently selected storm data.
7-681
Stormwater Flow
Weir Depth Coefficient Table Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define weir depth coefficient tables.
The dialog consists of a list pane on the left and a tabbed section on the right. The list
pane displays all of the weir depth coefficient definitions associated with the project.
Above the list pane are the following buttons:
pane.
7-682
Loading
Synchronization Options: Clicking this button opens a submenu

Browse Engineering Library: Opens the Engineering Library manager

dialog, allowing you to browse the Weir Depth Coefficient Libraries.
Synchronize From Library: Lets you update a set of definitions previously

imported from a Weir Depth Coefficient Library. The updates reflect changes
that have been made to the library since it was imported.
Synchronize To Library: Lets you update an existing Weir Depth Coefficient

Library using current definitions that were initially imported but have since
been modified.
Import From Library: Lets you import a definition from an existing Weir
Depth Coefficient Library.
Export To Library: Lets you export the current definition to an existing Weir
Depth Coefficient Library.

The tabbed section on the right side of the dialog consists of the following tabs:
Weir Depth Table: Enter the Weir Depth vs Weir Coefficient points to define the
weir depth coefficient curve. Click the New button above the table to add a new
row; click the Delete button to remove the currently highlighted row.
Notes Tab: This text field that allows you to enter descriptive notes that will be
associated with the currently highlighted list pane entry.
Library Tab: This tab displays information about the template that is currently
highlighted in the list pane. If the template is derived from an engineering library,
the synchronization details can be found here. If the template was created manually for this project, the synchronization details will display the message Orphan
(local), indicating that the template was not derived from a library entry.
Weir Depth Coefficient Table Library Editor

This dialog box lets you define weir depth coefficient tables.
7-683
Stormwater Flow
The dialog box contains the weir depth coefficient table and the following buttons:
New
Delete

the table.
7-684
Column
Description
Weir Depth
Lets you define the weir depth for the

corresponding weir coefficient.
Weir Coefficient
Lets you define the weir coefficient at the

corresponding weir depth.
Loading
Weir Submergence Table Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define custom submergence correction tables to adjust weir
discharges for submergence effects. The correction table is a dimensionless table of
discharge multipliers (qr) which are a function of the tailwater-to-headwater depth
ratio (TW/HW). These depths are measured relative to the weir crest elevation.
The dialog consists of a list pane on the left and a tabbed section on the right. The list
pane displays all of the weir submergence definitions associated with the project.
Above the list pane are the following buttons:
pane.
7-685
Stormwater Flow
Synchronization Options: Clicking this button opens a submenu

Browse Engineering Library: Opens the Engineering Library manager

dialog, allowing you to browse the Weir Submergence Libraries.
Synchronize From Library: Lets you update a set of definitions previously

imported from a Weir Submergence Library. The updates reflect changes that
have been made to the library since it was imported.
Synchronize To Library: Lets you update an existing Weir Submergence

Library using current definitions that were initially imported but have since
been modified.
Import From Library: Lets you import a definition from an existing Weir
Submergence Library.
Export To Library: Lets you export the current definition to an existing Weir
Submergence Library.

The tabbed section on the right side of the dialog consists of the following tabs:
7-686
Weir Submergence Table: Enter the Hw/Tw Ratio vs Q Multiplier points to

define the weir submergence correction table. Click the New button above the
table to add a new row; click the Delete button to remove the currently highlighted
row.
Notes Tab: This text field that allows you to enter descriptive notes that will be
associated with the currently highlighted list pane entry.
Library Tab: This tab displays information about the template that is currently
highlighted in the list pane. If the template is derived from an engineering library,
the synchronization details can be found here. If the template was created manually for this project, the synchronization details will display the message Orphan
(local), indicating that the template was not derived from a library entry.
Loading
Catchment Characteristics
The precipitation that falls on a catchment can only be converted into a flow to a
sewer if the user specifies the following:
Area to determine magnitude of available flow

(For more information, see Entering Area on page 7-692.)
Runoff method which consists of:
Loss method to determine the amount of available flow that actually runs off
Hydrograph method to determine the shape of the runoff hydrograph
The modified rational method does not explicitly have a loss method associated with
it.
Entering Area
There are two ways to specify area in a catchment.
The first involves directly entering the area in the Property Editor or FlexTable for the
catchment.
The second is based on the scaled area from the drawing. This can only be used if the
drawing is scaled and the units have been correctly identified. Bentley SewerGEMS
V8i displays the scaled area in the Property Editor for the catchment and you must
copy that value in the Area attribute. For more information, see CatchmentGeometry on page 15-1387.
It is possible to have an area that is not uniform in terms of runoff. For more information, see Defining CN Area Collections for Catchments on page 7-650.
For more information, see CatchmentCatchment on page 15-1388.
Related Topics
7-687
Stormwater Flow
Defining CN Area Collections for Catchments

SewerGEMS V8i lets you define infiltration for a catchment based on CN (SCS Curve
Number) and Area data that you specify. You define and save this data in a CN Area
collection.
In SewerGEMS V8i, the sub-basin runoff is defined solely by the CNinput for each
watershed. The CN Area Collection dialog box automatically computes weighted CN
values as a function of soil hydrologic class and cover characteristics, based on the CN
Engineering Library entries that you select when you create a CN Area collection.
Note:
The USDA has classified its soil types into four hydrologic soil
groups. For a complete description of the CN values for various
land uses and cover characteristics for each soil classification,
see The Runoff Curve Number on page 14-1228.
To define a CN Area collection for a catchment:

Runoff Method. The Loss Method field becomes available.
3. Select SCS CN as the Loss Method. the SCS CN field becomes available.
4. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the SCS CN field. The CN Area Collection
dialog box appears.
5. Type a description for the collection in the Description field, or click the Ellipses
(...) button to display the CN Libraries in the Engineering Libraries.
6. Click the plus signs to expand the list of items in the CN Libraries until you find
the CN Value for the soil hydrologic class and cover characteristics that you want
to use.
7. Click Select to close the Engineering Libraries dialog box and add the CN Value
to the table in the CN Area Collection dialog box.
8. SewerGEMS V8i automatically fills in the values for SCS CN and Area. Type
values for Percent Connected Impervious Area and Percent Unconnected Impervious Area.
Note:
You can change the SCS CN value by clicking the Ellipses (...)
button next to the SCS CN field, then selecting a different CN
Value from the CN Engineering Libraries.
9. Repeat Steps 5 - 8 for each item you want to add to the CN Area collection.
10. Click OK.
7-688
Loading
CN Area Collection Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you define infiltration based on Cn and Area data. The dialog box
contains the Cn-Area table and the following buttons:
New
Creates a new row in the cn-area table.
Delete

from the cn-area table.
Report


Column
Description
Description
Lets you enter a description for the catchment.
CN
Lets you define the Cn value for the catchment.
Area
Lets you define the area for the catchment.
Percent Connected
Impervious Area
This field allows you to enter the percent

connected impervious area.
(for the current line of data) that contains directly
connected impervious cover. Precipitation that
falls on these types of impervious areas flow to the
outfall point without ever flowing over pervious
cover areas.
made based on the % connected impervious areas
(0% yields no adjustment).
An example sequence of directly connected
impervious areas are rainfall drops onto a concrete
driveway, driveway drains to a paved gutter, gutter
drains into a storm sewer, and storm sewer into a
detention pond.
7-689
Stormwater Flow
Column
Description
Percent Unconnected
Impervious Area
Enter the percent unconnected impervious area.

(for the current line of data) that contains
unconnected impervious cover. Precipitation
falling on these types of impervious areas
eventually flows over pervious areas before
reaching the outfall.
made based on the % unconnected impervious
areas (0% yields no adjustment).
An example sequence of directly unconnected
impervious areas are rainfall drops onto a paved
tennis court at a grassed park, water sheet flowing
across a paved tennis court, water flowing off the
tennis court onto a grass field in a park (there are
no inlet drains on the court), and some of the water
then being absorbed into the soil.
Runoff Method
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i supports the following runoff methods which can be
selected by the user in the Property Editor or FlexTable under the attribute Runoff
Method. They include:
None - no runoff
Modified rational method
Unit hydrograph
EPA SWMM
User defined hydrograph
The data required varies for each method. The data requirements are summarized in
CatchmentRunoff on page 15-1388. The data needs for each method are
described in their individual sections.
The input parameters for each method are listed below. Each of these methods is
described in standard hydrology and stormwater references such as Stormwater
Modeling Conveyance and Design, published Haestad Press.
Input Parameters for Unit Hydrograph Runoff Methods
7-690
Loss method
Loading
Green Ampt
-
Capillary suction
Ks
Moisture deficit
SCS Curve Number
Horton
fc
fo
Initial abstraction
Recovery constant
Maximum volume
fLoss
Time of Concentration
(For more information, see Specifying a Time of Concentration (Tc) Method for
a Catchment on page 6-366.)
Unit hydrograph method

(For more information, see Unit Hydrograph Methodology on page 14-1278.)
-
Generic unit hydrograph

(For more information, see Generic Unit Hydrographs on page 141279.)
RTK Method
(For more information, see Adding Hydrographs Based On the RTK
Method on page 7-701.)
SCS
(For more information, see Using the SCS Unit Hydrograph Runoff
Method on page 7-710.)
For more information on unit hydrograph runoff methods, see Unit Hydrograph
Runoff Methods on page 14-1283.
Related Topics
Adding Generic Unit Hydrographs on page 7-697
Adding Hydrographs Based On the RTK Method on page 7-701
7-691
Stormwater Flow
Adding Generic Unit Hydrographs

You can directly associate a user-defined unit hydrograph to a subarea (catchment) for
runoff calculations. In dynamic flow routing, the hydraulics of the system are modeled
over time.
The coefficients for the generic unit hydrographs are usually developed based on a
linear correlation analysis between precipitation data and flow measurement. Usually
flow monitoring data are only available at a handful of locations in a collection
system. Therefore, when using generic unit hydrograph, you only need to load a
model at points corresponding to flow monitoring locations. This lumping of wet
weather loads will model flows downstream of the monitoring point accurately but
will underestimate flow immediately upstream of the monitoring location.
In this method, the rainfall is converted into catchment outflow in discrete time intervals, called convolution time steps. Usually, it is best to set the convolution time step
to the same value as the increment in the unit hydrograph that you enter. Smaller intervals won't produce greater accuracy while larger intervals will lose resolution.
For more information on unit hydrographs, see Generic Unit Hydrographs on
page 14-1279 and Soil Conservation Service (SCS) on page 14-1281.
Note:
Implementation of generic unit hydrographs in PondPack is not

the same as generic unit hydrographs in CivilStorm and
SewerGEMS.
To add a unit hydrograph to a catchment:

Runoff Method.
3. Select Generic Unit Hydrograph in the Unit Hydrograph Method drop-down.
4. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Runoff Hydrograph field. The Unit
Hydrograph Data dialog box appears.
5. Click the New button to add a row to the Time vs. Flow table.
6. Enter Time vs. Flow data into the table. Press Enter after typing a value to add a
new row to the table (or click the New button to add a new row).
7. Click the Graph button to view a plot of the Time vs. Flow data.
8. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the hydrograph to the Property Editor
for the catchment.
7-692
Loading
Unit Hydrograph Data Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define Time vs. Flow unit hydrographs. The dialog box
contains the time-vs.-flow table and the following buttons:
New
Creates a new row in the hydrograph

table.
Delete

from the hydrograph table.
Report

Graph
Opens a graph window plotting the unit

hydrograph defined by the points in the
table.
7-693
Stormwater Flow
Column
Description
Time
Lets you define the hour of the hydrograph point.
Flow
Lets you define the flow for the hydrograph point.
Related Topics
What is the Difference Between a User Defined Unit Hydrograph and a

Hydrograph Entered in the Inflow Collection Editor? on page 6-419
EPA SWMM
The input parameters for each method are listed below.
Loss method
Capillary suction
Ks
Moisture deficit
SCS Curve Number
Horton
7-694
Green Ampt
fc
fo
Initial abstraction
Recovery constant
Maximum volume
fLoss
Storage (Impervious Depression)
Storage (Pervious Depression)
Manning's n (Impervious)
Manning's n (Pervious)
Percent impervious
Slope
Loading
Subarea routing
Impervious
Pervious
Outlet
Percent routed
If you are using the EPA SWMM runoff method with the SWMM engine, you must:
1. Use the EPA-SWMM runoff for all catchments;
2. Use the same loss method for all catchments;
3. Set the Infiltration Method under Calculation Options to the loss method used by all
catchments.
For more information on SWMM input data, see Using the SWMM Solver on
page 6-473.
Single Loss Method for EPA-SWMM Catchments

In CivilStorm and SewerGEMS when using the EPA-SWMM Runoff Method the loss
method used must match the same infiltration method specified in the calculation
options.
The option is labeled as "Default Infiltration Method" and has the following options:
Horton
Green and Ampt
SCS CN
The corresponding loss method options on a catchment are:
fLoss (not shown for EPA-SWMM Runoff)
Green and Ampt
SCS CN
(Generic) Horton
The validation checks all active catchments for the scenario being computed and then
filters the list further for those that are EPA-SWMM Runoff Method with a loss
method not equal to the setting in the calculation options.
The reason for this validation is simple. SWMM only supports the calculation of a
model using a single infiltration method. All catchments will use that one global infiltration method with no local overrides.
7-695
Stormwater Flow
If a model has a condition where an EPA-SWMM Runoff Method catchment uses a
loss method that is NOT the same as the calculation option, the following user notification is generated:
-1 Base "Scenario 1 Base (N/A) One or more EPASWMM catchments are using an infiltration method not
the same as the default infiltration method in the
calculation options. Precalculation
This user notification is only generated when the engine type in the calculation
options is set to "Implicit" (which is the Bentley DynamicWave calculation engine).
Adding Hydrographs Based On the RTK Method

The RTK method is used to generate a hydrograph based on precipitation data. It
forms the hydrograph by combining triangular hydrographs from three components of
flow:
Rapid inflow
Slow infiltration
A typical RTK hydrograph is shown below. Q1, Q2 and Q3 refer to the three components of flow which must be summed to determine the flow.
7-696
Loading
Figure 7-2: A Typical RTK Hydrograph
For information on the theory behind this method, see RTK Methods on page 141288. RTK methods are described further in the wet weather flow chapter of Wastewater Collection System Modeling and Design, available from Bentley Institute
Press.
The RTK method is most appropriate for determining RDII (Rainfall Derived Infiltration and Inflow) to sanitary sewers. It treats the system between the rainfall and flow
in the sewer as a black box which can be represented by the three parameters R, T and
K. In storm sewer systems, most of the flow moves over the surface and enters the
sewer at known locations; a method such as the SCS hydrograph method is more
appropriate in these systems.
The RTK method requires that the storm data be specified as a hyetograph, not simply
a peak intensity. The resulting hydrograph from the catchment will have time steps
equal to the time step size in the hyetograph. For example if precipitation is specified
in 0.25 hr increments, flow will be calculated in those increments.
7-697
Stormwater Flow
Note:
SWMM RTK can only be used with the Explicit SWMM solver. If
you are using the SWMM RTK method in your model you wont
be able to change solvers.
For more information about RTK methods, see:
Assembling RTK Parameters on page 7-703
Creating an RTK Table and Assigning it to a Catchment on page 7-704
RTK Tables Dialog Box on page 7-706
RTK Methods on page 14-1288
Assembling RTK Parameters

The RTK parameters are:
R - fraction of precipitation that enters the collection system for that component
T - the time from the precipitation pulse to the peak of that component of the
hydrograph
K- the ratio of the time to peak to time to end of hydrograph for that component.
There is no theoretical method to determine R, T and K. They must be determined

empirically for each system based on a comparison of a measured rainfall hyetograph
with measured wet weather sewer flow.
In general, R will be higher for systems that have significant infiltration and inflow
problems than tight systems. T will be larger for larger catchments and will be larger
for slow infiltration than rapid inflow. K is usually on the order of 1.5 to 2.5. The sum
of the R values for all components should be positive but less than 1. The default units
for T is hours while R and K are dimensionless.
Determining R, T and K for a particular catchment (or group of catchments) and event
involve constructing a model, then trying different values of R, T and K that, when
combined with sanitary dry weather flow, match the measured system hydrograph.
In some cases, the RTK parameters may have been determined for a large area, say
several square kilometers (square miles) but the model is being loaded based on catchments on the order of a few hectares (acres). In this case, the R and K values are likely
to be valid but the T values may need to be decreased to reflect the shorter time of
concentration of these smaller catchments.
It is best to calibrate the RTK method using several storm data.
7-698
Loading
Note:
The word "infiltration" is used in two different ways in wet

weather flow monitoring:
1. It is the precipitation that seeps into the ground.
2. It is the precipitation that seeps through the groundwater into
collection systems.
In Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, generally the first definition is used.
In the RTK method, the second definition is typically used.
Related Topics:
Creating an RTK Table and Assigning it to a Catchment

The RTK parameters are a property of each catchment. However, it is not uncommon
for many catchments with similar characteristics to share the same RTK parameters.
Therefore, the RTK parameters are entered in a named RTK table and that table can be
shared among many catchments.
The RTK table is a set of RTK parameters that is available to be assigned to catchments. The following table shows some example ranges of RTK values.
Table 7-2: Example RTK Values
Component
Rapid Inflow
0.08
1.5
Moderate Infiltration
0.04
3.5
1.75
Slow Infiltration
0.06
1.67
In most cases, the RTK hydrograph implicitly accounts for infiltration so when using
RTK, you should set this type of infiltration to zero. This can be done by setting the
infiltration rate to zero in the fLoss method or setting fc and fo to zero in the Horton
(generic) method.
7-699
Stormwater Flow
To create a RTK table:
1. Open your project in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, then do one of the following:
Select Components > RTK Tables.
Double-click a catchment in your model, then in the Property Editor for the
catchment, select Unit Hydrograph as the Runoff Method, RTK Unit
Hydrograph as the Unit Hydrograph Method, then New as the RTK Table.
Open a catchment FlexTable, then click the Ellipse (...) button in the RTK
Table cell.
2. Click the New button to create a new RTK table, then type a new name for the
RTK table.
3. Enter RTK values for Rapid Inflow, Moderate Infiltration, and Slow Infiltration.
You can use the Tab key to quickly move from one field to the next.
Note:
If you do not use one of the flow components, set the R value of
that component to zero.
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i validates your RTK data as you enter it
and displays errors and warnings in the status bar at the bottom
of the RTK Tables dialog box. Be sure to check this status bar for
any errors or warnings as you enter data.
4. Click Close to close the dialog box and save the RTK table.
5. In the Property Editor for the catchment, select the new RTK table from the dropdown menu in the RTK Table field.
To assign an RTK table to a catchment:
The advantage of using FlexTables to assign RTK tables to catchments is that the
hydrograph types can be assigned globally.
1. To assign an RTK table to a catchment using the Property Editor, perform these
steps:
a. Double-click a catchment in your model.
b. In the Property Editor, select Unit Hydrograph as the Runoff Method.
c. Select RTK Unit Hydrograph as the Unit Hydrograph Method.
d. In the RTK Table field, select the desired RTK table from the drop-down
menu, or select New to create a new RTK table.
7-700
Loading
2. To assign an RTK table to a catchment using a FlexTable, perform these steps:
a. Open or create a catchment FlexTable.
For information on creating FlexTables, see Creating a New FlexTable on
page 10-964. For information on adding columns to an existing FlexTable, see
Editing FlexTables on page 10-965.
b. Add the following columns to the FlexTable:
-
Runoff Method
Unit Hydrograph Method
RTK Table
c. In the Runoff Method cell in the FlexTable, select Unit Hydrograph.

d. In the Unit Hydrograph Method cell, select RTK Unit Hydrograph.
e. In the RTK Table cell for the catchment, select the appropriate RTK table or
click the Ellipses (...) button to create a new table.
Related Topics:
RTK Tables Dialog Box

You create RTK tables in the RTK Tables dialog box. The dialog box contains a list
pane with the following controls:
New
Creates a new RTK table that uses an

7-701
Stormwater Flow
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted RTK

table.
Rename

RTK table.
Report

the currently highlighted RTK table.
Duplicate
Lets you create an exact copy of the

selected RTK table with a new name.
The RTK Tables dialog box also contains the following controls:
Rapid Inflow
Moderate Infiltration
7-702
Lets you enter RTK values for the rapid inflow

component of flow:
RFraction of precipitation that enters the

collection system for rapid inflow.
TThe time from the precipitation pulse to the

peak of rapid inflow of the hydrograph.
KThe ratio of the time to peak to time to end

of hydrograph for rapid inflow.
Lets you enter RTK values for the moderate

infiltration component of flow:

collection system for moderate infiltration.

peak of moderate infiltration of the
hydrograph.

of hydrograph for moderate infiltration.
Loading
Slow Infiltration
Lets you enter RTK values for the slow infiltration

component of flow:

collection system for slow infiltration.

peak of slow infiltration of the hydrograph.

of hydrograph for slow infiltration.
Related Topics:
SWMM RTK Unit Hydrograph Dialog Box

You create SWMM RTK unit hydrographs in this dialog box. The dialog box contains
a list pane with the following controls:
New
Creates a new RTK unit hydrograph that

uses an automatically created label.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted RTK unit

hydrograph.
Rename

RTK unit hydrograph.
Report

the currently highlighted RTK unit
hydrograph.
Help
7-703
Stormwater Flow
The table on the top right allows you to define the default RTK and initial abstraction
depth for all months. The first row is used to specify parameters for a short-term
response hydrograph, the second for a medium-term response hydrograph, and the last
for a long-term response hydrograph. It contains the following columns:
R
The fraction of rainfall volume that enters the

sewer system.
The time from the onset of rainfall to the peak of

the UH in hours.
The ratio of time to recession of the UH to the

time to peak.
Dmax
The maximum depth of initial abstraction

available (in rain depth units).
Drec
The rate at which any utilized initial abstraction is

made available again (in rain depth units per day).
Do
The amount of initial abstraction that has already

been utilized at the start of the simulation (in rain
depth units).
The table at the bottom allows you to override the default RTK and/or abstraction
depth for specified months. To override the default value, check the box for the corresponding row to enable the values in that row to be edited.
Using the SCS Unit Hydrograph Runoff Method

When the SCS Unit Hydrograph Runoff Method is assigned to a catchment, Bentley
CivilStorm V8i allows you to choose between the following three dimensionless
methods to further customize the hydrograph:
7-704
Default CurvilinearThis method uses the standard dimensionless curvilinear

unit hydrograph ordinates, as defined in Chapter 4 of the National Engineering
Handbook, Section 4.
Triangular Unit HydrographThis method uses a triangular unit hydrograph

shape to define the coordinates for the unit hydrograph. The default shape factor is
484 (37.5% of the volume on the rising limb of the unit hydrograph).
Dimensionless Unit HydrographThis method allows you to customize the Q/

Qp-T/Tp unit hydrograph that is used with the SCS Unit Hydrograph method. See
Adjusting the Q/Qp-T/Tp Unit Hydrograph on page 7-710 for more information.
Loading
Related Topics:
Soil Conservation Service (SCS)on page 14-1281
Adjusting the Q/Qp-T/Tp Unit Hydrograph

Q/Qp-T/Tp is a dimensionless unit hydrograph that is used with the SCS Unit
Hydrograph method. The Qp and Tp are determined based on subarea characteristics.
Typically, the SCS method uses a default curvilinear unit hydrograph. CivilStorm V8i
allows you to assign your own Q/Qp-T/Tp hydrograph to better suit your local conditions.
To create a new Q/Qp-T/Tp Unit Hydrograph:
1. Highlight a catchment in the model.
2. In the Property Editor, change the value in the Runoff Method field to Unit
Hydrograph.
3. Change the Unit Hydrograph Method to SCS Unit Hydrograph.
4. Change the Unit Hydrograph Method Type to Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph.
5. Click the Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph field and select the Edit Dimensionless
Unit Hydrograph command.
6. In the Dimensionless Unit Hydrographs dialog that appears, click the New button.
To import a Q/Qp-T/Tp Unit Hydrograph from an Engineering Library:
1. Highlight a catchment in the model.
2. In the Property Editor, change the value in the Runoff Method field to Unit
Hydrograph.
3. Change the Unit Hydrograph Method to SCS Unit Hydrograph.
4. Change the Unit Hydrograph Method Type to Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph.
5. Click the Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph field and select the Edit Dimensionless
Unit Hydrograph command.
6. In the Dimensionless Unit Hydrographs dialog that appears, click the Synchronization Options button and select the Import From Library command from the
menu that appears.
7. In the Engineering Libraries dialog that appears, find the desired library, highlight
it, and click the Select button to import it.
7-705
Stormwater Flow
Dimensionless Unit Hydrographs Dialog
This dialog allows you to create the Q/Qp-T/Tp unit hydrographs that are used with the
SCS Unit Hydrograph method.
7-706
Loading
The following controls are available in the Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph dialog
box:
New
This button creates a new hydrograph.
Delete

hydrograph.
Duplicate
This button creates a copy of the the

currently highlighted hydrograph.
Rename
This button allows you to rename the

currently highlighted hydrograph.
Report

dialog box.
Synchronization
Options

Browse Engineering LibraryOpens

the Engineering Library manager dialog,
allowing you to browse the Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph Library.

update a set of storm data previously
imported from a Dimensionless Unit
Hydrograph Library. The updates reflect
changes that have been made to the
library since it was imported.

update an existing Dimensionless Unit
Hydrograph Library using current storm
data that were initially imported but have
since been modified.
Import From LibraryLets you import a

storm data from an existing Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph Library.
Export To LibraryLets you export the

current storm data to an existing Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph Library.
7-707
Stormwater Flow
7-708
New
Creates a new unit hydrograph that uses an

Delete

hydrograph.
Loading
Duplicate
Craetes a copy of the currently highlighted

unit hydrograph.
Rename

unit hydrograph.
Report

the currently highlighted unit hydrograph.
Synchronization
Options

Browse Engineering Library

Opens the Engineering Library
manager dialog, allowing you to
browse the Dimensionless Unit
Hydrograph Engineering Libraries.

update a set of unit sanitary loads
previously imported from a Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph Engineering
Library. The updates reflect changes
that have been made to the library
since it was imported.

update an existing Dimensionless Unit
Hydrograph Engineering Library using
current unit hydrograph ordinates that
been modified.
Import From LibraryLets you

import a unit hydrograph from an
existing Dimensionless Unit
Hydrograph Engineering Library.
Export To LibraryLets you export

the current unit hydrograph to an
existing Dimensionless Unit
Hydrograph Engineering Library.

a library to synchronize with the
current entry.
7-709
Stormwater Flow
Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph Curve Tab
New
This button creates a new row in the Q/Qp-T/

Tp table.
Delete

row from the Q/Qp-T/Tp table.
Notes Tab
This tab contains a text field that is used to

type descriptive notes that will be associated
with the hydrograph that is currently
highlighted in the Dimensionless Unit
Hydrograph Definition Pane.
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the

hydrograph that is currently highlighted in
the Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph
Definition Pane. If the hydrograph is derived
from an engineering library, the
synchronization details can be found here. If
the hydrograph was created manually for this
project, the synchronization details will
display the message Orphan (local),
indicating that the hydrograph was not
Dimensionless Unit
Hydrograph Curve Tab
7-710
T/Tp Column
Q/Qp is the ratio of actual flow to the peak flow of

the unit hydrograph.
Q/Qp Column
T/Tp is the ratio of actual time to the time-to-peak.
Notes Tab
This tab provides a text field that lets you enter

descriptive notes for the unit hydrograph that is
Loading
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the unit

hydrograph that is currently highlighted in the list
pane. If the hydrograph is derived from an
can be found here. If the hydrograph was created
indicating that the hydrograph was not derived
from a library entry.
Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph Curves Library Editor

This dialog allows you to create engineering library entries containing the Q/Qp-T/Tp
unit hydrographs that are used with the SCS Unit Hydrograph method. The following
controls are available in the Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph Curves dialog box:
New
Creates a new unit hydrograph that uses an

Delete

hydrograph.
Rename

unit hydrograph.
Report

the currently highlighted unit hydrograph.
Graph
Lets you plot a graph based on the input

data associated with the currently
highlighted unit hydrograph.
Modified Rational
The modified rational methods used in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i are listed below.
Rational C
7-711
Pipeline Infiltration
Time of concentration
(For more information, see Specifying a Time of Concentration (Tc) Method for
a Catchment on page 6-366.)
Receding limb multiplier

(For more information, see Calculation Option Attributes on page 8-737.)
You can add Time of Concentration (Tc) Methods to a catchment in your model.
SewerGEMS V8i supports 13 different methods.
For more information, see Specifying a Time of Concentration (Tc) Method for a
Catchment on page 6-366
Pipeline Infiltration
To model infiltration along a pipeline, it is possible to specify infiltration as:
Pipe length
Pipe area
Pipe diameter-length
Count
Hydrograph
Pattern load
The first four types of infiltration are constant rates while the last two are time varying
inflows. For more information on entering data for each type of infiltration, see
ConduitInfiltration on page 15-1312.
7-712
Loading
Note:
Infiltration loading will be ignored by the calculation engine if it

is assigned to a conduit whose upstream element is a Pond
Outlet Structure.
Conduit infiltration flow is added after the upstream section of
the conduit by the calculation engine. Therefore, when viewing
flow results,you will see the infiltration flow in the middle section
and the downstream section of the conduit.
Hydrograph Curve Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to enter Hydrograph Time vs. Flow data to create Hydrographs for use with the Hydrograph Infiltration Load type.
The dialog box contains the Hydrograph Time vs. Flow table along with the following
controls:
New
This button creates a new row in the timeflow table.
Delete

row from the time-flow table.
Report

dialog box.
Graph

hydrograph curve defined by the points in the
table

Column
Description
Hydrograph Time
This field allows you to define time of the

hydrograph curve point.
Flow
This field allows you to define flow at the

specified time for the hydrograph curve point.
7-713
Pond Infiltration
Pond Infiltration
Ponds can lose water by infiltration into groundwater. Any water lost by infiltration
does not show up in downstream links.
The user can specify "None" (default) if pond infiltration is not being considered. The
user can specify two alternative ways of entering pond infiltration rates:
1. a Constant Flow rate given in flow units
2. an Average Infiltration rate in depth per unit time which is multipied by the area of
the pond surface at that time step to determine the infiltration rate.
In applying either method, the model also has a stability filter when the pond water
depth is below 0.5 ft so that the infiltration rate will linearly reduce to zero as the
depth decreases to zero.
Extreme Flows
Extreme flow factors are generally used for computing peak discharges, and therefore
are typically referred to as peaking factors or peaking equations. However, since they
can also be used to compute minimum discharges, the term extreme flow factor is
more accurate and will be used throughout the program and documentation.
SewerGEMS V8i defines tabular and equation extreme flow factor methods in the
editable Engineering Libraries, thus allowing you to edit predefined methods and
insert new ones. The extreme flow factor can be user-defined with either of the
following:
Equation extreme flow factor method
Table extreme flow factor method
In both cases, the extreme flow factor method can be a function of either of the
following:
Contributing population
Base Load
Discharge based extreme flow methods can be used with any unit dry load. Population
based extreme flow methods can be used only with population-based unit sanitary and
non-population based unit sanitary loads that have population equivalents specified.
7-714
Loading
Note:
For tabular extreme flow factors, values above the maximum

specified value and below the minimum specified value are
linearly extrapolated by the software.
Extreme Flows Dialog

This dialog box allows you to create, edit, and view extreme flow factors.The dialog
box contains a toolbar, an Extreme Flows list pane, and two tabs. The toolbar contains
the following buttons:
New
Creates a new entry in the Extreme

Flows List Pane.
Duplicate
Creates a copy of the currently

highlighted entry in the Extreme Flows
List Pane.
7-715
Extreme Flows
Delete

highlighted in the Extreme Flows List
Pane.
Rename

currently highlighted in the Extreme
Flows List Pane.
Report

highlighted in the Extreme Flows List
Pane.
Synchronize


the Extreme Flow Factor Methods
Library.

command allows you to update a
Extreme Flow Factor Method that was
previously imported from a Extreme Flow
Factor Methods Engineering Library to
reflect changes that have been made to
the library since it was imported.
existing Extreme Flow Factor Methods
Engineering Library using current
Extreme Flow Factor Method entries that
been modified.

an existing Extreme Flow Factor
Methods Engineering Library.

entries to an existing Extreme Flow
Factor Methods Engineering Library.
The following table describes the rest of the controls in the Extreme Flows dialog box.
7-716
Loading
Extreme Flows List

Pane
Located on the left side of the dialog box, displays

a list of all of the extreme flow factors that have
been defined in the current project. Highlighting an
extreme flow factor in this list causes the Table or
Equation sections to display the data associated
with the highlighted extreme flow factor.
Table Section
When a Table-based Extreme Flow factor is

highlighted in the Extreme Flows List Pane, this
section contains the following controls. Extreme
flow factor values that fall outside of the range of
boundary values will be assigned the closest inrange value, either the first (lowest) or last
(highest) value.
New button
Adds a new row to the table.
Delete button
Removes the currently highlighted row from the

table.
Contributing
Population column
Thecontributing population for theassociated

extreme flow factor value. This column is only
available for population-based extreme flow
factors.
Base Load column
The base load for the associated extreme flow

factor value. This column is only available for loadbased extreme flow factors.
Extreme Flow Factor

column
The extreme flow factor value associated with the

base load or population value.
Equation Section
When an Equation-based Extreme Flow factor is

highlighted in the Extreme Flows List Pane, this
section contains the following controls.
Population Unit in
Equation
The unit in which population is defined. The

coefficients in the equation are based on this unit.
This column is only available for population-based
extreme flow factors.
Flow Unit
The unit in which flow is defined. The coefficients

in the equation are based on this unit. This column
is only available for load-based extreme flow
factors.
7-717
Extreme Flows
Cutoff Value
The maximum possible extreme flow factor for

peaking methods. This is used to
prevent unrealistically high values for small
populations or land areas.
c1
Equation coefficient.
c2
c3
e1
e2
m1
m2
Library Tab
Displays information pertaining to the catalog

entry that is currently highlighted in the List Pane,
including:
ID
Label
Modified Date
Library Source
Library Modified Date
Synchronization Status
SewerGEMS V8i uses a generic exponential equation to define any extreme flow
factor method. For population based extreme flow factor methods, the generic equation is:
e1
c2 m1 P
EFF c 1 -------------------------------e2
c3 m2 P
where P is population and c1, c2, c3, m1, m2, e1, and e2, are constants.
For discharge-based extreme flow factor methods the generic equation is:
7-718
Loading
e1
c2 m1 Q
-------------------------------EFF c 1
e2
c3 m2 Q
where Q is total sanitary (base) load and c1, c2, c3, m1, m2, e1, and e2, are constants.
Extreme Flow Setups Dialog

The Extreme Flow Setup dialog lets you define a list of Extreme Flow Setups. An
Extreme Flow Setup allows you to match unit sanitary loads with appropriate extreme
flow factor methods.
Each scenario can use a different Extreme Flow Setup, thus allowing you to model
different load alternatives (average, minimum daily, maximum daily, etc).
The dialog box contains a toolbar, an Extreme Flow Setups list pane, and a table
where the setup data is edited. The toolbar contains the following buttons:
New
Creates a new entry in the Extreme Flow

Setups List Pane.
Duplicate
Creates a copy of the currently

highlighted entry in the Extreme Flow
Setups List Pane.
Delete

highlighted in the Extreme Flow Setups
List Pane.
Rename

currently highlighted in the Extreme
Flow Setups List Pane.
Report

highlighted in the Extreme Flow Setups
List Pane.
The table on the right contains the following columns:
7-719
Extreme Flows
Use
When the box is checked the associated unit

sanitary loads will be used during calculations. If
the box is not checked the associated loads will be
ignored.
Unit Load
The sanitary load to be associated with an

Extreme Flow Method.
Extreme Flow Method
Lists the currently defined Extreme Flow factors.

Click the ellipsis button to open the Extreme Flows
dialog. You can also select a Constant method, in
which the unit load is multiplied by the userdefined Constant value.
Constant
Available only for the Constant Extreme Flow

Method, it simply multiplies the unit load
by that constant.
Adjustment Multiplier
Used to adjust an existing Extreme Flow Method.

The following formula is used:
EFF (new) = EFF (original) x AM
The Adjustment Multiplier does not change the
Extreme Flow Method, but changes the extreme
flow factor for the selected unit sanitary load.
None and Constant Extreme Flow Methods
cannot be adjusted.
Base Load Table Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define the base load table for extreme flow factor collections. It consists of the Base Load vs. Extreme Flow Factor table and the following
controls:
New
Adds a new row to the Base Load table.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted row in

the Base Load table.
The table consists of the following columns:

Base Load: Enter the base load value for the corresponding extreme flow factor.
Extreme Flow Factor: Enter the extreme flow factor for the corresponding base load
value.
7-720
Loading
7-721
Extreme Flows
7-722
Chapter
Calculating Your Model
Click one of the following links to learn how to calculate your model and work with
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i calculation features:
Calculation Options Manager on page 8-735
Creating Calculation Options on page 8-736
Calculation Executive Summary Dialog Box (Implicit Solver) on page 8-774
Calculation Detailed Summary Dialog Box (Implicit Solver) on page 8-775
User Notifications on page 8-795
Troubleshooting DynamicWave Model Calculations on page 8-806
Steady State/Extended Period Simulation

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i gives the choice between performing a steady-state analysis
of the system or performing an extended-period simulation over any time period.
Steady State Simulation

Steady-state analyses determine the operating behavior of the system at a specific
point in time or under steady-state conditions (flow rates and hydraulic grades remain
constant over time). Steady state simulations can be run with the GVF-rational solver
or GVF-convex solver (with Time Analysis Type set to "Steady" in Calculation
options. This type of analysis can be useful for determining pressures and flow rates
under minimum, average, and peak flows.
For this type of analysis, the network equations are determined and solved with wet
wells being treated as fixed grade boundaries. The results that are obtained from this
type of analysis are instantaneous values and may or may not be representative of the
values of the system a few hours, or even a few minutes, later in time.
8-727

In the GVF-rational solver, flows may not be additive at nodes because but CA values
are additive. For the GVF-convex solver, flows may not be additive when an Extreme
flow setup is specified as peaking factors will decrease moving downstream. If a
steady run is desired in the Explicit or Implicit solvers, maintaining a constant loading
over a run with no hydrographs can give roughly steady results, except for pump and
wet well cycling.
Extended Period Simulation

When the variation of the system attributes over time is important, an extended period
simulation is appropriate. This type of analysis allows you to model wet wells filling
and draining, regulating valves opening and closing, and pressures and flow rates
changing throughout the system in response to varying load conditions and automatic
control strategies formulated by the SewerGEMS V8i.
While a steady-state model may tell whether the system has the capability to route
calculated loads, an extended period simulation indicates whether the system has the
ability to provide acceptable levels of service over a period of minutes, hours, or days.
Data requirements for extended period simulations are greater than for steady-state
runs. In addition to the information required by a steady-state model, you also need to
determine load patterns and operational rules for pumps and valves.
The following additional information is required only when performing Extended
Period Simulation, and therefore is not enabled when Steady-State Analysis has been
specified.
8-728
Start TimeSelect the clock time at which the simulation begins.
DurationSpecify the total duration of an extended period simulation.
Hydraulic Time StepSelect the length of the calculation time step.
Override Reporting Time Step?Set to true if you want the Reporting Time
Step to differ from the Hydraulic Time Step.
Reporting Time StepData will be presented at every reporting time step. The
reporting time step should be a multiple of the hydraulic time step.

Note:
If you run an Extended Period Simulation, you can generate

graphs of the domain elements in the results by right-clicking an
element and selecting Graph.
Note:
Each of the parameters needed for an extended period analysis

has a default value. You will most likely want to change the
values to suit your particular analysis.
Occasionally the numerical engine will not converge during an
extended period analysis. This is usually due to controls
(typically based on tank elevations) or control valves (typically
pressure regulating valves) toggling between two operational
modes (on/off for pump controls, open/closed for pipe controls,
active/closed for valves). When this occurs, try adjusting the
hydraulic time step to a smaller value. This will minimize the
differences in boundary conditions between time steps, and may
allow for convergence.
Time Browser
Time Display
Shows the current time step that is displayed

Time Slider
Lets you manually move the slider

representing the currently displayed time step
along the bar, which represents the full length
of time that the scenario encompasses.
Go to Start
Sets the currently displayed time step to the

beginning of the simulation.
Play Backward
Sets the currently displayed time step from the

end to the beginning.
Step Backward
Returns the currently displayed time step to

the previous time step.
Pause/Stop
Stops the animation. Restarts it again with

another click.
Step
Advances the currently displayed time step to

the following time step.
8-729
Play
Advances the currently displayed time step

from beginning to end.
Go to End

end of the simulation.
Options
Opens the Time Browser Options dialog box.
Help
Opens Bentley SewerGEMS V8i online help.
Speed Slider
Lets you control the length of the delay

between time steps during animations.
Increment
Allows you to set the increment between

steps.
Time Browser Options Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define the animation settings that are applied when the
drawing pane is animated. It contains the following controls:
Frame Options
Increment
Controls the smoothness of the animation.

Each time step in a scenario counts as one
animation frame. This slider allows you to
specify the number of frames that are skipped
for each step in the animation. For example, if
there are time steps every 3 minutes in the
scenario and the slider is set at 3 frames, each
step in the animation represents 9 minutes of
scenario time when you click the Play button.
Looping Options
No Loop
8-730
Stops the animation at the end of the

simulation, if selected.
Loop Animation
Restarts the animation automatically, if

selected. When this option is selected, the
animation reaches the end of the simulation
and then restarts from the beginning.
Rocker Animation
Restarts the animation automatically in

reverse. When this option is selected, the
and then plays the simulation in reverse.
When the beginning of the simulation is
reached, the animation advances towards the
end again, and so on.
Long Term Continuous Simulations (LTCS) in SewerGEMS /

CivilStorm Using the SWMM Engine
SewerGEMS and CivilStorm can now more easily leverage SWMM's ability to run
simulations over very long durations (years vs. days). Here are few notes to keep in
mind when attempting to work through the process.
Rainfall
Commonly, LTCS's are used to test sewer models with many years worth of rainfall
data. Although, you can manually enter in this data directly into the Storm Data
Group Library, CivilStorm and SewerGEMS now have the capability to reference
external rainfall files when using the SWMM engine. This functionality eliminates
the necessity of entering years worth of rainfall data into the CivilStorm/SewerGEMS
Storm Libraries and allows you to directly access rainfall stored in many common
formats including:
DSI-3240
DSI-3260
HLY03, HLY21
FIF21
And a generic SWMM specific format which works as follows where each line of
the file contains the station ID, year, month, day, hour, minute, and non-zero
precipitation reading, all separated by one or more spaces.
STA01 2004 6 12 00 00 0.12
STA01 2004 6 12 01 00 0.04
STA01 2004 6 22 16 00 0.07
8-731

For more information on how SWMM utilizes external rain files see the SWMM user
manual section 11.3 here: http://www.epa.gov/ednnrmrl/models/swmm/
epaswmm5_user_manual.pdf
When setting up a reference to a rainfall file in the Storm Data dialog, note that not all
data is required for all data types. For example when using the SWMM specific
format, you will need to set the Rain Data File Type, the Station ID and the interval,
for other file types this data may be implicit in the file. Also, if the Rain Data File
contains multiple stations you can create multiple references to the same file, by
clicking the add button in the Rain File Storm Data section.
Note:
That Rainfall Files only work when using the SWMM engine.
Runoff Calculations
The SWMM engine only directly supports the EPA-SWMM runoff method when
computing runoff off of catchments. When using other runoff methods, the hydrographs are computed using a separate engine and passed into the SWMM engine as
opposed to the SWMM engine computing the hydrographs directly. Therefore, it is
highly recommended, if not necessary in most cases to use the EPA-SWMM runoff
method when performing a LTCS for these reasons:
1. You will be able to take into account Climate Data, Snow Melt, and Groundwater,
all of which play a more active role in runoff computations over longer durations.
2. When computing the hydrographs independently of SWMM you are restricted to
32,000 points per catchment. This may require you to use larger time steps than
desired to span larger periods of time.
3. If you have many catchments with large number of runoff points, not using the
EPA-SWMM runoff method could overly bloat the SWMM input data.
When running a LTCS with a SewerGEMS/CivilStorm model using the SWMM
engine, you can save considerable time during the overall runs by saving the calculated hydrology data using a Runoff Interface file through the SWMM calc options.
This procedure is useful, once catchment and rainfall data has been well established in
the model and only data associated with the sewer needs adjusting. To perform the
procedure:
1. In the SWMM Calculation Options change the Runoff File Mode from None to
Save, and select a location to save the Runoff File.
2. Compute the model.
3. Change the Runoff File Mode from Save to Use.
From now on when you compute the model SWMM will use the runoff hydrographs
stored in the Runoff File instead of recomputing them. Obviously, if any of your
catchment or climate data changes you will need to rebuild the Runoff File.
8-732
Restricting Results
Running a LTCS with the SWMM engine has the potential to generate an unwieldy
amount of results. In some cases it might be worthwhile to restrict results generated
to a few proxy elements then for every element in the model, especially for very large
models over long periods of time. You can do this by setting the Catchments, Nodes,
and Links Results Type in the SWMM calculation options. You can set the type to
either All Results, No Results, or choose a selection set. If the Selection Set is chosen,
results will be generated for elements of the appropriate type in the selection set.
Compute Center
The compute center is a dialog box that enables the user to quickly and easily keep
track of and modify high level settings for the current scenario. At a glance, the user
can determine what the current scenario is, what the active solver is and what set of
calculation options are being used. The user can also change these without getting into
the detailed scenario selection and calculation options dialogs. The Compute Center is
shown below.
The buttons on the top row enable the user to open other dialogs and include the
following:
8-733
Compute Center
Scenario - opens scenario manager
Alternatives - opens alternative manager
Calculation Options - opens calculation options manager
Time Browser - opens time browser
Calculation Summary - opens calculation summary
User Notifications - opens user notifications
Help - opens this help topic
The scenario row displays the current scenario and enables the user to switch
scenarios.
The Compute button
runs the current scenario and the drop down list next to
it enables the user to make batch runs.
The Validate button

The Properties button
starts the scenario validation.

displays the properties for the current scenario.
Under Calculation Options, the calculation option for the current scenario is listed
and can be changed.
In the General category, the solver associated with the current scenario is listed and
can be changed. See help topic Solvers (Numerical) on page 8-765 for details.
The remaining properties listed depend upon the solver and time analysis type. If the
run is steady as in GVF-Rational or GVF-convex with the steady option, time properties are not listed while for unsteady (dynamic or EPS runs), time properties are listed.
In general, the properties listed are the most important calculation options. If a calculation option is not listed, the user can view them by selecting Calculation options in
the Compute center or in the main menu.
8-734
Calculation Options Manager

You create calculation options in the Calculation Options Manager. The Calculation
Options Manager consists of a list pane that displays all of the calculation options
associated with the current project, and a toolbar that contains some common
commands.
To display the Calculation Options Manager, select Analysis > Calculation Options.
The Calculation Options manager allows you to create options that contain various
calculation settings. The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the options
currently contained in the project, along with a toolbar.
New
Creates a new calculation option. Define

the attributes for the option in the
Property Editor.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted option.
Rename
Lets you rename the currently

highlighted calculation option.
Help
Displays online help for the Calculation

Options manager.
If the Property Editor is open, highlighting an option in the list causes the settings that
make up the option appear there. If the Property Editor is not open, you can display
the settings that make up the option by highlighting the desired option and clicking the
Properties button in the Calculation Options Manager.
Related Topics
Creating Calculation Options on page 8-736
Calculation Option Attributes on page 8-737
User Notifications Manager on page 8-796
8-735
Creating Calculation Options

Calculation options contain attributes that define how your model is calculated in
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i. You create calculation options in the Calculation Options
Manager. You can create several calculation options with different attributes
depending on the requirements of your project.
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i contains a default calculation option called Base Calculation Options. If you do not create additional calculation options, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i will use this default option whenever you calculate your model.
To create a calculation option:
1. Open the Calculation Options Manager by selecting Analysis > Calculation
Options.
2. Click the New button. A new option appears in the list with a default name.
3. Type a new name for the option.
4. Double-click the new option to display its attributes in the Property Editor. Edit
the attributes as required.
Editing a Calculation Option
You edit the attributes of a calculation option in the Property Editor.
If you select a calculation option while the Property Editor is open, the attributes for
that option appear there. If the Property Editor is not open, you can display the
attributes of the calculation option by double-clicking the option in the Calculation
Options Manager.
Deleting a Calculation Option
To delete a calculation option:
Options.
2. Select the option you want to delete.
3. Press the Delete key, click the Delete button in the Calculation Options Manager,
or right-click the option and select Delete from the shortcut menu.
8-736

Renaming Calculation Options
To rename calculation options:
Options.
2. Select the option you want to rename.
3. Click the Rename button or right-click and select Rename from the shortcut
menu.
4. Type a new name for the option, then press Enter.
Related Topics
Calculation Options Manager on page 8-735
Calculation Option Attributes on page 8-737
User Notifications Manager on page 8-796
Calculation Option Attributes

Calculation Options contain the information described in the following table.
Table 8-1: Calculation Option Attributes

Attribute
Description
General
Label
Specify a name for the calculation option.
Notes
Enter descriptive text to be associated with the current

calculation profile.
Calculation Options
8-737

Attribute
Description
Calculation
Type
Identifies the numerical solver to be used . The solvers include:
Explicit (SWMM)
Implicit (Dynamic Wave)
GVF-convex (gradually varied flow with convex routing)
GVF-rational (gradually varied flow with ration method

hydrology)
The solver selected will affect the properties in the grid below
as some are only available for specific solvers while others
pertain to all solvers.
While it is possible to select any solver from any product,
SewerCAD will only run scenario with the GVF-convex solver
and StormCAD will only run scenarios with the GVF-rational
solver.
Note that if a catchment is using the EPA SWMM runoff
method and not using the same default infiltration method
specified in the SWMM calc options then neither hydrology or
network will calculate.
If the user is not using the EPA SWMM runoff method, then
any combination of other runof methods can be used.
8-738
Time Analysis
Type
If the user selects GVF-convex as the solver type, then this

property determines whether a steady or extended period
simulation is to be run. If Steady State is selected, most of the
time related properties below are not available and the only
additional property in this category is Calculation Type.
Simulation
Start Date
Select the calendar date on which the simulation begins.
Simulation
Start Time
Select the clock time at which the simulation begins.
Duration
Type
Choose between User Defined Duration (e.g. 48 hours) or End

Date/End Time (e.g. 2/28/2014 12:00:00 AM). Default = User
Defined.
Duration
If duration type is set to User Defined, set the duration (default

= 24 hrs).
End Date
If Duration Type is set to End Date/End Time, specify the end

date (default = same as start date).

Attribute
Description
End Time
If Duration Type is set to End Date/End Time, specify the end

time (default = same as start time).
Minimum Tc
This is the minimum time of concentration. If a computed time

of concentration on a catchment is less than this value, this
value is used instead.
Hydrologic
Routing Time
Step
When the GVF-convex solver is selected, this is where the user

specifies the increment for the convex routing of flows in
gravity subnetworks. This should be an even increment of the
hydraulic time step. This is also the time step for the pressure
subnetworks, although intermediate time steps may be inserted
by the pressure solver based on pump switches. Default = 0.1
hr
Hydraulic
Time Step
When the GVF-convex solver is selected, this is where the user

specifies the increment between which hydraulic properties
(e.g. velocity, depth) are calculated using gradually varied flow
methods based on flows from the convex routing. Default = 1
hr.
Reporting
Time Step
For the GVF-convex solver, the user can control the amount of
results that are reported. The default is "All". However with
this solver, the user can specify a large Constant time step or
can only save results for some specific time steps if Varied is
selected.
Report Start
Time
For the explicit solver, time at which reports will begin to be

saved.
Report Start
Date
For the explicit solver, date at which reports will begin to be

saved.
Calculation
Type
For a GVF-convex steady state simulation, this property

establishes whether an analysis (simulation) or a design (pipe
and invert sizing) run is to be made. Default = Analysis.
Output
Increment
Allows user to set the Output Increment you want to use to

display the output hydrographs of a network analysis.
Calculation
Time Step
Lets you specify the computational time step in hydrodynamic

calculations. See Troubleshooting DynamicWave Model
Calculations on page 8-806 for more information.
8-739

Attribute
Description
Receding
Limb
Multiplier
Helps define the shape of the modified rational hydrograph.

The receding limb of all modified rational hydrographs are
taken to occur over a duration obtained by multiplying this
value by the Tc. Refer to local design policy and practices to
determine the appropriate value of Tc. The default value is 1.0.
Calculation Options (Implicit)
8-740
Y Iteration
Tolerance
In the implicit numerical scheme, Newton iteration converge

criteria for depth/elevation. It is strongly recommended to use
the default value.
LPI
Coefficient
Coefficient for advanced LPI supercritical-subcritical mix flow

computation algorithm. It is strongly recommended to use the
default value. The default value is 1.0. When the model is
unstable or when the calculated results do not reflect some
significant backwater effects, the user can try increasing the
LPI value as high as 15.
NR Weighting
Coefficient
Implicit numerical scheme Newton iteration weighting factor.

A Larger value tends to increase stability, but at the cost of
performance. We suggest using the default value or values
between 0.6 and 0.85, but values between 0.1 and 1.0 are valid.
Use 0.98 - 1.0 in very difficult cases. See Troubleshooting
DynamicWave Model Calculations on page 8-806 for more
information.
NR Iterations
Allowed maximum Newton iterations in one time step during

the numerical solution process. This attribute value is used to
prevent the numerical solver from unlimited iterations under
situations when the solver is unable to reach convergence.
Relaxation
Weighting
Coefficient
Implicit numerical scheme relaxation factor for network

computations. The range of valid values is between 0.5 and
0.9.

Attribute
Description
Computation
Distance
Implicit numerical scheme computational distance interval.

The model will automatically insert additional computational
sections based on this value, a small value increases stability
while large value increases performance.
Computational distance is the lesser of
one half the pipe length
or
default distance
See Troubleshooting DynamicWave Model Calculations on

page 8-806 for more information.
Start Type
By default the engine assumes a dry condition to start the

simulation; i.e., all inflows are zero and all depths are zero in
all elements at the beginning. For situations in which the user
wants a non-zero starting flow or the catchments hydrology
calculations to give none-zero flows, the model provides two
options to start the simulation: select Warm Up Time for a
warm-up start or Transition Start for a transitional start. In a
warm-up start, the model estimates initial depths based on nonzero inflows and uses a user-specified warm-up time (entered
in the Warm Up Time field) to approach steady state
conditions prior to starting the actual simulation. In a transition
start, the model initiates the simulation from zero flows and
immediately reaches the actual none-zero flows in the first
time step and continued the simulation. See Troubleshooting
DynamicWave Model Calculations on page 8-806 for more
information.
Note that if the model is a looped network then the warm-up
start will be disabled, because of the difficulty in estimating
the non-zero initial conditions for complex looped networks.
Warm Up
Time
Lets you enter a warm-up time for warm-up starts. This field is
available only when the user selects Warm Up Time as the
Start Type.
8-741

Attribute
Description
Virtual Flow
Depth
This is an option used in the implicit solver to overcome the

calculation instabilities when the conduit is in dry (zero flow)
or when the flow is very small. Under very small flow
conditions the implicit numerical solver for St. Venant
equations tends to be unstable so the model adds a small
artificial "virtual flow" to maintain the stability. The virtual
flow can be specified using this virtual depth calculation
option value. The model determines the virtual flow based on
the virtual depth for each link. The default value of 0.04 ft has
been tested and works well for a wide range of conditions.
Generally speaking a larger value will further increase stability
while a smaller value may increase accuracy for small flows
for the same cases. The Y-Iteration tolerance for the Newton
iteration may be also reduced together with lowing virtual flow
depth.
Calculation Options (Explicit)
Routing Time
Step
Specify the computational time step in routing calculations.
Inertial
Terms
Define how the inertial terms in the St. Venant momentum

equation will be handled:
Allow
Ponding at
Gravity
Structures
8-742
KeepMaintains these terms at their full value under all

conditions.
DampenReduces the terms as flow comes closer to

being critical and ignores them when flow is supercritical.
IgnoreDrops the terms altogether from the momentum

equation, producing what is essentially a Diffusion Wave
solution.
Select whether or not to allow excess water to collect at gravity

structures and be re-introduced into the system as conditions
permit. Select True to allow ponding at gravity structures in
your model. In order for ponding to actually occur at a
particular node, you must enter a non-zero value for the nodes
Ponded Area attribute.

Attribute
Description
Use Variable
Time Step?
Select whether or not to use a variable time step. The variable

step is computed for each time period to prevent an excessive
change in water depth at each node. Select True to use a
variable time step. a safety factor (between 10 and 200%) that
will be applied against the variable time step as automatically
derived to preserve the Courant stability criterion.
Time Step
Multiplier
(%)
Enter a safety factor (between 10 and 200%) to be applied

against the variable time step as automatically derived to
preserve the Courant stability criterion. This field is available
only if you select True in the Use Variable Time Step? field.
Routing
Method
Select which method to use to route flows through the

conveyance system. Select Uniform Flow, Kinematic Wave,
or Dynamic Wave.
Define Super
Critical Flow
Select the basis used to determine when supercritical flow

occurs in a conduit.
Minimum
Surface Area
(Acres)
Enter the minimum surface area to be used at nodes when

computing changes in water depth. If you enter 0, then the
default value of 12.566 ft2 (i.e., the area of a 4-ft diameter
manhole) is used.
Time Step For

Conduit
Lengthening
Enter the time step, in seconds, used to artificially lengthen

conduits so that they meet the Courant stability criterion under
full-flow conditions (i.e., the travel time of a wave will not be
smaller than the specified conduit lengthening time step). As
this value is decreased, fewer conduits will require
lengthening. A value of 0 means that no conduits will be
lengthened.
Skip Steady
State Periods?
Setting this option to True will make the simulation use the
most recently computed conveyance system flows during a
steady state period instead of computing a new flow routing
solution. A time step is considered to be in steady state if the
change in external inflow at each node is below 0.5 cfs and the
relative difference between total system inflow and outflow is
below 5.
8-743

Attribute
Description
Minimum
Conduit Slope
The minimum value allowed for a conduits slope. If zero (the

default) then no minimum is imposed, although the explicit
solver uses a lower limit on elevation drop of 0.001 ft (0.00035
m) when computing a conduit slope.
Calculation Options (SWMM Hydrology)
Default
Infiltration
Method
Lets you determine how to model infiltration of rainfall into

the upper soil zone of subcatchments. Select Horton, GreenAmpt, or SCS CN. If you change this attribute, you will have
to re-enter values for the infiltration parameters in each
subcatchment.
SWWMM
Hydrologic
Increment
Lets you specify the computational time step in SWMM

hydrology runoff calculations.
Dry Step
(hours)
Enter the time step length used for runoff computations

(consisting essentially of pollutant buildup) during periods
when there is no rainfall and no ponded water. This must be
greater or equal to the Hydrologic Routing Time Step.
Antecedent
Dry Period
The number of days with no rainfall prior to the start of the

simulation. This value is used to compute an initial buildup of
pollutant load on the subcatchment surfaces.
Start
Sweeping On
Enter the day of the year (month/day) when street sweeping

operations begin. The default is January 1.
End Sweeping
On
Enter the day of the year (month/day) when street sweeping

operations end. The default is December 31.
Inlets
Active
Components
for
Combination
Inlets on
Grade
8-744
Select the active openings for combination inlets on grade.

Attribute
Description
Active
Components
for
Combination
Inlets In Sag
Select the active openings for combination inlets in sag.
Neglect
Gutter Cross
Slope For
Side Flow?
If True, when grate width is less than gutter width, gutter cross
slope is used to determine side flow.
Neglect Side
Flow?
If True, only frontal views wuill be included in the inlet

calculations.
Calculation Options (Convex/Pressure)
Peak Flow
Ratio
Used when selecting a representative flow rate from the

hydrograph to be routed when calculating the C parameter
used to perform the convex routing calculations.
Steady State
Hydrograph
Equivalent
Specify how the software should handle hydrographs during a

steady state analysis.
Extreme Flow
Setup
Select an Extreme Flow Setup for the current calculation.
Pattern Setup
Pattern setups allow the user to match unit sanitary (dry

weather) loads with appropriate loading patterns. Specify a
default Pattern Setup to associate with each Calculation
Option. Each scenario can use a different Pattern Setup, thus
allowing the user to model different loading alternatives for
different extended period simulations.
Minimum
Convex C for
Adverse
Conduits
The convex coefficient for large negative sloped pipe

(channel) can be too small and this can result in unrealistic
flow attenuation through the pipe. By using a minimum
convex C option you can improve the results; a value of
between 0.3 and 0.5 is suggested.
Gravity Hydraulics
8-745

8-746
Attribute
Description
Minimum
Time of
Concentratio
n
User defined lower limit for the amount of time it takes for
water to travel from the farthest point in the watershed to an
inlet.
Maximum
Network
Transversals
Maximum number of iterations that will be performed when

solving GVF equations.
Flow
Convergence
Test
This value is taken as the maximum relative change in

discharge occurring at the system outfall between two
successive network solutions. In rational hydrology, system
discharge is a function of travel time and hydraulics through
the system. Therefore, it is necessary to iterate until the system
balances, or a maximum number of trials has occurred.
Shear Stress
(Global
Minimum)
The global minimum allowable shear stress in the conduit.

Value is compared with calculated shear stress in conduit to
determine if adequate scouring is occurring.
Flow Profile
Method
Allows you to choose between a backwater and capacity

analysis flow option method. Default is backwater.
Number of
Flow Profile
Steps
The gradually varied flow option divides each pipe into

internal segments prior to calculation of the hydraulic grade.
The default value of option steps is five, and it is
recommended that the value entered here be at least five for
accuracy. Increasing this number will increase the accuracy of
the hydraulic grade calculation, but will increase the
calculation time.
Hydraulic
Grade
Convergence
Test
The value entered here is taken as the maximum absolute

change between two successive iterations of hydraulic grade at
any junction or inlet in the system. For a given discharge, the
upstream propagation of headlosses through pipes will
continue until two successive calculations change by an
absolute difference of less than this test value. Default is 0.001
ft.
The Hydraulic Grade Convergence Test value is used in the
standard step gradually varied flow profiling algorithm. The
calculations is assumed to converge to the solution when the
two successive depth iterations are within this absolute test
value.

Attribute
Description
Average
Velocity
Method
This section allows you to pick the method used to calculate

the average travel time velocity. The following four options are
available:
Actual Uniform Flow Velocity (default)
Full Flow Velocity
Simple Average Velocity
Weighted Average Velocity
Minimum
Structure
Headloss
This section allows you to specify a minimum structure

headloss. If the system calculates a structure headloss that is
lower than this value, the value specified in the Minimum
Headloss field will be used.
This option applies to all structure headloss methods except for
the Absolute Method. Absolute headlosses will not be
overridden, even if they are less than the value specified in this
option.
Governing
Upstream
Pipe Selection
Method
Select the method for selecting the upstream pipe when

computing the headloss for a structure using the Generic
Headloss Method.
Structure
Loss Mode
Choose either Hydraulic Grade (default)or Energy Grade as

the basis for the hydraulic calculations.
Report
Hydrologic
Time Step?
If True, hydrographs will be reported in the hydrologic

increment.
Save Detailed
Headloss
Data?
If True, the detailed headloss data will be saved after

computation. If False, the detailed headloss data (the
AASHTO results for manholes) used in the computations will
not be saved, resulting in a smaller results file.
Gravity
Friction
Method
Select the global friction method for gravity elements. The

choices include Manning's, Darcy-Weisbach, Hazen-Williams
or Kutter's. Default is Manning's.
Liquid Label
Label which describes the type of liquid used in the simulation.
8-747

Attribute
Description
Liquid
Kinematic
Viscosity
Ratio of the liquids dynamic, or absolute, viscosity to its mass

density. Default is water at 20C.
Use Explicit
Depth and
Slope
Equations?
If true then explicit depth and slope equations will be used.

Default is False. The GVF hydraulics solver computes the
water profile by backwater calculations in which the control
depths (normal depth and critical depth) and critical slope play
important roles. The solver normally calculates the normal
depth, critical depth and critical slope by iterative methods.
For very large models, or models that have a long run duration
with a very small hydraulic time step, the iterative methods can
result in slow computation performance. In order to improve
the performance a method of using highly accurate explicit
equations can be used by enabling this option. This method
uses simple polynomial fitting equations to the theoretical
normal depth, critical depth and critical slope equations for
circular pipes and can provides reliable and robust solutions
with much improved (as much as 50% faster) computation
performance. The technical details can be found in Jin &
Walski, Efficient Equations for Circular Partly-full Pipe
Hydraulics, Proc. EWRI 2011 conference.
Ignore Travel
Time in
Carrier
pipes?
Ignore the travel time in carrier pipes (pipes with no

subcatchment connected to their upstream node) when
computing system time at the node immediately downstream
of the carrier pipe in rational method hydrology. Default is
False..
Correct for
Partial Area
Effects?
If False (default), the software will always adopt the largest

system time from all incoming flows. If True, when two or
more rational flows enter a single node, the software will adopt
the system time that produces the largest rational flow. A larger
partial area flow will be carried downstream until the total
area flows exceed it.
Headloss - AASHTO
Bend Angle
vs. Bend Loss
Curve
8-748
Opens the Bend Angle vs Bend Loss Curve dialog, allowing

you to modify the default curve.

Attribute
Description
Expansion,
Ke
Adjustment coefficient used in AASHTO equation to account

for expansion of the flow on the exit from incoming pipe.
Contraction,
Kc
Adjustment coefficient used in the AASHTO equation to

account for contraction of the flow on the entrance in the
outfall pipe.
Shaping
Adjustment,
Cs
Adjustment coefficient used in the AASHTO equation for

junction headloss calculation to account for partial diameter
inlet shaping (equivalent to Half and Full in HEC-22). If inlet
shaping is used then the headloss is decreased by this factor
(50% default).
Non-Piped
Flow
Adjustment,
Cn
If non-piped flow accounts for 10% or more of the total

structure outflow, a correction factor is applied to the total loss.
By default, this value is a 30% increase in headloss (a factor of
1.3) as documented in the AASHTO manual, but can be
changed by the user.
HEC-22 Energy Losses
Elevations
Considered
Equal Within
The maximum elevation distance that pipes entering a node

can be separated by and still be considered to be at the same
elevation.
Consider
Non-Piped
Plunging
Flow
If this value is set to True, plunging correction factor for nonpiped flow will be applied during the calculation.
HEC-22 Energy Losses (Second Edition)
Flat
Unsubmerged
Factor
Benching correction factor used in the HEC-22 Method for a

flat unsubmerged transition structure.
Flat
Submerged
Factor

flat unsubmerged transition structure.
Depressed
Unsubmerged
Factor

depressed unsubmerged transition structure.
8-749

Attribute
Description
Depressed
Submerged
Factor

depressed submerged transition structure.
Half Bench
Unsubmerged
Factor

half bench unsubmerged transition structure.
Half Bench
Submerged
Factor

half bench submerged transition structure.
Full Bench
Unsubmerged
Factor

full bench unsubmerged transition structure.
Full Bench
Submerged
Factor

full bench submerged transition structure.
Improved
Bench
Unsubmerged
Factor
Benching correction factor used in the HEC-22 Method for an

unsubmerged and bench type transition structure.
Improved
Bench
Submerged
Factor

submerged and bench type transition structure.
HEC-22 Energy Losses (Third Edition)
8-750
Flat
Unsubmerged
Coefficient
Benching correction coefficient used in the HEC-22 Method

for a flat unsubmerged transition structure.
Flat
Submerged
Coefficient

for a flat unsubmerged transition structure.
Depressed
Unsubmerged
Coefficient

for a depressed unsubmerged transition structure.

Attribute
Description
Depressed
Submerged
Coefficient

for a depressed submerged transition structure.
Half Bench
Unsubmerged
Coefficient

for a half bench unsubmerged transition structure.
Half Bench
Submerged
Coefficient

for a half bench submerged transition structure.
Full Bench
Unsubmerged
Coefficient

for a full bench unsubmerged transition structure.
Full Bench
Submerged
Coefficient

for a full bench submerged transition structure.
Improved
Bench
Unsubmerged
Coefficient

for an unsubmerged and bench type transition structure.
Improved
Bench
Submerged
Coefficient

for a submerged and bench type transition structure.
Pressure Hydraulics
Liquid
Specific
Gravity
Ratio of the specific weight of the liquid to the specific weight

of water.
Wet Well
Increment
Unless a wet well is set to Fixed Level, this is the increment

that is used to attempt to balance the wet well level such that
the total flow out is greater than the total flow in.
8-751

Attribute
Description
Use Pumped
Flows?
In a steady state run, in pressure subnetworks, the flow from

the network is calculated using pressure equations, the
characteristics of the system and number of pumps running.
For that flow rate to be passed to the downstream gravity
system, the user should set this property to "True" (default).
In some cases, the user will not want to use that flow but would
rather pass a loading to the downstream system based on
upstream loads and appropriate extreme flow factors similar to
the way flows are handled in the gravity system. To pass those
flows on to the downstream gravity system, the user sets this
property to "False".
In general, using pumped flows (True) is used when the user
wants to look at the peak flows when the pumps are running,
while using the loadings (False) gives more of a true picture as
one moves far downstream from the pressure system and the
effects of pump cycling become diminished.
8-752
Use Linear
Interpolation
for Multipoint
Pumps?
If set to true, the engine will use linear interpolation to

interpret the pump curve as opposed to quadratic interpolation.
Default is False.
Accuracy
Unitless number that defines the convergence criteria for the

iterative solution of the network hydraulic equations. When the
sum of the absolute flow changes between successive
iterations in all links is divided by the sum of the absolute
flows in all links, and is less than the Accuracy value, the
solution is said to have converged. The default value is 0.001
and the minimum allowed value is 1.0e-5.
Trials
Maximum number of iterations to be performed for each

hydraulic solution. Default is 40.
Use Controls
During
Steady State?
When this box is checked, controls will be active during

Steady State analyses.

Attribute
Description
Pressure
Friction
Method
Lets you select a default friction method for all pressure pipes
in your model. Select Mannings, Hazen-Williams, DarcyWeisbach, or Kutters. The Property Editor attributes for
pressure pipes are updated with the default friction method
selected here.
SWMM Interface Files
Rainfall File
Mode
Rainfall File
Rainfall files are binary files that can be saved and reused from
one analysis to the next. The rainfall interface file collates a
series of separate rain gage files into a single rainfall data file.
Normally a temporary file of this type is created for every
SWMM analysis that uses external rainfall data files and is
then deleted after the analysis is completed. However, if the
same rainfall data are being used with many different analyses,
requesting SWMM to save the rainfall interface file after the
first run and then reusing this file in subsequent runs can save
computation time. The following file modes are available:
None-When this option is selected, no Rainfall File will be

used or saved.
Use-When this option is selected, the Rainfall File field will

become available, allowing you to select the rainfall file to
use.
Save-When this option is selected, the Rainfall File field

will become available, allowing you to specify the name
and location for the rainfall file to be saved.
This field is only available when the Rainfall File Mode is set
to Use or Save, and allows you to specify the rainfall file to be
used or saved, respectively.
8-753

Attribute
Description
Runoff File
Mode
This option can be used to save the runoff results generated

from a simulation run. If runoff is not affected in future runs,
the user can request that SWMM use this interface file to
supply runoff results without having to repeat the runoff
calculations again. The following file modes are available:
None-When this option is selected, no Runoff File will be
used or saved.
Use-When this option is selected, the Runoff File field will

become available, allowing you to select the runoff file to
use.
Save-When this option is selected, the Runoff File field will

become available, allowing you to specify the name and
location for the runoff file to be saved.
Runoff File
This field is only available when the Runoff File Mode is set to
Use or Save, and allows you to specify the runoff file to be
used or saved, respectively.
RDII File
Mode
The RDII interface file is a text file that contains a time series
of rainfall-dependent infiltration/inflow flows for a specified
set of drainage system nodes. This file can be generated from a
previous SWMM run when Unit Hydrographs and nodal RDII
inflow data have been defined for the project, or it can be
created outside of SWMM using some other source of RDII
data (e.g., through measurements or output from a different
computer program).
RDII File
8-754
None-When this option is selected, no RDII File will be

used or saved.
Use-When this option is selected, the RDII File field will

become available, allowing you to select the RDII file to
use.
Save-When this option is selected, the RDII File field will

become available, allowing you to specify the name and
location for the RDII file to be saved.
This field is only available when the RDII File Mode is set to
Use or Save, and allows you to specify the RDII file to be used
or saved, respectively.

Attribute
Description
Save Hot
Start File?
Hot start files are binary files created by SWMM that contain
hydraulic and water quality variables for the drainage system
at the end of a run. These data consist of the water depth and
concentration of each pollutant at each node of the system as
well as the flow rate and concentration of each pollutant in
each link. The hot start file saved after a run can be used to
define the initial conditions for a subsequent run.
Hot start files can be used to avoid the initial numerical
instabilities that sometimes occur under Dynamic Wave
routing. For this purpose they are typically generated by
imposing a constant set of base flows (for a natural channel
network) or set of dry weather sanitary flows (for a sewer
network) over some startup period of time. The resulting hot
start file from this run is then used to initialize a subsequent
run where the inflows of real interest are imposed.
It is also possible to both use and save a hot start file in a single
run, starting off the run with one file and saving the ending
results either to the same or to another file. The resulting file
can then serve as the initial conditions for a subsequent run if
need be. This technique can be used to divide up extremely
long continuous simulations into more manageable pieces.
When this field is set to True a hot start file will be generated
from the end results of the run.
Hot Start File

to Save
This field is only available when the Save Hot Start File?
option is set to True, and allows you to specify the hot start file
to be saved.
Use Hot Start

File?
When this field is set to True you can specify a hot start file to
initialize the SWMM calculation run.
Hot Start File

to Use
This field is only available when the Use Hot Start File? option
is set to True, and allows you to specify the hot start file to be
used.
Use Inflow
File?
If True you can specify an inflow file to load the SWMM

network.
Inflow File to
Use
Specify the path to the inflow file to be used.
8-755

Attribute
Description
Save Outflow
File?
If True you can generate a SWMM outflow file.
Outflow File
to Save
Specify the path to the outflow file to be saved.
Explicit Results Control
Catchment
Results Type
Specify the degree of results to be generated for catchments.
Nodes Results
Type
Specify the degree of results to be generated for nodes.
Links Results
Type
Specify the degree of results to be generated for links.
SWMM
Pattern Mode
Choose how patterns are handled by the SWMM engine.
Apply
SWMM
Control Set?
When this proprty is set to True, you can apply a SWMM

control set to the calculation run.
SWMM
Control Set
Specify the SWMM control set to be applied to the calculation

run.
Inlets
Active
Components
for
Combination
Inlets on
Grade
8-756
Select the active openings for combination inlets on grade.

Attribute
Description
Active
Components
for
Combination
Inlets in Sag
Select the active openings for combination inlets in sag.
Neglect
Gutter Cross
Slope for Side
Flow?
If True, when grate width is less than gutter width, gutter cross
slope is used to determine side flow.
Neglect Side
Flow?
If True, only frontal views will be included in the inlet

calculations.
Inlet
Transition
Depth
A depth that is used to transition hydraulic calculations

between surcharge dynamic calculation and non-surcharged
inlet calculation. See Inlet Transition Depth.
What is the Difference Between the Implicit and SWMM Engines?

The "engine" refers to the type of numerical finite difference solution used to solve the
St. Venant equations, which describe unsteady one-dimensional, free surface flow.
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i contains two types of engines:
The implicit engine uses a four-point implicit finite difference solver to find the
numerical solutions for the hydrodynamic Saint-Venant equations. The implicit
engine tends to be more stable than an explicit solver. The implicit engine in
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i is based on the solver in the National Weather Service
FLDWAV model.
The SWMM engine uses the solver from the EPA Stormwater Management
Model version 5. This is an explicit solver which, while more prone to stability
problems, exactly matches the results from SWMM 5.
There is an initial elevation attribute for manholes using the SWMM engine so
that the calculation can simulate a filling process if the initial elevation is lower
than the downstream start elevation. However in the Implicit engine the manhole
initial elevation is not considred, so the initial mahole elevation is assumed to be
the same as the downstream start elevation.
Inflow hydrographs are also handled differently by the two engines. The implicit
engine interpolates flows between the final flow in the hydrograph and the end time.
The SWMM engine assumes that all flows after the final inflow point are zero.
8-757

You select the engine you want to use in the Calculation Options manager.
Note:
If a catchment is using the EPA SWMM runoff method and not

using the default infiltration method specified in the SWMM
calculation options then neither hydrology or network will
calculate.
If the user is not using the EPA SWMM runoff method, then any
combination of other runof methods can be used.
SWMM Treats Pump and Their Discharge Lines Differently Than

the Implicit Engine. How Do I Handle the Differences, Especially If I
Want to Use Both Engines?
SWMM can "model" a force main without accounting for the hydraulics of the force
main from the pump. You simply specify the discharge node for the force main and the
water arrives there. In Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, the hydraulics of the discharge
conduit are explicitly considered.
If you want to get consistent results for a pump line in SWMM and the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i implicit engine, the force main should be represented as a "Virtual
conduit" in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i. For more information about virtual conduits,
see What Is A Virtual Conduit? on page 6-373.
Bentley Hydrology Memory Limitations

When using Bentley Hydrology in SewerGEMS V8i, there are certain memory limitations that apply in certain cases.
First, there is a limit of 32k ordinates per computed hydrograph.
Second, based on the number of catchments, the simulation duration and the output
increment you are also limited in how many points may be used per hydrograph and it
can be below the 32k internal maximum.
If you get the message about out of memory (and this can appear in several different
ways including but not limited to a user notification) you should try increasing your
output increment and/or decreasing your simulation duration.
The fewer catchments you use in a model, the longer total simulation time you can use
before reaching the memory threshold of the Bentley Hydrology engine.
It is difficult to predict the exact threshold of the Bentley Hydrology Engine as there
are many dependent variables involved. Some of these variables include but are not
limited to the operating system (32-bit vs. 64-bit) , the amount of system memory
available, the size of the model (primarily the number of catchments in said model),
the output increment and total simulation time.
8-758

Also note that Long Term Continuous Simulation is not recommended with the
Bentley Hydrology methods as using longer simulations can easily exceed the 32k per
computed hydrograph limitation. It is highly recommended that you use the Explicit
(SWMM5) engine in the calculation options and use the EPA-SWMM Runoff Method
for your catchments. In this approach you will get the full benefit of the built-in
support for Long Term Continuous Simulation using the SWMM 5 engine.
Time Steps and Runoff Methods

The calculation and hydrograph time steps used vary according to the runoff moethod
selected, as follows:
SWMM Runoff Method
The calculation uses the hydrology (wet or dry) time step.
The resulting hydrograph uses output (reporting) time step.
SCS Runoff Method
The calculation uses an automatically set time step based on the local Tc
(0.1333 Tc).
RTK Runoff Method
The calculation uses an automatically set time step (0.2 * T where T is the
smallest T in the RTK table data).
Unit Hydrograph Runoff Method
The calculation uses the convolution time step.
GVF/Convex Routing
The calculation uses the hydrologic routing time step.
The resulting hydrograph uses the hydrologic routing time step.
Time Step Considerations in Bentley Storm and Sanitary Sewer

Models
The Bentley storm and sanitary sewer models analyze time varying (dynamic) conditions (with the exception of the steady solver in the Gradually Varied Flow (GVF)
rational solver (StormCAD solver)). Each of the hydraulic solvers:
Implicit Dynamic Wave
Explicit SWMM
GVF-convex routing
8-759

has its own way of dealing with time step size and different implications of time step
size. In addition, if catchment rainfall hydrology is being modeled there are additional
different time steps for the hydrology calculations and rainfall data.
There are numerous time steps that can be set in the models. They are generally set in
the calculation options of the scenario, although some are properties of the individual
catchment or storm. In addition, there are some internal time steps which are based on
other parameters such as the time of concentration or the T in the RTK method. The
time step choices are described in the sections below.
Hydraulic solver time steps
The explicit (SWMM) solver needs the smallest time step because of potential instability in the explicit method. The default of 0.00833 hr (30 sec) is set as its "Routing
time step".
The implicit solver can use a somewhat larger time step and its "Calculation time step"
has a default value of 0.025 hr (1.5 min).
The GVF convex solver solves for flow and other hydraulic properties separately and
therefore has two different time steps sizes:
"Hydrologic routing time step" which has a default value of 0.1 hr, used for routing
gravity flow, "Hydraulic time step" with a default of 1 hr, used as the time step for
pressure calculations and the time at which flow is converted into hydraulic properties
such as depth and velocity in gravity flow elements.
Because the hydraulic time steps in the GVF convex solver are large and pumps can
change on/off status any time within a time step, the pressure portion of the solver will
insert additional time steps at times corresponding to pump status changes. Results are
only calculated for the pressure subnetwork in which the pump which changed is
located. No other subnetworks have results at these times and profiles may not look
complete at these times.
Results time steps
Calculations are performed at small time steps which may give results at a finer time
resolution than needed. To reduce results file size and improve display performance,
the solvers provide ways to only output results at larger time steps.
In the implicit solver, the user would specify the "Output increment" with a default of
0.05 hr (2 default calculation time steps). In the explicit solver, the user would specify
the "SWMM output increment" with a default of 0.25 hr (30 default routing time
steps).
8-760

The GVF-convex provides considerably more flexibility in specifying the "Reporting
time step". It can be "All" which corresponds to all hydraulic time steps plus pump
switch time steps (default) or either a "Constant" time step which is some multiple of
the hydraulic time steps or "Variable" which enables the user to turn off results for
periods of time or switch the "constant" time step part way through a run. See help
topic Reporting Time Steps Dialog Box on page 8-763.
Rainfall-runoff hydrology time steps
Rainfall runoff hydrology calculations at catchments and manholes occur at different
time steps than the hydraulic solvers. These results are generally interpolated to match
hydraulic time steps. (If rainfall runoff is not being calculated, these time steps are
ignored.)
There are two general types of hydrology calculations: those using SWMM for calculations and those using the Bentley hydrology engine developed under PondPack for
calculations. See help topic Hydrology (Rainfall-Runoff) Solvers on page 8-772.
SWMM hydrology is used when the user specifies the Runoff method in the catchment properties as EPA-SWMM Runoff or when a manhole has the property "Apply
SWMM RTK Unit Hydrograph" set to True. It uses the calculation option of "SWMM
Hydrologic Increment" set in the calculation options with a default value of 0.25 hr.
The SWMM hydrology calculations have an additional time step, call "Dry time step"
which is used for runoff calculations during dry periods.
When any other runoff method is used (e.g. modified rational, unit hydrograph), then
the results hydrograph flows from the catchment hydrology are produced at the output
time increment for the hydrology solver.
However the actual increment used internally for calculating the hydrograph differs
from the hydrograph output time steps and depends on the Runoff method selected.
The SCS hydrograph uses 0.1333 tc , where tc is time of concentration for that catchment. The RTK method uses 0.2 T where T is the smallest T value for that catchment
in the RTK tables. The Generic unit hydrograph uses a user defined "Convolution time
step" which has 0 for a default value. A fatal error is issued if either zero or a large
value are given. It is best to set that value equal to the rainfall increment or some small
multiple of that value. The Modified rational method uses only 4 points corresponding
to the trapezoidal shape of the modified rational hydrograph. See the individual help
topics for details on these methods.
Storm event increment
The storm event increment is usually determined by the raw precipitation data when
the data are imported from a rain file or are set by the user in the Increment field when
manually creating a precipitation vs. time table (either incremental, cumulative or
intensity).
8-761
Inlet Transition Depth

If an inlet type is not the "Full Capture" type and there is a bypass gutter from the inlet
connecting to downstream (i.e. the inlet is On Grade), the surface inflow to the inlet
will be divided into captured flow (the flow that makes into the inlet node and adds to
the subsurface system) and bypass flow (the flow that goes to the surface gutter and
flows downstream). The model will determine the captured flow, bypass flow, inlet
gutter depth and spread based on the inlet types. If the inlet type is Catalog Inlet the
HEC-22 method is used to calculate all of the flows, depth and spread If the inlet type
is Inflow-Capture Curve, Percent Capture, or Maximum Capacity, the captured
and bypass flows are determined by the capture curve, percent or maximum specifications, the inlet gutter depth and spread, then are determined by the bypass gutter
hydraulic calculation (Manning equation) based on the bypass flow.
The above described calculation algorithm, however, is applicable only when the inlet
is not surcharged from the underlying conduit, since the HEC-22 method does not
apply to such an overflow condition. When the inlet is surcharged (i.e., the inlet node
hydraulic grade line is above the ground rim elevation), the Saint Venant equations
based dynamic calculation is applied instead of the HEC-22 based calculation. In
order to achieve a smooth transition in switching such equations, the model needs a
small transition depth within which the equations are gradually switched. The smaller
the transition depth is, the more accurate results are but the model will be less stable.
The new calculation option gives user a control over the transition depth. Typical
values are on the order of 0.1-0.5 feet and a default value of 0.5 has been proven to be
satisfactory for most conditions.
Controlling Results Output

You can limit the output data that is written to the result file from the SewerCAD
engine. Limiting the reported results in this way will produce a smaller result file,
thereby improving performance when copying results files during open and save operations. It also conserves hard disk space.
By default, the Reporting Time Step Type calculation option is set to <All>. Under
this setting, all results for all time steps are written to the results file.
To limit the output results to a specific interval (such as every 2 hours, every 4 hours,
etc) set the Reporting Time Step Type calculation option to Constant. The Reporting
Time Step calculation option will become available. Enter the constant interval at
which output results should be written to the results file in this field.
To limit the output results to specific time steps, set the Reporting Time Step Type
calculation option to Variable. The Reporting Time Steps calculation option will
become available. Click the elipsis (...) button in this field to open the Reporting
Time Steps Dialog Box on page 8-763 dialog.
8-762

Reporting Time Steps Dialog Box
This dialog allows you to specify whether the output results for different time steps
during an extended period simulaton will or will not be written to the results file.
You do this by specifying ranges of time during which:
All of the time steps are reported on and written to the results file.
None of the time steps are reported on and written to the results file.
Time steps that fall within the specificed constant interval are reported on and written
to the results file.
The first row in this dialog will always be 0.00 hours, which is the beginning of the
first time range. To specify the first range of time, enter the end time step in the second
row, for example 24 hours. Specify the type in the first row, for example <All>. In this
example, all time steps between hour 0 (the start of the simulation) and hour 24 will be
written to the results file. To specify further ranges of time, add new rows with the
New button. Remove rows with the Delete button. The last range in the dialog will
start at the time specified in the last row and end at the end of the simulation.
8-763
Compute Center
Compute Center
The compute center enables you to quickly and easily keep track of and modify high
level settings for the current scenario. At a glance, you can determine what the current
scenario is, what the active solver is, and what set of calculation options are being
used. You can also change these without getting into the detailed scenario selection
and calculation options dialogs. The Compute Center is shown below:
The buttons on the top row enable include:
ScenarioOpens the Scenario Manager.
AlternativesOpens the Alternatives Manager.
Calculation OptionsOpens the Calculation Options Manager dialog.
Time BrowserOpens the Time Browser dialog.
Calculation SummaryOpens the Calculation Summary dialog.
User NotificationsOpens the User Notifications dialog.
The scenario row displays the current scenario and enables you to switch scenarios.
The compute button runs the current scenario and the drop down list next to it enables
you to make batch runs.
The validation button starts the scenario validation.
The properties button displays the properties for the current scenario.
Under Calculation Options, the calculation option for the current scenario is listed
and can be changed.
8-764

In the General Category, the solver associated with the current scenario is listed and
can be changed. See the help topic "Solvers Numerical" for details [include link].
The remaining properties listed depend upon the solver and time analysis type. If the
run is steady as in GVF-Rational or GVF-convex with the steady option, time properties are not listed, while for unsteady (dynamic or EPS runs) time properties are listed.
In general, the properties listed are the most important calculation options. If a calculation option is not listed, you can view them by selecting Calculation Options in the
Compute center or in the main menu.
Solvers (Numerical)
The Bentley storm and sanitary products have a distinct advantage over other sewer
models in that it is possible for a user to choose different numerical hydraulic solvers
for each scenario. This is important because there is not a single "correct" way to solve
the complex hydraulic equations for a mixed gravity and pressure hydraulic network.
Each problem has its own characteristics that can make one solver (sometimes
referred to as an "engine") more advantageous than another.
Each of the solvers is briefly described in the section below.
Implicit (SewerGEMS Dynamic Wave): Solves the full St. Venant equations
using an implicit numerical method developed by Bentley based on the US
National Weather Service FLDWAV model. It simultaneously solves for both flow
and hydraulic grade and uses the same equations for gravity and pressure portions
of the system. It only solves dynamic flows (no steady state). It can be applied to
storm, sanitary and combined sewers.
Explicit (SWMM solver): Solves the full St. Venant equations using an explicit
numerical method based on the EPA-SWMM model. In addition to solving the St.
Venant equations using a dynamic solution, it can also route flows using a kinematic wave solution and a uniform flow solution, which does not account for any
backwater effects. The Explicit dynamic solver simultaneously solves for both
flow and hydraulic grade and uses the same equations for gravity and pressure
portions of the system. It can be applied to storm, sanitary and combined sewer,
especially systems without a great deal of force mains or pressure sewers.
GVF - Convex (SewerCAD): Separates the hydraulic problem first into a set of
gravity subnetworks and pressure subnetworks. For the gravity subnetworks, it
divides the solution into a flow routing problem using convex routing (a hydrologic routing method) and then solves for hydraulic grade (including depth and
velocity) using gradually varied flow (GVF) (backwater) equations. For the pressure subnetworks, it uses a true pressure solver as found in Bentley's WaterGEMS.
It can perform extended period simulations and steady state simulations and can
base steady simulations on an extreme flow factor method that reduces peaking
8-765
Solvers (Numerical)
factors as the flow increase moving downstream. The solution method was developed for the SewerCAD model. It can be applied to sanitary and combined
sewers, especially those with a great deal of pumping or pressure sewers, and
those which only require a steady state analysis.
Note:
For steady state runs using the GVF-Convex solver, patterns are
ignored and the base flow is loaded as a constant inflow.
GVF - Rational (StormCAD): Uses flows developed by the rational method (plus
other additional flows). The solver outes values for CA downstream while
decreasing peaking factors due to longer time of concentration moving downstream. Once flows are determined, hydraulic grade (including depth and
velocity) are determined using gradually varied flow (GVF) methods for both
gravity and pressure pipes. This solution method was originally developed for the
StormCAD model. It can be applied to stormwater system.
While the solvers were developed with an orientation to storm and sanitary sewer
design, to the extent to which they capture the behavior of the systems, the solvers can
also be applied to flood control systems, irrigation systems, natural streams, treatment
plants and any other hydraulic systems comprised of a mixture of gravity and/or pressure flow elements.
SewerGEMS contains all of the numerical hydraulic solvers. The association of other
products and solvers is shown below.
Table 8-2: Available Solvers by Product
Solver
SewerGEMS
CivilStorm
SewerCAD
StormCAD
Implicit
Yes
Yes
No
No
Explicit
Yes
Yes
No
No
GVF-Convex
Yes
No
Yes
No
GVF-Rational
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Overview of GVF-Convex Solver Network Connectivity Rules

In the GVF-Convex Solver calculation, the network is divided into multiple gravity
and pressure sub-networks. In order to calculate each sub-network in correct order, the
solver needs to find the upstream and downstream relationship between sub-networks.
The following are the rules used in finding the upstream to downstream relationship
between sub-networks:
8-766
Flow direction is from upstream pressure pipe to downstream gravity node.
Flow direction is from upstream conduit to a wet-well and then to downstream

pressure sub-network.
Flow direction is from diversion link start node gravity sub-network to stop node
gravity sub-network, if the diversion link start node and stop node are not in the
same gravity sub-networks
Switching Between Solvers in Bentley Storm and Sanitary Sewer

Models
The Bentley storm and sanitary sewer models can use four different numerical solvers:
implicit (Bentley Dynamic Wave), explicit (SWMM based), GVF-convex
(SewerCAD) and GVF-rational (StormCAD). See the help topic Solvers (Numerical) on page 8-765. With SELECTseries 3, it became much easier to switch from one
solver to another from one scenario to the next within a given model. This has been
facilitated by the unification of the model files type from individual types for each
product (swg, swc, csd, stc) into a single file format (stsw). There is no longer a need
to import one file type into a different product.
The user can switch solvers by changing the "Active numerical solver" in either the
Calculation options or the Compute center. In many cases, the model will be able to
run with the switched solver. However, there are some situations where the model may
need to be modified to run with the new solver because of fundamental differences in
the ways that the solvers work. For example, a dynamic wave model (either implicit or
explicit) cannot directly be used with the GVF-rational method because the dynamic
solvers are time varying while the rational method is a steady state model that uses
different runoff methods. Dynamic and GVF solvers also handle pumping using
different approaches.
It is best for a user to decide which solver is most appropriate at the beginning of a
modeling study and use that primarily. For example, modeling the filling and draining
for stormwater systems is best done with the dynamic wave solvers while modeling
sewers that are primarily force mains and pressure sewers are best done with the
GVF-convex solver.
If the user works with relatively generic modeling methods and avoids some problematic areas, switching models is usually easy. The following sections provide some
suggestions to make switching models work smoothly.
8-767
Solvers (Numerical)
Note:
The HEC-22 3rd edition headloss method is available only with

the GVF-Rational and GVF-Convex solvers. (the Implicit solver
only supports HEC-22 2nd Edition).
Overview - Converting Between Solvers

In general, users can switch solvers readily. However, there are special elements,
behaviors and components that differ between the programs that the user needs to be
aware of.
Even when the current solver does not support some element types, it may be possible
to create or edit that element. However, the property grids are "filtered" such that only
properties relevant to the current solver are displayed. For example, if the active
solver is implicit, it is not possible to establish controls for a GVF-convex variable
speed pump. The Alternatives Manager is not filtered so that it is possible to review or
edit properties that are not applicable to the active solver using the Alternatives
Manager.
While essentially all element types are available to be included in models with any
solver as active, their behavior can be different depending on the solver. For example,
channel link elements can be specified with any solver, but only the implicit solver
can correctly handle non-prismatic channels with different cross sections at each end.
Other solvers assume the upstream cross section is constant through the link.
To simplify the process of moving models between solvers, users are advised to avoid
elements and features that can complicate this process. Some of those special considerations are described below. They key areas where the solvers differ include flow
splits, pump definitions, control statements and ponds, plus some other minor differences.
Flow Splits
Flow splits are calculated differently in the various solvers. The implicit and explicit
(dynamic wave) solvers determine the flow split based on hydraulics and downstream
boundary conditions. The GVF convex and rational solvers use a rating curve to split
flow between the primary downstream link and diversion links. The explicit (kinematic wave and uniform) solvers use a 'splitter" node.
Treatment of Time Steps
The implicit and explicit dynamic wave solvers use a constant time step throughout
the run. The GVF-convex solver has the ability to use different size time steps for
hydrologic routing, gravity hydraulics and pressure hydraulics. This enables it to take
larger default time steps and allows the pressure solver to insert time steps corresponding to pump switches on a subnetwork basis.
8-768

The dynamic wave solvers do not perform steady state solutions. On the other hand,
GVF-convex solver can perform steady state or extended period calculations and the
GVF rational solver can only perform steady state calculations.
Pumping
The solvers share the same Pump Definition Library, but not all pump types and functionality are usable in both products. See the help topic Pump Definition Types on
page 14-1223 for details. In general, the multipoint pump curves is the safest to use if
the user is switching between solvers.
Controls
There are three ways of controlling elements in time simulations in the storm sewer
products;
1. On / off levels as a pump property. These are available in all solvers but are
limited to pumps controlled by wet well levels.
2. SWMM type control statements for any element type. These are available only in
the explicit solver.
3. Pressure controls for pressure elements in GVF-convex solver. These are available
for pressure elements and can be more complex than the elementary on/off
controls.
If a user plans to move models between solvers, it is best to keep the control statements as simple as possible or to create different scenarios with control statements in
operational alternatives suited to that solver only.
Gravity Flow Control Structures
Head losses through gravity flow control nodes (e.g. manholes) and handled differently in the different solvers. The GVF solvers have the most choices while the
implicit solver has many of the same except for the HEC-22 and AASHTO methods.
The explicit solver handles node head losses by placing them on the outgoing link
elements.
Conduits
With the release of SELECTseries 3, essentially all of the conduit types are available
in every solver. A minor exception is pipe arch shapes, which are specified differently
depending on the solver. See help topic "Pipe Arch and Arch Behavior".
8-769
Solvers (Numerical)
Ponds
While pond elements can be included in any model, they are handled differently
depending on the solver. In the implicit and explicit solver, they are hydraulically
calculated based on the inflow, water level, tailwater and pond outlet structure conditions.
In the GVF solver for extended period simulations, the routing does not account for
backup of tailwater but uses the pond inflow, level and outlet structure to determine
flow and then the new level will be the higher of the value from the storage routing or
GVF calculations. For GVF steady runs, flow in equals flow out and water level is
determined from the control structure if one exists or the user supplied initial elevation
if no control structure exists.
Open Channels
The implicit solver has two types of gravity flow links, conduits and open channels.
The other solvers have only conduit elements, where open channels are simply a
special type of conduit as described in the table above.
In the explicit solver, the open channel properties are set at channel cross sections and
vary between cross section nodes. In other solvers, the channels are prismatic with
constant properties along the link element. When importing from the implicit solver to
other solvers, the shape of the upstream cross section is used as the cross section of the
prismatic channel.
Head Loss Methods
The implicit and explicit solvers only uses Manning's equation for head loss calculations. When moving scenarios that do not use Manning equation between solvers, the
pipe roughness is converted into the equivalent n coefficients. The GVF sovlers can
use the Manning, Darcy-Weisbach and Hazen Williams equations for pressure pipe
while for gravity pipes, it can use all of the above plus Kutter's equation.
Air Valves
Air valves at high points are unique to the pressure portion of the GVF convex solver
and are imported as pressure junctions to other solvers. However, the downhill side of
a high point that may or may not flow full may be modeled in the solvers as gravity
conduits that have bolted manholes.
Gutters
The flow properties of gutter elements are not calculated in the GVF-convex solver
which is intended more for sanitary sewers.
8-770

Catch Basin Inlets
The explicit solver has a unique method for dynamically calculating depth and spread
for catch basins where the capture is hydraulically calculated. If the models are to be
moved between solvers, simpler inlet types such as full capture and percent capture
should be used instead.
Head Loss Method Associated with Each Solver for Link Elements
Most of the solvers can use most head loss methods. However, there are some exceptions. The relationship between solvers and head loss methods are summarized in the
table below. When a method is not supported by a solver an error message is generated
at run time.
Manning's equation for gravity flow is unique in that Manning's n can be treated as a
constant or as a function of depth or flow. This choice of implementations is only
available in the Implicit dynamic wave solver.
For channel links, the roughness coefficient is specified at the cross section element,
not the channel link. When an irregular channel is specified for a channel, Manning's
can be treated as a constant or varied across the cross section or take on different
values for the left and right bank and the main channel.
Table 8-3: Head Loss Method By Solver
Implicit
Explicit
GVFRational
GVFConvex
Pressure
Pipes
Manning
DarcyWeisbach
HazenWilliams
Kutters
ManningSingle
Gravity
Conduits
8-771
Solvers (Numerical)
Table 8-3: Head Loss Method By Solver
Implicit
GVFRational
GVFConvex
DarcyWeisbach
HazenWilliams
Kutters
ManningDepth-Curve
ManningFlow-Curve
Explicit
Gravity
Channel
(Prismatic)
ManningSingle
ManningSingle
Horizontal
Segment
Bank
Channel
Graity
Channel
(Irregula)
Hydrology (Rainfall-Runoff) Solvers

There are two different types of solvers used in the Bentley storm and sanitary sewer
products. There are the hydraulic solvers which determine the flows in the conduit and
channel networks (implicit, explicit, GVF-convex and GVF-rational). In model runs
that perform rainfall-runoff calculations, there are also hydrology solvers which
covert rainfall (generally on a catchment) to runoff.
8-772

While there are a large number of rainfall-runoff methods supported in the Bentley
products, they can be grouped as to whether they were developed by Bentley or were
extracted from SWMM. Within each runoff method, there are methods to determine
loss, which refers the rainfall that does not become runoff but infiltrates into groundwater, and hydrograph, which refers to how the rainfall (that is not lost) is converted
into a hydrograph. In some methods, like RTK, the loss and runoff calculations are
implicitly combined.
Data entry for the hydrologic solvers depends highly on which solver is to be used.
Some require that the loss and hydrograph methods be specified while others implicitly contain the methods. The list below shows which methods are needed for each
method to determine runoff.
SWMM Hydrology
EPA SWMM Runoff
Loss method
Horton
Green and Ampt
SCS CN
RTK Method (node based)
Bentley Hydrology
Unit hydrograph
Hydrograph method
-
Generic
RTK (catchment based)
SCS unit hydrograph
Loss method
-
Horton
fLoss
Green and Ampt
SCS CN
Modified rational
User defined hydrograph
All of the hydrologic methods can be used with any of the non-steady state hydraulic
numerical solvers. For the steady runs using the GVF rational solver, the rational
method must be used while for steady runs with the steady state GVF-convex solver,
the user cannot use catchment hydrology.
8-773
Calculation Executive Summary Dialog Box (Implicit Solver)

In general, for long term continuous simulation, the SWMM hydrology methods
should be selected because they work more effectively with long term rainfall data.
In general, all of the catchments should use either Bentley hydrology methods or
SWMM hydrology methods and not mix them in a given run. When the SWMM based
hydrology solvers are used, the same loss method must be used for all catchments and
the loss method is specified in the Calculation options rather than as a catchment property.
The two RTK methods use different internal solvers so a user should decide beforehand which one to use and not try to switch back and forth. Unlike the other hydrology
methods, the SWMM RTK method is applied to nodes such as manholes. It is generally more appropriate for I/I studies.
Calculation Executive Summary Dialog Box (Implicit

Solver)
The Calculation Executive Summary dialog box opens automatically after you
compute a model. This dialog box reports a summary of the calculations performed on
your model. You can also see this report by clicking Report > Calculation Executive
Summary.
Click Detailed Summary for more information about the calculation (see Calculation Detailed Summary Dialog Box (Implicit Solver) on page 8-775) or Close to
close the dialog box.
The Executive Summary dialog box displays the following information:
8-774
Scenario Label
Displays the currently selected scenario.
Run Completed
Displays the date and time at which the run was

completed.
Storm Data Label
Displays the currently selected hydrology

alternative.
Global Storm Data
Displays the current global storm data.
Return Event
Displays the recurrence period of the global storm

data.
Total Inflow Volume
Displays the total volume of flow that enters the

model during the course of the analysis.
Total System Overflow

Volume
Displays the total volume of flow that exits the

system due to overflows. This value does not
include volume of flow that exits at outfalls.
Total Gutter Volume

Change
Displays the gutter flow volume difference

between the initial state and the state at the end of
the computation.
Total System Outflow

Volume
Displays the total volume of flow that exits the

outfalls during the course of the analysis.
Total System Volume

Change
Displays the total system flow volume difference

between the initial state and the state at the end of
the computation.
Continuity Error
Displays the total system computational continuity

balance error which accounts for total inflows into
the system, outflows, flow losses due to
overflows, and volume changes. Generally
speaking, a high continuity error (>5%) is an
indication that the system is hydraulically very
challenging and the hydraulic engine may have
difficulty achieving stable results.
Total N-R Iterations
Displays the number of Newton iterations used in

the calculation. This attribute value is used to
prevent the numerical solver from unlimited
iterations under situations when the solver is
unable to reach convergence. A more
hydraulically-complex model requires a larger
number of iterations than a less complex model.
Calculation Detailed Summary Dialog Box (Implicit

Solver)
The Calculation Detailed Summary dialog box provides a detailed reports of the
calculations performed on your model. You can open this dialog box by calculating
your model and clicking Detailed Summary in the Calculation Executive Summary
dialog box. You can also see this report by clicking Report > Calculation Detailed
Summary.
Click the tabs in the Calculation Detailed Summary dialog box to review the details of
the report:
Calculation Options Tab on page 8-776
8-775
Calculation Detailed Summary Dialog Box (Implicit Solver)
Catchment Summary Tab on page 8-778
General Summary Tab on page 8-778
Node Summary Tab on page 8-779
Gutter Summary Tab on page 8-780
Calculation Options Tab

This tab displays the current settings in the Property Editor for calculation options. To
change this, click Analysis > Calculation Options and change the settings in the
Property Editor.
The Calculation Options tab displays the following information:
8-776
Label
Displays the currently selected calculation

options.
Duration
Displays the duration of the model simulation.
Calculation Time Step
Displays the calculation time step used in

calculations of your model. See Troubleshooting
DynamicWave Model Calculations on page 8806 for more information.
Output Increment
The Output Increment you want to use to display

the output hydrographs of a network analysis.
Hydrologic Routing
Time Step
Lets you specify the computational time step in

hydrology runoff calculations.
Y Iteration Tolerance
Implicit numerical scheme Newton iteration

convergence criteria for depth/elevation. It is
strongly recommended that you use the default
value.
LPI Coefficient
Displays the LPI coefficient used in calculations

of your model.
NR Weighting
Coefficient
Implicit numerical scheme Newton iteration

weighting factor. A Larger value tends to increase
stability, but at the cost of performance. We
suggest using the default value or values between
0.6 and 0.85, but values between 0.1 and 1.0 are
valid. Use 0.98 - 1.0 in very difficult cases. See
Troubleshooting DynamicWave Model
Calculations on page 8-806 for more
information.
Relaxation Weighting
Coefficient
The weighting coefficient used by the relaxation

equation for estimating lateral flow. The values
must range between 0 and 1. For more details see
Network Algorithms on page 14-1127.
Computational
Distance
Implicit numerical scheme computational distance

interval. The model will automatically insert
additional computational sections based on this
value, a small value increases stability while large
value increases performance.
Computational distance is the lesser of
one half the pipe length
or
default distance
See Troubleshooting DynamicWave Model

Calculations on page 8-806 for more
information.
Virtual Flow Depth
This is an option used in the implicit solver to

overcome the calculation instabilities when the
conduit is in dry (zero flow) or the flow is very
small.
Neglect Side Flow?
If True, only frontal views will be included in the

inlet calculations.
Active Components for

Combination Inlets In
Sag
This section gives you the choice of whether to

use both curb and grate openings or the grate or
curb opening only for combination inlets in sag.
Active Components for

Combination Inlets On
Grade
This section gives you the choice of whether to

use both curb and grate openings or the grate or
curb opening only for combination inlets on grade.
8-777
Neglect Gutter Cross

Slope For Side Flow?
If True, when grate width is less than gutter width,

gutter cross slope is used to determine side flow.
Catchment Summary Tab

This tab displays a table of data about catchments in your model. You cannot modify
the table, it is read-only. To edit a catchment, select it in the Drawing Pane and edit its
attributes in the Property Editor.
The Catchment Summary tab displays the following information:
Label
Displays the label of each catchment in your

model.
Runoff Method
Displays the runoff method associated with each

catchment.
Loss Method
Displays the loss method associated with each

catchment.
Total Rainfall Depth
Displays the total rainfall depth.
Area
Displays the catchment size.
Runoff Volume
Displays the calculated runoff volume.
Flow (Peak)
Displays the calculated peak flow.
Time to Peak
Displays how long after the simulation starts that

peak runoff happens.
General Summary Tab

This tab displays a table of calculations for elements in your model. You cannot
modify the table, it is read-only. To edit an element, select it in the Drawing Pane and
edit its attributes in the Property Editor.
The General Summary tab displays the following information:
8-778
Label
Displays the label of each element in your model.
Element Type
Displays the kind of element being reported on.
Branch
Provides information for engineers who are

troubleshooting a model or looking to simplify a
particularly complex model.
The Bentley SewerGEMS V8i calculation engine
includes a heuristic routine that decomposes a
network into its component branches, and each
branch is solved independently using an implicit
solver. Each branch comprises a series of
connected elements. Elements with the same
branch ID are solved together.
Time to Max Flow

maximum flow happens.
Flow (Maximum)
Displays the calculated flow through elements.
Velocity (Maximum)
Displays the calculated velocity of flow through

elements.
Maximum HGL
Displays the calculated maximum hydraulic grade

line for each element.
Node Summary Tab

This tab displays a table of calculations for nodes in your model. Nodes include catch
basins, manholes, outfalls, ponds (but not cross-sections, catchments, etc.). You
cannot modify the table, it is read-only. To edit a node, select it in the Drawing Pane
and edit its attributes in the Property Editor.
The Node Summary tab displays the following information:
Label
Displays the label of each node in your model.
Element Type
Displays the kind of node being reported on.
8-779
Branch
Provides information for engineers who are

troubleshooting a model or looking to simplify a
particularly complex model.The Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i calculation engine includes a
heuristic routine that decomposes a network into
its component branches, and each branch is solved
independently using an implicit solver. Each
branch comprises a series of connected elements.
Elements with the same branch ID are solved
together.
Time to Max Inflow

maximum flow into the nodes occurs.
Flow (Maximum in)
Displays the calculated flow into the nodes.

(Outfalls cannot have inflow.)
Time to Maximum
Inlet Flow

maximum flow into the nodes occurs.
Flow (Surface
Maximum)
Displays the maximum flow into each of the nodes

of your model.
Time to Max Captured

Flow

maximum captured flow occurs in each catch
basin.
Flow (Captured
Maximum)
Displays the calculated captured flow in each

catch basin.
Time to Maximum
Overflow

maximum overflow occurs at each of the nodes in
your model.
Flow (Overflow
Maximum)
Displays the maximum overflow at each of the

nodes of your model.
Gutter Summary Tab

This tab displays a table of data about gutters in your model. You cannot modify the
table, it is read-only. To edit a gutter, select it in the Drawing Pane and edit its
The Gutter Summary tab displays the following information:
8-780
Label
Displays the label of each gutter in your model.
Open Cross Section
Displays the kind of open cross section that

defines the gutter.
Flow (Maximum)
Displays the calculated flow through the gutters.
Time to Max Flow

maximum flow happens.
Velocity (Maximum)
Displays the calculated velocity of flow through

gutters.
Maximum HGL
Displays the calculated maximum hydraulic grade

line for each gutter.
Detailed Calculation Summary Dialog Box (GVFConvex Solver)

The Detailed Calculation Summary dialog box provides a detailed reports of the
calculations performed on your model. You can see this report by clicking Analysis >
Calculation Summary.
Click the tabs in the Detailed Calculation Summary dialog box to review the details of
the report:
Executive Summary Tab on page 8-781
Pressure Summary Tab on page 8-787
Pipe Report Tab on page 8-788
Node Report Tab on page 8-788
Executive Summary Tab

The Executive Summary tab displays the following information:
Scenario Label: Displays the name of the currently selected scenario.
Computation Results: Displays information about the computed results such as

the number of gravity and pressure subnetworks and where they are draining to,
and whether convergence was achieved.
8-781
Detailed Calculation Summary Dialog Box (GVF-Convex Solver)

The Calculation Options tab displays the calculation options as they were set for the
previous calculation. Note that the fields are not editable from this tab. The tab
contains the following information:
Attribute
Description
General
8-782
Label
Lets you specify a name for the options option.
Notes
Lets you enter descriptive text to be associated with the

current calculation option.
Time Analysis Type
Select whether the analysis is extended period or steadystate.
Calculation Type
Select whether to perform an analysis of the current model

or to perform an automatic design calculation. This field is
only available when the EPS Analysis Type is chosen.
Start Time
Select the clock time at which the simulation begins. This

field is only available when the EPS Time Analysis Type is
chosen.
Base Date
Select the calendar date on which the simulation begins.

This field is only available when the EPS Time Analysis
Type is chosen.
Duration
Lets you specify the duration of the simulation. This field is

only available when the EPS Analysis Type is chosen.
Hydraulic Time
Step
Lets you specify the computational time step in hydraulic

calculations. This field is only available when the EPS
Time Analysis Type is chosen.
Hydrologic Time
Step
Lets you specify the computational time step in hydrology

runoff calculations. This field is only available when the
EPS Time Analysis Type is chosen.
Reporting Time
Step
Output data will be presented at every reporting time step.

This field is only available when the EPS Time Analysis
Type is chosen.

Attribute
Description
Reporting Time
Steps
Edit this collection to specify a custom definition for results

ouput, including periods where you want all time steps
saved (<All>), a constant reporting period (Constant), or no
results at all (None). This field is only available when the
Reporting Time Step value is set to Variable.
Tractive Stress
(Global Minimum)
The global minimum allowable tractive stress in a conduit.
Report Hydrologic
Time Step?
If True, hydrographs will be reported in the hydrologic

increment.
Convex Routing
Peak Flow Ratio
Used when selecting a representative flow rate from the

hydrograph to be routed when calculating the C parameter
used to perform the routing calculations.
Gravity Hydraulics
Maximum Network
Transversals
This is the maximum number of iterations that will be

performed to achieve the closest approximation of the
desired network results.
Flow Convergence
Test
This value is taken as the maximum relative change in

discharge occurring at the system outfall between two
successive network solutions. In rational hydrology, system
discharge is a function of travel time and hydraulics
through the system. Therefore, it is necessary to iterate until
the system balances, or a maximum number of trials has
occurred.
Flow Profile
Method
Allows you to choose between a backwater and capacity

analysis flow option method.
Number of Flow
Profile Steps
The gradually varied flow option divides each pipe into

internal segments prior to calculation of the hydraulic
grade. The default value of option steps is five, and it is
recommended that the value entered here be at least five for
accuracy. Increasing this number will increase the accuracy
of the hydraulic grade calculation, but will increase the
calculation time.
8-783

Attribute
Description
Hydraulic Grade
Convergence Test
The value entered here is taken as the maximum absolute

change between two successive iterations of hydraulic
grade at any junction or inlet in the system. For a given
discharge, the upstream propagation of headlosses through
pipes will continue until two successive calculations
change by an absolute difference of less than this test value.
The Hydraulic Grade Convergence Test value is used in the
standard step gradually varied flow profiling algorithm.
The calculations is assumed to converge to the solution
when the two successive depth iterations are within this
absolute test value.
Minimum Structure
Headloss
This section allows you to specify a minimum structure

headloss. If the system calculates a structure headloss that
is lower then this value, the value specified in the Minimum
Headloss field will be used.
This option applies to all structure headloss methods except
for the Absolute Method. Absolute headlosses will not be
overridden, even if they are less then the value specified in
this option.
Average Velocity
Method
This section allows you to pick the method used to

calculate the average travel time velocity. The following
four options are available:
Actual Uniform Flow Velocity
Full Flow Velocity
Structure Loss
Mode
Choose either Hydraulic Grade or Energy Grade as the

basis for the hydraulic calculations.
Save Detailed
Headloss Data?
If True, the detailed headloss data will be saved after

computation. If False, the detailed headloss data (the
AASHTO results for manholes) used in the computations
will not be saved, resulting in a smaller results file.
Gravity Pressure Interface Options
8-784
Extreme Flow Setup
Select an Extreme Flow Setup for the current calculation.
Pattern Setup
Select the Pattern Setup for the current calculation.

Attribute
Description
Pressure Hydraulics
Use Controls
During Steady
State?
When this box is checked, controls will be active during

Steady State analyses.
Wet Well Increment
Unless a wet well is set to Fixed Level, this is the increment

that is used to attempt to balance the wet well level such
that the total flow out is greater than the total flow in.
Use Pumped Flows?
In a steady state run, in pressure subnetworks, the flow

from the network is calculated using pressure equations, the
characteristics of the system and number of pumps running.
For that flow rate to be passed to the downstream gravity
system, the user should set this property to "True".
In some cases, the user will not want to use that flow but
would rather pass a loading to the downstream system
based on upstream loads and appropriate extreme flow
factors similar to the way flows are handled in the gravity
system. To pass those flows on to the downstream gravity
system, the user sets this property to "False".
In general, using pumped flows (True) is used when the
user wants to look at the peak flows when the pumps are
running, while using the loadings (False) gives more of a
true picture as one moves far downstream from the pressure
system and the effects of pump cycling become diminished.
Accuracy
Unitless number that defines the convergence criteria for

the iterative solution of the network hydraulic equations.
When the sum of the absolute flow changes between
successive iterations in all links is divided by the sum of the
absolute flows in all links, and is less than the Accuracy
value, the solution is said to have converged. The default
value is 0.001 and the minimum allowed value is 1.0e-5.
Trials
Unitless number that defines the maximum number of

iterations to be performed for each hydraulic solution.
Use Linear
Interpolation for
Multipoint Pumps?
If set to true, the engine will use linear interpolation to

interpret the pump curve as opposed to quadratic
interpolation.
8-785

Attribute
Description
Steady State Loading
Steady State
Hydrograph
Equivalent
Specify how the program should handle hydrographs

during a steady state analysis.
Headloss Options (AASHTO)
Bend Angle vs.

Bend Loss Curve
Opens the Bend Angle vs Bend Loss Curve dialog,

allowing you to modify the default curve.
Expansion, Ke
Adjustment coefficient used in AASHTO equation to

account for expansion of the flow on the exit from
incoming pipe.
Contraction, Kc
Adjustment coefficient used in the AASHTO equation to

account for contraction of the flow on the entrance in the
outfall pipe.
Shaping
Adjustment, Cs
Adjustment coefficient used in the AASHTO equation for

junction headloss calculation to account for partial diameter
inlet shaping (equivalent to Half and Full in HEC-22). If
inlet shaping is used then the headloss is decreased by this
factor (50% default).
Non-Piped Flow
Adjustment, Cn
If non-piped flow accounts for 10% or more of the total

structure outflow, a correction factor is applied to the total
loss. By default, this value is a 30% increase in headloss (a
factor of 1.3) as documented in the AASHTO manual, but
can be changed by the user.
Headloss Options (HEC-22)
8-786
Elevations
Considered Equal
Within
The maximum elevation distance that pipes entering a node

can be separated by and still be considered to be at the same
elevation.
Consider Non-Piped
Plunging Flow
If this value is set to True, plunging correction factor for

non-piped flow will be applied during the calculation.
Flat Submerged
Benching correction coefficient used for a flat submerged

transition structure.

Attribute
Description
Flat Unsubmerged
Benching correction coefficient used for a flat

unsubmerged transition structure.
Depressed
Submerged
Benching correction coefficient used for a depressed

submerged transition structure.
Depressed
Unsubmerged
Benching correction coefficient used for a depressed

Half Bench
Submerged
Benching correction coefficient used for a half bench

Half Bench
Unsubmerged
Benching correction coefficient used for a half bench

Full Bench
Submerged
Benching correction coefficient used for a full bench

Full Bench
Unsubmerged
Benching correction coefficient used for a full bench

Headloss Options (Generic)
Governing
Upstream Pipe
Selection Method
Select the method for selecting the upstream pipe when

computing the headloss for a structure using the Generic
Headloss Method.
The list of calculation options can be sorted by either of two methods. You can switch
between the two sorting methods by clicking the Categorized or Alphabetical
buttons above the list pane.
Pressure Summary Tab

The Pressure Summary displays a table of data about the pressure subnetworks in the
model. Click the Copy button to copy the Pressure Summary to the clipboard. Click
the Report button to generate a preformatted Pressure Summary report.
The table displays whteher the flow is balanced, the number of trials, and the relative
flow change at a particular time step for the pressure subnetwork that is currently
selected in the Pressure Subnetwork menu:
8-787
Click the Highlight button

currently selected.
to visually distinguish the pressure subnetwork that is
If you click on a time step in the table more detailed information is displayed in the
tabs at the bottom of the dialog:
Information tab: This tab displays any element messages for the currently
selected time step.
Status Messages tab: This tab displays any status messages for the currently
selected time step.
Trials tab: This tab displays the relative flow change for each of the trials for the
currently selected time step.
Pipe Report Tab

The Pipe Report displays information about selected calculated results of the pipes in
the various subnetworks in the model in a tabular format. The table contains the
following columns:
Label: The label of the associated pipe.
Time (Maximum Flow): The time (measured from the start of the simulation)
when the maximum flow occurs in the associated pipe.
Flow (Maximum): The maximum flow that occurs in the associated pipe over the
course of the simulation.
Velocity (Maximum Calculated): The maximum velocity that occurs in the associated pipe over the course of the simulation.
Depth (Average End) / Rise (Maximum): The maximum ratio of depth to rise
that occurs in the associated pipe over the course of the simulation.
The pipes listed in the column are categorized according to the subnetwork they are
part of. To change the currently displayed subnetwork, choose another subnetwork
from the Subnetwork pulldown menu.
Node Report Tab

The Node Report displays information about selected calculated results of the nodes
in the various subnetworks in the model in a tabular format. The table contains the
following columns:
8-788
Label: The label of the associated node.
Time (Maximum Hydraulic Grade Line): The time (measured from the start of
the simulation) when the maximum hydraulic grade line occurs in the associated
node.
Hydraulic Grade Line (Maximum): The maximum hydraulic grade that occurs
in the associated node over the course of the simulation.
Depth (Maximum): The maximum outgoing depth that occurs in the associated
node over the course of the simulation.
Pressure (Maximum): The maximum pressure that occurs in the associated node
over the course of the simulation.
The nodes listed in the column are categorized according to the subnetwork they are
part of. To change the currently displayed subnetwork, choose another subnetwork
from the Subnetwork pulldown menu.
8.1
Calculation Executive Summary Dialog Box

(GVF Rational Solver)
The Calculation Executive Summary dialog box opens automatically after you
compute a model. This dialog box reports a summary of the calculations performed on
your model. You can also see this report by clicking Analysis > Calculation
Summary.
Click Details... for more information about the calculation (see Calculation Detailed
Summary Dialog Box), Messages... to open the User Notifications dialog to view any
calculation warnings or errors (User Notifications Manager), Report to open the
report viewer, or Close to close the dialog box.
The Executive Summary dialog box displays the following information:
Label: Displays the name of the currently selected scenario.
Rainfall Alternative Label: Displays the currently selected rainfall alternative.
Global Storm Event: Displays the current global storm event.
Return Event: Displays the recurrence period of the global storm event.
8-789
Calculation Detailed Summary Dialog Box (GVF Rational Solver)
8.2
Calculation Detailed Summary Dialog Box

(GVF Rational Solver)
The Calculation Detailed Summary dialog box provides a detailed reports of the
calculations performed on your model. You can open this dialog box by calculating
your model and clicking Detailed Summary in the Calculation Executive Summary
dialog box. You can also see this report by clicking Analysis > Calculation
Summary > Details.
Click the tabs in the Calculation Detailed Summary dialog box to review the details of
the report:
Conduit Summary Tab on page 8-792
Catchment Summary Tab on page 8-792
Node Summary Tab on page 8-793
Inlet Summary Tab on page 8-794
8.2.1

This tab displays the current settings in the Property Editor for calculation options. To
change this, click Analysis > Calculation Options and change the settings in the
Property Editor.
The Calculation Options tab displays the following information:
Maximum Network Traversals: This is the maximum number of iterations that will
be performed to achieve the closest approximation of the desired network results.
Flow Convergence Test: This value is taken as the maximum relative change in
discharge occurring at the system outlet between two successive network solutions. In
rational hydrology, system discharge is a function of travel time and hydraulics
through the system. Therefore, it is necessary to iterate until the system balances, or a
maximum number of trials has occurred.
Neglect Side Flow?: Allows you to choose whether to neglect side flow. If you select
True for this option, only frontal views will be included in the inlet calculations.
8-790

Neglect Gutter Slope for Side Flow?: If this option is True, StormCAD will neglect
the gutter cross slope and always use the road cross slope for side flow calculations. If
this option is False, and the grate width is less than the gutter width, StormCAD will
use the gutter slope for side flow calculations. (Note: StormCAD 5.6 and earlier
always used the road cross slope for side flow calculations).
Active Components for Combination Inlets In Sag: This section gives you the
choice of whether to use both curb and grate openings or the grate or curb opening
only for combination inlets in sag.
Active Components for Combination Inlets on Grade: This section gives you the
choice of whether to use both curb and grate openings or the grate or curb opening
only for combination inlets on grade.
Flow Profile Method: Allows you to chosse between a backwater and capacity analysis flow profile method.
Number of Flow Profile Steps: The gradually varied flow profile divides each pipe
into internal segments prior to calculation of the hydraulic grade. The default value of
profile steps is five, and it is recommended that the value entered here be at least five
for accuracy. Increasing this number will increase the accuracy of the hydraulic grade
calculation, but will increase the calculation time.
Hydraulic Grade Convergence Test: The value entered here is taken as the
maximum absolute change between two successive iterations of hydraulic grade at
any junction or inlet in the system. For a given discharge, the upstream propagation of
headlosses through pipes will continue until two successive calculations change by an
absolute difference of less than this test value.
Hydraulic Grade Convergence Test: The value is used in the standard step gradually
varied flow profiling algorithm. The calculations is assumed to converge to the solution when the two successive depth iterations are within this absolute test value.
Average Velocity Method: This section allows you to pick the method used to calculate the average travel time velocity. The following four options are available:
Actual Uniform Flow Velocity
Full Flow Velocity
Minimum Structure Headloss: This section allows you to specify a minimum structure headloss. If the system calculates a structure headloss that is lower then this
value, the value specified in the Minimum Headloss field will be used.
8-791

This option applies to all structure headloss methods except for the Absolute Method.
Absolute headlosses will not be overridden, even if they are less then the value specified in this option.
Minimum Time of Concentration: The Minimum Time of Concentration. Time of
concentration is defined as the amount of time it takes for water to travel from the
farthest point in the watershed to an inlet.
8.2.2
Catchment Summary Tab

This tab displays a table of data about catchments in your model. You cannot modify
the table, it is read-only. To edit a catchment, select it in the Drawing Pane and edit its
The Catchment Summary tab displays the following information:
Label: Displays the label of each catchment in your model.
Area: Displays the catchment size.
Time of Concentration: Displays the time of concentration for the catchment.
Rational C: Displays the rational C value for the catchment.
Catchment CA: Displays the CA value for the catchment.
Catchment Intensity: Displays the intensity of the rainfall at the catchment.
Catchment Rational Flow: Displays the amount of rational flow at the catchment.
8.2.3
Conduit Summary Tab

This tab displays a table of calculations for conduits in your model. You cannot
modify the table, it is read-only. To edit a conduit, select it in the Drawing Pane and
edit its attributes in the Property Editor.
The Conduit Summary tab displays the following information:
Label: Displays the label of each element in your model.
Conduit Description: Displays the Conduit Description. The Conduit Description
field is a special field which can automatically consolidate several conduit properties
into one field. For more information, see the Conduit Description Attribute topic.
Conduit Shape: Displays the shape of the conduit.
8-792

Branch ID: Branch identifier for the conduit, determined during engine parsing.
Subnetwork Outfall: Most downstream element of the conduit's subnetwork outfall.
Flow: Total flow through the conduit during the calculation.
Velocity (Average): The average velocity of flow through the conduit over the duration of the run.
Hydraulic Grade Line (In): Hydraulic Grade Line at the upstream end of the
conduit.
Hydraulic Grade Line (Out): Hydraulic Grade Line at the downstream end of the
conduit.
Depth (In): Depth at the upstream end of the conduit.
Depth (Out): Depth at the downstream end of the conduit.
8.2.4
Node Summary Tab

This tab displays a table of calculations for nodes in your model. Nodes include catch
basins, manholes, and transitions. You cannot modify the table, it is read-only. To edit
a node, select it in the Drawing Pane and edit its attributes in the Property Editor.
The Node Summary tab displays the following information:
Label: Displays the label of each node in your model.
Element Type: Displays the kind of node being reported on.
Subnetwork Outfall: Most downstream outfall for the node's gravity subnetwork.
Flow (Total Surface): Summation of all surface catchment inflows draining to the
inlet.
Flow (Total Out): Sum of flows at the downstream side of the struture.
Elevation (Ground): Ground elevation for the node.
Elevation (Invert): Invert elevation for the node.
Conduit Description: Displays the Conduit Description. The Conduit Description
field is a special field which can automatically consolidate several conduit properties
into one field. For more information, see the Conduit Description Attribute topic.
Conduit Shape: Displays the shape of the conduit.
8-793

Branch ID: Branch identifier for the conduit, determined during engine parsing.
Subnetwork Outfall: Most downstream element of the conduit's subnetwork outfall.
Flow: Total flow through the conduit during the calculation.
Velocity (Average): The average velocity of flow through the conduit over the duration of the run.
Hydraulic Grade Line (In): Hydraulic Grade Line at the upstream end of the
conduit.
Hydraulic Grade Line (Out): Hydraulic Grade Line at the downstream end of the
conduit.
Depth (In): Depth at the upstream end of the conduit.
Depth (Out): Depth at the downstream end of the conduit.
Energy Grade Line (In): Energy grade line at the upstream side of the node.
Energy Grade Line (Out): Energy grade line at the downstream side of the node.
8.2.5
Inlet Summary Tab

This tab displays a table of data about inlets in your model. You cannot modify the
table, it is read-only. To edit an inlet, use the Inlets Catalog dialog, accessible from the
Components menu.
The Inlet Summary tab displays the following information:
Label: Displays the label of each gutter in your model.
Inlet Type: Displays the type of inlet (Maximum Capacity, Percent Capture, or
Catalog Inlet).
Inlet Type (Inlet): Displays which of the inlet catalog types the associated catalog
inlet belongs to.
Inlet: Displays the Catalog Inlet label for the inlet.
Flow (Captured): Total amount of flow intercepted by the inlet.
Flow (Total Bypassed): Total amount of flow that bypassed the inlet and was not
captured.
Bypass Target: The downstream inlet that bypassed flow is directed towards.
8-794

Capture Efficiency: Ratio of captured flow to total flow.
Kerb Channel Depth: Depth of water at the inlet.
Gutter Spread: Spread of water at the inlet, measured from the curb.
SWMM Engine Summary Report

When a SWMM engine run finishes it produces a summary report which is written to
Notepad (as opposed to the Calculation Summary report when the Implicit engine
solves). This report is a Notepad file and is not saved with the model once the file is
closed. This report provides useful overall information on the run. If you want to
review this result later in the session, you can minimize it instead of closing it. If you
want to save it for later use, execute a File > Save command.
SWMM Results File

When a run using the SWMM engine teminates, a file generated by SWMM is
displayed. This provides some useful diagnostics about the run and summary results.
Once this file is closed, it can be viewed again by selecting Report > Calculation
Executive Summary
User Notifications
User notifications are messages about your model. These messages can warn you
about potential issues with your model, such as slopes that might be too steep or
elements that slope in the wrong direction. These messages also point you to errors in
your model that prevent Bentley SewerGEMS V8i from solving your model.
To see user notifications:
1. Compute your model.
2. If needed, open the User Notification manager by clicking Analysis >
User Notifications.
3. Or, if the calculation fails to compute because of an input error, when your model
is finished computing, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i prompts you to view user notifications to validate the input data.
You must fix any errors identified by red circles before Bentley SewerGEMS V8i
can compute a result.
8-795
User Notifications
Errors identified by orange circles are warnings that do not prevent the computation of the model.
4. In the User Notifications manager, if a notification pertains to a particular
element, you can double-click the notification to magnify and display the element
in the center of the drawing pane.
5. As needed, use the element label to identify the element that generates the error
and use the user notification message to edit the elements properties to resolve
the error.
User Notifications Manager

The User Notifications Manager displays warnings and error messages that are turned
up by Bentley SewerGEMS V8is validation routines. If the notification references a
particular element, you can zoom straight to that element by either double-clicking the
notification, or right-clicking it and selecting the Zoom To command.
Warnings are denoted by an orange icon and do not prevent the model from
calculating successfully.
Errors are denoted by a red icon, and the model will not successfully calculate if errors are found.
The User Notifications Manager consists of a toolbar and a tabular view containing a
list of warnings and error messages. The toolbar consists of the following buttons:
8-796
Details
Displays the User Notification Details

dialog box, which includes information
about any warning or error messages.
Save
Saves the user notifications as a commadelimited .csv file. You can open the .csv
file in Microsoft Excel or Notepad.
Report
Displays a User Notification Report.
Copy
Copies the currently highlighted warning or

error message to the Windows clipboard.
Zoom To
If the warning or error message is related to

a specific element in your model, click this
button to center the element in question in
the drawing pane.
Select In Drawing
Allows you to select the element(s)

associated with the user notification in the
drawing pane.
Help
Displays online help for the User

Notification Manager.
The User Notification Manager displays warnings and error messages in a tabular
view. The table includes the following columns:
Message ID
This column displays the message ID associated

with the corresponding message.
Scenario ID
This column displays the scenario associated with

the corresponding message. This column will
display Base unless you ran a different scenario.
Element Type
This column displays the element type associated

Element ID
This column displays the element ID associated

Label
If the notification is caused by a specific element,

this column displays the label of the element
associated with the corresponding message.
Message
This column displays the description associated

Time
If the user notification occurred during a specific

time step, this column displays the time step.
Otherwise, this column is left blank.
Source
This column displays the validation routine that

triggered the corresponding message.
8-797
Statistics
User Notification Details Dialog Box

This dialog lists the elements that are referred to by a time-sensitive user notification
message. In the User Notification dialog, there is a time column that displays the timestep during which time-sensitive messages occur. These messages will say during
this time-step or for this time-step, and do not display information about the referenced element or elements. Double-clicking one of these messages in the User Notifications dialog opens the User Notification Details dialog, which does provide
information about the referenced element(s).
You can double-click messages in the User Notification Details dialog to zoom the
drawing pane view to the referenced element.
Statistics
Two general types of statistics are available: Flex table and Long Term Continuous
Simulation.
Flex table statistics are available by right clicking the top of any column with numerical data.
Modelers are often required to summarize the results of Long Term Continuous Simulations in terms of parameters such as number of overflows, volume discharged or
other similar properties. While these results can be prepared by manually reviewing
model runs, SewerGEMS V8i can calculate these statistics when the SWMM hydrologyengine or Implicit engine is used. After a simulation is completed, SewerGEMS
V8i can perform statistical frequency analysis on any of the variables of each element
in model. SewerGEMS V8i can perform statistical frequency analysis on system
results, such as temperature, precipitation, snow depth, or runoff.
A statistical report can then be generated from the time series of simulation results by
selecting Analysis > Statistics or clicking the
8-798
button.
Statistics Manager
In working with Long Term Continuous Simulations, the user reaches the statistics
manager by clicking Analysis > Statistics. The Statistics manager lets the user add,
edit, and remove and manage the statistics settings that are associated with the project.
The dialog box contains a list pane that displays each of the statistics currently
contained within the project, along with a toolbar. The toolbar consists of the
following buttons:
New
Creates a new Statistics item in the list pane.
Delete
Removes the currently highlighted statistics

item.
Rename

statistics item.
Edit
Opens the Statistics Editor dialog box that

corresponds with the currently highlighted
statistics item, allowing the user to define
the settings.
Statistics
Performs a statistics calculation based on the

settings defined for the currently highlighted
statistics item.
Help
Displays online help for the Statistics

Manager.
Statistics Results
The Statistics Results dialog is composed of the following tabs:
8-799
Statistics
8-800
Summary: The Summary tab shows the Statistics selection input and statistics
results. Input data include Object Name, Variable, Event Period, Event Statistic,
Event Threshold and Period of Record. Statistics results include Number of
Events, Event Frequency, Minimum Value, Maximum Value, Mean Value, Std.
Deviation and Skewness Coefficient. In the example below, there were 79 events

during the model run given the precipitation graph below.
8-801
Statistics
8-802
Events: The Events tab shows a table of rank-ordered event periods, including
their date, duration, and magnitude ranked according to the mean precipitation
intensity.
Histogram: The Histogram tab displays a plot of the occurrence frequency versus
event magnitude.
Frequency Plot: The Frequency Plot tab displays the exceedance frequency of
the event values. In the example, below50% of the events had a mean precipitation intensity greater than roughly 0.045.
8-803
Statistics
Statistics Editor
The Statistics editor allows the user to define the parameters for the statistical analysis. The dialog consists of the following controls:
Result Type: Allows the user to define whether to perform a statistical analysis of
individual elements or system statistics.
Element Label: Allows the user to choose the individual element for which to
perform the statistical analysis. Click the ellipsis button to select the element in
the drawing pane. This field is only available when the Result Type is set to
Element.
Result Analyzed: This field allows the user to choose the result variable to be
analyzed. For example,
8-804
Catchments
-
Precipitation
Snow Depth
Losses
Runoff
Groundwater Flow
Groundwater Elevation
Pollutant Concentration
Conduits
Flow
Depth
Velocity
Froude Number
Pollutant concentration
Capacity
Manholes
-
Depth
Head
Volume
Lateral Inflow
Total Inflow
Flooding
Pollutant concentration
Event Time Period: This field allows the user to choose the length of the time
period that defines an event. These can be Daily, Monthly, Annually or Event
dependent. In the Event-Dependent case, the event period depends on the number
of consecutive reporting periods where the simulation results are above the
threshold values defined below in the Event Thresholds section of the dialog. That
is, how much rain constitutes an event and what period of time between non-zero
rain constitutes a separate event.
Statistic Type: This field allows the user to define the type of statistical analysis
to perform. These include Mean, Peak, Total, Duration and Inter-event time.
Has Minimum Event Value: When this box is checked, the user can specify a
minimum value that must be met for an event to occur.
Minimum Event Value: This threshold specifies the minimum value of the variable being analyzed that must be exceeded for a time period to be included in an
event. This field is available when the Has Minimum Event Value box is
checked. If for example, the precipitation intensity does not exceed this value,
then it does not constitute and event.
Has Minimum Event Volume: When this box is checked, the user can specify a
minimum volume that must be met for a result to be counted as part of an event.
8-805
Troubleshooting DynamicWave Model Calculations
Minimum Event Volume: This threshold specifies a minimum flow volume (or
rainfall volume) that must be exceeded for a result to be counted as part of an
event. If the value is 0, no volume threshold applies. This field is available when
the Has Minimum Event Volume box is checked.
Separation Time: This field sets the minimum number of hours that must occur
between the end of one event and the start of the next event. Event with fewer
hours are combined together. The value applies only to event-dependent time
periods.
In the example above, the mean precipitation for all events over the duration of the
simulation will be determined and an event is defined as consisting of more than 0.1 in
of precipitation with at least a 0.5 day period since the previous non-zero precipitation.
Troubleshooting DynamicWave Model Calculations

If your model does not successfully calculate, try the following steps:
1. If you are running hydrology (rainfall on catchments) as well as hydraulics, check
the outflow hydrographs from catchments to make certain they are reasonable.
2. Check the model for errors:
8-806
Use the Validate command and look at the warnings and/or errors that are
reported.
When you Calculate the model, validation routines are performed that are not
included during a Validate operation. Review the warnings and/or errors that
are returned from both levels of validation.
Common data problems to look for include:

-
Incorrect channel or conduit slopes: Reasonable slopes are generally

small and rarely negative. You can view slopes along a reach visually by
using the Profiles feature. You can find unusually large or negative slopes
through User Notifications and FlexTable reports. You can Color Code
link elements by Slope and look for excessive values. If the model has
parallel conduits connected by a flat (slope value of 0) conduit, try
making that conduit Inactive.
Incorrect Channel or Conduit size: Look for unusual size changes along a
reach. Color code drawing by Diameter to look for this type of discrepancy.
Very low flows: If flows are less than 0.01 cfs (0.001 m3/s), depths may
fall below accuracy tolerances.
Look for areas displaying common modeling difficulties to verify input data is
correct:
-
Flow splits at weirs and orifices that are dry at certain points during an
extended period simulation.
Hydrograph rapidly changes within a short time (minutes).
Very sharp flood wave.
Near-critical slopes.
Significant and abrupt changes in the conduit size, shape and/or slope.
Looped networks.
Backwater up to a control structure.
Significant backwater conditions.
Flow control structures on relatively small storage nodes (ponds, wetwells).
System inflows vastly exceeding the system capacity resulting in mass

flooding.
Unusually small ponds compared to their inflow.
Many pumping stations in the system.
Look for a mix of very long and very small pipes, especially when using
the SWMM engine. Eliminate or combine short pipes because their effect
on routing is small. Break exceptionally long pipes into mutliple pipes
that are each roughly the same length as other pipes in the network.
Examine the User Notifications that are displayed after calculating.
Examine Graphs and water surface Profiles. Create Flow plots at splits
and at pump discharge areas and look for jagged peaks in the plot.
3. Default values for calculation options will work for the majority of cases, but
some systems need small adjustments to converge. When the calculation is
moving very slowly (you can observe that the model is stuck at certain times) or
the results show apparent instabilities, it is an indication that the model is experiencing difficulties in converging to a stable and robust result. Try adjusting calc
options in this order:
Initial conditions: Options include warm start or transitional start. Try both
and see if one gives better results for your system.
Computational Distance, Calculation Time Step, and NR Weighting Coefficient: Loop through the following process:
Try an NR Weighting Coefficient value of between 0.9 and 0.99 with the
default Computational Distance and Calculation Time Step.
Set NR back to default and try reducing the Computational Distance value.
8-807
Using the Totalizing Flow Meter
Set Computational Distance back to default and try reducing the Calculation
Time Step value.
Keep the Calculation Time Step the same and repeat the above steps.
Try increasing the the NR Iterations to 20.
Try increasing the LPI Coefficient to a value over 10.0.
Note:
There is no absolute rule on whether the time step, LPI

Coefficient, or the NR weighting coefficient should be changed
or to what specific value; normally you should reduce the time
step and increase the NR coefficient but sometimes the opposite
can also help.
4. Isolate problems areas: Isolate the problem area by incrementally deleting small
sections of your model and re-computing. This may help you narrow down the
source data that the engine has trouble with. It may expose data entry issues or
areas that are exhibiting common modeling difficulties.
5. Determine at what time step the problem occurs. Look for what is happening at
that time. Is a weir beginning to overflow? Is it the first time a large pump comes
on?
6. Switch to using the SWMM numerical engine. If there are problems when using
the SWMM engine, try changing the Routing Method from Dynamic Wave
(default) to Kinematic Wave or Uniform Flow. These methods do not handle
backups as accurately as dynamic wave but they tend to be more stable.
Note:
Headlosses at nodes are ignored during periods of supercritical

flow.

Totalizing flow meters allow you to view results of the total volume going through
your model for a specific selection of elements.
Totalizing Flow Meters Manager Dialog

The Totalizing Flow Meter manager consists of the following controls:
8-808
New
Create a new totalizing flow meter.
Delete
Delete the selected totalizing flow meter.
Rename
Rename the label for the current totalizing flow

meter.
Edit
Open the totalizing flow meter editor.
Refresh
Recompute the volume of the current totalizing

flow meter.
Help
Opens the online help for totalizing flow meter.
To create a new Totalizing Flow Meter

1. Click Compute. (EPS settings must be on in order to utilize this feature.)
2. From the Analysis Menu click Totalizing Flow Meters.
3. Click New which will open up the Select box.

4. Select the elements to be calculated or click the Query box then click Done.
Totalizing Flow Meter Editor Dialog

The Totalizing Flow Meter editor allows you to:
Define settings for new or existing flow meters
8-809

Display the calculated results for the current flow meter settings.
The Totalizing Flow Meter Summary tab displays the totals for each element type.
The Totalizing Flow Meter Details tab displays results for each individual element.
To define flow meter settings
1. Set Start and Stop times. Once selected, the results are automatically updated.
2. Click the Report button to run a report or click Close.
To remove elements from the Totalizing Flow Meter definition
Highlight the element to be removed in the list and click the Delete button above the
list pane.
To add elements to the Totalizing Flow Meter definition
1. Click the Select From Drawing button above the element list pane.
2. In the Drawing View, click the element or elements to be added.
Click the Done button in the Select dialog.
8-810
Chapter
Using Scenarios and

Alternatives
Scenarios and alternatives let you create, analyze, and recall an unlimited number of
variations of your model. In Bentley SewerGEMS V8i powerful two-level design,
scenarios contain alternatives to give you precise control over changes to the model.
Click one of the following links to learn more about using scenarios and alternatives:
Understanding Scenarios and Alternatives on page 9-811
Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution System on page 9-821
Scenarios on page 9-826
Running Multiple Scenarios at Once (Batch Runs) on page 9-829
Alternatives on page 9-832
Calculation Options on page 9-497
Understanding Scenarios and Alternatives

Scenario management in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i can dramatically increase your
productivity in the "What If?" areas of modeling, including calibration, operations
analysis, and planning.
If youve never used scenarios and alternatives before, we recommend reading all of
the topics in this section to gain a complete understanding of how they work. By
investing a little time now to understand management, you can avoid unnecessary
editing and data duplication. Take advantage of scenario management to get a lot more
out of your model, with much less work and expense.
Topics in this section include:
Advantages of Automated Scenario Management on page 9-812
A History of What-If Analyses on page 9-812
The Scenario Cycle on page 9-776
Scenario Properties and Alternatives on page 9-816
9-811
A Familiar Parallel on page 9-816
Inheritance on page 9-817
Local and Inherited Values on page 9-818
Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance on page 9-819
Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance on page 9-820
Advantages of Automated Scenario Management

In contrast to the old methods of scenario management (editing or copying data), automated scenario management using inheritance gives you significant advantages:
A single project file makes it possible to generate an unlimited number of "What

If?" conditions without becoming overwhelmed with numerous modeling files
and separate results.
Because the software maintains the data for all the scenarios in a single project, it
can provide you with powerful automated tools for directly comparing scenario
results. Any set of results is immediately available at any time.
The Scenario / Alternative relationship empowers you to mix and match groups of
data from existing scenarios without having to re-declare any data.
With inheritance, you do not have to re-enter data if it remains unchanged in a

new alternative or scenario, avoiding redundant copies of the same data. Inheritance also enables you to correct a data input error in a parent scenario and automatically update the corrected attribute in all child scenarios.
These advantages, while obvious, may not seem compelling for small projects. It is as
projects grow to hundreds or thousands of network elements that the advantages of
true scenario inheritance become clear. On a large project, being able to maintain a
collection of base and modified alternatives accurately and efficiently can be the
difference between evaluating optional improvements and being forced to ignore
them.
A History of What-If Analyses

The history of what-if analyses can be divided into two periods:
Before Haestad Methods - Distributed Scenarios on page 9-812
With Haestad Methods: Self-Contained Scenarios on page 9-814
Before Haestad Methods - Distributed Scenarios

Traditionally, there have only been two possible ways of analyzing the effects of
change on a software model:
9-812
Using Scenarios and Alternatives
Change the model, recalculate, and review the results
Create a copy of the model, edit that copy, calculate, and review the results
Although either of these methods may be adequate for a relatively small system, the
data duplication, editing, and re-editing becomes very time-consuming and errorprone as the size of the system and the number of possible conditions increase. Also,
comparing conditions requires manual data manipulation, because all output must be
stored in physically separate data files.
Figure 9-1:
Before Haestad Methods: Manual Scenarios
9-813
With Haestad Methods: Self-Contained Scenarios

Effective scenario management tools need to meet these objectives:
Minimize the number of project files the modeler needs to maintain (one, ideally).
Maximize the usefulness of scenarios through easy access to things such as input
and output data, and direct comparisons.
Maximize the number of scenarios you can simulate by mixing and matching data
from existing scenarios (data reuse)
Minimize the amount of data that needs to be duplicated to consider conditions

that have a lot in common
The scenario management feature in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i successfully meets all
of these objectives. A single project file enables you to generate an unlimited number
of What If? conditions, edit only the data that needs to be changed, and quickly
generate direct comparisons of input and results for desired scenarios.
Scenario Cycle
The process of working with scenarios is similar to the process of manually copying
and editing data, but without the disadvantages of data duplication and troublesome
file management. This process lets you cycle through any number of changes to the
model, without fear of overwriting critical data or duplicating important information.
Of course, it is possible to directly change data for any scenario, but an audit trail of
scenarios can be useful for retracing the steps of a calibration series or for understanding a group of master plan updates.
Figure 9-2:
9-814
Before Haestad Methods: Manual Scenarios
9-815
Scenario Properties and Alternatives

Before we explore scenario management further, a few key terms should be defined:
PropertyA property is a fundamental characteristic of a model element, and is

often a single numeric quantity. For example, the properties of a pipe include
diameter, length, and roughness.
AlternativeAn alternative holds a family of related proprties so pieces of data

that you are most likely to change together are grouped for easy referencing and
editing. For example, a physical properties alternative groups physical data for the
network's elements, such as elevations, sizes, and roughness coefficients.
ScenarioA scenario has a list of referenced alternatives (which hold the

attributes), and combines these alternatives to form an overall set of system conditions that can be analyzed. A scenario essentially points to the alternative which
contain the propertiy.This referencing of alternatives enables you to easily
generate system conditions that mix and match groups of data that have been
previously created. Note that scenarios do not actually hold any attribute data
the referenced alternatives do.
A Familiar Parallel
Although the structure of scenarios may seem a bit difficult at first, anyone who has
eaten at a restaurant should be able to relate fairly easily. A meal (scenario) is
comprised of several courses (alternatives), which might include a salad, an entre,
and a dessert. Each course has its own attributes. For example, the entre may have a
meat, a vegetable, and a starch. Examining the choices, we could present a menu as in
the following figure:
Figure 9-3:
9-816
A Restaurant Meal Scenario

The restaurant does not have to create a new recipe for every possible meal (combination of courses) that could be ordered. They can just assemble any meal based on what
the customer orders for each alternative course. Salad 1, Entre 1, and Dessert 2 might
then be combined to define a complete meal.
Generalizing this concept, we see that any scenario references one alternative from
each category to create a big picture that can be analyzed. Note that different types of
alternatives may have different numbers and types of attributes, and any category can
have an unlimited number of alternatives to choose from.
Figure 9-4:
Generic Scenario Anatomy
Inheritance
The separation of scenarios into distinct alternatives (groups of data) meets one of the
basic goals of scenario management: maximizing the number of scenarios you can
develop by mixing and matching existing alternatives. Two other primary goals have
also been addressed: a single project file is used, and easy access to input data and
calculated results is provided in numerous formats through the intuitive graphical
interface.
But what about the other objective: minimizing the amount of data that needs to be
duplicated to consider conditions that have a lot of common input? Surely an entire set
of pipe diameters should not be re-specified if only one or two change?
The solution is a familiar concept to most people: inheritance.
9-817

In the natural world, a child inherits characteristics from a parent. This may include
such traits as eye-color, hair color, and bone structure. There are two significant differences between the genetic inheritance that most of us know and the way inheritance is
implemented in software:
Overriding Inheritance on page 9-818
Dynamic Inheritance on page 9-818
Overriding Inheritance
Overriding inheritance is the software equivalent of cosmetics. A child can override
inherited characteristics at any time by specifying a new value for that characteristic.
These overriding values do not affect the parent, and are therefore considered local to
the child. Local values can also be removed at any time, reverting the characteristic to
its inherited state. The child has no choice in the value of his inherited attributes, only
in local attributes.
For example, suppose a child has inherited the attribute of blue eyes from his parent.
Now the child puts on a pair of green- tinted contact lenses to hide his natural eye
color. When the contact lenses are on, we say his natural eye color is overridden
locally, and his eye color is green. When the child removes the tinted lenses, his eye
color instantly reverts to blue, as inherited from his parent.
Dynamic Inheritance
Dynamic inheritance does not have a parallel in the genetic world. When a parent's
characteristic is changed, existing children also reflect the change. Using the eye-color
example, this would be the equivalent of the parent changing eye color from blue to
brown, and the children's eyes instantly inheriting the brown color also. Of course, if
the child has already overridden a characteristic locally, as with the green lenses, his
eyes will remain green until the lenses are removed. At this point, his eye color will
revert to the inherited color, now brown.
This dynamic inheritance has remarkable benefits for applying wide-scale changes to
a model, fixing an error, and so on. If rippling changes are not desired, the child can
override all of the parent's values, or a copy of the parent can be made instead of a
child.
Local and Inherited Values

Any changes that are made to the model belong to the currently active scenario and
the alternatives that it references. If the alternatives happen to have children, those
children will also inherit the changes unless they have specifically overridden that
attribute. The following figure demonstrates the effects of a change to a mid-level
alternative. Inherited values are shown as gray text, local values are shown as black
text.
9-818

The best way to determine is a value is local or inherited is to open the tab for that
element in the in the Alternatives Manager (Analysis > Alternatives) and view the
column designated "*. There are three possible values:
Yellow with a check - Base data
White with no check - Inherited data from parent alternative
White with a check - Local data which has been changed from parent alternative
See help topic Overriding Inheritance on page 9-818 for an example of how inheritance works.
Figure 9-5: A Mid-level Hierarchy Alternative Change
Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance

Inheritance has an application every time you hear the phrase, "just like x except for
y." Rather than specifying all of the data from x again to form this new condition, we
can create a child from x and change y appropriately. Now we have both conditions,
with no duplicated effort.
We can even apply this inheritance to our restaurant analogy as follows. Inherited
values are shown as gray text, local values are shown as black text.
Note:
Salad 3 could inherit from Salad 2, if we prefer: "Salad 3 is just

like Salad 2, except for the dressing."
"Salad 2 is just like Salad 1, except for the dressing."
9-819
"Salad 3 is just like Salad 1, except for the dressing."

Note:
If the vegetable of the day changes (say from green beans to

peas), only Entre 1 needs to be updated, and the other entres
will automatically inherit the vegetable attribute of "Peas"
instead of "Green Beans."
"Entre 2 is just like Entre 1, except for the meat and the starch."
"Entre 3 is just like Entre 2, except for the meat."

Note:
Dessert 3 has nothing in common with the other desserts, so it

can be created as a "root" or base alternative. It does not inherit
its attribute data from any other alternative.
"Dessert 2 is just like Dessert 1, except for the topping."
Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance

Just as a child alternative can inherit attributes from its parent, a child scenario can
inherit which alternatives it references from its parent. This is essentially still the
phrase just like x except for y, but on a larger scale.
Carrying through on our meal example, consider a situation where you go out to
dinner with three friends. The first friend places his order, and the second friend orders
the same thing except for the dessert. The third friend orders something totally
different, and you order the same meal as hers except for the salad.
The four meal scenarios could then be presented as follows (inherited values are
shown as gray text, local values are shown as black text):
9-820
"Meal 2 is just like Meal 1, except for the dessert." The salad and entre alternatives are inherited from Meal 1.
"Meal 3 is nothing like Meal 1 or Meal 2." A totally new base or root is created.
"Meal 4 is just like Meal 3, except for the salad." The entre and dessert alternatives are inherited from Meal 3.
Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution

System
Let us consider a fairly simple water distribution system: a single reservoir supplies
water by gravity to three junction nodes.
Figure 9-6:
Example Water Distribution System
Although true water distribution scenarios include such alternative categories as initial
settings, operational controls, water quality, and fire flow, we are going to focus on the
two most commonly changed sets of alternatives: demands and physical properties.
Within these alternatives, we are going to concentrate on junction baseline demands
and pipe diameters.
9-821
Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution System
Building the Model (Average Day Conditions)

During model construction, probably only one alternative from each category is going
to be considered. This model is built with average demand calculations and preliminary pipe diameter estimates. At this point we can name our scenario and alternatives,
and the hierarchies look like the following (showing only the items of interest):
Analyzing Different Demands (Maximum Day Conditions)

In our example, the local planning board also requires analysis of maximum day
demands, so a new demand alternative is required. No variation in demand is expected
at J-2, which is an industrial site. As a result, the new demand alternative can inherit J2s demand from Average Day while the other two demands are overridden.
Now we can create a child scenario from Average Day that inherits the physical alternative, but overrides the selected demand alternative. As a result, we get the following
scenario hierarchy:
9-822

Since no physical data (pipe diameters) have been changed, the physical alternative
hierarchy remains the same as before.
Another Set of Demands (Peak Hour Conditions)

Based on pressure requirements, the system is adequate to supply maximum day
demands. Another local regulation requires analysis of peak hour demands, with
slightly lower allowable pressures. Since the peak hour demands also share the industrial load from the Average Day condition, Peak Hour can be inherited from Average
Day. In this instance, Peak Hour could inherit just as easily from Maximum Day.
Another scenario is also created to reference these new demands, as shown below:
Note again that we did not change any physical data, so the physical alternatives
remain the same.
Correcting an Error
This analysis results in acceptable pressures, until it is discovered that the industrial
demand is not actually 500 gpmit is 1,500 gpm. Because of the inheritance within
the demand alternatives, however, only the Average Day demand for J-2 needs to be
updated. The changes ripple through to the children. After the single change is made,
the demand hierarchy is as follows:
Notice that no changes need to be made to the scenarios to reflect these corrections.
The three scenarios can now be calculated as a batch to update the results.
9-823
Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution System

When these results are reviewed, it is determined that the system does not have the
ability to adequately supply the system as it was originally thought. The pressure at J2 is too low under peak hour demand conditions.
Analyzing Improvement Suggestions

To counter the headloss from the increased demand load, two possible improvements
are suggested:
A much larger diameter is proposed for P-1 (the pipe from the reservoir). This
physical alternative is created as a child of the Preliminary Pipes alternative,
inheriting all the diameters except P-1s, which is overridden.
Slightly larger diameters are proposed for all pipes. Since there are no commonalities between this recommendation and either of the other physical alternatives,
this can be created as a base (root) alternative.
These changes are then incorporated to arrive at the following hierarchies:
This time, the demand alternative hierarchy remains the same since no demands were
changed. The two new scenarios (Peak, Big P-1, Peak, All Big Pipes) can be batch run
to provide results for these proposed improvements.
Next, features like Scenario Comparison Annotation (from the Scenario Manager) and
comparison Graphs (for extended period simulations, from the element editor dialog
boxes) can be used to directly determine which proposal results in the most improved
pressures.
9-824
Finalizing the Project

It is decided that enlarging P-1 is the optimum solution, so new scenarios are created
to check the results for average day and maximum day demands. Notice that this step
does not require handling any new data. All of the information we want to model is
present in the alternatives we already have!
Also note that it would be equally effective in this case to inherit the Avg. Day, Big P1 scenario from Avg. Day (changing the physical alternative) or to inherit from Peak,
Big P-1 (changing the demand alternative). Likewise, Max. Day, Big P-1 could inherit
from either Max. Day or Peak, Big P-1.
Neither the demand nor physical alternative hierarchies were changed in order to run
the last set of scenarios, so they remain as they were.
Summary
In contrast to the old methods of scenario management (editing or copying data), automated scenario management using inheritance gives you significant advantages:
A single project file makes it possible to generate an unlimited number of What

If? conditions without becoming overwhelmed with numerous modeling files and
separate results.
9-825
Scenarios
Because the software maintains the data for all the scenarios in a single project, it
can provide you with powerful automated tools for directly comparing scenario
results. Any set of results is immediately available at any time.
The Scenario / Alternative relationship empowers you to mix and match groups of
data from existing scenarios without having to re-declare any data.
With inheritance, you do not have to re-enter data if it remains unchanged in a

new alternative or scenario, avoiding redundant copies of the same data. Inheritance also enables you to correct a data input error in a parent scenario and automatically update the corrected attribute in all child scenarios.
These advantages, while obvious, may not seem compelling for small projects. It is as
projects grow to hundreds or thousands of network elements that the advantages of
true scenario inheritance become clear. On a large project, being able to maintain a
collection of base and modified alternatives accurately and efficiently can be the
difference between evaluating optional improvements and being forced to ignore
them.
To learn more about actually using scenario management in our software, start by
running the scenario management tutorial from the Help menu or from within the
scenario manager itself. Then load one of the SAMPLE projects and explore the
scenarios defined there. For context-sensitive help, press F1 or the Help button any
time there is a screen or field that puzzles you.
Scenarios
A Scenario contains all the input data (in the form of Alternatives), calculation
options, results, and notes associated with a set of calculations. Scenarios let you set
up an unlimited number of What If? situations for your model, and then modify,
compute, and review your system under those conditions.
You can create scenarios that reuse or share data in existing alternatives, submit
multiple scenarios for calculation in a batch run, switch between scenarios, and
compare scenario resultsall with a few mouse clicks. There is no limit to the number
of scenarios that you can create.
Click one of the following links to learn more about creating scenarios:
9-826
Base and Child Scenarios on page 9-827
Creating Scenarios on page 9-827
Editing Scenarios on page 9-828
Scenario Manager on page 9-830
Base and Child Scenarios

Note:
The calculation options are not inherited between scenarios, but

are duplicated when the scenario is first created. The
alternatives and data records, however, are inherited. There is a
permanent, dynamic link from a child back to its parent.
There are two types of scenarios:
Base ScenariosContain all of your working data. When you start a new project,
you begin with a default base scenario. As you enter data and calculate your
model, you are working with this default base scenario and the alternatives it
references.
Child ScenariosInherit data from a base scenario, or other child scenarios.

Child scenarios allow you to freely change data for one or more elements in your
system. Child scenarios can reflect some or all of the values contained in their
parent. This is a very powerful concept, giving you the ability to make changes in
a parent scenario that will trickle down through child scenarios, while also giving
you the ability to override values for some or all of the elements in child
scenarios.
Related Topics
Creating Scenarios
You create new scenarios in the Scenario Manager. A new scenario can be a Base
scenario or a Child scenario. For information about the differences between the two
types of scenarios, see Base and Child Scenarios on page 9-827.
To create a new scenario:
1. Select Analysis > Scenarios to open the Scenario Manager, or click the Scenario
Manager tab.
2. Click the New button and select whether you want to create a Base scenario or a
Child Scenario. When creating a Child scenario, you must first highlight the
scenario from which the child is derived in the Scenario Manager tree view.
9-827
Scenarios
By default, a new scenario comprises the Base Alternatives associated with each
alternative type.
3. Double-click the new scenario to edit its properties in the Property Editor.
Related Topics
Editing Scenarios
You edit scenarios in two places in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i:
The Scenario Manager lists all of the projects scenarios in a hierarchical tree
format, and displays the Base/Child relationship between them.
The Property Editor displays the alternatives that make up the scenario that is
currently highlighted in the Scenario Manager, along with the scenario label, any
notes associated with the scenario, and the calculation options profile that is used
when the scenario is calculated.
To edit a scenario:
1. Select Analysis > Scenarios to open the Scenario Manager, or click the Scenario
Manager tab.
2. Double-click the scenario you want to edit to display its properties in the Property
Editor.
3. Edit any of the following properties as desired:
Scenario label - This is the same operation as renaming the scenario in the
Scenario Manager.
Notes - Add any notes or comments in the Notes field
Alternatives
Calculation Options
Related Topics
9-828
Running Multiple Scenarios at Once (Batch Runs)

Performing a batch run lets you set up and run calculations for multiple scenarios at
once. This is helpful if you want to queue a large number of calculations, or manage a
group of smaller calculations as a set. The list of selected scenarios for the batch run
remain with your project until you change it.
To perform a batch run:
1. Selecting View > Scenarios to open the Scenario Manager, or click the Scenario
Manager tab.
2. Click the Compute Current Scenario button, then select Batch Run from the
shortcut menu.
The Batch Run Editor dialog box appears.
3. Check the scenarios you want to run, then click the Batch button. Each scenario is
calculated. You can cancel the batch run between any scenario calculation. The
selected scenarios run consecutively.
When the batch run is completed, the scenario that was current stays current, even
if it was not calculated.
4. Select a calculated scenario from the Scenario toolbar drop-down list to see the
results throughout the program.
Batch Run Editor Dialog Box

The Batch Run Editor dialog box contains the following controls:
Scenario List
Displays a list of all current scenarios. Click the

check box next to the scenarios you want to run in
batch mode.
Batch
Starts the batch run of the selected scenarios.
Select
Displays a drop-down menu containing the

following commands:
Select All - Selects all scenarios listed.
Clear Selection - Clears all selected

scenarios.
9-829
Scenarios
Close
Closes the Batch Run Editor dialog box.
Help
Displays context-sensitive help for the Batch Run

Editor dialog box.
Related Topics
Scenario Manager
The Scenario Manager lets you create, edit, and manage scenarios. There is one builtin default scenariothe Base scenario. If you wish, you only have to use this one
scenario. However, you can save yourself time by creating additional scenarios that
reference the alternatives needed to perform and recall the results of each of your
calculations. There is no limit to the number of scenarios that you can create.
Note:
When you delete a scenario, you are not losing data records
because scenarios never actually hold calculation data records
(alternatives do). The alternatives and data records referenced
by that scenario exist until you explicitly delete them. By
accessing the Alternatives Manager, you can delete the
referenced alternatives and data records.
The Scenario Manager consists of a hierarchical tree view and a toolbar.

The tree view displays all of the scenarios in the project. If the Property Editor is open,
highlighting a scenario in the list causes the alternatives that make up the scenario
appear there. If the Property Editor is not open, you can display the alternatives and
scenario information by highlighting the desired scenario and clicking the Properties
button in the Scenario Manager.
9-830
New Scenario

commands:
Child ScenarioLets you create a new

Child scenario from the currently highlighted
Base scenario.
Base ScenarioLets you create a new

Base scenario.
Delete
Removes the currently selected scenario.
Rename
Lets you rename the currently selected scenario.
Go

commands:
Make Current
ScenarioLets you calculate the currently

highlighted scenario.
HierarchyLets you calculate the entire

currently highlighted branchthe Base
scenario and all Child scenarios currently
associated with it.
ChildrenLets you calculate all of the

Child scenarios associated with the
currently highlighted scenario.
Batch RunLets you run a user-defined

group of scenarios at once.
Causes the currently selected scenario to

become the active one, and to be displayed in
the drawing pane.
9-831
Alternatives
Scenario
Comparison
Opens the Scenario Comparison tool, allowing

you to compare the differences between
scenarios.
Expand All
Expands all of the branches in the hierarchy

displayed in the list pane.
Collapse All
Collapses all of the branches in the hierarchy

Help
Displays online help for the Alternatives

Manager.
Related Topics
Alternatives
Alternatives are the building blocks behind scenarios (for more information, see
Scenarios on page 9-826). They are categorized data sets that create scenarios when
placed together. Alternatives hold the input data in the form of records. A record holds
the data for a particular element in your system.
Scenarios are composed of alternatives, as well as other calculation options (see
Calculation Options on page 9-497), allowing you to compute and compare the
results of various changes to your system. Alternatives can vary independently within
scenarios, and can be shared between scenarios.
Scenarios allow you to specify the alternatives you wish to analyze. In combination
with scenarios, you can perform calculations on your system to see what effect each
alternative has. Once you have determined an alternative that works best for your
system, you can permanently merge changes from the preferred alternative to the base
alternative if you wish.
9-832

When you first set up your system, the data that you enter is stored in the various base
alternative types. If you wish to see how your system behaves, for example, by
increasing the diameter of a few select pipes, you can create a child alternative to
accomplish that. You can make another child alternative with even larger diameters,
and another with smaller diameters. There is no limit to the number of alternatives that
you can create.
Click one of the following links to learn more about creating and editing alternatives:
Base and Child Alternatives on page 9-833
Creating Alternatives on page 9-834
Editing Alternatives on page 9-834
Alternatives Manager on page 9-835
Types of Alternatives
The exact properties of each alternative are discussed in their respective sections. By
breaking up alternatives into these different types, we give you the ability to mix
different alternatives any way that you want within any given scenario.
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i includes these types of alternatives:
Active Topology Alternative on page 9-837
Physical Alternatives on page 9-840
Boundary Condition Alternatives on page 9-867
Initial Settings Alternative on page 9-869
Hydrology Alternatives on page 9-871
Output Alternatives on page 9-878
Infiltration and Inflow Alternatives on page 9-879
Rainfall Runoff Alternative on page 9-883
Water Quality Alternative on page 9-886
Base and Child Alternatives

There are two kinds of alternatives: Base alternatives and Child alternatives. Base
alternatives contain local data for all elements in your system. Child alternatives
inherit data from base alternatives, or even other child alternatives, and contain data
for one or more elements in your system. The data within an alternative consists of
data inherited from its parent, and the data altered specifically by you (local data).
9-833
Alternatives
Remember that all data inherited from the base alternative are changed when the base
alternative changes. Only local data specific to a child alternative remain unchanged.
Related Topics
Creating Alternatives
New alternatives are created in the Alternatives Manager dialog box. A new alternative can be a Base scenario or a Child scenario. Each alternative type contains a Base
alternative in the Alternatives Manager tree view.
Note:
For information regarding the differences between the two types

of alternatives, see Base and Child Alternatives on page 9-833.
To create a new Alternative:

1. Select View > Alternatives to open the Alternatives Manager, or click the Alternatives Manager tab.
2. To create a new Base alternative, highlight the type of alternative you want to
create, then click the New button.
3. To create a new Child alternative, right-click the Base alternative from which the
child will be derived, then select New > Child Alternative from the submenu.
4. Double-click the new alternative to edit its properties in the Alternative Editor.
Related Topics
Editing Alternatives
You edit the properties of an alternative in its own alternative editor. The first column
in an alternative editor contains check boxes, which indicate the records that have
been changed in this alternative.
9-834
If the box is checked, the record on that line has been modified and the data is
local, or specific, to this alternative.
If the box is not checked, it means that the record on that line is inherited from its
higher-level parent alternative. Inherited records are dynamic. If the record is
changed in the parent, the change is reflected in the child. The records on these
rows reflect the corresponding values in the alternatives parent.
To edit an existing alternative, you can use one of two methods:
Double-click the alternative to be edited in the Alternatives Manager.
or
Highlight the alternative to be edited in the Alternatives Manager and click the
Properties button.
In either case, the Alternative Editor dialog box for the specified alternative appears,
allowing you to view and define settings as desired.
Related Topics
Alternative Editor Dialog Box on page 9-837
Alternatives Manager
The Alternatives Manager lets you create, view, and edit the alternatives that make up
the project scenarios. The dialog box consists of a pane that displays folders for each
of the alternative types which can be expanded to display all of the alternatives for that
type, and a toolbar.
The toolbar consists of the following buttons:
9-835
Alternatives
New
9-836

commands:
Base AlternativeCreates a new Base

Alternative of the currently highlighted
type.
Child AlternativeCreates a new

Child Alternative from the currently highlighted Base Alternative.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted alternative.
Duplicate
Creates a copy of the the currently

highlighted alternative.
Open
Opens the Alternative Editor dialog box for

the currently highlighted alternative.
Merge Alternative
Moves all records from one alternative to

another.
Rename

alternative.
Report
Lets you generate a report of the currently

highlighted alternative.
Expand All

Collapse All

Help
Displays online help for the Alternatives

Manager.
Alternative Editor Dialog Box

This dialog box presents in tabular format the data that makes up the alternative being
edited. Depending on the alternative type, the dialog box contains a separate tab for
each element that possesses data contained in the alternative.
Note:
Note: As you make changes to records, the check box

automatically becomes checked. If you want to reset a record to
its parent's values, clear the corresponding check box.
Many columns support Global Editing (see Globally Editing
Data), allowing you to change all values in a single column.
Right-click a column header to access the Global Edit option.
The check box column is disabled when you edit a base
alternative.
The Alternative Editor displays all of the records held by a single alternative. These
records contain the values that are active when a scenario referencing this alternative
is active. They allow you to view all of the changes that you have made for a single
alternative. They also allow you to eliminate changes that you no longer need.
There is one editor for each alternative type. Each type of editor works similarly and
allows you to make changes to a different aspect of your system. The first column
contains check boxes, which indicate the records that have been changed in this alternative.
If the check box is selected, the record on that line has been modified and the data is
local, or specific, to this alternative.
If the check box is cleared, it means that the record on that line is inherited from its
higher-level parent alternative. Inherited records are dynamic. If the record is changed
in the parent, the change is reflected in the child. The records on these rows reflect the
corresponding values in the alternative's parent.
Note that the tabs for element types that are not used in the current model are marked
with an icon
Active Topology Alternative

The Active Topology Alternative lets you temporarily remove areas of the network
from the current analysis. This is useful for comparing the effect of proposed
construction and to gauge the effectiveness of redundancy that may be present in the
system.
The Active Topology dialog box is divided into tabs for each element type:
9-837
Alternatives
Pump
Manhole
Catch basin
Outfall
Pond outlet structure
Cross section node
Wet well
Pressure junction
Junction chamber
Conduit
Channel
Gutter
Pressure Pipe
Catchment
Pond
For each tab, the same setup appliesthe tables are divided into three columns. The
first column displays whether the data is Base or Inherited, the second column is the
element Label, and the third column allows you to choose whether or not the corresponding element is Active in the current alternative.
To make an element Inactive in the current alternative, clear the check box in the Is
Active? field that corresponds to that elements Label.
Related Topic
Creating an Active Topology Child Alternative on page 9-838
Creating an Active Topology Child Alternative

When creating an active topology child alternative, you may notice that the elements
added to the child scenario also appear in your model when the base scenario is the
current scenario.
To create an active topology alternative so that the elements added to the child
scenario do not show up as part of the base scenario:
1. Create a new project.
2. Open the Property Editor.
9-838

3. Open the Scenario Manager and make sure the Base scenario is current (active).
4. Create your model by adding elements in the drawing pane.
5. Create a new child scenario and a new child active topology alternative as
described in the following steps:
a. In the Scenario Manager, click the New button and select Child Scenario
from the submenu.
b. In the Property Editor, which should now display the properties for the newly
created scenario, select <New...> in the Active Topology field.
c. In the Create New Alternative dialog box, type the name of the new child
active topology alternative name then click OK.
6. In the Scenario Manager, select the new child scenario then click the Make
Current button to make the child scenario the current (active) scenario.
7. Add new elements to your model. These elements will be active only in the new
child alternative.
8. To verify that this worked as expected:
a. In the Scenario Manager, select the base scenario then click the Make
Current button to make the base scenario the current (active) scenario. The
new elements are shown as inactive (they appear grayed out in the drawing
pane).
b. In the Scenario Manager, select the new child scenario then click the Make
Current button to make the child scenario the current (active) scenario. The
new elements are shown as active.
Note:
If you add new elements in the base scenario, they will show up
in the child scenario. This is normal.
Active Topology Selection Dialog Box

While it is possible to make elements active or inactive by:
1. Checking or unchecking the "Is active?" box in the Alternatives Manager under
the Active Topology Manager,
2. Unchecking the "Is active?" box in a FlexTable, or
3. Picking True of False in property grid next to "Is active?" for individual elements,
another way of making elements active or inactive is the Active Topology Selection
Tool, which is accessed through Tools>Active Topology Selection.
When the user starts Active Topology Selection, a Select tool opens. Clicking
elements in the drawing view while the selection tool is enabled can make them active
or inactive according to the commands below.
9-839
Alternatives
Making an element "inactive" means that the element remains in the data file but it is
not included in any hydraulic analysis calculations. Inactive elements will appear in
FlexTables but calculated values will be set to NA.
Changing the active status using this tool only affects the Active Topology Alternative
of the current scenario.
The Select tool consists of the following controls:
Done: Select Done when you are finished selecting elements. This brings the user
back to the drawing pane.
Add: When this button is selected, clicking elements highlights the elements and
makes them Inactive. Clicking on an element that is already inactive causes the
tool to give a beep and the element remains inactive.
Remove: While in this mode, clicking on elements that are inactive deselects
them, making them Active. Clicking on active elements has no effect.
Clear: Clicking on this button causes all elements to become active in the current
scenario.
Right clicking while the Selection tool is open (i.e. opening the right click context
menu) brings up a list which enables the user to switch between Add, Remove or
Done.
Note:
Selecting a node element to become Inactive will also select all

adjacent pipes to become Inactive. This is because all pipes
must end at a node.
In AutoCAD mode, you cannot use the right-click context menu
command Repeat to re-open the Active Topology Selection
dialog box.
Physical Alternatives
Each type of network element has a specific set of physical properties that are stored
in a physical properties alternative, as listed below:
9-840
Physical Alternative for Pumps on page 9-841
Physical Alternative for Manholes on page 9-842
Physical Alternative for Catch Basins on page 9-844
Physical Alternative for Outfalls on page 9-845
Physical Alternative for Pond Outlet Structures on page 9-846
Physical Alternative for Cross Section Nodes on page 9-846
Physical Alternative for Wet Wells on page 9-849
Physical Alternative for Pressure Junctions on page 9-850
Physical Alternative for Junction Chambers on page 9-850
Physical Alternative for Conduits on page 9-851
Physical Alternative for Channels on page 9-860
Physical Alternative for Gutters on page 9-862
Physical Alternative for Pressure Pipes on page 9-865
Physical Alternative for Ponds on page 9-863
Physical Alternative for Pumps

The physical alternative editor for pumps is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of pumps. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID
Displays the unique identifier for each element in

the alternative.
Label
Displays the label for each element in the

alternative.
Pump Definition
Allows you to select the pump definition that is

associated with each pump in the alternative.
Clicking the Ellipsis () button opens the Pump
Definitions dialog box.
Elevation
Displays the ground elevation for each node in the

alternative.
9-841
Alternatives
Physical Alternative for Manholes

The physical alternative editor for manholes is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of manholes. The following columns are available:
9-842
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Bolted Cover
Indicates that the associated manhole has a bolted

cover. If the manhole cover is bolted, then the
hydraulic grade line is not reset to the rim
elevation at the downstream end of the upstream
pipes in the case of a flooding situation (the
calculated HGL being higher than the rim
elevation).
Width
Displays the width of each box manhole in the

alternative.
Length
Displays the length of each box manhole in the

alternative.
Diameter
Displays the diameter of each circular manhole in

the alternative.
Structure Shape Type
Indicates whether the manhole is circular or box

shaped. Clicking a field displays a list box that
allows you to switch between the two.
Area (Constant
Surface)
Lets you define the area in which ponding occurs

at the currently selected element. It is available
only when the Surface Storage Type attribute is set
to Ponded Area.
Surface Storage Type
Contains list boxes for each manhole that allow

you to specify whether the manhole uses the
Default Storage Equation or a Surface Depth-Area
Curve.
Column
Description
Surface Depth Area

Curve
Clicking the Ellipsis () button in this field opens

the Surface Depth-Area Curve editor, allowing
you to define the Surface Depth- Area curve for
each element in the alternative that uses the
Surface Depth-Area Curve Surface Storage Type.
Elevation (Rim)
Lets you define the top elevation of a manhole

structure. This elevation is typically flush with the
ground surface. However in some cases, the rim
elevation may be slightly below the ground
surface elevation (sunk) or slightly above the
ground surface elevation (raised).
Set Rim to Ground

Elevation
Enables or disables a data entry shortcut. If the

box is checked, the manhole rim elevation is set
equal to the ground elevation automatically.
Elevation (Invert)
Lets you define the elevation at the bottom of the

manhole.
Elevation (Ground)

alternative.
Lets you define the headloss coefficient of each

manhole in the alternative. This column is only
available for manholes that use the Standard
Headloss method.
Start
Lets you define the headloss coefficient of the

element upstream of the manhole. This column is
only available for manholes that use the Generic
Headloss method.
Stop
Lets you define the headloss coefficient of the

element downstream of the manhole. This column
is only available for manholes that use the Generic
Headloss method.
Absolute Headloss
Lets you define the absolute headloss of manholes

in the alternative. This column is only available
for manholes that use the Absolute Headloss
method.
9-843
Alternatives
Column
Description
Headloss Method
Lets you specify the headloss method that is used

by the associated manhole.
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Physical Alternative for Catch Basins

The physical alternative editor for catch basins is used to create various data sets for
the physical characteristics of catch basins. The following columns are available:
9-844
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Inflow Capture Curve

the Inflow Capture Curve editor, allowing you to
define the inflow capture curve for each element
in the alternative that uses the Inflow Capture
Curve Inlet Type.
Flow (Maximum in)
Lets you define the maximum inflow for catch

basins of the Maximum Inflow Inlet Type.
Inlet Type
Indicates whether the catch basin is Rating Curve

or Maximum Inflow type. Clicking a field
activates a list box allowing you to switch between
the two.
Width
Displays the width of each box catch basin in the

alternative.
Length
Displays the length of each box catch basin in the

alternative.
Column
Description
Diameter
Displays the diameter of each circular catch basin

in the alternative.
Structure Shape Type
Indicates whether the catch basin is circular or box

shaped. Clicking a field activates a list box that
allows you to switch between the two.
Surface Depth Area

Curve

the Surface Depth-Area Curve editor, allowing
you to define the surface depth area curve for each
element in the alternative that uses the Surface
Depth-Area Curve Surface Storage Type.
Area (Constant
Surface)
Lets you define the area in which ponding occurs

at the currently selected element. It is available
only when the Surface Storage Type attribute is set
to Ponded Area.
Surface Storage Type
Contains a drop-down list box that allow you to

specify whether the manhole uses the Default
Storage Equation or a Surface Depth-Area Curve.
Elevation (Rim)
Lets you define the top elevation of a catch

basin structure. This elevation is typically flush
with the ground surface. In some cases, the rim
elevation may be slightly below the ground
surface elevation (sunk) or slightly above the
ground surface elevation (raised).
Set Rim to Ground

Elevation
Enables or disables a data entry shortcut. If the

box is checked, the catch basin rim elevation is set
equal to the ground elevation automatically.
Physical Alternative for Outfalls

The physical alternative editor for outfalls is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of outfalls. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
9-845
Alternatives
Column
Description
Label

alternative.
Elevation (Ground)

alternative.
Physical Alternative for Pond Outlet Structures

The physical alternative editor for pond outlet structures is used to create various data
sets for the physical characteristics of pond outlet structures. The following columns
are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Control Structure
Lets you specify the previously defined control

structure associated with the outlet structure
Has Control Structure
Specifies whether or not the pond has an outlet

control structure.
Upstream Pond
Displays the label of the upstream pond.
Physical Alternative for Cross Section Nodes

The physical alternative editor for cross section nodes is used to create various data
sets for the physical characteristics of cross section nodes. The following columns are
available:
9-846
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Column
Description
Mannings n
Lets you define the Mannings roughness value for

all of the cross sections in the alternative. This
column is available only when the Single
Mannings n Roughness Type is specified.
Channel Mannings n
Lets you specify the Mannings roughness value

for each cross section node in the alternative. This
column is only available for cross section nodes
that have a Trapezoidal Channel or Overbank
Channel Section Type.
Right Overbank
Mannings n

for the right overbank of each cross section node
in the alternative. This column is only available
for cross section nodes that have a Trapezoidal
Channel or Irregular Channel Section Type.
Left Overbank
Mannings n

for the left overbank of each cross section node in
the alternative. This column is only available for
cross section nodes that have a Trapezoidal
Channel or Irregular Channel Section Type.
Roughness Type
Lets you specify the roughness type of each cross

section in the alternative.
Transition Length
Lets you define the transition length when the

Abrupt Transition Type is chosen.
Transition Type
Lets you specify the transition type of the

currently highlighted element. If Abrupt is chosen
here, the Transition Length field becomes
available for input.
Elevations Modifier
The Elevations modifier is a constant value that

will be added to each elevation value. This
attribute is only used during SWMM calculations.
Stations Modifier
The Stations modifier is a factor by which the

distance between each station will be multiplied
when the transect data is processed by SWMM.
Use a value of 0 if no such factor is needed. This
9-847
Alternatives
9-848
Column
Description
Right Bank Station
The distance values appearing in the Station/

Elevation grid that mark the end of the left
overbank and the start of the right overbank. Use 0
to denote the absence of an overbank.
Left Bank Station

Material
The name of the material used. Alternatively,

clicking the Ellipsis () button opens the
Material Engineering Library, allowing you to
select a pre-defined material. If a pre-defined
material is chosen, the roughness value will
change accordingly.
Mannings n Flow
Curve

the Mannings n Flow Curve editor, allowing you
to define the Mannings roughness vs. flow curve
for each element in the alternative that uses the
Mannings n Flow Curve Roughness Type.
Mannings n Depth
Curve

the Mannings n Depth Curve editor, allowing you
to define the Mannings roughness vs. depth curve
for each element in the alternative that uses the
Mannings n Flow Curve Roughness Type.
Bottom Width
Displays the bottom width of each element in the

alternative. This column is only available for
Trapezoidal cross section types.
Elevation (Invert)
Lets you define the invert elevation for all cross

section nodes in the alternative. This column is
only available for Trapezoidal cross section types.
Slope (Left Side)
Lets you define the left side slope for all cross
Slope (Right Side)
Lets you define the right side slope for all cross
Column
Description
Height
Lets you define the height, or channel depth for all

cross section nodes in the alternative. This column
is only available for Trapezoidal cross section
types.
Section Type
Lets you specify the cross section type for all cross
section nodes in the alternative. The choices
include Trapezoidal and Generic cross section
types.
Physical Alternative for Wet Wells

The physical alternative editor for wet wells is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of wet wells. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Exponent
The exponent of the area function for the currently

highlighted element. It is available only when Wet
Well Area Function is chosen as the Wet Well
Volume Type.
Coefficient
The coefficient of the area function for the

currently highlighted element. It is available only
when Wet Well Area Function is chosen as the
Wet Well Volume Type.
Area
Allows you to define the area of each wet well in

the alternative.
Wet Well Depth-Area

Curve

the Wet Well Depth-Area Curve editor, allowing
you to define the depth-area curve for each wet
well in the alternative that uses the Wet Well
Depth-Area Curve Wet Well Volume Type.
9-849
Alternatives
Column
Description
Wet Well Volume Type
Lets you specify the volume type of each wet well

in the alternative. The type chosen here will affect
the availability of other fields in the alternative.
Ponded Area
Lets you define the ponded area of the wet well.
Max. Level
Lets you define the maximum water surface

elevation of the wet well.
Elevation (Invert)
Lets you define the invert elevation of each wet

well in the alternative.
Physical Alternative for Pressure Junctions

The physical alternative editor for pressure junctions is used to create various data sets
for the physical characteristics of pressure junctions. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Elevation
Lets you define the elevation of each pressure

junction in the alternative.
Physical Alternative for Junction Chambers

The physical alternative editor for junction chambers is used to create various data
sets for the physical characteristics of junction chambers. The following columns are
available:
9-850
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Column
Description
Diameter
The diameter of the currently highlighted element.
Elevation (Bottom)
The bottom elevation of the currently highlighted

element.
Elevation (Top)
The top elevation of the currently highlighted

element.
Elevation (Ground)
The ground elevation of the currently highlighted

element.
The headloss coefficient for the manhole. This

field is only available if you selected the Standard
Headloss Method.
Start
The headloss coefficient at the start section. This

field is only available if you selected the Generic
Headloss Method.
Stop
The headloss coefficient at the stop section. This

field is only available if you selected the Generic
Headloss Method.
Absolute Headloss
The headloss. This field is only available if you

selected the Absolute Headloss Method.
Headloss Method
Lets you select the headloss method to use:

Absolute, HEC-22, Generic, or Standard.
Physical Alternative for Conduits

The physical alternative editor for conduits is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of conduits. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
9-851
Alternatives
9-852
Column
Description
Egg Rise
Lets you define the rise (height) of the associated

conduit. This column is only available for
conduits that have an egg Section Type.
Number of Barrels
Lets you specify the number of hydraulically

identical conduit barrels that make up the conduit.
This column is only available for elements whose
Conduit Type is Closed Conduit.
Horseshoe Span
Lets you define the span (width) of the associated

conduits that have a horseshoe Section Type.
Horseshoe Rise

conduits that have a horseshoe Section Type.
Ellipse Span

conduits that have a an ellipse Section Type.
Ellipse Rise

conduits that have an ellipse Section Type.
Basket Span

conduits that have a basket-handle Section Type.
Basket Rise

conduits that have a basket-handle Section Type.
Box Equation Form
Lets you specify the form of equation that should

be used when applying culvert data. This column
is only available for box conduits that do Apply
Culvert Data.
Box Kr
Lets you define the reverse flow loss value for the
associated conduit. This column is only available
for box conduits that do Apply Culvert Data.
Box Ke
Lets you define the entrance loss value for the

Column
Description
Box Slope Correction

Factor
Lets you define the Slope Correction Factor to be

used in inlet control calculations. Normally this
factor is 0.5, but for mitered inlets, HDS No. 5
suggests +0.7. This column is only available for
box conduits that do Apply Culvert Data.
Box Y
Lets you define the Y equation coefficient that is

used in the submerged inlet control equation. This
column is only available for box conduits that do
Apply Culvert Data.
Box M
Lets you define the M equation coefficient that is

used in both forms of the unsubmerged inlet
control equation. This column is only available for
Box C
Lets you define the C equation coefficient that is

column is only available for box conduits that do
Apply Culvert Data.
Box K
Lets you define the K equation coefficient that is

Box Inlet Description
Lets you enter an inlet description for the

Box Apply Culvert

Data
Lets you specify whether the associated box

conduit does or does not apply culvert data.
Box Span

conduits that have an box Section Type.
Box Rise

conduits that have an box Section Type.
9-853
Alternatives
9-854
Column
Description
Circle Equation Form
Contains list boxes that allow you to specify the

form of equation that should be used when
applying culvert data. This column is only
available for circle conduits that do Apply Culvert
Data.
Circle Kr
for circle conduits that do Apply Culvert Data.
Circle Ke

Circle Slope
Correction Factor

circle conduits that do Apply Culvert Data.
Circle Y

column is only available for circle conduits that do
Apply Culvert Data.
Circle M

Circle C

Apply Culvert Data.
Circle K

Circle Inlet
Description

Column
Description
Circle Apply Culvert

Data
Lets you specify whether the associated box

conduit does or does not apply culvert data.
Diameter
Lets you define the diameter of the associated

conduits. This column is only available for
circular conduits.
Slope (Left Side)
Lets you define the left side slope of the associated

conduits that have a Trapezoidal Section Type.
Slope (Right Side)
Lets you define the right side slope of the

associated conduits. This column is only available
for conduits that have a Trapezoidal Section Type.
Trapezoidal Channel
Depth
Lets you define the depth of the associated

Base Width
Lets you define the base width of the associated

Section Type
Lets you specify the section type for each conduit

in the alternative. The value that is chosen affects
the available input data for other columns.
Outlet Structure
Lets you specify the previously defined outlet

structure associated with the conduit.
Has Control Structure
Lets you specify whether or not the associated

conduit has a control structure.
Length (User Defined)
Lets you define the length of each channel in the

alternative that has a userdefined length.
Has User Defined

Length
Lets you specify whether the channel has a userdefined or schematic length.
Channel Mannings n

for each channel in the alternative. This column is
only available for conduits that have a Trapezoidal
Channel or Overbank Channel Section Type.
9-855
Alternatives
9-856
Column
Description
Right Overbank
Mannings n

for the right overbank of each channel in the
conduits that have a Trapezoidal Channel or
Irregular Channel Section Type.
Left Overbank
Mannings n

for the left overbank of each channel in the
conduits that have a Trapezoidal Channel or
Irregular Channel Section Type.
Elevations Modifier
The Elevations modifier is a constant value that

will be added to each elevation value. This
Stations Modifier
The Stations modifier is a factor by which the

distance between each station will be multiplied
when the transect data is processed by SWMM.
Use a value of 0 if no such factor is needed. This
Right Bank Station

Left Bank Station

Material

change accordingly.
Invert (Stop)
Lets you define the downstream pipe invert.
Set Invert to Stop Node
Lets you automatically set the upstream pipe

invert to the elevation of the upstream node.
Column
Description
Invert (Start)
Lets you define the upstream pipe invert.
Set Invert to Start

Node
Lets you automatically set the upstream pipe

invert to the elevation of the downstream node.
Exit Loss Coefficient
Lets you define the exit loss coefficient for the

associated conduits.
Entrance Loss
Coefficient
Lets you define the entrance loss coefficient for

the associated conduits.
Contraction Loss
Coefficient
Lets you define the contraction loss of the conduit.

The contraction loss is due to flow transitioning
from large-area, low-velocity flow to small-area,
high-velocity flow, such as flow exiting a structure
and entering a downstream pipe
Expansion Loss
Coefficient
Lets you define the expansion loss of the conduit.

Expansion losses are encountered when smallarea, high-velocity flow meets a large-area, lowvelocity flow, such as a pipe discharging into a
structure.
Stop Control Structure
Lets you design a stop control structure, or choose

a preexisting one. Click the Ellipsis () button to
open the Conduit Control Structure dialog box to
set up the control structure you want to use.
Has Stop Control

Structure
Lets you define whether or not the currently

highlighted element has a stop control structure,
and if so, which type. The value chosen here
affects the availability of the other fields. If this is
set to True, an icon displays at the start/stopend
of the conduit to display the presence of the
structure.
Start Control Structure
Lets you design a start control structure, or choose

open the Conduit Control Structure dialog box to
9-857
Alternatives
9-858
Column
Description
Has Start Control

Structure

highlighted element has a start control structure,
set to True, an icon displays at the start/stopend
of the conduit to display the presence of the
structure.
Flap Gate?
Lets you choose whether or not the highlighted

element has a flap gate. If this is set to True, and
icon displays at the stop-end of the conduit to
display the presence of the structure. If this is set
to True and you design control structures without
flap gates selected, the flap gate check box will be
enabled for your control structures and a message
displayed.
Mannings n Flow
Curve
Lets you define points that describe a roughnessflow curve for the currently highlighted element.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button,
and click the Ellipsis () button to use the
Mannings n-Flow Curve dialog box. To use this
field, you must set Roughness Type attribute is set
to Mannings n-Flow.
Mannings n Depth
Curve
Lets you define points that describe a roughnessdepth curve for the currently highlighted element.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button,
and click the Ellipsis () button to use the
Mannings n-Depth Curve dialog box. To use this
field, you must set Roughness Type attribute is set
to Mannings n-Depth Curve.
Mannings n
Lets you define the Mannings roughness value for

the associated conduits. This column is only
available for conduits that use the Single
Mannings n Roughness Type.
Roughness Type
Lets you specify the roughness type for each

conduit in the alternative.
Arch Span

conduits that have an arch Section Type.
Column
Description
Arch Rise

conduits that have an arch Section Type.
Catalog Pipe Equation

Form
Let you specify the form of equation that should

be used when applying culvert data. This column
is only available for catalog pipe conduits that do
Apply Culvert Data.
Catalog Pipe Kr
for catalog pipe conduits that do Apply Culvert
Data.
Catalog Pipe Ke

Catalog Pipe Slope

Correction Factor

catalog pipe conduits that do Apply Culvert Data.
Catalog Pipe Y

Apply Culvert Data.
Catalog Pipe M

Catalog Pipe C

Apply Culvert Data.
Catalog Pipe K

9-859
Alternatives
Column
Description
Catalog Pipe Inlet

Description

Catalog Pipe Apply

Culvert Data
Contains list boxes that allow you to specify

whether the associated box conduit does or does
not apply culvert data.
Catalog Pipe Number

of Barrels
Lets you specify the number of hydraulically

identical conduit barrels that make up the conduit.
This column is only available for elements whose
Conduit Type is Closed Conduit.
Catalog Pipe
Lets you specify the previously defined catalog

pipe associated with the conduit.
Semi-Ellipse Span

conduits that have a semi-ellipse Section Type.
Semi-Ellipse Rise

conduits that have a semi-ellipse Section Type.
Egg Span

conduits that have an egg Section Type.
Design Percent Full
Design Capacity The percentage full that you

would like the link to maintain. If you want the
pipe to be 75% full, enter in the 75 in the field.
This value in no way affects the network
calculations. It is informational only.
Physical Alternative for Channels

The physical alternative editor for channels is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of channels. The following columns are available:
9-860
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Column
Description
Label

alternative.
Scaled Length
Displays the scaled (as opposed to user defined)

length of each channel in the alternative. This is a
calculated field for channels that do not have a
user-defined length.
Set Invert to Start

Node
Lets you automatically set the upstream channel

invert to the elevation of the upstream node.
Invert (Start)
Lets you define the upstream channel invert.
Set Invert to Stop Node
Lets you automatically set the downstream

channel invert to the elevation of the downstream
node.
Start Control Structure
Lets you design a start control structure, or choose

open the Channel Control Structure dialog box to
Has Stop Control

Structure

highlighted element has a stop control structure,
set to True, an icon displays at the start/stop-end of
the conduit to display the presence of the
structure.
Stop Control Structure

set up the control structure you want to use
Has Start Control

Structure

9-861
Alternatives
Column
Description
Flap Gate?
Lets you choose whether or not the highlighted

element has a flap gate. If this is set to True, and
icon displays at the stop-end of the conduit to
display the presence of the structure. If this is set
to True and you design control structures without
flap gates selected, the flap gate check box will be
enabled for your control structures and a message
displayed.
Invert (Stop)
Lets you define the downstream channel invert.
Lets you define the length of each channel in the

alternative that has a user-defined length.
Has User Defined

Length
Material

change accordingly.
Physical Alternative for Gutters

The physical alternative editor for gutters is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of gutters. The following columns are available:
9-862
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Mannings n (Gutter)
Lets you define the Mannings roughness of each

gutter in the alternative.
Gutter Material
Lets you specify the material of each gutter in the

alternative.
Column
Description
Lets you define the length of each gutter in the

alternative that has a user defined length.
Has User Defined

Length
Depth
Lets you define the depth of the trapezoidal gutter.

This column is only available for gutters that have
a Trapezoid Open Cross Section type.
Slope (Right Side)
Lets you define the right side slope of the

trapezoidal gutter. This column is only available
for gutters that have a Trapezoid Open Cross
Section type.
Slope (Left Side)
Lets you define the left side slope of the

Section type.
Bottom Width
Lets you define the width of the bottom of the

Section type.
Open Cross Section
Lets you specify whether the cross section is

Generic or Trapezoidal for each gutter in the
alternative.
Irregular Channel

the Irregular Channel editor, allowing you to
define the shape of each gutter in the alternative
that uses the Irregular Channel Open Cross
Section type.
Physical Alternative for Ponds

The physical alternative editor for ponds is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of ponds. The following columns are available:
9-863
Alternatives
9-864
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Infiltration (Average)
Specify the average infiltration rate for the pond.

This value only applies when the Pond Infiltration
Method is set to Average Infiltration.
Constant Flow
The flow that exits the pond via infiltration during

each time step. This value only applies when the
Pond Ifiltration Method is set to Constant Flow.
Pond Infiltration
Method
Ponds can lose water by infiltration into

groundwater. Any water lost by infiltration does
not show up in downstream links.
You can specify "None" (default) if pond
infiltration is not being considered, or you can use
one of the following ways to enter pond
infiltration rates:
1. a Constant Flow rate given in flow units
2. an Average Infiltration rate in depth per unit
time which is multipied by the area of the pond
surface at that time step to determine the
infiltration rate.
In applying either method, the model also has a
stability filter when the pond water depth is below
0.5 ft so that the infiltration rate will linearly
reduce to zero as the depth decreases to zero.
Invert (Stop)
Lets you define the downstream invert of the

pipes. This column is available only when the
Volume method is Pipe.
Invert (Start)
Lets you define the upstream invert of the pipes.

This column is available only when the Volume
method is Pipe.
Volume Type
Specifies which of the four volume methods

(Elevation-Area, Elevation-Volume, Pipe, or
Functional) is used for each pond in the
alternative. Clicking a field in this column allows
you to switch between them.
Column
Description
Pond Constant
C value in the expression A*Depth^B+C for

Depth in feet. This field is available only when the
Functional Volume Type is chosen.
Pond Exponent
B value in the expression A*Depth^B+C for

Pond Coefficient
A value in the expression A*Depth^B+C for

Depth (Maximum)
Lets you define the maximum depth, or water

surface elevation, of the pond.
Elevation (Invert)
Lets you define the invert elevation of each pond

in the alternative.
Number of Barrels
Lets you define the number of barrels the Pipe

Volume uses. This column is available only when
the Volume method is Pipe.
Length
Lets you define the length of the pipes. This

column is available only when the Volume method
is Pipe.
Pipe Diameter
Lets you define the diameter of the pipes. This

column is available only when the Volume method
is Pipe.
Elevation-Volume
Curve
Opens the Elevation-Volume Curve dialog box,

allowing you to define the elevation-volume curve
for each pond in the alternative that uses the
Elevation-Volume Curve Volume Type.
Elevation-Area Curve
Opens the Elevation-Area Curve dialog box,

allowing you to define the elevation-area curve for
each pond in the alternative.
Physical Alternative for Pressure Pipes

The physical alternative editor for pressure pipes is used to create various data sets for
the physical characteristics of pressure pipes. The following columns are available:
9-865
Alternatives
9-866
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Length (User Defined)/

Scaled Length
The length of the currently highlighted element.

To use this field, you must check the check box in
the Has User Defined Length field. If you clear the
check box in that field, the Length (User Defined)
field displays the scaled length for the currently
highlighted element.
Has User Defined

Length?
Lets you choose whether the highlighted element

uses scaled or user-defined length. If check box in
this field is checked, the Length (User Defined)
field is activated.
Mannings n
The Manning's roughness of the currently

Hazen-Williams C
The Hazen-Williams C coefficient of the currently

Diameter
Material

clicking the Ellipsis (...) button opens the Material
Engineering Library, allowing you to select a predefined material. If a pre-defined material is
chosen, the roughness value will change
accordingly.
Invert (Stop)
The stop invert for the currently highlighted

element.
Set Invert to Stop

Node?
Lets you choose whether to set the invert to the

stop node. When the check box checked, the invert
is set to the stop node.
Invert (Start)
The stop invert for the currently highlighted

element.
Column
Description
Set Invert to Start

Node?
Lets you choose whether to set the invert to the

start node. When the check box checked, the
invert is set to the stop node.
Minor Loss Coefficient
The minor loss coefficient for the currently

Minor Loss Collection

the Minor Loss Collection dialog box, allowing
you to define a collection of minor loss elements
for each pressure pipe in the alternative.
Boundary Condition Alternatives

The boundary condition alternative allows you to define boundary condition settings
for outfall elements. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID
Displays the unique identifier for each element in the

alternative.
Label
Displays the label for each element in the alternative.
Elevation (User
Defined Tailwater)
The user defined tailwater value. This column is only

available for elements that use the User Defined
Tailwater Boundary Condition Type.
9-867
Alternatives
9-868
Column
Description
Boundary Condition
Type
Lets you specify the type of boundary condition to be

used at the associated outfall element. The following
choices are available:
Free OutfallFor a free outfall control, it is

assumed that the downstream discharge conditions do not directly affect the hydraulic response
of the structure. This is equivalent to assuming that
the downstream TW elevation never rises above
the controlling structure outfall invert of the structure.
Time-Elevation CurveFor this type of boundary

condition, a time-elevation curve is specified to
establish at the outfall a tailwater condition that
varies over time.
Elevation (User Defined Tailwater)This type of

boundary condition allows you to directly enter a
tailwater value.
Elevation Flow CurveFor this type of boundary

condition, an elevation-flow table is specified to
simulate at the outfall a channel or outlet structure
where flow rate varies over time.
Boundary PondThis type of boundary condition

allows you to specify a pond element as the outfall.
NormalWhen this type of boundary condition is

chosen, the boundary condition is the normal
depth of the upstream link. If there is more than
one upstream link, the one with the highest normal
depth is used as the boundary condition.
TidalFor this type of boundary condition, a cyclic

time-elevation curve is specified to establish at the
outfall a tailwater condition that varies over time in
a cyclical fashion.
Tidal Gate
Lets you specify whether or not there is a tidal gate at

each outfall in the alternative.
Cyclic Time-Elevation
Curve
Clicking the Ellipsis () button in this field opens the

Cyclic Time-Elevation Curve editor, allowing you to
define the cyclic time vs. elevation curve for each
outfall in the alternative that uses the Tidal Boundary
Condition Type.
Column
Description
Boundary Element
Contains list boxes that display all of the elements that

are available to be used as boundary ponds. This
column is available only when the Boundary Pond
Boundary Condition is specified.
Time-Elevation Curve
Clicking the Ellipsis () button in this field opens the

Time-Elevation Curve editor, allowing you to define
the time vs. elevation curve for each outfall in the
alternative that uses the Time-Elevation Curve
Condition Type.
Initial Settings Alternative

Ponds and wet wells have a specific set of initial setting properties that define the
corresponding settings at the beginning of a simulation. These conditions are stored in
an initial settings alternative, as listed below:
Initial Settings Alternative for Manholes on page 9-869
Initial Settings Alternative for Catch Basins on page 9-870
Initial Settings Alternative for Wet Wells on page 9-870
Initial Settings Alternative for Ponds on page 9-870
Initial Settings Alternative for Pumps on page 9-871
Initial Settings Alternative for Manholes

The Initial Settings alternative for manholes allows you to define the initial settings
for manholes. The following conditions are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Depth (Initial)
Lets you define the initial depth for each of the

manholes in the alternative.
9-869
Alternatives
Initial Settings Alternative for Catch Basins

The Initial Settings alternative for catch basins allows you to define the initial settings
for catch basins. The following conditions are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Depth (Initial)
Lets you define the initial depth for each of the

catch basins in the alternative.
Initial Settings Alternative for Wet Wells

The Initial Settings alternative for wet wells allows you to define the initial settings
for ponds. The following conditions are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Elevation (Initial)
Lets you define the initial water surface elevation

for each wet well in the alternative that uses the
User Defined Initial Elevation Initial Elevation
Type.
Initial Elevation Type
Lets you specify whether each wet well in the

alternative has a user defined initial elevation or
initially uses the invert value as the starting
elevation
Initial Settings Alternative for Ponds

The Initial Settings alternative for ponds allows you to define the initial settings for
ponds. The following conditions are available:
9-870
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Elevation (Initial)
Lets you define the initial water surface elevation

for each of the ponds in the alternative.
Initial Elevation Type
Allows you to choose the initial elevation type for

each of the ponds in the alternative.
Initial Settings Alternative for Pumps

The Initial Settings alternative for pumps allows you to define the initial settings for
pumps. The following conditions are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Status (Initial)
Lets you define whether the pump is initially on or

off for each of the pumps in the alternative.
Hydrology Alternatives
The hydrology alternative allows you to define hydrologic settings for catchments.
The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
9-871
Alternatives
9-872
Column
Description
Groundwater Flow
Coefficient
Value of A1 in the groundwater flow formula.
Surface Elevation
Elevation of ground surface for the subcatchment

that sits above the aquifer.
Receiving Node
Lets you choose the node to which flow

discharges from the currently highlighted element.
To use this feature, click Select in the Outfall
Node field. Move the cursor over the drawing
pane and click the element you want to select for
the outflow node.
Aquifer
Lets you assign a predefined aquifer to each

catchment in the alternative, or create a new one
by clicking the Ellipsis () button.
Area
Lets you define the area of the associated

catchments. This column is only available for
catchments using the Unit Hydrograph Runoff
Method.
Initial Abstraction
Lets you define the initial abstraction (Ia) for each

of the catchments in the alternative. The initial
abstraction is a parameter that accounts for all
losses prior to runoff and consists mainly of
interception, infiltration, evaporation, and surface
depression storage. This column is only available
for catchments that use the Unit Hydrograph
Runoff Method and the Generic Horton Loss
Method.
Recovery Constant
Dry weather regeneration rate constant for the

Horton curve. This attribute is active only when
the Loss Method attribute is set to (Generic)
Horton.
Maximum Volume
Lets you define the maximum volume for each of

the catchments in the alternative.
Column
Description
Moisture Deficit
The value for Moisture Deficit, which is the

saturated moisture content minus the original
moisture content, for each of the catchments in the
alternative that use the Green and Ampt Runoff
Loss Method. This column is only available for
catchments that use the Unit Hydrograph Runoff
Method and the Green and Ampt Loss Method.
SCS CN
Allows you to define the SCS Cn value for

elements that use the SCS Cn Loss Method. This
column is only available for catchments that use
the SCS Cn Loss Method
Lets you define the decay coefficient for each of

the catchments in the alternative. This column is
only available for catchments that use the Unit
Hydrograph Runoff Method and the Generic
Horton Loss Method.
fo
Lets you define the initial infiltration rate at the

time that infiltration begins for each of the
catchments in the alternative. This column is only
available for catchments that use the Unit
Hydrograph Runoff Method and the Generic
Horton Loss Method.
fc
Lets you define the steadystate infiltration rate

that occurs for a sufficiently large time period for
each of the catchments in the alternative. This
the Unit Hydrograph Runoff Method and the
Generic Horton Loss Method.
CN Area Collection

the Cn Area Collection editor, allowing you to
define the Cn area collection for each catchment in
the alternative that uses the SCS Cn Loss Method.
Storage (Impervious
Depression)
Lets you define the depth of impervious storage

for each of the catchments in the alternative that
use the EPA-SWMM Runoff Method.
9-873
Alternatives
9-874
Column
Description
Slope
Lets you define the slope of the associated

catchments. This column is only available for
catchments that use the EPA-SWMM Runoff
Method.
Ks
The saturated hydraulic conductivity (the rate at

which water travels through the soil when it is
saturated) for each of the catchments in the
catchments that use the Unit Hydrograph Runoff
Method and the Green and Ampt Loss Method.
Capillary Suction
Lets you define the capillary suction value for the

soil type associated with each of the catchments in
the alternative that use the Green and Ampt
Runoff Loss Method. This column is only
available for catchments that use the Unit
Hydrograph Runoff Method and the Green and
Ampt Loss Method.
fLoss
Lets you define the fLoss absorption value for

each of the catchments in the alternative. This
fLoss Loss Method.
Loss Method
Lets you specify the loss method used by the

associated catchments. Other columns become
available/unavailable depending on the value
chosen here.
Subarea Routing
Lets you define the type of subarea routing at the

currently highlighted element. This attribute is
available only when the Runoff Method attribute
is set to EPA-SWMM Runoff.
Percent Routed
The percent of runoff routed between subareas.

This attribute is available only when the Runoff
Method attribute is set to EPA-SWMM Runoff.
Percent Impervious
Zero Storage
The percent of the impervious area with no

depression storage. This attribute is available only
when the Runoff Method attribute is set to EPASWMM Runoff.
Column
Description
Storage (Pervious
Depression)
Lets you define the depth of pervious storage for

each of the catchments in the alternative that use
the EPA-SWMM Runoff Method. This column is
only available for catchments that use the EPASWMM Runoff Method.
Mannings n
(Pervious)
Lets you define the depth of pervious storage for

Mannings n
(Impervious)
Lets you define the depth of impervious storage

for each of the catchments in the alternative that
use the EPA-SWMM Runoff Method. This
the EPA-SWMM Runoff Method.
Percent Impervious
Lets you define the percentage of impervious

storage for each of the catchments in the
alternative that use the EPA-SWMM Runoff
Method. This column is only available for
catchments that use the EPA-SWMM Runoff
Method.
Characteristic Width
Lets you define the characteristic width value for

Runoff Method
Lets you specify the runoff method for each

catchment in the alternative.
Tc Data Collection

the Tc Data Collection editor, allowing you to
define the Tc data for each catchment in the
alternative that uses the SCS Unit Hydrograph
Runoff Method.
9-875
Alternatives
9-876
Column
Description
Tc
Lets you define the time of concentration for each

of the catchments in the alternative that use SCS
Unit Hydrograph Method. This column is only
available for catchments that use the SCS Unit
Hydrograph Runoff Method.
Convolution Time Step
Lets you define the convolution time step. This

Generic Unit Hydrograph Method.
Convolution Time Step has two uses:
It represents the time step by which the input

unit-hydrograph data is subdivided when used
in a calculation.
It represents the duration of excess rainfall

that generated the unit hydrograph.
Unit Hydrograph
Method
Lets you specify the unit hydrograph method to be

used with the associated catchment.
Runoff Method
This column contains list boxes that allow you to

specify the runoff method that is used by the
associated catchments. This column is only
available for elements that are set to the Unit
Hydrograph Runoff Method.
Unit Hydrograph Data

the Unit Hydrograph Data dialog box, allowing
you to define Time vs. Flow unit hydrographs for
each element in the alternative.
Outflow Node
Lets you specify the element to which flow the

catchment outfalls
Apply Groundwater
Specify whether or not the associated element

applies groundwater.
Fixed Surf. Water

Depth
Fixed depth of surface water at receiving node (ft.

or m) (set to zero if surface water depth will vary
as computed by flow routing).
Surface-GW
Interaction Coefficient
Column
Description
Surf. Water Flow

Exponent
Value of B2 in the groundwater flow formula.
Surf. Water Flow

Coefficient
Groundwater Flow
Exponent
Low Impact
Development Control
Select a previously defined Low impact

Development Control.
Top Width of Overland

Flow Surface of Each
Unit
The width of the outflow face of each identical

LID unit.
Percent Initially
Saturated
For Bio-Retention Cells, this is the degree to

which the unit's soil is initially filled with water (0
saturation corresponds to the wilting point
moisture content, 100 saturation has the moisture
content equal to the porosity). The storage zone
beneath the soil zone of the cell is assumed to be
completely dry. For other types of LIDs it
corresponds to the degree to which their storage
zone is initially filled with water.
Number of Replicate
Units
The number of equally sized LID units.
Occupies Full
Catchment?
If set to True then the LID will occupy the full

area of the LID's owning catchment.
Area of Each Unit
Specify the surface area occupied by the LID.
Percent Impervious
Area Treated
The percent of the impervious portion of the

subcatchment's non-LID area whose runoff is
treated by the LID practice.
Send Outflow to
Pervious Area?
Select this option if the outflow from the LID is

returned onto the subcatchment's pervious area
rather than going to the subcatchment's outlet. An
example of where this might apply is a rain barrel
whose contents are used to irrigate a lawn area.
This field is ignored if the LID takes up the entire
subcatchment.
9-877
Alternatives
Output Alternatives
The output alternative lets you define output options for network elements, as listed
below:
Output Alternative for Conduits on page 9-878
Output Alternative for Channels on page 9-879
Output Alternative for Conduits

The output alternative editor for conduits is used to create various data sets for the
output options of conduits. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Output Options

whether the Sections Results type is Summary
Results or Detailed Results for the associated
element.
When Summary Results is selected, the result
attributes are displayed for the start, end, and
middle of the conduit.
SewerGEMS V8i breaks a conduit up into a
number of longitudinal sections as detailed in the
topic Section Count on page 14-1139. When
Detailed Results is selected, the result attributes
are displayed for each of the longitudinal sections
of the conduit.
Only Summary Results are displayed in the graphs
and reports for conduits. To create a report
containing the Detailed Results for each calculated
section, you must use the report command in the
Sections Results Dialog Box on page 6-292.
9-878
Output Alternative for Channels

The output alternative editor for channels is used to create various data sets for the
output options of channels. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Output Options

whether the Sections Results type is Summary
Results or Detailed Results for the associated
element.
When Summary Results is selected, the result
attributes are displayed for the start, end, and
middle of the channel.
SewerGEMS V8i breaks a channel up into a
number of longitudinal sections as detailed in the
topic Section Count on page 14-1139. When
Detailed Results is selected, the result attributes
are displayed for each of the longitudinal sections
of the channel.
Only Summary Results are displayed in the graphs
and reports for channels. To create a report
containing the Detailed Results for each calculated
section, you must use the report command in the
Sections Results Dialog Box on page 6-292.
Infiltration and Inflow Alternatives

The Inflow Alternative lets you define loading data for elements capable of accepting
an inflow, as listed below:
Inflow Alternative for Manholes on page 9-880
Inflow Alternative for Catch Basins on page 9-880
Inflow Alternative for Outfalls on page 9-880
Inflow Alternative for Catchments on page 9-881
9-879
Alternatives
Inflow Alternative for Ponds on page 9-881
Inflow Alternative for Cross Section Nodes on page 9-882
Inflow Alternative for Wet Wells on page 9-882
Infiltration and Inflow Alternative for Pressure Junctions on page 9-882
Inflow Alternative for Manholes

The Inflow Alternative for manholes allows you to define loading data for manholes.
The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Inflow Collection
Contains an Ellipsis (...) button that allows you to

access the Inflow Collection dialog box for the
associated element.
Inflow Alternative for Catch Basins

The Inflow Alternative for catch basins allows you to define loading data for catch
basins. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Inflow Collection

associated element.
Inflow Alternative for Outfalls

The Inflow Alternative for outfalls allows you to define loading data for outfalls. The
following columns are available:
9-880
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Inflow Collection

associated element.
Inflow Alternative for Catchments

The Inflow Alternative for catchments allows you to define loading data for catchments. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Inflow Collection

associated element.
Inflow Alternative for Ponds

The Inflow Alternative for ponds allows you to define loading data for ponds. The
following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Inflow Collection

associated element.
9-881
Alternatives
Inflow Alternative for Cross Section Nodes

The Inflow Alternative for cross section nodes allows you to define loading data for
cross section nodes. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Inflow Collection

associated element.
Inflow Alternative for Wet Wells

The Inflow Alternative for wet well nodes allows you to define loading data for wet
well nodes. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Inflow Collection

associated element.
Infiltration and Inflow Alternative for Pressure Junctions

The Infiltration and Inflow Alternative for pressure junctions allows you to define
loading data for pressure junctions. The following columns are available:
9-882
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Column
Description
Label

alternative.
Inflow Collection

associated element.
Rainfall Runoff Alternative

The rainfall runoff alternative allows you to define runoff data for catchment, pond,
and wet well elements, as listed below:
Rainfall Runoff Alternative for Global Rainfall on page 9-883
Rainfall Runoff Alternative for Outfalls on page 9-884
Rainfall Runoff Alternative for Catchments on page 9-884
Rainfall Runoff Alternative for Ponds on page 9-885
Rainfall Runoff Alternative for Wet Wells on page 9-886
Rainfall Runoff Alternative for Global Rainfall

The rainfall runoff alternative for global rainfall displays information about global
storm data in your project. The following fields are available:
Field
Description
Global Storm Data
Lists all of the rainfall curves that have been

defined for the current project in the Storm Data
dialog box, which is accessible by clicking the
Ellipsis (...) button.
Source
Displays the location of the library file for storm

data that are derived from an engineering library
entry.
Return Event
Displays the return event that is associated with

the storm data. The return event is a value that
reflects the average time between similar storm
data.
9-883
Alternatives
Field
Description
Depth
Displays the rainfall depth of the storm as defined

by the currently selected storm data.
Duration
Displays the duration of the storm as defined by

the currently selected storm data.
Rainfall Runoff Alternative for Outfalls

The rainfall runoff alternative for outfalls allows you to define runoff data for outfall
elements. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Local Storm Data
Contains list boxes that allow you to choose from

a list of rainfall curves that have already been set
up in the current project. Click the ellipsis button
to open the Storm Data manager.
Use Local Rainfall
Contains check boxes that allow you to specify

whether or not the associated outfall uses local
rainfall.
Rainfall Runoff Alternative for Catchments

The rainfall runoff alternative for catchments allows you to define runoff data for
catchment elements. The following columns are available:
9-884
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Column
Description
Runoff Hydrograph
Provides access to the User-Defined Hydrograph

dialog box for the associated element through the
Ellipsis () button.
Use Local Rainfall
Contains check boxes that allow you to specify

whether or not the associated catchment uses local
rainfall.
Local Storm
Contains list boxes that allow you to choose from

a list of rainfall curves that have already been set
up in the current project. This column is available
only when for catchments that Use Local Rainfall.
Duration
Lets you define the duration of the storm for each

catchment in the alternative. This column is only
available for catchments that Use Local Rainfall.
Depth
Lets you define the depth of rainfall for each

catchment in the alternative. This column is
available only when for catchments that Use Local
Rainfall.
Return Event
Lets you specify the return frequency of the storm

for each catchment in the alternative.
Runoff Hydrograph

the User Defined Hydrograph editor, allowing you
to define a hydrograph for each element in the
alternative.
Rainfall Runoff Alternative for Ponds

The rainfall runoff alternative for ponds allows you to define runoff data for pond
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
9-885
Alternatives
Column
Description
Evaporation Factor
Fraction of evaporation rate realized. This

Rainfall Runoff Alternative for Wet Wells

The rainfall runoff alternative for wet wells allows you to define runoff data for wet
well elements. The following columns are available:
Field
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Evaporation Factor
Fraction of evaporation rate realized. This

Water Quality Alternative

The water quality alternative allows you to define runoff data for manhole, catch
basin, outfall, catchment, pond, and wet well elements, as listed below:
Water Quality Alternative for Manholes on page 9-886
Water Quality Alternative for Catch Basins on page 9-887
Water Quality Alternative for Outfalls on page 9-887
Water Quality Alternative for Catchments on page 9-888
Water Quality Alternative for Ponds on page 9-889
Water Quality Alternative for Wet Wells on page 9-889
Water Quality Alternative for Manholes

The water quality alternative allows you to define water quality data for manhole
9-886
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Treatment
Lets you define SWMM treatment functions that

will be applied at the currently highlighted
element. This field is only used during SWMM
calculations.
Apply Treatment
Lets you specify whether or not treatment is

applied at the currently highlighted element. This
field is only used during SWMM calculations.
Water Quality Alternative for Catch Basins

The water quality alternative allows you to define water quality data for catch basin
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Treatment

calculations.
Apply Treatment

Water Quality Alternative for Outfalls

The water quality alternative allows you to define water quality data for outfall
9-887
Alternatives
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Treatment

calculations.
Apply Treatment

Water Quality Alternative for Catchments

The water quality alternative allows you to define water quality data for catchment
9-888
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Treatment

calculations.
Apply Treatment

Water Quality Alternative for Ponds

The water quality alternative allows you to define water quality data for pond
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Treatment

calculations.
Apply Treatment

Water Quality Alternative for Wet Wells

The water quality alternative allows you to define water quality data for wet well
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Treatment

calculations.
Apply Treatment

9-889
Alternatives
Headloss Alternative
The headloss alternative editor allows you to define headloss properties for manhole,
catch basin, and conduit elements. The following columns are available, depending on
element type:
ID: Displays the unique identifier for each element in the alternative.
Label: Displays the label for each element in the alternative.
Absolute Headloss: Enter the desired value for headloss at the structure. This method
ensures that the headloss across the structure will be equal to the value entered here
regardless of the actual flows or geometry of the structure. This field is only used
when the Headloss Method is set to Absolute.
Headloss Method: Select the method to be used to calculate the headlosses through
the associated structure. The option chosen here determines which of the parameter
fields will become available.
Flow-Headloss Curve: Specify the previously defined Flow-Headloss curve to be
applied to the node, or create a new one by choosing the <Select...> option to access
the Flow-Headloss Curves dialog.
Headloss Coefficient (Standard): Enter the headloss coefficient for the structure.
The headloss across the structure will be equal to this number multiplied by the exit
conduit velocity head. This field is only used when the Headloss Method is set to
Standard.
Headloss Coefficient (Upstream): This field is only used when the Headloss Method
is set to Generic. The Generic method computes the structure headloss by multiplying
the velocity head of the exit pipe by the user-defined Headloss (Downstream) value
and then subtracting the velocity head of the governing upstream pipe multiplied by
thevalue entered in this field.
Headloss Coefficient (Downstream): This field is only used when the Headloss
Method is set to Generic. The Generic method computes the structure headloss by
multiplying the velocity head of the exit pipe by the value entered in this field and
then subtracting the velocity head of the governing upstream pipe multiplied by the
user-defined Headloss Coefficient (Upstream) value.
Entrance Loss Coefficient: Specify the loss coefficient for the entrance of the
conduit.
Exit Loss Coefficient: Specify the headloss coefficient for the conduit exit.
Expansion Loss Coefficient: Specify the expansion loss coefficient for the current
conduit.
9-890

Contraction Loss Coefficient: Specify the contraction loss coefficient for the current
conduit.
Average Loss Coefficient: Coefficient for energy losses along the length of the
conduit. For use with the SWMM engine only.
Operational Alternative
The operational alternative allows you to define the operational settings for pump
elements.
Ignore On and Off Elevations in SWMM?: By setting this to True, you can ignore
the on and off elevations when runing the model with the SWMM engine.
Elevation (Off): Set the Water Surface Elevation at the immediate upstream node,
above which the pump will turn on.
Elevation (On): Set the Water Surface Elevation at the immediate upstream node,
below which the pump will shut off.
Sanitary Loading Alternative

The sanitary loading alternative lets you define sanitary loading data for manholes,
catch basins, wet wells, and pressure junctions, as listed below:
Sanitary Loading Alternative for Manholes on page 9-891
Sanitary Loading Alternative for Catch Basins on page 9-892
Sanitary Loading Alternative for Wet Wells on page 9-892
Sanitary Loading Alternative for Pressure Junctions on page 9-893
Sanitary Loading Alternative for Manholes

The sanitary loading alternative for manholes allows you to define sanitary loading
data for manhole elements. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
9-891
Alternatives
Column
Description
Label

alternative.
Sanitary Loads
Clicking the Ellipses (...) button allows you to

enter sanitary loads in the Sanitary (Dry Weather)
Flow dialog box for the currently highlighted
element.
Known Flow
The known flow for the currently highlighted

element.
Sanitary Loading Alternative for Catch Basins

The sanitary loading alternative for catch basins allows you to define sanitary loading
data for catch basin elements. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Sanitary Loads

element.
Known Flow

element.
Sanitary Loading Alternative for Wet Wells

The sanitary loading alternative for wet wells allows you to define sanitary loading
data for wet well elements. The following columns are available:
9-892
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Column
Description
Label

alternative.
Sanitary Loads

element.
Known Flow

element.
Sanitary Loading Alternative for Pressure Junctions

The sanitary loading alternative for pressure junctions allows you to define sanitary
loading data for pressure junction elements. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Sanitary Loads

element.
Known Flow

element.
User Data Extensions Alternative

The User Data Alternative allows you to edit the data defined in the User Data Extension command for each of the network element types. The User Data Alternative
editor contains a tab for each type of network element.
9-893
Alternatives
Design Alternative
The Design Alternative Editor allows you to edit the pipe, node and inlet constraints
governing the design of the system. It also allows you to specify which gravity
elements you want designed, and the extent to which you want them designed.
For example, you may want to design a particular pipe. However, you may also want
to design the downstream invert elevation to meet a particular velocity, cover, and
slope constraint.
The tabbed dialog for each particular type of element follows the same general format.
The top of the dialog box contains several fields where the design constraints can be
entered. The constraints entered in these fields are applied to every element in the
table on the bottom of the dialog, except the elements that are specified to contain
local values. This system allows you to rapidly enter the values that govern most of
the elements in the table, and then manually override the constraints for those
elements that are exceptions to the majority. The following attributes are available in
this section:
Pipe diameters, invert elevations, node structures, and inlets can be all designed with
the same set of design constraints. You also have the option to adjust these values individually for each pipe or structure.
The Default Design Constraints dialog is divided into the three following tabs:
Gravity Pipe
Node
Inlet
Gravity Pipe Tab

The Gravity Pipe tab allows you to enter default constraints to be used for the design
of pipes when performing a calculation run in design mode. The dialog is divided into
the following sections:
Default Constraints
Extended Design
Default Constraints Section

In this section, there is a Velocity tab, a Cover tab, and a Slope tab. You can specify
the following default constraints to be used for the design of gravity pipes:
9-894
Velocity Tab: The Velocity tab consists of the following controls:
Velocity Constraints TypeWhen Simple is chosen, a single minimum and

maximum Velocity value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Velocity (Minimum) vs Velocity (Maximum) points in
tabular format.
Velocity (Minimum)Specify the minimum allowable velocity value. This

Velocity (Maximum)Specify the maximum allowable velocity value. This

Cover Tab: The Cover tab consists of the following controls:
Cover Constraints TypeWhen Simple is chosen, a single minimum and

maximum Cover value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Cover (Minimum) vs Cover (Maximum) points in tabular
format.
Cover (Minimum)Specify the minimum allowable cover value. This

Cover (Maximum)Specify the maximum allowable cover value. This

Slope Tab: The Slope tab consists of the following controls:
Slope Constraints TypeWhen Simple is chosen, a single minimum and

maximum Slope value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Slope (Minimum) vs Slope (Maximum) points in tabular
format.
Slope (Minimum)Specify the minimum allowable slope value. This control

Slope (Maximum)Specify the maximum allowable slope value. This control

Extended Design Section

This section lets you specify if the following design parameters are to be used. If they
are to be used, you can also specify the associated default value. The Extended Design
section is split into three tabs:
Part Full Design Tab: The Part Full Design tab consists of the following
controls:
Is Part Full Design?When checked, allows you to specify the Percent Full
target to be used by the design algorithm.
9-895
Alternatives
Percent Full Constraint TypeAllows you to specify how the Percent Full
constraints are defined. When Simple is chosen, a single Percentage Full
value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify multiple Rise vs
Percent Full points in tabular format.
Percentage FullSpecify the Percent Full value to be used when the Is Part
Full Design? box is checked. This control is only availble when the Percent
Full Constraint Type is set to Simple.
Number of Barrels Tab: The Number of Barrels tab consists of the following
controls:
Allow Multiple Barrels?When checked, allows the design algorithm to use

more than one identical section in parallel, up to the specified Maximum
Number of Barrels.
Maximum Number of BarrelsThe maximum number of identical sections

allowed to be used in parallel when the Allow Multiple Barrels? box is
checked.
Section Size Tab: The Section Size tab consists of the following controls:
Limit Section Size?When checked, limits the pipe section height to the
specified Maximum Rise value during the design process.
Maximum RiseThe maximum rise a section height is allowed to be used in

the design when the Limit Section Size? box is checked.
Node Tab
This tab lets you specify the design constraints to be used by default for all gravity
structures when performing calculations in design mode. During an automatic design,
the program will adjust the elevations of the pipes adjacent to the structure according
to the structure's matching constraints. The two choices for matching are Inverts and
Crowns. Additionally, the downstream pipe can be offset from the upstream pipe(s) by
a specified amount. This value is called the Matchline Offset. Optionally, the program
supports the design of drop structures. In some situations, drop structures can minimize pipe cover depths while maintaining adequate hydraulic performance.
Inlet Tab
This tab lets you specify the design constraints to be used for all inlets when
performing a calculation run in design mode. During an automatic design, the
program will adjust the length of the inlet in order to meet the design constraints.
9-896
For an inlet in sag, the Default In Sag Design Constraints consist of maintaining
the gutter spread and water depth under a given value.
For an inlet on a grade, the Default on Grade Design Constraints consist of

ensuring that at least a given percentage of the gutter flow is intercepted.
Default In Sag Design Constraints Section

This section lets you specify the design constraints to be used for all inlets located in
sag when performing calculations in design mode. During an automatic design, the
program will adjust the length of the inlet in order to meet both design constraints:
Maximum Spread in SagThe maximum allowed spread of water at the inlet,

measured from the curb.
Maximum Depth in SagThe maximum depth of water allowed at the inlet.
Default On Grade Design Constraints

This section lets you specify the design constraints to be used for all inlets located on
a grade when performing a calculation run in design mode. During an automatic
design, the program will adjust the length of the inlet in order to meet a minimum inlet
efficiency, or percentage of gutter flow intercepted by the inlet, that you specify.
The lower section of the dialog allows you to specify local data. In order to specify
that an element contain local data, place a check mark in the column labeled Specify
Local Constraints on the same row as the element. When the check mark appears, the
yellow columns that display the global design constraints defined in the top of the
dialog will turn white on the row of the element that is being modified. This means
that you can now change the design constraint values for this particular element. If
you click the check mark again, the opposite happens. The columns containing the
constraints turn yellow and revert to the global values entered in the top of the dialog.
The following tabs are available:
Additional check boxes are available to specify exactly what you want the software to
design:
For Conduits
Design Conduit?: Check this box if you want the program to design the conduit
based on the constraints you define.
Design Start Invert?: Check this box if you want the program to design the
upstream invert based on the constraints you define.
Design Stop Invert?: Specify if the program should design the downstream invert
based on the constraints given in the model.
Specify Local Pipe Constraint?: If this box is checked, you can enter local
values to replace the default values. If it is not checked, the program will automatically use the default constraints.
For Nodes
9-897
Alternatives
Design Structure Elevation?: Check this box if you want to allow the structure's
sump elevation to be adjusted during an automatic design. When this box is
checked, the Desired Sump Depth field becomes editable.
Desired Sump Depth: This field becomes editable when the Design Structure
Elevation? box is checked. The sump depth is the distance below the lowest pipe
invert.
Local Pipe Matching Constraints?: If this box is checked, you can enter local
For Inlets
Design Inlet Opening?: Check this box if you want to allow the Inlet Opening to
be adjusted during the automatic design.
Specify Local Inlet Constraints?: If this box is checked, you can enter local
Note:
For inlets in sag, the inlet length selected in an automatic design

will be the smallest length that will generate a spread and a
depth at the curb less than the maximums specified. For inlets
on grade, the inlet length selected is the smallest length that will
generate an inlet efficiency larger than the minimum specified.
System Flows Alternatives

The system flows alternative allows you to specify additional and known flow, along
with other contributing sources of water that are not part of the model. System flows
Flow (Known): Used to identify a known flow into the piped system.
Flow (Additional): Flow added directly to the piping system at the catch basin.
External Tc: The time of concentration for an external source not included in the
model.
External CA: The rational contributing area of an external source not included in the
model.
9-898
Calculation Options
Each scenario is associated with a set of calculation options. Calculation options are
stored in a discrete Calculation Options Profile.
For more information on Calculation Options Profiles, see Creating Calculation
Options on page 8-736 and Calculation Option Attributes on page 8-737.
Scenario Comparison
The scenario comparison tool enables you to compare input values between any two
scenarios to identify differences quickly. While Bentley SewerGEMS V8i users have
previously had the capability to open a child scenario or alternative and compare it
with its parent, this tool greatly extends that capability in that you can compare any
two scenarios or alternatives (not necessarily parent-child) and very easily detect
differences.
The scenario comparison tool can be started by picking Tools > Scenario Comparison
or by selecting the Scenario Comparison button from the toolbar
. If the button is
not visible, it can be added using the "Add or Remove Buttons" drop down from the
Tools toolbar (see Customizing the Toolbars on page 2-41).
On first opening the scenario comparison tool, the dialog below opens which gives an
overview of the steps involved in using the tool. Pick the New button (leftmost).
9-899
Scenario Comparison
This opens a dialog which allows you to select which two scenarios will be compared.
The scenario manager button next to each selection gives you the ability to see the tree
view of scenarios. Chose OK to begin the scenario comparison tool. This initially
displays a list of alternatives and calculation options, with the ones with identical
properties displayed with a yellow background and those with different properties
displayed with a pink background. The background color can be changed from pink to
any other color by selecting the sixth button from the left and then selecting the
desired color.
The dialog below shows that the Inflow alternative is different between the scenarios.
There is a second tab for Calculation Options which shows if the calculation options
are different between scenarios.
This display can also be copied to the clipboard using the Copy button.
9-900

The alternatives that have differences are also shown in the left pane with a red mark
as opposed to the green check indicating that there are no differences.
To obtain more detailed information on differences, highlight one of the alternatives

and select the green and white Compute arrow at the top of pane (fourth button).
This initially returns a summary of the comparison which indicates the time when the
comparison was run, which scenarios were involved and number of elements and
attributes for which there were differences.
9-901
Scenario Comparison
By picking "Differences" in the left pane for the alternative of interest, you can view
the differences. In this display, only the elements and properties that are different are
shown with a pink background.There are separate tables for each element type that
had differences.
Using the buttons on top of the right pane, when Differences is selected, you can
create a selection set of the elements with differences or highlight those elements in
the drawing. This is very useful for finding elements with differences in a large model.
Scenario Comparison Options Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to select the color used to highlight differences between
the scenarios being compared in the Scenario Comparison tool.
To choose another color, click the ellipsis button, select the new color from the palette,
and click OK.
9-902
Scenario Comparison Collection Dialog Box

Some of the Differences types (such as load) may include collections of data (multiple
loads within a single load Collection). By clicking the ellipsis button next to one of
these collections you can open this dialog, which displays a table that breaks down the
collection by the individual pieces of data.
9-903
Scenario Comparison
9-904
Chapter
10
Presenting Your
Results
Click one of the following links to learn how to present your network and results
computed by Bentley SewerGEMS V8i:
Using Background Layers on page 10-905
Annotating Your Model on page 10-916
Color Coding Your Model on page 10-929
Using Profiles on page 10-935
Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables on page 10-957
Reporting on page 10-976
Graphing on page 10-979
Chart Options Dialog Box on page 10-993
Print Preview Window on page 10-1060
Using Background Layers

Use background layers to display pictures behind your network. For example, you
might want to display a picture of a neighborhood behind your network, so you can
relate elements in your network to structures and roads depicted in the picture. You
can add, delete, edit and rename background layers in the Background Layers
Manager.
You can add multiple pictures to your project for use as background layers, and turn
off the ones you don't want to show and turn on those you do. Additionally, you can
create groups of pictures in folders, so you can hide or show an entire folder or group
of pictures at once.
To add or delete background layers, open the Background Layers manager: click View
> Background Layers (Ctrl+2).
10-905

You can use shapefiles, AutoCAD DXF files, and raster (also called bitmap) pictures
as background images for your model. These raster image formats are supported:
bmp, jpg, jpeg, jpe, jfif, gif, tif, tiff, png, and sid.
Click one of the following links to learn more about using background layers:
Background Layer Manager on page 10-906
Working with Background Layer Folders on page 10-908
Adding Background Layers on page 10-909
Deleting Background Layers on page 10-910
Editing Background Layers on page 10-910
Renaming Background Layers on page 10-911
Turning Background Layers On and Off on page 10-912
Shapefile Properties Dialog Box on page 10-914
DXF Properties Dialog Box on page 10-915
Performing ProjectWise Operations on page 4-192
Background Layer Manager

Note:
When multiple background layers are overlaid, priority is given

to the one that appears highest in the list. In other words, a layer
in the first list position is drawn on top of all other layers,
since they are all below it on the list.
The Background Layer manager lets you add, edit, and remove and manage the background layers that are associated with the project. The dialog box contains a list pane
that displays each of the layers currently contained within the project, along with a
number of button controls.
When a background layer is added, it appears in the Background Layers list pane,
along with an associated check box that is used to control that layers visibility.
Selecting the check box next to a layer causes that layer to become visible in the main
drawing pane; clearing it causes it to become invisible. If the layers in the list pane are
contained within one or more folders, clearing the check box next to a folder causes all
of the layers within that folder to become invisible.
10-906
Presenting Your Results
New

commands:
FileOpens a browse dialog box that

allows you to choose the file to use as a
background layer.
FolderCreates a folder in the Background Layers list pane.
Delete

background layer.
Rename

layer.
Edit
Opens the background layer properties

dialog box that corresponds with the
currently highlighted background layer.
Shift Up
Moves the currently highlighted object up in

the list pane.
Shift Down
Moves the currently highlighted object

down in the list pane.
Expand All

Collapse All

Help
Displays online help for the Background

Layer Manager.
Related Topics
Image Properties Dialog Box on page 10-912
10-907
Working with Background Layer Folders

You can create folders in the Background Layers Manager to organize your background layers and create a group of background layers that can be turned off as one
entity. You can also create folders within folders. When you start a new project,
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i displays an empty folder in the Background Layers
Manager called Background Layers. New background layer files and folders are
added to the Background Layers folder by default.
To add a background layer folder:
1. Click View > Background Layers to open the Background Layers Manager.
2. In the Background Layers Manager, click the New button, then click New Folder
Or select the default Background Layers folder, then right-click and select New >
Folder from the shortcut menu.
If you are creating a new folder within an existing folder, select the folder,
then click New > New Folder. Or right-click, then select New > Folder from
the shortcut menu.
3. Right-click the new folder and select Rename from the shortcut menu.
4. Type the name of the folder, then press Enter.
To delete a background layer folder:
2. In the Background Layers Managers, select the folder you want to delete, then
click the Delete button.
You can also right-click a folder to delete, then select Delete from the shortcut
menu.
To rename a background layer folder:

2. In the Background Layers Managers, select the folder you want to rename, then
click the Rename button.
You can also right-click a folder to rename, then select Rename from the
shortcut menu.
3. Type the new name of the folder, then press Enter.
10-908
You can also rename a background layer folder by selecting the folder, then
modifying its label in the Properties Editor.
Related Topics
Adding Background Layers

You add background layers to your project using the Background Layers Manager.
When you start a new project, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i displays an empty folder in
the Background Layers Manager called Background Layers. New background layer
files and folders are added to the Background Layers folder by default.
To add a background layer:
2. In the Background Layers Managers, click the New button, then click New File
Or right-click on the default Background Layers folder and select New > File
To add a new background layer file to an existing folder in the Background

Layer Manager, select the folder, then click New > New File. Or right-click,
then select New > File from the shortcut menu.
3. Navigate to the file you want to add as a background layer and select it.
If you select a .dxf file, the DXF Properties dialog box opens. For more information, see DXF Properties Dialog Box.
If you select a .shp the ShapeFile Properties dialog box opens. For more information, see Shapefile Properties Dialog Box.
If you select a .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jfif, .gif, .tif, .tiff, .png, or .sid file, the
Image Properties dialog box opens. For more information, see Image Properties Dialog Box.
4. After you add the background layer, you might have to use the Pan button to move
the layer within the drawing area; Zoom Extents does not center a background
image.
Related Topics
10-909
Deleting Background Layers

To delete a background layer:
Select the background layer you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Or, right-click the background layer, then select Delete from the shortcut menu.
Related Topics
Editing Background Layers

You can edit a background layer in two ways: you can edit its properties or its position
in a list of background layers displayed in the Background Layers Manager.
To edit the properties of a background layer:
1. Select the background layer you want to edit.
2. Click the Edit button. A Properties dialog box opens.
You can also right-click the background layer, then select Edit from the
shortcut menu.
To change the position of a background layer in the list of background layers:
10-910

The order of a background layer determines its Z level and what displays if you use
more than one background layer. Background layers at the top of the list display on
top of the other background layers in the drawing pane; so, background layers that are
lower than the top one in the list might be hidden or partially hidden by layers above
them in the list.
Select the background layer whose position you want to change in the list of Background Layers Manager, then click the Shift Up or Shift Down buttons to move the
selected background layer up or down in the list.
Related Topics
Renaming Background Layers

To rename a background layer:
Select the background layer you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Or, right-click the background layer that you want to rename, then select Rename
Related Topics
10-911
Turning Background Layers On and Off

You can choose to turn your background layers off by clearing the check box next to
the background layer file or folder than contains it in the Background Layers Manager.
Related Topics
Background Layer Manager
Working with Background Layer Folders
Adding Background Layers
Deleting Background Layers
Editing Background Layers
Renaming Background Layers
Image Properties Dialog Box

This dialog box opens when you are adding or editing a background-layer image other
than a .dxf or .shp. Use the following controls to define the properties of the background layer:
Image Filter
10-912
Lets you more clearly display background images

that you resize. Set this to Point, Bilinear, or
Trilinear. These are methods of displaying your
image on-screen.
Point works well when you are not changing

the size of the image in the display, for
example, when you are displaying a 500 x 500
pixel image at 100% using 500 x 500 pixels
on-screen.
Bilinear and Trilinear work well when you

display your image on-screen using more or
fewer pixels than your image contains, such
as displaying a 500 x 500 pixel image at by
stretching it to 800 x 800 pixels on-screen.
Trilinear gives you smoother transitions when
you zoom in and out of the image.
Transparency
The transparency level of the background layer.

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i lets you add
transparency to any image type you use as a
background. Bentley SewerGEMS V8i ignores
any transparency that exists in the image before
you use it as a background.
Resolution
Lets you select the clarity for MrSID images that

you use as background images. Because using a
higher level of clarity or resolution increases the
time it takes to display a MrSID image, you can
select the resolution that best meets your needs.
For formats other than MrSID, this drop-down list
contains only one selection.
Use Compression
This checkbox lets you compress the image in

memory so that it takes up less RAM while it is
being loaded. When you check this option, you
may see slight color distortion in the image.
Note:
Image Position Table
The way the image is

compressed depends on your
computers video card. Not all
video cards support this
feature. If you check this option
but your computers video card
does not support image
compression, the request for
compression will simply be
ignored and the image will be
loaded uncompressed.
Lets you position the background layer with

respect to your drawing.
X/Y Image displays the size of the image you

are using for a background and sets its position with respect to the origin of your drawing.
You cannot change this data.
X/Y Drawing displays where the corners of the

image your are using will be positioned relative to your drawing. By default, no scaling is
used. However, you can scale the image you
are using by setting different locations for the
corners of the image you are importing. The
locations you set are relative to the origin of
your Bentley SewerGEMS V8i drawing.
10-913

You can also use BMP and JPG image files. For more information, see How Do I
Enter the Scale of a Background Image If it is a File Type without an Inherent Scale?
on page 16-1421.
Related Topics
Shapefile Properties Dialog Box

The Shapefile Properties dialog box lets you define a shapefile background layer. Use
the following controls to define the properties of the background layer:
10-914
Filename
Lists the path and filename of the shapefile to use

as a background layer.
Browse
Opens a browse dialog box, letting you select the

file to be used as a background layer.
Label
Identifies the background layer.
Unit
Lets you select the unit associated with the spatial

data within the shapefile. For example, if the X
and Y coordinates of the shapefile represent feet,
choose ft. from the drop-down list.
Transparency
Lets you specify the transparency level of the

background layer, where 0 has the least
transparency and 100 has the most.
Line Color
Sets the color of the layer elements. Click the

Ellipsis (...) button to open a Color palette
containing more color choices.
Line Thickness
Sets the thickness of the outline of the layer

elements. Use values beginning at 0, where 0 is
the minimum thickness and larger values are
thicker.
Fill Color
Sets the fill color of the layer elements. Click the

Fill Figure
Lets you show or hide the selected fill color for the
layer elements. Select this check box to display
the selected background color; clear it to turn off
the background color and only the outline
displays.
To access the Shapefile Properties dialog box, click New File in the Background
Layers manager, then select an .shp file.
Related Topics
DXF Properties Dialog Box

The DXF Properties dialog box lets you define a .dxf file as the background layer. Use
the following controls to define the properties of the background layer:
Filename
Lists the path and filename of the .dxf file to use

as a background layer.
Browse
Opens a browse dialog box, letting you select the

file to be used as a background layer.
Label
Identifies the background layer.
Unit
Lets you select the unit associated with the spatial

data within the shapefile. For example, if the X
and Y coordinates of the shapefile represent feet,
choose ft. from the drop-down list.
10-915
Annotating Your Model
Transparency
Lets you specify the transparency level of the

background layer, where 0 has the least
transparency and 100 has the most.
Line Color
Sets the color of the layer elements. Click the

Default Color
Lets you use the line color included in the .dxf file
or lets you use a custom color that you select in the
Line Color field. Select this check box to use the
default color included in the .dxf file. cleared this
check box if you want to choose a custom color
from the Line Color field.
Symbol
Lets you choose the symbol that is displayed for

each point element in the .dxf.
Size
Sets the size of the symbol for each point element

in the .dxf.
To access the .dxf properties, click New File In the Background Layers manager, then
select a .dxf file.
Related Topics

You can annotate any of the element types in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.
To work with annotations, open the Element Symbology manager: click View >
Element Symbology (Ctrl+1).
Click one of the following links to learn more about annotating your model:
10-916
Element Symbology Manager on page 10-917
Using Folders in the Element Symbology Manager on page 10-920
Adding Annotations on page 10-921
Deleting Annotations on page 10-922
Editing Annotations on page 10-923
Renaming Annotations on page 10-923
Annotation Properties Dialog Box on page 10-924
Element Symbology Manager

The Element Symbology manager allows you to control the way that elements and
their associated labels are displayed. The dialog box contains a menu that allows you
to select the currently active element symbology definition, a pane that lists each
element type, and a toolbar.
.
10-917
10-918
Symbology
Definition
The menu lists all of the available element

symbology definitions. Click the ellipsis (...)
button to open the Symbology Definitions
Manager.
New

commands:
New AnnotationOpens the Annotation Properties dialog box, allowing you

to define annotation settings for the
New Color CodingOpens the Color

Coding Properties dialog box, allowing
you to define annotation settings for the
Add FolderCreates a folder under the

currently highlighted element type,
allowing you to manage the various
color coding and annotation settings
that are associated with an element.
You can turn off all of the symbology
settings contained within a folder by
clearing the check box next to the folder.
When a folder is deleted, all of the
symbology settings contained within it
are also deleted.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted Color

Coding or Annotation Definition or folder.
Rename

object.
Edit
Opens a the Annotation Properties dialog

box, allowing you to modify the settings for
the highlighted annotation..
Refresh Element
Symbology
Opens a shortcut menu containing the

following options:
Refresh Element Symbology - This

can be useful if your color-coding and/or
annotations are applied to a subset of
elements using a query-based selection
set. For performance reasons, querybased selection sets are treated as
static selection sets by default. Use this
option to refresh the query based selection set while refreshing element
symbology.
Refresh Annotation - If you change an

annotation's prefix or suffix in the Property Editor, or directly in the database,
selecting this command refreshes the
annotation.
Update Annotation Offset - If you have

adjusted the Initial X or Y offsets,
selecting this command resets all annotation X or Y offsets to the currently
specified "initial offset" location.
Update Annotation Height - If you've

adjusted the height multiplier, selecting
this command resets all annotation
heights multipliers to the currently specified initial height multiplier
Shift Up
Moves the currently highlighted object up in

the list pane.
Shift Down
Moves the currently highlighted object

down in the list pane.
Expand All
Expands each branch in the tree view pane.
Collapse All
Collapses each branch in the tree view pane.
Help
Displays online help for the Element

Symbology Manager.
10-919
Related Topics
Using Folders in the Element Symbology Manager

Use folders in the Element Symbology Manager to create a collection of color coding
and/or annotation that can be turned off as one entity.
Adding Folders
Use element symbology folders to control whether related annotations and/or color
coding displays. To create a folder in the Element Symbology Manager:
1. Click View > Element Symbology.
2. In the Element Symbology Manager, right-click an element and select New >
Folder.
Or, select the element to which you want to add the folder, click the New button,
then select New Folder.
3. Name the folder.
4. You can drag and drop existing annotations and color coding into the folder you
create, and you can create annotations and color coding within the folder by rightclicking the folder and selecting New > Annotation or New > Color Coding.
5. Use the folder to collectively turn on and off the annotations and color coding
within the folder.
10-920

Note:
You can refresh the display of all color-codings/annotations

within a folder by right-clicking the folder and selecting the
Refresh Group command.
In the MicroStation version, the Refresh Group command will
override any local modifications made to color or weight
settings applied to individual elements using MicroStation
commands. These elements will revert to the SewerGEMS V8i
symbology settings after a Refresh Group command is initiated.
Deleting Folders
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology Manager, right-click
the theme folder you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the folder you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Renaming Folders
the theme folder you want to rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the folder you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Related Topics
Adding Annotations
To add an annotation:
Annotation.
Or, select the element to which you want to add the annotation, click the New
button, and select New Annotation.
10-921

3. The Annotation Properties dialog box opens. Select the annotation you want in the
Field drop-down list.
If you dont find the Field you want to use immediately, look carefully through the
list of available field selections from top to bottom to make sure you didnt miss
the field you want.
4. If needed, set a Prefix or Suffix. Anything you type as a prefix is added directly to
the beginning of the label, and anything you type as a suffix is added to the end
(so, you may want to include spaces as part of your prefix and suffix).
Note:
If you add an annotation that uses units, you can type %u in

the prefix or suffix field to display the units in the drawing pane.
5. Select the initial X- and Y- offset for the annotation. Offset is measured from the
center of the node or polygon or midpoint of the polyline.
6. If needed, set an initial height multiplier. Use a number greater than 1 to make the
annotation larger, and a number between 0 and 1 to make the annotation smaller.
If you use a negative number, the annotation is flipped (rotated 180 degrees).
7. If you have created selection sets, you can apply your annotation only to a particular selection set by selecting that set from the Selection Set drop-down list. If you
have not created any selection sets, then the annotation is applied to all elements
of the type you are using.
8. After you finish defining your annotation, click OK to close the Annotation Properties dialog box and create your annotation, or Cancel to close the dialog box
without creating an annotation.
Related Topics
Deleting Annotations
an annotation you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the annotation you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
10-922
Related Topics
Editing Annotations
the annotation you want to edit, then select Edit.
Or, select the annotation you want to edit, then click the Edit button.
Note:
Changes to annotation settings may not be visible in the

drawing pane immediately. To refresh the drawing view to reflect
any changes that have been made, you can right-click the
annotation that was edited in the Element Symbology Manager
and select the Re-Apply Annotation command from the
Related Topics
Adding Annotations
Deleting Annotations
Renaming Annotations
Annotation Properties Dialog Box
Renaming Annotations
the annotation you want to rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the annotation you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
10-923
Related Topics

The Annotation Properties dialog box allows you to define annotation settings for
each element type.
This dialog box allows you to define annotation settings for each element type. The
dialog box consists of a list pane on the left and a control section on the right. The
control section in the right side of the dialog allow you to edit the settings for the
annotation that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
The dialog box consists of the following buttons:
New
Creates a new annotation in the list pane.
Delete
Deletes the annotation that is currently

Rename
Lets you rename the annotation that is

and the following controls:

List Pane
10-924
Label
Displays the name of the current annotation

definition.
Initial X Offset
Displays the initial X-axis offset of the

annotation in feet.
Initial Y Offset
Displays the initial Y-axis offset of the

annotation in feet.
Selected Annotation
Field Name
Lets you specify the attribute that is displayed

by the annotation definition.
Prefix
Lets you specify a prefix that is displayed before

the attribute value annotation for each element
to which the definition applies.
Suffix
Lets you specify a suffix that is displayed after

the attribute value annotation for each element
to which the definition applies.
Note:
If you add an annotation that

uses units, you can type
%u in the prefix or suffix
field to display the units in
the drawing pane.
Selection Set
Lets you specify a selection set to which the

annotation settings will apply. If the annotation
is to be applied to all elements, select the <All
Elements> option in this field. <All Elements>
is the default setting.
Initial Offset
If checked, the values in the X and Y fields will

be applied to all annotations (that are associated
with the current annotation definition) in the
drawing when the Apply button is clicked.
Sets the initial horizontal offset for an

annotation. Set this at the time you create the
annotation.
Sets the initial vertical offset for an annotation.

Set this at the time you create the annotation.
Initial Multiplier
If checked, the value in the Height Multiplier

field will be applied to all annotations (that are
associated with the current annotation
definition) in the drawing when the Apply
button is clicked.
10-925
Initial Height Multiplier
Sets the initial size of the annotation text. Set

this at the time you create the annotation.
Only list fields that apply

to the active solver
When this box is checked, the Field Name list

will only display those fields that are applicable
to the currently active solver. The active solver
can be changed in the Calculation Options (see
Calculation Options Manager).
Free Form Annotation Dialog Box

The Free Form Annotation dialog box allows you to type custom annotations for an
element type.
To create an annotation, type the text as you want it to appear in the drawing. You can
add element attributes to the text string by clicking the Append button and selecting
the attribute from the categorized list.
10-926
Symbology Definitions Manager

The Symbology Definitions manager lets you add, edit, and remove and manage the
symbology definitions that are associated with the project. The dialog box contains a
list pane that displays each of the definitions currently contained within the project, a
display pane that details the settings for the currently highlighted definition, along
with a toolbar.
.
10-927
New
Creates a new symbology definition in the

list pane.
Import
Imports a previously created set of

symbology definitions. Symbology
definitions are stored in a .sym file.
Export
Exports the current set of symbology

definitions to a .sym file for use in other
projects.
Delete

symbology definition.
Duplicate

Rename

Help
Displays online help for the Symbology

Definitions manager.
When you create a new definition, all of the annotation and color settings will be
turned off. To change the settings for a definition, change the current symbology definition to the one you want to edit in the Element Symbology Manager and make the
desired changes there (i.e. turn on/off the desired elements, create new annotations
and color coding and turn them on or off, etc.).
Zoom Dependent Visibility

Available through the Properties dialog box of each layer in the Element Symbology
manager, this feature can be used to cause elements, decorations, and annotations to
only appear in the drawing pane when the view is within the zoom range specified by
the Minimum and Maximum Zoom values.
10-928
Enabled: Set to true to enable and set to false to disable Zoom Dependent Visibility.
Minimum Zoom (%): The lowest zoom level at which the element will appear in
the drawing pane.
Maximum Zoom (%) : The highest zoom level at which the element will appear
Apply to Element: Set to true to apply the zoom minimums and maximums to the
symbols in the drawing.
Apply to Decorations: Set to true to apply the zoom minimums and maximums
to flow arrows, check valves, and constituent sources in the drawing.
Apply to Annotations: Set to true to apply the zoom minimums and maximums
to labels in the drawing.
Related Topics
Color Coding Your Model

Use color coding to help you quickly see what's going on in your Bentley SewerGEMS V8i model. Use color coding to change the color and/or size of elements based
on the value of data that you select, such as flow or element size.
To work with color coding, open the Element Symbology manager: click View >
Element Symbology (Ctrl+1).
Click one of the following links to learn more about color coding your model:
Deleting Color-Coding on page 10-930
Editing Color-Coding on page 10-931
Renaming Color-Coding on page 10-931
Adding Color-Coding on page 10-929
Adding Color-Coding
To add color coding, including element sizing:
Color Coding.
10-929

Or, select the element to which you want to add the color coding, click the New
button, and select New Color Coding.
3. The Color Coding Properties dialog box opens. Select the properties for which
you want to color code from the Field and Selection Set drop-down lists.
4. In the Options drop-down list, select whether you want to apply color and/or size
to the elements you are coding.
a. Click Calculate Range. This automatically sets the maximum and minimum
values for your coding. If you want, you can set these values manually.
b. Click Initialize. This automatically creates values and colors in the Color
Map. If you want, you can set these values manually.
5. After you finish defining your color coding, click OK to close the Color Coding
Properties dialog box and create your color coding, or Cancel to close the dialog
box without creating a color coding.
6. Click Compute to compute your network.
7. To see the network color coding and/or sizing change over time:
a. Click Analysis > Time Browser, if needed, to open the Time Browser dialog
box.
b. Click Play to use the Time Browser to review your color coding over time.
Related Topics
Color-Coding Properties Dialog Box on page 10-932
Deleting Color-Coding
the color coding you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the color coding you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Related Topics
10-930
Editing Color-Coding
the color coding you want to edit, then select Edit.
Or, select the color coding you want to edit, then click the Edit button.
Note:
Changes to color coding settings may not be visible in the

drawing pane immediately. To refresh the drawing view to reflect
any changes that have been made, you can right-click the
annotation that was edited in the Element Symbology Manager
and select the Refresh Color Coding command from the
Related Topics
Renaming Color-Coding
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology manager, right-click
the color coding you want to rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the color coding you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Related Topics
10-931
Element Symbology Manager
Adding Color-Coding
Deleting Color-Coding
Editing Color-Coding
Color-Coding Properties Dialog Box
Color Coding Properties That Are Not In The List of Field Names
This topic explains how to color code elements by properties that arent in the predefined list of field names. For example; creating a property (Max full flow)/Capacity
and color coding by it.
1. Open the Conduit Flex Table and copy the columns Max Flow and Full Capacity
and paste into Excel.
2. Create a new column in Excel that calculates Max Flow/Full Capacity.
3. In SewerGEMS V8i, create a new User Data Extension e.g. Conduit Field- 1.
4. Open FlexTables again and bring the Conduit Field-1 column into the FlexTable.
5. Now Copy and Paste the Max Flow/Full Capacity column from the Excel
spreadsheet into the Conduit Field-1 column.
6. Close FlexTables.
7. Now Color Code based on the Conduit Field-1 User Data Extension.
Color-Coding Properties Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define color coding for each element type. The dialog
box consists of the following controls:
Properties
10-932
Field Name
Lets you select the attribute by which the color

coding is applied.
Selection Set
Lets you apply a color coding to a previously

defined selection set.
Only list fields that

apply to the active
solver
When this box is checked, the Field Name list will

only display those fields that are applicable to the
currently active solver. The active solver can be
changed in the Calculation Options (see
Calculation Options Manager).
Calculate Range
Automatically finds the minimum and maximum

values for the selected attribute and enters them in
the appropriate Min. and Max fields.
Min
Lets you define the minimum value of the attribute

to be color coded.
Max
Lets you define the maximum value of the

attribute to be color coded.
Steps
Lets you specify how many rows are created in the

color maps table when you click Initialize. When
you click Initialize, a number of values equal to the
number of Steps are created in the color maps
table. The low and high values are set by the Min
and Max values you set.
Color Map
Options
Lets you select whether you want to use color

coding, sizing, or both to code and display your
elements.
10-933
Color Maps Table
Lets you map colors to value ranges for the

attribute being color coded. The following buttons
are found along the top of the table:
NewCreates a new row in the Color

Maps table.
DeleteDeletes the currently highlighted row from the Color Maps table.
InitializeFinds the range of values for

the specified attribute, divides it into equal
ranges based on the number of Steps you
have set, and assigns a color to each range.
RampGenerates a gradient range

between two colors that you specify. Pick the
color for the first and last values in the list,
then Bentley SewerGEMS V8i automatically
sets intermediate colors for the other values.
For example, picking red as the first color and
blue as the last color produces varying shades
of purple for the other values.
InvertReverse the order of the colors/

sizes used in the Color Map table.
Above Range Color
Displays the color that is applied to elements

whose value for the specified attribute fall outside
the range defined in the color maps table. This
selection is available if you choose Color or Color
and Size from the Options list.
Above Range Size
Displays the size that is applied to elements whose

value for the specified attribute fall outside the
range defined in the color maps table. This
selection is available if you choose Size or Color
and Size from the Options list.
Related Topics
10-934
Using Profiles
A profile is a graph that plots a particular attribute across a distance, such as ground
elevation along a section of piping. As well as these side or sectional views of the
ground elevation, profiles can be used to show other characteristics, such as hydraulic
grade, pressure, and constituent concentration.
You define profiles by selecting a series of adjacent elements. Only conduits, channels, and gutters can be part of a profile. The profile you create displays the structures
you selected, plus the relative ground and water elevations.
To create or use a profile, you can:
Open the Profiles manager. The Profiles manager is a dockable window that lets
you add, delete, rename, edit, and view profiles.
or
Create a profile from the drawing:

Right-click a link element and select Create Profile from the context menu that
appears. This creates a profile for just the selected link.
Right-click a node element (conduit, channel, gutter) and select Create Profile
from the context menu that appears. This creates a profile from that node to the
network outfall.
Click one of the following links to learn more about how to use profiles:
Profiles Manager on page 10-936
Viewing Profiles on page 10-937
Animating Profiles on page 10-937
Creating a New Profile on page 10-941
Editing Profiles on page 10-942
Deleting Profiles on page 10-943
Renaming Profiles on page 10-943
Profile Setup on page 10-944
Profile Viewer Dialog Box on page 10-946
10-935
Using Profiles
Profiles Manager
The Profiles Manager allows you to create, view, and edit profile views of elements in
the network. The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the profiles
currently contained within the project, along with a toolbar.
10-936
New
Opens the Profile Setup dialog box,

allowing you to create a new profile.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted profile.
Rename

profile.
Edit
Opens the Profile Setup dialog box,

allowing you to modify the settings of the
currently highlighted profile.
View
Opens the Profile Element Viewer, allowing

you to view the currently highlighted
profile.
Select In Drawing
Selects the elements contained within the

currently highlighted profile in the drawing
pane and performs a zoom extent based on
the selection.
Highlight
When this toggle button is on, elements

contained within the currently highlighted
profile will be highlighted in the drawing
pane to increase their visibility.
Help
Displays online help for the Profile

Manager.
Viewing Profiles
To view a profile:
1. Click Compute to calculate flows.
2. Click View > Profiles to open the Profile manager.
3. In the Profile manager, select the profile you want to view, then click the View
button (or double-click the profile you want to view).
Note:
You can edit your list of profile elements at any time and
compute your network with the Profile Viewer dialog box open,
but you must click Refresh to update the display of that dialog
box if you do make changes.
4. The Profile Viewer dialog box opens. For more information, see Profile Viewer
Dialog Box on page 10-946.
5. If necessary, you can click Chart Settings to change the look of the profile, and
use Print Preview and Print to print the profile.
Related Topics
Profile Setup Dialog Box on page 9-607
Animating Profiles
Animate a profile by:
1. Click Compute to calculate flows.
2. Click View > Profiles to open the Profiles manager.
3. In the Profiles manager, select the profile you want to see and click the Profile
button to open the profile in Profile Viewer.
4. If the Scenario Animation dialog box is not open, select View > Scenario Animation to open it.
10-937
Using Profiles
5. If needed, click the Scenario Animation Option button to setup the animation.
6. In the Scenario Animation dialog box, move the Time slider or click one of the
animation buttons and watch the profile change over time in the Profile Viewer.
As needed, click the Pause button in the Scenario Animation dialog box, to study
the profile at a given time.
Time Browser Dialog Box

The Time Browser dialog box allows you to change the currently displayed time step
and to animate the main drawing pane.
10-938
Time Display
Shows the current time step that is displayed

Time Slider
Lets you manually move the slider

representing the currently displayed time step
along the bar, which represents the full length
of time that the scenario encompasses.
Go to Start

beginning of the simulation.
Play Backward
Sets the currently displayed time step from the

end to the beginning.
Step Backward
Returns the currently displayed time step to

the previous time step.
Pause/Stop
Stops the animation. Restarts it again with

another click.
Step
Advances the currently displayed time step to

the following time step.
Play
Advances the currently displayed time step

from beginning to end.
Got to End

end of the simulation.
Options
Opens the Time Browser Options dialog box.
Help
Opens Bentley SewerGEMS V8i online help.
Speed Slider
Lets you control the length of the delay

between time steps during animations.
Increment
Allows you to set the increment between

steps.
Time Browser Options Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define the animation settings that are applied when the
drawing pane is animated. It contains the following controls:
Frame Options
Increment
Controls the smoothness of the animation.

Each time step in a scenario counts as one
animation frame. This slider allows you to
specify the number of frames that are skipped
for each step in the animation. For example, if
there are time steps every 3 minutes in the
scenario and the slider is set at 3 frames, each
step in the animation represents 9 minutes of
scenario time when you click the Play button.
Looping Options
No Loop
Stops the animation at the end of the

simulation, if selected.
Loop Animation
Restarts the animation automatically, if

selected. When this option is selected, the
and then restarts from the beginning.
Rocker Animation
Restarts the animation automatically in

reverse. When this option is selected, the
and then plays the simulation in reverse.
When the beginning of the simulation is
reached, the animation advances towards the
end again, and so on.
10-939
Using Profiles
Time and Date Formats

You can change the format in which times and dates are displayed. To change the time
and/or date format, right-click any time field column headings, then select Units and
Formatting. The following dialog will appear:
The following is a list of supported time and date formats, and a sample of what the
format will look like for 1 year, 1 month, 1 day, 1 hour, 1 minute, and one second into
the simulation.
10-940
Elapsed Time Short: 9504.04 (hours)
Elapsed Time Long: 396:01:01:01
Short Time: 1:01 AM
Long Time: 1:01:01 AM
Short Date: 2/01/2009
Long Date: Monday, Feb 01, 2009
Short Date & Short Time: 2/01/2009 1:01 AM
Short Date & Long Time: 6/15/2009 1:01:01 AM
Long Date & Short Time: Monday, Feb 01, 2009 1:01 AM
Long Date & Long Time: Monday, Feb 01, 2009 1:01:01 AM
Sortable Date & Time: 2009-01-01T01:01:01
Universal Sortable Date & Time: 2009-01-01 01:01:01Z
Universal Full Date & Time: Monday, Feb 01, 2009 01:01:01 AM
Creating a New Profile

To create a new profile:
1. Click View > Profiles or click the Profiles Manager button on the View toolbar to
open the Profiles manager.
2. Right-click in the Profiles manager and select New, or click the New button.
3. The Profile Setup dialog box opens. For more information, see Profile Setup
4. Select the Elements you want to use:
a. Click Select from Drawing. The Select dialog box appears:
You must select one path of contiguous elements; you cannot select diverging
paths. You can select upstream and downstream elements, but if you begin at
an upstream element, select downstream, and then make upstream selections
to finish, your profile will be V-shaped, with higher elevations at the beginning and end of the profile than in the middle. Instead, what you might want
to do is select elements beginning at a high elevation and selecting elements at
increasingly lower elevations towards an outfall.
b. To add elements to the profile, click elements in the drawing pane. (By
default, the Add button is active in the Select dialog box.) You can only add
elements to either end of your selectionall selected elements must be
contiguous.
When there is a plus sign next to the cursor, you can select elements to add to
the profile; elements that you successfully select are highlighted red.
c. To remove elements from the profile, click the Remove button in the Select
dialog box. Thereafter, elements you select in the drawing pane are removed
from the profile. You can only remove elements from either end of your selectionall selected elements must be contiguous.
When there is a minus sign next to the cursor, you can remove elements from
the profile; unselected elements are not highlighted.
d. When you are finished adding elements to your profile, click the Done button
in the Select dialog box.
10-941
Using Profiles
5. The Profile Setup dialog box opens and displays a list of the elements you
selected. If necessary, use the Reverse button to reverse the order of these
elements, and the Select from Drawing or Remove buttons to add or remove
elements from the list.
Note:
You can edit your list of profile elements at any time and
compute your network with the Profile Viewer dialog box open,
but you must click Refresh to update the display of that dialog
box if you do make changes.
6. Click Close and Open Profile to close the Profile Setup dialog box and open the
Profile Viewer dialog box.
Create Profile Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to enter a name for a newly created profile.
Click OK to create the profile using the specified name, or Cancel to cancel the operation.
Note:
When links that are a part of an existing profile are reconnected

such that the previously created profile does not remain
continuous, the profile may no longer show correct results. If
you reconnect links that are part of an existing profile, edit and
redefine a valid path to ensure correct results.
Editing Profiles
You can edit a profile to change the elements that it uses or the order in which those
elements are used. To edit a profile:
1. Click View > Profiles to open the Profiles manager.
2. In the Profiles manager, right-click the profile you want to edit, then select Edit.
Or, select the profile you want to edit, then click the Edit button.
3. The Profile Setup dialog box opens. Modify the profile as needed and click OK to
save your changes or Cancel to exit without saving your changes.
Related Topics
10-942
Deleting Profiles
Click View > Profiles to open the Profiles manager. In the Profiles manager, rightclick the profile you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the profile you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Related Topics
Renaming Profiles
Click View > Profiles to open the Profiles manager. In the Profiles manager, rightclick the profile you want to rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the profile you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Related Topics
10-943
Using Profiles
Profile Setup
Setting up a profile is a matter of selecting the adjacent elements on which the profile
is based. When you click on New in the Profiles dialog box the following dialog box
opens.
The Profile Setup dialog box includes the following options:
10-944
Label
Displays the list of elements that define the

profile.
User Defined Station
Checking this box makes the Station field editable

for the associated element, allowing you to define
the station.
Station
Displays the station for the associated element.

This field is non-editable unless the User Defined
Station box is checked.
Select From Drawing
Selects and clears elements for the profile.
Reverse
Reverses the profile, so the first node in the list

becomes the last and the last node becomes the
first.
Remove All
Removes all elements from the profile.
Remove All Previous
Removes all elements that appear before the

selected element in the list. If the selected element
is a pipe, the associated node is not removed.
Remove All Following
Removes all elements that appear after the

selected element in the list. If the selected element
is a pipe, the associated node is not removed.
Open Profile
Closes the Profile Setup dialog box and opens the

Profile Series Options dialog box.
Related Topics
10-945
Using Profiles
Profile Viewer Dialog Box

This dialog box displays the profile view of the profile run that is plotted from the
Profile Manager. It consists of the profile display pane and the following controls:
Zoom Window
Lets you magnify or reduce the display of a

section of the graph. To zoom or magnify an area,
select the Zoom Window tool, click to the left of
the area you want to magnify, then drag the mouse
to the right, across the area you want to magnify,
so that the area you want to magnify is contained
within the marquee that the Zoom Window tool
draws. After you have selected the area you want
to magnify, release the mouse button to stop
dragging.
To zoom out, or reduce the magnification, drag the
mouse from right to left across the magnified
image.
Zoom Extents
Magnifies the profile so that the entire graph is

displayed.
Chart Settings
Opens the Chart Options dialog box, letting you

view and modify the display settings for the
current profile plot. For more information, see
Chart Options Dialog Box on page 10-993.
Warning!
10-946
Never delete or rename any

of the series entries on the
Series Tab of the Chart
Options dialog box. These
series were specifically
designed to enable the
display of the Profile Plots.
Display Labels
Lets you display or hide labels for the elements in

your profile plot.
Copy
Copies the contents of the Profile Viewer dialog

box as an image to the Windows clipboard, from
where you can paste it into another application,
such as Microsoft Word or Adobe
Photoshop.
Print
Prints the current view of the profile to your

default printer. If you want to use a printer other
than your default, use Print Preview to change the
printer and print the profile.
Print Preview
Opens a print preview window containing the

current view of the profile. You can use the Print
Preview dialog box to select a printer and preview
the output before you print it.
Note:
Do not change the print

preview to grayscale, as doing
so might hide some elements
of the display.
Refresh
Updates the profile view to reflect changes in

input data and results.
Time Browsers
The following Time Browsers are found to the

right of the Refresh button:
Rewind (Full)Sets the currently displayed

time step to the beginning of the simulation.
PauseStops the animation. Restarts it again

with another click.
PlayAdvances the currently displayed time

step from beginning to end.
Time DisplayShows the current time step

that is displayed in the drawing pane.
Time SliderLets you manually move the

slider representing the currently displayed
time step along the bar, which represents the
full length of time that the scenario encompasses
Axis Options Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define the scale of the profile plot. Specify a unit, enter a
value for the Horizontal and vertical axes, and specify whether the direction is
measured from Left to Right or Right to Left.
10-947
Using Profiles
Engineering Profile Viewer Dialog Box

This dialog box displays the profile view of the profile run that is plotted from the
Profile Manager. It consists of the profile display pane and the following controls:
10-948
Zoom Window

dragging.
image.
Zoom Extents

displayed.
Chart Settings

commands:
Display Annotation Labels: Lets you display or
hide labels for the elements in your profile
plot.
Profile Annotation Table: Lets you display or

hide the profile element annotation table.
HGL: Lets you display or hide the line representing hydraulic grade line in the profile plot.
EGL: Lets you display or hide the line representing energy grade line in the profile plot.
Legend: Lets you display or hide the profile

plot legend.
Axis Options: Opens the Axis Options dialog.
Chart Options: Opens the Chart Options

dialog box, letting you view and modify the
display settings for the current profile plot. For
more information, see Chart Options Dialog
Box on page 10-993.
Warning!
Never delete or rename any

of the series entries on the
Series Tab of the Chart
Options dialog box. These
series were specifically
designed to enable the
display of the Profile Plots.
Export to DXF: Exports the profile view as a

dxf file.
Print
Prints the current view of the profile to your

default printer. If you want to use a printer other
than your default, use Print Preview to change the
printer and print the profile.
Print Preview
Opens a print preview window containing the

current view of the profile. You can use the Print
Preview dialog box to select a printer and preview
the output before you print it.
Note:
Do not change the print

preview to grayscale, as doing
so might hide some elements
of the display.
10-949
Using Profiles
Copy
Copies the contents of the Profile Viewer dialog

box as an image to the Windows clipboard, from
where you can paste it into another application,
such as Microsoft Word or Adobe
Photoshop.
Zoom Extents

displayed.
Zoom

dragging.
image.
Engineering Profile Options

This dialog allows you to change various display options for engineering profiles. It is
divided into the following tabs:
Axis Tab
10-950
Scale: Allows you to define the horizontal and vertical scale of the engineering
profile view.
Direction: Allows you to choose the direction in which elements are displayed in
the engineering profile view.
Axis Labeling: Allows you to choose where to place the labels along the axis of
the engineering profile view.
Automatic Scaling: When this box is checked the scaling is handled automatically and the Minimum and Maximum fields are not editable. When this box is
not checked you can define the Minimum and Maximum fields.
Minimum: The left-most station. When Automatic Scaling is checked this field is
not editable.
Maximum: The right-most station. When Automatic Scaling is checked this field
is not editable.
Increment: The length between intermediate values.
Drawing Tab
Text Height Multiplier: Increases or decreases the size of the text by the factor
indicated.
Ground Elevation Line Width: This field allows you to define the width of the
ground elevation line in the engineering profile view.
Structure Line Width: This field allows you to define the width of structure lines
in the engineering profile view.
HGL Line Width: This field allows you to define the width of the hydraulic
grade line in the engineering profile view.
EGL Line Width: This field allows you to define the width of the energy grade
line in the engineering profile view.
Layers Tab
This tab allows you to select the color and/or change the visibility of the various
elements of the profile view. Uncheck the Is Visible box to turn the corresponding
element off in the engineering profile view. Click the Layer Color to access the color
menu to change the color of the corresponding element in the engineering profile
view.
Ground Profile Options

This dialog allows you to define the line representing ground elevation in the engineering profile view.
By default, the Elevation Data Type is set to Automatic. If you change it to Ground
Elevation/Depth Curve, you can use the Station vs. Elevation table to define the
ground elevation. Click the New button to add a row to the table or Delete to remove
the currently highlighted row. Click the Import button to import ground elevation data
from a Tab-delimited text file.

This dialog allows you to modify the settings of the profile annotation for nodes. The
following controls are available:
Horizontal Justification: This control allows you to select the horizontal (left-toright) placement of the annotation over the annotated element.
10-951
Using Profiles
Vertical Justification: This control allows you to select the vertical (up-anddown) placement of the annotation over the annotated element.
Rotation: This control allows you to enter the angle of rotation of the annotation
over an annotated element.
Show Leader Line: When this box is checked, a line is drawn between the annotation and the associated element.
Show Leader Arrow: When this box is checked, an arrow is drawn pointing to
the associated element.
Link Annotation Properties Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to modify the settings of the profile annotation for links. The
following controls are available:
Align Text With Pipes: When this box is checked the annotation will align with
the angle of the corresponding pipe.
Horizontal Justification: This control allows you to select the horizontal (left-toright) placement of the annotation over the annotated element.
Vertical Justification: This control allows you to select the vertical (up-anddown) placement of the annotation over the annotated element.
Rotation: This control allows you to enter the angle of rotation of the annotation
over an annotated element.
Show Leader Line: When this box is checked, a line is drawn between the annotation and the associated element.
Show Leader Arrow: When this box is checked, an arrow is drawn pointing to
the associated element.
Text Properties
This dialog allows you to modify the settings of the profile annotation for the axis
labels. The following controls are available:
10-952
Text: This field displays the text of the label. This field is not editable.
Horizontal Justification: This control allows you to select the horizontal (left-toright) placement of the label annotation.
Vertical Justification: This control allows you to select the vertical (up-anddown) placement of the label annotation.
Rotation: This control allows you to enter the angle of rotation of the label annotation .
Annotation Properties
Use the Annotation Properties dialog box to define annotation settings for your engineering profiles.
Field Name
Specify the attribute that is displayed by the

annotation definition.
Free Form
This field is only available when <Free Form

Annotation> is selected in the Field Name list.
Click the ellipsis button to open the Free Form
Annotation dialog box.
Selection Set
Specify a selection set to which the annotation

settings will apply. If the annotation is to be
applied to all elements, select the <All
Elements> option in this field. <All Elements>
is the default setting.
Initial Offset Checkbox
When this box is checked, changes made to the

X and Y Offset will be applied to current and
subsequently created elements. When the box is
unchecked, only subsequently created elements
will be affected.
X Offset
Displays the initial X-axis offset of the

annotation in feet. Sets the initial horizontal
offset for an annotation. Set this at the time you
create the annotation. Clicking OK will cause
the new value to be used for all subsequent
elements that you place. Clicking Apply will
cause the new value to be applied to all
elements.
Y Offset
Displays the initial Y-axis offset of the

annotation in feet. Sets the initial vertical offset
for an annotation. Set this at the time you create
the annotation. Clicking OK will cause the new
value to be used for all subsequent elements that
you place. Clicking Apply will cause the new
value to be applied to all elements.
10-953
Using Profiles
Initial Multiplier
Checkbox
When this box is checked, changes made to the

Height Multiplier will be applied to current and
subsequently created elements. When the box is
unchecked, only subsequently created elements
will be affected.
Height Multiplier
Sets the initial size of the annotation text. Set

this at the time you create the annotation.
Clicking OK will cause the new value to be used
for all subsequent elements that you place.
Clicking Apply will cause the new value to be
applied to all elements.
Control Structures in Profiles

Because of the way that water surface profiles are calculated in the different solvers,
profiles for the same system and flows in a series of conduits may look different using
different solvers. For example, a system with four weirs in series may look like this:
In SewerCAD/StormCAD GVF solver:
10-954

In SewerGEMS./CivilStorm Implicit dynamic wave solver:
In SewerGEMS/CivilStorm Explicit SWMM dynamic wave solver:
The profile in the dynamic wave solvers near control structures can be made to look
more accurate by placing the control structures in a shorter conduit. For example, if
the conduit is 400 ft, break it into a 40 ft and 360 ft conduit and place the weir in the
shorter conduit.
10-955
Using Profiles
By using these shorter lengths, the profile near the control structure can be made to
look more realistic.
For the Implicit solver:
For the Explicit SWMM solver:
10-956

The conduit with the control structure should not be made extremely short or it may
affect the stability of the run. For example, a 1 ft conduit can cause problems.
Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables

FlexTables lets you view input data and results for all elements of a specific type in a
tabular format. You can use the standard set of FlexTables or create customized
FlexTables to compare data and create reports.
FlexTables lets you view all elements in the project, all elements of a specific type, or
any subset of elements. Additionally, to ease data input and present output data for
specific elements, FlexTables can be:
Filtered (see Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data on page 10-967)
Globally edited (see Globally Editing Data on page 10-966)
Sorted (see Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data on page 10-967)
If you need to edit a set of properties for all elements of a certain type in your network,
you might consider creating a FlexTable and making your changes there, rather than
editing each element one at a time, in sequence.
FlexTables can also be used to create results reports that you can print, save as a file,
or copy to the Windows clipboard for copying into word processing or spreadsheet
software.
To work with FlexTables, select the FlexTables manager or use View > FlexTables
(Ctrl+7) to open the FlexTables manager if it is closed.
Click one of the following links to learn more about using FlexTables:
FlexTables Manager on page 10-958
Working with FlexTable Folders on page 10-960
Opening FlexTables on page 10-963
Creating a New FlexTable on page 10-964
Deleting FlexTables on page 10-964
Naming and Renaming FlexTables on page 10-964
Editing FlexTables on page 10-965
Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data on page 10-967
Customizing Your FlexTable on page 10-970
FlexTable Setup Dialog Box on page 10-971
10-957
Copying, Exporting, and Printing FlexTable Data on page 10-974
Using Predefined Tables on page 10-976
FlexTables Manager
The FlexTables Manager allows you to create, manage, and delete custom tabular
reports.
The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the custom FlexTables currently
contained within the project, along with a toolbar.
.
10-958
New

commands:
FlexTableCreates a new tabular

report and opens the FlexTable Setup
dialog box, allowing you to define the
element type that the FlexTable
displays, and the columns that are
contained in the table.
FolderCreates a folder in the list

pane, allowing you to group custom
FlexTables.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted FlexTable.
Rename

FlexTable.
Edit
Opens the FlexTable Setup dialog box,

allowing you to make changes to the format
of the currently selected table
Open
Lets you open the currently highlighted

FlexTable.
Help
Displays online help for the FlexTable

Manager.
Related Topics
Working with FlexTable Folders on page 10-960
10-959
Working with FlexTable Folders

You can add, delete, and rename folders in the FlexTable Manager to organize your
FlexTables into groups of that can be turned off as one entity. You can also create
folders within folders. When you start a new project, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i
displays two items in the FlexTable Manager: Tables - Project (for project-level
FlexTables) and Tables - Shared (for FlexTables shared by more than one Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i project). You can add new FlexTables and FlexTable folders to
either item or to existing folders.
To add a FlexTable folder:
1. Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables Manager.
2. In the FlexTable Manager, select either Tables - Project or Tables - Shared, then
click the New button.
If you are creating a new folder within an existing folder, select the folder,
then click the New button.
3. Click New Folder from the shortcut menu.

4. Right-click the new folder and select Rename from the shortcut menu.
5. Type the name of the folder, then press Enter.
To delete a FlexTable folder:
2. In the FlexTables Manager, select the folder you want to delete, then click the
Delete button.
You can also right-click a folder to delete, then select Delete from the shortcut
menu.
To rename a FlexTable folder:

2. In the FlexTables Manager, select the folder you want to rename, then click the
Rename button.
You can also right-click a folder to rename, then select Rename from the
shortcut menu.
3. Type the new name of the folder, then press Enter.
10-960
You can also rename a FlexTable folder by selecting the folder, then modifying its label in the Properties Editor.
Related Topics
FlexTables Manager on page 10-958
FlexTable Dialog Box

FlexTables are displayed in the FlexTable dialog box. The dialog box contains a
toolbar, the rows and columns of data in the FlexTable, and a status bar.
Export to File
Export to a Shapefile .shp, a Tab Delimited

file .txt, or a Comma Delimited File .csv.
Copy
Lets you copy the contents of the selected

table cell, rows, and/or columns for the
purpose of pasting into a different row or
column or into a text editing program such
as Notepad.
Paste
Lets you paste the contents of the Windows

clipboard into the selected table cell, row, or
column. Use this with the Copy button.
Edit
Opens the FlexTable Setup dialog box,

allowing you to make changes to the format
of the currently selected table
10-961
Zoom To
Lets you zoom into and center the drawing

pane on the currently selected element in the
FlexTable.
Report
Lets you create and view a report of your

FlexTable for either the current time step or
all time steps.
Options

commands:
Select In Drawing
Create Selection SetLets you create

a new static selection set ( a selection
set based on selection) containing the
currently selected elements in the
FlexTable.
Add to Selection SetLets you add

the currently selected elements in the
FlexTable to an existing selection set.
Remove from Selection Set

Removes the currently selected
elements from an existing selection set.
RelabelOpens an Element Relabeling

box where you can Replace, Append, or
Renumber

commands:
Select In DrawingSelects the

currently highlighted element(s) in the
drawing pane.
Add to SelectionAdds the currently

highlighted element(s) to the group that
is currently highlighted in the drawing
pane.
Remove From SelectionRemoves

the currently highlighted element(s) from
the group that is currently highlighted in
the drawing pane.
The status bar at the bottom of the FlexTable dialog box contains the following items:
10-962
x of x elements displayedNumber of elements displayed in the FlexTable of

the total possible number of that type of element.
FILTEREDIf you have applied a filter to the FlexTable, this appears in the
status bar. Hold the mouse cursor over this panel to display a tool tip, which lists a
summary of active filters.
SORTEDIf you have sorted the order of any items in the FlexTable, this
appears in the status bar. Hold the mouse cursor over this panel to display a tool
tip, which lists a summary of active sorting.
Statistics Dialog Box

The Statistics dialog box displays statistics for the elements in a FlexTable. You can
right-click any unitized input or output column and choose the Statistics command to
view the count, maximum value, mean value, minimum value, standard deviation, and
sum for that column.
Opening FlexTables
You open FlexTables from within the FlexTable Manager.
To open FlexTables:
1. Click View > FlexTables or click the FlexTables button on the View toolbar to
open the FlexTables Manager.
Right-click the FlexTable you want to open, then select Open.
Select the FlexTable you want to open, then click the Open button.
Double-click the FlexTable you want to open.
10-963
Creating a New FlexTable

You can create project-level or shared FlexTables.
Project-level FlexTables are available only for the project in which you create
them.
Shared tables are available in all Bentley SewerGEMS V8i projects.
To create a new FlexTable:

Project-level and shared FlexTables are created the same way:
2. In the FlexTables Manager, right-click Tables - Project or Tables - Shared, then
select New > FlexTable.
Or, select Tables - Project or Tables - Shared, click the New button, then select
FlexTable.
3. The Table Setup dialog box opens.
4. Select the Table Type you want to create. This lets you filter your table by element
type.
5. Select the items you want in the FlexTable by moving them to the Selected
Columns pane.
6. Click OK.
7. The table displays in the FlexTables Manager; you can type to rename the table or
accept the default name.
Deleting FlexTables
Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables Manager. In the FlexTables manager,
right-click the FlexTable you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the FlexTable you want to delete, then click the Delete button. You cannot
delete predefined FlexTables.
Note:
You cannot delete predefined FlexTables.
Naming and Renaming FlexTables

You name and rename FlexTables in the FlexTable Manager.
10-964

To rename FlexTables:
Right-click the FlexTable you want to rename, then select Rename.
Select the FlexTable you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Click the FlexTable you want to rename, to select it, then click the name of
the FlexTable.
Note:
You cannot rename predefined FlexTables.
Editing FlexTables
You can edit a FlexTable to change the columns of data it contains or the values in
some of those columns.
Editable columns:
Columns that contain data you can edit are displayed

with a white background. You can change these
columns directly in the FlexTable and your changes
are applied to your model when you click OK.
The content in the FlexTable columns can be
changed in other areas of Bentley SewerGEMS V8i,
such as in a Property Editor or managers; but, it
might be more efficient to make changes to
numerous elements in a FlexTable rather than the
Property Editor or a manager.
If you make a change that affects a FlexTable outside
the FlexTable, the FlexTable is updated automatically
to reflect the change.
Non-editable columns:
Columns that contain data you cannot edit are

displayed with a yellow background, and correspond
to model results calculated by the program and
composite values.
The content in these columns can be changed in other
areas of Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, such as in a
Property Editor and by running a computation.
If you make a change that affects a FlexTable outside
the FlexTable, the FlexTable is updated automatically
to reflect the change.
10-965

To edit a FlexTable:
1. Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables Manager, then you can:
Right-click the FlexTable, then select Edit.
Double-click the FlexTable to open it, then click Edit.
Click the FlexTable, to select it, then click the Edit button.
2. The Table dialog box opens. .

3. Use the Table dialog box to include and exclude columns and change the order in
which the columns appear in the table.
4. Click OK after you finish making changes, to save your changes and close the
dialog box; or, click Cancel to close the dialog box without making changes.
Editing Column-Heading Text
To change the text of a column heading:
2. In the FlexTables manager, open the FlexTable you want to edit.
3. Right-click the column heading and select Edit Column Label.
4. Type the new name for the label and click OK to save those changes and close the
dialog box or Cancel to exit without making any changes.
Changing Units, Format, and Precision in FlexTables
To change the units, format, or precision in a column of a FlexTable:
1. In the FlexTables manager, open the FlexTable you want to edit.
2. Right-click the column heading and select Units.
3. Make the changes you want and click OK to save those changes or Cancel to exit
without making any changes.
Navigating in Tables
The arrow keys, Ctrl+Home, Ctrl+End, PgUp, PgDn, and Ctrl+arrow keys navigate to
different cells in a table.
Globally Editing Data
10-966

Using FlexTables, you can globally edit all of the values in an entire editable column.
Globally editing a FlexTable column can be more efficient for editing properties of an
element than using the Properties Editor or managers to edit each element in your
model individually.
To globally edit the values in a FlexTable column:
2. In the FlexTables manager, open the FlexTable you want to edit and find the
column of data you want to change.
If necessary, you might need to first create a FlexTable or edit an existing one to
make sure it contains the column you want to change.
3. Right-click the column heading and select Global Edit.
4. In the Operation field, select what you want to do to data in the column: Add,
Divide, Multiply, Set, or Subtract.
Note:
The Operation field is only available for numeric data.
5. In the Global Edit field, type or select the value you wantfor numeric data, you
typically type a new value, for other data you might select from a drop-down list
or select a check box.
Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data

You can sort and filter your FlexTables to focus on specific data or present your data
in one of the following ways:
To sort the order of columns in a FlexTable:
You can sort the order of columns in a FlexTable in two ways:
Edit the FlexTable (see Editing FlexTables), to open the Table dialog box and
change the order of the selected tables using the up and down arrow buttons.
The top-most item in the Selected Columns pane appears furthest to the left in the
resulting FlexTable.
Open the FlexTable, click the heading of the column you want to move, then click
again and drag the column to the new position. You can only move one column at
a time.
To sort the contents of a FlexTable:

1. Open the FlexTable you want to edit
2. Right-click a column heading to rank the contents of the column.
10-967

3. Select Sort Ascending Sort Descending, or Custom.
Sort AscendingSorts alphabetically from A to Z, from top to bottom. Sorts

numerically from negative to positive, from top to bottom. Sorts selected
check boxes to the top and cleared ones to the bottom.
Sort DescendingSorts alphabetically from Z to A, from top to bottom.

Sorts numerically from positive to negative, from top to bottom. Sorts cleared
check boxes to the top and selected ones to the bottom.
CustomOpens the Custom Sort dialog box, which allows you to choose an
attribute to sort by in ascending or descending order.
To filter a FlexTable:
You filter a FlexTable by creating a query.
1. Open the FlexTable you want to filter.
2. Right-click the column heading you want to filter, and select Filter.
The Query Builder dialog box opens.
3. All input and results fields for the selected element type appear in the Fields list
pane, available SQL operators and keywords are represented by buttons, and
available values for the selected field are listed in the Unique Values list pane.
Perform the following steps to construct your query:
a. Double-click the field you wish to include in your query. The database
column name of the selected field appears in the preview pane.
b. Click the desired operator or keyword button. The SQL operator or keyword
is added to the SQL expression in the preview pane.
c. Click the Refresh button above the Unique Values list pane to see a list of
unique values available for the selected field. The Refresh button is becomes
disabled after you use it for a particular field.
d. Double-click the unique value you want to add to the query. The value is
added to the SQL expression in the preview pane.
e. Click the Validate button above the preview pane to validate your SQL
expression. If the expression is valid, the word VALIDATED is displayed in
the lower right corner of the dialog box.
f.
Click the Apply button above the preview pane to execute the query. If you
didnt validate the expression, the Apply button validates it before executing
it.
g. Click OK.
10-968
Double-click the
desired field to add it
to the preview pane
Click the desired operator

or keyword button to add it
to the SQL expression in
the preview pane
Click the Refresh

button to display the
list of available
unique values
Double-click the
desired unique
value to add it to
the SQL
expression in the
preview pane
Apply button
Preview pane
Validate
button
The FlexTable displays columns of data for all elements returned by the query and
the word FILTERED is displayed in the FlexTable status bar.
To reset a filter:
1. Right-click the column heading you want to filter.
2. Select Filter.
3. Click Reset.
The status pane at the bottom of the Table window always shows the number of rows
displayed and the total number of rows available (e.g., 10 of 20 elements displayed).
When a filter is active, this message is highlighted.
10-969

Note:
Table filtering lets you perform global editing (see Editing

FlexTables) on any subset of elements. Only the elements that
appear in the filtered table can be edited.
Custom Sort Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to choose an attribute to sort by, and whether to sort in
asending or descending order. You can choose multiple attributes to sort by. When
multiple sort attributes are specified, the first attribute specified will take precedence,
then the second, and so on.
Customizing Your FlexTable

There are several ways to customize tables to meet a variety of output requirements:
10-970
Changing the Report TitleWhen you print a table, the table name is used as
the title for the printed report. You can change the title that appears on your
printed report by renaming the table. For more information, see Naming and
Renaming FlexTables on page 10-964.
Adding/Removing ColumnsYou can add, remove, and change the order of

columns from the Table Setup dialog box. For more information, see Editing
FlexTables on page 10-965 and Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data on
page 10-967.
Drag/Drop Column PlacementWith the Table window open, select the

column heading of the column that you would like to move and drag the column
to its new location. For more information, see Sorting and Filtering FlexTable
Data on page 10-967.
Resizing ColumnsWith the Table open, click the vertical separator line
between column headings. Notice that the cursor changes shape to indicate that
you can resize the column. Drag the column separator to the left or right to stretch
the column to its new size.
Changing Column HeadingsWith the Table window open, right-click the

column heading that you wish to change and select Edit Column Label.
FlexTable Setup Dialog Box

The Table Setup dialog box allows you to customize any table through the following
options:
Table Type
Lets you specify the type of elements that appear

in the table. It also provides a filter for the
attributes that appear in the Available Columns
list. When you choose a table type, the available
list only contains attributes that can be used for
that table type. For example, only manhole
attributes are available for a manhole table.
Available Columns
Contains all the attributes that are available for

your table design. The Available Columns list is
located on the left side of the Table Setup dialog
box. This list contains all of the attributes that are
available for the type of table you are creating.
The attributes displayed in yellow represent noneditable attributes, while those displayed in white
represent editable attributes.
Selected Columns
Contains attributes that appear in your custom

designed FlexTable. When you open the table, the
selected attributes appear as columns in the table
in the same order that they appear in the list. You
can drag and drop or use the up and down buttons
to change the order of the attributes in the table.
The Selected Columns list is located on the righthand side of the Table Setup dialog box. To add
columns to the Selected Columns list, select one
or more attributes in the Available Columns list,
then click the Add button [>] or drag and drop the
highlighted attributes to the Selected Columns list.
10-971
Column Manipulation
Buttons
Lets you select or clear columns to be used in the

table, as well as to arrange the order in which the
columns appear.
The Add and Remove buttons are located in the
center of the Table Setup dialog box.
[ > ] Adds the selected items from the Available Columns list to the Selected Columns list.
[ >> ] Adds all of the items in the Available

Columns list to the Selected Columns list.
[ < ] Removes the selected items from the

Selected Columns list.
[ << ] Removes all items from the Selected

Columns list.
Note:
You can select multiple

attributes in the Available
Columns list by holding down
the Shift key or the Control key
while clicking with the mouse.
Holding down the Shift key
provides group selection
behavior. Holding down the
Control key provides single
element selection behavior.
To rearrange the order of the attributes in the

Selected Columns list, highlight the item to be
moved, then move it up or down in the list by
dragging or clicking the up or down button located
below the Selected Columns list.
Only list fields that
apply to the active
solver
10-972
When this box is checked, the Available Columns

window will only display those fields that are
applicable to the currently active solver. The
active solver can be changed in the Calculation
Options (see Calculation Options Manager).
Element Relabeling Dialog Box

This dialog is where you perform global element relabeling operations for the Label
column of the FlexTable.
The element relabeling tool allows you to perform three types of operations on a set of
element labels: Replace, Renumber, and Append. The active relabel operation is
chosen from the list box in the Relabel Operations section of the Relabel Elements
dialog box. The entry fields for entering the information appropriate for the active
relabel operation appear below the Relabel Operations section. The following list
presents a description of the available element relabel operations.
ReplaceThis operation allows you to replace all instances of a character or

series of characters in the selected element labels with another piece of text. For
instance, if you selected elements with labels CO-1, CO-2, CO-12, and CO-5, you
could replace all the COs with the word Conduit by entering CO in the Find field,
Conduit in the Replace With field, and clicking the Apply button. The resulting
labels are Conduit-1, Conduit-2, Conduit-12, and Conduit-5. You can also use this
operation to delete portions of a label. Suppose you now want to go back to the
original labels. You can enter Conduit in the Find field and leave the Replace With
field blank to reproduce the labels CO-1, CO-2, CO-12, and CO-5. There is also
the option to match the case of the characters when searching for the characters to
replace. This option can be activated by checking the box next to the Match Case
field.
RenumberThis operation allows you to generate a new label, including suffix,

prefix, and ID number for each selected element. For example, if you had the
labels CO-1, CO-4, CO-10, and Conduit-12, you could use this feature to
renumber the elements in increments of five, starting at five, with a minimum
number of two digits for the ID number field. You could specify a prefix CO- and
a suffix -Z1 in the Prefix and Suffix fields, respectively. The prefix and suffix are
appended to the front and back of the automatically generated ID number. The
10-973

value of the new ID for the first element to be relabeled, 5, is entered in the Next
field. The value by which the numeric base of each consecutive element is in
increments, 5, is entered in the Increment field. The minimum number of digits in
the ID number, 2, is entered in the Digits field. If the number of digits in the ID
number is less then this value, zeros are placed in front of it. Click the Apply
button to produce the following labels: CO-05-Z1, CO-10-Z1, CO-15-Z1, and
CO-20-Z1.
AppendThis operation allows you to append a prefix, suffix, or both to the

selected element labels. Suppose that you have selected the labels 5, 10, 15, and
20, and you wish to signify that these elements are actually conduits in Zone 1 of
your system. You can use the append operation to add an appropriate prefix and
suffix, such as CO- and -Z1, by specifying these values in the Prefix and Suffix
fields and clicking the Apply button. Performing this operation yields the labels
CO-5-Z1, CO-10-Z1, CO-15-Z1 and CO-20-Z1. You can append only a prefix or
suffix by leaving the other entry field empty. However, for the operation to be
valid, one of the entry fields must be filled in.
The Preview field displays an example of the new label using the currently defined
settings.
Copying, Exporting, and Printing FlexTable Data

You can output your FlexTable several ways:
Copy FlexTable data via the clipboard
Export FlexTable data as a text file
Create a FlexTable report
To copy FlexTable data via the clipboard:

You can copy your FlexTable data via the clipboard and paste it into another Windows
application, such as a word-processing application as tab-delimited text.
1. Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables manager.
2. In the FlexTables manager, open the FlexTable you want to use.
3. Click Copy. The contents of the FlexTable are copied to the Windows clipboard.
10-974

Caution:
Make sure you paste the data you copied before you copy
anything else to the Windows clipboard. If you copy
something else to the clipboard before you paste your
FlexTable data, your FlexTable data will be lost from the
clipboard.
4. Paste (Ctrl+v) the data into other Windows software, such as your wordprocessing application.
To export FlexTable data as a text file:
You can export the data in a FlexTable as tab- or comma-delimited ASCII text, for use
in other applications, such as Notepad, spreadsheet, or word processing software.
3. Click File > Export data.
4. Select either Tab Delimited or Comma Delimited.
5. When prompted, set the path and name of the .txt file you want to create.
To create a FlexTable report:
Create a FlexTable Report if you want to print a copy of your FlexTable and its values.
Note:
Instead of Print Preview, you can click Print to print the report
without previewing it.
3. Click Report. A print preview of the report displays to show what your report will
look like if printed using your default printer.
Note:
You cannot edit the format of the report.
4. Click Print to open the Print dialog box and print the report to a printer that you
select.
10-975
Reporting
Using Predefined Tables

Element tables are read-only, predefined FlexTables. There is one predefined table for
every element available in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i. You can access the element
tables by clicking Report > Element Tables or from the FlexTable manager. Use
these tables to review data about the elements in your model.
Related Topics
Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables on page 10-957
Copying, Exporting, and Printing FlexTable Data on page 10-974
Reporting
Use reporting to create printable content based on some aspect of your model, such as
element properties or results.
You need to compute your model before you can create reports about results, such as
the movement of water in your network. But, you can create reports about input data
without computing your model, such as conduit diameters. (To compute your model,
after you set up your elements and their properties, click the Compute button.)
You can access reports by:
Clicking the Report menu
Right-clicking any element, then selecting Report
Reporting includes:
Using Standard Reports on page 10-976
Reporting on Element Data on page 10-977
Using Standard Reports

There are several standard reports available. To access the standard reports, click the
Report menu, then select the report you want.
You can use these standard reports:
10-976
Creating a Project Inventory Report on page 10-977
Creating a Scenario Summary Report on page 10-977
Related Topics
Creating a Project Inventory Report

To create a report that provides an overview of your network, click Report > Project
Inventory. The report dialog box opens and displays your report. You cannot format
the report, but you can print it by clicking the Print button.
Related Topics
Creating a Scenario Summary Report

To create a report that summarizes your scenario, click Report > Scenario Summary.
The report dialog box opens and displays your report. You cannot format the report,
but you can print it by clicking the Print button.
Related Topics
Reporting on Element Data

You can create reports for specific elements in your network by computing the
network, right-clicking the element, then selecting Report. You cannot format the
report, but you can print it by clicking the Print button.
Related Topics
10-977
Reporting
Report Options
The Report Options dialog box offers control over how a report is displayed.
10-978
Load factory default

settings to current view
Changes the display settings

used by the current report to
the factory default.
Load global settings to

current view
Changes the display settings

used by the current report to
the previously saved global
settings.
Save current view settings

to global settings
Saves the display settings

used by the current report as
the new global settings.

The header and footer can be fully customized and you can edit text to be displayed in
the cells or select a pre-defined dynamic variable from the cell's menu.
When the Use Single Header Column box is checked, only the Align Center column
will be available (The Align Left and Align Right columns become inactive).
You can also select fonts, text sizes, and customize spacing, as well as change the
default margins in the Default Margins tab.
%(Company) - The name specified in the project properties.
% (DateTime) - The current system date and time.
% (BentleyInfo) - The standard Bentley company information.
% (BentleyName) - The standard Bentley company name information.
% (Pagination) - The report page out of the maximum pages.
% (ProductInfo) - The current product and its build number.
% (ProjDirectory) - The directory path where the project file is stored.
% (ProjEngineer) - The engineer specified in the project properties.
% (ProjFileName) - The full file path of the current project.
% (ProjStoreFileName) - The full file path of the project.
% (ProjTitle) - The name of the project specified in the project properties.
% (ReportTitle) - The name of the report.
% (Image) - Opens up the Select Image file window.
% (ActiveScenarioLabel) - The label of the currently active scenario.
Graphing
Use graphing to visualize some aspect of your model, such as element properties or
results. You need to compute your model before you can create graphs. To compute
your model, after you set up your elements and their properties, click the Compute
button.
Click one of the following links to learn more about using graphs in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i:
Graph Manager on page 10-980
Creating a Graph on page 10-982
Printing a Graph on page 10-982
Working with Graph Data: Viewing and Copying on page 10-983
10-979
Graphing
Graph Dialog Box on page 10-984
Graph Manager
The Graph Manager lets you recall a graph you have created and saved in the current
session or in a previous session of Bentley SewerGEMS V8i. Graphs listed in the
Graph Manager retain any customizations you have applied.
To use the Graph Manager:
1. Compute your model and resolve any errors. (Press F9 or click Analysis >
Compute.)
2. Open the Graph Manager, click View > Graphs.
3. Create your graph. (For more information, see Creating a Graph on page 10982.)
4. After you create a graph, it is available in the Graph Manager. You can select it by
double-clicking it. Also, you can right-click a graph listed in Graph Manager to:
Delete it
Rename the graphs label
Open it, by selecting Properties
Graphs are not saved in Graph Manager after you close Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.
Graph Manager
The Graph Manager contains a toolbar with the following buttons:
10-980
New
Inserts a new graph of the currently selected

elements in your model. If no elements are
selected, you are prompted to select one or
more elements to graph.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted graph.
Rename

graph.
View
Opens the Graph dialog box, allowing you

to view the currently highlighted graph.
Add to Graph
Opens the Select toolbar, allowing you to

add or remove elements to the currently
highlighted graph.
Help
Displays online help for the Graph Manager.
Add to Graph Dialog Box

This dialog appears after you initiate an Add to Graph command and allows you to
choose a previously defined graph to add the element to.
Select the desired graph from the Add to: menu, then click OK. To cancel the
command, click the Cancel button.
Related Topics
10-981
Graphing
Creating a Graph
You can graph computed values, such as flow and velocity. To create a graph:
1. Compute your Bentley SewerGEMS V8i network.
2. If necessary, use Shift+click to select multiple elements.
3. Right-click an element and select Graph. The Graph dialog box opens (see
Graph Dialog Box on page 10-984).
4. If needed, use the Scenarios drop-down list (for more information, see Scenario
Manager on page 9-830) to select check boxes to include different or multiple
scenarios in the graph. Click Refresh after you make any changes, so the graph
displays your changes.
5. If needed, use the Elements drop-down list to select check boxes to include
different or multiple element properties in the graph. Click Refresh after you
make any changes, so the graph displays your changes.
Note:
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i assumes initial flowflow at time 0in

all networks to be 0; thus, graphs of flow begin at 0 for time 0.
6. If needed, click Chart Settings to change the display of the graph. For more
information, see Graph Manager on page 10-980.
Tip:
If you want your graph to display over more time (for example, it
displays a 24-hour time period and you want to display a 72-hour
period), click Analysis > Calculation Options and change
Duration in the Property Editor (for more information, see
Editing Attributes in the Property Editor on page 15-1305).
Related Topics
Printing a Graph
To print a graph, click the Print button to open the print dialog box or click the Print
Preview button to see what your graph looks like before clicking Print.
10-982
Related Topics
Working with Graph Data: Viewing and Copying

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i lets you view the data that your graphs are based on. To
view your data, create a graph, then, after the Graph dialog box opens, click the Data
tab.
You can copy this data to the Windows clipboard for use in other applications, such as
word-processing software. To copy this data:
1. Click in the top-most cell of the left-most column to select the entire table, click a
column heading to select an entire column, or click a row heading to select an
entire row.
2. Press Ctrl+C to copy the selected data to the clipboard.
3. As needed, press Ctrl+V to paste the data as tab-delimited text into other software.
Tip:
To print out the data for a graph, copy and paste it into another
application, such as word-processing software or Notepad, and
print the pasted content.
Related Topics
10-983
Graphing
Graph Dialog Box

The Graph dialog box allows you to view graphs and modify graph settings as desired.
After you create a graph, you view it in the Graph dialog box.
Graph Tab
10-984
Add to Graph Manager
Lets you save the Graph to the graph

manager. When you click this button,
the graph options (i.e., attributes to
graph for a specific scenario) and the
graph settings (i.e., line color, font
size) are saved with the graph. If you
want to view a different set of data
(for example, a different scenario),
you must change the scenario in the
Graph Series Options dialog box.
Simply switching the active scenario
will not change the graph. Graphs
that you add to the Graph manager
are saved when you save your model,
so that you can use the graph after
you close and reopen Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i.
Add to Graph
Opens the Select toolbar, allowing

you to add or remove elements to the
current graph.
Graph Series Options
Lets you control what your graph

displays. For more information, see
Graph Series Options Dialog Box
on page 10-988.
Chart Settings
Opens the Chart Options dialog box,

allowing you to change graph
display settings.
Print
Prints the current view in the graph

display pane.
Print Preview
Opens the Print Preview Window,

displaying the graph exactly as it will
be printed.
Copy
Copies the current view in the graph

display pane to the Windows
Clipboard.
Zoom Extents
Zooms out so that the entire graph is

displayed
Zoom Window
Zooms in on a section of the graph.

When the tool is toggled on, you can
zoom in on any area of the graph by
clicking on the chart to the left of the
area to be zoomed, holding the
mouse button, then dragging the
mouse to the right (or, the opposite
extent of the area to be magnified)
and releasing the mouse button when
the area to be zoomed has been
defined.
To zoom back out, click and hold the
mouse button, drag the mouse in the
opposite direction (right to left), and
release the mouse button.
10-985
Graphing
Time (VCR) Controls
Lets you evaluate plots over time.
If you click Restart, the Time

resets to zero and the vertical
line that marks time resets to the
left edge of the Graph display.
If you click Pause, the vertical

line that moves across the graph
to mark time pauses, as does the
Time field.
If you click Play, a vertical line

moves across the graph and the
Time field increments.
The following controls are also

available:
Graph Display Pane
TimeDisplays the time location of the vertical black bar in

the graph display. This is a readonly field, to set a specific time,
use the slider button.
SliderLets you set a specific

time for the graph. A vertical line
moves in the graph display and
intersects your plots to show the
value of the plot at a specific
time. Use the slider to set a
specific time value.
Displays the graph.
Data Tab
10-986
Data Table
Note:
The Data tab displays the data that

comprise your graphs. If there is
more than one item plotted, the data
for each plot is provided.
You can copy and paste the data from
this tab to the clipboard for use in
other applications, such as Microsoft
Excel.
To select an entire column or row,
click the column or row heading. To
select the entire contents of the Data
tab, click the heading cell in the topleft corner of the tab. Use Ctrl+C and
Ctrl+V to paste your data. The
column and row headings are not
copied.
You can right click on either graph axis and choose to change
the numeric formatting of the axis and/or edit the graph
properties. If you want to change the time axis formatting to a
Time of Day or date/time format, right click the bottom axis and
select Time Properties.
The Data tab is shown below.
10-987
Graphing
Note:
The chart tab of the graph will show all the detail possible, for all
time step detail available, on each plotted result line. For the
data tab of graph the number of rows will correspond to the
'Increment' declared in the 'Time Browser' toolbar window. If you
set the 'Increment' choice to '<All>' the Data tab will show all
possible reporting points (all rows).
Graph Series Options Dialog Box

Click the Graph Series Options button in the Graph dialog box (Graph Dialog Box
on page 10-984) to use the Graph Series Options dialog box to customize your graph.
This dialog box lets you choose which scenarios, elements, and fields you want to plot
(this affects both the Graph and Data tabs). Click to select the check boxes next to
those items you want to plot and clear the check boxes for those items you do not want
to plot. Click Close after you have made your selections and the graph is updated to
display the items you chose.
10-988

For any given element, the most commonly used fields are displayed underneath a
Common folder, colored blue. To graph all of these attributes you can simply check
the Common box, as shown below:
Filter Dialog Box

The Filter dialog box lets you specify your filtering criteria. Each filter criterion is
made up of three items:
AttributeThe attribute to filter.
OperatorThe operator to use when comparing the filter value against the data
in the specific column (operators include: =, >, >=, <, <=, < >).
ValueThe comparison value.
Any number of criteria can be added to a filter. Multiple filter criteria are implicitly
joined with a logical AND statement. When multiple filter criteria are defined, only
rows that meet all of the specified criteria will be displayed. A filter will remain active
for the associated table until the filter is reset.
The status pane at the bottom of the Table window always shows the number of rows
displayed and the total number of rows available (e.g., 10 of 20 elements displayed).
When a filter is active, this message will be highlighted.
10-989
Graphing
Observed Data Dialog Box

Use this feature to display user-supplied time variant data values alongside calculated
results in the graph display dialog. Model competency can sometimes be determined
by a quick side by side visual comparison of calculated results with those observed
and collection in the field.
Get familiar with your data - If you obtained your observed data from an outside
source, you should take the time to get acquainted with it. Be sure to identify units
of time and measurement for the data. Be sure to identify what the data points
represent in the model; this helps in naming your line or bar series as it will appear
in the graph.
Preparing your data - Typically, observed data can be organized as a collection

of points in a table. In this case, the time series data can simply be copied to the
clipboard directly from the source and pasted right into the observed data input
table. Ensure that your collection of data points is complete. That is, every value
must have an associated time value. Oftentimes data points are stored in tab or
comma delimited text files; these two import options are available as well. See the
Sample Observed Data Source topic for an example of the observed data source
file format.
Specifying the characteristics of your data - The following charecteristics must

be defined:
Time from Start - An offset of the start time for an EPS scenario.
Y Dimension - Unit class for the observed data point(s).
Numeric Formatter - Group of units that correspond to the selected value.
Y Unit - A preview of the current displayed unit for the selected format.
Show Series Line - When checked the time series line will be plotted on the
graph.
Plot Zero Values - When checked any (Time, Y) points in the collection will
be plotted in the graph. Otherwise, points where Y is zero will not be plotted
at that corresponding time.
Note:
Go to Tools > Options > Units for a complete list of formats.
Caution:
Observed data can only be saved if the graph is saved.
To create Observed Data
1. Click New
2. Set hours, dimension, and formatter.
10-990
3. Add hours and Y information (or import a .txt or .csv file
4. Click Graph
).
to view the Observed data.
5. Click Close.
Sample Observed Data Source
Below is an example of an Observed Data source for import and graph comparison.
The following table contains a flow meter data collection retreived in the field for a
given pipe. We will bring this observed data into the model for a quick visual inspection against our model's calculated pipe flows.
Table 10-1: Observed Flow Meter Data (Time in Hours)
Time (hrs)
Flow (gpm)
0.00
125
0.60
120
3.00
110
9.00
130
13.75
100
18.20
125
21.85
110
10-991
Graphing
With data tabulated as in the table above, we could simply copy and paste these rows
directly into the table in the Observed Data dialog. However if we had too many
points to manage, natively exporting our data to a comma delimited text file may be a
better import option. Text file import is also a better option when our time values are
not formatted in units of time such as hours, as in the table below.
Table 10-2: Observed Flow Meter Data (24-Hr Clock)
Time (24-hr
clock)
Flow (gpm)
00:00
125
00:36
120
03:00
110
09:00
130
13:45
100
18:12
125
21:51
110
Below is a sample of what a comma-delimited (*.csv) file would look like:

0:00,125
0:36,120
3:00,110
9:00,130
13:45,100
18:12,125
21:51,110
10-992

Note:
Database formats (such as MS Access) are preferable to simple

spreadsheet data sources. The sample described above is
intended only to illustrate the importance of using expected data
formats.
To import the comma delimited data points:

1. Click the Import toolbar button from the Observed Data dialog.
2. Pick the source .csv file.
3. Choose the Time Format that applies, in this case, HH:mm:ss, and click OK.
Chart Options Dialog Box

Use the Chart Options dialog box to format a graph.
Note:
Changes you make to graph settings are not retained for use
with other graphs.
To open Chart Options dialog box:

1. Open your project and click Compute.
2. Select one or more elements, right-click, then select Graph.
3. Click the Chart Settings button.
Click one of the following links to learn more about Chart Options dialog
box:
Chart Options Dialog Box - Chart Tab on page 10-994
Chart Options Dialog Box - Series Tab on page 10-1019
Chart Options Dialog Box - Tools Tab on page 10-1027
Chart Options Dialog Box - Export Tab on page 10-1028
Chart Options Dialog Box - Print Tab on page 10-1030
Border Editor Dialog Box on page 10-1031
Gradient Editor Dialog Box on page 10-1032
Color Editor Dialog Box on page 10-1033
Color Dialog Box on page 10-1033
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box on page 10-1034
Pointer Dialog Box on page 10-1037
Change Series Title Dialog Box on page 10-1038
10-993
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box on page 10-1038
TeeChart Gallery Dialog Box on page 10-1050
Chart Options Dialog Box - Chart Tab

The Chart tab lets you define overall chart display parameters. This tab is subdivided
into second-level sub-tabs:
Series Tab
Panel Tab
Axes Tab
General Tab
Titles Tab
Walls Tab
Paging Tab
Legend Tab
3D Tab
Series Tab
Use the Series tab to display the series that are associated with the current graph. To
show a series, select the check box next to the series name. To hide a series, clear its
check box. The Series tab contains the following controls:
10-994
Up/Down arrows
Lets you select the printer you want to use.
Add
Adds a new series to the current graph. The

TeeChart Gallery opens, see TeeChart Gallery
Dialog Box.
Delete
Lets you remove the currently selected series.
Title
Lets you rename the currently selected series.
Clone
Creates a duplicate of the currently selected series.
Change
Lets you edit the currently selected series. The

TeeChart Gallery opens, see TeeChart Gallery
Dialog Box.
Panel Tab
Use the Panel tab to set how your graph appears in the Graph dialog box. The Panel
tab includes the following sub-tabs:
Borders Tab
Use the Borders tab to set up a border around your graph. The Borders tab contains the
following controls:
Border
The border of the graph. The Border Editor opens,

see Border Editor Dialog Box.
Bevel Outer
Lets you set a raised or lowered bevel effect, or no

bevel effect, for the outside of the chart border.
Color
The color for the bevel effect that you use; inner
and outer bevels can use different color values.
Bevel Inner

bevel effect, for the inside of the chart border.
Size
Lets you set a thickness for the bevel effect that

you use; inner and outer bevels use the same size
value.
Background Tab
Use the Background tab to set a color or image background for your graph. The Background tab contains the following controls:
Color
Lets you set a color for the background of your

graph. The Color Editor opens, see Color Editor
Dialog Box.
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the background of your

graph. The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see Hatch
Brush Editor Dialog Box.
Transparent
Makes the background of the graph transparent.
10-995
Background Image
Lets you set an existing image as the background

of the graph. Click Browse, then select the image
(including .bmp, .tif, .jpg, .png,. and .gif). After
you have set a background image, you can remove
the image from the graph by clicking Clear.
You can control the Style of the background
image:
StretchResizes the background image to fill

the entire background of the graph.
TileRepeats the background image as

many times as needed to fill the entire background of the graph.
CenterPuts the background image in the

horizontal and vertical center of the graph.
NormalPuts the background image in the

top-left corner of the graph.
Gradient Tab
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your graph. The
Gradient tab contains the following subtabs and controls:
Format Tab
Visible
Determines whether a gradient displays or not.

Select this check box to display a gradient you
have set up, clear this check box to hide the
gradient.
Direction
Sets the direction of the gradient. Vertical causes

the gradient to display from top to bottom,
Horizontal displays a gradient from right to left,
and Backward/Forward diagonal display gradients
from the left and right bottom corners to the
opposite corner.
Angle
Lets you customize the direction of the gradient

beyond the Direction selections.
Colors Tab
Start
10-996
The starting color for your gradient. Opens the

Color Editor dialog box.
Middle
Lets you select a middle color for your gradient.

The Color Editor opens. Select the No Middle
Color check box if you want a two-color gradient.
Opens the Color Editor dialog box.
End
Lets you select the final color for your gradient.

Opens the Color Editor dialog box.
Gamma Correction
Lets you control the brightness with which the

background displays to your screen; select or clear
this check box to change the brightness of the
background on-screen. This does not affect printed
output.
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for your gradient, where

100 is completely transparent and 0 is completely
opaque.
Options Tab
Sigma
The location on the chart background of the

gradients end color.
Sigma Focus
Lets you use the options controls. Select this

check box to use the controls in the Options tab.
Sigma Scale
Lets you control how much of the gradients end

color is used by the gradient background.
Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for your graph. The Shadow tab contains the
following controls:
Visible
Lets you display a shadow for your graph. Select

this check box to display the shadow, clear this
check box to turn off the shadow effect.
Size
Set the size of the shadow by increasing or

decreasing the numbers for Horizontal and/or
Vertical Size.
Color
Lets you set a color for the shadow of your graph.

You might set this to gray but can set it to any
other color.
10-997
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the shadow of your

graph. The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see Hatch
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for your shadow, where

opaque.
Axes Tab
Use the Axes tab set how your axes display. It includes the following controls and
subtabs:
Visible
When checked, displays all of your graphs axes;

clear it to hide all of the graphs axes.
Behind
When checked, displays all of your graphs axes

behind the series display; clear it to display the
axes in front of the series display.
Axes
Select the axis you want to edit. The Scales,

Labels, Ticks, Title, Minor, and Position tabs and
their controls pertain only to the selected axis.
Caution:
Do not delete the axes called Custom 0 and Custom 1, as

these are reserved axes that are needed by Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i.
Scales Tab
Use the Scales tab to define your axes scales. The Scales tab contains the following
controls:
10-998
Automatic
Lets you automatically or manually set the

minimum and maximum axis values. Select this
check box if you want TeeChart to automatically
set both minimum and maximum, or clear this
check box if you want to manually set either or
both.
Visible
Displays the axis if selected, hides the axis if

cleared.
Inverted
Reverses the order in which the axis scale

increments. If the minimum value is at the origin,
then selecting Inverted puts the maximum value at
the origin.
Change
Lets you change the increment of the axis.
Increment
Displays the increment value you set for the axis.
Logarithmic
Lets you use a logarithmic scale for the axis.
Log Base
If you select a logarithmic scale, set the base you

want to use in the text box.
Minimum Tab
Auto

minimum axis value.
Change
The axis minimum.
Offset
Lets you adjust the axis scale to change the

location of the minimum or maximum axis value
with respect to the origin.
Maximum Tab
Auto

maximum axis value.
Change
The axis maximum.
Offset
Lets you adjust the axis scale to change the

location of the minimum or maximum axis value
with respect to the origin.
Labels Tab
Use the Labels tab to define your axes text. The Labels tab contains the following
subtabs and controls:
Style Tab
Visible
Lets you show or hide the axis text.
10-999
Multi-line
Lets you split labels or values into more than one

line if the text contains a space. Select this check
box to enable multi-line text.
Round first
Controls whether axis labels are automatically

rounded to the nearest magnitude.
Label on axis
Controls whether Labels just at Axis Minimum

and Maximum positions are shown. This applies
only if the maximum value for the axis matches
the label for extreme value on the chart.
Size
Determines distance between the margin of the

graph and the placement of the labels.
Angle
Sets the angle of the axis labels. In addition to

using the up and down arrows to set the angle in
90 increments, you can type an angle you want to
use.
Min. Separation %
Sets the minimum distance between axis labels.
Style
The label style.
AutoLets TeeChart automatically set the

label style.
ValueSets axis labeling based on minimum

and maximum axis values.
TextUses text for labels. Since Bentley

SewerGEMS V8i uses numeric values, this is
not implemented; dont use it.
NoneTurns off axis labels.
MarkUses SeriesMarks style for labels.

Since Bentley SewerGEMS V8i uses numeric
values, this is not implemented; dont use it.
Format Tab
10-1000
Exponential
Displays the axis label using an exponent, if

appropriate.
Values Format
The numbering format for the axis labels.
Default Alignment
Lets you select and clear the default TeeChart

alignment for the right or left axes only.
Text Tab
Font
The font properties for axis labels. This opens the

Windows Font dialog box.
Color
Lets you select the color for the axis label font.
Double-click the colored square between Font and
Fill to open the Color Editor dialog box (see
Color Editor Dialog Box).
Fill
Lets you set a pattern the axis label font. The

Hatch Brush Editor opens, see Hatch Brush
Editor Dialog Box.
Shadow
Lets you set a shadow for the axis labels.
VisibleLets you display a shadow for the

axis labels. Select this check box to display
the axis label shadow.
SizeThe location of the shadow. Use larger

numbers to offset the shadow by a large
amount.
ColorLets you set a color for the shadow.

other color. The Color Editor opens.
PatternLets you set a pattern for the

shadow. The Hatch Brush Editor opens.
TransparencyLets you set transparency for

your shadow, where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is completely opaque.
Ticks Tab
Use the Ticks tab to define the major ticks and their grid lines. The Ticks tab contains
Axis
The properties of the selected axis. Opens the

Border Editor dialog box.
Grid
The properties of the graphs grid lines that

intersect the selected axis. Opens the Border
Editor dialog box.
10-1001
Ticks
The properties of the tick marks that are next to

the labels on the label-side of the selected axis.
Opens the Border Editor dialog box.
Len
Sets the length of the Ticks or Inner ticks.
Inner
The properties of the tick marks that are next to

the labels on the graph-side of the selected axis.
Opens the Border Editor dialog box.
Centered
Lets you align between the grid labels the graphs

grid lines that intersect the selected axis.
At Labels Only
Sets the axis ticks and axis grid to be drawn at

labels only. Otherwise, they are drawn at all axis
increment positions.
Title Tab
Use the Title tab to set the axis titles. The Title tab contains the following subtabs and
controls:
Style Tab
Title
Lets you type a new axis title.
Angle
Sets the angle of the axis title. In addition to using

the up and down arrows to set the angle in 90
increments, you can type an angle you want to use.
Size
Determines distance between the margin of the

graph and the placement of the labels.
Visible
Check box that lets you display or hide the axis

title.
Text Tab
10-1002
Font
The font properties for axis title. This opens the

Color
Lets you select the color for the axis title font.
Double-click the colored square between Font and
Fill to open the Color Editor dialog box (see
Color Editor Dialog Box).
Fill
Lets you set a pattern the axis title font. The Hatch
Brush Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor
Dialog Box
Shadow
Lets you set a shadow for the axis title.

axis title. Select this check box to display the
axis label shadow.

amount.



Minor Tab
Use the Minor tab to define those graph ticks that are neither major ticks. The Minor
tab contains the following controls and tabs:
Ticks
The properties of the minor tick marks. The

Border Editor opens, see Border Editor Dialog
Box.
Length
Sets the length of the minor tick marks.
Grid
The properties of grid lines that align with the

minor ticks. The Border Editor opens, see Border
Editor Dialog Box.
Count
Sets the number of minor tick marks.
Position Tab
Use the Position tab to set the axes position for your graph. The Position tab contains
Position %
Sets the position of the axis on the graph in pixels

or as a percentage of the graphs dimensions.
10-1003
Start %
Sets the start of the axis as percentage of width

(horizontal axis) and height (vertical axis) of the
graph. The original axis scale is fitted to new axis
height/width.
End %
Sets the end of the axis as percentage of width

(horizontal axis) and height (vertical axis) of the
graph. The original axis scale is fitted to new axis
height/width.
Units
Lets you select pixels or percentage as the unit for

the axis position.
Z%
Sets the Z dimension as a percentage of the

graphs dimensions. This is unused by Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i.
General Tab
Use the General tab to preview a graph before you print it and set up scrolling and
zooming for a graph. It includes the following controls:
Print Preview
Lets you see the current view of the document as it

will be printed and lets you define the print
settings, such as selecting a printer to use. Opens
the Print Preview dialog box.
Margins
Lets you specify margins for your graph. There are

four boxes, each corresponding with the top,
bottom, left, and right margins, into which you
enter a value that you want to use for a margin.
Units
Lets you set pixels or percentage as the units for

your margins. Percentage is a percentage of the
original graph size.
Cursor
Lets you specify what your cursor looks like.

Select a cursor type from the drop-down list, then
click Close to close the TeeChart editor, and the
new cursor style displays when the cursor is over
the graph.
Zoom Tab
10-1004

Use the Zoom tab to set up zooming on, magnifying, and reducing the display of a
graph. The Zoom tab contains the following controls:
Allow
Lets you magnify the graph by clicking and

dragging with the mouse.
Animated
Lets you set a stepped series of zooms.
Steps
The number of steps used for successive zooms if

you selected the Animated check box.
Pen
The thickness of the border for the zoom window

that surrounds the magnified area when you click
and drag. The Border Editor opens, see Border
Editor Dialog Box.
Pattern
The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see Hatch Brush

Editor Dialog Box.
Minimum pixels
The number of pixels that you have to click and

drag before the zoom feature is activated.
Direction
Lets you zoom in the vertical or horizontal planes

only, as well as both planes.
Mouse Button
The mouse button that you use to click and drag

when activating the zoom feature.
Scroll Tab
Use the Scroll tab to set up scrolling and panning across a graph. The Scroll tab
Allow Scroll
Lets you scroll and pan over the graph. Select this
check box to turn on scrolling, clear the check box
to turn it off.
Mouse Button
The mouse button that you click to use the scroll

feature.
Titles Tab
The Titles tab lets you define titles to use for your graph. It includes the following
controls and tabs:
10-1005
Title
The location of the titles you want to use. The

Titles sub tabs apply to the Title that is currently
selected in the Title drop-down list.
Style Tab
Use the Style tab to display and create a selected title. Type the text of the title in the
text box on the Style tab. The Style tab contains the following controls:
Visible
Lets you display the selected title.
Adjust Frame
Lets you wrap the frame behind the selected title

to the size of the title text.
Each title can have a frame behind it (see Format
Tab). By default, this frame is transparent. If you
turn off transparency to see the frame, the frame
can be sized to the width of the graph or set to
snap to the width of the title text.
Select the Adjust Frame check box to set the
width of the frame to the width of the title text;
clear this check box to set the width of the frame
to the width of the graph.
Alignment
The alignment of the selected title.
Position Tab
Use the Position tab to set the placement of the selected title. The Position tab contains
Custom
Lets you set a custom position for the selected

title. Select this check box to set a custom
position.
Left/Top
The location of the selected title relative to the left

and top of the graph. If you select the Custom
check box, use these settings to position the
selected title.
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set and format a background shape behind the selected title. The
Format tab contains the following controls:
10-1006
Color
Lets you set a color for the fill of the shape you
create behind the selected title. The Color Editor
opens, see Color Editor Dialog Box.
Frame
Lets you define the outline of the shape you create

behind the selected title. The Border Editor opens,
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the shape you
create behind the selected title. The Hatch Brush
Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor Dialog
Box.
Round Frame
Lets you round the corners of the rectangular

shape you create behind the selected title. Select
this check box to round the corners of the shape.
Transparent
The fill of the shape you create behind the selected

title as transparent. If the shape is completely
transparent, you cannot see it, so clear this check
box if you cannot see a shape that you expect to
see.
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for the shape, where 100

is completely transparent and 0 is completely
opaque.
Text Tab
Use the Text tab to format the text used in the selected title. The Text tab contains the
following controls:
Font
The font properties for the text. This opens the

Color
Lets you select the color for the text. Double-click

the colored square between Font and Fill to open
the Color Editor dialog box (see Color Editor
Dialog Box).
Fill
Lets you set a pattern for the text. The Hatch

Dialog Box.
10-1007
Shadow
Lets you set a shadow for the text.

text. Select this check box to display the axis
label shadow.

amount.



Gradient Tab
Note:
To use the Gradient tab, clear the Transparent check box in the
Chart > Titles > Format tab.
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your axis title. The
Gradient tab contains the following controls:
Format Tab
Visible
Sets whether a gradient displays or not. Select this

check box to display a gradient you have set up,
clear this check box to hide the gradient.
Direction

opposite corner.
Angle

Colors Tab
Start
10-1008
The starting color for your gradient.
Middle

End
Gamma Correction

output.
Transparency

opaque.
Options Tab
Sigma

Sigma Focus

Sigma Scale

Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for the background for the selected title. The
Shadow tab contains the following controls:
Visible
Lets you display a shadow. Select this check box

to display the shadow, clear this check box to turn
off the shadow effect.
Size

Vertical Size.
Color
Lets you set a color for the shadow. You might set
this to gray but can set it to any other color. The
Color Editor opens, see Color Editor Dialog
Box.
10-1009
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the shadow. The Hatch

Dialog Box.
Transparency

opaque.
Bevels Tab
Note:
To use the Gradient tab, clear the Transparent check box in the
Chart > Titles > Format tab.
Use the Bevels tab to create rounded effects for the background for the selected title.
The Bevels tab contains the following controls:
Bevel Outer

bevel effect, for the background for the selected
title.
Color
Bevel Inner

bevel effect, for the inside of the background for
the selected title.
Size

value.
Walls Tab
Use the Walls tab to set and format the edges of your graph. The Walls tab contains the
following subtabs:
Left/Right/Back/Bottom Tabs
Use the Left, Right, Back, and Bottom tabs to select the walls that you want to edit.
You might have to turn off the axes lines to see the effects (see Axes Tab on
page 10-998) for the back wall and turn on 3D display to see the effects for the left,
right, and bottom walls (see 3D Tab on page 10-1018).
The Left, Right, Back, and Bottom tabs contain the following controls:
10-1010
Color
The Color Editor opens, see Color Editor Dialog

Box.
Border
The Border Editor opens, see Border Editor

Dialog Box.
Pattern

Editor Dialog Box.
Gradient
Lets you set a color gradient for your walls. The

Gradient Editor opens, see Gradient Editor
Dialog Box.
Visible
Lets you display the walls you set up.
Dark 3D
Lets you automatically darken the depth

dimension for visual effect. Select a Size 3D larger
than 0 to enable this check box.
Size 3D
Lets you increase the size of the wall in the

direction perpendicular to its length (the graph
resizes automatically as a result).
Transparent
Lets you set transparency for your background,

where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is
completely opaque.
Paging Tab
Use the Paging tab to display your graph over several pages. The Paging tab contains
Points per Page
Lets you scale the graph to fit on one or many

pages. Set the number of points you want to
display on a single page of the graph, up to a
maximum of 100.
Scale Last Page
Scales the end of the graph to fit the last page.
Current Page Legend
Shows only the current page items when the chart

is divided into multiple pages.
Show Page Number
Lets you display the current page number on the

graph.
10-1011
Arrows
Lets you navigate through a multi-page graph.

Click the single arrows to navigate one page at a
time. Click the double arrows to navigate directly
to the last or first pages of the graph.
Legend Tab
Use the Legend tab to display and format a legend for your graph. The Legend tab
includes the following controls:
Style Tab
Use the Style tab to set up and display a legend for your graph. The Style tab contains
Visible
Lets you show or hide the legend for your graph.
Inverted
Lets you draw legend items in the reverse

direction. Legend strings are displayed starting at
top for Left and Right Alignment and starting at
left for Top and Bottom Legend orientations.
Check boxes
Activates/deactivates check boxes associated with

each series in the Legend. When these boxes are
unchecked in the legend, the associated series are
invisible.
Font Series Color
Sets text in the legend to the same color as the

graph element to which it applies.
Legend Style
Lets you select what appears in the legend.
Text Style
Lets you select how the text in the legend is

aligned and what data it contains.
Vert. Spacing
Controls the space between rows in the legend.
Dividing Lines
Lets you use and define lines that separate

columns in the legend. The Border Editor opens,
Position Tab
Use the Position tab to control the placement of the legend. The Position tab contains
10-1012
Position
Lets you place the legend on the left, top, right, or

bottom of the chart.
Resize Chart
Lets you resize your graph to accommodate the

legend. If you do not select this check box, the
graph and legend might overlap.
Margin
The amount of space between the graph and the

legend.
Position Offset %
Determines the vertical size of the Legend. Lower

values place the Legend higher up in the display
Custom
Lets you use the Left and Top settings to control

the placement of the legend.
Left/Top
Lets you enter a value for custom placement of the

legend.
Symbols Tab
Use the Symbols tab to add to the legend symbols that represent the series in the
graph. The Symbols tab contains the following controls:
Visible
Lets you display the series symbol next to the text

in the legend.
Width
Lets you resize the symbol that displays in the

legend. You must clear Squared to use this
control.
Width Units
The units that are used to size the width of the

symbol.
Default border
Lets you use the default TeeChart format for the

symbol. If you clear this check box, you can set a
custom border using the Border button.
Border
Lets you set a custom border for the symbols. You

must clear Default Border to use this option. The
Box.
Position
Lets you put the symbol to the left or right of its

text.
10-1013
Continuous
Lets you attach or detach legend symbols. If you

select this check box, the color rectangles of the
different items are attached to each other with no
vertical spacing. If you clear this check box, the
legend symbols are drawn as separate rectangles.
Squared
Lets you override the width of the symbol, so you

can make the symbol square shaped.
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set and format the box that contains the legend. The Format tab
Color
Lets you set a color for the fill of the legends box.
The Color Editor opens, see Color Editor Dialog
Box.
Frame
Lets you define the outline of the legends box.

Dialog Box.
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the legends

box. The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see Hatch
Round Frame
Lets you round the corners of the legends box.

Select this check box to round the corners of the
shape.
Transparent
The fill of the legends box as transparent. If the

shape is completely transparent, you cannot see it,
so clear this check box if you cannot see a shape
that you expect to see.
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for the legends box,

where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is
completely opaque.
Text Tab
10-1014

Use the Text tab to format the text used in the legend. The Text tab contains the
following controls:
Font

Color

Dialog Box).
Fill

Dialog Box.
Shadow

label shadow.

amount.



Gradient Tab
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your legend. The
Gradient tab contains the following controls:
Format Tab
Visible

10-1015
Direction

opposite corner.
Angle

Colors Tab
Start
Middle

End
Gamma Correction

output.
Transparency

opaque.
Options Tab
Sigma

Sigma Focus

Sigma Scale

Shadow Tab
10-1016

Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for the legend. The Shadow tab contains the
following controls:
Visible

Size

Vertical Size.
Color
Box.
Pattern

Dialog Box.
Transparency

opaque.
Bevels Tab
Use the Bevels tab to create a rounded effects for the legend. The Bevels tab contains
Bevel Outer

title.
Color
Bevel Inner

the selected title.
Size

value.
10-1017
3D Tab
Use the 3D tab to add a three-dimensional effect to your graph. The 3D tab contains
10-1018
3 Dimensions
Lets you display the chart in three dimensions.

Select this check box to turn on three-dimensional
display.
3D %
Lets you increase or decrease the threedimensional effect. Set a larger percentage for
more three-dimensional effect, or a smaller
percentage for less effect.
Orthogonal
Lets you fix the graph in the two-dimensional

work plane or, if you clear this check box, lets you
use the Rotation and Elevation controls to rotate
the graph freely.
Zoom Text
Lets you magnify and reduce the size of the text in

a graph when using the zoom tool. clear this check
box if you want text, such as labels, to remain the
same size when you use the zoom tool.
Quality
Lets you select how the graph displays as you

manipulate and zoom on it.
Clip Points
Trims the view of a series to the walls of your

graphs boundaries, to enhance the threedimensional effect. Turn this on to trim the graph.
You only see this effect when the graph is in
certain rotated positions.
Zoom
Lets you magnify and reduce the display of the

graph in the Graph dialog box.
Rotation
Lets you rotate the graph. You must clear

Orthogonal to use this control.
Elevation

Horiz. Offset
Lets you adjust the left-right position of the graph.
Vert. Offset
Lets you adjust the up-down position of the graph.
Perspective

Chart Options Dialog Box - Series Tab

Use the Series tab to set up how the series in your graph display. Select the series you
want to edit from the drop-down list at the top of the Series tab.
The Series tab is organized into second-level sub-tabs:
Format Tab
Point Tab
General Tab
Data Source Tab
Marks Tab
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set up how the selected series appears. The Format tab contains
Border
Lets you format the graph of the selected series.

Dialog Box.
Color
Lets you set a color for the graph of the selected

series. The Color Editor opens, see Color Editor
Dialog Box.
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the graph of the selected

series. This might only be visible on a threedimensional graph (see 3D Tab). The Hatch
Dialog Box.
Dark 3D

dimension for visual effect.
Color Each
Assigns a different color to each series indicator.
Clickable
This is unused by Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.
10-1019
Color Each line
Lets you enable or disable the coloring of

connecting lines in a series. This is unused by
Height 3D
Lets you set a thickness for the three-dimensional

effect in three-dimensional graphs.
Stack
Lets you control how multiple series display in the

Graph dialog box.
NoneDraws the series one behind the

other.
OverlapArranges multiple series with the

same origin using the same space on the
graph such that they might overlap several
times.
StackLets you arrange multiple series so

that they are additive.
Stack 100%Lets you review the area under

the graph curves.
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for your series, where

opaque.
Stairs
Lets you display a step effect between points on

your graph.
Inverted
Inverts the direction of the stairs effect
Outline
Displays an outline around the selected series. The

Border Editor opens.
Point Tab
Use the Point tab to set up how the points that make up the selected series appear. The
Point tab contains the following controls:
10-1020
Visible
Lets you display the points used to create your

graph.
3D
Lets you display the points in three dimensions.
Dark 3D

Inflate Margins
Adjusts the margins of the points to display points

that are close to the edge of the graph. If you clear
this option, points near the edge of the graph
might only partly display.
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the points in your series.

Editor Dialog Box. You must clear Default to use
this option.
Default
Lets you select the default format for the points in

your series. This overrides any pattern selection.
Color Each
Assigns a different color to each series indicator.
Style
Lets you select the shape used to represent the

points in the selected series.
Width/Height
Lets you set a size for the points in the selected

series.
Border
The outline of the shapes that represent the points

in the selected series. The Border Editor opens,
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for the points in the

selected series, where 100 is completely
transparent and 0 is completely opaque.
General Tab
Use the General tab to modify basic formatting and relationships with axes for series
in a graph. The General tab contains the following controls:
Show in Legend
Lets you show the series title in the legend. To use

this feature, the legend style has to be Series or
LastValues (see Style Tab).
Cursor
Lets you specify what your cursor looks like.

Select a cursor type from the drop-down list, then
click Close to close the TeeChart editor, and the
new cursor style displays when the cursor is over
the graph.
10-1021
Depth
The depth of the three-dimensional effect (see 3D

Tab).
Auto
Lets you automatically size the three-dimensional

effect. clear and then select this check box to reset
the depth of the three-dimensional effect.
Values
Controls the format of the values displayed when

marks are on and they contain actual numeric
values
Percents
Controls the format of the values displayed when

marks are on and they contain actual numeric
values.
Horizontal Axis
Lets you define which axis belongs to a given

series, since you can have multiple axes in a chart.
Vertical Axis
Lets you define which axis belongs to a given

series, since you can have multiple axes in a chart.
Date Time
Sort
Sorts the points in the series using the labels list.
Data Source Tab

Use this tab to connect a TeeChart series to another chart, table, query, dataset, or
Delphi database dataset.
This The number of random points to generate and overrides the points passed by
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i to the chart control. The Data Source feature can be useful
in letting you set its sources as functions and do calculations between the series
created by Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.
10-1022
Random
Number of sample values
Default
Apply
Marks Tab
Use the Marks tab to display labels for points in the selected series. Series-point labels
are called marks. The Marks tab contains the following tabs and controls:
Style Tab
Use the Style tab to set how the marks display. The Style tab contains the following
controls:
Visible
Lets you display marks.
Clipped
Lets you display marks outside the graph border.

clear this check box to let marks display outside
the graph border, or select it to clip the marks to
the graph border.
Multi-line
Lets you display marks on more than one line.

Select this check box to enable multi-line marks.
All Series Visible
Lets you display marks for all series.
Style
The content of the marks.
Draw every
Sets the interval of the marks that are displayed.

Selecting 2 would display every second mark, and
3 would display every third, etc.
Angle
Lets you rotate the marks for the selected series.
Arrow Tab
Use the Arrow tab to display a leader line on the series graph to indicate where the
mark applies. The Arrow tab contains the following controls:
Border
Lets you set up the leader line. The Border Editor

opens, see Border Editor Dialog Box.
Pointer
Lets you set up the arrow head (if any) used by the
leader line. The Pointer dialog box opens, see
Pointer Dialog Box.
Arrow head
Lets you select the kind of arrow head you want to

add to the leader line.
Size
The size of the arrow head.
10-1023
Length
The size of the leader line and arrow head, or just

the leader line if there is no arrow head.
Distance
The distance between the leader line and the graph

of the selected series.
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set and format the boxes that contains the marks. The Format
tab contains the following controls:
Color
Lets you set a color for the fill of the boxes. The
Box.
Frame
Lets you define the outline of the boxes. The

Box.
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the boxes. The
Editor Dialog Box.
Round Frame
Lets you round the corners of the boxes. Select

Transparent
The fill of the boxes as transparent. If the shape is

completely transparent, you cannot see it, so clear
this check box if you cannot see a shape that you
expect to see.
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for the boxes, where 100

opaque.
Text Tab
Use the Text tab to format the text used in the marks. The Text tab contains the
following controls:
Font
10-1024

Color

Dialog Box).
Fill

Dialog Box.
Shadow

label shadow.

amount.



Gradient Tab
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your marks. The
Gradient tab contains the following subtabs and controls:
Format Tab
Visible

Direction

opposite corner.
10-1025
Angle

Colors Tab
Start
Middle

End
Gamma Correction

output.
Transparency

opaque.
Options Tab
Sigma

Sigma Focus

Sigma Scale

Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for the marks. The Shadow tab contains the
following controls:
10-1026
Visible

Size

Vertical Size.
Color
Box.
Pattern

Dialog Box.
Transparency

opaque.
Bevels Tab
Use the Bevels tab to create a rounded effects for your marks. The Bevels tab contains
Bevel Outer

title.
Color
Bevel Inner

the selected title.
Size

value.
Chart Options Dialog Box - Tools Tab

Use the Tools tab to add special figures in order to highlight particular facts on a given
chart. For more information, see Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box on page 10-1038.
The Tools tab contains the following controls:
Add
Lets you add a tool from the Chart Tools Gallery.

To be usable in the current graph, a tool needs to
be added and set to Active.
10-1027
Delete
Deletes the selected tool from the list of those

available in the current graph.
Active
Activates a selected tool for the current graph. To

be usable in the current graph, a tool needs to be
added and set to Active.
Up/Down arrow
These are unused by Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.
Note:
Each tool has its own parameters, see Chart Tools Gallery Dialog
Box.
Chart Options Dialog Box - Export Tab

Use the Export tab to save your graph for use in another application. The Export tab
Copy
Lets you copy the contents of the graph to the

Windows clipboard, so you can paste it into
another application. You must consider the type of
data you have copied when choosing where to
paste it. For example, if you copy a picture, you
cannot paste it into a text editor, you must paste it
into a photo editor or a word processor that
accepts pictures. Similarly, if you copy data, you
cannot paste it into an image editor, you must
paste it into a text editor or word processor.
Save
Lets you create a new file from the contents of the

graph.
Picture Tab
Use the Picture tab to save your graph as a raster image or to copy the graph as an
image to the clipboard. The Picture tab contains the following controls and subtabs:
Format
10-1028
Lets you select the format of the picture you want

to save. GIF, PNG, and JPEG are supported by the
Worldwide Web, a metafile is a more easily
scalable format. A Bitmap is a Microsoft BMP file
that is widely supported on Windows operating
systems, whereas TIFF pictures are supported on a
variety of Microsoft and non-Microsoft operating
systems.
Options Tab
Colors
Lets you use the default colors used by your graph

or to convert the picture to use grayscale. This
feature is used when you save the picture as a file,
not by the copy option.
Size Tab
Width/Height
Lets you change the width and height of the

picture. These values are measured in pixels and
are used by both the Save and Copy options
Keep aspect ratio
Lets you keep the relationship between the height

and width of the picture the same when you
change the image size. If you clear this check box,
you can distort the picture by setting height or
width sizes that are not proportional to the original
graph.
Note:
Changing the size of a graph using these controls might cause

some loss of quality in the image. Instead, try saving the graph
as a metafile and resizing the metafile after you paste or insert it
into its destination.
Native Tab
The Native tab contains the following controls:
Include Series Data
File Size
Displays the size of an ASCII file containing the

data from the current graph.
Data Tab
The Data tab contains the following controls:
Series
Lets you select the series from which you copy

data.
Format
Lets you select a file type to which you can save

the data. This is not used by the Copy function.
Include
Select the data you want to copy.
10-1029
Text separator
Lets you specify how you want rows of data

separated. This is supported by the Save function
and only by the Copy function if you first saved
using the text separator you have selected, before
you copy.
Chart Options Dialog Box - Print Tab

Use the Print tab to preview and print your graph. The Print tab contains the following
controls and subtabs:
Printer
Lets you select the printer you want to use.
Setup
Lets you configure the printer you want to use. For

example, if the selected printer supports printing
on both sides of a page, you might want to turn on
this feature.
Print
Prints the displayed graph to the selected printer.
Page Tab
Orientation
Lets you set up the horizontal and vertical axes of

the graph. Many graphs print better in Landscape
orientation because of their width:height ratio.
Zoom
Lets you magnify the graph as displayed in the

print preview window. Use the scrollbars to
inspect the graph if it doesnt fit within the
preview window after you zoom. Changing the
zoom does not affect the size of the printed output.
Margins
Lets you set up top, bottom, left, and right margins

that are used when you print.
Margin Units
The units used by the Margins controls: percent or

hundredths of an inch.
Format Tab
Print Background
10-1030
When checked, prints the background of the

graph.
Quality
You do not need to change this setting. The box is

cleared by default.
Proportional
Lets you change the graph from proportional to

non-proportional. When you change this setting,
the preview pane is automatically updated to
reflect the change. This box is checked by default.
Grayscale
Prints the graph in grayscale, converting colors

into shades of gray.
Detail Resolution
Lets you adjust the detail resolution of the

printout. Move the slider to adjust the resolution.
Preview Pane
Displays a small preview of the graph printout.
Border Editor Dialog Box

The Border Editor dialog box lets you define border properties for your graph. The
Border Editor dialog box contains the following controls:
Visible
Displays or hides the border. Select this check box

to display the border.
Color
Lets you select a color for the border. The Color

Editor dialog box opens, see Color Editor Dialog
Box.
Ending
The ending style of the border.
Dash
Lets you select the dash style, if you have a

selection other than Solid set for the border style.
Width
The width of the border.
Style
The style for the border. Solid is an uninterrupted

line.
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for your border, where

opaque.
10-1031
Gradient Editor Dialog Box

Use the Gradient Editor dialog box to set a blend of two or three colors as the fill.
Click OK to apply the selection. The Gradient Editor contains the following controls
and tabs:
Format Tab
Visible

Direction

opposite corner.
Angle

Colors Tab
Start
Middle

End
Gamma Correction

output.
Transparency

opaque.
Options Tab
Sigma
10-1032

Sigma Focus

Sigma Scale

To access the Gradient Editor dialog box, click Chart Settings in the Graph dialog box,
then click the Tools tab. Select the Axis tab and Color Band tool, then click the
Gradient button.
Color Editor Dialog Box

Use the Color Editor dialog box to select a color. Click the basic color you want to use
then click OK to apply the selection. The Color Editor dialog box contains the
following controls:
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for your color, where

opaque.
Custom
Lets you define a custom color to use. The Color

dialog box opens, see Color Dialog Box.
OK/Cancel
Click OK to use the selection. Click Cancel to

close the dialog box without making a selection.
To access the Color Editor dialog box, click a Color button in the Chart Options dialog
box.
Color Dialog Box

Use the Color dialog box to select a basic color or to define a custom color. After you
select the color you want to use, click OK to apply the selection.
Basic colors
Lets you click a color to select it.
Custom colors
Displays colors you have created and selected for

use.
Color matrix
Lets you use the mouse to select a color from a

range of colors displayed.
Color|Solid
Displays the currently defined custom color.
10-1033
Hue/Sat/Lum
Lets you define a color by entering values for hue,

saturation, and luminosity.
Red/Green/Blue
Lets you define a color by entering values of red,

green, and blue colors.
Add to Custom Colors
Adds the current custom color to the Custom

colors area.
To access the Color dialog box, click the Custom button in the Color Editor dialog
box.
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box

Use the Hatch Brush Editor dialog box to set a fill. The Hatch Brush Editor dialog box
contains the following controls and tabs:
Visible
Displays or hides the pattern. Select this check

box to display the selected pattern.
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Solid Tab
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Hatch Tab
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Gradient Tab
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Image Tab
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Solid Tab

Use the Solid tab to set a solid color as the fill. The Solid tab contains the following
controls:
10-1034
Transparency

opaque.
Custom
Lets you define a custom color to use. The Color

dialog box opens, see Color Dialog Box.
OK/Cancel
Click OK to use the selection. Click Cancel to

close the dialog box without making a selection.
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Hatch Tab

Use the Hatch tab to set a pattern as the fill. Click OK to apply the selection. The
Hatch tab contains the following controls:
Hatch Style
Select the pattern you want to use. These display

using the currently selected background and
foreground colors.
Background/
Foreground
Select the color you want to use for the

background and foreground of the pattern. This
opens the Color Editor, see Color Editor Dialog
Box.

opaque.
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Gradient Tab

Use the Gradient tab to set a blend of two or three colors as the fill. Click OK to apply
the selection. The Gradient tab contains the following controls:
Format Tab
Visible

Direction

opposite corner.
Angle

Colors Tab
Start
Middle

10-1035
End
Gamma Correction

output.
Transparency

opaque.
Options Tab
Sigma

Sigma Focus

Sigma Scale

Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Image Tab

Use the Image tab to select an existing graphic file or picture to use as the fill. Click
OK to apply the selection. The Image tab contains the following controls:
10-1036
Browse
Lets you navigate to then select the graphic file

you want to use. When selected, the graphic
displays in the tab.
Style
Lets you define how the graphic is used in the fill.
StretchResizes the image to fill the usable

space.
TileRepeats the image to fill the usable

space.
CenterPuts the image in the horizontal and

vertical center.
NormalPuts the image in the top-left corner
Pointer Dialog Box

Use the Pointer dialog box to set up a pointers for use with leader lines. The Pointer
Visible
Sets whether a pointer displays or not.
3D
Lets you display the pointer in three dimensions.
Dark 3D

Inflate Margins
Adjusts the margins of the pointers to display

pointers that are close to the edge of the graph. If
you clear this option, pointers near the edge of the
graph might only partly display.
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the pointers. The Hatch

Dialog Box. You must clear Default to use this
option.
Default
Lets you select the default format for the pointers.

This overrides any pattern selection.
Color Each
Assigns a different color to each pointer.
Style
Lets you select the shape used to represent the

pointers.
Width/Height
Lets you set a size for the pointers.
Border
The outline of the shapes that represent the

pointers. The Border Editor opens, see Border
Editor Dialog Box.
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for the pointers, where

opaque.
To access the Pointer dialog box, click Chart Settings in the Graph dialog box, then
click Series > Marks > Arrow.
10-1037
Change Series Title Dialog Box

Use the Change Series Title dialog box to change the title of a selected series. Type the
new series title, then click OK to apply the new name or Cancel to close the dialog
box without making a change.
To access the Change Series title dialog box, click Chart Settings in the Graph dialog
box, then click the Series tab, then the Title button.
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box

Use the Chart Tools Gallery dialog box to add tools to your graph. For more information, see Chart Options Dialog Box - Tools Tab on page 10-1027.
Click one of the following links to learn more about the Chart Tools Gallery dialog
box:
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Series Tab
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Axis Tab
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Other Tab
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Series Tab

Use the Series tab to add tools related to the series in your chart. The Series tab
contains the following tools:
Cursor
Displays a draggable cursor line on top of the series. After you have added the Cursor
tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:
10-1038
Series
Lets you select the series to which you want to

apply the tool.
Style
Lets you select a horizontal line, vertical line, or

both as the format of the tool.
Snap
Causes the cursor tool to adhere to the selected

series.
Follow Mouse
Causes the cursor tool to follow your movements

of the mouse.
Pen
Lets you define the cursor tool. The Border Editor

Drag Marks
Lets you drag series marks. To use this tool, you must display the marks for a selected
series, see Marks Tab. After you have added the Drag Marks tool to your graph, you
can modify the following settings:
Series

apply the tool.
Reset Positions
Moves any marks you have dragged back to their

original position.
Drag Point
Lets you drag a series point. After you have added the Drag Point tool to your graph,
you can modify the following settings:
Series

apply the tool.
Style
Lets you constrain the movement of the series

point to one axis or both (no constraint).
Mouse Button
Lets you select the mouse button you click to drag.
Cursor
Lets you select the appearance of the cursor when

using the tool.
Draw Line
Lets you draw a line on the graph by dragging. After you have added the Draw Line
tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:
Series

apply the tool.
Pen
Lets you define the line. The Border Editor opens,

Button
Lets you select the mouse button you click to drag.
10-1039
Enable Draw
Enables the Draw Line tool. Select this check box

to let you draw lines, clear it to prevent you from
drawing lines.
Enable Select
Lets you select and move lines that you have

drawn. Select this check box, then click and drag
the line you want to move. clear this check box if
you want to prevent lines from being moved.
Remove All
Removes all lines you have drawn.
Gantt Drag
Lets you move and resize Gantt bars by dragging. This is unused by Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.
Image
Displays a picture using the selected series axes as boundaries. After you have added
the Image tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:
10-1040
Series

apply the tool.
Browse
Lets you navigate to and select the image you

want to use. Browse is unavailable when there is a
selected image. To select a new image, first clear
the existing one.
Clear
Lets you remove a selected image. Clear is

unavailable when there is no selected image.
Mode
Lets you set up the image you select.
NormalPuts the background image in the

top-left corner of the graph.
StretchResizes the background image to fill

the entire background of the graph. The image
you select conforms to the series to which you
apply it.
CenterPuts the background image in the

horizontal and vertical center of the graph.
TileRepeats the background image as

many times as needed to fill the entire background of the graph.

Mark Tips
Displays data in tooltips when you move the cursor over the graph. After you have
added the Mark Tips tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:
Series

apply the tool
Style
Lets you select what data the tooltips display.
Action
Sets when the tooltips display. Select Click if you

want the tooltips to display when you click, or
select Move if you want the tooltips to display
when you move the mouse.
Delay
Lets you delay how quickly the tooltip displays.
Nearest Point
Lets you define and display an indicator when you are near a point in the selected
series. After you have added the Nearest Point tool to your graph, you can modify the
following settings:
Series

apply the tool.
Fill
The fill for the nearest-point indicator. The Hatch

Dialog Box.
Border
The outline of the nearest-point indicator. The

Box.
Draw Line
Creates a line from the tip of the cursor to the

series point.
Style
Sets the shape for the indicator
Size
Sizes the indicator.
Pie Slices
Outlines or expands slices of pie charts when you move the cursor or click them. This
is unused by Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.
10-1041

Series Animation
Animates series points. After you have added the Series Animation tool to your graph,
you can modify the following settings.
Series

apply the tool.
Steps
Lets you select the steps used in the animation. Set

this control towards 100 for smoother animation
and away from 100 for quicker, but less smooth
animation.
Start at min. value
Lets you start the animation at the series

minimum value. clear this check box to set your
own start value.
Start value
Sets the value at which the animation starts. To use

this control, you must clear Start at min. value.
Execute!
Starts the animation.
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Axis Tab

Use the Axis tab to add tools related to the axes in your chart. The Axis tab contains
the following tools:
Axis Arrows
Lets you add arrows to the axes. The arrows permit you to scroll along the axes. After
you have added the Axis Arrows tool to your graph, you can modify the following
settings:
10-1042
Axis
Select the axis to which you want to add arrows.
Border
The outline of the arrows. The Border Editor

Fill
The fill for the arrows. The Hatch Brush Editor

opens, see Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box.
Length
The length of the arrows.
Inverted Scroll
Lets you change the direction in which the arrows

let you scroll.
Scroll
Changes the magnitude of the scroll. Set a smaller

percentage to reduce the amount of scroll caused
by one click of an axis arrow, or set a larger
percentage to increase the amount of scroll caused
by a click.
Position
Lets you set an axis arrow at the start, end, or both

positions of the axis.
Color Band
Lets you apply a color band to your graph for a range of values you select from an
axis. After you have added the Color Band tool to your graph, you can modify the
following settings:
Axis
Select the axis that you want to use to define the

range for the color band.
Border
The outline of the color band. The Border Editor

Pattern
The fill of the color band. The Hatch Brush Editor

opens, see Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box.
Gradient
Lets you set a gradient for the color band. A

gradient overrides any solid color fill you might
have set. The Gradient Editor opens, see Gradient
Editor Dialog Box.
Color
Lets you set a solid color for the color band. The
Box.
Start Value
Sets where the color band begins. Specify a value

on the selected axis.
End Value
Sets where the color band ends. Specify a vale on

the selected axis.
Transparency

opaque.
10-1043
Draw Behind
Lets you position the color band behind the

graphs. If you clear this check box, the color band
appears in front of your graphs and hides them,
unless you have transparency set.
Color Line
Lets you apply a color line, or plane in three dimensions, at a point you set at a value
on an axis. After you have added the Color Line tool to your graph, you can modify
the following settings:
10-1044
Axis
Select the axis that you want to use to define the

location for the line.
Border
The outline of the color line. The Border Editor

Value
Sets where the color line is. Specify a value on the

selected axis.
Allow Drag
Lets you drag the line or lock the line in place.

Select this check box if you want to permit
dragging. clear this check box if you want the line
to be fixed in one location.
Drag Repaint
Lets you smooth the appearance of the line as you

drag it.
No Limit Drag
Lets you drag the line beyond the axes of the

graph, or constrain the line to boundaries defined
by those axes. Select this check box to permit
unconstrained dragging.
Draw Behind
Lets you position the color line behind the graphs.

If you clear this check box, the color band appears
in front of your graphs. This is more noticeable in
3D graphs.
Draw 3D
Lets you display the line as a 2D image in a 3D

chart. If you have a 3D chart (see 3D Tab), clear
this check box to display the line as a line rather
than a plane.
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Other Tab

Use the Other tab to add tools to your chart, including annotations. The Other tab
contains the following tools:
3D Grid Transpose
Swaps the X and Z coordinates to rotate the series through 90 degrees. This is unused
by Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.
Annotation
Lets you add text to the chart. After you have added the Annotation tool to your graph,
you can modify the following settings:
Options Tab
Text
The text you want for your annotation.
Text alignment
Sets the alignment of the text inside the annotation

box.
Cursor
The style of the cursor when you move it over the

annotation.
Position Tab
Auto
Lets you select a standard annotation position.
Custom
Lets you select a custom position for the

annotation. Select this check box to override the
Auto setting and enable the Left and Top controls.
Left/Top
Lets you set a position from the Left and Top

edges of the graph tab for the annotation.
Callout Tab
Border
Lets you set up the leader line. The Border Editor

Pointer
Lets you set up the arrow head (if any) used by the
leader line. The Pointer dialog box opens, see
Pointer Dialog Box.
Position
Sets the position of the callout.
10-1045
Distance
The distance between the leader line and the graph

of the selected series.
Arrow head
Lets you select the kind of arrow head you want to

add to the leader line.
Size
The size of the arrow head.
Format Tab
Color
Lets you set a color for the fill of the boxes. The
Box.
Frame
Lets you define the outline of the boxes. The

Border Editor opens.
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the boxes. The
Editor Dialog Box.
Round Frame
Lets you round the corners of the boxes. Select

Transparent
The fill of the boxes as transparent. If the shape is

completely transparent, you cannot see it, so clear
this check box if you cannot see a shape that you
expect to see
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for the boxes, where 100

opaque.
Text Tab
10-1046
Font
The font properties for text. This opens the

Color
Lets you select the color for the text font. Doubleclick the colored square between Font and Fill to
open the Color Editor dialog box.
Fill
Lets you set a pattern for the text font. The Hatch
Brush Editor opens.
Shadow

text. Select this check box to display the
shadow.

amount.



Gradient Tab
Format
FormatLets you set up the gradients

properties.
VisibleSets whether a gradient displays or

not. Select this check box to display a gradient
you have set up, clear this check box to hide
the gradient.
DirectionSets the direction of the gradient.

Vertical causes the gradient to display from
top to bottom, Horizontal displays a gradient
from right to left, and Backward/Forward diagonal display gradients from the left and right
bottom corners to the opposite corner.
AngleLets you customize the direction of

the gradient beyond the Direction selections.
10-1047
Colors
Options
The colors used for your gradients. The Start,

Middle, and End selections open the Color Editor,
see Color Editor Dialog Box.
StartThe starting color for your gradient.
MiddleLets you select a middle color for

your gradient. The Color Editor opens. Select
the No Middle Color check box if you want a
two-color gradient.
EndLets you select the final color for your

gradient.
Gamma CorrectionLets you control the

brightness with which the background
displays to your screen; select or clear this
check box to change the brightness of the
background on-screen. This does not affect
printed output.

your gradient, where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is completely opaque.
Lets you control the affect of the start and end

colors on the gradient, the middle color is not
used.
SigmaLets you use the options controls.

Select this check box to use the controls in the
Options tab.
Sigma FocusThe location on the chart

background of the gradients end color.
Sigma ScaleLets you control how much of

the gradients end color is used by the
gradient background.
Shadow Tab
10-1048
Visible

Size

Vertical Size.
Color
Color Editor opens.
Pattern

Brush Editor opens.
Transparency

opaque.
Bevels Tab
Bevel Outer

bevel effect, for the outside of the legend.
Color
Bevel Inner

bevel effect, for the inside of the legend.
Size

value.
Page Number
Lets you add a page number annotation. For more information, see Annotation.
Rotate
Lets you rotate the chart by dragging. After you have added the Rotate tool to your
graph, you can modify the following settings:
Inverted
Reverses the direction of the rotation with respect

to the direction you move the mouse.
Style
Lets you rotate horizontally, vertically, or both.

Rotation is horizontal rotation about a vertical
axis, whereas elevation is vertical rotation about a
horizontal axis.
Outline
The outline. The Border Editor opens, see Border

Editor Dialog Box.
10-1049
TeeChart Gallery Dialog Box

Use the TeeChart Gallery dialog box to change the appearance of a series.
Series
The available series chart designs include:
Standard
Stats
Financial
Extended
3D
Other
View 3DLets you view the chart design in two or three dimensions. Select this
check box to view the charts in 3D, clear it to view them in 2D.
SmoothSmooths the display of the charts. Select this check box to smooth the
display, clear it to turn off smoothing.
Functions
The available function chart designs include:
10-1050
Standard
Financial
Stats
Extended
View 3DLets you view the chart design in two or three dimensions. Select this
check box to view the charts in 3D, clear it to view them in 2D.
SmoothSmooths the display of the charts. Select this check box to smooth the
display, clear it to turn off smoothing.
Customizing a Graph
To customize a graph:
1. If you do not have your own model, open Example-1.stsw, one of the sample
models that is included with Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.
2. Create a graph.
a. Click Compute.
b. Close the Calculation Executive Summary.
c. Save your model.
d. Right click an element, in Example-1csd, shift+click CO-11, CO-3, and CO7 to select them, then right-click one of them and select Graph.
e. Click Save in the Graph dialog box, to add the graph to the Graph manager.
3. Move the legend.
a. Click Chart Settings, to open the Chart Options dialog box.
b. Click the Chart button, Legend tab, and Position subtab.
c. Click the Right button in the Position area to set the legend to the right side of
the graph. You can use other controls on this subtab to move the legend.
4. Change the line colors and weights.

a. Click Chart Settings, to open the Chart Options dialog box.
b. In the Chart, Series tab click the series that you want to edit, to select and
highlight it. You can select more than one series by Ctrl+ or Shift+clicking
them.
10-1051

c. Click Series and select the Format tab.
d. Click the Color button and select a new color, to change the color of the line.
The Color Editor dialog box opens (for more information, see Color Editor
Dialog Box on page 10-1033).
e. Click OK after you click the color you want to use. The series that are
changed are those that you highlighted in the Chart, Series tab.
f.
Click Outline to change the thickness of a line. The Border Editor dialog box
open (for more information, see Border Editor Dialog Box on page 101031).
g. Select Visible.
h. Change the Width.
i.
Make sure the Transparency is set to 0 if you want the line to appear opaque.
j.
Click OK after you define the line width and attributes. The series that are
changed are those that you highlighted in the Chart, Series tab.
5. Change the interval between labels, grid, and ticks.

a. Click Chart > Axes > Scales > Change to change the interval between labels
on the axes.
b. Select the Axis you want to change from the list of axes in the Axes area.
10-1052
c. In the Increment dialog box, type the new value and click OK. This also
changes the distance between major and minor ticks.
d. If needed, change the axis you have selected for changes.

e. Click Chart > Axes > Minor and change the Count to change the interval
between minor ticks on the axes.
10-1053

6. You can show and hide a grid associated with the major ticks.
a. Click Chart > Axes > Ticks and click Grid.
b. Select the axis on which you want to change the grid.
c. In the Border Editor dialog box, select or clear Visible to show or hide the
grid. (For more information, see Border Editor Dialog Box on page 101031.)
7. You can show and hide a grid associated with the minor ticks.
a. Click Chart > Axes > Minor and click Grid.
c. In the Border Editor dialog box, select or clear Visible to show or hide the
grid.
8. You can set the minimum and maximum range for an axis.
a. Click Chart > Axes > and select Scales.
c. Use the Minimum tab to change the minimum value for an axis. Clear the
Auto check box.
d. Click Change.
e. Set the minimum value for the axis.
f.
Use the Maximum tab to change the maximum value for an axis. Clear the
Auto check box.
g. Click Change.
h. Set the maximum value for the axis.
10-1054
9. Change the background colors.

a. Click Chart > Panel > and select Background.
b. Use the Color and Pattern buttons to set a background color and/or pattern
for the graph (see Color Editor Dialog Box on page 10-1033 and Hatch
Brush Editor Dialog Box on page 10-1034).
10. Change the number of decimal places used in axis labels.
a. Click Chart > Axes > Labels and select Format.
b. Select the axis you want to change.
c. Change the number of decimal places by making a selection from the Values
Format drop-down list.
11. Change the fonts used by the axes and titles.
a. Click Chart > Axes > Labels and select Text.
b. Select the axis you want to change.
c. Click Font to open the Font dialog box and change the format of the fonts
used by the axis labels.
d. Click Chart > Axes > Title and select Text.
10-1055

e. Select the axis you want to change.
f.
Click Font to open the Font dialog box and change the format of the fonts
used by the axis title.
12. Add a text box to the graph.

a. Click Tools > Add > Other > Annotation.
b. In the Text pane, type the text you want in your annotation.
13. Plot rainfall and flow on the same graph for a catchment.
a. Open Example-1csd.
b. Click Compute.
c. Right-click CM-5 and select Graph.
d. In the Graph dialog box, click Graph Series Options.
e. In the Graph Series Options dialog box, select Precipitation (Cumulative)

and Total Outflow, then click Close. The Graph dialog box displays two
graphs, one for total outflow and the other for cumulative precipitation.
f.
Click Chart Settings. The Graph Options dialog box opens.
g. Click the Precipitation (Cumulative) series to select it.
10-1056
h. Click Change.
i.
Click the Bar graph type, to select it, then click OK.
j.
Change the axis used by the bar graph.
k. Click Series, then select Precipitation (Cumulative) in the drop-down list.

l.
Click the General subtab, then change Vertical Axis from Left to Custom 0.
m. To disable marks, click the Series > Marks > Style subtab, and clear the
Visible check box.
n. If you want to invert the Y-axis for the Precipitation (Cumulative) series, click
Chart > Axis, select the Custom 0 axis from the Axes list, and select the
Inverted check box.
o. Close the Chart Options dialog box when you finish.
10-1057
Time Series Field Data

The Time Series Field Data dialog allows you to enter your observed field data and
compare it to the calculated results from the model in graph format. The dialog is
accessed by clicking the Components menu and selecting Time Series Field Data.
10-1058

Use this feature to display user-supplied time variant data values alongside calculated
results in the graph display dialog. Model competency can sometimes be determined
by a quick side by side visual comparison of calculated results with those observed
and collection in the field.
Get familiar with your data - If you obtained your observed data from an outside
source, you should take the time to get acquainted with it. Be sure to identify units
of time and measurement for the data. Be sure to identify what the data points
represent in the model; this helps in naming your line or bar series as it will appear
in the graph.
Preparing your data - Typically, observed data can be organized as a collection

of points in a table. In this case, the time series data can simply be copied to the
clipboard directly from the source and pasted right into the observed data input
table. Ensure that your collection of data points is complete. That is, every value
must have an associated time value. Oftentimes data points are stored in tab or
comma delimited text files; these two import options are available as well.
Specifying the characteristics of your data - To add time series field data, select
the element for which the data applies and click the New button. Select the associated attribute for the data and click OK. You can change the label of the data set
by highlighting it and clicking the Rename button. This label will appear in the
Graph Series Options dialog when you create a graph. The following information
must also be defined:
Start Date Time - Specify the date and time the field data was collected. This
data will not affect the graph, but is valuable to you as a reference.
Element - Choose the element that represents the field data measurement
location. Click the ellipsis button to select the element from the drawing.
10-1059
Print Preview Window
Time From Start - Specify an offset of the start time and date for an EPS
scenario.
Attribute Value - Enter the value for the specified attribute at the specified
Time from Start.
You can perform a quick graphical check on the data import by clicking the Graph
button at the top of the data table.
If the number of observations is large, it is best to use the Copy/Paste commands.
Copy the data from the original source to the clipboard, then go to the top of the Time
from Start or Property (e.g. Flow) column and hit CTRL-V to paste the values into the
appropriate column.
The Notes tab contains a text field that allows you to enter descriptive notes that will
be associated with the time series field data.
The data is saved with the model file. If you modify the source data file, the changes
will not appear until time series data is imported again.
To add the time series field data to a graph, first create the graph of the property from
an EPS model run (e.g. right click on element and pick Graph). In the Graph options
dialog, select Time Series Field Data and then the name of the time series (in the Field
pane (right pane). The field data will appear in the graph as points (by default) while
the model results will appear as a continuous line. This can be changed using the Chart
Settings button at the top of the graph (third from left).
Select Associated Modeling Attribute Dialog Box

This dialog appears when you create a new field data set in the Time Series Field Data
dialog. Choose the attribute represented in the time series data source. The available
attributes will vary depending on the element type chosen.
Print Preview Window

The Print Preview window can be used to print documents from Bentley SewerGEMS
V8i, such as reports and graphs. This window lets you see the current view of the
document as it will be printed and lets you define the print settings, such as selecting a
printer to use.
The following controls are available in the Print Preview window:
10-1060
Contents
Displays a table of contents for the document, if

one is created.
Print
Opens the Print dialog box and lets you print the
document as it appears in the preview pane. You
can change printers in the Print dialog box, if you
want.
Copy
Copies the document to the Windows clipboard,

so you can paste it into other applications.
Find
Lets you search for words in the document. To

find a word, click Find, in the Find dialog box,
type the word you want to find, then click Find
Next. Words that are found are highlighted in the
print preview; click Find Next to continue
searching the document.
Single/Multiple Page
View
Displays the document as a single page or multiple

pages in the preview pane.
Zoom In/Out
Enlarges or reduces the display of the document in

the print preview.
Note:
Changing the zoom only affects

how the document displays onscreen, it does not affect how
the document prints.
Zoom Combo
Lets you select or type the amount of zoom used to

display the document, where 100% is full size.
Previous Page
Displays to the previous page in the document.
Next Page
Displays the next page in the document.
Page
Displays the current page number and the total

pages in the current chart. You can type the page
number you want to display, and press Enter to
display it.
10-1061
Contours
Backward/Forward
Displays the page that was previously displayed.

Backward and Forward are based on your
navigation in the document and not on the page
order of the document. For example, if you
navigated from page 2 directly to page 6, clicking
Backward would display page 2 again; if you
then clicked Forward, page 6 would display
again.
Contours
Using SewerGEMS V8i you can visually display calculated results for many attributes
using contour plots.
The Contours dialog box is where all of the contour definitions associated with a
project are stored. Choose View > Contours to open the Contours dialog box.
The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the contours currently contained
within the project, along with a toolbar.
10-1062
New
Opens the Contour Definition dialog box,

allowing you to create a new contour.
Delete
Deletes the currently selected contour.
Rename
Renames the currently selected contour.
Edit
Opens the Contour Definition dialog box,

where you can modify the settings of the
currently selected contour.
Export

Export to Shapefile - Exports the

contour to a shapefile, opening the
Export to File Manager to select the
shapefile.
Export to DXF - Exports the contour as

a .dxf drawing.
Export to Native Format - Opens the

Shapefile Properties dialog box,
allowing you to add it to the Background
Layers Manager.
View
Contour
Browser
Opens the Contour Browser dialog,

allowing you to display detailed contour
results for points in the drawing view.
Refresh
Regenerates the contour.
Shift Up
Moves the currently selected contour up in

the list pane.
Shift
Down
Moves the currently selected contour down

in the list pane.
Help
Displays online help for the Contours.
Contour Definition
The Contour Definition dialog box contains the information required to generate
contours for a calculated network.
Contour
Field
Select the attribute to apply the contour.
Selection Set
Apply an attribute to a previously defined

selection set or to one of the following predefined
options:
All Elements - Calculates the contour based

on all elements in the model, including spot
elevations.
All Elements Without Spots - Calculates the

contour based on all elements in the model,
except for spot elevations.
Minimum
Lowest value to be included in the contour map. It

may be desirable to use a minimum that is above
the absolute minimum value in the system to avoid
creating excessive lines near a pump or other highdifferential portions of the system.
Maximum
Highest value for which contours will be

generated.
10-1063
Contours
Increment
Step by which the contours increase. The contours

created will be evenly divisible by the increment
and are not directly related to the minimum and
maximum values. For example, a contour set with
10 minimum, 20 maximum, and an increment of 3
would result in the following set: [ 12, 15, 18 ] not
[ 10, 13, 16, 19 ].
Index Increment
Value for which contours will be highlighted and

labeled. The index increment should be an even
multiple of the standard increment.
Smooth Contours
The Contour Smoothing option displays the results

of a contour map specification as smooth, curved
contours.
Line Weight
The thickness of contour lines in the drawing view.
Label Height
Multiplier
The thickness of contour lines in the drawing view.
Color by Range
Contours are colored based on attribute ranges.

Use the Initialize button to create five evenly
spaced ranges and associated colors.
InitializeThis button, located to the right of the
Contour section, will initialize the Minimum,
Maximum, Increment, and Index Increment values
based on the actual values observed for the
elements in the selection set.
Tip:
Initialization can be
accomplished by clicking the
Initialize button to automatically
generate values for the
minimum, maximum,
increment, and index increment
to create an evenly spaced
contour set.
RampAutomatically generate a gradient range

between two colors that you specify. Pick the color
for the first and last values in the list and the
program will select colors for the other values.
10-1064
Color by Index
The standard contours and index contours have

separately controlled colors that you can make the
contours more apparent.
OK
When you click OK your settings will be saved but

not applied (the drawing view won't refresh).
Clicking OK will close the dialog.
Initialize
This button will initialize the Minimum,

Maximum, Increment, and Index Increment values
based on the actual values observed for the
elements in the selection set.
Apply
When you click Apply your settings will be

applied (the drawing view will refresh). Clicking
Apply will not close the dialog.
Cancel
Closes the dialog without saving or applying any

changes.
Contour Plot
The Contour Plot window displays the results of a contour map specification as accurate, straight-line contours.
View the changes in the mapped attribute over time by using the animation feature.
Choose Analysis > Time Browser and click the Play button to automatically advance
through the time step increments selected in the Increment bar.
The plot can be printed or exported as a .DXF file. Choose File > Export > DXF to
export the plot.
Tip:
Although the straight-line contours generated by this program

are accurate, smooth contours are often more desirable for
presentation purposes. You can smooth the contours by clicking
Options and selecting Smooth Contours.
Note:
Contour line index labels can be manually repositioned in this

view before sending the plot to the printer. The Contour Plot
Status pane displays the Z coordinate at the mouse cursor.
Contour Browser Dialog Box

The Contour Browser dialog box displays the X and Y coordinates and the calculated
value for the contour attribute at the location of the mouse cursor in the drawing view.
10-1065
Contours
Using Aerial View

The Aerial View is a small navigation window that provides a graphical overview of
your entire drawing. You can toggle the Aerial View window on or off by selecting
View > Aerial View to open the Aerial View window.
A Navigation Rectangle is displayed in the Aerial View window. This Navigation
Rectangle provides a you-are-here indicator showing you current zoom location
respective of the overall drawing. As you pan and zoom around the drawing, the Navigation Rectangle will automatically update to reflect your current location.
You can also use the Aerial View window to navigate around your drawing. To pan,
click the Navigation Rectangle to drag it to a new location. To zoom, click anywhere
in the window to specify the first corner of the Navigation Rectangle, and click again
to specify the second corner.
In AutoCAD mode, see the AutoCAD online help for a detailed explanation.
In Stand-Alone mode, with Aerial View window enabled (by selecting the View >
Aerial View), click and drag to draw a rectangular view box in the aerial view. The
area inside this view box is displayed in the main drawing window. Alternately, any
zooming or panning action performed directly in the main window updates the size
and location of the view box in the Aerial View window.
The Aerial View window contains the following buttons:
Zoom ExtentsDisplay the entire drawing in the Aerial View window.
Zoom InDecrease the area displayed in the Aerial View window.
Zoom OutIncrease the area displayed in the Aerial View window.
To resize the view box directly from the Aerial View window, click to define the new
rectangular view box. To change the location of the view box, hover the mouse cursor
over the current view rectangle and click to drag the view box frame to a new location.
10-1066
Chapter
11
Working in ArcGIS
Mode
Click one of the following links to learn how to use Bentley SewerGEMS V8i in
ArcGIS mode:
GIS Basics on page 11-1067
Using ArcCatalog with a Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Database on page 11-1071
The Bentley SewerGEMS V8i ArcMap Client on page 11-1072
Using LoadBuilder to Assign Loading Data on page 11-1081
Generating Thiessen Polygons on page 11-1093
ModelBuilder on page 11-1099
Using GeoTables on page 11-1099
GIS Basics
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i provides three environments in which to work: Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i Modeler Mode, AutoCAD Integrated Mode, and ArcMap Integrated
Mode. Each mode provides access to differing functionalitycertain capabilities that
are available within Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Modeler mode may not be available
when working in ArcMap Integrated mode, and vice-versa. In addition, you can use
ArcCatalog to perform actions on any Bentley SewerGEMS V8i database. Some of
the advantages of working in GIS mode include:
Full functionality from within the GIS itself, without the need for data import,
export, or transformation
The ability to view and edit multiple scenarios in the same geodatabase
Minimizes data replication
GIS custom querying capabilities
Lets you build models from scratch using practically any existing data source
Utilize the powerful reporting and presentation capabilities of GIS
11-1067
GIS Basics
A firm grasp of GIS basics will give you a clearer understanding of how Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i interacts with GIS software. Click one the following links to learn
more:
GIS Terms and Definitions
ArcGIS Integration
ArcGIS Applications
GIS Terms and Definitions

ArcObjects:
ArcObjects is the framework upon which ArcGIS has

been built. It is a collection of software components
based on the COM protocol, which allows for the
customization and extension of the core software
functionality.
Coverage:
A collection of data that has a common theme, and is

considered a single unit.
Feature Class:
1. A classification describing the format of

geographic features and supporting data in a
coverage. Coverage feature classes for representing
geographic features include point, arc, node, routesystem, route, section, polygon and region. One or
more coverage features are used to model geographic
features; for example, arcs and nodes can be used to
model linear features such as street centerlines. The
tic, annotation, link, and boundary feature classes
provide supporting data for coverage data
management and viewing.
2. The conceptual representation of a geographic
feature. When referring to geographic features,
feature classes include point, line, area, and surface.
11-1068
Feature Dataset:
A feature dataset is a collection of feature classes that

share the same spatial reference.
GEMS Datastore:
The relational database that Bentley SewerGEMS

V8i uses to store model data. Each Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i project uses two main files for data
storage, the datastore (.MDB) and the Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i Modeler-specific data (.stsw).
Although the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i datastore is
an .mdb file, cannot be a geodatabase.
Working in ArcGIS Mode

Geocode:
The process of identifying the coordinates of a

location given its address. For example, an address
can be matched against a TIGER street network to
determine the location of a home. Also referred to as
address geocoding.
Geodatabase:
Short for geographic database, a geodatabase stores

spatial and descriptive data in an efficient manner.
Geodatabases are the standard file format for ArcGIS
v8 and later.
Layer:
Layers contain spatial data according to similar

subject matter. Conceptually, layers in a database or
map library environment are exactly like coverages.
Layers are the standard GIS data format for ArcView
3.x and earlier.
Metadata:
Additional information (aside from tabular and

spatial data) that makes the data useful. Includes
characteristics and information that are required to
use the data but are not contained within the data
itself.
Relate:
A temporary connection between table records using

a common item shared by both tables. Each record in
one table is connected to those records in the other
table that share the same value for the common item.
Relational Database:
A database in which the data is structured in such a

way as to associate tables according to attributes that
are shared by the tables.
Relational Join:
The process of merging two attribute tables using a

common item.
Shapefile:
A file format that stores spatial and attribute data for

the spatial features within the dataset. A shapefile
consists of a main file, an index file, and a dBASE
table. Shapefiles were the standard file storage
format for ArcView 3.x and earlier.
Spatial Reference:
The spatial reference for a feature class describes its

coordinate system (for example, geographic, UTM,
and State Plane), its spatial domain, and its precision.
The spatial domain is best described as the allowable
coordinate range for X and Y coordinates, m(measure) values, and z-values. The precision
describes the number of system units per one unit of
measure. A spatial reference with a precision of 1
will store integer values, while a precision of 1000
will store three decimal places.
11-1069
GIS Basics
Related Topics
ArcGIS Integration on page 11-1070
ArcGIS Applications on page 11-1071
ArcGIS Integration
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i features full integration with Esris ArcGIS software,
including ArcView, ArcEdit, and ArcInfo. The following is a description of the functionality available with each of these packages:
ArcViewArcView provides the following capabilities:
Data Access
Mapping
Customization
Spatial Query
Simple Feature Editing
ArcView can edit shapefiles and personal geodatabases that contain simple
features such as points, lines, polygons, and static annotation. Rules and relationships can not be edited with ArcView.
ArcEditArcEdit provides all of the capabilities available with ArcView in addition to the following:
Coverage and geodatabase editing
ArcEdit can edit shapefiles, coverages, personal geodatabases, and multi-user

geodatabases.
ArcInfoArcInfo provides all of the capabilities available with ArcEdit in addition to the following:
Advanced geoprocessing
Data conversion
ArcInfo Workstation
ArcInfo can edit shapefiles, coverages, personal geodatabases, and multi-user

geodatabases.
11-1070
ArcGIS Integration with Bentley SewerGEMS V8i

When you install Bentley SewerGEMS V8i after you install ArcGIS, integration
between the two is automatically configured when you install Bentley SewerGEMS
V8i.
If you install ArcGIS after you install Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, you must manually
integrate the two by selecting Run > All Programs > Haestad Methods >Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i > Integrate Bentley SewerGEMS V8i with AutoCAD-ArcGIS. The
integration utility runs automatically. You can then run Bentley SewerGEMS V8i in
ArcGIS mode.
Related Topics
GIS Terms and Definitions on page 11-1068
ArcGIS Applications on page 11-1071
ArcGIS Applications
ArcView, ArcEdit, and ArcInfo share a common set of applications, each suited to a
different aspect of GIS data management and map presentation. These applications
include ArcCatalog and ArcMap.
ArcCatalogArcCatalog is used to manage spatial data, database design,

and to view and record metadata.
ArcMapArcMap is used for mapping, editing, and map analysis. ArcMap

can also be used to view, edit, and calculate your Bentley SewerGEMS V8i
model.
Related Topics
GIS Terms and Definitions on page 11-1068
ArcGIS Integration on page 11-1070
Using ArcCatalog with a Bentley SewerGEMS V8i

Database
You can use ArcCatalog to manage spatial data, database design, and to view and
record metadata associated with your Bentley SewerGEMS V8i databases.
11-1071
The Bentley SewerGEMS V8i ArcMap Client

For more information, see the following topic:
ArcCatalog Geodatabase Components on page 11-1072
Related Topics
The Bentley SewerGEMS V8i ArcMap Client on page 11-1072
ArcCatalog Geodatabase Components

Many of the components that can make up a geodatabase can be directly correlated to
familiar Bentley SewerGEMS V8i/Bentley SewerGEMS V8i conventions. The
following diagram illustrates some of these comparisons.

The Bentley SewerGEMS V8i ArcMap client refers to the environment in which
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i is run. As the ArcMap client, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i
runs within Esris ArcMap interface, allowing the full functionality of both programs
to be utilized simultaneously.
Related Topics
11-1072
Getting Started with the ArcMap Client on page 11-1073
Getting Started with the ArcMap Client

An ArcMap Bentley SewerGEMS V8i project consists of:
A Bentley SewerGEMS V8i .mdb filethis file contains all modeling data, and
includes everything needed to perform a calculation.
A Bentley SewerGEMS V8i .stsw filethis file contains data such as annotation
and color-coding definitions.
A geodatabase associationa project must be linked to a new or existing geodatabase.

Note:
You must be in an edit session (Click the ArcMap Editor button

and select the Start Editing command) to access the various
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i editors (dialogs accessed with an
ellipsis (...) button) through the Property Editor, Alternatives
Editor, or FlexTables, even if you simply wish to view input data
and do not intend to make any changes.
There are a number of options for creating a model in the ArcMap client:
Create a model from scratchYou can create a model in ArcMap. Youll first
need to create a new project and attach it to a new or existing geodatabase. See
Managing Projects In ArcMap on page 11-1079 and Attach Geodatabase
Dialog on page 11-1080 for further details. You can then lay out your network
using the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i toolbar. See Laying out a Model in the
ArcMap Client on page 11-1081.
Open a previously created Bentley SewerGEMS V8i projectYou can open a

previously created Bentley SewerGEMS V8i model. If the model was created in
the Stand Alone version, you must attach a new or existing geodatabase to the
project. See Managing Projects In ArcMap on page 11-1079 and Attach
Geodatabase Dialog on page 11-1080 for further details.
Import a model that was created in another modeling applicationYou can

import a model that was created in SewerCAD or EPA SWMM. See Importing
Data From Other Models on page 4-192 for further details.
11-1073

Warning!
You cannot use a Bentley SewerGEMS V8i .mdb file as a

geodatabase. Make sure that you do not attempt to use the
same file name for both the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i
database (stsw.mdb) and the geodatabase .mdb.
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Toolbar

The SewerGEMS V8i toolbar offers the following functionality:
ProjectThe Project menu contains the following commands:
Add New ProjectCreates a new Bentley SewerGEMS V8i project. When

you select this command, a Save As dialog box appears, allowing you to
define a name and directory location for the new project.
Add Existing ProjectOpens an existing project. When you select this

command, an Open dialog box appears, allowing you to browse to the project
to be opened.
ImportOpens a submenu containing the following commands:
SWMM v5Opens a Windows Browse dialog box, allowing you to

choose the SWMM v5 file to import.
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i DatabaseLets you import a Bentley SewerGEMS V8i project database file.
ExportOpens a submenu containing the following command:

-
11-1074
SWMM v5Lets you export the current project to SWMM format.
Project PropertiesOpens the Project Properties dialog.
EditThe Edit menu contains the following commands:
Select AllSelects all of the elements in the network.
Select By ElementOpens a submenu listing all available element types.

Select one of the element types from the submenu to select all elements of that
type in the model.
Clear SelectionDeselects the currently selected element(s).
Find ElementLets you find a specific element by entering the elements

label.
AnalysisThe Analysis menu contains the following commands:
LoadBuilderOpens the LoadBuilder Manager dialog.
Storm DataOpens the Storm Data dialog box, which lets you create, edit,
and delete storm data. These storms are available for you to select for a catchment.
Global Storm DataOpens the Global Storm Data Settings dialog box,
which lets you define project-wide global storm data data.
Pipe CatalogOpens the Catalog Pipe dialog box, which lets you create,
edit, and view catalog pipes. Catalog pipes are an efficient way to reuse
common physical pipe definitions.
Pump DefinitionsOpens the Pump Definitions dialog box, which lets you
view, edit, and create Pump Definitions.
SWMM ExtensionsOpens a submenu containing the following SWMMspecific commands:

-
ClimatologyOpens the Climatology dialog box, allowing you to view

and edit evaporation data for use in SWMM calculations.
Snow PackOpens the Snow Pack dialog box, allowing you to view and
edit snow pack data for use in SWMM calculations.
AquifersOpens the Aquifers dialog box, allowing you to view and edit
aquifer data for use in SWMM calculations.
Control SetsOpens the Control Sets dialog box, allowing you to view,
edit, and create control sets for use in SWMM calculations.
PollutantsOpens the Pollutants dialog box, allowing you to view and

edit pollutant data for use in SWMM calculations.
Land UsesOpens the Land Use dialog box, allowing you to view and
edit land use data for use in SWMM calculations.
Unit Sanitary LoadsOpens the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads dialog
box, which lets you create, edit, and delete unit sanitary loads.
PatternsOpens the Pattern Manager where you can create and edit diurnal
loading patterns for use with extended period simulations.
Pattern SetupsOpens the Pattern Setup Manager where you can associate
diurnal patterns with the appropriate unit sanitary loads for a given scenario.
ValidateRuns a diagnostic check on the network data to alert you to

possible problems that may be encountered during calculation. This is the
manual validation command, and it checks for input data errors. It differs in
this respect from the automatic validation that SewerGEMS V8i runs when
the compute command is initiated, which only checks for network connectivity errors.
Compute HydrologyLets you perform the hydrologic calculations for the

current scenario.
ComputeCalculates the network. Before calculating, an automatic validation routine is triggered, which checks the model for network connectivity
errors. Note that this automatic validation does not check for input data errors;
to check for these types of errors, you must manually validate the model using
the Validate command.
11-1075
11-1076
Always Compute HydrologyLets you turn hydrology calculations on and

off whenever the model is calculated. Turning hydrology computation off
improves performance and is recommended when the hydrology input will
not change.
ViewThe View menu contains the following commands:
Project ManagerOpens the Project Manager dialog. (See Managing

Projects In ArcMap on page 11-1079)
ScenariosOpens the Scenario Manager, which lets you create, view, and
manage project scenarios.
AlternativesOpens the Alternatives Manager, which lets you create, view,

and manage alternatives.
Calculation OptionsOpens the Calculation Options Manager, which lets

you create, view, and manage calculation settings for the project.
User NotificationsOpens the User Notifications Manager, allowing you to

view warnings and errors uncovered by the validation process.
Selection SetsOpens the Selection Sets Manager, which lets you create,
view, and manage selection sets associated with the project.
Network NavigatorOpens the Network Navigator manager, which lets you

quickly navigate to and review any group of elements.
PropertiesTurns the Properties Editor display on or off.
FlextablesOpens the FlexTables Manager, which lets you create, view, and
manage the tabular reports for the project.
GraphsOpens the Graph Manager, which lets you create, view, and
manage graphs for the project.
ProfilesOpens the Profile Manager, which lets you create, view, and
manage the profiles for the project.
Time BrowserOpens the Scenario Animation manager, which lets you

manipulate the currently displayed time step and to animate the drawing pane.
Auto-RefreshTurns automatic updates to the main window view on or off

whenever changes are made to the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i datastore. When
selected, a check mark appears next to this menu command, indicating that
automatic updates are turned on.
Refresh DrawingUpdates the main window view according to the latest

information contained in the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i datastore.
Apply SewerGEMS V8i RendererAllows you to toggle the Bentley

SewerGEMS V8i renderer on/off. When the renderer is On, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i color coding settings are applied and inactive elements are
displayed in the color specified in the Inactive Topology Color field of the
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Global Options tab (to access Options, click the
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i menu and select the Tools...Options command.)
Show Flow ArrowsAllows you to toggle on/off flow arrow visibility.
ToolsThe Tools menu contains the following commands:
ModelBuilderOpens the ModelBuilder Connections Manager. (See

ModelBuilder Connections Manager on page 5-235)
Thiessen PolygonOpens the Thiessen Polygon Input dialog. (See Generating Thiessen Polygons on page 11-1093)
Engineering LibrariesOpens the Engineering Libraries Manager.
Database UtilitiesOpens a submenu containing the following commands:

-
Note:
Compact DatabaseWhen you delete data from a Bentley SewerGEMS

V8i project, such as elements or alternatives, the database store that
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i uses can become fragmented, causing data
storage to be inefficient. This can cause unnecessarily large data files,
which impact performance substantially. Compacting the database eliminates the empty data records, thereby defragmenting the datastore and
improving the performance of the file.
Every tenth time a file is opened, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i will
automatically prompt you to compact the database. Click Yes to
compact the database, or no to close the prompt dialog box
without compacting. Since compacting the database can take
time, especially for larger models, you way want to postpone the
compact procedure until a later time.
Synchronize DrawingSynchronizes the current model with the project

database.
OptionsOpens the Options dialog box, which lets you change global
settings such as display pane settings, units, display precision and format
used, and element labeling.
ReportThe Report menu contains the following commands:
Element TablesOpens a submenu containing a command for each of the

element types, each of which opens a tabular report containing all of the input
data and results for every instance of the selected element in the model.
11-1077
11-1078
Layer SymbologyOpens the Color Coding Properties dialog. Bentley

SewerGEMS V8i color coding settings are only applied when the Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i Renderer is toggled On (to turn on the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i renderer, click the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i menu and select the
View...Apply Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Renderer command).
Scenario SummaryOpens the Scenario Summary Report.
Calculation Executive SummaryOpens the calculation executive

summary report, which reports a summary of the calculations performed
on your model.
Calculation Detailed SummaryOpens the calculation detailed summary

report, which reports the details of the calculations performed on your
model.
Project InventoryOpens the Project Inventory Report, which contains the

number of each of the various element types that are in the network.
HelpThe Help menu contains the following commands:
SewerGEMS HelpOpens the online help Table of Contents.
Quick Start LessonsOpens the online help to the Quick Start Lessons
Overview topic.
Welcome DialogOpens the Welcome dialog box.
Check for UpdatesOpens your Web browser to the our Web site, allowing
you to check for Bentley SewerGEMS V8i updates.
Bentley Institute TrainingOpens your browser to the Bentley Institute

Training web site.
Bentley Professional ServicesOpens your browser to the Bentley Professional Services web site.
Online SupportOpens your browser to SELECTservices area of the

Bentley web site.
Discussion GroupsOpens your browser to Bentley's Haestad Discussion

Groups.
Bentley.comOpens the home page on the Bentley web site.
About SewerGEMSOpens the About Bentley SewerGEMS V8i dialog

box, which displays copyright information about the product, registration
information, and the current version number of this release.
Managing Projects In ArcMap

The Bentley SewerGEMS V8i ArcMap client utilizes a Project Manager to allow you
to disconnect and reconnect a model from the underlying geodatabase, to view and
edit multiple projects, and to display multiple projects on the same map.
The Project Manager lists all of the projects that have been opened during the ArcMap
session. The following controls are available:
AddClicking the Add button opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
Add New ProjectOpens a Save As dialog, allowing you to specify a

project name and directory location. After clicking the Save button, the
Attach Geodatabase dialog opens, allowing you to specify a new or existing
geodatabase to be connected to the project.
Add Existing ProjectOpens an Open dialog, allowing you to browse to the

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i project to be added. If the Bentley SewerGEMS
V8i project is not associated with a geodatabase, the Attach Geodatabase
dialog opens, allowing you to specify a new or existing geodatabase to be
connected to the project.
Open ProjectOpens the project that is currently highlighted in the Project

Manager list pane. You can only edit projects that are currently open. This
command is available only when the currently highlighted project is closed.
Save ProjectSaves the project that is currently highlighted in the Project

Manager list pane. This command is available only when changes have been made
to the currently highlighted project.
Close ProjectCloses the project that is currently highlighted in the Project

Manager list pane. Closed projects cannot be edited, but the elements within the
project will still be displayed in the map. This command is available only when
the currently highlighted project is open.
Remove ProjectRemoves the project that is currently highlighted in the Project

Manager list pane. This command permanently breaks the connection to the
geodatabase associated with the project.
Make CurrentMakes the project that is currently highlighted in the Project

Manager list pane the current project. Edits made in the map are applied to the
current project. This command is available only when the currently highlighted
project is not marked current.
11-1079

To add a new project:
1. From the Project Manager, click the Add button and select the Add New Project
command. Or, from the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i menu, click the Project menu
and select the Add New Project command.
2. In the Save As dialog that appears, specify a name and directory location for the
new project, then click the Save button.
3. In the Attach Geodatabase dialog that appears, click the Attach Geodatabase
button. Browse to an existing geodatabase to import the new project into, or create
a new geodatabase by entering a name for the geodatabase and specifying a directory. Click the Save button.
4. Enter a dataset name.
5. You can assign a spatial reference to the project by clicking the Change button,
then specifying spatial reference data in the Spatial Reference Properties dialog
that appears.
6. In the Attach Geodatabase dialog, click the OK button to create the new project.
To add an existing project:
1. From the Project Manager, click the Add button and select the Add Existing
Project command. Or, from the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i menu, click the Project
menu and select the Add Existing Project command.
2. In the Open dialog that appears, browse to the location of the project, highlight it,
then click the Open button.
3. If the project is not associated with a geodatabase, the Attach Geodatabase dialog
opens, allowing you to specify a new or existing geodatabase to be connected to
the project. Continue to Step 4. If the project has already been associated with a
geodatabase, the Attach Geodatabase will not open, and the project will be added.
4. In the Attach Geodatabase dialog, click the Attach Geodatabase button. Browse to
an existing geodatabase to import the new project into, or create a new geodatabase by entering a name for the geodatabase and specifying a directory. Click the
Save button.
Attach Geodatabase Dialog

The Attach Geodatabase dialog allows you to associate a Bentley SewerGEMS V8i
project with a new or existing geodatabase, and also provides access to the ArcMap
Spatial Reference Properties dialog, allowing you to define the spatial reference for
the geodatabase.
11-1080
Geodatabase FieldThis field displays the path and file name of the geodatabase that was selected to be associated with the project.
Geodatabase ButtonThis button opens an Import To or Create New Geodatabase dialog, where you specify an existing geodatabase or enter a name and directory for a new one.
Dataset NameAllows you to enter a name for the dataset.
Spatial Reference PaneDisplays the spatial reference currently assigned to the

geodatabase.
Change ButtonOpens the Spatial Reference Properties dialog, allowing you to

change the spatial reference for the geodatabase.
Laying out a Model in the ArcMap Client

The Bentley SewerGEMS V8i toolbar contains a set of tools similar to the StandAlone version. See Layout Toolbar on page 2-44 for descriptions of the various
element layout tools.
You must be in an edit session (Click the ArcMap Editor button and select the Start
Editing command) to lay out elements or to enter element data in ArcMap. You must
then Save the Edits (Click the ArcMap Editor button and select the Save Edits
command) when you are done editing. The tools in the toolbar will be inactive when
you are not in an edit session.
Using LoadBuilder to Assign Loading Data

LoadBuilder simplifies and expedites the process of assigning loading data to
your model, using a variety of source data types.
Note:
The loading output data generated by LoadBuilder is a Base

Flow, i.e., a single value that remains constant over time.
After running LoadBuilder and exporting the results, you may
need to modify your data to reflect changes over time by
applying patterns to the base flow values.
LoadBuilder includes:
LoadBuilder Manager on page 11-1082
LoadBuilder Wizard on page 11-1082
11-1081
LoadBuilder Manager
The LoadBuilder manager provides a central location for the creation, storage, and
management of LoadBuilder templates. The following buttons are available from this
dialog box:
New
Opens the LoadBuilder Wizard.
Delete
Deletes an existing LoadBuilder template.
Rename
Rename an existing LoadBuilder template.
Edit
Opens the LoadBuilder Wizard, with the

settings associated with the currently
highlighted definition loaded.
Help
Opens the context-sensitive online help.
LoadBuilder Wizard
The LoadBuilder wizard assists you in the creation of a new load build template by
stepping you through the procedure of creating a new load build template. Depending
on the load build method you choose, the specific steps presented in the wizard will
vary.
Note:
The loading output data generated by LoadBuilder is a Base

Flow, i.e., a single value that remains constant over time.
After running LoadBuilder and exporting the results, you may
need to modify your data to reflect changes over time by
applying patterns to the base flow values.
LoadBuilder wizard includes:
11-1082
Step 1: Load Method to Use on page 11-1083
Step 2: Input Data on page 11-1085
Step 3: Calculation Summary on page 11-1091
Step 4: Results Preview on page 11-1092
Step 5: Completing the LoadBuilder Wizard on page 11-1092
Step 1: Load Method to Use

In this step, the Load Method to be used is specified. The next steps will vary
according to the load method that is chosen. The load methods are divided into three
categories; the desired category is selected by clicking the corresponding button. Then
the method is chosen from the Load Demand types pane.
The available load methods are as follows:
Allocation
Billing Meter AggregationThis loading method assigns all meters within a

service polygon to the specified loading node for that service polygon.
Nearest NodeThis loading method assigns customer meter loads to the closest
loading junction.
Nearest PipeThis loading method assigns customer meter loads to the closest
pipe, then distributes loads using user-defined criteria.
11-1083
Flow Monitoring DistributionThis loading method asigns loading data from a

point load monitoring layer to upstream loading nodes. This method automatically
identifies all the upstream manholes up to its adjacent next upstream load monitor,
works out the sub-total load contribution of the manhole between the load monitors (the load difference between the monitors) and then equally distributes the
effective load to all the contributing manholes.
Distribution
11-1084
Equal Flow DistributionThis loading method equally divides the total flow
contained in a flow boundary polygon and assigns it to the nodes that fall within
the flow boundary polygon.
Proportional Distribution by AreaThis load method proportionally distributes a lump-sum load among a number of loading nodes based upon the ratio of
total service area to the area of the nodes corresponding service polygon.
Proportional Distribution by PopulationThis load method proportionally

distributes a lump-sum load among a number of loading nodes based upon the
ratio of total population contained within the nodes corresponding service
polygon.
Projection
Projection by Land UseThis method allocates loads based upon the density
per land use type of each service polygon.
Load Estimation by PopulationThis method allocates loads based upon userdefined relationships between load per capita and population data.
In addition to the controls described above, there is also a check box and a menu near
the bottom of the dialog box, entitled Initialize From Previous Run. If a previously
created LoadBuilder template exists in the LoadBuilder Manager display, the settings
for this template can be applied to a new LoadBuild of the same type.
Step 2: Input Data

This step will vary according to the load method type that was specified in Step 1, as
follows:
Billing Meter AggregationInput DataThe following fields require data to be

specified:
Service Area LayerThis field allows you to specify the polygon feature
class or shapefile that defines the service area for each demand node.
Manhole ID FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field
that contains identifying label data.
Note:
ElementID is the preferred Junction ID value because it is always

unique to any given element.
Billing Meter LayerThis field allows you to specify the point feature class
or shapefile that contains the geocoded billing meter data.
11-1085
Load Type FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field
that contains load type data. Load Type is an optional classification that can
be used to assign composite loads to nodes, which enables different behaviors,
multipliers, and patterns to be applied in various situations. For example,
possible load types may include Residential, Commercial, Industrial, etc. To
make use of the Load Type classification, your source database must include a
column that contains this data.
Usage FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that
contains usage data. The usage field in the source database must contain flow
data.
Usage Field UnitsThis drop-down list allows you to select the unit associated with the usage field value.
Nearest NodeInput DataThe following fields require data to be specified:
Node LayerThis field allows you to specify the feature class or shapefile
that contains the nodes that the loads will be assigned to.
Node ID FieldThis field allows you to specify the feature class database
field that contains the unique identifying label data.
Note:
11-1086
ElementID is the preferred node ID value because it is always

Billing Meter LayerThis field allows you to specify the feature class or
shapefile that contains the geocoded billing meter data.
contains usage data.
Use Previous RunLoadBuilders most time-consuming calculation when

using the Nearest Node strategy is the spatial calculations that are performed
to determine proximity between the meter elements and the node elements.
When this box is checked, the proximity calculations that were generated
from a previous run are used, thereby increasing the overall calculation
performance.
Nearest PipeInput DataThe following fields require data to be specified:
Pipe LayerThis field allows you to specify the line feature class or shapefile that contains the pipes that will be used to determine meter-to-pipe proximity. Note that the pipes in this layer must connect to the nodes contained in
the Node Layer.
Pipe ID FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that
contains the unique identifying label data.
Note:
ElementID is the preferred Pipe ID value because it is always

Load AssignmentThis field allows you to specify the method that will be
used to distribute the metered loads that are assigned to the nearest pipe to the
end nodes of said pipe. Options include:
-
Distance WeightedThis method assigns a portion of the total load

assigned to a pipe based on the distance between the meter(s) and the
nodes at the pipe ends. The closer a meter is to the node at the end of the
pipe, the more load will be assigned to it.
Closest NodeThis method assigns the entire total load assigned to the
pipe end node that is closest to the meter.
Farthest NodeThis method assigns the entire total load assigned to the
pipe end node that is farthest from the meter.
Equal DistributionThis method assigns an equal portion of the total

load assigned to a pipe to each of the pipes end nodes.
Node LayerThis field allows you to specify the point feature class or
shapefile that contains the nodes that will be used to determine node-to-pipe
proximity. Note that the nodes in this layer must connect to the pipes
contained in the Pipes Layer.
Node ID FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field
that contains the unique identifying label data.
Note:

Use Previous RunLoadBuilders most time-consuming calculation when

using the Nearest Pipe strategy is the spatial calculations that are performed to
determine proximity between the meter elements, the pipe elements, and the
node elements. When this box is checked, the proximity calculations that
were calculated from a previous runs are used, thereby increasing the overall
calculation performance.
Billing Meter LayerThis field allows you to specify the point or polyline
feature class or shapefile that contains the geocoded billing meter data.
11-1087
Meter Assignment TypeWhen a polyline meter layer is selected, this field

will be activated. When multiple pipes are associated with (overlapped by) a
polyline meter, the option chosen in this field determines the method that will
be used to divide the polyline meter load among them. The available options
are:
-
Equal DistributionThis option will distribute the load equally among

the pipes associated with (overlapping) the meter.
Proportional DistributionThis option will divide the load proportionally according to the ratio of the length of pipe that is associated with
(overlapping) the meter to the total length of the meter.
Billing Meter ID FieldBilling Meter ID is used to identify the unique

meter. When polylines are used to represent water consumption meters,
multiple polylines (multiple records) may designate one actual meter, but each
(record in the attribute Table) of the polylines contains the same consumption
data with the same billing meter ID.
contains usage data.
Flow Monitoring DistributionInput DataThe following fields require data

to be specified:
Node LayerThis field allows you to specify the point feature class or
shapefile that contains the nodes that the flow will be assigned to.
Node ID FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field
Note:
11-1088
ElementID is the preferred Node ID value because it is always

Flow Monitoring LayerThis field allows you to specify the point feature
class that contains the flow monitoring meter data.
contains usage data. The usage field in the source database must contain flow
data.
Equal Flow DistributionInput DataThe following fields require data to be

specified:
Manhole LayerThis field allows you to specify the point feature class or
shapefile that contains the manhole data.
Note:
Flow Boundary LayerThis field allows you to specify the polygon feature
class or shapefile that contains the flow boundary data.
that contains the Load Type data.
Load Type Field UnitsThis drop-down list allows you to select the unit
associated with the flow field value.
Proportional Distribution by AreaInput DataThe following fields require

data to be specified:
class or shapefile that defines the service area for each node.
Note:


Boundary FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field
that contains the boundary label.
Flow FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that
contains the load type data.
Flow Field UnitsThis drop-down list allows you to select the unit associated with the Load Type Field value.
Proportional Distribution by PopulationInput DataThe following fields

require data to be specified:
11-1089
Note:
Boundary FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field
that contains the boundary label.
that contains the load data.
Load Type Field UnitsThis drop-down list allows you to select the unit
associated with the load type field value.
Population LayerThis field allows you to specify the polygon feature class
or shapefile that contains population data.
Population ID FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database

field that contains population data.
Land Type FieldThis field is optional. It allows you to specify the source
database field that contains land use type.
Projection by Land UseInput DataThe following fields require data to be

specified:
Note:

Land Use LayerThis field allows you to specify the polygon feature class
or shapefile that contains the land use data.
Land Type FieldThis field is optional. It allows you to specify the source
database field that contains land use type.
Load Densities Per AreaThis table allows you to assign load density
values to the various load types contained within your land use layer.
Load Estimation by PopulationInput DataThe following fields require data

to be specified:
11-1090

Note:

Population LayerThis field allows you to specify the polygon feature class
or shapefile that contains the population data.
Population Density Type FieldThis field is optional. It allows you to

specify the source database field that contains the population density type
data.
Population Density FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains population density data.
Load Densities Per CapitaThis table allows you to assign load density
values to the various load types contained within your population density
layer.
Step 3: Calculation Summary

This step displays the Results Summary pane, which displays the total load, load
multiplier, and hydraulic pattern associated with each load type in a tabular format.
The number of entries listed will depend on the load build method and data types
selected in Step 1. The Results Summary pane contains the following columns:
Load TypeThis column contains an entry for each load type contained within
the database column specified in step one. (Examples include residential,
commercial, industrial, etc.)
ConsumptionThis column displays the total load associated with each load
type entry.
MultiplierThis column displays the multiplier that is applied to each load type
entry. Multipliers can be used to account for peak loads, expected future loads, or
to reflect unaccounted-for-loads. This field is editable.
PatternThis column displays the hydraulic pattern associated with each

demand type entry. A different pattern can be specified using the menu contained
within each cell of this column. New patterns cannot be created from this dialog
box; see the Pattern manager help topic for more information regarding the
creation of new patterns.
In addition to the functionality provided by the tabular summary pane, the following
controls are also available in this step:
11-1091
Global MultiplierThis field allows you to apply a multiplier to all of the

entries contained within the Results Summary Pane. Any changes are automatically reflected in the Total Load text field. Multipliers can be used to account for
peak loads, expected future loads, or to reflect unaccounted-for-loads. The Global
Multiplier should be used when the conditions relating to these considerations are
identical for all usage types and elements.
Total LoadThis field displays an updated total of all of the entries contained
within the Results Summary Pane, as modified by the local and global multipliers
that are in effect.
Step 4: Results Preview

This step displays the calculated results in a tabular format. The table consists of the
following information:
ElementIDElementID is the unique identifying label assigned to all geodatabase elements by the GIS.
LabelLabel is the unique identifying label assigned by Bentley SewerGEMS

V8i Modeler.
Load TypeLoad Type is an optional classification that can be used to assign

different behaviors, multipliers, and patterns in various situations. For example,
possible load types may include Residential, Commercial, Industrial, etc. To make
use of the Load Type classification, your source database must include a column
that contains this data.
PatternAllows you to assign a previously created pattern to each load type in

the table.
Step 5: Completing the LoadBuilder Wizard

In this step, the load build template is given a label and the results are exported to an
existing or new load alternative. This step contains the following controls:
11-1092
LabelThis field allows a unique label to be assigned to the load build template.
Override an Existing AlternativeChoosing this option will cause the calculated loads to overwrite the loads contained within the existing load alternative
that is selected.
Append to an Existing AlternativeChoosing this option will cause the calculated loads to be appended to the loads contained within the existing load alternative that is selected. Loads within the existing alternative that are assigned to a
specific node will not be overwritten by newly generated loads assigned to the
same node; the new loads will simply be added to them.
New AlternativeChoosing this option will cause the calculated loads to be

applied to a new load alternative. The text field next to this button lets you enter a
label for the new load alternative. The Parent Alternative field will only be active
when this option is selected.
LoadBuilder Run Summary

The LoadBuilder Run Summary dialog box details important statistics about the
results of a completed LoadBuilder run, including the number of successfully added
loads, file information, and informational and/or warning messages.
Generating Thiessen Polygons

A Thiessen polygon is a Voronoi Diagram that is also referred to as the Dirichlet
Tessellation. Given a set of points, it defines a region around each point. A Thiessen
polygon divides a plane such that each point is enclosed within a polygon and assigns
the area to a point in the point set. Any location within a particular Thiessen polygon
is nearer to that polygons point than to any other point. Mathematically, a Thiessen is
constructed by intersecting perpendicular bisector lines between all points.
Thiessen polygon has many applications in different location-related disciplines such
as business planning, community services, transportation and hydraulic/hydrological
modeling. For water distribution modeling, the Thiessen Polygon generation utility
was developed to quickly and easily define the service areas of demand nodes. Since
each customer within a Thiessen polygon for a junction is nearer to that node than any
others, it is assumed that the customers within a particular Thiessen polygon are
supplied by the same demand node.
The following diagrams illustrate how Thiessen polygons would be generated manually. The Thiessen polygon generator does not use this method, although the results
produced by the generator are consistent with those that would be obtained using this
method.
The first diagram shows a simple pipe and junction network.
11-1093
In the second diagram, the circles are drawn around each junction.
11-1094

In the third diagram, bisector lines are added by drawing a line where the circles interjoin.
In the final diagram, the network is overlaid with the polygons that are created by
connecting the bisector lines.
11-1095
Thiessen Polygon Input Dialog Box

The Thiessen Polygon Creator allows you to quickly create polygon layers for use
with the LoadBuilder demand allocation module. This utility creates polygon layers
that can be used as service area layers for the following LoadBuilder loading strategies:
11-1096
Billing Meter Aggregation
Proportional Distribution By Area
Proportional Distribution By Population
Projection by Land Use
Load Estimation by Population.
The Thiessen Polygon Creator dialog box consists of the following steps:
Step 1: Node Data Source
Node Data SourceSelect the data source to use.
Node LayerThis lists the valid point feature classes and shapefiles that
Thiessen Polygon Creator can use.
Current SelectionClick if the current feature data set contains a previously

created selection set.
Include active elements onlyClick to activate.
SelectionThis option allows you to create a selection on the fly for use with
the Thiessen Polygon Creator. To use this option, use the ArcMap Select
Features tool to select the point features that you want before opening the
Thiessen Polygon Creator.
Step 2: Boundary Layer
Buffering PercentageThis percentage value is used for calculating the

boundary for a collection of points. In order to make the buffer boundary big
enough to cover all the points, the boundary is enlarged based upon the value
entered in this field as it relates to the percentage of the area enclosed by drawing
a polygon that connects the outermost nodes of the model.
Polygon Boundary LayerSelect the boundary polygon feature class or shapefile, if one has already been created. A boundary is specified so that the outermost
polygons do not extend to infinity.
11-1097

Note:
For more information about boundary layers, see Creating

Boundary Polygon Feature Classes.
Step 3: Output Layer
Output FileSpecify the name of the shapefile that will be created.

Note:
The Thiessen Polygon Creator is flexible enough to generate

Thiessen polygons for unusual boundary shapes, such as
borders with cutouts or holes that Thiessen polygons should not
be created inside. To accomplish this, the boundary polygon
must be created as one complex (multi-part) polygon. For more
information about creating boundary polygon feature classes,
see your ArcGIS documentation.
Creating Boundary Polygon Feature Classes

The Thiessen polygon generator requires a boundary to be specified around the area in
which Thiessen Polygons will be created. This is to prevent the outside edge of the
polygons along the perimeter of this area from extending to infinity. The generator can
automatically create a boundary using the Buffering Point Area Percentage value, or
it can use a previously created polygon feature class as the boundary.
A border polygon feature class can be created in ArcCatalog, and edited in ArcMap.
To create a border feature class, you will need a Bentley SewerGEMS V8i model that
has had at least one scenario published as an Esri feature dataset. Then, follow these
steps:
1. In the directory structure pane of ArcCatalog, right-click the Bentley SewerGEMS
V8i feature dataset and select New...Feature Class.
2. A dialog box will open, prompting you to name the new feature class. Enter a
name and click Next.
3. In the second step, you are prompted to select the database storage configuration.
Do so, and click Next.
4. In the third step, click the Shape cell under the Field Name column, and ensure
that the Geometry Type is Polygon. Click Finish.
5. In ArcMap, click the Add Data button and select your Bentley SewerGEMS V8i feature dataset.
6. Click the Editor button and select Start Editing. Ensure that the border
feature class is selected in the Target drop-down list.
7. Draw a polygon around the point features (generally manholes) that you wish to
be used to generate the polygons. When you are finished drawing the polygon,
click Editor...Stop Editing. Choose Yes when prompted to save your edits.
11-1098

The polygon feature class you just created can now be used as the boundary during
Thiessen polygon generation. For more information about creating and editing feature
classes, see your ArcGIS documentation.
ModelBuilder
For detailed information on how to use ModelBuilder, see Using Modelbuilder on
page 5-233.
Using GeoTables
A GeoTable is a flexible table definition provided by Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i creates feature classes with a very simple schema. The
schema consists solely of the Geometry, the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i ID and Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i feature type. what Bentley SewerGEMS V8i provides is a dynamic
join of this data to our trademarked GeoTable. The join is then managed so that it will
be automatically updated on a change to the GeoTable definition for each element
type.
GeoTables allow for a dynamic view on the data. The underlying data will represent
the data for the current scenario, the current timestep and the unit definition of the
GeoTable. By using these GeoTables, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i provides ultimate
flexibility for using the viewing and rendering tools provided by the ArcMap environment.
Note that the GeoTable settings are not project specific, but are stored on your local
machine - any changes you make will carry across all projects. This means that if you
have ArcMap display settings based on attributes contained in customized GeoTables,
you will have to copy the AttributeFlexTables.xml file (located in the C:\Documents
and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Bentley\SewerGEMS\8 folder) for these
display settings to work on another computer.
Using GeoTables, you can:
Apply ArcMap symbology definitions to map elements based on Bentley SewerGEMS V8i data
Use the ArcMap Select By Attributes command to select map elements based on
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i data
Generate ArcMap reports and graphs that include Bentley SewerGEMS V8i data
11-1099
Using GeoTables
To Edit a GeoTable:
1. In the FlexTable Manager list pane, expand the GeoTables node if necessary.
Double-click the GeoTable for the desired element.
2. By default, only the ID, Label, and Notes data is included in the GeoTable. To add
attributes, click the Edit button.
3. In the Table setup dialog that appears, move attributes from the Available
Columns list to the Selected columns list to include them in the GeoTable. This
can be accomplished by double-clicking an attribute in the list, or by highlighting
attributes and using the arrow buttons (a single arrow button moves the highlighted attribute to the other list; a double arrow moves all of them).
4. When all of the desired attributes have been moved to the selected columns, click
OK.
11-1100
Chapter
12
Features of the
MicroStation Version
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i features support for MicroStation integration. You run
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i in both MicroStation and stand-alone mode.
The MicroStation functionality has been implemented in a way that is the same as the
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i base product. Once you become familiar with the standalone mode, you will not have any difficulty using the product in MicroStation mode.
In MicroStation mode, you will have access to the full range of functionality available
in the MicroStation design and drafting environment. The standard environment is
extended and enhanced by using MicroStations MDL (MicroStation Development
Language) client layer that lets you create, view, and edit the native Bentley SewerGEMS V8i network model while in MicroStation.
MDL is a complete development environment that lets applications take full advantage of the power of MicroStation and MicroStation-based vertical applications. MDL
can be used to develop simple utilities, customized commands or sophisticated
commercial applications for vertical markets.
Some of the advantages of working in MicroStation mode include:
Lay out network links and structures in fully-scaled mode in the same design and
drafting environment that you use to develop your engineering plans.
You will have access to any other third party applications that you currently use,
along with any custom MDL applications.
Use native MicroStation insertion snaps to precisely position Bentley SewerGEMS V8i elements with respect to other entities in the MicroStation drawing.
Use native MicroStation commands on Bentley SewerGEMS V8i model entities

with automatic update and synchronization with the model database.
Control destination levels for model elements and associated label text and annotation, giving you control over styles, line types, and visibility of model elements.
Note:
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i supports MicroStation V8i only.
Additional features of the MicroStation version includes:
12-1101
MicroStation Environment
MicroStation Environment on page 12-1102
MicroStation Project Files on page 12-1103
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Element Properties on page 12-1103
Working with Elements on page 12-1106
MicroStation Commands on page 12-1108
MicroStation Environment
The MicroStation environment includes:
MicroStation Mode Graphical Layout on page 12-1102
MicroStation Mode Graphical Layout

In MicroStation mode, our products provide a set of extended options and functionality beyond those available in stand-alone mode. This additional functionality
provides enhanced control over general application settings and options and extends
the command set, giving you control over the display of model elements within
MicroStation.
Key differences between MicroStation and stand-alone mode include:
Full element symbol editing functionality is available through the use of custom
cells. All elements and graphical decorations (flow arrows, control indicators,
etc.) are contained within a SewerGEMS V8i .cel file.
You can control the appearance and destination of all model elements using the
Element Levels command under the View menu. For example, you can assign a
specific level for all outlets, as well as assign the label and annotation text style to be
applied.
12-1102
Features of the MicroStation Version

Note:
Any MicroStation tool that deletes the target element (such as

Trim and IntelliTrim) will also remove the connection of that
element to SewerGEMS V8i. After the SewerGEMS V8i
connection is removed, the element is no longer a valid link and
will not show properties on the property grid.
MicroStation Project Files

When using Bentley SewerGEMS V8i in MicroStation mode, there are three files that
fundamentally define a Bentley SewerGEMS V8i model project:
Drawing File (.DGN)The MicroStation drawing file contains the elements that
define the model, in addition to the planimetric base drawing information that
serves as the model background.
Model File (.stsw)The model file contains model data specific to SewerGEMS
V8i, including project option settings, color-coding and annotation settings, etc.
Note that the MicroStation .dgn that is associated with a particular model may not
bave the same filename as the models .stsw file.
Database File (.MDB)The model database file that contains all of the input and
output data for the model. Note that the MicroStation .dgn that is associated with a
particular model may not bave the same filename as the models .mdb file.
To send the model to another user, all three files are required.
It is important to understand that archiving the drawing file is not sufficient to reproduce the model. You must also preserve the associated .stsw and .MDB files.
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Element Properties

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i element properties includes:
Element Properties on page 12-1104
Levels on page 12-1104
Text Styles on page 12-1105
12-1103
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Element Properties
Element Properties
When working in the MicroStation mode, this feature will display a dialog box
containing fields for the currently selected elements associated properties. To modify
an attribute, click each associated grid cell.
You can also review or modify MicroStation drawing information about an
element(s), such as its type, attributes, and geometry, by using the Element Information dialog. To access the Element Information dialog, click the Element Information
button or click the Element menu and select the Information command.
Levels
To control display of elements in the selected levels, use the Level Display dialog box.
To access the Level Display dialog, click the Settings menu and select the Level >
Display command.
If you want to freeze elements in levels, select Global Freeze from the View Display
menu in the Level Display dialog.
You can create new Levels in the Level Manager. To access the Level Manager, click
the Settings menu and select the Level > Manager command.
To control the display of levels, use level filters. Within MicroStation, you can also
create, edit, and save layer filters to DWG files in the Level Manager. To access the
Level Manager, click the Settings menu and select the Level > Manager command.
Layer filters are loaded when a DWG file is opened, and changes are written back
when the file is saved.
Element Levels Dialog

This dialog allows you to assign newly created elements and their associated annotations to specific MicroStation levels.
To assign a level, use the pulldown menu next to an element type (under the Element
Level column heading) to choose the desired level for that element. You can choose a
seperate level for each element and for each elements associated annotation.
You cannot create new levels from this dialog; to create new levels use the MicroStation Level Manager. To access the Level Manager, click the Settings menu and select
the Level > Manager command.
12-1104
Text Styles
You can view, edit, and create Text Style settings in MicroStation mode by clicking
the Element menu and selecting the Text Styles command to open the Text Styles
dialog.
View Associations
View associations allow you to define the Element Symbology Definition and the
currently displayed Scenario that is displayed for each view.
There is a View Associations button in the Scenario Manager and the Element
Symbology Manager. This button allows you to toggle between Independent
and Synchronized
view modes.
When Independent is selected, you can change the active scenario (or element
symbology) for the current view without changing the active scenario (or element
symbology) displayed in the other views.
When Synchronized is selected, changing the active scenario (or element symbology)
in the current view will also change the active scenario (or element symbology) in all
of the other views.
Multi-view Synchronized Mode:
When the user is in multi-view synchronized mode, a change of the active scenario
and/or symbology definition will cause all view windows to update to have that
scenario and/or symbology definition to be used.
Multi-view Independent Mode:
A user can only have one view window active (in focus) at any given time. When the
user changes a symbology definition, that newly active symbology definition will now
be used whenever that view window is active (or until the user changes the active
symbology definition again).
Likewise, when the user changes the current scenario, that newly active scenario will
now be used whenever that view window is active (or until the user changes the
current scenario again).
12-1105
Working with Elements

Note:
The View Associations feature is only available in the

Microstation version.

Working with elements includes:
Edit Elements on page 12-1107
Deleting Elements on page 12-1107
Modifying Elements on page 12-1107
Edit Elements
Elements can be edited in one of two ways in MicroStation mode:
Element Properties Dialog: To access the Element Properties dialog, click the
SewerGEMS V8i View menu and select the Properties command.
FlexTables: To access the FlexTables dialog, click the SewerGEMS V8i View menu
and select the FlexTables command.
12-1106
Deleting Elements
In MicroStation mode, you can delete elements by clicking on them using the Delete
Element tool, or by highlighting the element to be deleted and clicking your
keyboards Delete key.
Note:
Any MicroStation tool that deletes the target element (such as

Trim and IntelliTrim) will also remove the connection of that
element to SewerGEMS V8i. After the SewerGEMS V8i
connection is removed, the element is no longer a valid link and
will not show properties on the property grid.
Modifying Elements
In MicroStation mode, these commands are selected from the shift-right-click shortcut
menu (hold down the Shift key while right-clicking). They are used for scaling and
rotating model entities.
Change Pipe Widths

In MicroStation mode, you can change the line width through the Element Information dialog. To access the Element Information dialog, click the Element menu and
select the Information command. To change the width of a pipe, select it and open the
Element Information dialog. Then change the value in the Weight pulldown menu
Edit Elements
In MicroStation mode, this menu command is used to open a spreadsheet FlexTable
editor or a selection of one or more network figures. You are prompted to select
figures on which to build a table.
Working with Elements Using MicroStation Commands

Working with elements using MicroStation commands includes:
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Custom MicroStation Entities on page 12-1108
MicroStation Commands on page 12-1108
Moving Elements on page 12-1108
Moving Element Labels on page 12-1108
12-1107
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Custom MicroStation Entities

The primary MicroStation-based Bentley SewerGEMS V8i element entitiespipes,
channels, gutter links, manholes, catch basins, outfalls, pond outlet structures, and
cross section nodesare all implemented using native MicroStation elements. These
elements have feature linkages to define them as SewerGEMS V8i objects.
This means that you can perform standard MicroStation commands (see MicroStation Commands on page 12-1108) as you normally would, and the model database
will be updated automatically to reflect these changes.
It also means that the model will enforce the integrity of the network topological state.
Therefore, if you delete a nodal element such as a junction, its connecting pipes will
also be deleted since their connecting nodes topologically define model pipes.
Using MDL technology ensures the database will be adjusted and maintained during
Undo and Redo transactions.
See MicroStation Mode Graphical Layout on page 1102.
MicroStation Commands
When running in MicroStation mode, Haestad Methods products make use of all the
advantages that MicroStation has, such as plotting capabilities and snap features.
Additionally, MicroStation commands can be used as you would with any design
project. For example, our products elements and annotation can be manipulated using
common MicroStation commands.
Moving Elements
When using MicroStation mode, the MicroStation commands Move, Scale, Rotate,
Mirror, and Array can be used to move elements.
To move a node, execute the MicroStation command by either typing it at the
command prompt or selecting it. Follow the MicroStation prompts, and the node and
its associated label will move together. The connecting pipes will shrink or stretch
depending on the new location of the node.
Moving Element Labels

When using MicroStation mode, the MicroStation commands Move, Scale, Rotate,
Mirror, and Array can be used to move element text labels.
To move an element text label separately from the element, click the element label you
wish to move. The grips will appear for the label. Execute the MicroStation command
either by typing it at the command prompt, by selecting it from the tool palette, or by
selecting it from the right-click menu. Follow the MicroStation prompt, and the label
will be moved without the element.
12-1108
Snap Menu
When using MicroStation mode, you can enable the Snaps button bar by clicking the
Settings menu and selecting the Snaps > Button Bar command. See the MicroStation
documentation for more information about using snaps.
Polygon Element Visibility

By default, polygon elements are sent to the back of the level order when they are
drawn. If the level order is modified, polygon elements can interfere with the visibility
of other elements. This can be remedied using the MicroStation Level Manager (Click
the Settings menua and select the Level > Manager command.).
To access the MicroStation Level Manager, click the Settings menu and select the
Level > Manager command.
Import Bentley SewerGEMS V8i

When running Bentley SewerGEMS V8i in MicroStation mode, this command
imports a selected Bentley SewerGEMS V8i data (.stsw) file for use in the current
drawing. The new project file will now correspond to the drawing name, such as,
CurrentDrawingName.stsw.
Warning!
A SewerGEMS V8i Project can only be imported to a new,

empty MicroStation design model.
Annotation Display
Some fonts do not correctly display the full range of characters used by SewerGEMS
V8is annotation feature because of a limited character set. If you are having problems
with certain characters displaying improperly or not at all, try using another font.
Use SewerGEMS V8i Z Order Command

When this control is toggled on, SewerGEMS V8i will parse the elements when the
screen is redrawn. It takes significant time to do this parsing, so for larger models
performance can be improved by toggling this control off
12-1109
12-1110
Chapter
13
Working in AutoCAD
Mode
Caution:
If you previously installed Bentley ProjectWise and turned

on AutoCAD integration, you must add the following key to
your system registry using the Windows Registry Editor.
Before you edit the registry, make a backup copy.
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Bentley\ProjectWise
iDesktop Integration\XX.XX\Configuration\AutoCAD"
String value name: DoNotChangeCommands
Value: 'On'
To access the Registry Editor, click Start > Run, then type
regedit. Using the Registry Editor incorrectly can cause
serious, system-wide problems that may require you to reinstall Windows to correct them. Always make a backup
copy of the system registry before modifying it.
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i features support for AutoCAD integration.

The AutoCAD functionality has been implemented in a way that is the same as the
SewerGEMS V8i base product. Once you become familiar with the stand-alone mode,
you will not have any difficulty using the product in AutoCAD mode.
Some of the advantages of working in AutoCAD mode include:
Layout network links and structures in fully-scaled mode in the same design and
drafting environment that you use to develop your engineering plans. You will
have access to any other third party applications that you currently use, along with
any custom LISP, ARX, or VBA applications that you have developed.
Use native AutoCAD insertion snaps to precisely position Bentley SewerGEMS

V8i elements with respect to other entities in the AutoCAD drawing.
13-1111
The AutoCAD Workspace
Use native AutoCAD commands such as ERASE, MOVE, and ROTATE on

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i model entities with automatic update and synchronization with the model database.
Control destination layers for model elements and associated label text and annotation, giving you control over styles, line types, and visibility of model elements.
Click one of the following links to learn how to use Bentley SewerGEMS V8i in
AutoCAD mode:
The AutoCAD Workspace on page 13-1112
AutoCAD Project Files on page 13-1115
Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands on page 13-1116
The AutoCAD Workspace

In AutoCAD mode, you will have access to the full range of functionality available in
the AutoCAD design and drafting environment. The standard environment is extended
and enhanced by an AutoCAD ObjectARX Bentley SewerGEMS V8i client layer that
lets you create, view, and edit the native Bentley SewerGEMS V8i network model
while in AutoCAD.
Click one of the following links to learn more about Bentley SewerGEMS V8i
AutoCAD environment:
AutoCAD Integration with SewerGEMS V8i on page 13-1112
AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout on page 13-1113
Menus on page 13-1113
Drawing Setup on page 13-1114
Symbol Visibility on page 13-1114
AutoCAD Integration with SewerGEMS V8i

When you install SewerGEMS after you install AutoCAD, integration between the
two is automatically configured.
If you install AutoCAD after you install SewerGEMS, you must manually integrate
the two by selecting Start > All Programs > Bentley >SewerGEMS V8i > Integrate
SewerGEMS with AutoCAD-ArcGIS-Microstation. The integration utility runs
automatically. You can then run SewerGEMS in AutoCAD mode.
13-1112
Working in AutoCAD Mode

The Integrate SewerGEMS with AutoCAD-ArcGIS-Microstation command can also
be used to fix problems with the AutoCAD configuration file. For example, if you
have SewerGEMS installed on the same system as Bentley SewerGEMS V8i and you
uninstall or reinstall SewerGEMS, the AutoCAD configuration file becomes unusable. To fix this problem, you can delete the configuration file then run the Integrate
SewerGEMS with the AutoCAD-ArcGIS-Microstation command.
AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout

In AutoCAD mode, our products provide a set of extended options and functionality
beyond those available in stand-alone mode. This additional functionality provides
enhanced control over general application settings and options and extends the
command set, giving you control over the display of model elements within
AutoCAD.
Note:
In AutoCAD, you must hold down the mouse button to keep the
submenu open while selecting an element from the layout
toolbar. Alternate layout methods include using the right-click
menu to select elements or using the command line.
Menus
In AutoCAD mode, in addition to AutoCADs menus, the following Bentley SewerGEMS V8i menus are available:
Analysis
View
Tools
Report
In addition, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i adds its own Help menu commands to
AutoCADs Help menu.
The Bentley SewerGEMS V8i menu commands work the same way in AutoCAD and
the Stand-Alone Editor. For complete descriptions of Bentley SewerGEMS V8i menu
commands, see Menus on page 2-18.
Toolbars
In AutoCAD mode, in addition to AutoCADs toolbars, the following Bentley SewerGEMS V8i toolbars are available:
Layout
13-1113
AutoCAD Project Files
View
Compute
Scenarios
Analysis
Links
The Bentley SewerGEMS V8i toolbars work the same way in AutoCAD and the
Stand-Alone Editor. For complete descriptions of Bentley SewerGEMS V8i toolbars,
see Toolbars on page 2-34.
Drawing Setup
When working in the AutoCAD mode, you may work with our products in many
different AutoCAD scales and settings. However, Haestad Methods product elements
can only be created and edited in model space.
Symbol Visibility
Note:
In AutoCAD, it is possible to delete element label text using the

ERASE command. You should not use ERASE to control
visibility of labels. If you desire to control the visibility of a
selected group of element labels, you should move them to
another layer that can be frozen or turned off.
In AutoCAD mode, you can control display of element labels using the check box in
the Drawing Options dialog box.
AutoCAD Project Files

When using SewerGEMS V8i in AutoCAD mode, there are three files that fundamentally define a SewerGEMS V8i model project:
Drawing File (.DWG)The AutoCAD drawing file contains the custom entities
that define the model, in addition to the planimetric base drawing information that
serves as the model background.
Model File (.stsw)The model file contains model data specific to SewerGEMS
V8i, including project option settings, color-coding and annotation settings, etc.
Database File (.MDB)The model database file that contains all of the input and
output data for the model.
To send the model to another user, all three files are required.
13-1114

The two files will have the same base name. It is important to understand that
archiving the drawing file is not sufficient to reproduce the model. You must also
preserve the associated .stsw and .MDB files.
Since the .stsw file can be run and modified separately from the .DWG file using
Stand-Alone Editor, it is quite possible for the two files to get out of sync. Should you
ever modify the model in Stand-Alone Editor mode and then later load the AutoCAD
.DWG file, the SewerGEMS V8i program will compare file dates, and automatically
use the built-in AutoCAD synchronization routine.
Click one of the following links to learn more about AutoCAD project files and
SewerGEMS V8i:
Drawing Synchronization on page 13-1115
Saving the Drawing as Drawing*.dwg on page 13-1116
Drawing Synchronization
Whenever you open a Bentley SewerGEMS V8i-based drawing file in AutoCAD, the
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i model server will start. The first thing that the application
will do is load the associated Bentley SewerGEMS V8i model (stsw) file. If the time
stamps of the drawing and model file are different, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i will
automatically perform a synchronization. This protects against corruption that might
otherwise occur from separately editing the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i model file in
stand-alone mode, or editing proxy elements at an AutoCAD station where the
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i application is not loaded.
The synchronization check will occur in two stages:
First, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i will compare the drawing model elements with
those in the server model. Any differences will be listed. Bentley SewerGEMS
V8i enforces network topological consistency between the server and the drawing
state. If model elements have been deleted or added in the .stsw file during a
SewerGEMS V8i session, or if proxy elements have been deleted, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i will force the drawing to be consistent with the native database by
restoring or removing any missing or excess drawing custom entities.
After network topology has been synchronized, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i will
compare other model and drawing states such as location, labels, and flow directions.
You can run the Synchronization check at any time using the following command:
SWRGSYNCHRONIZE
Or by selecting Tools > Database Utilities > Synchronize Drawing.
13-1115
Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands
Saving the Drawing as Drawing*.dwg

Note:
If this situation inadvertently occurs (save on quit for example),

restart AutoCAD, use the Open command to open the
Drawing*.dwg file from its saved location, and use the Save As
command to save the drawing and model data to a different
name.
AutoCAD uses Drawing*.dwg as its default drawing name. Saving your drawing as
the default AutoCAD drawing name (for instance Drawing1.dwg) should be avoided,
as it makes overwriting model data very likely. When you first start AutoCAD, the
new empty drawing is titled Drawing*.dwg, regardless of whether one exists in the
default directory. Since our modeling products create model databases associated with
the AutoCAD drawing, the use of Drawing*.dwg as the saved name puts you at risk of
causing synchronization problems between the AutoCAD drawing and the modeling
files.

This section describes how to work with elements using AutoCAD commands,
including:
This section includes the following topics about working with elements using
AutoCAD commands:
13-1116
SewerGEMS Custom AutoCAD Entities on page 13-1117
AutoCAD Commands on page 13-1117
Explode Elements on page 13-1117
Moving Elements on page 13-1118
Moving Element Labels on page 13-1118
Snap Menu on page 13-1118
Polygon Element Visibility on page 13-1118
SewerGEMS Custom AutoCAD Entities

The primary AutoCAD-based SewerGEMS element entitiesconduits, channels,
gutters, pressure pipes, manholes, catch basins, outfalls, ponds, catchments, pond
outlet structures, cross section nodes, pressure junctions, junction chambers, wet
wells, and pumpsare all implemented using ObjectARX custom objects. Thus, they
are vested with a specialized model awareness that ensures that any editing actions
you perform will result in an appropriate update of the model database.
This means that you can perform standard AutoCAD commands (see AutoCAD
Commands on page 13-1117) as you normally would, and the model database will be
updated automatically to reflect these changes.
It also means that the model will enforce the integrity of the network topological state.
Therefore, if you delete a nodal element such as a junction, its connecting pipes will
also be deleted since their connecting nodes topologically define model pipes.
Using ObjectARX technology ensures the database will be adjusted and maintained
during Undo and Redo transactions.
AutoCAD Commands
When running in AutoCAD mode, Haestad Methods products make use of all the
advantages that AutoCAD has, such as plotting capabilities and snap features. Additionally, AutoCAD commands can be used as you would with any design project. For
example, our products elements and annotation can be manipulated using common
AutoCAD commands.
Explode Elements
In AutoCAD mode, running the AutoCAD Explode command will transform all
custom entities into equivalent AutoCAD native entities. When a custom entity is
exploded, all associated database information is lost. Be certain to save the exploded
drawing under a separate filename.
Use Explode to render a drawing for finalizing exhibits and publishing maps of the
model network. You can also deliver exploded drawings to clients or other individuals
who do not own a Bentley Systems Product license, since a fully exploded drawing
will not be comprised of any ObjectARX proxy objects. For more information, see
Working with Proxies on page 13-1120.
13-1117
Moving Elements
When using AutoCAD mode, the AutoCAD commands Move, Scale, Rotate, Mirror,
and Array can be used to move elements.
To move a node, execute the AutoCAD command by either typing it at the command
prompt or selecting it. Follow the AutoCAD prompts, and the node and its associated
label will move together. The connecting pipes will shrink or stretch depending on the
new location of the node.
Moving Element Labels

When using AutoCAD mode, the AutoCAD commands Move, Scale, Rotate, Mirror,
and Array can be used to move element text labels.
To move an element text label separately from the element, click the element label you
wish to move. The grips will appear for the label. Execute the AutoCAD command
either by typing it at the command prompt, by selecting it from the tool palette, or by
selecting it from the right-click menu. Follow the AutoCAD prompt, and the label will
be moved without the element.
Snap Menu
When using AutoCAD mode, the Snap menu is a standard AutoCAD menu that
provides options for picking an exact location of an object. See the Autodesk
AutoCAD documentation for more information.
Polygon Element Visibility

By default, polygon elements are sent to the back of the draw order when they are
drawn. If the draw order is modified, polygon elements can interfere with the visibility
of other elements. This can be remedied using the AutoCAD Draw Order toolbar.
To access the AutoCAD Draw Order toolbar, right-click on the AutoCAD toolbar and
click the Draw Order entry in the list of available toolbars.
By default, polygon elements are filled. You can make them unfilled (just borders
visible) using the AutoCAD FILL command. After turning fill mode OFF, you must
REGEN to redraw the polygons.
13-1118
Contour Labeling
You can apply contour labels after the contour plot has been exported to the AutoCAD
drawing. The labeling commands are accessed from the Tools menu. The following
options are available:
EndAllows you to apply labels to one end, both ends, or any number of
selected insertion points. After selecting this labeling option, AutoCAD will
prompt you to Select Contour to label. After selecting the contour to label,
AutoCAD prompts for an Insertion point. Click in the drawing view to place
labels at specified points along the contour. When prompted for an Insertion point,
clicking the Enter key once will prompt you to select point nearest the contour
endpoint. Doing so will apply a label to the end of the contour closest to the area
where you clicked. Clicking the Enter key twice when prompted for an Insertion
point will apply labels to both ends of the contour.
InteriorThis option applies labels to the interior of a contour line. You will be
prompted to select the contour to be labeled, then to select the points along the
contour line where you want the label to be placed. Any number of labels can be
placed inside the contour in this way. Clicking the label grip and dragging will
move the label along the contour line.
Group EndChoosing this option opens the Elevation Increment dialog box.
The value entered in this dialog box determines which of the contours selected
will be labeled. If you enter 2, only contours representing a value that is a multiple
of 2 will be labeled, and so on. After clicking OK in this dialog box, you will be
prompted to select the Start point for a line. Contours intersected by the line drawn
thusly will have a label applied to both ends, as modified by the Elevation Increment that was selected.
Group InteriorChoosing this option opens the Elevation Increment dialog box.
The value entered in this dialog box determines which of the contours selected
will be labeled. If you enter 2, only contours representing a value that is a multiple
of 2 will be labeled, and so on. After clicking OK in this dialog box, you will be
prompted to select the Start point for a line.
Change SettingsAllows you to change the Style, Display Precision, and Font
Height of the contour labels.
Delete LabelPrompts to select the contour from which labels will be deleted,
then prompts to select the labels to be removed.
Delete All LabelsPrompts to select which contours the labels will be removed
from, then removes all labels for the specified contours.
13-1119
Importing SewerGEMS Data

When running SewerGEMSin AutoCAD mode, this command imports a selected
SewerGEMS data (.stsw) file for use in the current drawing. The new project file will
now correspond to the drawing name, such as, CurrentDrawingName.stsw. Whenever
you save changes to the network model through SewerGEMS, the associated .stsw
data file is updated and can be loaded into SewerGEMS.
Warning!
A SewerGEMS Project can only be imported to a new, empty

AutoCAD drawing.
Working with Proxies

If you open a Bentley SewerGEMS V8i drawing file on an AutoCAD workstation that
does not have the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i application installed, you will get an
AutoCAD Proxy Information message box. This is because the executable logic for
managing the AutoCAD entities is not available, and the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i
modeling elements are not associated with the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i native database.
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i proxy objects can be moved and erased. However, doing so
will put the drawing state out of sync with the model database if the drawing is saved
with its original name. If this happens, and you later reload the drawing on an
AutoCAD station that is running a Bentley SewerGEMS V8i application, the application will automatically load and will attempt to reconcile any differences it finds by
automatically loading its Database Synchronization routine. (For more information,
see Drawing Synchronization on page 13-1115).
13-1120
Chapter
Theory
14
Click one of the following links to learn about the theory behind Bentley SewerGEMS
V8i:
Fundamental Solution of the Gravity Flow System on page 14-1123
Hydraulic Boundaries on page 14-1197
Dynamic Storage Routing on page 14-1212
Surface (Gutter) System on page 14-1166
Fundamental Solution of the Gravity Flow System

Basic Hydrodynamic Equations
With increasing urbanization and urban renewal impacts driving the drainage and
water quality regulatory framework, the design and analysis of storm water systems
are becoming increasingly complex. The hydraulics characteristics of a drainage
system often exhibit many complicated features, such as tidal or other hydraulic
obstructions influencing backwater at the downstream discharge location, confluence
interactions at junctions of a pipe network, interchanges between surcharged pressure
flow and gravity flow conditions, street-flooding from over-loaded pipes, integrated
detention storage, bifurcated pipe networks, and various inline and offline hydraulic
structures. The time variations of the storm drainage design flow event are increasingly important in verifying total performance and achieving a measure of regulatory
or design policy compliance. To better understand these complicated hydraulic
features and accurately simulate flows in a complicated storm water handling system
hydrodynamic flow models are necessary.
To simulate unsteady flows in storm water collection systems, numerical computational techniques have been the primary tools, and the results from numerical models
are widely used for planning, designing and operational purposes. Since an urban
drainage system can be composed of hundreds of pipes and many hydraulic control
14-1123

structures, the hydraulics in storm system can exhibit very complicated flow conditions. Consequently the numerical stability, computational performance, capabilities
and robustness in handling complicated hydraulic conditions and computational accuracy are the major factors when deciding which approach to use to solve the hydraulic
system.
Although many numerical methods have been developed to simulate the unsteady
flows in sewer and storm water systems, including those based on explicit numerical
schemes and those based on implicit schemes, limitations in most of models exist.
SewerGEMS V8i features engines capable of solving the dynamic solution using both
schemes. Users may select to either user EPA SWMMs native explicit solver or a
custom implicit solver as more fully described in this section. The implicit solver is
the default solver used in SewerGEMS V8i.
Flows in sewers are usually free surface open-channel flows, therefore the SaintVenant equations of one-dimensional unsteady flow in non-prismatic channels or
conduits are the basic equations for unsteady sewer flows. The dynamic model solution uses the following complete and extended equations:
(14.1)
(14.2)
Where
14-1124
time
the distance along the longitudinal axis of the

sewer reach
flow-depth
the active cross-sectional area of flow
A0
the inactive (off-channel storage) cross-sectional

area of flow
Theory
lateral inflow or outflow
the coefficient for nonuniform velocity

distribution within the cross section
gravity constant
So
sewer or channel slope
Sf
friction slope due to boundary turbulent shear

stress and determined by Mannings equation
Se
slope due to local severe expansion-contraction

effects (large eddy loss)
the momentum effect of lateral flow
Equation 14.1 is known as continuity equation and equation 14.2 is known as

momentum equation. The two equations represent a complete unsteady flow hydrodynamic equation system therefore a dynamic model based on them is known as
dynamic routing model or dynamic model.
Sometimes simplified equations, by neglecting a few terms in the momentum equation, are used in a model and the model becomes kinematic or diffusion model
depending on what terms are neglected. This will be further discussed in the special
consideration section.
Numerical Solution Scheme

In the default numerical solver of the Saint-Venant equations, Eq. 14.1 and 14.2,
implicit finite-difference numerical method is used and a weighted four-point implicit
scheme is applied to get numerical solutions. The implicit method is preferred over
explicit since these methods have the advantage of maintaining good stability for large
computational time steps and exhibit robustness in modeling systems that integrate the
complex hydraulic interactions encountered in gravity sewer systems. The scheme
was adopted since it handles unequal distance steps, its stability-convergence properties can be conveniently modified, and the internal (any hydraulic structures, such as
dams, weirs, pumps, manholes etc) and external boundary conditions can be easily
applied. The dynamic model is developed using the following four-point finite-difference scheme:
f
f j 1 fij11 f i j fij1
i
2t j
t
(14.3)
14-1125
f ( fi j11 f i j 1 ) (1 )( fi j1 fi j )
x
xi
(14.4)
( f i j 1 fij11 ) (1 )( f i j f ij1 )
2
(14.5)
in which is a weighting factor and the weighted four-point implicit scheme is unconditionally stable for >0.5. The value of of 0.6-0.8 is found to be optimal in maintaining stability and accuracy for large computational time steps. This is one of the
calculation options which user can modify (NR weighting coefficient). The computation x and t domain and resulting finite differential equations are shown below.
14-1126
Theory
Applying equations 14.3 though 14.5 to the non-linear dynamic equations to each
computational x reach results in a complex matrix of linear system, with all Q and h
at every section are unknown. In order to derive all Q and h, the Newton-Raphson
iteration method is used to solve the finite-difference equations (the linear matrix
system). Convergence of the iterative technique is attained when the difference
between successive iterations for each unknown Q and h is less than a specified tolerance which can be modified by user as a calculation option as well (Y-iteration tolerance).
Exceptional computational efficiency is achieved by special algorithm to iterate a
banded matrix so that a convergence is mostly obtained within 1-5 iterations for each
time step.
Network Algorithms
A sewer network can be as simple as a system of a few dendritic branches or as
complicated as a system of hundreds of branches with many loops and various junctions containing different hydraulic structures and facilities, such as weirs and pumps.
In many situations, the mutual flow interaction must be accounted for to achieve realistic results, particularly for unsteady flows since those confluence junctions can have
significant effects to the traveling dynamic wave in a sewer system.
In order to simulate any complicated sewer networks using implicit numerical
schemes, special algorithms have to be developed for any efficient and accurate solutions. An extended relaxation technique is used in the implicit dynamic sewer model
to decompose the network of a sewer system into many single branches and solve
each individual branch by the four-point implicit scheme described above. In doing so,
it treats the influences of other branches at a junction as either lateral flows (when
14-1127

other branch joins the junction) or as a stage boundary condition (when the branch
downstream end joins a junction). During the numerical solution process, when each
branch is solved by the Newton-Raphson iteration, an assumed lateral inflow or
outflow is added at each junction reach to replace the confluence branch.
The branches are automatically numbered such that the dendritic branches are always
treated before the loop branches and higher order branches (more downstream) are
always solved before the lower order branches. This numbering scheme enables a
stage boundary condition at the downstream of a branch to be determined using the
average computed stages at the two confluence cross-sections at the junction which
the branch joins. In this way, each branch is independently solved one by one using
the estimated lateral flows at each of the branch junctions. If the system has a total of
J junctions, the relaxation is to iterate these J junction-related lateral flows.
The relaxation equation for the lateral flows is:
q* (1 )q** Q
(14.6)
Where
14-1128
q*
the estimated confluence lateral flow (the tributary

branch flow at the downstream) for the next
iteration
q**
previous relaxation iteration estimated lateral flow
the computed discharge at the downstream end of

the connecting branch in the previous iteration
a weighting factor (0<<1.0)
Theory
Values of between 0.8 and 0.9 provide the most efficient convergence for the relaxation iteration. Extensive tests have shown that the relaxation iteration convergence is
achieved within one to three iterations for almost all situations using = 0.6 (a default
value in the calculation option).
A looped branch or split branch is the one linked to a junction node at both upstream
and downstream boundaries. When solving a looped branch for a time step, the
implicit solver does the normal relaxation for the downstream boundary and uses an
estimated flow as the upstream boundary condition, the iterative upstream flow is
based on the diversion junction flow distribution factors which are derived by estimating the exiting link dynamic flow capacities.
The relaxation technique retains the super efficiency of solving the St. Venant equations for each individual branch and applying iterative proper boundary conditions so
that it converges very fast for both boundary relaxation and branch solving.
Internal and External boundaries

Hydraulically, an "internal boundary" is any internal computational reach (a reach is a
length between sections xi and xi+1, such as a pipe, a junction or a manhole node) for
which special equations are used to replace one or both of Equations 14.1 and 14.2
normally applied to a friction-slope-dominated-dynamic reach. Although they are
called internal boundaries they are still part of the St. Venant equation matrix system.
These internal boundaries may include manholes, junctions, controlling structures
14-1129

such as gates, weirs and orifices, storage facilities such as ponds and wet-wells; or any
particular reach which needs to be treated differently other than a normal dynamic
reach, such as one user specifies to use culvert treatment. The external boundaries are
those of most upstream and downstream boundaries in a sewer system for which a
boundary condition, such as a discharge hydrograph, a tidal or stage hydrograph or an
equation defining a relationship between stage and discharge is given, or simply a free
outfall.
The four-point implicit scheme used in the model is very flexible in dealing with any
type of internal boundaries. Because the new equations for replacing Saint-Venant
equations involve only the junction reach and its corresponding elements in the
matrix, the Newton iteration technique can still be used without any case-based modifications. Most commonly used alternative equations for simulating the internal
boundaries are:
A. A storage equation, which accounts for dynamically changing storage volumes in
a junction structure with inflows and outflows, is used to replace the continuity
equation (Eq.14.1) for manholes, ponds and wet-wells. A general storage equation is in the form of:
In which Q(in) and Q(out) are the flows into and out of the node and V is the
volume change during the time step. If user specifies storage area on the ground,
the equation is able to simulate the storing and draining effect duo to the manhole
surcharge caused volume change. The storage areas above the ground can be
represented by either user input table of areas and elevations or by model defined
smooth transition function when there is no surface storage data available, which
determines the areas from the junction, chamber area to about 1200 times that of
the chamber area, the empirical storage equation is defined as
14-1130
Theory
Sa is the ground storage area (acres) and H is the head above the ground, it also
limits to the 1200 times of the manhole chamber area, Sam. User can also specify
that there is no storage above the ground and in this case the manhole overflow
occurs when the manhole HGL is above the ground rim elevation. The street
flooding will be discussed in following section.
B. An energy equation is usually used in sewer manholes or junctions to replace the
Momentum equation (Eq.14.2) if user specifies to add head loss calculation in the
manhole. Different methods to calculate the energy loss are provided. The HGLbased energy equation is generally in the form of
in which hi and hi+1 are HGL's in the upstream and downstream sections and ?h
is the head loss calculated by appropriate loss equation. The head loss methods
include:
Absolute
Standard
HEC-22
Generic
C. Some hydraulic equations, such as weir flow equations and orifice flow equations
are used to automatically generate necessary matrix elements for different
hydraulic controlling structures such as weirs and orifices to replace the
momentum equation. A user specified rating curve can also be used for any
internal boundaries. The control equation is generally in the form of
Qcontl is the flow given by the control structure. For example, a rectangular flow
is defined by:
Where Cw is the weir flow coefficient (typical value is 3.0 - 3.5 for U.S.
customary units and 1.8 - 1.9 for SI units), the exponent e =1.5 for a inline weir
and 1.67 for a side weir which divert flow from the main waterway, H is the head
over the weir, L is the weir crest length. Corrections for end contractions are also
considered in rectangular inline and side weirs. A V-Notch weir flow is defined
by:
14-1131

Where is the triangular weir angle, the orifice flow is defined by:
Where Ao is the area of the opening and Co is the orifice discharge coefficient and
its typical value is 0.6.
Other structures are similar with using appropriate equations.
D. In the case of significant slope changes at a junction which results in an apparent
flow regime change at the junction, such as a drop manhole, sometimes the
normal flow equation or the critical flow equation, depending on the flow regime
change, is used to replace the momentum equation.
The external boundaries are the most upstream end section or most downstream end
section. Mathematically they are known as boundary conditions. Usually an external
upstream boundary condition is a manhole node or open channel section where there
may be a point inflow (either from a linked surface catchment runoff hydrograph or a
user input hydrograph, patterned loads or a flow from a surface gutter). An external
downstream boundary condition can be one of followings:
Free outfall
Time-Elevation curve
Flow-Elevation curve
User defined tailwater (a constant h)
Boundary Element (a pond or wet well)
Normal (use normal flow equation)
Pressure (surcharged) flow and Overflow (street flooding)

Surcharged flow (when the flow exceeds capacity of the conduit so that the conduit
becomes pressurized) is common in storm and sewer systems. The Preissmann slot
method is used for simulating pressure or surcharged flows for gravity conduits. An
artificial slot is added to the conduit and the slot extends vertically from pipe crown to
infinity and over the entire length the pipe, and the width of the slot is usually 0.1% of
the characteristic conduit dimension (diameter for a circular pipe) but not larger than
0.01 ft. The significant advantages in using a hypothetical slot are apparent in simulating the moving transitional interface between open-channel flow and pressure flow,
which can happen anywhere at any time in a sewer system, since the model uses same
equations and numerical schemes and make no special switches between openchannel flows and pressure flows.
14-1132
Theory
In a manhole or junction where flow has open access to the ground, the storage effects
of the ground are accounted by including the surface area and elevation data in the
continuity or the storage equation as described previously. When the water elevation
in the junction rises above the ground, the ground starts to store the water, which
significantly attenuates the unsteady wave. As the water elevation recedes, the stored
water may drain back to the underground sewer system from the junction or may be
lost to surface flow duo to overflow. The overflow occurs when water elevation at the
manhole reaches above defined highest street elevation. The overflow from the
manhole ground is similar flow over a weir so that a weir equation is used to model
the overflow as
Where Qover is the overflow discharge, Lw is the overflow length, C is the discharge
coefficient and C=3.0 is used, H is the head over the overflow elevation.
Pumps and Force Main System(s)

Very often a network involves pumps and pressure force main sub-networks and to
model such gravity-pressure combined system requires hydraulic models to not only
simulate the system dynamic behaviour of both gravity subsystem and pressure
subsystem and the hydraulic interactions between gravity and pressure sub-systems.
From hydraulic dynamic modelling point of view, the governing hydraulics for the
gravity and pressure sub networks is different, the gravity sub-network is governed by
open channel hydraulics while the pressure sub-network is governed by pressure
closed conduit hydraulics and the pump hydraulics and pumps play important role in
the sub-network hydraulic behaviour. In order to provide reliable numerical modelling solution for sewer or storm network involving pumps and force mains, a sewer
dynamic hydraulic model has to be comprehensive and sophisticated to be able to
simulate these two different hydraulics features.
As an integrated part of the numerical sewer modelling engine, a pressure hydraulic
solver is also included for the pump(s) and the pressure (force main) sub network(s).
The gravity and pressure hydraulic solvers are solved simultaneously within every
time step so that the dynamic hydraulic interactions (inflow to the wet well and backwater effect from downstream gravity system) between the gravity sub network and
pressure sub network are fully considered in the integrated numerical engine.
Normally a pressure force main branch can be identified pre-calculation and the pressure hydraulics will be applied to a force main branch all time, there can be instances,
14-1133

however, a gravity branch receives pump flows and partially or fully pressurized
during some times, the Pressmann slot method in the gravity solver then is used for the
branch. A force main branch is pre-identified if the downstream end has the highest
invert so that the flow within the branch is always in the pressure condition.
The challenges to accurately simulate the pump-force-main subsystem are:
Each pump can have its own pump curve
Each pump can have its own control schemes
The dynamic head of each pump is affected by the system response so that it is
also affected by other pump's behaviour
Each pump therefore has its own operating point
The whole system outflow is therefore very dynamic and dependent of every
pump
There are interactions with upstream and downstream gravity element hydraulic
conditions as well
SewerGEMS V8i allows you to add a short suction pipe between a pump and a wet
well. This is done by connecting a pressure pipe between the wet well and the pump
and making the Is Virtual attribute set to False.
The model will consider the friction loss in the suction pipe and use this loss to modify
the pump curve, so that the pump head is still based on the wet well HGL. The suction
loss will not be reflected in its profile although the loss effect is considered in the
calculation as described above.
In order to model complex pumping scenarios with robustness and accuracy, an iterative relaxation technique is used. At each time step t during the dynamic computation,
all pump outflows are simultaneously iterated in a relaxation way until they converge
to a stable value for every pump and its associated pressure sub-network:
in which i represents the outflow from the pump i, k+1 represents an updated value for
the next iteration, and * represents a value determined from the pump curve and
current system hydraulic conditions under current k iteration, i.e., the flow value for
Q(t)i* is determined using the head difference across the pump from the previous iteration and the pump head characteristic curve. The pump flow equations are solved
along with simultaneously solving all the pressure pipe and junction equations in the
pressure sub-network. When there are multiple mumps, all the pumps and their pressure sub-networks are solver simultaneously as well, with some subsystems no longer
14-1134
Theory
iterating when a convergence is achieved during the iteration. The hydraulic conditions are obtained by solving the force main pipes using current pump outflows, ? is a
relaxation factor (0<?<1.0) and ?=0.8 is found to provide robust and fast converging
results and it is used in the pressure solver (not a calculation option).
Special Numerical Techniques

LPI technique
One of the challenging features of unsteady flows in a sewer or storm water drainage
system is the interchanges or moving interfaces of different flow regimes between
subcritical and supercritical flows. This is largely due to the fact that a piped urban
drainage system can have a great variation in the range of slopes of the conduits and it
is common to have significant slope changes at pipe junctions. A good numerical
model for sewer and storm water system must be able to handle the mixed flow
regimes and interchanges with great robustness.
When modeling unsteady flows, the dynamic routing technique, using the four-point
implicit numerical scheme, tends to be less numerically stable than the diffusion (zero
inertia) routing technique for certain mixed flows, especially in the near critical range
of the Froude number (Fr ~ 1) or mixed flows with moving supercritical/subcritical
interfaces. It has been observed that the diffusion technique, which eliminates the two
inertial terms in the momentum equation, produces stable numerical solutions for
flows where Fr is in the range of critical flow (Fr = 1.0) and for supercritical flows. To
take advantage of the diffusion method's stability and retain the accuracy of the fully
dynamic method, the Local Partial Inertial modification (LPI) technique is used. In the
LPI technique, the momentum equation is dynamically modified by a numerical filter,
?, so that the inertial terms are partially or totally omitted based on the time-dependent
local hydraulic conditions. The modified equation and numerical filter are:
in which is a numerical modifier and its value for every finite-difference box
(between xi and xi+1) will be determined at each time step by the following equation:
in which m is a user specified constant (LPI coefficient in the calculation option) and
m 1.0. It is found that smaller values of m tend to stabilize the solution in some cases
while larger values of m provide more accuracy.
Virtual Flow
14-1135

Dry flow condition is common in the storm and sewer modeling. A zero or near zero
flow can cause instability in the implicit numerical model, in order to overcome this
small flow instability a virtual flow method is used. The method adds a small base
flow to every conduit which has a depth < the virtual depth so that the model is stable
for low flow conditions. The virtual flow is determined by a pre-scribed (as a calculation option) virtual depth, the virtual depth is typically between 0.0 to 0.04 ft and the
default value of 0.04 is proven to be stable for almost all conditions. After the calculation is finished for a time step a filtering algorithm is used to filter out the virtual
flow and depth so that the final results are more accurately presented.
Explicit Hydraulic Equations in GVF Solvers

The standard approach to solving hydraulic equations to calculate depth and velocity
in pipe, (given flow, pipe size, roughness, and slope) involves iteratively solving pipe
geometry and head loss equations. For large models, this can be slow.
Most pipes in storm and sanitary sewer systems are circular. It is possible to generate
solutions to the flow equations for circular pipes and fit the solutions to polynomial
equations. These polynomial equations can be solved explicitly (i.e. with no iterations), thereby significantly reducing the time to solve large models with the GVF
solvers.
The equation for normal depth in circular pipes can be given by
14-1136
Theory
This equation is accurate to within 1% over most of its range and no worse than 3%.
For Yn/D > 0.94, there are actually two solutions but the lower one in Figure 1, which
compares the equations to an exact theoretical solution, is used as it is more common.
The equations for critical depth can be given by
Once the critical depth has been determined, the critical slope can be given by
14-1137

The use of the term "explicit" in these equations refers to the fact that the equations are
solved explicitly, not iteratively and differs from discussion of the "Explicit" solver
which refers to the numerical scheme for solving dynamic wave equations. These
equations are only used in the GVF-convex and GVF-rational solvers because in
these, the flow is calculated before the depth.
A description of the derivation of these equations can be found in Jin, M. and Walski,
T., 2011, "Efficient Equations for Circular Partly-full Pipe Hydraulics", EWRI
Conference, palm Springs, Cal.
Surface gutter and networks

The implicit model can model flows in a surface gutter. A surface gutter is an open
channel from a ground of a manhole or junction so that its flow sources can be:
Excessive catchment runoff inflow above the inlet interception capacity, an inlet
can capture all or partial runoff, a partial runoff is determined by a specified
maximum capacity or an inflow-capture curve and other portion of the flow will
go to the surface gutter
Manholes overflow, if the manhole is overflowed and there is a gutter on the

ground then the overflow goes to the gutter and the gutter may flow the overflow
into the system, the manhole overflow is lost from the system if there is no gutter.
Gutter flows are modeled in simple Muskingum-Cunge routing method for flow and
Manning equation for depth. The gutter and its surface network are solved every time
after the primary sewer network is solved.
Branches
The implicit dynamic engine solves the St. Venant equations along straight branches
of conduit or channel starting at the most downstream outfall. Branch 1 starts at the
outfall and upstream until it reaches the first junction. There it follows the junction
with the largest conduit and/or the conduit with the alignment that matches the outlet
pipe alignment. This continues until the branch reaches the most upstream node. At
this point a second branch starts from the largest pipe from the first junction that was
not in branch 1. This branch continues to its most upstream point. Once these branches
are numbered, branches that start at pump station wet wells are traced out to their
source.
An example of the branch labeling is shown in the figure below. The red numbers
indicate branches. In the figure, branch 1 is made up of 30 in. pipes; branch 2 is made
up of 24 in. pipes while the other branches consist of 18 in. pipes.
Figure 14-1: Branch Labeling
14-1138
Theory
Section Count
The element property Section Count refers to the number of spatial sections into
which the element is divided along its length by the implicit numerical engine. For any
element there will be a minimum of five sections. Depending on the value of the
Computational Distance property, which you set in the Property Editor for Calculation
Options, additional sections are added for longer pipes. The default computational
distance is 50 feet so that there will be five sections for any element up to 250 ft.
Beyond that length, a section is added for each 50 ft of length. You can control the
number of sections by increasing or decreasing the computational distance, which will
decrease or increase the number of sections accordingly.
Implicit Solver Special Considerations

Gravity sewer collection systems are subject to a number of special hydraulic conditions that must be considered in developing a full and complete solution scheme.
These special conditions challenge the basic algorithm since they are not explicitly
accounted for in the basic solution for 1-D gravity flow. The hydraulics engine has
been extended to account for these conditions and the numerical adaptations are
described in this section, which includes the following topics:
Pressurized Flow on page 14-1140
Mixed (Transcritical) Flow on page 14-1141
Dry Bed (Low Flow) on page 14-1143
Steep Reaches on page 14-1143
14-1139
Flooding on page 14-1144
Related Topics:
Network Algorithms on page 14-1127
Section Hydraulics on page 14-1146
Pressurized Flow
The typical gravity sewer network is dominated by circular pipe segments. These
pipes are all closed and characterized by a converging top where the hydraulic top
width approaches zero as flow transitions from free surface to pressure. The Preissmann slot method is used for simulating pressure or surcharged flows by adapting the
conceptualization of pressurized flow to fit a free surface model. The slot extends
vertically from pipe crown to infinity and over the entire length the pipe, and the width
of the slot is usually 1% of the characteristic pipe dimension (diameter for a circular
pipe) but not large than 0.02 ft.
Figure 14-2: Transition of a Circular Pipe to the Slot
Since a circular conduit width changes dramatically near the crown and in order to
maintain a smooth transition between conduit width and the slot width, the SewerGEMS V8i model adapted a transitional function of the conduit width:
14-1140
Theory
b
0.98 32
0.28(
)
d
y/d
where 0.98<y/d<1.2
b/d = 0.001 and
y/d>1.2, and
Where
conduit and slot width
circular conduit diameter
flow depth
The maximum width allowed in the slot is 0.01 ft. Also, when the flow depth is above
the diameter d the area remains the full circular section area therefore the slot will
have no impact on the flow continuity.
The significant advantages in using this hypothetical slot are apparent in simulating
the moving transitional interface between open-channel flow and pressure flow, which
can happen anywhere at any time in a sewer system. Since the model applies a unified
set of consistent equations and numerical schemes, it makes no special switches
between open-channel flows and pressure flows, giving rise to a robust solution.
Related Topics:
Mixed (Transcritical) Flow

One of the challenging features in the unsteady flows in a sewer or storm water
drainage system is the interchanging or moving interface of different flow regimes
between subcritical and supercritical flows. This is largely due to the fact that an
urban hydraulic system can experience a large range of slopes of conduits and it is
common to have significant slope changes at many pipe junctions. A good numerical
model for sewer and storm water system has to be able to handle the mixed flow
regimes and interchanges with great robustness.
14-1141

When modeling unsteady flows, the dynamic routing technique using the four-point
implicit numerical scheme tends to be less numerically stable than the diffusion (zero
inertia) routing technique for certain mixed flows, especially in the near critical range
of the Froude number (Fr) or mixed flows with moving supercritical/subcritical interfaces. It has been observed that the diffusion technique, which eliminates the two inertial terms in the momentum equation, produces stable numerical solutions for flows
where Fr is in the range of critical flow (Fr=1.0) and for supercritical flows. To take
advantage of the diffusion method's stability and retain the accuracy of the fully
dynamic method, the Local Partial Inertia modification (LPI) technique is used in the
dynamic sewer model. In the LPI technique, the momentum equation, Equation 11.2,
is modified by a numerical filter, , so that the inertial terms are partially or totally
omitted based on the time-dependent local hydraulic conditions.
The modified equation and numerical filter are:
Q ( Q 2/A)
y
[ +
] + gA( S 0 + S f + S i )+ L = 0
t
x
x
(14.7)
in which is a numerical modifier and its value for every finite-difference box
(between xi and xi+1) will be determined at each time step by the following equation:
={
1.0 - F r
0
F r 1.0
F r > 1.0
(14.8)
in which m is a user specified constant and m 1.0. It is found that smaller values of
m tend to stabilize the solution in some cases while larger values of m provide more
accuracy.
The LPI technique was developed by Dr. Ming Jin and Dr. Danny Fread and this technique has been adapted by Federal dynamic models such as NWS Fldwav model,
USACE HEC-RAS unsteady flow model and EPA-SWMM model.
Related Topics:
14-1142
Theory
Dry Bed (Low Flow)

For the dry flow condition, the numerical model applies a very small initial steady
flow (virtual flow) at the start the simulation. This virtual flow is applied system-wide
and has negligible effect on the computational results over the full simulation. The
engine distributes and manages the virtual flow allocation and de-allocation dynamically across all the network branches and loops over the full course of the simulation,
and sophisticated algorithms are developed to distribute the virtual flows in the way
that they will not be accumulative and they have only local impacts on the very low
flow conditions. These virtual flow assignments are based on a tiny threshold value
that is dynamically adjusted over the duration of the analysis. A virtual flow filter
algorithm adjusts the results for the virtual flow quantities and depths by subtracting
the virtual flow effects from the hydraulic results at each time step at each solution
point over the network.
To users, these virtual flows are invisible and there is no practical impact on the
computational results.
Related Topics:
Steep Reaches
Unlike a natural river, a storm drainage system can often have pipes of very steep
slopes, sometimes more than 30%. The flows in such steep pipes are overwhelmingly
very supercritical. A kinematical treatment is applied on such very steep pipes in
which the Manning equation is used to replace the momentum equation during the
solution process.
Related Topics:
14-1143
Flooding
A unique hydraulic condition in the storm sewer modeling is the overcharged-flowresulted street surface flooding. This is the condition in which the drainage flow into
the sewer pipe is much larger than the sewer capacity and the depth is built higher than
the ground surface elevation. In addition, at the sewer junctions (manholes) where
there may be open access to the ground, the flow starts to go upward through the
manhole openings, overtop the manhole rims.
There are two scenarios after the street flooding occurs:
If there is a surface gutter or channel connected to the manhole, the overflowing

water will join the surface gutter or channel and will be accounted for and simulated as part of the flows in the gutter subsystem. These flows may drain back to
the sewer subsystem somewhere downstream.
If there is no surface gutter or channel connected to the overflowed manhole, the

overtopped flows leave the sewer system and these flows are lost to the system;
this will be reflected by a flow volume loss. In this condition, there may also be a
storage area above the ground elevation and below the user-specified overtop
elevation. The water stored in the storage area will drain back to the manhole
when the water elevation recesses. Users can specify the storage areas and the
street-flooding-overtop elevation. A default overtop elevation is the ground rim
elevation, assuming there is no storage effects.
The implicit hydraulic engine treats the street overtopping overflow as weir flow and
uses a weir equation to determine the overflow. The weir crest elevation is the userspecified street overtop elevation and the weir length is determined by an empirical
equation:
WL = 6.0(1 + dh)
Where
(14.9)
WL
overflow weir crest length
dh
the head over the overflow weir
Related Topics:
14-1144
Theory
Convex Routing
Convex routing is a hydrologic routing technique used to calculate the hydrograph at
the downstream end of a link, given its value at the upstream end. It is used in all EPS
runs of the GVF-convex solver.
The underlying logic in the convex routing method is that the routed outflow for a
time step is based on the inflow and outflow for the previous time step. Each outflow
ordinate is calculated as:
Ot t cI t 1 c Ot
Where:
Ot + = Outflow at time t + t
= Current time (s, min)
t = Hydrologic time step (s, min)
c = Convex routing coefficient
It = Inflow at time t (l/s, gpm)
Ot = Outflow at time t (l/s, gpm)
The convex routing coefficient is essentially a ratio of the hydrologic time step and
representative flow travel time through the pipe and is calculated as follows:
c t
V t
L tt
Where:
t = Hydrologic time step (s)
tt = Travel time (s)
V = Velocity established for representative flow. (m/s, ft/s)
L = Length of pipe (m, ft)
14-1145

The velocity used to calculate the coefficient is either the normal velocity or full flow
velocity generated for a user-specified percentage of the peak of the inflow
hydrograph. In other words, if the percentage of the peak flow is greater than the
capacity of the pipe then the full-flow velocity is used. If the percentage of the peak
flow is less than the capacity the flow velocity for normal depth is used.
Note:
You can specify the percentage of the peak flow, which is used
to calculate the Convex Routing coefficient for each pipe by
entering the value for the property Peak Flow Ratio % in the
Calculation options when the GVF-convex solver is the active
solver. The values typically range between 50% and 75%.
The higher the percentage of flow the faster the velocity used to calculate the convex
routing coefficient, hence the closer the routed hydrograph will be to a pure translation
of the inflow hydrograph.
The user-specified percentage can be modified in the calculation options. A typical
value is around 75 % but can be modified for oddly shaped hydrographs with sharp
uncharacteristic peaks or for calibration purposes.
In the case of negative sloping pipe, the convex routing coefficient can be very small
and overestimate peak flow attenuation. In these pipes, there is usually very little peak
attenuation. The user can provide a value for C for negative sloping pipe on the order
of 0.3 to 0.5 to achieve more realistic results for this case. The value is entered in the
property "Minimum convex C for negative conduit". The default value is zero.
Note:
Known Flows are not routed. Known Flows override other

known flows, and are not cumulative going downstream.
Section Hydraulics
Within the hydraulics solver the decomposed network branches and loops comprise a
series of reach segments and/or structures that are logically ordered from upstream to
downstream by the numerical engine. Each reach segment consists of either a prismatic conduit section or a natural channel segment described by separately defined
upstream and downstream open channel sections.
This section includes the following topics:
14-1146
Conduit Shapes on page 14-1147
Natural Reach Shapes on page 14-1161
Virtual Link Types on page 14-1023
Theory
Related Topics:
Network Algorithms on page 14-1127
Implicit Solver Special Considerations on page 14-1139
Conduit Shapes
The supported conduit shapes are shown in Figures 11-2 to 11-21. Each shape is
parameterized by one, two, or more characteristic dimensions as shown in the reference figure. In this model, a conduit is taken to be a prismatic (constant-shaped)
conveyance segment that is defined by a single shape. Conduits do not have to be
closed sections, so prismatic design channels can be modeled using conduit elements.
The allowable conduit shapes include:
Circular Channel on page 14-1148
Trapezoidal Channel on page 14-1148
Basket Handle on page 14-1149
Ellipse on page 14-1150
Horseshoe on page 14-1150
Egg on page 14-1151
Semi-ellipse on page 14-1152
Arch on page 14-1153
Pipe-Arch on page 14-1154
Semi-Circle on page 14-1155
Catenary on page 14-1156
Gothic on page 14-1156
Modified Basket Handle on page 14-1157
Triangle on page 14-1157
Rectangular Channel on page 14-1158
Irregular Open Channel on page 14-1158
Irregular Closed Section on page 14-1159
Rectangular-Rounded on page 14-1159
Rectangular-Triangular on page 14-1160
14-1147
Power on page 14-1160
Parabola on page 14-1161
In addition, SewerGEMS V8i supports the following:
Circular Channel
Figure 14-3: Circular Channel Shape
A circular pipe or channel is simply defined by its Diameter (D). Optimal conveyance
is achieved when the flow depth is about 0.938*D.
Trapezoidal Channel
Figure 14-4: Trapezoidal Channel Shape
14-1148
Theory
A trapezoidal channel requires the input of the height (H) and its bottom width (W).
Additionally, the left (SL)and right (SR) side slopes should be provided.
Basket Handle
Figure 14-5: Basket-Handle Shape
The required input to define the size of a Basket-Handle Arch is simply its Height or
Rise (H). Unique to basket-Handle shape is the ratio of the bottom width (W) of the
Arch to be .99135 of the Height (H). The remaining shape characteristics are derived
based upon internal look up tables to the SWMM implementation. These auxiliary
attributes include:
14-1149

Ellipse
Figure 14-6: Ellipse Shape
An Elliptical shaped pipe is defined by its Height or Rise (H). The elliptical coefficients of A and B respectively correspond to H/2 and W/2.
Horseshoe
Figure 14-7: Horseshoe Shape
14-1150
Theory
The required input to define the size of a Horseshoe Arch is simply its Height or Rise
(H). The remaining attributes are derived based upon tables internal to the SWMM
implementation. Sometimes referred to as "Boston Horseshoe Arch", the unique cross
sectional characteristics are based upon a top radius equal to half of its height. The
definition of the bottom half of the arch is more complex and based upon internal
angles
.,
, and
Egg
Figure 14-8: Egg Shape
The only user input to define a Egg Shaped Arch is its Height or Rise (H). The
remaining attributes are derived based upon tables internal to the SWMM implementation. Its unique cross sectional characteristics are based upon a top radius equal to
one-third of its height. The definition of the bottom portion of the arch is more
complex and based upon internal angles
and
14-1151

Semi-ellipse
Figure 14-9: Semi-Ellipse Shape
The required input to define the size of a Semi-Elliptical Arch is simply its Height or
Rise (H). Unique to this arch shape is that characteristic that at its widest dimension,
at its base, the width is equal to its height (H). The shape is geometrically defined
with the function of an ellipsis, where the traditional elliptical coefficients of A and B
respectively correspond to H/2 and H.
14-1152
Theory
Arch
Figure 14-10: Arch Shape
The cross sectional shape of an Arch link is loosely defined by its Span and Rise.
When computing using the Implicit or Explicit (SWMM) engine in CivilStorm or
SewerGEMS only these two parameters are required. The remaining attributes are
derived based upon internal look-up tables native to the EPA-SWMM computations,
and therefore, differs slightly from the Pipe-Arch on page 14-1154 conduit shape.
The GVF-Rational and GVF-Convex solvers also support the Arch conduit shape
selection.
14-1153

Pipe-Arch
RB
RT
Rise
RC
B
Span
Figure 14-11: Pipe-Arch Shape
14-1154
Theory
The Pipe-Arch shape originates from FHWA publications, and differs slightly from
the more generically defined Arch on page 14-1153 shape from SWMM. Currently,
a conduit may given a Pipe-Arch conduit shape only when the conduit type is a
conduit catalog reference. Pipe-Arch shape is supported by the GVF-Rational and
GVF-Convex solvers. In addition to Rise and Span, the cross sectional characteristics
of a Pipe-Arch include:
Rc = Corner Radius
Rb = Bottom Radius
Rt = Top Radius
B = Bottom Distance
Full Area = cross sectional full flow area of the pipe
Semi-Circle
Figure 14-12: Semi-Circular Shape
A Semi-Circular Arch is sized only by its Rise or Height (H). The semi-circular shape
has a radius (R) equal to its Height (H). At its largest, at its base, its width is twice the
Height (H).
14-1155

Catenary
Figure 14-13: Catenary Shape
The only user input to define a Catenary Arch is its Height or Rise (H). The shape is
principally defined with the cosine function, where the coefficients a and b are determined within SWMM computations.
Gothic
Figure 14-14: Gothic Shape
A Gothic Arch is well defined based upon its Height or Rise (H). At its greatest width
(W) the unique proportion of W to H is 1.115. Also unique to this arch type is the
existence of the equilateral triangle with side lengths of W.
14-1156
Theory
Modified Basket Handle
Figure 14-15: Modified Basket-Handle Shape
The Modified Basket Handle Arch is only defined by its Rise or Height (H) and its
Width (W). The top portion is a semi-circular in shape with a radius equal in size to
half its Width (W).
Triangle
Figure 14-16: Triangle Shape
A triangular shaped channel varies in its input requirements. When based solely upon
its height (H) and its width (W) the channels left (SL) and right (SR) side slopes are
assumed equivalent. Otherwise the channel could be defined based upon user
provided height (H) and left (SL) and right (SR) side slopes.
14-1157

Rectangular Channel
Figure 14-17: Rectangular Channel Shape
Irregular Open Channel
Figure 14-18: Irregular Open Channel Shape
An irregular open channel is defined by a series of Station and Elevation points.

Referenced when using a Bank Channel Roughness type, the Left and Right overbanks are highlighted in the above example.
14-1158
Theory
Irregular Closed Section
Figure 14-19: Irregular Closed Section Shape
Rectangular-Rounded
Figure 14-20: Rectangular-Rounded Shape
A Rectangular-Rounded shape is completely defined by three attributes:

H = Height
W = Width
14-1159

D = Radius of the rounded portion of the channel
Rectangular-Triangular
Figure 14-21: Rectangular-Triangular Shape
A Rectangular-Triangular shape is completely defined by three attributes:

H1 = Height of the entire cross section
H2 = Height of the triangular shaped section of the channel
W = Width of the entire cross section
Power
Figure 14-22: Power Shape
14-1160
Theory
A channel defined with the power function requires the input of the exponent (n) to
the following general form equation: y = xn
Parabola
Figure 14-23: Parabola Shape
A channel defined with a general form parabolic function requires the input of the
Height (H), Width (W) and the quadratic coefficient (a) to the following equation:
y = ax2
Natural Reach Shapes

As in most river models, a natural channel branch can be taken as a series of gradually
varying sections. Natural channels segments that describe a branch are defined using
an upstream and downstream open channel section element. The following section
shapes may be used to define natural channels:
Irregular Closed Section
Trapezoidal
For natural sections, the engine will automatically insert the required computational
sections along the reach by interpolating a top width versus elevation table that is
dynamically built according to the maximum number of input points that describes
either end-section.
14-1161

Note:
The SWMM engine does not support the notion of a natural

channel described between two open channels cross-sections.
So, when solving using the SWMM engine, each open channel
reach will be modeled using the upstream section shape. Using
a conduit element with an irregular shape will provide
computational consistency between the SWMM and implicit
engines.
Related Topics:
Virtual Conduits
User defined conduits can be treated as virtual conduits by setting the Section Type to
Virtual. Virtual conduits are not available in the Conduit Catalog.
In the implicit and explicit solvers, the virtual conduits have length but no diameter/
rise and span. In these solvers, the virtual conduit must have a control structure (e.g.
weir, orifice) assigned to it. If a control structure link is imported from an EPASWMM model, a virtual conduit is created with the control structure.
For the GVF solver, virtual conduits can only be used for diversion links. If a control
structure is placed on a diversion link, it will be ignored since the diversion is
controlled with the diversion rating table or cutoff value.
When switching between the solvers, it is best to set up two physical alternatives when
flow splits are involved. The one associated with the implicit or explicit solvers will
have a control structure while the one with the GVF solvers with be a diversion link.
Both of them can be virtual. It is best to make these links short so that they look like
point structures in profiles.
Virtual Pressure Pipes

The Bentley storm and sanitary sewer models treat pumps as nodes connected to
suction and discharge piping. However, not all solvers were set up with that representation and not all pumps have suction lines (e.g. submersible pumps).
14-1162
Theory
In the GVF solvers, there is no benefit from using virtual pressure pipes. For the GVFconvex solver, they are treated as not virtual even if they were set up as virtual in
another solver (with the diameter and length taken from prototype properties). In the
GVF-rational solver, no head loss is calculated for the virtual pressure pipes. When
moving between solvers, the user should remember that head loss is calculated in the
GVF-convex solver so the results may not agree between solvers.
In the implicit solver, pressure pipes connected to pumps may or may not be virtual.
When implicit pressure pipes are virtual, no head loss is calculated and the flow is
simply moved from the upstream to the downstream nodes on the pipe. For example, a
virtual suction pipe can be used to represent a submersible pump which has no suction
pipe but is shown with a suction pipe in the drawing.
In the explicit solver, no head loss is calculated for virtual pressure pipes. When a
SWMM model is imported into a Bentley model, a virtual pressure pipe is placed on
both the suction and discharge side of the pump and the explicit solver is set as the
default.
In general, the most accurate calculation of pump flows result if virtual pipes are not
used. If they must be used, then they should be kept short in the drawing. For example,
in SWMM, it is possible to have the discharge side of a pump connected to a node
thousands of feet away with no consideration of the interconnecting force main. This
should be avoided if accuracy in pump behavior is important.
When moving a model between solvers, where virtual pipes are used in the implicit
and explicit solvers, it is advisable to set up a different physical alternative for the
solvers.
Related Topic:
Roughness Models
The SewerGEMS V8i solver uses the Manning's equation to evaluate the friction
slope term, Sf , in Equation 11-3:
14-1163
n2 Q Q
QQ
S f 2 2 4/3 2
AR
K
(14.10)
Where
Manning coefficient for friction
unit conversion factor (1.49 for US Customary

and 1.0 for SI units)
hydraulic radius
flow conveyance factor
The Mannings n is a user-defined value that introduces the effects of conduit,

channel, or gutter roughness. The K that is actually applied for a segment between two
interpolated locations along the computational stream is evaluated by averaging the K
values computed for the two locations.
For more information on the application of this roughness model, see Implementations on page 14-1164.
Related Topics:
Implementations
This section describes the applications of the roughness model available in Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i.
Single Roughness
The simplest application of the Manning's model is to supply a single roughness value
to the segment being modeled.
Horizontal Variation
The modeler can describe the horizontal variation of roughness across a natural
section. Horizontally varied roughness is automatically pre-processed and described
to the engine as a vertical variation using Pavloskiis Method:
14-1164
Theory
n=
Where
(P n
N
2
N
)
=
2
2
2
Pn
1 1 + P2 n2 + + PN nN
P
Roughness coefficient
Weighted perimeter
(14.11)
Subscripts represents subdivisions of one given

section
Overbank Segments
This roughness model is widely applied in floodplain analysis and is a useful way to
describe the overbank and channel components of a river reach. In these circumstances the conveyance factor for the section is computed as follows:
KL
KC
KR
nL
nC
nR
AL RL 2 / 3
AC RC 2 / 3
AR RR 2 / 3
K K L KC K R
Where
left floodplain
channel
right floodplain
Overbank segment manning types are converted to horizontal variation roughness

types, which can be converted to vertical variation types using Pavlovskiis Method.
14-1165
Surface (Gutter) System

Vertical Variation
A Manning's n versus depth relationship can be supplied. In the case of irregular
sections, the engine simply interpolates the roughness value to apply for each interpolated internal top width value that is developed by the algorithm for the section.
Flow Roughness
Describing Manning's n versus flow is a roughness model that can be used in natural
river applications where the flow record can be used to calibrate the n.
Related Topics:

Storm sewer systems are typically designed and constructed for smaller, more
frequent storms. Runoff from large, less frequent events is usually not entirely
conveyed by storm sewers; rather, it flows over the land surface in roadways and in
natural and constructed open channels. Therefore storm sewer conveyance networks
and surface gutter drainage and conveyance networks are integrated into a whole
urban storm sewer infrastructure system. SewerGEMS V8i is capable of modeling a
complete integrated subsurface storm sewer and surface gutter (channel) drainage
system.
Fundamental Solution of the Gutter System

The SewerGEMS V8i model simulates the gutter subsurface flows using diffusion
routing algorithms. A nonlinear Muskingum-Cunge routing method is used to route
the flows in gutters and the Mannings equation is used to compute water depths in the
gutters.
An inlet receives both runoff flow from the catch basin and flows from gutters. Since
it is an open pathway to subsurface sewers, it is possible that the subsurface sewers
can become pressurized and as the overloaded flow increases and sewer water elevation rises above the inlet elevation so that "street flood" or "overflow" occurs in which
water flows from the subsurface sewer to the ground through the manhole and the
inlet. Under this condition, the water also finds its way to gutters and flows downstream if there is a gutter connected to the catch basin. This reverse interaction
between subsurface sewer and surface gutter is also properly modeled by SewerGEMS V8i model. Therefore a gutter can carry excessive flow from an inlet or overflow from a catch basin.
14-1166
Theory
There is a difference between a gutter as a surface drainage network and an open
channel as part of a sewer network in a SewerGEMS V8i model. A gutter (or channel)
in a surface network is always associated with a catch basin inlet and the main source
of its flow comes from the excess water of the inlet or the overflow from the overcharged sewer catch basin. On the other hand, an open channel can be a part of the
subsurface sewer system and a channel can be directly linked to a conduit.
Inlet Hydraulics
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i considers the following inlet hydraulic principles:
HEC-22 Inlet Capacity Calculations on page 14-1168
Flows in Gutters on Grade on page 14-1151
Flow in Ditch or Median Section on Grade on page 14-1188
Inlet Openings on page 14-1168
Grate Inlet on Grade on page 14-1171
Curb Inlet on Grade on page 14-1173
Slot Inlet on Grade on page 14-1175
Combination Inlet on Grade on page 14-1176
Grate Inlet in Sag on page 14-1176
Curb Inlet in Sag on page 14-1178
Slot Inlet in Sag on page 14-1180
Combination Inlet in Sag on page 14-1181
Location of Flows on page 14-1139
14-1167
14.0.1
HEC-22 Inlet Capacity Calculations

Note:
Pavement drainage requires consideration of gutter flow and

inlet capacity. The design of these elements is dependent on
storm frequency and the allowable spread of storm water on the
pavement surface.
The primary methodology used by Bentley SewerGEMS V8i to perform pavement

drainage and inlet computations is described in Chapter 4 of the HEC-22 manual:
Urban Drainage Design Manual, 2009. This chapter is included as Pavement
Drainage on page 4-1. Related charts can be found in the Appendices. Most of the
information presented in HEC-22 Chapter 4 was originally published in the 2nd
edition, August 2001 Pub No FHWA-NHI-01-021FHWA, and AASHTOs Model
Drainage Manual, 1991.
This section presents an overview of the HEC-22 methodology used by Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i. For more information, refer to Pavement Drainage on page 4-1 or
the HEC-22 documentation.
Inlet Openings
Inlet openings are divided into 4 classifications, as illustrated in the following figure:
14-1168
Theory
Figure 14-24: Inlet Openings
For details on each type of inlet, refer to the HEC-22 Manual, Chapter 4 (see Pavement Drainage on page 6-183).
14-1169

Note:
Do not confuse gutter depression and local depression:

The gutter depression is the depression of the gutter relative to
the pavement normal cross-slope named a on the figure below,
which shows a gutter and inlet cross section. It is also referred
to as a continuously depressed gutter.
The local depression is the depression at the location of the inlet
(a in the figure below). It does not exist in the gutter upstream or
downstream of the inlet. It is measured from the gutter slope.
Figure 14-25: Continuous Gutter Depression and Local Depression
Figure 9.6 illustrates the concept of local depression versus gutter depression used by
HEC-22, with:
atotal = a + a'
Where
(14.12)
Gutter depression (mm, in)
a'
Local depression (mm, in)
atotal
Total depression at location of inlet (mm, in)
Inlets on Grade
Inlets located on a grade (SL > 0) are characterized by an efficiency, E, for a given set
of conditions:
E=
14-1170
Qi
Q
(14.13)
Theory
Where
Inlet efficiency (unitless)
Total gutter flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
Qi
Intercepted flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
The flow that is not intercepted is called carryover or bypass flow. It is defined as
follows:
Qb = Q Qi
Where
Qb
(14.14)
=
Bypass low (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
Grate Inlet on Grade
Figure 14-26: Grate Inlet

As previously defined, the total gutter flow, Q, is composed of a frontal flow Qw and a
side flow Qs.
The ratio Rf of frontal flow intercepted to total frontal flow is expressed as:
Rf = 1 Kcf (V V0)
Where
(14.15)
Kcf
0.295 SI, 0.090 U.S. customary
Average velocity in gutter (m/sec., ft/sec.)
V0
Gutter velocity at which splash-over first happens

(m/sec., ft/sec.)
14-1171

Note:
If V < V0, then Rf = 1 (all the frontal flow is intercepted).

Also, Rf cannot exceed 1.0. The splash-over velocity, V0 is a
function of the grate type and the grate length, L. Velocity is
computed as the uniform flow velocity, based on gutter's cross
sectional flow area. For the same gutter flow depth, this area
can vary significantly by gutter shape.
The frontal flow intercepted, Qwi, is:

Qwi = RfQw
The ratio Rs of side flow intercepted to side flow is expressed as:
K csV 1.8
Rs = 1 / 1 +
S x L2.3
Where
(14.16)
Kcs
Grate length (m, ft)
Sx
Applicable traverse slope of the gutter at the edge

of the grate. This is road or gutter cross slope in
Conventional and V-Shaped gutters, and the
tangential slope at that point for a Parabolic gutter.
The side flow intercepted, Qsi, is therefore:

Qsi = RsQs
(14.17)
The total flow intercepted is:

Qi = Qwi + Qsi
Where
Qi
(14.18)
Total flow intercepted (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
The bypass flow is then:

Qb = Q Qi
14-1172
(14.19)
Theory
Where
Qb
Bypass flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
The efficiency of the grate is expressed as:

E = RfE0 + Rs(1 E0)
(14.20)
E = Qi /Q
(14.21)
Or,
Curb Inlet on Grade
L
h
Figure 14-27: Curb Inlet

The curb opening length Lr that would be required to intercept 100% of a flow Q on a
pavement with a uniform cross slope is computed as:
0.6
LT = K C Q
Where
0.42
S L0.3
1
nS x
(14.22)
LT
Curb opening length required to intercept 100% of

gutter flow
Kc
In order to account for a locally or continually depressed gutter, an equivalent cross

slope, Se, is computed.
Se Sx Sw Eo
14-1173

where:
E o = ratio of flow in the depressed section to gutter flow
S w = cross slope of the gutter measured from the cross slope of the pavement, S x
Note:
For Parabolic gutters, Sx is the tangential slope near the curb

opening. Sx is computed at the larger distance of the local
depression width or a small finite length from the curb opening.
a = gutter depression (in)
Sx
Q total
Sw
S'w
Figure 14-28: Composite Gutter Section

S'w is calculated as:
S w =
S w =
Where
14-1174
atotal
1000W SI Units
(14.23)
atotal
12W U.S. Customary Units
(14.24)
S'w
Gutter cross-slope at inlet locationmeasured

from pavement cross-slope (m/m, ft/ft)
Sw
Gutter cross-slope upstream of inletdoes not

account for local depression (m/m, ft/ft)
atotal
Total depression at inlet locationincludes local

and continuous gutter depression (mm, in)
Larger of the gutter width and local-depression

width (m, ft)
Theory
The curb opening length LT that would be required to intercept 100% of a flow Q on a
pavement with a composite cross slope at the location of the inlet is:
0.6
LT = KT Q
0.42
S L0.3
1
nSe
(14.25)
The efficiency E of a curb opening shorter than the required length for total interception is:
1.8
L
E = 1- 1 LT
Where
(14.26)
=
Curb opening length (m, ft)
Slot Inlet on Grade
Figure 14-29: Slot Inlet
The efficiency of a Slotted Inlet on Grade with an opening width greater than or equal
to 45 mm (1.75 in) is calculated using the same equations as for a curb opening inlet of
the same length.
14-1175

Combination Inlet on Grade
L
h
Figure 14-30: Combination Inlet
HEC-22 distinguishes two cases:
The grate and the curb opening are placed side by side. In this case, the flow interception by the curb opening is negligible, and the capacity of the combination
inlet is identical to that of the grate alone.
The curb opening is extended upstream of the grate in order to intercept debris
that could otherwise clog the grate inlet. The flow intercepted by the combination
inlet is calculated as the flow intercepted by the curb opening upstream of the
grate inlet, plus the portion of the remaining flow intercepted by the grate.
Inlets in Sag
Note:
Inlets in sag location operate as weirs at low water depth and as

orifices at higher depth.
Grate inlets alone are not recommended, as clogging of the
grate is likely to occur.
In contrast with inlets on grade, the efficiency of an inlet located in sag is always
assumed to be 1.0 (or 100%).
Grate Inlet in Sag
Figure 14-31: Grate Inlet
14-1176
Theory
The flow Qiw intercepted by a grate inlet operating as a weir is:
Q iw C w 2 Wd 1
Where
1.5
C w Ld 2
1.5
Width of the grate (m, ft)
Length of the grate (m, ft)
CW
Weir Coefficient (1.66 SI, 3.0 U.S. customary)
d1
Flow depth at middle of grate(m, ft)
d2
Flow depth at side of grate opposite the curb (m,

ft)
The flow Qio intercepted by a grate inlet operating as an orifice is:
Q io 0.67 AgP 2 gd
Where
12
Qio
Capacity of the grate operating as an orifice (cfs,

m3/s)
Clear opening area of grate (ft2, m2)
Average depth of flow over grate (ft, m)
Acceleration due to gravity (ft/s2, m/s2)
The intercepted flow Qi is conservatively calculated at any flow depth by using the
lesser of the intercepted flows computed using the weir or orifice equation:
Qi = min(Qiw , Qio )
(14.27)
This accounts for the three stages: weir flow, orifice flow and transitional flow.
14-1177

Note:
The depth of flow over the grate opening could vary significantly
with gutter shape and when considering local depression.
Curb Inlet in Sag
L
h
Figure 14-32: Curb Inlet
Curb inlets are divided into 3 categories, based on their throat geometry: horizontal
(most common), vertical, and inclined, as defined in the figure below.
di
do
do
do = di
d o = d i -(h/2)
h
a. Horizontal Throat
c. Vertical Throat
do
h
d o = d i -(h/2)Sin 0
b. Inclined Throat
Figure 14-33: Curb Inlet Throat Types
Where
14-1178
Height of curb-opening inlet (m, ft)
di
Water depth at lip of curb (m, ft)
do
Effective head, measured from center of orifice

throat (m, ft)
Throat angle for inclined-throat inlets
Theory
Weir Flow
A curb inlet in a sag, without a locally or continuously depressed gutter, operates as a
weir for depths at curb (measured from the normal cross slope) that are less than or
equal to the curb opening height.
This condition can be expressed as:
dh
Where
(14.28)
d
Depth at curbi.e., d = TSx (m, ft)
In the case of a depressed curb opening (local depression) or a continuously depressed

gutter, the previous condition becomes:
d+
Where
atotal
h
1000
U.S. Customary SI Units
(14.29)
Total depression, measured at inlet (mm, in)
Depth at curb, measured from normal cross-slope

(m, ft)
The intercepted flow Qiw by a curb-opening inlet operating as a weir, with a locally or
continuously depressed gutter, is:
Qiw = Cw1(L + 1.8W)d1.5
Where
(14.30)
Cw1
Weir coefficient (1.25 SI, 2.3 U.S. customary)
Curb-opening length (m, ft)
Lateral width of depression (m, ft)
However, if L is greater than or equal to 3.6 m (12 ft), then the following equation is
used, which is the same as the equation for curb-opening inlets without depression:
Qiw = Cw2Ld1.5
Where
Cw2
(14.31)
=
Weir coefficient (1.6 SI, 3.0 U.S. customary)
14-1179

Orifice Flow
A curb inlet in a sump operates as an orifice for depths at the lip of a curb opening that
are greater than 1.4 times the curb opening height:
di 1.4h
(14.32)
The intercepted flow Qio by a curb-opening inlet (depressed or undepressed) operating

as an orifice is:
Qio CohL(2gdo)0.5
(14.33)
which is also expressed as:
0.5
Qio = Co hL 2 g di - sin Q

Where
(14.34)
90 for horizontal-throat inlets, 0 for verticalthroat inlets
Transition Flow
At depths between 1.0 and 1.4 times the opening height, the flow is in a transition
stage.
This intercepted flow Qi is calculated conservatively in this depth range as:
Qi = min(Qiw, Qio)
(14.35)
Slot Inlet in Sag

Weir Flow
Slotted inlets located in sag operate as weirs to water depths, d (measured at the curb
from the normal cross slope), of about 0.06 m (0.2ft).
The intercepted flow Qiw is expressed as:
Qiw = CwLd1.5
14-1180
(14.36)
Theory
Where
Cw
Weir coefficientvaries with flow depth and slot

length (typically 1.4 SI, 2.48 U.S. customary)
Water depth at curb, measured from normal cross

slope (m, ft)
Slot length (m, ft)
Orifice Flow
At water depths (measured at the curb) greater than about 0.12 m (0.4 ft), slotted inlets
perform as orifices.
The intercepted flow Qio is expressed as:
Qio = 0.8LW(2gd)0.5
Where
(14.37)
Slot width (m, ft)
Water depth at slot (m, ft)
Transitional Flow
At depths between 0.06 m (measured at the slot from the normal cross slope) and 0.12
m, the flow is in a transition stage.
The intercepted flow Qi is conservatively calculated in this depth range as:
Qi = min(Qiw, Qio)
(14.38)
Combination Inlet in Sag

According to HEC-22, combination inlets are considered advisable for use in sags
where hazardous ponding occurs.
Conservatively, the ponding depth computed at a combination inlet in sag will be the
depth which corresponds to the smaller of orifice or weir governing intercept, at each
opening. Often, the curb and grate inlet openings are of equal length. However, for
improved efficiency a longer curb inlet opening may be desirable.
Equal Length Inlets
14-1181

Equal length inlets refer to a grate inlet placed along the side of a curb-opening inlet of
identical length. At lower flow depths, the grate inlet is operating as a weir and the
interception capacity of the curb is negligible (unless the grate is clogged, in which
case the curb is intercepting some flow). The flow Qiw intercepted by the combination
is then:
Qiw = CwPd1.5
Where
(14.39)
Cw
Weir coefficient (typically 1.66 SI, 3.0 U.S.

customary)
Perimeter of grate, disregarding side along curb

(m, ft)
Flow depth at curb (m, ft)
At higher flow depths, both the grate inlet and the curb-opening inlet are operating as
orifices.
Note:
The clear opening area of the grate depends on the opening ratio
of the grate (HEC-22 defines an opening ratio for each grate
type), as well as the clogging factor you specify.
The flow Qio intercepted by the combination inlet operating as an orifice is:
Qio = CoAg(2gd)0.5 + CohL(2gdo)0.5
Where
(14.40)
Co
Orifice coefficient (Co = 0.67)
Ag
Clear opening of grate (m2, ft2 )
Gravitational acceleration (9.81 m/sec.2, 32.16 ft/

sec.2 )
Height of curb-opening inlet (m, ft)
do
Head, measured from the center of the orifice

throat (m, ft)
Sweeper Inlet
A sweeper inlet refers to a grate inlet placed at the downstream end of a longer curb
opening inlet. A sweeper inlet is more efficient than an equal length combination inlet
in intercepting debris.
14-1182
Theory
Note that since the HEC-22 manual is not very explicit about this type of inlet in sag,
some assumptions were made in order to define the flows for this inlet.
The flow Qi intercepted by a sweeper inlet is the sum of the flow Qie as calculated
above for an equal length combination inlet of length L (where L is the length of the
grate) and the flow Qic intercepted by the additional length L (upstream of the grate)
of the curb opening.
Qi = Qie + Qic
(14.41)
Gutter System Hydraulics

Stormwater from runoff enters the subsurface sewer conveyance system through catch
basin inlets in roadway gutters, parking lots, depressions, ditches, and other locations,
and often not all runoff water from the catch basin enters the inlet and additional water
flows in gutters further downstream. There are a few hydraulic aspects to be considered in order to properly model the catch basin-inlet-gutter subsystem:
Inlets are designed to have certain drainage capacities, and these capacities play
an important role in the interaction between sewer subsystems and gutter
subsystems. There are well-established design procedures to design inlets based
on the design storm data. Once an inlet is set with specific dimensions, its
capacity or hydraulic performance is known. In a SewerGEMS V8i model, the
user can optionally input this performance with an inlet capacity rating curve. You
can define the tabular relationship between total catch basin drainage flow and the
inlet captured flow is presented, or a maximum inlet capacity flow amount. The
model dynamically determines the inlet flow.
When the inlet capacity is set, the excess water above its capacity will flow in the
gutter to a downstream point. The gutter can also represent an open channel.
SewerGEMS V8i lets the user specify the gutter cross section just like an open
channel; it can be a trapezoidal or generic irregular section, and the user would
also specify its Mannings friction coefficient.
The following Gutter Shape Types are defined by HEC-22 methodology:

Conventional, Parabolic, V-Shaped, and Trapezoidal (Median). With the
exception of the GVF-Convex solver, these gutter types are supported by each of
our numerical solvers, but differently. HEC-22 Methodology is strictly adhered to
for GVF-Rational and Explicit (SWMM) solvers. However, the Implicit (DW)
solver models a gutter link element as channel. Generally, tcomputed gutter depth
and gutter spread at the interface of the gutter and the inlet opening are computed
under assumed uniform flow conditions with the Manning's equation. More
specifically, the computed HEC-22 gutter bypass is used by the Manning's equation to estimate the gutter depth and spread at the inlet.
14-1183

The gutter link is modeled as a channel in the implicit solver. The channel is internally modeled as a rating table of <Depth, Width> pairs for every 20% of Maximum
Gutter Depth. That is 6 points (including <0,0> and <max gutter depth value,
computed max gutter spread> points). This gutter-as-channel method is used to
compute the upstream and downstream pairs of results: 1) Depth (In) and Spread/Top
Width (Start) and 2) Depth (Out) and Spread/Top Width (Stop). The terms "Spread"
and "Top Width" are used interchangeably even though "spread" refers the width of
flow in a gutter, and "top width" is the same measurement but implicitly refers to a
channel transect.
This holds true of GVF-Rational, SWMM, and implicit solvers: the software doesn't
always compute a Depth and Top Width/Spread. It will always compute Top Width/
Spread and Depth together, that is, if the software can compute the pair together at the
upstream end the it will compute both of them. Otherwise, the software presents N/A
for both of them. At the upstream/start end of gutter link the software computes depth
and width of bypass flow in the gutter, right after inlet interception at the upstream
node. If the upstream node of the gutter is a Catch Basin, and a physically defined
HEC-22 type of catalog inlet, then the software computes these 2 results. Otherwise
the software does not attempt to compute them (not having enough physical data to
compute them at this time. At the downstream/stop end of the gutter link element the
software will always refer to the gutter depth and gutter spread values at the stop node.
Therefore, the stop node has to be a Catch Basin with a HEC-22 Inlet for these values
to be computed and not appear as N/A.
Conventional Gutters
A conventional gutter begins at the curb and extends to the roadway centerline. The
HEC-22 manual declares two types of Conventional shaped gutters: uniform and
composite. Gutters having triangular cross sections have a gutter cross slope uniform
to that of the road cross slope. A conventional gutter where the section nearest the
curb is depressed compared to the roadway slope should be modeled as composite
gutter section.
Uniform Gutter Cross Slope
In the case of a uniform cross-slope (gutter slope Sw equal to pavement slope Sx), the
relationship between the gutter flow Q and the flow spread T is obtained by applying
the Mannings equation, assuming normal flow:
Q=
14-1184
K c 1.67 0.5 2.67

Sx SL T
n
(14.42)
Theory
Where
Flow rate (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
Kc
Mannings coefficient
Sx
Pavement cross-slope (m/m, ft/ft)
SL
Longitudinal pavement slope (m/m, ft/ft)
Width of flowspread (m, ft)
T
Wg
Ts
Qs
Qw
Sx
Sw
Figure 14-34: Uniform Gutter Cross Slope
The flow depth along the curb is:

d = TSx
Where
(14.43)
d
Depth of flow at curb (m, ft)
The coefficient E, as well as the variables Qw and Qs, are introduced as:
Qw = E0Q
(14.44)
Qs = Q Qw = (1 E0)Q
(14.45)
E0 = 1 (1 Wg/T)2.67
(14.46)
14-1185
Where
Total pavement flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
Qw
Frontal flowportion of the flow over the grate

width (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
E0
Ratio of flow above the grate to total flow
Qs
Side flowflow outside the grate width (m3/sec.,

ft3/sec.)
Wg
Grate width (m, ft)
Composite Gutter Section

T
W
Ts
Qs
Qw
Sx
Sw
a
Figure 14-35: Composite Gutter Section

In the case of a composite gutter section, the coefficient E0, as well as the variables Qw
and Qs, are defined as:
14-1186
Qw = E0Q
(14.47)
Qs = Q Qw = (1 E0)Q
(14.48)
Theory
Where
Total pavement flow (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
Qw
Frontal flowportion of the flow in the depressed

gutter (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
E0
Ratio of flow in the depressed gutter to total flow
Qs
Side flowflow outside the depressed gutter (m3/

sec., ft3/sec.)
E0 can then be derived from Mannings equation as:
S
E0 = 1 / 1 + w
Sx
Where
2.67
- 1
Sw S x
- 1
1 +
(T W )- 1
(14.49)
Sw
Gutter cross-slope (m/m, ft/ft)
Width of depressed gutteror grate, if it is

smaller (m, ft)
The continuously depressed gutter is also sometimes defined by a gutter depression, a,

defined as:
Sw = S x +
Sw = S x +
Where
a
1000W SI Units
(14.50)
a
12W U.S. Customary Units
(14.51)
Gutter depression (mm, in)
Gutter depression is the depression of the gutter relative to the street cross-slope
projection. It is also identified as a continuously depressed gutter because the gutter is
depressed along its full length.
14-1187
14.0.1
Flow in Ditch or Median Section on Grade

T
1
d
Z1
Z2
W
B
Figure 14-36: Ditch Cross Section

The discharge Q in a ditch or median section is expressed as:
1.67
z1 + z2 2
K c Bd +
d S L0.5
Q=
2
n B + d 1 + z1 + 1 + z22
Where
Discharge rate (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
Kc
Mannings coefficient
Ditch width (m, ft)
Water depth (m, ft)
z1, z2
Ratio H:V for ditch side slopes (m/m, ft/ft)
SL
Ditch longitudinal slope (m/m, ft/ft)
(14.52)
The ratio E0 of frontal flow (over the grate) to total flow is:
E0 =
Where
14-1188
W
z + z2
B+ d 1
2
W
(14.53)
Grate width (m, ft)
Theory
14.0.2
V-Shaped Gutter Cross Section
Figure 14-37: V-Shaped Gutter Cross Section
Equivalent cross slope (Sx) for V-Shaped gutter is found with the formula:
Sx 1 Sx 2
--------------------------Sx
Sx 1 Sx 2
where:
Sx1 = Curb side slope
Sx2 = Gutter cross slope
Sx3 = Road cross slope
Generally for on-grade inlets, spread is iteratively computed. In the case of a VShaped gutter, the Sx term considers the proportion of wet road and gutter surfaces.
This is well documented in Example 4-4 on page 4-20 of Hydraulic Engineering
Circular No. 22, Third Edition.
Then V-Shaped gutter depth can be inferred from spread with the following relationship:
d=T*Sx
14-1189

where:
T= gutter spread (ft, m)
d= gutter depth (ft, m)
Conversely, for in sag inlets, the gutter depth is first computed and then the spread.
It should also be noted for V-Shape gutter that its cross sectional gutter flow area is
computed geometrically with the computed on-grade gutter spread. The flow area is
used to find the uniform flow velocity at the frontal interface with the grate inlet
opening.
The gutter link is modeled as a channel in the implicit solver. The channel is internally
modeled as a rating table of <Depth, Width> pairs for every 20% of Maximum Gutter
Depth. That is 6 points (including <0,0> and <max gutter depth value, computed max
gutter spread> points). This gutter-as-channel method is used to compute the upstream
and downstream pairs of results: 1) Depth (In) and Spread/Top Width (Start) and 2)
Depth (Out) and Spread/Top Width (Stop). The terms "Spread" and "Top Width" are
used interchangeably even though "spread" refers the width of flow in a gutter, and
"top width" is the same measurement but implicitly refers to a channel transect.
This holds true of GVF-Rational, SWMM, and implicit solvers: the software doesn't
always compute a Depth and Top Width/Spread. It will always compute Top Width/
Spread and Depth together, that is, if the software can compute the pair together at the
upstream end the it will compute both of them. Otherwise, the software presents N/A
for both of them. At the upstream/start end of gutter link the software computes depth
and width of bypass flow in the gutter, right after inlet interception at the upstream
node. If the upstream node of the gutter is a Catch Basin, and a physically defined
HEC-22 type of catalog inlet, then the software computes these 2 results. Otherwise
the software does not attempt to compute them (not having enough physical data to
compute them at this time. At the downstream/stop end of the gutter link element the
software will always refer to the gutter depth and gutter spread values at the stop node.
Therefore, the stop node has to be a Catch Basin with a HEC-22 Inlet for these values
to be computed and not appear as N/A.
14-1190
Theory
Parabolic Gutter Cross Section
Figure 14-38: Parabolic Gutter Cross Section

Where:
H= Gutter Height
B = Gutter Width
a = linear term coefficient dervied with equation: a = 2H/B
b = quadratic term coefficient derived with equation: b=H/B2
See Hydraulic Engineering Circular No. 22, Third Edition Urban Drainage
Design Manual (2009) for more details.
14.0.1
Flows at Catchbasins
Although the type of flow is indicative of its origin (for example a rational flow probably comes from a catchment area), the Bentley stormwater products allow flow to be
added from several source locations. SewerGEMS V8i also tracks flows and flow
types as they progress through the system, making it easy to control and observe storm
sewer flows.
Flow (and related) results are broken down into different groups in SewerGEMS V8i.
The groups are:
System Flows - total flows in the subsurface (conduit) network, on the downstream side (outlet conduit) of a catch basin, manhole or transition node. The
system flows are equal to the sum of the Local and Upstream flows.
14-1191
Local Flows - flows that occur at the catch basin inlet where the result is reported.
For example the Local Rational Flow at catch basin is the 'rational flow' (i.e.
catchment runoff computed using the Rational Method) generated by catchments
that discharge directly to that catch basin.
Inflow (Collection) - these flows enter at subsurface invert and is treated like
carryover flow in the implicit and explicit sovlers.
Upstream Flows - total flows in the subsurface (conduit) network, on the

upstream side of a catch basin, manhole or transition node.
Intercepted Flows - flows that are intercepted or captured by the inlet at a catch
basin node.
Bypass Flows - flows that are not intercepted by the inlet at a catch basin node,
and continue on downstream via a gutter element
Carryover Flows - flows at an inlet that were bypassed, via a gutter, from the
inlet upstream.
Total Inlet Flows - the sum of the Local and Carryover flows that reach an inlet
via the surface network. In other words, the total flow that reaches an inlet. It does
not include flows that enter the invert from upstream conduits.
In addition, the GVF rational solver from StormCAD breaks flows down into different
flow types. The types are:
14-1192
Rational Flow - catchment runoff computed using the Rational Method.
Additional Subsurface Flow - flow added directly to the subsurface (conduit)

network. This can represent a fixed inflow from a known source, such as an industrial discharge.
Additional Carryover Flow - additional flow in the surface (gutter) network.

This can represent gutter flow that bypassed an upstream inlet, where that
upstream inlet is not included in the current model.
Additional Flow - the sum of Additional Subsurface and Additional Carryover

flows after they have mixed together in the subsurface (conduit) network.
Theory
Known Flow - a flow where the total flow rate is known at various points in the
system. A known flow downstream will overwrite (not add to) a known flow
upstream. This can be used to represent flows derived from flow monitoring
results.
Fixed Flow - the sum of Additional and Known flows.
14-1193
The major locations of load input and reporting are as follows:
14-1194
Theory
Surface Catchment Loads
Surface Carryover Loads
Inlet Approach Loads
Inlet Captured (Intercepted) Loads
Inlet Bypassed Loads
Subsurface Piped Loads
Subsurface External Loads
Subsurface Total Piped Loads
Although input flow loads such as surface catchment loads and subsurface external
loads are only editable for inlets, calculated loads, such as subsurface total piped load,
are computed for all nodes.
Note:
See also: Flow Balance at Junctions on page 8-589.
Surface Catchment Loads

The surface catchment load includes rational loading (areas, rational coefficients, and
time of concentration) from the local catchment.
Note:
This load may also include an additional load representing a

fixed flow that contributes to the gutter flow approaching the
inlet (similar to subsurface external loads). Note that
supplementary rational gutter loads that are not part of the
SewerGEMS V8i system can be accounted for simply as another
sub-catchment area and C coefficient.
Surface Carryover Loads

Surface carryover loads are loads that have been bypassed from upstream gutter inlets.
Note that the term "upstream" in this case refers to the directionality of the gutter
network, which does not necessarily correspond to the directionality of the subsurface
piped network. In fact, carryover loads may even come from inlets that are part of a
separate pipe network. Note that carryover loads are assumed to have the same time of
concentration as the surface catchment load. The times of concentration from their
original catchments are not considered.
Inlet Approach Loads

The inlet approach load is the sum of the surface catchment load and the surface carryover loads. This represents the total flow that is in the gutter or ditch immediately
before it is captured or bypassed.
14-1195
Inlet Captured (Intercepted) Loads

The load intercepted by a surface inlet is calculated based on the HEC-22 methodology, the inlet maximum capacity curve, or capture curve, depending on which type
of inlet is used. This represents the load that is actually captured by the inlet and enters
the subsurface structure. The captured load is assumed to have the same proportions of
load (rational and additional) as the approach load. Inlet captured loads are represented as a percentage of the inlet approach load.
Inlet Bypassed Loads

An inlet's bypassed load is the part of the approach load that is not intercepted by the
surface inlet. This load is assumed to have the same proportion of load (rational and
additional) as the approach load. Bypassed loads may be directed to any other inlet in
any pipe network, or may be lost. Lost flows are accumulated and accounted for at
outlets, but never contribute to subsurface piped flow.
Subsurface Piped Loads

Subsurface piped loads are those that enter a subsurface structure from upstream
pipes. These loads combine in accordance with each load component's behavior. This
means that rational loads are normalized to a common time, additional loads are
summed directly, and so on. Because of rational load normalization, a node's total
upstream flow may be less than the sum of each pipe's total flow.
Subsurface External Loads

Subsurface external loads are user-entered loads that represent flows entering the pipe
network at and below an inlet, such as a roof or footing drain or another storm sewer
branch. These loads are not used to analyze or design the inlet structure, but are used
in analyzing or designing the pipe network.
Subsurface Total Piped Load

The total piped load is the total load leaving a node, and is calculated by summing all
of the contributing loads: intercepted surface load, subsurface piped loads, and subsurface external loads. For nodes where there are no surface loads or external loads
entering, the total piped load is equal to the sum of subsurface piped loads (upstream).
14-1196
Theory
Note:
The rational component of the total piped load will be based on

the overall controlling time, which is the largest of the upstream
system time, the intercepted load time of concentration, or the
external load time of concentration.
Known Flow
Known flows are a special type of fixed flow that are used only in the GVF-convex
and GVF-rational solvers (not the explicit or implicit solvers). As with other fixed
flows, known flows remain constant as they progress downstream and combine
directly as a simple sum. Known flow is constant over time and cannot have a pattern.
The special behavior of known flows occurs during a Steady State Analysis when
another known flow is specified at a downstream location. While most fixed flows
combine directly under any circumstances, a non-zero known flow at any location
replaces all upstream known flows. Known flows do not override hydrograph or
pattern loads from upstream. Therefore it is not advisable to mix known flows with
these other types of node.
For this reason, known flows may be desirable for modeling flows that originate from
external calculations or field measured data (flows that do not need to be summed in
any way).
During Extended Period Simulations, Known Flows are modeled as a single constant
flow hydrograph over the duration of the simulation. They are added directly to the
existing flows coming from upstream sources and are all lumped together as a single
hydrograph for routing. The Known Flows are additive and do not replace each other
during Extended Period Simulations, much like a fixed pattern load.
Hydraulic Boundaries
In order to numerically solve the Saint Venant equations, boundary conditions are
needed in the model to provide the necessary additional equations to form a complete
set of equations.
There are two types of hydraulic boundaries:
External Boundaries on page 14-1198
Internal Boundaries on page 14-1199
14-1197
External Boundaries
External boundaries in a sewer system include outfalls at the downstream ends and
very first section at the upstream ends. For the upstream end boundaries, usually a
simple zero flow is used as upstream boundary condition or a flow time series can be
used as upstream boundary condition.
There are a few different boundary conditions users can select for the outfall at the
downstream end:
A constant user-defined tail water elevation.
A user-defined water elevation time series (time-elevation curve), such as a tide

surface elevation time series.
A user-defined tabular relation between the outfall water elevation and outflow
discharge (elevation-flow curve), often called as single-valued rating curve or
simply rating curve. Sometimes more than one outfall discharges to one receiving
point; in this situation, the discharge in the rating curve would be the summation
of all the flows from these discharging pipes.
A free outfall, which means that the outflow is freely discharged without any
anticipated backwater effects. In this case, the model automatically applies the
proper boundary equation, either a normal flow equation or a critical flow equation, to the outfall boundary based on the dynamic hydraulic condition at the
boundary. The normal flow equation will be used if the flow is in supercritical
condition and the critical flow equation will be used if the flow is subcritical.
In the first three cases, the control elevation h at the downstream boundary (outfall) is
determined from the curves at each time step. It can be replaced by normal or critical
flow elevations if it falls below those normal or critical elevations.
The dynamic model also supports boundary elements, such as ponds or storage nodes,
as downstream boundaries even when there are no further outflow outlets from there.
In this case, a storage equation is used as a boundary condition. If there are no outlets
from these boundary elements, then these elements are treated as internal regular
elements.
Related Topics:
14-1198
Internal Boundaries on page 14-1199
Theory
Internal Boundaries
Along a sewer pipeline, there are hydraulic structures and control devices, such as
manholes, weirs, and orifices where the flow is often rapidly varied rather then gradually varied in space. The Saint-Venant equations are not applicable at these locations
since the gradually varied flow assumption in the Saint-Venant equations derivation is
no longer valid. Instead these locations are treated as hydraulic internal boundaries;
usually alternative empirical internal boundary equations are used for these internal
local computational reaches (a computational reach is a link between two computational sections).
Typical internal boundaries are:
Manholes and Sewer Junctions on page 14-1199
Flow Control Structures on page 14-1203
Culverts on page 14-1211
Related Topics:
External Boundaries on page 14-1198
Manholes and Sewer Junctions

Manholes and sewer junctions are the most common internal boundaries. Hydraulically they represent significant changes in many properties such as bottom slope,
boundary roughness, and cross section shape. They may have different vertical and
horizontal alignments, such as drop manhole or perched manhole. As a consequence
of these significant hydraulic property changes, the dynamic hydraulic conditions in
manholes and junctions are very complicated and modeling these conditions is one of
the most challenging aspects in sewer dynamic modeling.
Usually a manhole and a junction has a storage area and may have open access to
ground surface (the user would be able to set a manhole as bolted so that the access to
the ground is turned off). SewerGEMS dynamic model applies a manhole storage
equation (a form of continuity equation) as one of the internal boundary equations.
When the water elevation is above the ground rim elevation, additional street storage
and street flooding may occur. For more information about flooding, see Flooding
on page 14-1144.
Related Topics:
Junction Headloss Methods on page 14-1200
14-1199
Minor Losses on page 14-1202
Junction Headloss Methods

Another internal boundary equation is the balance of hydraulic heads at a junction. At
each junction, the user may optionally model headloss with a user specified and static
value, or by calculating the loss through one of several methods:
Standard loss method - a user-defined loss coefficient is used to calculate the

head loss based on the velocity head of the exit conduit. The standard method
calculates structure headloss based on the exit pipe's velocity. The exit velocity
head is multiplied by a user-entered coefficient to determine the loss.
For numerical stability reason an empirical velocity filter is used when the
velocity is larger than 5.0 ft/s as follows:
v = 5.0 + 0.1*(v -5.0)
in which v is the velocity applied to the head loss equation and v is the original
velocity.
Absolute loss method - a user-defined loss amount (relative change in elevation)

is used as the head loss.
HEC-22 Energy (Second Edition) method - a procedure of calculating the junction head loss specified in Hydraulic Engineering Circular No. 22 (HEC-22)
Second Edition manual is used to calculate the head loss. See HEC-22 Junction
Energy Loss Method on page 14-1200.
HEC-22 Energy (Third Edition) method - a procedure of calculating the junction head loss specified in Hydraulic Engineering Circular No. 22, (HEC-22),
Third Edition manual is used to calculate the head loss. See HEC-22 Junction
Energy Loss Method on page 14-1200.
Generic loss method - a user defined loss coefficient is used to calculate the head
loss based on the velocity head difference between entry and exit conduits. The
loss will be set as zero if the value given by the equation is negative.
HEC-22 Junction Energy Loss Method

In an update from the junction energy loss method detailed in the Second Edition, the
U.S. DOT - FHA has released a new procedure for computing this head loss in the
Hydraulic Engineering Circular No. 22, (HEC-22), Third Edition manual is used in
SewerGEMS V8i.
In addition to the formula outlined in the HEC-22 manual, the following calculation
details are notable:
14-1200
Theory
Entrance Loss
In computing the entrance loss effects, the dimension of downstream pipe was chosen
as equivalent diameter.
Plunging Loss
Plunging inflow effects are evaluated for an incoming piped flows as well as any
surface inflow captured by the inlet opening of the structure. The referenced plunging
elevations include the inverts of the incoming links, and if applicable, the rim elevation of the structure.
Exit Loss
During plunging inflow conditions, the exit loss of an incoming pipe is derived from
the difference in energy level representative of the free outfall condition and the
energy level at the upstream end of the structure after including entrance and additional structure losses. Exit loss is calculated with the velocity of the inflow pipe
computed at its downstream end.
Flooding and Non-Bolted nodes:
For non-bolted manholes (or other gravity node) HGL (In) and (Out) results are equal
to the rim elevation or less. The software assumes energy loss due to surface flooding.
Special considerations include:
When Addition of Entrance Loss Results in Flooding: If the Entrance Loss raises
hydraulic grade above the non-bolted rim elevation of the node, entrance loss is
reported as the difference between the outflow pipe's HGL In and the node's rim
elevation. The sum of total additional structure losses is reported as zero. The
individual values for loss due to benching, plunging, and angled inflow are
reported as N/A, because they cannot be reported accurately. All of the connected
upstream pipes will report zero exit loss so that these incoming pipes can report
their HGL (down) value as equal to the node's rim elevation.
When Addition of Additional Structure Losses Results in Flooding: If the addition

of 'total additional structure losses' raises the node's hydraulic grade to above its
non-bolted rim elevation, then the 'total additional structure losses' is reported as
the difference of rim elevation - (outflow pipe's Upstream HGL + exit loss). The
individual values for loss due to benching, plunging, and angled inflow remain
14-1201
unchanged, so the user can validate the sum of these results relative to rim elevation. All of the connected upstream pipes will report zero exit loss so that these
incoming pipes can report their HGL (down) value as equal to node's rim elevation.
Addition of Exit Loss Results in Flooding: If the Exit Loss raises hydraulic grade
above the non-bolted rim elevation of the node, exit loss is reported as the difference in the nodes rim elevation and the nodes HGL (In). Exit Loss is computed
at the downstream of each incoming pipe into a HEC-22 3rd Edition node. The
HGL (down) on an incoming pipe is computed as the sum of HGL (In) at the
downstream node and Exit Loss.
Related Topics:
Minor Losses on page 14-1202
Minor Losses
Minor losses in pressure pipes are caused by localized areas of increased turbulence
that create a drop in the energy and hydraulic grades at that point in the system. The
magnitude of these losses is dependent primarily upon the shape of the fitting, which
directly affects the flow lines in the pipe.
The equation most commonly used for determining the loss in a fitting, valve, meter,
or other localized component is:
V2
hm = K
2g
(14.54)
Where
hm
Loss due to the minor loss element (m, ft)
Velocity (m/s, ft/s)
Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s2, ft/s2)
Loss coefficient for the specific fitting
Typical values for the fitting loss coefficient are included in the Fittings Table at the
end of this chapter.
Generally speaking, more gradual transitions create smoother flow lines and smaller
headlosses. For example, the figure below shows the effects of a radius on typical pipe
entrance flow lines.
14-1202
Theory
Related Topics:
Junction Headloss Methods on page 14-1200
Flow Control Structures

Flow regulating structures, also known as control structures, are very common in
storm water drainage systems and in combined sewer systems. The most common
control structures are weirs and orifices.
In SewerGEMS V8i, you can attach a weir or orifice at either the upstream end or the
downstream end of a conduit, or at both ends of the conduit. A control can also have a
flap gate which allows flow to travel in only one direction. Hydraulically these
controls are treated as internal boundaries, i.e., the empirical weir or orifice equations
are used to replace the momentum equations in the Saint Venant equations and the
continuity equation is simply that the flow is the same between the upstream face and
the downstream face of the internal boundary (control structure).
For more information on flow control structures, see:
Orifices on page 14-1210
Rating Curves on page 14-1210
Related Topics:
14-1203
Weirs
Weirs are classified by their flow-diversion purpose as either a side weir or a transverse weir, as described in the following definitions:
Side weirs or overflow weirs are used to divert extra high flows to overflow
waterways. Typically a side weir is a weir parallel to the main sewer pipe and with
enough high crest elevation to prevent any discharge of dry-weather flow, but it is
also low and long enough to discharge required excess of wet weather flow. Weirs
in an outlet of a detention pond can be treated as one of the control elements in the
composite outlet control structure. Another example of a side weir is the emergency overflow weir or spillway at the top of a detention pond. Side weirs are
only used to model flow splits in the implicit or explicit solvers. In the GVF based
solvers, flow splits should be modeled using diversions or a user notification will
be issued when the model is run.
Transverse weirs or inline weirs are typically placed directly cross the sewer pipe,
perpendicular to the sewer flow and act like a small dam, to direct the low flow,
usually dry weather flow, to diversion pipe such as dry weather flow interceptor
sewer pipe.
Weirs are also classified by their cross section shapes, such as rectangular, V-notch,
trapezoidal, and irregular. Accordingly the computational equations for the weirs are
different, the discharge through a rectangular weir is proportional to the 1.5 exponent
of the head above the weir crest, and the exponent for the V-notch weir becomes 2.5.
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i users need to specify the weir discharge coefficient. Typically a weir discharge coefficient ranges between 2.65 and 3.10 (English units). Since
the weirs in a sewer system are mostly sharp-crested weirs, a value of 3.0 is a common
default assumption without knowing the weir specifics and hydraulic conditions.
Weirs can occur in models either as control structures in conduits or in pond outlet
elements. The properties of weirs are set in the Components under Conduit Control
Structures or Composite Outlet Structures. Once they have been defined, they can be
assigned to individual conduit or pond outlet elements.
There are three types of in-line weirs:
14-1204
In-Line (Rectangular) Weir on page 14-1205
Trapezoidal Weir on page 14-1206
V-Notch (Triangular) Weir on page 14-1207
Theory
In-Line (Rectangular) Weir
In-line Weir
No side slope
Weir Length
Structure
Top
Elevation
Crest
Elevation
Invert of
Upstream
Node
Datum
The flow is given by:
Q = C ( B - n(0.1h))h1.5
Where
(14.55)
weir length, L
effective head, L
weir coefficient
number (0,1,2) of end contractions
The weir coefficient can be further given (for weirs stretching across the channel) by:
Q = 2 Cv
3
2 g be H e1.5
(14.56)
14-1205
Where
gravity
be
effective width (essentially the width)
He
effective head (essentially the head)
Cv
0.602 + 0.075 h/p for full width weir

0.587 - 0.023 h/p for fully contracted weir
where
p = depth of weir crest above channel bottom
h = head
Note:
The weir coefficient required by the program is the C coefficient,

not Cv.
Trapezoidal Weir
Q CLh
3---
2
CsSh
5---
2
Where:
Q = flow
L = crest length
h = head above weir
C = weir coefficient
Cs = weir coefficient for the side section
The following illustration assumes that the trapezoidal weir is equivalent to a rectangular channel and a V-notch weir.
14-1206
Theory
Trapezoidal Weirs
Weir
Length
Structure
Top
Elevation
Side
Slope
1
z
Crest
Elevation
Datum
V-Notch (Triangular) Weir
Triangular Weirs (V-notch)
No Side Slope
No Crest Length
Structure
Top
Elevation
Crest
Elevation
Datum
Invert of
Upstream
Node
The parameter, , must be given in degrees (not radians). The flow for a V-notch weir
is given by:
14-1207
Q = C tan(q / 2) h 2.5
h
Where
C= 8
( 15)
Where
(14.57)
=
head above weir crest, L
2 gCv
(14.58)
Cv
0.58 for fully contracted weirs with h > 1.2p
approximately 1.4 for SI units and 2.5 for U.S.

customary units
Elevations for weirs must be specified relative to the datum for the problem, not the
invert of the channel. In general:
Invert elevation < Crest Elevation < Structure Top Elevation
Profile view of all weirs
Structure
Top
Elevation
Crest
Elevation
Datum
Note:
The weir coefficient required by the program is the C coefficient,

not Cv.
Related Topics:
14-1208
Theory
Side Weir
The flow and head for a side weir are determined as:
14-1209
Q = C L h5/3
The units on the weir discharge coefficient are ft1/3/s when flow is in cfs, and L and h
are in ft.
Orifices
Orifices are usually circular or rectangular openings in the wall of a tank or in a plate
normal to the axis of the conduit. Orifices can be oriented in a variety of ways, such
as side outlet or bottom outlet. SewerGEMS V8i can also treat an orifice as one of the
controlling elements in a detention pond composite control structure; other controlling
elements within a composite control structure include weirs, risers and culverts.
Orifices are treated the same as weirs to be internal boundaries except that the flow
equation of an orifice is used to calculate the discharge. There are different flow
conditions in an orifice and the calculation of the discharge through the orifice is
different:
The discharge through the orifice is proportional to the 0.5 exponent of the head if
the orifice is fully submerged.
A weir equation is usually used for unsubmerged conditions of the orifice.
Special treatment is necessary for a smooth transition between unsubmerged and

submerged conditions due to the calculating equation switch.
The orifice discharge coefficients typically range between 0.6 and 0.7 (English units).
Without knowing the orifice specifics, a default value of 0.65 is commonly used.
Related Topics:
Rating Curves
Another generic control structure can be a rating curve in which a tabular relationship
of discharge and head (or elevation) for the structure is prepared offline in advance by
the user, then assigned to a weir or orifice by simply specifying that a rating curve is
used. In this case, the model uses this rating curve to calculate the discharge at any
time base on the dynamic head.
14-1210
Theory
In general, a rating curve table can be used for any internal control structure to represent its flow-head relationship if there are no anticipated backwater effects. A singlevalued-rating-curve can not be used in cases where there are backwater effects since
the rating curves assumes no such backwater effects.
Related Topics:
Culverts
Culverts are common hydraulic elements in a sewer system. There can be stand-alone
culverts under highway embankments or conduit vaults in detention pond outlet structures. In SewerGEMS V8i, a culvert can be a conduit specified as a culvert or one of
controlling elements in a composite control structure. Since a culvert is a type of
hydraulic structure that transports water as full or partially full, culvert hydraulics is
more complicated than other control structures.
Conduits can be treated as culverts if the "Is culvert?" property is set to True. This can
only be done for box and circular conduits.
Hydraulically a culvert can be under inlet control or outlet control conditions. The
computational procedures for these conditions are very different:
Inlet control - A culvert is under inlet control if the culvert barrel hydraulic
capacity is higher than that of the inlet (entrance) and there is no backwater from
downstream. In this condition, the relationship of flow and headwater is mainly
dependent on the inlet configurations.
Outlet control - A culvert is under outlet control when the culvert barrel is not
capable of conveying as much flow as the inlet opening will accept. When the
culvert is under outlet control, the flow will depend not only on the headwater but
also the tailwater.
EQT curves - Dynamic culvert conditions are complicated in that the flow can
change from inlet control to outlet control or vice versa. As a result of this
complexity, the computation of culverts can be tedious. In SewerGEMS V8i, a
sophisticated procedure has been developed to build up a comprehensive EQT
data set for any culvert configuration. The EQT represents the headwater (E), flow
(Q), and tailwater (T) tabular curves in the way it covers all possible operating
ranges of the headwater and tailwater so that any hydraulic conditions are
accounted for by the EQT. The SewerGEMS V8i dynamic engine builds the EQT
for every culvert and uses the EQT for culvert computation dynamically at any
time step.
14-1211
Dynamic Storage Routing

Note:
Conduits can be treated as culverts if the "Is culvert?" property

is set to True. This can only be Done for box and circular
conduits.
Related Topics:
Culvert Calculations in GVF Convex and GVF Rational Solvers

Both solvers handle the culvert calculation the same way, so the descriptions of the
solver behavior described here apply to both.
A conduit can be designated as a culvert by designating the "Is Culvert" property as
"True" from the conduits Properties interface. If "True", some detailed culvert data
must be specified, such as the Culvert Equation Form.
If the Flow Profile Method in the Calculation Options is set to "Capacity analysis"
then the culvert hydraulics are not included in the calculations. If the Flow Profile
Method is "Backwater analysis" then the calculation follows the following steps:
1. First, the solver does a regular backwater calculation for the conduit without
considering the culvert, and determines the Hydraulic Grade Line at the start of
the culvert. This is the 'outlet control' Hydraulic Grade Line.
2. The solver determines the Hydraulic Grade Line at the start of the culvert
assuming the culvert is under 'inlet control'.
3. The solver compares these two Hydraulic Grade Lines and uses the highest one as
the Hydraulic Grade Line value at the start of the culvert.
4. The 'Culvert Control Types' result indicates whether the culvert is operating under
under inlet control, or outlet control.
5. If the culvert conduit is under inlet control and the upstream node (inlet or
manhole) also has a head loss specified, the node head loss calculation is ignored
and the inlet control headloss is used instead.

Pond outflow is determined by the types of pond outlet structures which are associated
with a given pond. The pond outlet can simply represent a connection point between
the pond and a downstream conduit, or a more complex composite outlet structure.
The composite outlet structure at a pond outlet is a parallel set of outlet components
which empty into the pond outlet's downstream link.
14-1212
Theory
Composite outlets consist of the following types of structures:
Riser Structures on page 14-1213
Weirs at Pond Outlets on page 14-1218
Riser Structures
Risers are represented as a single opening at some elevation above the invert of the
pond. The flow from the riser is then controlled by the flow through the downstream
conduit of the pond outlet with which the riser is associated.
A riser can be represented as either a stand pipe or a inlet box. The only distinction
between the two is essentially the open area and perimeter of the opening. In other
words, the area and perimeter for a stand pipe are determined from the input diameter,
while the area and perimeter for an inlet box are input directly.
Related Topics
Dynamic Storage Routing on page 14-1212
Flow Stages on a Riser on page 14-1213
Weirs at Pond Outlets on page 14-1218
Flow Stages on a Riser

As water rises in a pond the riser structure will exhibit three distinct flow stages:
Weir Stage on page 14-1213
Orifice Stage on page 14-1214
Full Riser Barrel Flow Stage on page 14-1215
Weir Stage
As the pond stage begins to go over the riser crest elevation, flow into the riser acts
like a weir with the perimeter of the opening being the weir length. The following
equation dictates the flow into the riser for low pond stages relative to the crest elevation.
Q = C * L * H 3/ 2
(14.59)
14-1213
Where
weir coefficient (US, SI forms)
effective weir length
depth of flow at the standpipe crest (ft, m)
Related Topics
Orifice Stage
As the pond stage rises relative the crest elevation, the riser will then act like an
orifice, and the flow is defined by the following equation.
Q = C * A * (2 gH )
(14.60)
Where
Note:
contraction and energy loss coefficient
effective orifice area (sq. ft, sq. m)
acceleration due to gravity
orifice head (ft, m)
For the type of orifices found in most ponds, C = 0.6.
A Note on Weir to Orifice Transition

The transition between the weir and orifice flow hydraulics is a turbulent transition
which is computationally abrupt. To enhance convergence characteristics, Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i supports the formulation of a weir to orifice transition zone. You can
specify a hydraulic transition zone height which is (by default) centered about the
theoretical transition point. Over this transition range, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i will
linearly interpolate the stand pipe flow between the lower transition elevation at which
weir flow governs to the upper transition elevation at which orifice flow governs.
Related Topics
14-1214
Theory
Full Riser Barrel Flow Stage
Whenever the downstream conduit is undersized with respect to the standpipe
capacity, full riser barrel flow will occur if the pond water surface elevation rises high
enough. In these cases, the program assumes a negligible loss through the riser barrel
and sets the riser flow equal to the downstream conduit flow rate.
If there are other orifices (perforations), slots (weirs), etc, flowing into the riser or
inlet box, their flow rates are set equal to zero since the upstream elevation (pond
water surface) and downstream elevation (inlet box headwater elevation) are identical
(i.e., drop in head equals zero across these elements).
A Note on Perforations and Slots in Risers
If components of a particular composite outlet structure contains a riser structure in
addition to orifice and weirs with elevations lower then the crest elevation riser, then
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i treats the orifices and weirs as perforations and slots in the
riser structure, and calculates the overall composite structure accordingly.
Related Topics
Orifices
There are two types of orifices that are associated with a pond outlets complex outlet
structure:
Circular
Orifice area
Both structures are defined by behaviors when submerged and unsubmerged.

For more information, see the following topics:
Submerged Orifice Hydraulics on page 14-1216
Circular Unsubmerged Hydraulics on page 14-1216
Orifice Area Unsubmerged Hydraulics on page 14-1217
Orifice Orientation on page 14-1218
14-1215
Submerged Orifice Hydraulics

When the orifice is submerged, the flow is defined by the following equation for both
orifice types:
Q = C * A * (2 gH )
(14.61)
Where
contraction and energy loss coefficient
effective orifice area (sq. ft, sq. m)
acceleration due to gravity
orifice head (ft, m)
The orifice head, H, is measured as the difference between the water surface elevation
and the greater of the center elevation of the circular orifice or the controlling tailwater elevation.
By inspection it can be seen that the equation is mathematically invalid whenever H is
less than zero (i.e., the water surface is below the centroid during unsubmerged conditions).
Also, for the equation to be applied correctly, assume that the flow area must be fully
submerged.
Related Topics
Circular Unsubmerged Hydraulics

To develop a continuous discharge rating relation for an orifice structure, it is necessary to handle flow situations in which the orifice opening is not fully submerged.
For circular orifices, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i models partially submerged orifices
by balancing specific energy across the culvert opening. This is implemented in the
program by assuming a thin culvert (L = 0.002 ft). This approach makes friction
conditions negligible. The inlet loss, Ke, is calibrated so that it matches the results of
the orifice flow at the "just submerged" elevation.
14-1216
Theory
Related Topics
Orifice Area Unsubmerged Hydraulics

To develop a continuous discharge rating relation for an orifice structure, it is necessary to handle flow situations in which the orifice opening is not fully submerged. For
area-based orifice calculations, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i performs a straightline
interpolation, setting the flow by multiplying the full flow, Qt, (at unsubmerged head,
Ht) by the ratio of actual H to Ht.
Qu = Qt * H u / H t
Where
(14.62)
Qu
unsubmerged discharge
Qt
full discharge at Ht
Hu
unsubmerged head
Ht
height of the orifice opening
Heads are measured from the opening invert or from the controlling tailwater, whichever is greater.
Related Topics
14-1217
Orifice Orientation
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i supports modeling area-based orifice openings which are
aligned horizontally and vertically, expressed as oriented parallel or perpendicular to
flow direction, respectively. Orifices which are oriented parallel to flow do not require
a datum input (since it is assumed to be equal to the opening invert).
In Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, circular orifices are all oriented perpendicular to flow.
To model an opening oriented parallel with flow, use the Orifice-Area option, or a
Stand Pipe.
Related Topics
Weirs at Pond Outlets

Weirs can be one of the flow controls at a pond outlet element. The properties of a
weir are set in Components . Composite Outlet Structures (link to that help topic).
Once the properties of the weir are set, the composite outlet structure is assigned to a
specific pond outlet element by setting "Has Control Structure" to Yes and selecting
the composite outlet structure in the "Composite Outlet Structures" property.
In the GVF rational and GVF convex solvers, weirs cannot be submerged from tailwater. A warning message will be given if that condition exists. Submerged weirs can
be solved in the implicit and explicit dynamic solvers.
Rectangular Weirs on page 14-1218
V-Notch Weirs on page 14-1219
Irregular Weirs on page 14-1220
Broad-Crested Weir on page 14-1220
Rectangular Weirs
In Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, a rectangular weir is characterized by two equations:
suppressed and contracted.
Suppressed weirs prevent the contraction of the flow through the weir and hence the
associated losses. These types of weirs are usually, but not solely, associated with
broad crested weirs, and are defined by the following equation:
14-1218
Theory
Q = C * L * H 3/ 2
Where
(14.63)
flow (cfs, cms)
length (ft, m)
head (ft, m)
Flow over a contracted weir does contract as it goes over the crest of the weir. These
types of weirs are often associated with the sharp crested types of weirs, and are
defined by the following equation:
Q = C *( L 0.2 H ) * H 3 / 2
Where
Note:
flow (cfs, cms)
length (ft, m)
head (ft, m)
(14.64)
For most rectangular weirs at ponds, C is usually 3.2 (US

Customary units; for SI units, C is usually 1.8).
Related Topics
V-Notch Weirs
V-Notch weirs are defined in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i by the following equation:
Q = C *(8 / 15) * (2 g ) * tan( / 2) * H 5 / 2

(14.65)
14-1219
Where
flow (cfs, cms)
coefficient of discharge (US, SI forms)
gravitational constant
angle of notch (degrees)
head above the bottom of the notch (ft, m)
H is measured from the water level to the bottom crest of the weir.
Related Topics
Irregular Weirs
Whenever the culvert headwater begins to rise above the minimum elevation of the
roadway, overtopping will occur. The weir x-y structure can be used to model overtopping.
Overtopping flow is modeled as a special type of weir flow expressed by the general
broad-crested weir equation.
Note:
Do not use the irregular structure to model an overflow channel.

The equations which define the irregular weir are different then
channel equations and would result in significantly different
flows.
Broad-Crested Weir
A broad-crested weir has a crest that extends horizontally in the direction of flow far
enough to support the nappe (sheet of water flowing over the crest of the weir) so that
hydrostatic pressures are fully developed for at least some short distance.
In order to model Embankment or Roadway overtopping, the Federal Highway
Administration (FHWA) has developed a methodology that can be found in the
manual FHWA, HDS No. 5, Hydraulic Design of Highway Culverts, 1985, which uses
the general broad-crested weir equation.
Q = Cd LH r3 2
14-1220
(14.66)
Theory
Where
Discharge over weir (m3/sec., ft3/sec.)
Cd
Weir coefficient
Length of roadway crest (m, ft)
Hr
Overtopping depth (m, ft)
Hr
ht
Lr
Figure 14-39: Broad-Crested Weir

The overtopping discharge coefficient Cd is a function of the submergence using the
equation:
Cd = K t Cr
(14.67)
The variables Kt and Cr are defined in the following figures, reproduced from the
manual FHWA, HDS No.5, Hydraulic Design of Highway Culverts, 1985. The first
two figures are used by Bentley SewerGEMS V8i to derive the base weir coefficient
Cr resulting from deep and shallow overtopping, respectively. The submergence
correction Kt is determined implicitly using the third figure.
14-1221
Figure 14-40: Discharge Coefficient Cr, for Hr/L > 0.15
Figure 14-41: Discharge Coefficient Cr, for Hr/L 0.15
14-1222
Theory
Figure 14-42: Submergence Factor, k
Related Topics
Pumps
Pump Definition Types
There are numerous types of pump definitions in Bentley storm and sanitary sewer
models. These are described below. These pump definitions are established by the user
using Components > Pump Definitions. The user can assign these definitions to any
pump elements. Pump definitions contain the pump curves describing pump performance. The only curves that are mandatory are the pump head curves. Efficiency and
motor curves are only used in Bentley water models.
Some of the definitions are used only in the implicit and explicit dynamic wave
solvers while others are only used in the pressure portion of the GVF-convex solver.
The only definition type that is common to all solvers is the Multipoint pump head
curve.
14-1223

The pump definition dialog is show below and is described in detail in Pump Definitions Dialog Box on page 6-334.
The individual pump definitions are described below. The suffixes (GVF or DW) indicate whether they are used in the GVF-convex solver or implicit or explicit dynamic
wave solvers.
Volume vs Flow - DW
This pump definition type is best suited for pumps which have either wet wells or
ponds as the source element. The curve relates the volume of water in the source
element to the outflow of the pump station. As the volume increases, the discharge
increases.
Depth vs Flow - DW
This pump definition type simply relates the depth of flow of the source element to the
outflow of the pump. As the depth increase, the discharge increases incrementally.
Multipoint - DW and GVF
This is the most standard pump definition type. It relates the head difference between
the upstream and downstream nodes to the discharge of the pump. As the head difference increases, the amount of discharge decreases.
14-1224
Theory
Depth-Flow (Variable Speed) - DW
This pump definition type also relates the depth of the source node to the discharge of
the pump. As the depth increases, the discharge increases continuously.
Constant Power - GVF
When selecting a Constant Power pump, the following attribute must be defined:
Pump Power-Represents the water horsepower, or horsepower that is actually

transferred from the pump to the water. Depending on the pump's efficiency, the
actual power consumed (brake horsepower) may vary with flow but is not
accounted for in this type of pump definition.
Design Point (One-Point) - GVF

When selecting a Design Point pump, the rated head and flow of the pump are specified and a reasonable head vs. flow relationship is used based on a radial flow centrifugal pump.
Standard (Three-Point) - GVF
When selecting a Standard Three-Point pump, three points on the pump curves must
be specified. Tthe following flow vs. head points must be definedare usually used:
Shutoff - Point at which the pump will have zero discharge. It is typically the
maximum head point on a pump curve.
Design - Point at which the pump was originally intended to operate. It is typically the best efficiency point (BEP) of the pump. At discharges above or below
this point, the pump is not operating under optimum conditions.
Max Operating - Highest discharge for which the pump is actually intended to
run. At discharges above this point, the pump may behave unpredictably, or its
performance may decline rapidly.
Standard Extended - GVF

When selecting a Standard Extended pump, the following flow vs. head points must
be defined:
14-1225
Max Extended - Absolute maximum discharge at which the pump can operate,
adding zero head to the system. This value may be computed by the program, or
entered as a custom extended point. This value is automatically calculated for
Standard Extended pumps.
Custom Extended - GVF

When selecting a Custom Extended pump, the following attributes must be defined:
Max Extended - Absolute maximum discharge at which the pump can operate,
adding zero head to the system. This value may be computed by the program, or
entered as a custom extended point.
Storage Elements
This section describes how the following volume/storage elements in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i are defined:
Ponds on page 14-1227
Catch Basins, Manholes, and Surface Storage on page 14-1229
Wet Wells
The Wet Well volume can be determined by one of the following ways:
14-1226
Depth-Area Curve
Constant area - Circular
Constant area - Non-Circular
Area Function
Theory
Variable Volume
Depth-Area Curve
This option allows for the modeling of an irregular shaped volume associated with the
wet well. The curve is then translated to volumes using conic sections.
Constant Area
Sets up the volume using with a constant cross sectional area. The volume is analogous to a cylinder.
Area Function
The Area is determined based on the following function which calculates the surface
area for a given depth.
Area Coeff * DepthExp Constant

(14.68)
Where
Area
surface Area at given depth
Coeff
user input value which is derived from existing

area data
Depth
distance from the invert of the pond
Exp
user input value which is derived from existing

area data
Constant
the area at the bottom of the pond and is a user

input value
Related Topics
Ponds
Pond volumes are defined one of four ways:
Elevation-Volume Curve
14-1227
Functional
Pipe Volume
Volumes are typically defined as a series of Elevation-Area points, which are easily
pulled from the contour map. The simulation then computes the volumes based on the
changes in area between two elevations.
Elevation-Volume Curve
This option defines the volume directly by a series of elevation volume points. This
allows for more complex storage structures that don't lend themselves to an ElevationArea curve. If for example you have a fill, or obstructions in the pond you can enter
the volume directly without having to work out adjustments to the areas.
Functional
The volume is determined based on the following function which calculates the
surface area for a given depth.
Area Coeff * DepthExp Constant

(14.69)
Where
Area
Surface Area at given depth
Coeff
User input value which is derived from existing

volume data
Depth
Distance from the invert of the pond
Exp
User input value which is derived from existing

volume data
Constant
The area at the bottom of the pond and is a user

input value
Pipe Volume
The Pipe Volume option supports modeling horizontal, vertical, or sloped pipes. Typically, the upsized pipes are significantly larger than would be required to simply
convey the runoff from the site. For this reason upsized pipes will be terminated by an
orifice or small diameter pipe stub which will provide the necessary peak discharge
control.
14-1228
Theory
The Pipe option automatically generates the cumulative volume rating table needed
for the simulation. It should be emphasized that in upsized pipe systems the assumption is that the water surface elevation in the upsized pipe is taken to be level. This
means that inflow into the upstream end of the pipe is immediately translated to the
downstream end of the pipe - the standard detention routing assumption.
Related Topics
Ponds on page 6-375
Catch Basins, Manholes, and Surface Storage

In addition to the negligible volumes assigned to manholes and catch basin structures,
you can define the surface storage volumes above the structure's rim elevation.
The surface storage can be defined one of four ways:
No Storage - When this option is selected the HGL at the element is determined
based solely on hydraulics.
Default Storage Equation - The surface volume above the rim is automatically
established by the engine by extrapolating from the rim elevation.
Ponded Area- The volume above the rim elevation is based on a volume with a
constant surface area.
Surface Depth-Area Curve - The surface volume is defined by a depth-area

curve where the volume is determined with conic sections.
Related Topics
14-1229
Hydrograph Methods
Hydrograph Methods
In virtually all cases except a sanitary sewer system with no wet weather inflows, it is
necessary to directly enter wet weather flow or perform some type of hydrologic
calculation to convert precipitation (or snow melt) into a flow rate. Methods can be
described based on how they handle time, whether they apply to nodes, links or catchments, and whether they are based on SWMM or Bentley hydrology methods.
The first modeling decision is whether the analysis is to be conducted over time and
needs a hydrograph or if it will be a peak flow analysis using the rational method or a
fixed flow.
Calculations for a single flow rate are performed using the rational method [rational
method link] in the GVF-rational solver. Steady flows can be specified as a known
flow [known flow link], inflow at any node [inflow help] or in the GVF-convex solver
as an infiltration on a conduit [infiltration help].
The user can directly input a hydrograph at any node [inflow collection dialog box] or
in the case of the GVF-convex solver, along any conduit. These values are independent of and supplemental to precipitation.
To convert precipitation hyetographs into surface flow for a catchment, a variety of
hydrologic methods are provide. Methods to calculate hydrographs can be divided
into two categories
SWMM Hydrology
Bentley Hydrology
When SWMM hydrology is used, the catchment runoff method is set to EPA-SWMM
Runoff and a loss method must be provided. If the SWMM-RTK method is used, no
loss method is required and the runoff appears at a manhole node rather than at a
catchment [link SWMM RTK Unit Hydrograph Dialog Box].
When Bentley hydrology is used, the user must first select a hydrograph method
which can include Unit Hydrograph, Modified Ration Method [modified rational
method] or User Defined Hydrograph [Runoff hydrograph]. If Unit Hydrograph
method [unit hydrograph methodology] is selected, the user must select one of the
Unit Hydrograph types: the SCS [Soil Conservation Service], RTK [RTK method] or
Generic Unit Hydrograph [Generic unit hydrographs]. The SCS and Generic unit
hydrograph methods require a loss method (fLoss, Green-Ampt, Horton, or SCS-CN.
For most of the hydrograph methods, storm data is needed in the form of a hyetograph
(precipitation vs. time). The exception is the modified rational method which is driven
from IDF storm data [Storm Data and Runoff Methods].
14-1230
Theory
It is also very important to be aware of whether the flow being calculated are to be
used as runoff in a stormwater or combined sewer model or the wet weather inflow/
infiltration to a sanitary sewer model. In general, EPA-SWMM and SCS methods are
better for surface runoff while RTK method tend to be preferred for sanitary sewer I&I
although a calibrated generic unit hydrograph is also acceptable.
Catchment hydrology information is stored in the Hydrology Alternative. Storm data
is entered under Components > Storm Data and is stored in the Rainfall-Runoff Alternative.
An outline of the available hydrologic method is given below
Single flow
Rational
Node inflow
Conduit infiltration
Known flow
Hydrograph
User defined hydrograph (conduit, catchment or node)
SWMM hydrology
Catchment SWMM runoff
SWMM node RTK
Bentley hydrology (catchment)

-
Unit Hydrograph
-SCS
-RTK
-Generic
Modified rational
User define hydrograph
Other related help includes:
Rainfall on page 14-1232
Snowmelt on page 14-1253
Time of Concentration on page 14-1254
Rational Method on page 14-1268
SCS CN Runoff Equation on page 14-1271
14-1231
Hydrograph Methods
Rainfall
SewerGEMS V8i considers rainfall in terms of:
Design Storms on page 14-1232
I-D-F Data on page 14-1233
Rainfall Curves on page 14-1236
Design Storms
SewerGEMS V8i design storms include:
Rational design storms
Cumulative rainfall curve storms
Rational Design Storms

Design storms for use with the Rational method can be created with one of two
methods.
The I-D-F table method uses a table of duration versus intensity values to describe
rainfall events of a particular frequency (return period).
The e, b, d coefficients method uses a collection of three coefficients (e, b, d) to

define a mathematical relationship between the rainfall intensity and the duration
of the rainfall event for a given frequency.
Both methods yield the equivalent of a rainfall I-D-F curve, and therefore must be
created for use in a particular geographic location.
Cumulative Rainfall Curve Storms
Hydrograph methods, such as the SCS Unit Hydrograph procedure, cannot use I-D-F
curves for rainfall data (as used in the Rational method). Instead, complex hydrograph
methods require time-based rainfall curves. Design storms for use with the
hydrograph methods (e.g., SCS Unit Hydrograph) can be created with one of two
methods: time-depth or synthetic.
Time-depth:
14-1232
The time-depth curve method uses a table of time

versus rainfall depth values to describe the rainfall
event. This method is typically used when gauged
data from actual storm data is available.
Theory
Synthetic:
The synthetic curve method uses a table of time

versus rainfall depth fraction values, a duration
multiplier, and a total rainfall depth to describe the
rainfall event. This arrangement is very flexible
because the same rainfall event shape can be used for
storms of various durations and total depth.
I-D-F Data
Intensity-duration-frequency (I-D-F) data includes:
I-D-F Curves on page 14-1233
I-D-F Tables on page 14-1235
I-D-F e, b, d Equation on page 14-1235
I-D-F Curves
Note:
The rainfall intensities that are used with the Rational method
are generally determined by regulatory agencies. Historical
rainfall information is analyzed and compiled into I-D-F curves
based on the frequency of the storm data. These curves give the
engineer a quick reference to determine the intensity of rainfall
that occurs at given return periods.
I-D-F (Intensity-Duration-Frequency) curves provide the engineer with a way of

determining the rainfall intensity for a given storm frequency and duration.
14-1233
Hydrograph Methods
Reading an I-D-F Curve
For example, a 5-year frequency, the resulting average intensity is 5 inches an hour for
12 minutes. In other words, if an average intensity of 5 inches/hour falls for a period
lasting 12 minutes, it would be considered a 5-year event.
Figure 14-43: I-D-F Curve
14-1234
Theory
I-D-F Tables
SewerGEMS V8i lets you enter I-D-F data into a table and saves the data so you may
use it again for other projects. Entering the design intensities is a very simple process
of looking up data from a graph and entering it into the I-D-F Table.
Related Topics:
I-D-F e, b, d Equation on page 14-1235
I-D-F e, b, d Equation
I-D-F curves can be fit to equations. The most common form of these equations is:
b
i -------------------e
T d
(14.70)
14-1235
Hydrograph Methods
Where
rainfall intensity (in/hr.)
rainfall duration (min.)
e, b, d
rainfall equation coefficients
This equation represents the mathematical relationship between the rainfall intensity
and the rainfall duration for a storm of a given frequency and a given geographical
location. The rainfall equation coefficients vary with storm data frequency and storm
data location.
To use rainfall equations properly requires that they yield results that are consistent
with the historical rainfall data for the design locale. If the preceding equation does
not provide such consistency, then it is not appropriate for your design.
Related Topics:
I-D-F Tables on page 14-1235
Rainfall Curves
Rainfall curves fall into two categories:
Gauged (Time versus Depth) on page 14-1237
Synthetic Rainfall Distributions on page 14-1241
Related Topics:
14-1236
Bulletins 70/71 on page 14-1248
Rainfall Curves: Build from I-D-F Data on page 14-1253
Theory
Gauged (Time versus Depth)
A rainfall curve is the measure of total rainfall depth as it varies throughout a gauged
storm. A good way to understand a rainfall curve is to visualize the Y-axis as a rainfall
gauge (see Gauged Rainfall Event on page 14-1237). As the storm progresses, the
gauge begins to fill. The curve describes the gauged rainfall depth at each point during
the storm.
A steeper slope on the curve indicates the gauge is filling faster than it would for a
less-steep curve; hence, the rate of rainfall is more intense. The most intense portion
of the storm occurs between 0.1 and 0.2 hours and again between 0.5 and 0.6 hours
(about 0.6 inches over 0.1 hour = 6 inches-per-hour intensity).
Figure 14-44: Gauged Rainfall Event
14-1237
Hydrograph Methods
Rainfall curves are a mathematical means for simulating different storms. The next
figure, Conditions for Two Storms on page 14-1238, shows conditions for two types
of storms. The other two (Comparison of Two Storms on page 14-1239 and Hydrographs for Two Storms on page 14-1239)display dramatic differences between these
two rainfall events, even though the total depth and volume are the same for each
storm.
Figure 14-45: Conditions for Two Storms
14-1238
Theory
Figure 14-46: Comparison of Two Storms
Figure 14-47: Hydrographs for Two Storms
14-1239
Hydrograph Methods
Related Topics:
Rainfall Tables
Rainfall hydrographs can be represented by tables. The table relates the cumulative
rainfall depth to the time from the beginning of a storm. The following table is an
example of a time versus depth rainfall table developed from data taken from a
recording rain gauge.
Table 14-1: Time versus Depth
14-1240
Time (hr.)
Accumulated
Rainfall (in)
0.0
0.00
0.3
0.37
0.6
0.87
0.9
1.40
1.2
1.89
1.5
2.24
1.8
2.48
2.1
2.63
2.4
2.70
2.7
2.70
3.0
2.70
3.3
2.71
3.6
2.77
3.9
2.91
4.2
3.20
4.5
3.62
Theory
Table 14-1: Time versus Depth (Contd)
Time (hr.)
Accumulated
Rainfall (in)
4.8
4.08
5.1x
4.43
5.4
4.70
5.7
4.90
6.0
5.00
Synthetic Rainfall Distributions

In most cases, drainage engineers design facilities for future rainfall events (not actual
gauged storms). Rainfall distributions provide a way to model statistically predicted
events of various magnitudes. These distributions are sometimes referred to as
synthetic storms, since they are not actual gauged events.
14-1241
Hydrograph Methods
Rainfall distributions fall into two categories:
Dimensionless DepthThe Y-axis for these distributions range from 0.0 to 1.0
(0% to 100%) of total rainfall depth. The total storm duration is defined on the Xaxis, in units of time.
Dimensionless Depth and TimeThese are similar to dimensionless depth

curves, except that the X-axis is also dimensionless.
Related Topics:
Dimensionless Depth: SCS Distributions on page 14-1242
Modeling Storms with SCS Distributions on page 14-1244
Dimensionless Depth and Time on page 14-1245
Synthetic Rainfall Tables on page 14-1247
Dimensionless Depth: SCS Distributions

The SCS 24-hr. rainfall distributions are classic examples of dimensionless depth rainfall distributions. The Y-axis is dimensionless so that different rainfall depths can be
applied to the distributions to create rainfall curves for various storm magnitudes and
geographic locations.
The following figure displays four SCS distributions used in the United States (Types
I, IA, II, and III).
14-1242
Theory
Figure 14-48: 24-Hour Rainfall Distributions
The approximate geographic boundaries for these rainfall distributions are shown
below.
TYPE IA
TYPE III
TYPE II
TYPE I
TYPE I
TYPE IA
TYPE III
TYPE II
TYPE III
TYPE I
Figure 14-49: Approximate Boundaries
Related Topics:
14-1243
Hydrograph Methods
Modeling Storms with SCS Distributions

To create a design rainfall curve, multiply the Y-axis by the 24-hour total rainfall
depth. The following figure shows what each distribution looks like when applied to a
24-hour total depth of 3.1 inches. Differences in storm magnitude and geographic
variations can be modeled by changing the total rainfall depth on the Y-axis.
Figure 14-50: SCS Distribution, 24-Hour P = 3.1 in.
Related Topics:
14-1244
Theory
Dimensionless Depth and Time
These rainfall curve distributions are typically developed based on statistical analyses
of storm data for different durations. When developed properly for a specific location,
these types of rainfall distributions provide the flexibility of modeling a variety of
storms other than the standard 24-hour event.
The basic philosophy of this approach is that longer-duration storms are expected to
behave differently than shorter-duration storms. For example, the most intense portion
of a 24-hour storm is expected to differ from the most intense portion of a 1-hour
storm.
Typically, these types of curves are dimensionless on both the X and Y axes, so they
can be applied to a wide range of durations and rainfall depths. The following graph
displays dimensionless rainfall curves established for different ranges of durations. To
create a rainfall depth curve, select the curve for the desired duration. Then, multiply
the X-axis by total storm duration and multiply the Y-axis by the total rainfall depth
for that given duration.
Figure 14-51: Dimensionless Time and Depth Curve
Related Topics:
Example: Dimensionless Time and Depth Curves on page 14-1246
14-1245
Hydrograph Methods
Example: Dimensionless Time and Depth Curves

Statistical analyses were performed using updated rainfall information for a
certain geographic location in the United States. This study yielded the statistical
distributions shown in the figure below.
Given:
14-1246
A 10 year return event for a certain area has the

following total rainfall depths corresponding to
various durations:
1 hr. P = 2.11 in.
6 hr. P = 3.37 in.
12 hr. P = 3.91 in.
18 hr. P = 4.13 in.
24 hr. P = 4.49 in.
Find:
Rainfall curves (time versus depth) for the 1-, 6-,

12-, 18-, and 24-hour durations, using the statistically
derived distributions in the following figure.
Solution:
First, select the distribution that corresponds to each

desired duration. Then multiply the Y-axis by the
total rainfall depth for that duration and the X-axis by
that duration.
Theory
Figure 14-52: Solution to Example
The figure displays the results of this example. Different curve types (A, B and C
from the previous graph) were used to model different duration storms. Note how
the total depth increases, but overall intensity (slope of the curve) decreases as the
duration is lengthened.
Synthetic Rainfall Tables
A synthetic rainfall curve is a plot of rainfall depth versus time that can be used in lieu
of actual rainfall event data. A synthetic rainfall distribution is useful because it incorporates maximum rainfall intensities for a given event frequency arranged in a
sequence that produces peak runoff. Therefore, a single rainfall distribution can be
used to determine peak runoff rates for watersheds of various sizes and times of
concentration.
Related Topics:
14-1247
Hydrograph Methods
Bulletins 70/71
The following sections describe the use of the data used in rainfall tables:
Rainfall Time-Distribution Information on page 14-1248
Watershed Area on page 14-1249
Rainfall Duration on page 14-1250
Data Sources on page 14-1250
Data Format on page 14-1251
Bulletin 70/71 Data on page 14-1252
Circular 173 Data on page 14-1252
Related Topics:
Rainfall Time-Distribution Information

Illinois State Water Survey Bulletin 70 and Bulletin 71 and Circular 173 data contains
synthetic rainfall time-distribution curves for heavy rainstorms in the Midwestern
United States. This information comes from Circular 173 (Huff 1990). Rainfall timedistribution curves are used for runoff computations related to the design and operation of runoff control structures.
Time-distribution curves are divided into four categories, corresponding to first-,
second-, third- and fourth-quartile storms. Time distributions are represented as cumulative fractions of the storm rainfall depth and the storm duration.
The Bulletin 70/71 data contains median (exceedance probability of 50%) curves. The
Circular 173 data gives the curves for exceedance probabilities of 10% and 90%.
Related Topics:
14-1248
Theory
Watershed Area
Time-distribution curves vary with the watershed area. Three time distribution types
have been presented here depending on the watershed size:
point distributions (area from 0 to 10 square miles)
intermediate distributions (area from 10 to 50 square miles)
area average distributions (area from 50 to 400 square miles)
The curves presented here are applicable only for relatively small watersheds (area
less than or equal to 400 square miles).
Related Topics:
14-1249
Hydrograph Methods
Rainfall Duration
Storms with durations of 6 hours or less tend to be associated more often with firstquartile distributions, and those lasting more than 6 hours and less than or equal to 12
hours are most commonly the second-quartile type. Storms having durations longer
than 12 and less than or equal to 24 hours most commonly follow the third-quartile
distribution. Storms with a duration longer than 24 hours are most frequently associated with the fourth-quartile distributions. However, a particular storm from any duration may be associated with any of the four quartile types.
We recommend the use of the most common quartile for the design storms. A design
storm with a duration less than or equal to 6 hours should be a first-quartile type
storm. The second quartile type design storms should be used for durations longer
than 6 and up to 12 hours. For storms longer than 12 hours in duration and less than or
equal to 24 hours, we recommend the use of the third-quartile time distribution.
Finally, design storms longer in duration than 24 hours should be modeled using the
fourth quartile type.
Related Topics:
Data Sources
The rainfall time-distribution data given here are obtained from Circular 173 (Huff
1990). Wherever the tabular data was available in Circular 173 it was used to develop
rainfall tables. However, tabular data in Circular 173 is given only for every 5% of the
time distribution. The tables available in the engineering catalogs give data for every
1% of the rainfall time duration. The data in between tabular values have been
obtained from the figures in Circular 173. Due to the interpolation procedure used to
develop graphs, a slight discordance between tables and figures occurs in the tails of
the distributions. Where this was the case, higher precedence was given to the tabular
data.
Additional differences between the data presented here and the Circular 173 tables
comes from the precision used in Circular 173. While Circular 173 rounds the data to
the first 1%, the data presented in the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i engineering libraries
has a precision of 0.01%. However, due to the statistical nature of the data presented,
these differences are negligible.
14-1250
Theory
Related Topics:
Data Format
Data presented here is reported in dimensionless (fractional) distributions both in time
and rainfall depth space. The temporal axes starts at 0.0 and ends at 1.0 with a time
step of 0.01. Duration Multipliers should be used in SewerGEMS V8i to convert the
dimensionless time to the desired rainstorm duration.
Quartile distributions are identified using the following notation:
1stQthe first quartile time distribution
2ndQthe second quartile time distribution
3rdQthe third quartile time distribution
4thQthe fourth quartile time distribution
Watershed area ranges are identified using the following notation:
00-10point distributions (0 to 10 square miles)
10-50intermediate distributions (10 to 50 square miles)
50-400area distributions (50 to 400 square miles)
Exceedance probabilities are identified using the following notation:
50%median distributions (for design storms)
10% - 90%exceedance distributions (for analysis storms)
90% - 10%exceedance distributions (for analysis storms)
Related Topics:
14-1251
Hydrograph Methods
Bulletin 70/71 Data

The Bulletin 70/71 tables contain the median (exceedance probability of 50%) time
distribution curves. Median distribution curves represent the most common rainfall
types and should be used for design purposes. Median temporal distribution curves are
given for point distributions, intermediate distributions, and areal distributions
containing all four distribution types.
Related Topics:
Circular 173 Data

The Circular 173 (Huff 1990) tables contain the 10% and 90% exceedance probability
time-distribution curves. These curves could be used for the analysis of extreme cases
(what-if scenarios). These temporal distribution curves are given for point distributions and areal distributions, containing all four distribution types.
Related Topics:
14-1252
Theory
Rainfall Curves: Build from I-D-F Data
Intensity-Duration-Frequency (I-D-F) data can be used to build center peaking rainfall
curves for any duration contained within that I-D-F curve.
The total rainfall depth is computed by multiplying the intensity corresponding to the
desired storm duration and the duration. For example, the total depth for a 5 hour
storm whose intensity (found from the I-D-F curve) is 0.469 in./hr. is 2.345 in. This
total depth is then temporally distributed throughout the duration of the storm
according to a center peaking pattern. The center peaking storm pattern dictates that
the most intense portion of the storm is during the middle of the storm, and that the
beginning and end of the storm are less intense.
Related Topics:
Bulletins 70/71 on page 14-1248
Snowmelt
The snowmelt routine, available when running the SWMM engine, is a part of the
runoff modeling process. It updates the state of the snow packs associated with each
subcatchment by accounting for snow accumulation, snow redistribution by areal
depletion and removal operations, and snow melt via heat budget accounting. Any
snowmelt coming off the pack is treated as an additional rainfall input onto the
subcatchment.
At each runoff time step the following computations are made:
1. Air temperature and melt coefficients are updated according to the calendar date.
2. Any precipitation that falls as snow is added to the snow pack.
3. Any excess snow depth on the plowable area of the pack is redistributed according
to the removal parameters established for the pack.
4. Areal coverages of snow on the impervious and pervious areas of the pack are
reduced according to the Areal Depletion Curves defined for the study area.
14-1253
Hydrograph Methods
5. The amount of snow in the pack that melts to liquid water is found using:
a. a heat budget equation for periods with rainfall, where melt rate increases
with increasing air temperature, wind speed, and rainfall intensity
b. a degree-day equation for periods with no rainfall, where melt rate equals the
product of a melt coefficient and the difference between the air temperature
and the pack's base melt temperature.
6. If no melting occurs, the pack temperature is adjusted up or down based on the
product of the difference between current and past air temperatures and an
adjusted melt coefficient. If melting occurs, the temperature of the pack is
increased by the equivalent heat content of the melted snow, up to the base melt
temperature. Any remaining melt liquid beyond this is available to runoff from the
pack.
7. The available snow melt is then reduced by the amount of free water holding
capacity remaining in the pack. The remaining melt is treated the same as an additional rainfall input onto the subcatchment.
The time of concentration (Tc) is found by summing the time for each individual flow
segment within the drainage area. Both single and multiple flow segments are
modeled with the Tc calculator.
Figure 14-53: The General Equation for Tc
14-1254
Theory
Tc
i1
Ti
n
Where
(14.71)
Tc
Total time of concentration
Ti
Flow travel time through segment i
Li
---Ti Vi
Where
(14.72)
Li
Length of flow segment i
Vi
Average velocity through segment i
The Tc equations provided in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i can be categorized into two
broad categories:
Equations that solve for velocity, then use velocity to solve for the travel time
through a flow segment
Equations that directly solve for the travel time through a flow segmentin these
cases, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i back solves for velocity and includes it in the
output report
Note:
Some types of Tc equations can apply to flow segments within a

multiple-segment Tc calculation (see preceding diagram). Other
Tc methods are equations intended to model the entire average
subarea flow distance and slope in one single flow segment.
When combining multiple flow segments to compute Tc, it is up
to you to only combine Tc methods that can be modeled in
combination with multiple flow segments.
There are 13 different methods for computing the time for an individual flow segment.
Each of the 13 methods has different data input requirements:
User-Defined on page 14-1257
Carter on page 14-1257
14-1255
Hydrograph Methods
Eagleson on page 14-1258
Espey/Winslow on page 14-1259
Federal Aviation Agency on page 14-1260
Kerby/Hathaway on page 14-1260
Kirpich (PA) on page 14-1261
Kirpich (TN) on page 14-1262
Length and Velocity on page 14-1263
SCS Lag on page 14-1264
TR-55 Sheet Flow on page 14-1264
TR-55 Shallow Concentrated Flow on page 14-1266
TR-55 Channel Flow on page 14-1267
Related Topic:
Minimum Time of Concentration on page 14-1256
Minimum Time of Concentration

Certain hydrologic methods for computing runoff hydrographs require the time of
concentration to be greater than some minimum value. For example the TR-55 methodology dictates that the minimum Tc to be used is 0.1 hr.
The minimum Tc is used in lieu of the calculated Tc whenever the calculated Tc is
smaller than the minimum.
Related Topics:
14-1256
Theory
User-Defined
The user-defined time of concentration (Tc) is a method that allows the direct input of
the Tc rather than using an equation to calculate it. This method would be used when
the Tc needs to be calculated using a methodology that is not supported by Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i, or when a quick estimate of Tc is sufficient for the analysis.
Related Topics:
Carter
0.6 0.3
T c 1.7L m S m
Where
(14.73)
Tc
Time of concentration (hr.)
Lm
Flow length (mi)
Sm
Slope (ft/mi)
14-1257
Hydrograph Methods
Related Topics:
Eagleson
T c 0.0001852L f nR
Where
2 3 1 2
Sf
Tc
Lf
Flow length (ft)
Mannings n
Hydraulic radius (ft)
Sf
Slope (ft/ft)
(14.74)
Related Topics:
14-1258
Theory
Espey/Winslow
0.29 0.145 0.6

Sf
Ip
T c 0.52L f
Where
Tc
Espey Channelization factor
Lf
Flow length (ft)
Sf
Slope (ft/ft)
Ip
Impervious area (%)
(14.75)
Related Topics:
14-1259
Hydrograph Methods
Federal Aviation Agency
T c 0.03 1.1 C L
Where
0.5 0.333
(14.76)
Tc
Rational C coefficient
Length of overland pipe flow (ft)
Slope (%)
Related Topics:
Kerby/Hathaway
0.47 0.47 0.235

n
Sf
T c 0.01377L f
14-1260
(14.77)
Theory
Where
Tc
Lf
Flow length (ft)
Mannings n
Sf
Slope (ft/ft)
Related Topics:
Kirpich (PA)
0.77 0.5
Sf
Mt
T c 0.00002167L f
Where
Tc
Lf
Flow length (ft)
Sf
Slope (ft/ft)
Mt
Tc Multiplier (Tc adjustment)
(14.78)
14-1261
Hydrograph Methods
Related Topics:
Kirpich (TN)
0.77 0.385
Sf
Mt
T c 0.00013L f
Where
Tc
Lf
Flow length (ft)
Sf
Slope (ft/ft)
Mt
Tc Multiplier (Tc adjustment)
(14.79)
Related Topics:
14-1262
Theory
Length and Velocity
Lf
1hr.
T c ------ ---------------------
V 3600sec.
Where
Tc
Lf
Flow length (ft)
Velocity (ft/sec.)
(14.80)
Related Topics:
14-1263
Hydrograph Methods
SCS Lag
Note:
There is a factor of 0.6 built into this equation (in the constant
0.0000877) to convert this equation from a lag time to a time of
concentration.
0.7 0.5
0.8 1000
----------T c 0.0000877L f
Sf
9
CN
Where
Tc
Lf
Flow length (ft)
Mannings n
Sf
Slope (ft/ft)
(14.81)
Related Topics:
TR-55 Sheet Flow

This number represents the sheet flow time computed for each column of sheet flow
data. Flow time for sheet flow is computed as:
14-1264
Theory
0.8
0.007 nL
T -------------------------------0.5 0.4
P2 Sf
Where
(14.82)
Sheet flow time (hr.)
Mannings roughness coefficient from TR-55

table
Flow length (ft)
P2
Two-year, 24-hour rainfall (in)
Sf
Slope (ft/ft)
Related Topics:
14-1265
Hydrograph Methods
TR-55 Shallow Concentrated Flow

This number represents the sheet flow time computed for each column of shallow
concentrated flow data. Flow velocity for this flow time is computed as:
Unpaved Surfaces
Paved Surfaces
0.5
V 16.1345S f
Where
(14.83)
Average velocity (ft/sec.)
Sf
Slope of hydraulic grade line (ft/ft)
Lf
1hr.
T c ------- ---------------------
V 3600sec.
Where
0.5
V 20.3282S f
(14.84)
(14.85)
Tc
Lf
Flow length (ft)
Related Topics:
14-1266
Theory
TR-55 Channel Flow

This number represents the channel flow time computed for each column of channel
flow data. Flow velocity for this flow time is computed as:
Lf
1hr.
T c ------- ---------------------
V 3600sec.
(14.86)
where
23 12
Sf
1.49R
V ----------------------------------n
Where
Tc
Lf
Flow length (ft)
Hydraulic radius (ft)
Sf
Average slope (ft/ft)
Mannings roughness value
(14.87)
Related Topics:
14-1267
Hydrograph Methods
Rational Method
The Rational method solves for peak discharge based on watershed area, Rational
coefficient, and rainfall intensity for the watershed. The following equation is used to
compute flow using the Rational method:
Q CiA
Where
Note:
(14.88)
Flow (cfs) for drainage area A
Weighted runoff coefficient for drainage area A
Intensity (in/hr.) for the given design frequency

and storm duration (this value is taken from the ID-F curves for your design area)
Drainage area (acres)
A conversion factor of 1.008 acre inches/hour per cfs makes the

Rational equation unit-consistent, and is used by PondPack.
Some localities have C adjustment factors for different storm
frequencies.
C, the Rational coefficient, is the parameter that is most open to engineering judgement. In many cases, an area weighted average of C coefficients is used as the C for
the entire drainage area. SewerGEMS V8i calculates the weighted C for drainage
areas.
Related Topics:
14-1268
Weighting C Values on page 14-1269
Related Topics: on page 14-1277
Theory
Weighting C Values
If the drainage area consists of more than one subarea, a weighted C value for the area
must be computed. The weighted C for a drainage area is computed by dividing the
sum of all subarea CAs by the total area, where CA is the subarea C value multiplied
by the area of the subarea.
Example: An engineer wants to compute the weighted C value for the composite
drainage area shown below. In this example the C values are not adjusted for storm
frequencies.
Total Area, A = 2.6 + 3.4 + 1.2 = 7.2 acres
2.6 0.97 3.4 0.47 1.2 0.98 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0.736 0.74

7.2
(14.89)
Q (cfs) is computed by:
Q CiA Q 0.74 i 7.2

Where
(14.90)
Rainfall intensity (in/hr.) for given design

frequency and duration
Basic Assumptions about Rational Method
There are several assumptions that form the basis for rational method hydrology:
Drainage areas are smaller than 300 acres (120 hectares).
Peak flow occurs when the entire catchment is contributing.
Rainfall intensity is uniform over a duration of time equal to or greater than the
time of concentration.
Rational coefficients are independent of the intensity of the rainfall.

The Rational Method has been tested on urban catchments up to 150 hectares in area
with times of concentration up to about 30 minutes and outfall pipe diameters of up to
around 1 metre. The catchments tested had reasonably uniform slopes and impervious
area distributions. These tests have shown that the method is as accurate as other more
sophisticated urban runoff methods for calculating peak runoff. (Department of Environment, National Water Council, Standing Technical Committee, 1981)
The accuracy of the method for conditions outside those described above is unknown,
and therefore the method can't be positively recommended in those cases.
14-1269
Hydrograph Methods
Modified Rational Method

The Modified Rational Method provides a way to calculate the hydrograph from a
catchment based on rational method C values and the peak intensity. There is no "loss
method" associated with the modified rational method. The underlying assumption is
that the peak intensity is maintained for a long enough duration to reach peak flow at
the outlet of the catchment. This results in a trapezoidal hydrograph as shown below.
Qpeak is determined from the rational method (link to rational method topic)
Q=CiA
When using English units i is intensity in in/hr, A = area, acres, Q = flow, cfs and C is
runoff coefficient, dimensionless.
The time to reach the peak is based on the time of concentration in the catchment
which the user can manually enter or calculate using a variety of methods (Rational
Method on page 14-1268).
The length of the recession leg is based on the time of concentration times a recession
multiplier which is set in the calculations options.
The intensity and duration are taken from the IDF curves (tables) based on the duration and frequency (return period) of the storm.
14-1270
Theory
SCS CN Runoff Equation

The SCS Runoff equation is used with the SCS Unit Hydrograph method to turn rainfall into runoff. It is an empirical method that expresses how much runoff volume is
generated by a certain volume of rainfall.
The variable input parameters of the equation are the rainfall amount for a given duration and the basins runoff curve number (CN). For convenience, the runoff amount is
typically referred to as a runoff volume even though it is expressed in units of depth
(in., mm). In fact, this runoff depth is a normalized volume since it is generally distributed over a sub-basin or catchment area.
In hydrograph analysis the SCS runoff equation is applied against an incremental burst
of rain to generate a runoff quantity. This runoff quantity is then distributed according
to the unit hydrograph procedure, which ultimately develops the full runoff
hydrograph.
14-1271
Hydrograph Methods
The general form of the equation (U.S. customary units) is:
P Ia
Q ----------------------------- P Ia S
Where
(14.91)
Runoff depth (in)
Rainfall (in)
Maximum retention after runoff begins (in)
Ia
Initial abstraction
The initial abstraction includes water captured by vegetation, depression storage,

evaporation, and infiltration. For any P, this abstraction must be satisfied before any
runoff is possible. The universal default for the initial abstraction is given by the equation:
I a 0.2S
(14.92)
The ratio, 0.2, is rarely, if ever, modified.

The potential maximum retention after runoff begins, S, is related to the soil and land
use/vegetative cover characteristics of the watershed by the equation:
1000
S ------------ 10
CN
(14.93)
Where the runoff curve number is developed by coincidental tabulation of soil/land

use extents in the weighted runoff curve number parameter, CN.
Related Topics:
14-1272
Theory
Runoff Curve Number

In SewerGEMS V8i, the sub-basin runoff is defined solely by the CN input for each
watershed. Bentley SewerGEMS V8i features built-in spreadsheet forms that aid you
by automatically computing weighted CN values as a function of soil hydrologic class
and cover characteristics.
The USDA has classified its soil types into four hydrologic soil groups. The CN
values for various land uses and cover characteristics for each soil classification are
described below. To describe a sub-basin using CN, you must overlay a land cover
layer over a hydrologic soil mapping overlay and a delineated drainage basin mapping
overlay. You then determine the component CN areas that comprise each sub-basin,
and enter these into SewerGEMS V8i, which develops the actual weighted CN for use
in hydrograph generation.
Definition of SCS Hydrologic Soil Groups
Group A:
Group A soils have low runoff potential and high

infiltration rates even when thoroughly wetted. They
consist chiefly of deep, well to excessively drained
sands or gravels and have a high rate of water
transmission (greater than 0.30 in./hr.).
Group B:
Group B soils have moderate infiltration rates when

thoroughly wetted and consist chiefly of moderately
deep to deep, moderately well to well drained soils
with moderately fine to moderately course textures.
These soils have a moderate rate of water
transmission (0.15 to 0.30 in./hr.).
Group C:
Group C soils have low infiltration rates when

thoroughly wetted and consist chiefly of soils with a
layer that impedes downward movement of water
and soils with moderately coarse textures. These
soils have a moderate rate of water transmission
(0.05-0.15 in./hr.).
Group D:
Group D soils have high runoff potential. They have

very low infiltration rates when thoroughly wetted
and consist chiefly of clay soils with a high swelling
potential, soils with a permanent high water table,
soils with a claypan or clay layer at or near the
surface, and shallow soils over nearly impervious
material. These soils have a very low rate of water
transmission (0.00 to 0.05 in./hr.).
TR-55 provides an extensive table detailing different land uses, soil types and their
associated CN values.
14-1273
Hydrograph Methods
Runoff Volume (CN Method)

The amount of actual runoff from a watershed is dependent upon the amount of
precipitation that occurs, the initial amount of precipitation that is intercepted, infiltrates, or is stored before runoff begins, the actual retention that occurs after rainfall
begins, and the potential maximum retention that can occur after rainfall begins.
The SCS method for estimating the volume of direct runoff from storm rainfall relates
the initial abstractions, and retention parameters to watershed properties as described
by the curve number (CN).
The potential maximum retention after runoff occurs is related to the CN as follows:
1000
S ------------ 10
CN
Where
(14.94)
Potential maximum retention after runoff begins
CN
Curve number
The initial abstraction is related to the potential maximum retention as follows:
I a 0.2S
Where
(14.95)
Ia
Initial abstraction (includes interception, surface

storage, and infiltration)
The runoff volume is related to the precipitation and the potential maximum runoff as
follows:
P 0.2S
Q ---------------------------- P 0.8S
Where
14-1274
(14.96)
Actual runoff volume
Rainfall (P >= Q)
Theory
For complex watersheds that consist of several subareas each having a distinct CN, the
total actual runoff volume can be computed in two different ways.
The cumulative volume method computes the actual runoff occurring from each
subarea individually (using the individual CNs and areas), and then sums these
runoff volumes to determine the total for the watershed.
The composite volume method computes the actual runoff using a composite CN
and the total watershed area.
CN Weighting
Note:
Figures and tables referred to in this help section are referring to

the TR-55 document. The tables are reproduced, see: Reference
Tables on page B-1433.
These sections are reproduced from TR-55, Urban Hydrology for Small Watersheds
(U.S. Soil Conservation Service 1986b):
Antecedent Runoff Condition on page 14-1275
Urban Impervious area Modifications on page 14-1275
Connected Impervious Areas on page 14-1276
Unconnected Impervious Areas on page 14-1276
Antecedent Runoff Condition

The index of runoff potential before a storm data is the antecedent runoff condition
(ARC). ARC is an attempt to account for the variation in CN at a site from storm to
storm. The CN for the average ARC at a site is the median value as taken from sample
rainfall and runoff data. For more information on the CNs for the average ARC, which
is used primarily for design applications, see Runoff Curve Number Tables on
page B-899. See the National Engineering Handbook (U.S. Soil Conservation Service
1969) and TR-55, Urban Hydrology for Small Watersheds (U.S. Soil Conservation
Service 1986b) for more detailed discussion of storm-to-storm variation and a demonstration of upper and lower enveloping curves.
Urban Impervious area Modifications
Several factors, such as the percentage of impervious areas and the means of
conveying runoff from impervious areas to the drainage system, should be considered
in computing CN for urban areas (U.S. Soil Conservation Service 1986b). For
example, do the impervious areas connect directly to the drainage system, or do they
outlet onto lawns or other pervious areas where infiltration can occur?
14-1275
Hydrograph Methods
Connected Impervious Areas
An impervious area is considered connected if runoff from it flows directly into the
drainage system. It is also considered connected if runoff from it occurs as concentrated shallow flow that runs over a pervious area and then into a drainage system.
Urban CNs (for more information, see Runoff Curve Numbers for Urban Areas on
page B-899) were developed for typical land use relationships based on specific
assumed percentages of impervious area. These CN values were developed on the
assumptions that:
Pervious urban areas are equivalent to pasture, in good hydrologic conditions.
Impervious areas have a CN of 98 and are directly connected to the drainage

system. Some assumed percentages of impervious area are shown in Table B-1:
Runoff Curve Numbers for Urban Areason page B-899.
If all of the impervious area is directly connected to the drainage system, but the
impervious area percentages or the pervious land use assumptions in Table B-1:
Runoff Curve Numbers for Urban Areason page B-899 are not applicable, use Figure
2-3 from TR-55, Urban Hydrology for Small Watersheds (U.S. Soil Conservation
Service 1986b) to compute a composite CN. For example, Table B-1: Runoff Curve
Numbers for Urban Areason page B-899 gives a CN of 70 for a 1/2-acre lot in HSG
B, with an assumed impervious area of 25 percent. However, if the lot has 20 percent
impervious area and a pervious area CN of 61, the composite CN obtained from
Figure 2-3 (U.S. Soil Conservation Service 1986b) is 68. The CN difference between
70 and 68 reflects the difference in percent impervious area.
Unconnected Impervious Areas
Runoff from these areas is spread over a pervious area as sheet flow. To determine CN
when all or part of the impervious area is not directly connected to the drainage
system, (1) use Figure 2-4 from TR-55, Urban Hydrology for Small Watersheds (U.S.
Soil Conservation Service 1986b) if total impervious area is less than 30 percent, or
(2) use Figure 2-3 (U.S. Soil Conservation Service 1986b) if the total impervious area
is equal to or greater than 30 percent, because the absorptive capacity of the remaining
pervious areas do not significantly affect runoff.
When impervious area is less than 30 percent, obtain the composite CN by entering
the right half of Figure 2-4 (U.S. Soil Conservation Service 1986b) with the
percentage of total impervious area and the ratio of total unconnected impervious area
to total impervious area. Then move left to the appropriate pervious CN and read
down to find the composite CN. For example, for a one acre lot with 20 percent total
impervious area (75 percent of which is unconnected) and pervious CN of 61, the
composite CN from Figure 2-4 (U.S. Soil Conservation Service 1986b) is 66. If all of
the impervious area is connected, the resulting CN from Figure 2-3 (U.S. Soil Conservation Service 1986b) would be 68.
14-1276
Theory
Equation for composite CN with connected impervious area:
P imp
CN c CN p ------------ 98 CN p
100
Where
CNc
Composite runoff curve number
CNp
Pervious runoff curve number
Pimp
Percent imperviousness
(14.97)
Equation for composite CN with unconnected impervious areas and total impervious
area less than 30%:
P imp
----------- 98 CN p 1 0.5R
CN c CN p
100
Where
(14.98)
Ratio of unconnected impervious area to total

impervious area
Related Topics:
Related Topics:
Initial Abstraction, Ia (in) on page 14-1280
Ia/P Ratio on page 14-1280
Unit Discharge, qu (csm/in.) on page 14-1280
Runoff, Q (in.) on page 14-1281
Pond and Swamp Adjustment Factor on page 14-1281
Peak Discharge, qp (cfs) on page 14-1281
Runoff Curve Number Tables on page B-899
14-1277
Hydrograph Methods
Where
qp
Peak discharge (cfs)
qu
Unit peak discharge (csm/in)
Am
Drainage area (mi2)
Runoff (in)
Fp
Pond and swamp adjustment factor
Related Topics:
Theory for Computed Spreadsheet Values on page 14-1282
Hydrograph Methods
Hydrograph methods include:
Soil Conservation Service (SCS) on page 14-1281
Related Topics:
Unit Hydrograph Methodology

The Unit Hydrograph theory assumes that the watershed is a linear system. This
means that the outflow is proportional to the inflow regardless of the magnitude of the
inflow. This is generally not the case however. When the flow in stream channels and
on overland flow surfaces increases, the velocity also increases, causing a reduction in
the time of travel to the outlet. Yet, for most natural streams, the velocity increases as
the depth increases only until overbank flow begins. At this point, the velocity tends to
remain constant, which satisfies the requirement of linearity. Therefore, unit hydrographs should be derived only from the larger floods for a particular watershed.
14-1278
Theory
The Unit Hydrograph theory also assumes that the input rainfall excess is uniform
over the watershed, and that the response to this input is invariable. Typically, the
spatial variation of rainfall, and the difference in watershed characteristics can cause
the rate of runoff to vary widely from place to place at any time. However, many
watersheds do experience similar patterns of rainfall from event to event, and therefore the response to that rainfall excess can be effectively characterized by the unit
hydrograph.
The unit hydrograph theory depends on the principle of superposition. This principle
states that a flood hydrograph for a particular storm data can be built up from the unit
hydrograph applied to the incremental rainfall excess during each period. In other
words, the unit hydrograph can be applied to a series of inputs, and the resulting
hydrographs can be added together to form the total hydrograph.
Related Topics:
Generic Unit Hydrographs on page 14-1279
Unit Hydrograph Runoff Methods on page 14-1283
Generic Unit Hydrographs

In calculating a runoff hydrograph from rainfall data, users can use a default triangular
or curvilinear hydrograph such as provided by the SCS or RTK methods. However, if
a hydrograph does not closely follow those shapes, the generic unit hydrograph
method can be used to develop a more accurate unit hydrograph if the user has sufficient rainfall and runoff data for the catchment.
This method is selected for a catchment by setting the Runoff Method to Unit
Hydrograph and the Unit Hydrograph Method to Generic Unit Hydrograph. The
values of the hydrograph entered by the user are a collection corresponding to the
runoff per unit of excess precipitation (rainfall minus loss) over time. These values
should be based on field data collection. These values are unique to each catchment
and are not scaled by the area.
The time step size on which the resulting hydrograph is based is referred to as the
"convolution time step". It must be greater than zero and should be less than or equal
to the rainfall increment. The hydrograph will be smoother if the time step is smaller
but there is no benefit in making it smaller than the output increment set in the Calculation options.
14-1279
Hydrograph Methods
For each plug of runoff generated over a single time step, an individual runoff
hydrograph is generated. All the successive unit hydrographs are superimposed to
form the ultimate runoff hydrograph for the catchment. The underlying theory is
described in Stormwater Conveyance Modeling and Design, by Bentley Institue Press
(pp. 158-162) or Wastewater Collection System Modeling and Design, by Bentley
Institue Press (pp. 252-254).
The fundamental equation for this method is show below.
k
Qk PU
i k i 1
i 1
Where
(14.99)
Qk
flow at time step k, cfs
Pi
precipitation during time step i, in./hr
Uk-i+1
flow at time step k from rain during time step

I, cfs/in
duration of rain in time steps + duration of

hydrograph
The theory behind unit hydrographs is that the volume of water, calculated as the area
under the hydrograph curve, should correspond to 1 inch of excess precipitation over
the area. The user needs to check if this is true.
For example, over a 2 acre area, the volume of water calculated under the unit
hydrograph should be 2 acre-in (7,260 cubic feet). If there is 1.5 in of excess precipitation (precipitation losses) over this catchment, the volume of water calculated
using the unit hydrograph method should be 3 acre-in (10,890 cubic feet). This runoff
volume is displayed under the Catchment tab of the Detailed Calculation Summary.
Related Topics:
14-1280
Theory
Soil Conservation Service (SCS)
This section includes:
SCS Unit Hydrograph on page 14-1281
Governing Equations on page 14-1281
SCS Unit Hydrograph

A unit hydrograph can be a natural hydrograph (i.e., a hydrograph obtained directly
from observed flows in a gauged stream), or a synthetic hydrograph (i.e., a
hydrograph that simulates a natural hydrograph by using watershed parameters and
storm characteristics). Specifically, a unit hydrograph is the hydrograph that results
from one inch of direct runoff occurring uniformly over a watershed in a specified
amount of time. L.K. Sherman first advanced the theory of the unit hydrograph in
1932, and then Victor Mockus derived the unit hydrograph used by the SCS (from a
large number of natural unit hydrographs from both large and small watersheds).
Governing Equations
The SCS Unit Hydrograph is an extremely flexible tool. It is a dimensionless curvilinear graph with ordinate values expressed in a dimensionless ratio Q/Qp (discharge
at time t to total discharge) or Qa/Q (accumulated volume at time t to total volume)
and its abscissa values as T/Tp (a selected time from the beginning of the rise to the
peak). A watershed specific unit hydrograph can be developed from the dimensionless
graph utilizing certain watershed parameters. This watershed specific unit graph can
then be used to build a flood hydrograph resulting from a given storm.
The unit hydrograph for any regularly shaped watershed can be constructed once the
values of Qp and Tp are defined. An irregularly shaped watershed should be divided
into hydrological units of uniformly shaped areas, such that the drainage area of any
unit should be less than 20 square miles and have a homogeneous drainage pattern.
Unit hydrographs should be developed for each of the divisions, and then combined to
form the watershed unit graph.
Excerpted from NEH-4: The dimensionless curvilinear unit hydrograph has 37.5% of
the total volume in the rising side, which is represented by one unit of time and one
unit of discharge. This dimensionless unit hydrograph also can be represented by an
equivalent triangular hydrograph having the same units of time and discharge, thus
having the same percent of volume in the rising side of the triangle.
Figure 14-54: Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph
The peak discharge for the hydrograph can be found from the following equation:
14-1281
Hydrograph Methods
484AQ
q p ----------------Tp
Where
(14.100)
qp
Peak discharge (cfs)
Drainage area (mi2)
Depth of runoff (in)
Tp
Time to peak (hr.)
484
645.33 x 0.75m, where 645.33 is a conversion

factor from in x mi2/hr. to ft3/sec.
The time to peak is defined as:
D
T p -------- L
2
Where
(14.101)
Duration of unit excess rainfall (hr.)
Watershed lag (hr.)
The average relationship of watershed lag to the time of concentration is:
L 0.6T c
Where
14-1282
Tc
(14.102)
=
Theory
The duration of unit excess rainfall is related to the time of concentration as:
D 0.133T c
(14.103)
Related Topics:
Runoff Curve Number Tables on page B-899
Unit Hydrograph Runoff Methods

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i provides various methods for computing the incremental
runoff for pervious and directly connected impervious areas to compute the weighted
runoff depth for each hydrograph increment. The SCS Unit Hydrograph option can
compute runoff using either of the following methods:
Note:
In either case, you can use the storage depression method for
computing runoff for the directly connected impervious area
(i.e., the runoff for impervious areas equals the rainfall greater
than a specified storage depression depth).
1. You can enter a value in the fLoss field that represents a constant infiltration loss
rate (in./hr.) that occurs throughout the entire duration of the storm.
2. You can use the SCS Runoff Curve Number method by entering CN values for
the pervious and impervious areas.
3. You can use the Green and Ampt method and calculate a variable rate of absorption for your subarea.
4. You can use the Horton (generic) method to calculate non-constant infiltration for
your subarea.
The following approach is used whenever CN values are entered for the pervious and
impervious areas.
Pervious Area
If P(t) is less than 0.2Sp then Rp(t) = 0.0. Otherwise:
14-1283
Hydrograph Methods
P t 0.2S p
R p t ------------------------------------- P t 0.8S p
Where
(14.104)
Rp(t)
Pervious area runoff (in) during time step t
P(t)
Rainfall (in) during time step t
Sp
1000/CNp - 10
CNp
Pervious area runoff curve number
Directly Connected Impervious Area

If P(t) is less than 0.2Si then Ri(t) = 0.0. Otherwise:
P t 0.2S i
R i t ------------------------------------- P t 0.8S i
Where
(14.105)
Ri(t)
Impervious area runoff (in) during time step t
P(t)
Rainfall (in) during time step t
Si
1000/CNi - 10
CNi
Impervious area runoff curve number
Depression Storage
If a value greater than 0 for depression storage depth is entered, the following method
is used for computing Ri(t) (the SCS CN method is not used).
Ri(t) = 0.0 when Pa(t) is less than Ds. Otherwise:
it
14-1284
Pa t Ds Pa t 1 Ds Pa t Pa t 1
(14.106)
Theory
Where
Ri(t)
Pa(t)
Cumulative rainfall (in) through time step t
Ds
Storage depression depth (in)
Weighted Incremental Runoff
R t Rp t Ap Ri t Ai Ap Ai
Where
(14.107)
Rp(t)
Pervious area runoff (in) during time step t
Ap
Pervious area (acres)
Ri(t)
Ai
Impervious area (acres)
fLoss Rate
Whenever you enter a value for fLoss, Bentley SewerGEMS V8i computes the runoff
for each hydrograph time increment using an average uniform infiltration rate that
does not vary with time or total depth.
Green and Ampt
While the Horton method was empirically derived to describe the exponential decay
of infiltration rate over time, the Green and Ampt method is based on a theoretical
derivation of Darcys law, which relates flow velocity to the permeability of the soil
and the Law of Conservation of Mass. The resulting equation inversely relates the
infiltration rate f to the total accumulated infiltration F as:
s i
f K s --------------------------- 1
(14.108)
14-1285
Hydrograph Methods
Where
Infiltration rate (in/hr, cm/hr)
Ks
Saturated hydraulic conductivity (permeability) (in/hr,

cm/hr)
Capillary suction (in, cm)
Volumetric moisture content (water volume unit soil

volume) under saturated conditions
Volumetric moisture content under initial conditions
Total accumulated infiltration (in, cm)
The benefit of the Green and Ampt method is that the infiltration rate can be calculated based on physical, measurable soil parameters, as opposed to the more amorphous decay coefficients of the Horton method.
In order to calculate the infiltration rate at a given time, the total infiltration up to that
time must be calculated. This value can be determined by integrating the previous
equation with respect to time (starting at time = 0) and solving for F.
F
F K s t s i ln 1 ---------------------------
Where
(14.109)
time (hr.)
The equation cannot be explicitly solved, and thus requires the application of a numerical method such as Newton-Rhapson or the bisection method to solve for F.
Horton
The Horton equation (Horton 1939) is a widely-used method of representing the infiltration capacity of a soil. The Horton equation models a decreasing rate of infiltration
over time, which implies that the rate of infiltration decreases as the soil becomes
more saturated. For conditions in which the rainfall intensity is always greater than the
infiltration capacity (that is, the rainwater supply for infiltration is not limiting), this
method expresses the infiltration rate as:
f t f c f 0 f c e
14-1286
k t t0
(14.110)
Theory
Where
f(t)
Infiltration rate (in/hr. or mm/hr.) at time t (min.)
fc
Steady-state infiltration rate that occurs for

sufficiently large t
f0
Initial infiltration rate at the time that infiltration

begins (that is, at time t = t0)
k (min.-1)
Decay coefficient
It can be shown theoretically that the steady-state infiltration rate fc is equal to the
saturated vertical hydraulic conductivity of the soil.
Estimation of the parameters fc, f0, and k in the previous equation can be difficult
because of the natural variabilities in antecedent moisture conditions and soil properties. The following table provides some values recommended by Rawls et al. (1976),
though such tabulations should be used with caution. Singh (1992) recommends that
f0 be taken as roughly 5 times the value of fc.
Table 14-2: Typical Values of Horton Infiltration Parameters
Soil Type
f0 (in./hr.)
fc (in./hr.)
k (min.-1)
Alphalpha loamy sand
19.0
1.4
0.64
Carnegie sandy loam
14.8
1.8
0.33
Dothan loamy sand
3.5
2.6
0.02
Fuquay pebbly loamy

sand
6.2
2.4
0.08
Leefield loamy sand
11.3
1.7
0.13
Tooup sand
23.0
1.8
0.55
(Source: Rawls et al. 1976.)
Often, the rainfall intensity during the early part of a storm is less than the potential
infiltration capacity of the soil; thus, the supply of rainwater is a limiting factor on the
infiltration rate. During the time period when the water supply is limiting, the actual
infiltration rate is equal to the rate at which rainwater is supplied to the ground
surface. Later in the storm when the rainfall rate is greater than the infiltration rate, the
actual infiltration rate will be greater than that predicted by the previous equation,
because infiltration was limited in the early in the storm.
14-1287
Hydrograph Methods
An integrated version of the Horton method can account for the underestimation of
infiltration rate due to limiting rainfall intensity early in a storm (Viessman et al. 1977;
Bedient and Huber 1992; Chin 2000), as can more complicated infiltration models
such as the Green and Ampt (1911) model. Nevertheless, the simple Horton model is
often used in practice as it yields a larger amount of effective precipitation than does
the integrated version of the Horton model, and is thus conservative. Depending on
selected parameter values, Horton may or may not yield more effective rainfall than
does, for example, the Green and Ampt model (for more information, see Green and
Ampt on page 14-1285).
Related Topics:
RTK Methods
The RTK method is based on representing unit hydrographs by a set of triangular
hydrographs, which can described by three parameters R, T and K. R is the fraction of
runoff that show up as precipitation; T is the time to peak of the hydrograph and K is
the ratio of the recession time to time to peak.
14-1288
Theory
A typical hydrograph is shown in the figure below.
Figure 14-55: A Typical Hydrograph
Most RDII hydrographs do not look like the simple triangular plot above but are really
influenced by several different phenomena such as direct inflow and infiltration
through groundwater. Investigators have suggested that there should actually be three
unit hydrographs representing these processes:
Rapid inflow
Slow infiltration
In Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, you determine the nine numerical values: three parameters for each of the three processes. Each hydrograph is generated and they are
summed as shown below.
The R values depend on the problems with the sewers (e.g. leaks, illegal connections,
sump pumps, roof leaders, etc.). In theory, R should be zero in a sanitary sewer
system. The sum of all the R's should be significantly less that one because some
water flows to storm systems, some seeps into the ground and some is lost to depression storage and evapotranspiration. The R's are usually around 0.1 but depend
heavily on the condition of the system.
14-1289
Hydrograph Methods
The T values depend on the size of the catchment with the rapid inflow T much
smaller than the long term infiltration T. K depends on the relative length of the recession curve but is usually on the order of 1.5 to 3, with 1.67 being a typical value (value
used in SCS triangular curves).
Differences in RTK method between the SWMM and implicit solver.
The RTK method is implemented in different ways between the implicit hydrology
solver and the SWMM explicit solver. Because of this, the RTK coefficients must be
entered separately for each solver. The differences between the two methods are
described below:
SewerGEMS V8i implicit solver
1. The RTK method is assigned to catchments so that area need not be entered
2. Initial abstraction is not explicitly accounted for
3. The coefficients do not change with season
4. Coefficients are entered under Components > RTK Tables
5. The user assigns a RTK hydrograph to a catchment in the property grid under
Runoff > Unit Hydrograph Method, when the Runoff Method is set to RTK Unit
Hydrograph.
SWMM explicit solver
1. The RTK method is assigned to manholes so that user must explicitly enter area
2. Use can specify maximum initial abstraction depth (Dmax), initial depth (Do) and
recovery rate during dry periods (Drec).
3. The user has the ability to enter different RTK coefficients for each month
4. Coefficients are entered under Components > SWMM RTK Unit Hydrographs
5. The user assigns a RTK hydrograph to a node in the property grid (or flex tables)
under Infiltration > Apply SWMM RTK unit hydrograph set? The user must also
enter the sewershed area in the property grid (or flex table).
If the calculation engine type is Explicit (SWMM), both catchment RTK Unit
hydrograph and manhole SWMM RTK Unit Hydrograph will be included in calculation. If the user only wants to use manhole inflows, no catchment hydrology should be
specified in that scenario.
If the calculation engine type is Implicit, only the catchment RTK Unit hydrograph is
included in calculation and the manhole SWMM RTK Unit Hydrograph is ignored.
14-1290
Theory
Procedure
The procedure for developing and applying RTK hydrographs comprises two overall
steps:
1. Use precipitation and flow meter data to develop R, T and K values.
2. Given a hyetograph, create a hydrograph for a given storm and place it on loading
nodes.The simulation model performs the second step.
Developing Hydrographs
During a model run, you enter a precipitation hyetograph and the R, T and K values
convert those values into a hydrograph. The first step is to use the precipitation, area,
and R values to determine the three peak flow values:
Qp j (i) = 2.017P(i) R j A /((1+ K )T )

(14.111)
Where
Qpj(i)
Hydrograph peak flow for i-th rainfall value for jth triangular hydrograph, cfs
P(i)
Precipitation in i-th hour of event, inches
Drainage area, ac
Rj
R value for j-th hydrograph component
P is used here as precipitation although it should be excess precipitation after losses

are subtracted out. However, for the RTK method in sanitary sewers, you would most
likely set the losses to zero and base everything on precipitation.
As with any unit hydrograph method, we are interested in the time from the i-th hour
of precipitation. To get the flow in any hour, the model sums up the hydrographs from
all the previous rainfall hours. Each of those values will be based on a sum of the three
hydrographs. With that in mind, the individual triangular hydrographs are determined
by the following equations:
(14.112)
0for t < ti
Where
ti
Qpj(i) (t/T)for 0 < t < T
The start of i-th precipitation hour
(14.113)
Qj(t) =
14-1291
Thiessen Polygon Generation Theory
t T
Qp j (i ) 1
KT
for T < t < (!+K)T
0for t > (1+K)T
(14.114)
(14.115)
Now that the individual component hydrographs have been created, they are summed
to get:
3
Q(ti ) = Q j (ti )
j =1
(14.116)
Now that the hydrographs have been determined for each interval of 0.2T, the hydrographs for the individual units of rain are summed to obtain the overall hydrograph for
the catchment.
Related Topics:

Nave Method on page 14-1292
Plane Sweep Method on page 14-1293
Nave Method
A Thiessen polygon of a site, also called a Voronoi region, is the set of points that are
closer to the site than to any of the other sites.
Let P = {p1, p2,pn} be the set of sites and V = {v(p1), v(p2),v(pn)} represent the
Voronoi regions or Thiessen polygons for Pi, which is the intersection of all of the half
planes defined by the perpendicular bisectors of pi and the other sites. Thus, a nave
method for constructing Thiessen Polygons can be formulated as follows:
14-1292
Theory
Step 1 For each i such that i = 1, 2,, n, generate n - 1 half planes H(pi,pj), 1 </= j </
= n, i <> j, and construct their common intersection v(pi).
Step 2 Report V = {v(p1), v(p2),v(pn)} as the output and stop.
This nave procedure is, however, very inefficient for generating Thiessen polygons.
The computation time increases exponentially as the number of sites increases. There
are many other more competent methods for constructing a Thiessen polygon.
Plane Sweep Method

The plane sweep technique is a fundamental method for solving two-dimensional
geometric problems. It works with a special line called a sweepline, a vertical line
sweeping the plane from left to right. It hits objects one by one as the sweepline
moves. Whenever it crosses an object, a portion of the problem is solved. Therefore, it
enables a two-dimensional problem to be solved in a sequence of one-dimension
processing. Sweep plane technique provides a conceptually simple and efficient algorithm. Steven Fortune (1986; 1987) has developed a sweepline algorithm for
constructing Thiessen polygons. This algorithm has been implemented in the SewerGEMS V8i Thiessen Polygon Generator. The detailed working algorithm is given as
follows:
1. Q <------- P.
2. Choose and delete the left-most point, say pi from Q.
3. L <------- the list consisting of a single region (V(pi).
4. While Q is not empty, repeat Steps 1-3.
5. If w is a site, say w = pi, do:
a. Find region (V(pi) on L containing pi.
b. Replace (V(pi) on L by the sequence ((V(pj), h-(pi, pj), ((V(pi)), h+(pi, pj),
(V(pj).
c. Add to Q the intersection of h-(pi, pj) with the intermediate lower half hyperbola on L and the intersection of h+(pi, pj) with the immediate upper half
hyperbola on L.
6. If w is an intersection, say w = (qt), do:
a. Replace sub-sequence (h(pi, pj), (V(pi)), h(pi, pk)) on L by h = h-(pi, pk) or
h = h+(pi, pk) appropriately.
b. Delete from Q any intersection of h(pi, pj) or h(pi, pk) with others.
14-1293

c. Add to Q any intersection of h with its immediate upper half hyperbola and its
immediate lower half parabola on L.
d. Mark (qt) as a Voronai vertex incident to h(pi, pj), h(pi, pk), and h.
7. Repeat all half hyperbolas ever listed on L, all the Voronai vertices marked in the
preceding step, and the incidence relations among them.
The sweepline algorithm is an efficient technique for constructing a Thiessen polygon.
The computation time required for the worst case is O(nlog n). It produces a far more
competent method than the nave method and provides satisfactory performance for
generating Thiessen polygons for a large number of points.
14-1294
Chapter
15
Editing Attributes in
the Property Editor
The Property Editor is a manager (titled, Properties) that lets you define and view
the data that defines your model. If it is not open, press F4 or click View > Properties
to open the Property Editor.
Note:
Some data described in this chapter may not appear in the

Property Editor but are available for use when you set up a
FlexTable. For more information on FlexTables, see Viewing and
Editing Data in FlexTables on page 10-957.
Additionally, the available fields will also change depending on
the currently active solver. The currently active solver is
determined by the Active Numerical Solver Calculation Option.
Click one of the following links to learn more about the element attributes that you
can edit in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Property Editor:
Pressure Pipe Attributes on page 15-1306
Conduit Attributes on page 15-1310
Channel Attributes on page 15-1327
Gutter Attributes on page 15-1333
Manhole Attributes on page 15-1340
Catch Basin Attributes on page 15-1348
Outfall Attributes on page 15-1359
Pond Outlet Structure Attributes on page 15-1366
Cross Section Attributes on page 15-1368
Pump Attributes on page 15-1375
Wet Well Attributes on page 15-1378
Catchment Attributes on page 15-1386
Low Impact Development Control Attributes on page 15-1397
15-1305
Pressure Pipe Attributes
Junction Chamber Attributes on page 15-1408
Pressure Junction Attributes on page 15-1413
Related Topics
Elements and Element Attributes on page 6-275

The pressure pipe attributes comprise the following categories:
Pressure PipeGeneral on page 15-1306
Pressure PipeGeometry on page 15-1307
Pressure PipePhysical on page 15-1308
Pressure PipePhysical: Minor Losses on page 15-1309
Pressure PipeActive Topology on page 15-1309
Pressure PipeResults on page 15-1310
Pressure PipeGeneral
Table 15-1: Pressure PipeGeneral Attributes
15-1306
Attribute
Description
ID
Displays the unique identifier for the currently highlighted

element. The ID is automatically assigned to each discrete
block of data in the project data store (the .mdb file) by the
program. It is not editable.
Label
Displays the label for the currently highlighted element. The

Label can be edited.
Notes
Lets you enter descriptive text that is associated with the

currently highlighted element.
GIS-IDs
List of associated IDs on the GIS / datasource side.
Editing Attributes in the Property Editor

Table 15-1: Pressure PipeGeneral Attributes
Attribute
Description
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature. Click
in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and click the
Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks feature. For more
information about the Hyperlink Manager, see Adding
Hyperlinks to Elements on page 6-524.
Node
Reversal
Lets you reverse the direction of the currently highlighted

element. Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button.
Clicking the ellipsis button in this field causes the start node
and stop node to be exchanged with one another, which
reverses the direction of the currently highlighted element.
Start Node
Displays the start, or upstream, node of the currently

highlighted element. This field is not editable.
Stop Node
Displays the stop, or downstream, node of the currently

Pressure PipeGeometry
Table 15-2: Pressure PipeGeometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Geometry
Lets you view and edit the coordinates of points along a

selected element. Click in the field to display an Ellipsis ()
button, and click the Ellipsis () button to use the Polyline
Vertices feature. For more information, see Polyline Vertices
Has User
Defined
Length?
Lets you choose whether the highlighted element uses scaled

or user-defined length. If this field is set to True, the Length
(User Defined) field is activated.
Length (User
Defined)/
Scaled
Length
The length of the currently highlighted element. To use this

field, you must set Has User Defined Length? field to True. If
you set this field to False, it displays the scaled length for the
15-1307
Pressure PipePhysical
Table 15-3: Pressure PipePhysical Attributes
15-1308
Attribute
Description
Is Virtual?
If True, the physical properties will be ignored, except when

using the Gradually Varied Flow (GVF) solver. Can be used to
connect pumps to nodes without accounting for hydraulic
properties.
Diameter
The diameter of the cross section of the currently highlighted

element.
Material
The name of the material used. Alternatively, clicking the

ellipsis button opens the Material Engineering Library, allowing
you to select a pre-defined material. If a pre-defined material is
chosen, the roughness value will change accordingly.
Mannings n
The Mannings roughness of the currently highlighted element.

This field is available only if you selected Mannings as the
default Pressure Friction Method in the Calculation Options
Manager.
HazenWilliams C
The Hazen-Williams roughness of the currently highlighted

element. This field is available only if you selected HazenWilliams as the default Pressure Friction Method in the
Calculation Options Manager.
DarcyWeisbach e
The Darcy-Weisbach roughness of the currently highlighted

element. This field is available only if you selected DarcyWeisbach as the default Pressure Friction Method in the
Calculation Options Manager.
Kutters n
The Kutters roughness of the currently highlighted element.

This field is available only if you selected Kutters as the default
Pressure Friction Method in the Calculation Options Manager.

Table 15-3: Pressure PipePhysical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Elevation
(Start Invert)
The start, or upstream, invert of the currently highlighted

element.
Set Invert to
Start Node?
Sets the start invert of the current element to the elevation of

the start node (upstream). Set this to False to enter a value for
the elevation of the invert, or set this field to True to use the
start-node elevation.
Elevation
(Stop Invert)
The stop, or downstream, invert of the currently highlighted

element.
Slope
The slope.
Pressure PipePhysical: Minor Losses

Table 15-4: Pressure PipeMinor Losses Attributes
Attribute
Description
Minor Loss
Coefficient
The minor loss coefficient of the currently highlighted element.

Alternatively, clicking the ellipse button opens the Minor Loss
Collection dialog box, which lets you generate composite
minor loss coefficients to be applied to the pressure pipe. For
more information, see Adding a Minor Loss Collection to a
Pressure Pipe on page 6-283.
Pressure PipeActive Topology

Table 15-5: Pressure PipeActive Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?
Lets you choose whether or not the corresponding element is

active in the current alternative. Select True to make the
element active in the current alternative.
15-1309
Conduit Attributes
Pressure PipeResults
Table 15-6: Pressure PipeResult Attributes
Attribute
Description
Flow
Representative calculated flow in the pressure pipe. The flow

calculated in the middle section of the pressure pipe. This is a
calculated results field and is not editable.
Velocity
Representative calculated velocity of the flow in the pressure

pipe. The velocity calculated in the middle section of the
pressure pipe. This is a calculated results field and is not
editable.
Conduit Attributes
The conduit attributes comprise the following categories:
15-1310
ConduitGeneral on page 15-1311
ConduitGeometry on page 15-1312
ConduitInfiltration on page 15-1312
ConduitOutput Filter on page 15-1314
ConduitPhysical on page 15-1315
ConduitPhysical: Additional Losses on page 15-1319
ConduitPhysical: Control Structure on page 15-1320
ConduitPhysical: Section Type: Culvert on page 15-1320
ConduitActive Topology on page 15-1323
ConduitResults on page 15-1324
ConduitResults: Capacities on page 15-1325
ConduitResults: Engine Parsing on page 15-1326
ConduitGeneral
Table 15-7: ConduitGeneral Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID

program. It not editable.
Label

Notes

GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Node
Reversal

Start-node Id

Stop-node Id

15-1311
Conduit Attributes
ConduitGeometry
Table 15-8: ConduitGeometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Has User
Defined
Length

Length (User
Defined)/
Scaled
Length
The length of the currently highlighted element. To use this

field, you must set Has User Defined Length? field to True. If
you set this field to False, it displays the scaled length for the
Geometry

ConduitInfiltration
Table 15-9: ConduitInfiltration Attributes
15-1312
Attribute
Description
Infiltration
Load Type
Lets you select the type of infiltration load associated with the
selected conduit. You can select Pipe Length, Pipe RiseLength, Pipe Surface Area, Count Based, Hydrograph,
Pattern Load, or None.
Flow
(Infiltration)
Lets you enter any additional infiltration flow at the selected

conduit.
Infiltration
Loading Unit
Lets you select the unit of measure for the infiltration load. To
use this field, you must set the Infiltration Loading Type to Pipe
Length, Pipe Rise-Length, or Pipe Surface Area.
Infiltration
Rate per
Loading Unit
The infiltration rate per load for the selected conduit. To use
this field, you must set the Infiltration Loading Type to Pipe
Length, Pipe Rise-Length, Pipe Surface Area, or Count
Based.

Table 15-9: ConduitInfiltration Attributes
Attribute
Description
Infiltration
Unit Count
The infiltration unit count for the selected conduit. To use this
field, you must set the Infiltration Loading Type to Count
Based.
Hydrograph
Curve
Lets you define the infiltration load for the selected conduit as
a hydrograph. Click the Ellipsis () button in this field to
display the Hydrograph Curve dialog box, where you can
define the Time vs. Flow data points that make up the
hydrograph curve. To use this field, you must set the Infiltration
Loading Type to Hydrograph.
Infiltration
Pattern
Lets you define the infiltration load as a pattern. You can select
Fixed (the default value), an existing pattern, or Edit Pattern.
When you select Edit Pattern, the Patterns dialog box appears.
To use this field, you must set the Infiltration Loading Type to
Pattern Load.
Flow
(Infiltration
Base)
The base infiltration flow for the selected conduit. To use this
field, you must set the Infiltration Loading Type to Pattern
Load.
ConduitOutput Filter
Table 15-10: ConduitOutput Filter Attributes
Attribute
Description
Output
Options
Lets you switch between summary and detailed versions of the

calculation results.
Select Detailed Results to include all the section results for
the link in the project file. Select Summary Results to include
results only for the start, middle, and stop sections of a link.
Selecting Summary Results, which stores less data than
Detailed Reports, might make color coding, annotation, and
other processes quicker than Detailed Results for larger
projects. You might use Detailed Results only for a small
section of a large model.
15-1313
Conduit Attributes
ConduitPhysical
Table 15-11: ConduitPhysical Attributes
15-1314
Attribute
Description
Section Type
Lets you choose the cross-sectional shape of the currently

highlighted element: Irregular Open Section, Trapezoidal,
Circle, Box, Basket-Handle, Ellipse, Horseshoe Conduit,
Egg, Semi-Ellipse, Catalog Pipe, Pipe-Arch, Virtual, SemiCircle, Catenary, Gothic, Modified Basket-Handle,
Rectangular-Round, Rectangular-Triangle, Power,
Parabola, Triangle, Rectangular, or Irregular Closed
Section. The value chosen here affects the availability of the
following fields.
Flow
(Maximum
User
Defined)
Maximum flow allowed in link. Use 0.0 if not applicable.
StationElevation
Curve
Lets you define station-elevation points that describe the

shape of the irregular channel. Click in the field to display an
Ellipsis () button, and click the Ellipsis () button to use the
Station-Depth Curve dialog box. To use this field, you must set
the Section type to Irregular Channel.
Elevations
Modifier
The Elevations modifier is a constant value that will be added

to each elevation value. This attribute is only used during
SWMM calculations.
Meander
Modifier
The meander modifier is the ratio of the length of a

meandering main channel to the length of the overbank area
that surrounds it. This modifier is applied to all conduits that
use this particular transect for their cross section. It assumes
that the length supplied for these conduits is that of the longer
main channel. The application will use the shorter overbank
length in its calculations while increasing the main channel
roughness to account for longer length. The modifier is ignored
if it is left blank or set to 0.
Station Left
Bank
The station value (horizontal distance) in the Station-Depth

table that marks the end of the left overbank (set to zero or to
the minimum station value in the Station-Depth curve to denote
the absence of an overbank). To use this field, you must set

Attribute
Description
Stations
Modifier
The Stations modifier is a factor by which the distance between

each station will be multiplied when the transect data is
processed by SWMM. Use a value of 0 if no such factor is
needed. This attribute is only used during SWMM calculations.
Station Right
Bank
The station value (horizontal distance) in the Station-Depth

table that marks the start of the right overbank (set to the
maximum station value in the Station-Depth curve to denote
the absence of an overbank). To use this field, you must set
Base Width
The width at the base of the cross section of the currently

highlighted element. To use this field, you must set The
Section Type to Trapezoidal Channel.
Height
The height of the cross section of the currently highlighted

element. To use this field, you must set Section Type to
Trapezoidal Channel.
Slope (Right
Side)
The right slope of the cross section of the currently highlighted

Slope (Left
Side)
The left slope of the cross section of the currently highlighted

Diameter
The diameter of the cross section of the currently highlighted

element. To use this field, you must set The Section Type to
Circle.
Fill Depth
Is the amount of sedimentation that a section has. To use this

field, you must set the Section Type to Circle. Only the SWMM
engine uses this in calculating your model.
Rise
The rise (height or vertical dimension) of the currently

highlighted element. To use this field, you must set Section
Type to any of the types except Circle, Irregular Open Section,
Irregular Closed Section, Trapezoidal, and Catalog Pipe.
Span
The span (width or horizontal dimension) of the currently

highlighted element. To use this field, you must set Section
Type to any of the types except Circle, Irregular Channel and
15-1315
Conduit Attributes
15-1316
Attribute
Description
Number of
Barrels
The number of barrels that comprise the currently highlighted

element. Note that the diameter, rise, and/or span values are
applied to each barrel. To use this field, you must set Section
Type to any of the types except Irregular Open Section,
Irregular Closed Section, and Trapezoidal.
Catalog Pipe
Lets you define or select a catalog pipe for the selected

conduit. Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Catalog Pipe dialog
box. To use this field, you must set the Section type to Catalog
Pipe.
Rect Bottom
Radius
The radius of the circular portion of the Rectangular-Round

section. To use this field, you must set the Section Type to
Rectangular-Round.
Rect Triangle
Triangle
Height
The height of the triangular portion of the Rectangular-Triangle

section. To use this field, you must set the Section Type to
Rectangular-Triangle.
Power
Exponent
The power exponent for the Power section. To use this field,
you must set the Section Type to Power.
Depth-Width
Curve
Lets you define depth-width points that describe the shape of

the irregular closed section. Click in the field to display an
Depth-Width Curve dialog box. To use this field, you must set
the Section type to Irregular Closed Section.
Material

Left Bank
Mannings n
Specify the roughness coefficient in the left overbank of the

irregular channel.
Channel
Mannings n
Specify the roughness coefficient in the main channel of the

irregular channel.
Right Bank
Mannings n
Specify the roughness coefficient in the right overbank of the

irregular channel.
Mannings n

This attribute is active only when the Roughness Type attribute
is set to Single Mannings n.

Attribute
Description
Mannings nDepth Curve
Lets you define points that describe a roughness-depth curve

for the currently highlighted element. Click in the field to
display an Ellipsis () button, and click the Ellipsis () button
to use the Mannings n-Depth Curve dialog box. To use this
field, you must set Roughness Type attribute is set to
Mannings n-Depth Curve.
Mannings nFlow
Lets you define points that describe a roughness-flow curve for

the currently highlighted element. Click in the field to display
an Ellipsis () button, and click the Ellipsis () button to use
the Mannings n-Flow Curve dialog box. To use this field, you
must set Roughness Type attribute is set to Mannings nFlow.
Roughness
Type
The roughness method for the currently highlighted: Single

Mannings n, Mannings - Depth Curve, or Mannings n Flow. The value chosen here affects the availability of some
fields in the Physical section of the Property Editor.
Set Invert to
Start Node?
Sets the start invert of the current element to the elevation of

the start node (upstream). Set this to False to enter a value for
the elevation of the invert, or set this field to True to use the
start-node elevation.
Elevation
(Start Invert)

element. To use this field, you must set Set Invert to Start
Node? to False.
Set Invert to
Stop Node
Sets the stop invert of the current element to the elevation of

the stop node (downstream). Set this to False to enter a value
for the elevation of the invert, or set this field to True to use the
stop-node elevation.
Elevation
(Stop Invert)

element. To use this field, you must set Set Invert to Stop Node
to False.
Slope
The difference between the start invert and stop invert divided
by the length of the conduit. This is a calculated results field
and is not editable.
Roughness
Type
Lets you select the roughness type for the conduit. For more
information see Roughness Models on page 14-1163.
15-1317
Conduit Attributes
Attribute
Description
Overbank
Channel
Lets you specify different roughness values for the left

overbank flow, the channel flow, and the right overbank flow.
To use this field, you must set the Section type to Irregular
Channel.
Horizontal
Segment
Lets you specify a different roughness for each horizontal

segment of the channel. This information is entered in the
Station-Depth curve. To use this field, you must set the Section
Type to Irregular Channel.
Left
Overbank
Mannings n
The Manning's roughness coefficient for overbank flow on the

left side of the channel (between the minimum station value on
the Station-Depth curve and the Left Bank Station). To use this
field, you must set the Section Type to Irregular Channel and
the Roughness Type to Overbank Channel.
Right
Overbank
Mannings n
The Manning's roughness coefficient for overbank flow on the

right side of the channel (between the Right Bank Station and
the maximum station value on the Station-Depth curve). To use
this field, you must set the Section Type to Irregular Channel
and the Roughness Type to Overbank Channel.
Design
Percent Full
The percentage full that you would like the link to maintain. If
you want the pipe to be 75% full, enter in the 75 in the field.
These values do not affect network calculations; they are
informational only.
In the Results attributes is a field called Capacity (Calculated
Design). This displays the result of calculating with the
equation the amount of flow going through the link if it were full
to the percentage you set in Design Percent Full (in this
example, the amount of flow if the link were 75% full).
ConduitPhysical: Additional Losses

Table 15-12: ConduitAdditional Loss Attributes
15-1318
Attribute
Description
Entrance
Loss
Coefficient
Lets you define entrance loss coefficients, if any, for the

Exit Loss
Coefficient
Lets you define exit loss coefficients, if any, for the currently
ConduitPhysical: Control Structure

Table 15-13: ConduitControl Structure Attributes
Attribute
Description
Start Control
Structure
Type
Lets you choose whether to use an Inline or Side Start Control

Structure for the selected conduit. Inline start control structures
are used for inline flow regulation while side start control
structures are used for flow diversion.
Flap Gate?
Lets you choose whether or not the highlighted element has a

flap gate. If this is set to True, and icon displays at the stopend of the conduit to display the presence of the structure.
If this is set to True and you design control structures without
flap gates selected (see Defining a Control Structure in a
Conduit on page 6-277), the flap gate check box will be turned
on for your control structures and a message displayed.
Has Start/
Stop Control
Structure?
Lets you define whether or not the currently highlighted

element has a control structure, and if so, which type. The
value chosen here affects the availability of the other fields. If
this is set to True, an icon displays at the start/stop-end of the
conduit to display the presence of the structure.
Start/Stop
Control
Structure
Lets you design a start and/or stop control structure, or choose

a preexisting one. Click the Ellipsis () button to open the
Conduit Control Structure dialog box to set up the control
structure you want to use.
ConduitPhysical: Section Type: Culvert

To use these attributes, you must set Section Type to Circle or Box.
15-1319
Conduit Attributes
Table 15-14: ConduitCulvert Attributes
15-1320
Attribute
Description
Is Culvert?
Lets you choose whether or not the section type for the
selected conduit is a culvert. If you select True, the other
Culvert attributes are enabled in the Property Editor. If you
select False, none of the other Culvert attributes are available
in the Property Editor. Note that not this option is not available
for ellipse and pipe arch section types.
Inlet
Description
Lets you type or select a description for the inlet. Click the
Ellipse (...) button to display the Culvert Inlet Coefficient
Engineering Library, where you can select an existing culvert.
Culvert
Equation
Form
Lets you select Form 1 or Form 2. To use this field, you must
set the Section Type to Circle or Box and the Is Culvert?
attribute to True.
Lets you define the C equation coefficient that is used in the

submerged inlet control equation. To use this field, you must
set the Section Type to Circle or Box and Is Culvert? to True.
Lets you define the M equation coefficient that is used in both

forms of the unsubmerged inlet control equation. To use this
field, you must set the Section Type to Circle or Box and Is
Culvert? to True.
Lets you define the K equation coefficient that is used in both

forms of the unsubmerged inlet control equation. To use this
field, you must set the Section Type to Circle or Box and Is
Culvert? to True.
Lets you define the Y equation coefficient that is used in the

submerged inlet control equation. To use this field, you must
set the Section Type to Circle or Box and Is Culvert? to True.
Ke
Lets you define the entrance loss value for the associated
conduit. To use this field, you must set the Section Type to
Circle or Box and Is Culvert? to True.
Kr
Lets you define the reverse flow loss value for the associated
conduit. To use this field, you must set the Section Type to
Circle or Box and Is Culvert? to True.
Slope
Correction
Factor
Lets you define the Slope Correction Factor to be used in inlet

control calculations. Normally this factor is 0.5, but for mitered
inlets, HDS No. 5 suggests +0.7.To use this field, you must set
the Section Type to Circle or Box and Is Culvert? to True.

Attribute
Description
Has
Overtopping
Weir?
If True, this allows the user to specify a section of roadway that

acts as an overtopping weir in the event that the culvert
headwater elevation exceeds the roadway elevation. When set
to true, SewerGEMS V8i will include the overtopping weir in
the elevation-discharge-tailwater (EQT) calculations for the
culvert crossing. Weir flow is computed assuming the road
acts as a broad-crested weir. Flow that passes over the
overtopping weir will discharge to the same downstream node
as the culvert.
This field is not available when using either Gradually Varied
Flow solver (Convex or Rational) because the overtopping
calculation is not supported in these solvers.
Elevation
(Roadway
Crest)
The elevation of the roadway crest. If the culvert headwater

elevation exceeds this elevation, flow will overtop the roadway
and the roadway will act like a weir.
Roadway
Cross
Section
Length
The length of the roadway section acting as a weir when flow

is overtopping the road. Often this is set equal the top width of
flow in the channel upstream of the culvert.
Use Weir CDepth Table?
If True, this lets you define a table of weir coefficient versus

flow depth values to simulate a weir coefficient that changes as
the flow depth changes.
C-Depth
Table
A table of weir coefficient versus flow depth values. To use this

field you must set the 'Use Weir C-Depth Table?' field to True.
Roadway
Weir
Coefficient
The weir coefficient for the roadway (typically between 2.5 and
3.1 for US units, or between 1.4 and 1.7 for SI units). This
coefficient is considered dimensionless and is used in the
broad crested weir equation (see Broad-Crested Weir on
page 14-1220) to compute the flow that overtops the roadway.
To use this field you must set the 'Use Weir C-Depth Table?'
field to False.
15-1321
Conduit Attributes
Attribute
Description
Depth
(Maximum
Overtopping)
This value is used to determine the maximum headwater

elevation to use when computing the culvert EQT table
(maximum headwater equals 'Elevation (Roadway Crest)' plus
'Depth (Maximum Overtopping). To ensure accurate
calculations this value should be set higher than the maximum
expected depth of flow over the weir; however users should
note that using very large values for this field may slow down
model computations. If the headwater exceeds the highest
elevation in the EQT table SewerGEMS V8i will linearly
extrapolate the values.
Increment
The depth increment used to generate EQT curves. A small

value provides more accuracy but reduces the performance.
User Defined
Tailwater?
If True, this lets the user specify the maximum tailwater

elevation used when computing the culvert EQT table. If False,
SewerGEMS V8i will chose a maximum tailwater elevation
based on the geometry of the downstream element (for
example if the culvert discharges to a channel downstream,
SewerGEMS V8i will use the channel's top water level)
Elevation
(Maximum
Tailwater)
Lets you define the maximum tailwater elevation used when

computing the culvert EQT table. To ensure accurate
calculations, this elevation should be greater that the highest
expected water surface elevation at the element immediately
downstream from the culvert; however users should note that
using very large values for this field may slow down model
computations. To use this field you must set the 'User Defined
Tailwater?' field to True.
ConduitActive Topology
Table 15-15: ConduitActive Topology Attributes
15-1322
Attribute
Description
Is Active?

ConduitResults
The hydraulic grade, flow, and depth/rise presented in the Property Editor are the
values associated with the middle section of the link. Obviously these values don't
give you the full sense of what is going on, so the middle, start, and stop values are
also available through the FlexTables, and you can also look at the profile. (For more
information, see Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables on page 10-957 and
Using Profiles on page 10-935.)
Table 15-16: ConduitResult Attributes
Attribute
Description
Flow
Representative calculated flow in the conduit. The flow

calculated in the middle section of the conduit. This is a
Velocity
Representative calculated velocity of the flow in the conduit.

The velocity calculated in the middle section of the conduit.
This is a calculated results field and is not editable. When the
conduit is surcharged because of tailwater conditions, the
velocity is based on full pipe flow, not normal depth.
Depth/Rise
Depth/Rise is computed based on the depth in the middle most

section of the link. The link is split into sections by the implicit
engine. You can see the sections and it's individual hydraulic
parameters by looking at the "Section Results" collection on
the property grid for the link.
Depth
Depth of the flow in the center of the link.
Is Oveflowing/
Surcharged?
Conduits are overflowing if the hydraulic grade exceeds the

top elevation of the conduit. This is defined by the invert
elevations and rise of the shape. For irregular channels it is
determined by the maximum most depth in the curve + the
binding invert elevations.
Ever
Oveflowing/
Surcharged?
Is true if HGL ever goes above crown over the course of the
simulation.
Froude
Number
Ratio of velocity to the square of the depth of flow times

gravity.
Flow
(Roadway
Overtopping)
Amount of flow overtopping the roadway.
15-1323
Conduit Attributes
Table 15-16: ConduitResult Attributes
Attribute
Description
Sections
Results
Lets you view the calculated flow variables at the start, middle
and end of the conduit section. Clicking the Ellipses (...)
button displays the Sections Results dialog box.
Flow-Area
(Middle)
The flow-area value in the middle of the conduit.
Flow-Width
(Middle)
The flow-width value in the middle of the conduit.
Pollutants
Collection*
Lets you view calculated results for pollutants. Clicking the

Ellipses (...) button displays the Pollutants Results dialog box.
ConduitResults: Capacities
Table 15-17: ConduitResult: Capacity Attributes
15-1324
Attribute
Description
Capacity (Full)
The normal full flow depth of the conduit. This is a calculated

results field and is not editable.
Capacity
(Excess Full)
The difference between the flow in the conduit and the

Capacity (Full). This is a calculated results field and is not
editable.
Capacity
(Flow/Full
Flow)
The ratio of the flow in the conduit to the Capacity (Full). This is
a calculated results field and is not editable.
Capacity
(Calculated
Design)
The normal flow calculated based on the percent of full flow

established by the design percent full. This is a calculated
Capacity
(Excess
Design)
The difference between the flow in the conduit and the

Capacity (Calculated Design). This is a calculated results field
Capacity
(Flow/Design)
The ratio of the flow in the conduit to the Capacity (Calculated

Design). This is a calculated results field and is not editable.
ConduitResults: Engine Parsing

Table 15-18: ConduitResult: Engine Parsing Attributes
Attribute
Description
Branch
Returns the ID of the branch which the current element is part

of. The branch is determined during the calculations using the
implicit engine. This is a calculated results field and is not
editable. For more information, see Branches on page 141138.
Section Count
The number of sections that the implicit engine divides the

conduits into during an analysis. Not available during a SWMM
analysis. This is a calculated results field and is not editable.
For more information, see Section Count on page 14-1139.
15-1325
Channel Attributes
Channel Attributes
The channel attributes comprise the following categories:
ChannelGeneral on page 15-1327
ChannelGeometry on page 15-1328
ChannelActive Topology on page 15-1331
ChannelOutput Filter on page 15-1329
ChannelPhysical on page 15-1329
ChannelPhysical: Control Structure on page 15-1331
ChannelResults on page 15-1332
ChannelResults: Engine Parsing on page 15-1333
ChannelGeneral
Table 15-19: ChannelGeneral Attributes
15-1326
Attribute
Description
ID

Label

Notes

GIS-IDs

Table 15-19: ChannelGeneral Attributes
Attribute
Description
Hyperlinks
Node
Reversal

Start Node

Stop Node

ChannelGeometry
Table 15-20: ChannelGeometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Geometry

selected element. Click the Ellipsis () button in this field to
open the Polyline Vertices dialog box. For more information,
see Polyline Vertices Dialog Box on page 6-285.
Has User
Defined
Length?

Length (User
Defined)/
Scaled
Length
The length of the currently highlighted element. This attribute

is active only when the Has User Defined Length? attribute is
set to True. If this field is set to False, it displays the scaled
length for the currently highlighted element.
15-1327
Channel Attributes
ChannelOutput Filter
Table 15-21: ChannelOutput Filter Attributes
Attribute
Description
Output
Options

Select Detailed Results to include all the section results for
the link in the project file. Select Summary Results to include
results only for the start, middle, and stop sections of a link.
Selecting Summary Results, which stores less data than
Detailed Reports, might make color coding, annotation, and
other processes quicker than Detailed Results for larger
projects. You might use Detailed Results only for a small
section of a large model.
ChannelPhysical
Manning's n is not a property of a channel but a property of the cross-section
nodes along the channel. The cross-section defines the shape and other physical properties of the channel (except for length). The properties between two
cross sections are interpolated. For more information, see Cross SectionPhysical on page 15-1370.
Table 15-22: ChannelPhysical Attributes
15-1328
Attribute
Description
Flow
(Maximum
User
Defined)
Maximum flow allowed in link. Use 0.0 if not applicable.
Invert (Start)

element.
Invert (Stop)

element.
Slope
by the length of the channel. This is a calculated results field
ChannelPhysical: Control Structure

Table 15-23: ChannelControl Structure Attributes
Attribute
Description
Start Control
Structure
Type
Lets you choose whether to use an Inline or Side Start Control

Structure for the selected conduit. Inline start control structures
are used for inline flow regulation while side start control
structures are used for flow diversion. A side control is applied
to control structures which generally divert flow at higher levels
and an inline structure is applied to the primary flow direction.
Flap Gate?
Lets you choose whether or not the highlighted element has a

flap gate. If this is set to True, and icon displays at the stopend of the conduit to display the presence of the structure.
If this is set to True and you design control structures without
flap gates selected, the flap gate check box will be turned on
for your control structures and a message displayed.
Has Start/
Stop Control
Structure?

element has a control structure, and if so, which type. The
value chosen here affects the availability of the other fields. If
this is set to True, an icon displays at the start/stop-end of the
conduit to display the presence of the structure.
Start/Stop
Control
Structure
Lets you design a start and/or stop control structure, or choose

a preexisting one. Click the Ellipsis () button to open the
Conduit Control Structure dialog box to set up the control
structure you want to use.
ChannelActive Topology
Table 15-24: ChannelActive Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?
Lets you choose whether or not the corresponding element Is

Active? in the current alternative. Select True to make the
15-1329
Channel Attributes
ChannelResults
The hydraulic grade, flow, and depth/rise presented in the Property Editor are the
values associated with the middle section of the link. Obviously these values don't
give you the full sense of what is going on, so the middle, start, and stop values are
also available through the FlexTables, and you can also look at the profile. (For more
information, see Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables on page 10-957 and
Using Profiles on page 10-935.)
Table 15-25: ChannelResult Attributes
15-1330
Attribute
Description
Flow
Representative calculated flow in the channel. The flow is

calculated in the middle section of the channel. This is a
Velocity
Representative calculated velocity of the flow in the channel.

The velocity is calculated in the middle section of the channel.
This is a calculated results field and is not editable.
Is
Overflowing?
(Start)
Is true if the HGL at the upstream end of the link goes above its
crown level during current time step. For the open channel
section, the SewerGEMS Dynamic Wave solver does not
compute overflow when the HGL exceeds the maximun depth
but the Is flooding? attribute will be marked True.
Is
Overflowing?
(Stop)
Is true if the HGL at the downstream end of the link goes

above its crown level during current time step. For the open
channel section, the SewerGEMS Dynamic Wave solver does
not compute overflow when the HGL exceeds the maximun
depth but the Is flooding? attribute will be marked True.
Ever
Overflowing/
Surcharged?
Is true if HGL ever goes above crown over the course of the
simulation.
Froude
Number
Ratio of velocity to the square of the depth of flow times

gravity.
Sections
Results
Lets you view the calculated flow variables at the start, middle
and end of the channel section. Clicking the Ellipses (...)
button displays the Sections Results dialog box.
Pollutants
Collection
Lets you view calculated results for pollutants. Clicking the

Ellipses (...) button displays the Pollutants Results dialog box.
ChannelResults: Engine Parsing

Table 15-26: ChannelResults: Engine Parsing Attributes
Attribute
Description
Branch

Section Count
The number of sections that the implicit engine divides the

channels into during an analysis. Not available during a
SWMM analysis. This is a calculated results field and is not
editable. For more information, see Section Count on
page 14-1139.
Gutter Attributes
The gutter attributes comprise the following categories:
GutterGeneral on page 15-1334
GutterGeometry on page 15-1335
GutterPhysical on page 15-1335
GutterActive Topology on page 15-1337
GutterResults on page 15-1338
15-1331
Gutter Attributes
GutterGeneral
Table 15-27: GutterGeneral Attributes
15-1332
Attribute
Description
ID

Label

Notes

GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Node
Reversal

Start Node

Stop Node

GutterGeometry
Table 15-28: GutterGeometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Geometry

selected element. Click the Ellipsis () button in this field to
open the Polyline Vertices dialog box. For more information,
see Polyline Vertices Dialog Box on page 6-285.
Has User
Defined
Length?

Length (User
Defined)/
Scaled
Length
The length of the currently highlighted element. This attribute

is active only when the Has User Defined Length? attribute is
set to True. If this field is set to False, it displays the scaled
length for the currently highlighted element.
GutterPhysical
Table 15-29: GutterPhysical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Gutter Type
The Gutter Type to use associated with the inlet.
Gutter Shape
The shape of the gutter to use.
Catalog
Gutter
The gutter referenced from the gutter catalog.
Maximum
Gutter Depth
The maximum depth of the gutter.
Irregular
Channel
Editor
Allows you to define the irregular cross section for the gutter.
Right Side
Slope
The right side slope of the gutter when using the trapezoidal
gutter shape.
Left Side
Slope
The left side slope of the gutter when using the trapezoidal
gutter shape.
15-1333
Gutter Attributes
15-1334
Attribute
Description
Bottom Width
(Ditch)
Enter the distance along the bottom of the ditch.
Road Cross
Slope
Enter the transverse slope of the road.
Curb Cross
Slope
The curb cross slope when using the V-Shaped gutter shape.
Depressed
Gutter?
If True, the gutter slope differs from the road cross slope.
Length
The length of the currently highlighted element. This field is

available only when the Structure Shape Type attribute is set
to Rectangular Structure.
Width
The width of the currently highlighted element. This field is

Irregular
Channel

shape of the irregular channel. Click in the field to display an
Irregular Channel dialog box. To use this field, you must set
Open Cross-Section attribute to Irregular Channel.
Bottom Width

highlighted element. To use this field, you must set Open
Cross-Section attribute to Trapezoidal Channel.
Gutter
Material


Attribute
Description
Mannings n
(Gutter)
The Mannings roughness of the currently highlighted gutter.

Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and click the
Ellipsis () button to use the Engineering Library to select a
Mannings n value for the gutter material you are using.
Has User
Defined
Length?
Allows the calculated scaled pipe lengths to be overriden with

a user-defined value.
Length (User
Defined)
The user defined gutter length (not scaled from the underlying
map dimensions).
Slope
by the length of the channel. This is a calculated results field
GutterActive Topology
Table 15-30: GutterActive Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?

15-1335
Gutter Attributes
GutterResults
Table 15-31: GutterResults Attributes
Attribute
Description
Calculation
Messages
View the calculation messages for the current element.
Depth/Rise
Depth/Rise is computed based on the depth in the middle

section of the link. The link is split into sections by the implicit
engine. You can see the sections and their individual hydraulic
parameters by looking at the Section Results collection on
the property grid for the link.
Hydraulic
Grade
Hydraulic Grade in the middle of the link.
Spread/Top
Width (Start)
Width of flow adjacent to start node.
Rise
(Unified)
The computed height of the link.
Spread/Top
Width (Stop)
Width of flow adjacent to stop node.
GutterResults (Flow)
Table 15-32: GutterResults (Flow) Attributes
15-1336
Attribute
Description
Flow (Start)
The flow in the gutter immediately adjacent to the upstream

catch basin before any adjacent surface flow is applied.
GutterResults (Hydraulic Summary)

Table 15-33: GutterResults (Hydraulic Summary) Attributes
Attribute
Description
Velocity
Average velocity of the flow in the gutter, calculated by using

one of the selected average velocity methods.
Area (Full
Flow)
The calculated full flow area of the gutter.
GutterResults (Maximum Values)

Table 15-34: GutterResults (Maximum Values) Attributes
Attribute
Description
Flow
(Maximum)
Maximum flow that occurs in link over the course of simulation.
Time
(Maximum
Flow)
Time (measured from start of simulation) when the Flow

(Maximum) occurs in this link.
Time
(Maximum
Calculated
Velocity)
Time (measured from start of simulation) when the Velocity

(Maximum) occurs in this link.
Velocity
(Maximum
Calculated)
In conduits, this value is the maximum average velocty that

occurs during the simulation.
GutterResults (Profile)
Table 15-35: GutterResults (Profile) Attributes
Attribute
Description
Depth (In)
Flow depth at the upstream end of the gutter.
Depth (Out)
Flow depth at the downstream end of the gutter.
15-1337
Manhole Attributes
Manhole Attributes
The manhole attributes comprise the following categories:
ManholeGeneral on page 15-1340
ManholeGeometry on page 15-1341
ManholePhysical on page 15-1342
ManholePhysical: Structure Losses on page 15-1343
ManholePhysical: Surface Storage on page 15-1344
ManholeSanitary Loading on page 15-1344
ManholeSWMM Extended Data on page 15-1345
ManholeActive Topology on page 15-1345
ManholeInflow on page 15-1346
ManholeResults on page 15-1346
ManholeResults: Engine Parsing Attributes on page 15-1347
ManholeResults (Extended Node) on page 15-1347
ManholeResults: Flows Attributes on page 15-1348
ManholeGeneral
Table 15-36: ManholeGeneral Attributes
15-1338
Attribute
Description
ID


Table 15-36: ManholeGeneral Attributes
Attribute
Description
Label

Notes

GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
ManholeGeometry
Table 15-37: ManholeGeometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Contains the coordinate of the currently highlighted element

along the X (horizontal) axis.

along the Y (vertical) axis
15-1339
Manhole Attributes
ManholePhysical
Table 15-38: ManholePhysical Attributes
15-1340
Attribute
Description
Elevation
(Ground)
Displays the ground elevation for the currently highlighted

node.
Set Rim to
Ground
Elevation?
Enables or disables a data entry shortcut. If the value is True,

the nodes rim elevation is set equal to the ground elevation
automatically.
Elevation
(Rim)
Lets you define the top elevation of the currently highlighted

node. This elevation is typically flush with the ground surface.
In some cases, the rim elevation may be slightly below the
ground surface elevation (sunk) or slightly above the ground
surface elevation (raised).
Elevation
(Invert)
Lets you define the elevation at the bottom of the currently

highlighted node. The invert elevation must be lower than the
rim elevation or the calculation cannot continue.
Structure
Shape Type
Lets you choose the shape of the currently highlighted

element. You can select Rectangular Structure or Circular
Structure. The value chosen here affects the availability of
other fields.
Diameter
The diameter of the currently highlighted element. This field is

to Circular Structure.
Length

Width

Bolted Cover
Lets you set whether a manhole has a bolted cover or not. A

value of True in this field indicates that the associated
manhole has a bolted cover. If the manhole cover is bolted,
then the hydraulic grade line is not reset to the rim elevation at
the downstream end of the upstream pipes in the case of a
flooding situation (the calculated HGL being higher than the
rim elevation).
ManholePhysical: Structure Losses

Table 15-39: ManholeStructure Loss Attributes
Attribute
Description
Headloss
Method
Lets you select the headloss method to use. Some methods

are only available for certain Active Numerical Solvers.
Absolute
Headloss
The headloss. This field is only available if you selected the

Absolute Headloss Method.
Headloss
Coefficient
Stop
The headloss coefficient at the stop section. This field is only

available if you selected the Generic Headloss Method.
Headloss
Coefficient
Start
The headloss coefficient at the start section. This field is only

Headloss
Coefficient
The headloss coefficient for the manhole. This field is only

available if you selected the Standard Headloss Method.
15-1341
Manhole Attributes
ManholePhysical: Surface Storage

Table 15-40: ManholeSurface Storage Attributes
Attribute
Description
Surface
Storage Type
Lets you choose how surface storage is handled. The value

chosen here affects the availability of other fields: select
Default Storage Equation, Surface Depth-Area Curve, No
Storage, or Ponded Area.The Default Storage Equation uses
the following formula:
Area = 0.262 y - 0.068 y2 + 0.006 y3
Area=0.344
(y<4.0 ft)
(y>4.0 ft)
where Y is the depth above the ground.

Surface
Depth-Area
Curve
Lets you describe the volume of the surface storage by

defining depth vs. area points. Click the Ellipsis () button in
this field to open the Surface Depth-Area dialog box (see
Surface Depth-Area Curve Editor on page 6-302). This field
is available only when the Surface Storage Type attribute is set
to Surface Depth-Area Curve.
Area
(Constant
Surface)
Lets you define the area in which ponding occurs at the

currently selected element. It is available only when the
Surface Storage Type attribute is set to Ponded Area.
ManholeSanitary Loading
Table 15-41: ManholeSanitary Loading Attributes
15-1342
Attribute
Description
Sanitary
Loads
Lets you define a sanitary (dry weather) flow collection for the
selected manhole. Click the Ellipses (...) button to display the
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor, which lets you
define collections of sanitary (dry weather) loads.
ManholeSWMM Extended Data

Table 15-42: ManholeSWMM Extended Data Attributes
Attribute
Description
Depth
(Surcharged)
Depth measured from the rim elevation where flooding will

begin to occur. If the manholes Bolted Cover? attribute is set
to True, an artifically high surcharged depth will be applied.
Depth (Initial)
Initial water depth in junction. This is a SWMM-only attribute.
Apply
Treatment?
Lets you specify whether or not treatment is applied at the

currently highlighted element. Select True to apply treatment.
This field is only used during SWMM calculations.
Treatment
Collection
Lets you add a collection of pollutants and their associated

treatment functions that will be applied at the currently
highlighted element. This field is used only during SWMM
calculations and is available only if Apply Treatment? is set to
True. For more information, see Adding Treatment to a Node
on page 6-510.
Pollutograph
Collection
Lets you define a pollutograph collection for the selected

manhole. Click the Ellipses (...) button to display the
Pollutograph Collection dialog box, which lets you add multiple
pollutographs to the collection. For more information, see
Adding Pollutographs to a Node on page 6-494.
ManholeActive Topology
Table 15-43: ManholeActive Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?

15-1343
Manhole Attributes
ManholeInflow
Table 15-44: ManholeInflow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Inflow
Collection
Lets you define an inflow collection for the selected manhole.

Click the Ellipsis () button to display the Inflow Collection
dialog box for the associated element (see Defining Inflow
Collections on page 7-639).
ManholeResults
Table 15-45: ManholeResults Attributes
15-1344
Attribute
Description
Hydraulic
Grade
Representative calculated hydraulic grade at the manhole.

Depth (Node)
Depth of the water at the currently highlighted element. This is

Is Flooded?
If this field displays True, flooding occurs at the currently

highlighted element during the current time step. For manhole
and catch basin elements, this field will display True if the HGL
goes above the rim elevation. This is a calculated results field
Flow (Out to
Links)
Sum of all flows leaving manhole. This is a calculated results

field and is not editable.
Flow
(Overflow)
Flow which exits the system as flooding at the node during the
current time step. The flow is lost to the simulation.
Pollutants
Collection
Lets you view calculated results for pollutants for the node.
Clicking the Ellipses (...) button displays the Pollutants Results
dialog box.
ManholeResults: Engine Parsing Attributes

Table 15-46: ManholeResults: Engine Parsing Attributes
Attribute
Description
Branch

ManholeResults (Extended Node)

Table 15-47: ManholeResults (Extended Node)
Attribute
Description
Freeboard
Height
Distance between the top of the manhole and the water

surface. This is a calculated results field and is not editable.
Depth
(Flooding)
Depth between top of manhole and the water surface when the
manhole is flooded. This is a calculated results field and is not
editable.
Volume
Calculated volume at the currently highlighted element. This is

Is Flooded
Ever?
If this field displays True, flooding occurs at least once during

the simulation at the currently highlighted element. This is a
15-1345
Catch Basin Attributes
ManholeResults: Flows Attributes

Table 15-48: ManholeResult: Flow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Local Inflow?
This field displays True if there is a user-defined flow at the

element, and False if there is not. This is a calculated results
Flow (Local
from Inflow
Collection)
Sum of all user defined inflows. This is a calculated results

Flow (Local
Surface)
Total inflow added from catchment runoff, wet-weather inflow

collection and sanitary loads. It does not include the carryover
flow from upstream gutter. This is a calculated results field and
is not editable.
Flow (Total
In)
The sum of flow from incoming links + Captured flow from the
surface + Locally generated inflow from the inflow and sanitary
collections.
Flow (Total In) does not include local inflows when using the
GVF Convex solver.

The catch basin attributes comprise the following categories:
15-1346
Catch BasinGeneral on page 15-1349
Catch BasinGeometry on page 15-1349
Catch BasinPhysical on page 15-1350
Catch BasinPhysical: Structure Losses on page 15-1351
Catch BasinPhysical: Surface Storage on page 15-1353
Catch BasinInflow (Sanitary Loading) on page 15-1354
Catch BasinSWMM Extended Data on page 15-1354
Catch BasinActive Topology on page 15-1354
Catch BasinInflow (Wet) on page 15-1355
Catch BasinInlet on page 15-1355
Catch BasinResults on page 15-1356
Catch BasinResults (Engine Parsing) on page 15-1357
Catch BasinResults (Extended Node) on page 15-1357
Catch BasinResults (Flow) Attributes on page 15-1358
Catch BasinResults: Inlet Capture on page 15-1359
Catch BasinGeneral
Table 15-49: Catch BasinGeneral Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID

Label

Notes

GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Catch BasinGeometry
Table 15-50: Catch BasinGeometry Attributes
Attribute
Description


15-1347
Catch BasinPhysical
Table 15-51: Catch BasinPhysical Attributes
15-1348
Attribute
Description
Elevation
(Ground)
Displays the ground elevation for the currently highlighted

node.
Set Rim to
Ground
Elevation?
Enables or disables a data entry shortcut. If the value is True,

the nodes rim elevation is set equal to the ground elevation
automatically. If this value is set to False, you must manually
enter the rim elevation.
Elevation
(Rim)
Lets you define the top elevation of the currently highlighted

node. This elevation is typically flush with the ground surface.
In some cases, the rim elevation may be slightly below the
ground surface elevation (sunk) or slightly above the ground
surface elevation (raised). You can only enter a value in this
field if Set Rim to Ground Elevation? is set to False.
Elevation
(Invert)

highlighted node.
Structure
Type
Lets you choose the shape of the currently highlighted

element. You can select Rectangular Structure or Circular
Structure. The value chosen here affects the availability of
other fields.
Diameter
The diameter of the currently highlighted element. This field is

to Circular Structure.
Gutter Type
The Gutter Type to use associated with the inlet.
Gutter Shape
The shape of the gutter to use.
Catalog
Gutter
The gutter referenced from the gutter catalog.
Maximum
Gutter Depth
The maximum depth of the gutter.
Irregular
Channel
Section
Allows you to define the irregular cross section for the gutter.
Right Side
Slope
The right side slope of the gutter when using the trapezoidal
gutter shape.

Table 15-51: Catch BasinPhysical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Left Side
Slope
The left side slope of the gutter when using the trapezoidal
gutter shape.
Bottom Width
(Ditch)
Enter the distance along the bottom of the ditch.
Road Cross
Slope
Enter the transverse slope of the road.
Curb Cross
Slope
The curb cross slope when using the V-Shaped gutter shape.
Depressed
Gutter?
If True, the gutter slope differs from the road cross slope.
Height.
The Height of the parabolic gutter.
Length

Width

Catch BasinPhysical: Structure Losses

Table 15-52: Catch BasinStructure Loss Attributes
Attribute
Description
Headloss
Method

15-1349

Table 15-52: Catch BasinStructure Loss Attributes
15-1350
Attribute
Description
Absolute
Headloss

Headloss
Coefficient
Stop

Headloss
Coefficient
Start

Headloss
Coefficient

Catch BasinPhysical: Surface Storage

Table 15-53: Catch BasinSurface Storage Attributes
Attribute
Description
Surface
Storage Type
Lets you choose how surface storage is handled. The value

chosen here affects the availability of other fields: select
Default Storage Equation, Surface Depth-Area Curve, No
Storage, or Ponded Area.The Default Storage Equation uses
the following formula:
Area = 0.262 y - 0.068 y2 + 0.006 y3
Area=0.344
(y<4.0 ft)
(y>4.0 ft)
where Y is the depth above the ground.
In case of overflow/flooding:
If No Storage is selected, the overflow elevation will be the

rim elevation and there will be no storage at all.
If a storage table is used then the highest h in the table will

be the overflow crest elevation.
If the default equation is used a depth of 2 ft over the rim is

used.
Surface
Depth-Area
Curve
Lets you describe the volume of the surface storage by

defining depth vs. area points. Click the Ellipsis () button in
this field to open the Surface Depth-Area dialog box (see
Surface Depth-Area Curve Editor on page 6-302). This field
is available only when the Surface Storage Type attribute is set
to Surface Depth-Area Curve.
Area
(Constant
Surface)
Lets you define the area in which ponding occurs at the

currently selected element. It is available only when the
Surface Storage Type attribute is set to Ponded Area.
15-1351
Catch BasinInflow (Sanitary Loading)

Table 15-54: Catch BasinSanitary Loading Attributes
Attribute
Description
Sanitary
Loads
selected catch basin. Click the Ellipses (...) button to display
the Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor, which lets
you define collections of sanitary (dry weather) loads.
Catch BasinSWMM Extended Data

Table 15-55: Catch BasinSWMM Extended Data Attributes
Attribute
Description
Apply
Treatment?

Treatment
Collection

on page 6-510.
Pollutograph
Collection

element. Click the Ellipses (...) button to display the
Catch BasinActive Topology

Table 15-56: Catch BasinActive Topology Attributes
15-1352
Attribute
Description
Is Active?

Catch BasinInflow (Wet)

Table 15-57: Catch BasinInflow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Inflow (Wet)
Collection
Contains an Ellipsis () button that lets you access the Inflow

Collection dialog box for the associated element (see Defining
Inflow Collections on page 7-639).
Catch BasinInlet
Table 15-58: Catch BasinInlet Attributes
Attribute
Description
Inlet Type
Lets you choose the type of element associated with the

currently highlighted element: Maximum Capacity, InflowCapture Curve, Full Capture, Catalog Inlet, and Percent
Capture. The value chosen here affects the availability of the
other fields described below. See Inlet Type on page 6-297.
Flow
(Maximum
in)
Lets you define the maximum inflow accepted by the inlet

associated with the currently highlighted element. This field is
available only when the Inlet Type attribute is set to Maximum
Capacity.
InflowCapture
Curve
Lets you define inflow vs. capture percentage points for the
currently highlighted element. Clicking the Ellipsis () button
in the field opens the Inflow-Capture Curve dialog box (see
Inflow-Capture Curve Dialog Box on page 6-298). This field is
available only when the Inlet Type attribute is set to InflowCapture Curve.
Inlet
Allows you to select the catalog inlet to use. This field is

available only when the Inlet Type attribute is set to Catalog
Inlet. See Inlet Catalog Dialog Box on page 6-450.
Capture
Efficiency
Set the percentage of flow to the inlet that is captured by the

inlet.
15-1353
Catch BasinInlet Location

Table 15-59: Catch BasinInlet Location Attributes
Attribute
Description
Inlet Location
Lets you choose whether the structure is located on grade or in

sag.
Longitudinal
Slope (Inlet)
Enter the slope of the roadway in the direction of flow.
Mannings n
(Inlet)
Enter the roughness factor for the roadway. This is generally a

fucntion of the construction material..
Catch BasinResults
Table 15-60: Catch BasinResults Attributes
15-1354
Attribute
Description
Hydraulic
Grade
Representative calculated hydraulic grade at the catch basin.

Depth (Node)

Is Flooded?

highlighted element during the current time step. For manhole
and catch basin elements, this field will display True if the HGL
goes above the rim elevation. This is a calculated results field
Flow (Out to
Links)
Sum of all flows leaving catch basin. This is a calculated

Flow
(Overflow)
Pollutants
Collection
dialog box.
Catch BasinResults (Engine Parsing)

Table 15-61: Catch BasinResults: Engine Parsing Attributes
Attribute
Description
Branch

Catch BasinResults (Extended Node)

Table 15-62: Catch BasinResults (Extended Node)
Attribute
Description
Freeboard
Height
Distance between the top of the catch basin and the water
Depth
(Flooding)
Depth between top of catch basin and the water surface when
the catch basin is flooded. This is a calculated results field and
is not editable.
Volume

Is Flooded
Ever?

15-1355
Catch BasinResults (Flow) Attributes

Table 15-63: Catch BasinResult: Flow Attributes
15-1356
Attribute
Description
Local Inflow?
This field displays True if there is a user-defined flow at the

element, and False if there is not. This is a calculated results
Flow (Local
from Inflow
Collection)

Flow (Local
Surface)

is not editable.
Flow (Total
In)
collections.
GVF Convex solver.
Catch BasinResults: Inlet Capture

Table 15-64: Catch BasinResult: Inlet Capture Attributes
Attribute
Description
Flow
(Captured)
Total amount of flow captured at the currently highlighted

element. This is a calculated results field and is not editable.
Capture
Efficiency
Percentage of flow that is captured at the currently highlighted

element. This is a calculated results field and is not editable.
Note that 100% capture means that the inlet capacity is larger
than the actual local inflow so the model will attempt to put the
entire local inflow into the manhole. If the manhole is flooded it
there may be flow lost from the flooding although the inlet is
still reporting 100% capture.
Ditch Top
Width
If the inlet is a ditch inlet this field will display the top width of
the flow through the gutter.
Depth (Ditch)
If the inlet is a ditch inlet this field will display the depth of the
flow through the gutter.
Outfall Attributes
The outfall attributes comprise the following categories:
OutfallGeneral on page 15-1360
OutfallGeometry on page 15-1360
OutfallBoundary Condition on page 15-1361
OutfallPhysical on page 15-1363
OutfallActive Topology on page 15-1364
OutfallSWMM Extended Data on page 15-1363
OutfallInflow on page 15-1364
OutfallResults on page 15-1364
OutfallResults: Flows on page 15-1365
15-1357
Outfall Attributes
OutfallGeneral
Table 15-65: OutfallGeneral Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID

Label

Notes

GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
OutfallGeometry
Table 15-66: OutfallGeometry Attributes
15-1358
Attribute
Description


OutfallBoundary Condition
Table 15-67: OutfallBoundary Condition Attributes
Attribute
Description
Boundary
Condition
Type
Lets you define what type of boundary condition the currently

highlighted element is operating under. The value chosen here
affects the availability of other fields. You can choose from:
Free Outfall - No tailwater condition. No further input is
necessary.
Time-Elevation Curve - Enables Time-Elevation Curve field.
Elevation (User Defined Tailwater) - Enables the User
Defined Tailwater field.
Elevation-Flow Curve - Enables Elevation Flow Curve field.
Boundary Element - Enables Boundary Element field,
allowing you to specify the element to which flow received by
the outfall is discharged.
Normal - No further input is necessary. Normal in this case
means that the depth at the outlet is the normal depth for the
last conduit or channel before the outlet.
Tidal - Enables the Cyclic Time-Elevation Curve field.
Crown - No further input is necessary. The Crown boundary
type is not supported for use in the SewerGEMS Dynamic
Wave solver.
Tidal Gate?
If True, back flow is restricted from entering the system from

the outfall.
TimeElevation
Curve
Lets you describe the elevation changes at the boundary

condition over time. Click the Ellipsis () button in this field to
open the Time-Elevation Curve dialog box (see TimeElevation Curve Dialog Box on page 6-325). It is available
only when the Boundary Condition Type attribute is set to
Time-Elevation Curve.
15-1359
Outfall Attributes
Table 15-67: OutfallBoundary Condition Attributes
Attribute
Description
Elevation
(User
Defined
Tailwater)
Lets you enter a value for tailwater at the boundary. It is

available only when the Boundary Condition Type is set to
User Defined Tailwater.
ElevationFlow Curve
Lets you define the elevation changes at the boundary

condition over a range of flows. Click the Ellipsis () button in
this field to open the Elevation-Flow Curve dialog box (see
Elevation-Flow Curve Dialog Box on page 6-327). This
property is available only when the Boundary Condition Type
attribute is set to Elevation-Flow Curve.
Boundary
Element
Lets you choose the boundary element for the currently

highlighted element from all of the valid elements in the
network.
To use this feature, click Select in the Boundary Element field.
Move the cursor over the drawing pane and click the element
you want to select for the boundary. This property is available
only when the Boundary Condition Type attribute is set to
Boundary Element.
Tip:
Cyclic TimeElevation
Curve
15-1360
Press the Esc key to exit out of Select

mode.
Lets you describe the elevation changes at the boundary

condition that repeat over time. Click the Ellipsis () button in
this field to open the Cyclic Time-Elevation Curve dialog box
(see Time-Elevation Curve Dialog Box on page 6-325). It is
available only when the Boundary Condition Type attribute is
set to Tidal.
OutfallPhysical
Table 15-68: OutfallPhysical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Elevation
(Ground)
Lets you define the elevation of the currently highlighted

element.
Set Invert
Equal to
Ground
Elevation?
Sets the invert of the current element to the value specified in

the Ground Elevation field.
Elevation
(Invert)

highlighted node.
OutfallSWMM Extended Data

Table 15-69: OutfallSWMM Extended Data Attributes
Attribute
Description
Apply
Treatment?

currently highlighted element. This field is only used during
SWMM calculations.
Treatment
Collection

on page 6-510.
Pollutograph
Collection

15-1361
Outfall Attributes
OutfallActive Topology
Table 15-70: OutfallActive Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?

OutfallInflow
Table 15-71: OutfallInflow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Inflow
Collection

OutfallResults
Table 15-72: OutfallResult Attributes
15-1362
Attribute
Description
Hydraulic
Grade
Representative calculated hydraulic grade at the outfall. This is

Depth (Node)

Flow (Out to
Links)
Sum of all flows leaving outfall. This is a calculated results field

Pollutants
Collection
dialog box.
OutfallResults: Flows
Table 15-73: OutfallResults: Flow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Local Inflow?
User defined inflow at outfall. This is a calculated results field

Flow (Local
from Inflow
Collection)

Flow (Total
In)
collections.
GVF Convex solver.
15-1363
Pond Outlet Structure Attributes
Pond Outlet Structure Attributes

The pond outlet structure attributes comprise the following categories:
Pond Outlet StructureGeneral on page 15-1366
Pond Outlet StructureGeometry on page 15-1367
Pond Outlet StructurePond Outlet on page 15-1367
Pond Outlet StructureActive Topology on page 15-1367
Pond Outlet StructureResults on page 15-1368
Pond Outlet StructureGeneral

Table 15-74: Pond Outlet StructureGeneral Attributes
15-1364
Attribute
Description
ID

Label

Notes

GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Pond Outlet StructureGeometry

Table 15-75: Pond Outlet StructureGeometry Attributes
Attribute
Description


Pond Outlet StructurePond Outlet

Table 15-76: Pond Outlet StructurePond Outlet Attributes
Attribute
Description
Upstream
Pond
Lets you choose the upstream pond for the currently

highlighted element from a list of all of the valid ponds in the
network.
Has Control
Structure?
Lets you choose whether the highlighted element has a control

structure. If this field is set to True, the Control Structure field is
activated.
Control
Structure
Lets you define the components that make up the control

structure. Click the Ellipsis () button in this field to open the
Composite Outlet Structure dialog box (see Composite Outlet
Structures Dialog Box on page 6-308). This field is active only
when the Has Control Structure? attribute is set to Yes.
Pond Outlet StructureActive Topology

Table 15-77: Pond Outlet StructureActive Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?

15-1365
Cross Section Attributes
Pond Outlet StructurePhysical

Table 15-78: Pond Outlet StructurePhysical
Attribute
Description
Elevation
(Ground)
The ground elevation for the currently highlighted node.
Pond Outlet StructureResults

Table 15-79: Pond Outlet StructureResult Attributes
Attribute
Description
Pollutants
Collection
dialog box.

The cross section attributes comprise the following categories:
15-1366
Cross SectionGeneral on page 15-1369
Cross SectionGeometry on page 15-1369
Cross SectionPhysical on page 15-1370
Cross SectionActive Topology on page 15-1374
Cross SectionInflow on page 15-1374
Cross SectionResults on page 15-1374
Cross SectionResults: Engine Parsing Attributes on page 15-1375
Cross SectionResults: Flows on page 15-1375
Cross SectionGeneral
Table 15-80: Cross SectionGeneral Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID

Label

Notes

GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Cross SectionGeometry
Table 15-81: Cross SectionGeometry Attributes
Attribute
Description


15-1367
Cross SectionPhysical
Table 15-82: Cross SectionPhysical Attributes
15-1368
Attribute
Description
Elevation
(Ground)
Section Type
Lets you choose the cross-sectional shape of the currently

highlighted element. You can select Trapezoidal Cross
Section or Irregular Channel. The value chosen here affects
the availability of other fields.
StationElevation
Curve

shape of the irregular channel. Click the Ellipsis () button in
this field to open the Station-Elevation Curve dialog box (see
Station-Elevation Curve/Depth Dialog Box on page 6-287).
This field is available only when the Section Type attribute is
set to Irregular Channel.
Elevations
Modifier
The Elevations modifier is a constant value that will be added

to each elevation value. This attribute is only used during
SWMM calculations.
Meander
Modifier
The meander modifier is the ratio of the length of a

meandering main channel to the length of the overbank area
that surrounds it. This modifier is applied to all conduits that
use this particular transect for their cross section. It assumes
that the length supplied for these conduits is that of the longer
main channel. The application will use the shorter overbank
length in its calculations while increasing the main channel
roughness to account for longer length. The modifier is ignored
if it is left blank or set to 0.
Stations
Modifier
The Stations modifier is a factor by which the distance between

each station will be multiplied when the transect data is
processed by SWMM. Use a value of 0 if no such factor is
needed. This attribute is only used during SWMM calculations.
Elevation
(Invert)
Lets you define the invert elevation at the currently highlighted

element. This attribute is active only when the Section Type
attribute is set to Trapezoidal Channel.
Bottom Width

highlighted element. This attribute is active only when the
Section Type attribute is set to Trapezoidal Channel.

Attribute
Description
Slope (Left
Side)
The left slope of the cross section of the currently highlighted

Slope (Right
Side)
The right slope of the cross section of the currently highlighted

Height
The height of the cross section of the currently highlighted

Roughness
Type
The roughness method for the currently highlighted: Single

Mannings n, Mannings - Depth Curve, or Mannings n Flow. The value chosen here affects the availability of some
fields in the Physical section of the Property Editor.
Material

Left Bank
Station
The distance values appearing in the Station/Elevation grid

that mark the end of the left overbank and the start of the right
overbank. Use 0 to denote the absence of an overbank.
Right Bank
Station
The distance values appearing in the Station/Elevation grid

that mark the end of the left overbank and the start of the right
overbank. Use 0 to denote the absence of an overbank.
Left
Overbank
Mannings n
The Mannings roughness of the left overbank.
Right
Overbank
Mannings n
The Mannings roughness of the right overbank.
Channel
Mannings n
The Mannings roughness for the center of the channel.
Mannings n

is set to Single Mannings n.
15-1369

Attribute
Description
Mannings nDepth Curve
Lets you define points that describe a roughness-depth curve

for the currently highlighted element. Click the Ellipsis ()
button in this field to open the Mannings n-Depth Curve dialog
box (see Mannings nDepth Curve Dialog Box on page 6466). This attribute is active only when the Roughness Type
attribute is set to Mannings n-Depth Curve.
Mannings nFlow
Lets you define points that describe a roughness-flow curve for

the currently highlighted element. Click the Ellipsis () button
in this field to open the Mannings n-Flow Curve dialog box
(see Mannings nFlow Curve Dialog Box on page 6-468).
is set to Mannings n-Flow.
Transition
Type
When you connect a channel to a conduit at a cross-section

node, a transition part is added between the channel crosssection and the conduit cross-section. This field lets you
specify the transition type of the currently highlighted crosssection node. You can select either Gradual or Abrupt. If you
select Abrupt, the top width of the channel cross-section node
is used as the length of the transition part. If you select
Gradual, the Transition Length field is made available. If the
Transition Length is larger than the top width of the crosssection node, the Transition Length value is used as the length
of the transition part.
Note:
Transition
Length
15-1370
Transition Type and Transition Length are

not used for cross-section nodes that
connect two channels.
Lets you define the length of the transition between a channel

cross-section and a conduit cross-section. This field is
available only if you select Gradual as the Transition Type.
If the user-specified transition length is smaller than the
calculated transition (which is the channel width), the
calculated transition is used in calculation.
Cross SectionActive Topology

Table 15-83: Cross SectionActive Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?

Cross SectionInflow
Table 15-84: Cross SectionInflow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Inflow
Collection

Cross SectionResults
Table 15-85: Cross SectionResult Attributes
Attribute
Description
Hydraulic
Grade
Representative calculated hydraulic grade at the cross section.

Depth (Node)

Flow
(Overflow)
Is Flooded?
Cross Sections are overflowing if the Hydraulic Grade exceeds

the top defined elevation. For Irregular channels this is the
maximum elevation defined in the Station-Elevation curve. For
Trapezoidal Channels this is the Invert Elevation + Trapezoidal
Channel depth.
Pollutants
Collection
dialog box.
15-1371
Pump Attributes
Cross SectionResults: Engine Parsing Attributes

Table 15-86: Cross SectionResults: Engine Parsing Attributes
Attribute
Description
Branch

Cross SectionResults: Flows

Table 15-87: Cross SectionResults: Flow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Local Inflow?
User defined inflow at cross section. This is a calculated

Flow (Local
from Inflow
Collection)

Pump Attributes
The pump attributes comprise the following categories:
15-1372
PumpGeneral on page 15-1376
PumpGeometry on page 15-1376
PumpPhysical on page 15-1377
PumpActive Topology on page 15-1377
PumpResults on page 15-1378
PumpResults: Engine Parsing Attributes on page 15-1378
PumpGeneral
Table 15-88: PumpGeneral Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID

Label

Notes

GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Downstream
Link
Displays the ID of the downstream link element to which the

pump is connected.
PumpGeometry
Table 15-89: PumpGeometry Attributes
Attribute
Description


15-1373
Pump Attributes
PumpPhysical
Table 15-90: PumpPhysical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Elevation
(Ground)
Suction
Element
This field allows you to define the upstream, or suction-side

node for the current pump. Select Select Suction Element
from the drop-down menu; your mouse cursor changes to a
Pick Element tool, allowing you to click on the desired element
in the Drawing Pane. After you have selected the suction-side
node, the pump and the node are connected by a dotted line in
your model.
Elevation
Lets you define the elevation of the currently highlighted

element.
Pumps
Lets you define pump settings for the currently highlighted

element. Click the Ellipsis () button in this field to open the
Pumps dialog box (see Pumps Dialog Box on page 5-246).
PumpActive Topology
Table 15-91: PumpActive Topology Attributes
15-1374
Attribute
Description
Is Active?

PumpResults
Table 15-92: PumpResults
Attribute
Description
Head
Calculated pump head for the currently highlighted pump. This

is a calculated results field, and as such is not editable.
Flow (Pump)
Calculated flow at the currently highlighted pump. This is a

calculated results field, and as such is not editable.
Hydraulic
Grade
(Upstream)
Calculated head on the upstream side of the currently

highlighted pump. This is a calculated results field, and as
such is not editable.
Hydraulic
Grade
(Downstream)
Calculated head on the downstream side of the currently

highlighted pump. This is a calculated results field, and as
Pollutants
Collection
dialog box.
PumpResults: Engine Parsing Attributes

Table 15-93: PumpResults: Engine Parsing Attributes
Attribute
Description
Branch

Wet Well Attributes

The wet well attributes comprise the following categories:
Wet WellGeneral on page 15-1379
Wet WellGeometry on page 15-1380
Wet WellPhysical on page 15-1380
Wet WellSanitary Loading on page 15-1382
15-1375
Wet Well Attributes
Wet WellInitial Condition on page 15-1382
Wet WellSWMM Extended Data on page 15-1383
Wet WellActive Topology on page 15-1383
Wet WellInflow on page 15-1383
Wet WellResults on page 15-1384
Wet WellResults (Extended Node) on page 15-1385
Wet WellResults: Flows on page 15-1385
Wet WellGeneral
Table 15-94: Wet WellGeneral Attributes
15-1376
Attribute
Description
ID

Label

Notes

GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Wet WellGeometry
Table 15-95: Wet WellGeometry Attributes
Attribute
Description


Wet WellPhysical
The following illustration shows a typical wet well.
Freeboard
Height
Max Depth
On Elevation
Initial
Elevation
Off
Elevation
Stop Invert
Upstream
Conduit
Pump
Wet Well
Invert Elevation
Datum
15-1377
Wet Well Attributes

Table 15-96: Wet WellPhysical Attributes
15-1378
Attribute
Description
Elevation
(Ground)
Section
Lets you choose the method used to define volume for the
currently highlighted element: Constant Area - Circular,
Constant Area - Non-Circular, Variable Volume, Depth Area,
or Area Function. The value chosen here affects the
availability of other attributes.
Wet Well
Depth-Area
Curve
Lets you define the size of the currently highlighted element by

entering points in the depth vs. area table. Click the Ellipsis
() button in this field to open the Wet Well Depth-Area Curve
dialog box (see Wet Well Depth-Area Curve Dialog Box on
page 6-333). This field is available only when Wet Well DepthArea Curve is chosen as the Wet Well Volume Type.
Area
Lets you define the area of the currently highlighted element. It

is available only when Wet Well Constant Area is chosen as
the Wet Well Volume Type.
Coefficient
The coefficient of the area function for the currently highlighted

element. It is available only when Wet Well Area Function is
chosen as the Wet Well Volume Type.
Exponent
The exponent of the area function for the currently highlighted

Constant
The constant of the area function for the currently highlighted

Elevation
(Invert)
Lets you define the invert, or bottom, elevation for the currently
Wet WellSanitary Loading

Table 15-97: Wet WellSanitary Loading Attributes
Attribute
Description
Sanitary
Loads
selected wet well. Click the Ellipses (...) button to display the
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor, which lets you
define collections of sanitary (dry weather) loads.
Wet WellInitial Condition

Table 15-98: Wet WellInitial Condition Attributes
Attribute
Description
Initial
Elevation
Type
Lets you choose which type of initial condition type to be

applied to the currently highlighted element: Invert or User
Defined Initial Elevation. The value chosen here affects the
Elevation
(Initial)
Lets you define the initial water surface elevation for the
currently highlighted element. It is available only when the
User Defined Initial Elevation value is selected for the Initial
Elevation Type attribute.
15-1379
Wet Well Attributes
Wet WellSWMM Extended Data

Table 15-99: Wet WellSWMM Extended Data Attributes
Attribute
Description
Evaporation
Factor
Fraction of evaporation rate realized. This attribute is only

used during SWMM calculations.
Apply
Treatment?

Treatment
Collection

on page 6-510.
Pollutograph
Collection

Wet WellActive Topology

Table 15-100: Wet WellActive Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?

Wet WellInflow
Table 15-101: Wet WellInflow Attributes
15-1380
Attribute
Description
Inflow
Collection

Collection dialog box for the associated element (see
Defining Inflow Collections on page 7-639).
Wet WellResults
Table 15-102: Wet WellResults Attributes
Attribute
Description
Hydraulic
Grade
Representative calculated hydraulic grade at the wet well. This

is a calculated results field and is not editable.
Depth (Node)

Is Flooded?

highlighted element during the current time step. For wet wells
the maximum elevation is directly defined or is the Level
(Maximum) + Elevation (Base). For depth area wet well types
using the implicit engine this is the maximum depth in the
rating curve + Elevation (Base). This is a calculated results
Flow (Out to
Links)
Sum of all flows leaving wet well. This is a calculated results

Flow
(Overflow)
Pollutants
Collection
dialog box.
15-1381
Wet Well Attributes
Wet WellResults (Extended Node)

Table 15-103: Wet WellResults (Extended Node)
Attribute
Description
Freeboard
Height
Distance between the top of the wet well and the water
Depth
(Flooding)
Depth between top of wet well and the water surface when the
wet well is flooded. This is a calculated results field and is not
editable.
Volume

Is Flooded
Ever?

Wet WellResults: Flows

Table 15-104: Wet WellResults: Flow Attributes
15-1382
Attribute
Description
Local Inflow?
User defined inflow at wet well. This is a calculated results field

Flow (Local
from Inflow
Collection)

Flow (Local
Surface)

is not editable.
Flow (Total
In)
collections.
GVF Convex solver.
Catchment Attributes
The catchment attributes comprise the following categories:
CatchmentGeneral on page 15-1386
CatchmentGeometry on page 15-1387
CatchmentCatchment on page 15-1388
CatchmentRunoff on page 15-1388
CatchmentSWMM Extended Data on page 15-1392
CatchmentSWMM Results on page 15-1394
CatchmentActive Topology on page 15-1394
CatchmentInflow on page 15-1394
CatchmentRainfall on page 15-1395
CatchmentResults on page 15-1395
CatchmentResults (Extended Catchment) on page 15-1396
CatchmentResults: Flows on page 15-1396
CatchmentGeneral
Table 15-105: CatchmentGeneral Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID

15-1383
Attribute
Description
Label

Notes

GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
CatchmentGeometry
Table 15-106: CatchmentGeometry Attributes
15-1384
Attribute
Description
Geometry

Scaled Area
Displays the scaled area of the currently highlighted element.

This field in not editable.
CatchmentCatchment
Table 15-107: CatchmentCatchment Attributes
Attribute
Description
Area
Lets you define the area of the currently highlighted element.

Clicking the ellipsis button in this field opens the Cn Area
Collection dialog box (see Defining CN Area Collections for
Catchments on page 7-650), allowing you to define SCS
values and the pervious/impervious ratio for the currently
highlighted element. This field is only available when the Use
Scaled Area? attribute is set to False.
Outflow
Node
Lets you choose the node to which flow flows from the
currently highlighted element. To use this feature, click Select
in the Outfall Node field. Move the cursor over the drawing
pane and click the element you want to select for the outflow
node.
CatchmentRunoff
Table 15-108: CatchmentRunoff Attributes
Attribute
Description
Runoff
Method
Lets you set what type of runoff method the currently

highlighted element uses. The value chosen here affects the
availability of other fields. You can select Unit Hydrograph,
EPA-SWMM Runoff, User-Defined Hydrograph, None, or
Modified Rational Method.
Characteristic
Width
Characteristic width of the currently highlighted catchment.

This attribute is available only when the Runoff Method
attribute is set to EPA-SWMM Runoff.
Storage
(Impervious
Depression)
Depth of depression storage on impervious portion of the

catchment. This attribute is available only when the Runoff
Storage
(Pervious
Depression)
Depth of depression storage on the pervious portion of the

15-1385
15-1386
Attribute
Description
Mannings n
(Impervious)
Manning's N for overland flow over the impervious portion of

the currently highlighted catchment. This attribute is available
only when the Runoff Method attribute is set to EPA-SWMM
Runoff.
Mannings n
(Pervious)
Manning's N for overland flow over the pervious portion of the

currently highlighted catchment. This attribute is available only
when the Runoff Method attribute is set to EPA-SWMM
Runoff.
Percent
Impervious
Percent of land area which is impervious. This attribute is

available only when the Runoff Method attribute is set to EPASWMM Runoff.
Slope
Average slope, in percent, of the currently highlighted

Percent
Impervious
Zero Storage
Percent of the impervious area with no depression storage.

attribute is set to EPA-SWMM Runoff.
Subarea
Routing
Lets you define the type of subarea routing at the currently

highlighted element. This attribute is available only when the
Runoff Method attribute is set to EPA-SWMM Runoff.
Percent
Routed
Percent of runoff routed between subareas. This attribute is

available only when the Runoff Method attribute is set to EPASWMM Runoff.
Runoff
Hydrograph
Lets you define time vs. flow points for the currently highlighted
User Defined Hydrograph dialog box (see Specifying a Time
of Concentration (Tc) Method for a Catchment on page 6366). This attribute is available only when the Runoff Method
attribute is set to User Defined Hydrograph.
Loss Method
Lets you define what type of loss method the currently

highlighted element uses. You can select fLoss, Green and
Ampt, SCS CN, or (Generic) Horton. The value chosen here
affects the availability of other fields.
fLoss
Lets you define the initial infiltration rate at the time that
infiltration begins for the currently highlighted element. This
attribute is active only when the Loss Method attribute is set to
fLoss.

Attribute
Description
Capillary
Suction
Lets you define the capillary suction value for the soil type
associated with the currently highlighted element. This
attribute is active only when the Loss Method attribute is set to
Green and Ampt.
Ks
The saturated hydraulic conductivity (the rate at which water

travels through the soil when it is saturated) for the currently
highlighted element. This attribute is active only when the Loss
Method attribute is set to Green and Ampt.
Moisture
Deficit
The value for moisture deficit, which is the saturated moisture

content minus the original moisture content, for the currently
highlighted element. This attribute is active only when the Loss
Method attribute is set to Green and Ampt.
SCS CN
Lets you set a Cn value for the catchment. You can either type
a value in the field or click the Ellipsis () button to open the
Cn Area Collection dialog box (see Defining CN Area
Collections for Catchments on page 7-650). This attribute is
active only when the Loss Method attribute is set to SCS CN.
SCS CN
(Composite)
The weighted CN value. This attribute is a calculated field and

is active only when the Loss Method attribute is set to SCS
CN.
Use Scaled
Area?
If True, the area of the catchment will be calculated based on

the area of the polygon.
fc
The equilibrium infiltration rate on the Horton infiltration curve

reached once the soil becomes saturated.
fo
The initial or maximum infiltration rate on Horton infiltration

curve.
Initial
Abstraction
Lets you define the initial abstraction (Ia) for the currently
highlighted element. The initial abstraction is a parameter that
accounts for all losses prior to runoff and consists mainly of
interception, infiltration, evaporation, and surface depression
storage. This attribute is active only when the Loss Method
attribute is set to (Generic) Horton.
Decay constant associated with the soil.
Recovery
Constant
Dry weather regeneration rate constant for the Horton curve.

This attribute is active only when the Loss Method attribute is
set to (Generic) Horton.
15-1387
15-1388
Attribute
Description
Maximum
Volume

attribute is set to EPA-SWMM Runoff and the Loss Method
attribute is set to (Generic) Horton.
Unit
Hydrograph
Method
Lets you define the type of unit hydrograph method the

currently highlighted element uses. The value chosen here
affects the availability of other fields. You can select Generic
Unit Hydrograph, SCS Unit Hydrograph, or RTK Unit
Hydrograph.
RTK Set
Lets you assign an RTK table to the catchment. If there is no

RTK table associated with your project, click the Ellipsis ()
button in this field to open the RTK Tables dialog box
(Creating an RTK Table and Assigning it to a Catchment on
page 7-704), where you can create new RTK tables. This field
is available only when the Unit Hydrograph Method is set to
RTK Unit Hydrograph.
Tc
The time of concentration for the currently highlighted element.

It is available only when the Unit Hydrograph Method attribute
is set to SCS Unit Hydrograph.
Tc
(Composite)
The total summed Tc value derived from the individual Tc

Methods in the Tc Data Collection.
Generic Unit
Hydrograph
Lets you define time vs. flow points for the currently highlighted
Unit Hydrograph Data dialog box (Adding Generic Unit
Hydrographs on page 7-697). This field is available only when
the Unit Hydrograph Method is set to Generic Hydrograph.
Shape Factor
Allows you to define the shape factor when using the

Triangular SCS Unit Hydrograph Method.
Convolution
Time Step
Lets you define the time step for the currently highlighted
element. It is available only when the Unit Hydrograph Method
is set to Generic Unit Hydrograph.
Tc Data
Collection
Contains individual Tc components for calculating the total

composite Tc for the current catchment.
Rational C
The Rational C coefficient of the catchment section. This field

is available when the Runoff Method attribute is set to
Modified Rational Method.
CatchmentSWMM Extended Data

Table 15-109: CatchmentSWMM Extended Data Attributes
Attribute
Description
Curb Length
The length of curb on the catchment. This is used to normalize

water quality calculations.
Land Uses
Collection of Land Uses applied to the catchment for use

during Water Quality calculations. Clicking the Ellipses (...)
button opens the Land Uses Collection dialog box, where you
can add land use entries to the collection. This field is available
when you select EPA-SWMM Runoff as the Runoff Method.
See Land Uses Dialog Box on page 6-499.
Initial Buildup
Collection
Lets you specify the initial quantities of pollutant buildup over

the catchment in a collection. Clicking the Ellipses (...) button
opens the Initial Buildup Collection dialog box, where you can
add initial buildup entries to the collection. This field is
available when you select EPA-SWMM Runoff as the Runoff
Method. See Initial Buildup Collection Dialog Box on page 6512.
Apply
Groundwater
Lets you apply groundwater to the catchment. If you select

True, several additional fields become available.
Aquifer
Select the aquifer to apply to the catchment or select Edit...

from the drop-down menu and click the Ellipses (...) button to
define new aquifers in the SWMM Aquifers dialog box. See
Aquifers Dialog Box on page 6-484.
Surface
Elevation
The elevation of ground surface for the subcatchment that sits

above the aquifer.
Groundwater
Flow
Coefficient
The groundwater flow formula is described as:
Qgw = A1(Hgw - E)B1 - A2(Hsw - E)B2 + A3HgwHsw

where Qgw = groundwater flow (cfs per acre or cms per
hectare)
Hgw = elevation of groundwater table (ft or m)
Hsw = elevation of surface water at receiving node (ft or m)
E = elevation of node invert (ft or m)
The groundwater flow coefficient is the value of A1 in the
groundwater flow formula.
15-1389
Table 15-109: CatchmentSWMM Extended Data Attributes
Attribute
Description
Groundwater
Flow
Exponent
The value of B1 in the groundwater flow formula.
Surf. Water
Flow
Coefficient
Surf. Water
Flow
Exponent
Surface-GW
Interaction
Coefficient
Fixed Surf.
Water Depth
This is the fixed depth of surface water at the receiving node

(in feet or meters). This is set to zero if the surface water depth
varies as computed by flow routing.
Receiving
Node
Lets you select the receiving node by clicking on the desired

node in the drawing pane.
CatchmentSWMM Results
Table 15-110: CatchmentSWMM Results
15-1390
Attribute
Description
Depth (Snow)
Calculated snow depth at the current time step.
Flow
(Groundwater)
The portion of the total flow that comes from groundwater.
Elevation
(Groundwater)
The elevation of the groundwater.
Intensity
(Rainfall)
The intensity of the rainfall at the current time step.
Loss Rate
The rate at which rainfall is infiltrated at the current time step.
CatchmentActive Topology
Table 15-111: CatchmentActive Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?

CatchmentInflow
Table 15-112: CatchmentInflow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Inflow
Collection

15-1391
CatchmentRainfall
Table 15-113: CatchmentRainfall Attributes
Attribute
Description
Use Local
Rainfall?

element uses local rainfall, and if so, which type. Select True
to display the Local Storm Data field. The value chosen here
affects the availability of other fields.
Local Storm
Data
Lets you create or select a storm data from those previously

created.
Select a storm data from the drop-down list in this field, select
the Ellipsis () item in the drop down list, or select the New
() item to open the Rainfall Curves dialog box (see Adding
Storm Data on page 7-658) and edit an existing storm data or
create a new one.
This field is available only when the Use Local Rainfall?
attribute is set to True.
Return Event
Lets you define the frequency of the storm at the currently

highlighted element. This attribute is available only when the
Use Local Rainfall? attribute is set to True. This is a noneditable field. It will reflect the return event defined for the
currently selected Local Storm Data.
CatchmentResults
Table 15-114: CatchmentResult Attributes
15-1392
Attribute
Description
Flow (Out to
Links)
Sum of all flows leaving catchment. This is a calculated results

Pollutants
Collection
Lets you view calculated results for pollutants assigned to the

node. Clicking the Ellipses (...) button displays the Pollutants
Results dialog box.
CatchmentResults (Extended Catchment)

Table 15-115: CatchmentResults (Extended Catchment) Attributes
Attribute
Description
Precipitation
(Cumulative)
Total rainfall on catchment up until current time step. This is a

calculated results field, and as such is not editable.
Loss
(Cumulative)
Total amount of rainfall that has infiltrated into catchment up

until current time step. This is a calculated results field, and as
Precipitation
(Incremental)
The depth of precipitation over the catchment for the current

time step.
Loss
(Incremental)
The amount of precipitation that is lost or absorbed over the

catchment for the current time step.
CatchmentResults: Flows
Table 15-116: CatchmentResults: Flow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Local Inflow?
User defined inflow at catchment. This is a calculated results

Flow (Local
from Inflow
Collection)

Flow (Total
In)
collections.
GVF Convex solver.
15-1393
Low Impact Development Control Attributes

The Low Impact Development Control (LID Control) attributes comprise the
following categories:
LID ControlGeneral on page 15-1397
LID ControlGeometry on page 15-1398
LID ControlActive Topology on page 15-1398
LID ControlOutput on page 15-1398
LID ControlHydrology on page 15-1399
LID ControlResults on page 15-1400
LID ControlGeneral
15-1394
Attribute
Description
ID

Label

Notes

GIS-IDs
List of associated IDs on the GIS/data-source side.
Hyperlinks
Parent
Catchment
Specify the catchment to associate with the current Low

Impact Development Control.
LID ControlGeometry
Table 15-118: LID ControlGeometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Geometry

Scaled Area

LID ControlActive Topology

Table 15-119: LID ControlActive Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?

LID ControlOutput
Table 15-120: LID ControlOutput Attributes
Attribute
Description
Output
Options

15-1395
LID ControlHydrology
Table 15-121: LID ControlHydrology Attributes
15-1396
Attribute
Description
Low Impact
Development
Control
Specify the LID Definition to associate with the LID control.
Occupies Full
Subcatchment?
If set to True then the LID will occupy the full area of the LIDs
owning catchment.
Area of Each
Unit
Specify the surface area occupied by the LID.
Top Width of
Overland Flow
Surface of Each
Unit
The width of the outflow face of each identical LID unit.
Percent Initially
Saturated
For Bio-Retention Cells, this is the degree to which the units

soil is initially filled with water (0 saturation corresponds to the
wilting point moisture content, 100 saturation has the moisture
content equal to the porosity). The storage zone beneath the
soil zone of the cell is assumed to be completely dry. For other
types of LIDs it corresponds to the degree to which their
storage zone is initially filled with water.
Percent
Impervious Area
Treated
The percent of the impervious portion of the subcatchments

non-LID area whose runoff is treated by the LID practice.
Send Outflow to
Pervious Area?
Select this option if the outflow from the LID is returned onto
the subcatchments pervious area rather than going to the
subcatchments outlet. An example of where this might apply is
a rain barrel whose contents are used to irrigate a lawn area.
This field is ignored if the LID takes up the entire
subcatchment.
Number of
Replicate Units
The number of equally sized LID units.
LID ControlResults
Table 15-122: LID ControlResults Attributes
Attribute
Description
Calculation
Messages
View the calculation messages for the current element.
Evaporation
The total evaporation exiting the LID (Surface Evaporation +

Soil Evaporation + Storage Evaporation).
Inflow
The flow that enters the LID through the Surface layer. This
includes runon from the associated catchment and
precipitation.
Surface
Infiltration
The infiltration entering into the Surface layer of the LID unit.
Soil Percolation
The rate at which water percolates through the Soil layer of the
LID.
Bottom
Infiltration
The flow exiting the LID unit out of the bottom.
Surface Runoff
Flow that exits the LID off of the Surface layer.
Drain Outflow
Flow that exits the LID through the Underdrain layer.
Surface Depth
Depth of flow on the Surface layer of the LID unit.
Soil/Pavement
Moisture
The moisture content of the Soil or Pavement layers

depending on the LID type.
Storage Depth
The depth of flow in the Storage layer of the LID unit.
15-1397
Pond Attributes
LID ControlResults (Misc)

Table 15-123: LID ControlResults (Misc) Attributes
Attribute
Description
Portion of
Parent
Catchment Area
The fraction of the parent catchment occupied by the Low

Impact Development Control.
Area Per Low

Impact
Development
(Unified)
Displays the active Area Per Low Impact Development value

used in the computations.
Area (Total)
The total area covered by this Low Impact Development

Control. (LID Count * Area/LID).
Pond Attributes
The pond attributes comprise the following categories:
PondGeneral on page 15-1402
PondGeometry on page 15-1402
PondPhysical on page 15-1403
PondSimulation Initial Condition on page 15-1404
PondSWMM Extended Data on page 15-1405
PondActive Topology on page 15-1405
PondInflow on page 15-1405
PondResults on page 15-1406
PondResults: Engine Parsing Attributes on page 15-1406
PondResults (Extended Node) on page 15-1407
PondResults: Flows on page 15-1407
For an overview of the physical characteristics of ponds, see Physical Characteristics

of Ponds on page 6-375
15-1398
PondGeneral
Table 15-124: PondGeneral Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID

Label

Notes

GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
PondGeometry
Table 15-125: PondGeometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Geometry

Scaled Area

15-1399
Pond Attributes
PondPhysical
Table 15-126: PondPhysical Attributes
15-1400
Attribute
Description
Volume Type
Lets you select the volume type that gets used: ElevationArea Curve, Elevation-Volume Curve, Pipe Volume,
Functional. The value chosen here affects the availability of
other fields.
ElevationArea Curve
Lets you define points to describe the shape of the currently

highlighted element. Click the Ellipsis () button in this field
to open the Elevation-Area Curve dialog box (Elevation-Area
Curve Dialog Box on page 6-383). This attribute is active only
when the Volume Type attribute is set to Elevation-Area
Curve.
ElevationVolume
Curve
Lets you define points to describe the shape of the currently

highlighted element. Click the Ellipsis () button in this field
to open the Elevation-Volume Curve dialog box (ElevationVolume Curve Dialog Box on page 6-385). This attribute is
active only when the Volume Type attribute is set to ElevationVolume Curve.
Number of
Barrels
Lets you define the number of barrels that comprise the

currently highlighted element. Note that the diameter, length,
and invert values are applied to each barrel. This field is
available only when the Volume Type attribute is set to Pipe
Volume.
Length
Lets you define the length of the currently highlighted element.

It is available only when the Volume Type attribute is set to
Pipe Volume.
Invert (Start)

element. It is available only when the Volume Type attribute is
set to Pipe Volume.
Invert (Stop)

set to Pipe Volume.
Pipe
Diameter
Lets you define the diameter of the currently highlighted

set to Pipe Volume.

Table 15-126: PondPhysical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Pond
Coefficient
A value in expression A*Depth^B+C for Depth in feet. This

field is available only when the Functional Volume Type is
chosen.
Pond
Exponent
B value in expression A*Depth^B+C for Depth in feet. This

chosen.
Elevation
(Invert)
The invert elevation of the currently highlighted pond.
Depth
(Maximum)
The maximum depth of the pond.
Pond
Constant
C value in expression A*Depth^B+C for Depth in feet. This

chosen.
PondSimulation Initial Condition

Table 15-127: PondSimulation Initial Condition Attributes
Attribute
Description
Initial
Elevation
Type
Lets you choose which type of initial condition type to be

applied to the currently highlighted element: Invert or User
Defined Initial Elevation. The value chosen here affects the
Elevation
(Initial)
Lets you define the initial water surface elevation for the
currently highlighted element. It is available only when the
User Defined Initial Elevation value is selected for the Initial
Elevation Type attribute.
15-1401
Pond Attributes
PondSWMM Extended Data

Table 15-128: PondSWMM Extended Data Attributes
Attribute
Description
Evaporation
Factor
Fraction of evaporation rate realized. This attribute is only

used during SWMM calculations.
Apply
Treatment?

Treatment
Collection

on page 6-510.
Pollutograph
Collection

PondActive Topology
Table 15-129: PondActive Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?

PondInflow
Table 15-130: PondInflow Attributes
15-1402
Attribute
Description
Inflow
Collection

PondResults
Table 15-131: PondResults Attributes
Attribute
Description
Hydraulic
Grade
Representative calculated hydraulic grade at the pond. This is

Depth (Node)

Is Flooded?

highlighted element during the current time step. For ponds,
Flooding occurs when the Hydraulic Grade exceeds the
maximum defined elevation. For rating curve based volumes
this is the maximum elevation in the curve. For the Pipe
Volume this the upstream invert + the rise of the pipe. This is a
Flow (Out to
Links)
Sum of all flows leaving pond. This is a calculated results field

Flow
(Overflow)
Pollutants
Collection
Lets you view calculated results for pollutants assigned to the

node. Clicking the Ellipses (...) button displays the Pollutants
Results dialog box.
PondResults: Engine Parsing Attributes

Table 15-132: Catch BasinResults: Engine Parsing Attributes
Attribute
Description
Branch

15-1403
Pond Attributes
PondResults (Extended Node)

Table 15-133: PondResults (Extended Node)
Attribute
Description
Freeboard
Height
Distance between the top of the pond and the water surface.
Depth
(Flooding)
Depth between top of pond and the water surface when the
pond is flooded. This is a calculated results field and is not
editable.
Volume

Is Flooded
Ever?

PondResults: Flows
15-1404
Junction Chamber Attributes

Table 15-134: Wet WellResults: Flow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Local Inflow?
User defined inflow at pond This is a calculated results field

Flow (Local
from Inflow
Collection)

Flow (Local
Surface)

is not editable.
Flow (Total
In)
collections.
GVF Convex solver.
The junction chamber attributes comprise the following categories:
Junction ChamberGeneral on page 15-1409
Junction ChamberGeometry on page 15-1409
Junction ChamberPhysical on page 15-1410
Junction ChamberPhysical: Structure Losses on page 15-1410
Junction ChamberActive Topology on page 15-1411
Junction ChamberResults on page 15-1411
Junction ChamberResults: Engine Parsing Attributes on page 15-1411
Junction ChamberResults: Flows on page 15-1412
15-1405
Junction ChamberGeneral
Table 15-135: Junction ChamberGeneral Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID

Label

Notes

GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Junction ChamberGeometry
Table 15-136: Junction ChamberGeometry Attributes
15-1406
Attribute
Description


Junction ChamberPhysical
Table 15-137: Junction ChamberPhysical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Diameter
Elevation
(Ground)
Elevation
(Top)
The top elevation for the currently highlighted node.
Elevation
(Bottom)
The bottom elevation for the currently highlighted node.
Junction ChamberPhysical: Structure Losses

Table 15-138: Junction ChamberPhysical: Structure Losses
Attributes
Attribute
Description
Headloss
Method

Absolute
Headloss

Headloss
Coefficient
Start

Headloss
Coefficient
Stop

Headloss
Coefficient

15-1407
Junction ChamberActive Topology

Table 15-139: Junction ChamberActive Topology
Attribute
Description
Is Active?

Junction ChamberResults
Table 15-140: Junction ChamberResults Attributes
Attribute
Description
Hydraulic
Grade
Representative calculated hydraulic grade at the junction

chamber. This is a calculated results field and is not editable.
Depth (Node)

Maximum
HGL
TimeToMaxi
mumHGL
Junction ChamberResults: Engine Parsing Attributes

Table 15-141: Junction ChamberResults: Engine Parsing Attributes
15-1408
Attribute
Description
Branch

Junction ChamberResults: Flows

Table 15-142: Junction ChamberResults: Flow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Flow (Total
In)
collections.
GVF Convex solver.
15-1409
Pressure Junction Attributes

The pressure junction attributes comprise the following categories:
Pressure JunctionGeneral on page 15-1413
Pressure JunctionGeometry on page 15-1414
Pressure JunctionPhysical on page 15-1414
Pressure JunctionSanitary Loading on page 15-1414
Pressure JunctionActive Topology on page 15-1414
Pressure JunctionInflow on page 15-1415
Pressure JunctionResults on page 15-1415
Pressure JunctionResults: Engine Parsing Attributes on page 15-1416
Pressure JunctionResults: Flows on page 15-1416
Pressure JunctionGeneral
Table 15-143: Pressure JunctionGeneral Attributes
15-1410
Attribute
Description
ID

Label

Notes

GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Pressure JunctionGeometry
Table 15-144: Pressure JunctionGeometry Attributes
Attribute
Description


Pressure JunctionPhysical
Table 15-145: Pressure JunctionPhysical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Elevation
(Ground)
The ground elevation of the currently highlighted element.
Elevation
The elevation of the currently highlighted element.
Pressure JunctionSanitary Loading

Pressure JunctionSanitary Loading Attributes
Attribute
Description
Sanitary
Loads
Lets you define sanitary loads for the pressure junction.

Clicking the Ellipse (...) button displays the Sanitary (Dry
Weather) Flow Collection Editor, which lets you define
Hydrographs, Unit Loads, and Pattern Loads.
Pressure JunctionActive Topology

Table 15-146: Pressure JunctionActive Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?

15-1411
Pressure JunctionInflow
Table 15-147: Pressure JunctionInflow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Inflow
Collection
Lets you define an inflow collection for the selected pressure

junction. Clicking the Ellipse (...) button displays the Inflow
Collection Editor, which lets you create collections containing
Fixed Inflows, Hydrograph Inflows, and Pattern Inflows.
Pressure JunctionResults
Table 15-148: Pressure JunctionResults Attributes
15-1412
Attribute
Description
Flow (Out to
links)
Sum of all flows leaving the pressure junction. This is a

Hydraulic
Grade
(Maximum)
The highest HGL value for all time steps.
Time To
Maximum
Hydraulic
Grade
The time step at which the highest HGL value is recorded.
Pressure
The pressure value at the junction for the current time step.
Hydraulic
Grade Line
The Hydraulic Grade Line value at the junction for the current
time step.
Pressure JunctionResults: Engine Parsing Attributes

Table 15-149: Pressure JunctionResults: Engine Parsing Attributes
Attribute
Description
Branch

Pressure JunctionResults: Flows

Table 15-150: Pressure JunctionResults: Flow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Local Inflow?
User defined inflow at the pressure junction. This is a

Flow (Total
In)
Sum of all flows coming into the pressure junction. This is a

GVF Convex solver.
Flow (Local
from Inflow
Collection)
collections.
15-1413
15-1414
yChapter
16
Frequently Asked
Questions
This chapter contains answers to some of the frequently asked questions about using
The following FAQs are included:
What Project Files Does Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Maintain? on page 16-1417
What Kind of Graphs Can I Create and How Do I Create Them? on page 161420
How Do I Enter the Scale of a Background Image If it is a File Type without an

Inherent Scale? on page 16-1421
What is the Difference Between a Drop Manhole and a Regular Manhole? on

page 16-1421
How Do I Manage the Size of My Database Files? on page 16-1422
What Project Files Does Bentley SewerGEMS V8i

Maintain?
These are filename extensions of the files associated with a Bentley SewerGEMS V8i
project:
Project files.stsw, .dwh, .mdb
Results files.out (model output), .bin, .gut, .eqt, .hyg (hydrology output), .cul,
.swm (SWMM data file). There is one set per scenario.
The .mdb file is the most important file because it contains all modeling data, and
includes everything needed to perform a calculation. This file is an open access database format file and can be viewed and edited.
The .stsw file contains data such as annotation and color-coding definitions. This file
is an open .xml format file and can be viewed and edited.
16-1417
What Kind of Graphs Can I Create and How Do I Create Them?

The .dwh file is used by the Stand-Alone mode only, and contains the drawing. This is
a binary format file.
Whenever you create a file with a name of Filename, three files are created:
Filename.mdb
Filename.stsw
Filename.dwh
When you move a file and speed is important, it is best to place all three in a .zip file,
which will greatly reduce file size. Then copy or move the zip file and unzip it.
Every time you save the file, you not only overwrite the previous version but you also
convert the old files to .bak files. Each file will have it's original file name plus the
extension .bak, for example Filename.stsw.bak.
If your file becomes corrupted or you accidentally delete it, you can go back to the
previous version by simply removing the .bak suffix from the file name and using that
file (after deleting the corrupted file if necessary).
You can usually delete the results files because they you can regenerated them by
rerunnng your model.
To send your model to other Bentley SewerGEMS V8i users:
To send your SewerGEMS V8i model to other SewerGEMS V8i users, you only need
to send the project files (.stsw, .dwh, and .mdb). The results files will be recreated
when the scenarios associated with the model are calculated.
What Kind of Graphs Can I Create and How Do I

Create Them?
In Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, there are two kinds of graphical displays: profiles and
graphs (charts). Profiles show cross sections of the network to scale along some path
through the network and are described in Using Profiles on page 10-935. Graphs are
plots of some attribute or group of attributes vs. time at one or more elements. Profiles
and graphs can only be drawn for results of model runs; in order to view a graph or
profile, you must first successfully compute your model (run the model successfully).
16-1418
For details on how create a graph, see Creating a Graph on page 10-982.
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i contains a powerful graph editing tool to help you
customize your graphs.
For more information about this tool, see Graph Dialog Box on page 10-984.
Frequently Asked Questions
How Do I Enter the Scale of a Background Image If it

is a File Type without an Inherent Scale?
Image file formats such as BMP or JPG do not have scales inherently associated with
them.
When you create a new background layer (by clicking New File in the Background
Layer manager, then selecting the image file to use), Bentley SewerGEMS V8i
displays the Image properties dialog box (see Image Properties Dialog Box on
page 10-912). In the Image Properties dialog box, you can specify the true distances of
the corners of the drawing from the bottom left corner, which in the image is considered by default to be 0,0. If you know the coordinates of each corner of the map, you
can enter them in the Image Properties dialog box as well.
The image scale is used internally by Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, while the drawing
scale represents the actual length and is used to determine scaled lengths in Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i.
Related Topic
What is the Difference Between a Drop Manhole and

a Regular Manhole?
A drop manhole is used in areas with a steep slope when one or more of the inlet pipes
has an invert elevation significantly higher than the invert of the outlet pipe. Typically
the invert elevation of the "stop" end of the inlet pipe is set to the invert elevation of
the manhole. However, in the case of a drop manhole, the stop invert of the pipe is not
set to the manhole invert elevation but is at a significantly higher elevation.
16-1419
How Do I Manage the Size of My Database Files?

The following illustration shows a drop manhole.
Figure 16-1: Drop Manhole
How Do I Manage the Size of My Database Files?

If your database files are getting too large, you can compress them by compacting the
database. This operation eliminates much of the wasted space in your file. To do this,
select Tools > Database Utilities > Compact Database. To be able to use this feature,
you must select the Compact Database Enabled option on the Global tab of the
Options dialog box.
For more information, see Tools Menu on page 2-30 and Options Dialog Box Global Tab on page 4-175.
16-1420
Appendix
About Bentley
Systems
Bentley Systems, Incorporated provides software for the lifecycle of the worlds infrastructure. The companys comprehensive portfolio for the building, plant, civil, and
geospatial vertical markets spans architecture, engineering, construction (AEC) and
operations. Bentley is the leading provider of AEC software to the Engineering NewsRecord Design 500 and major owner-operators. For more information, visit the
Bentley Web site at http://www.bentley.com.
Bentley Systems, Inc. offers software solutions to civil engineers throughout the world
for analyzing, modeling, and designing all sorts of hydrologic and hydraulic systems,
from municipal water and sewer systems to stormwater ponds, open channels, and
more. With point-and-click data entry, flexible units, and report-quality output,
Bentley Systems, Inc. is the ultimate source for your modeling needs.
In addition to the ability to run in Stand-Alone mode with a CAD-like interface, four
of our productsWaterCAD, StormCAD, SewerCAD, and Bentley SewerGEMS
V8ican be totally integrated within AutoCAD. These three programs also share
numerous powerful features, such as scenario management, unlimited undo/redo,
customizable tables for editing and reporting, customizable GIS, database and spreadsheet connection, and annotation.
Be sure to contact us or visit our Web site at http://www.bentley.com to find out about
our latest software, books, training, and open houses.
Software
Bentley Institute Press
Training
Software
Bentley Systems, Inc. software includes:
A-1423
Software
CivilStorm
WaterGEMS
WaterCAD
SewerCAD
StormCAD
PondPack
FlowMaster
CulvertMaster
HAMMER
CivilStorm
CivilStorm revolutionizes municipal stormwater management. Whether your concern
is a stormwater master plan, localized flooding, GASB34 requirements, water quality
BMPs, NPDES permitting, or just simply being able to do faster and smarter designs
every day, CivilStorm fits your needs. It is the only commercially available software
package that lets you analyze all your system elements in one package. CivilStorm
also gives you the ability to perform analyses using either the SWMM algorithm or
CivilStorms own implicit solution of full Saint-Venant equations.
CivilStorm provides numerical solutions for the toughest interconnected pipe, pond,
and open channel networks, and provides stunning graphics and reporting tools for
visualizing your storm systems in action.
Use CivilStorm For:
Comprehensive Stormwater Master Plans
Watershed-Based Master Planning
Analysis of Open-channel, Closed-conduit and Combination systems
Floodplain Studies
Complex Flow Regime Analysis
Water Quality Assessments
Integrated Stormwater Quantity and Quality Assessments
NPDES Permitting
CivilStorm can be run in a MicroStation integrated interface, a Stand-Alone graphical

user interface, or an AutoCAD integrated interface.
A-1424
About Bentley Systems
WaterGEMS
WaterGEMS brings the concept of water modeling and GIS integration to the next
level. It is the only water-distribution modeling software that provides full, completely
seamless integration with GIS applications. Now the combined functionality of
WaterCAD and GIS can be utilized simultaneously, synthesizing the distinct advantages of each application to create a modeling tool with an unprecedented level of
freedom, power, efficiency, and usability.
You can create, display, edit, run, map, and design water models from within the GIS
environment, and view the results of the simulations as native GIS maps or with traditional Haestad Methods modeling tools. These abilities, in conjunction with the crossproduct functionality provided by the core Unified Data and Object Model architecture, provide a powerful cutting-edge solution for your modeling projects.
WaterGEMS works within your choice of environments: MicroStation, ArcView,
ArcEdit, ArcInfo, AutoCAD, or the standalone WaterGEMS Modeler interface.
WaterCAD
WaterCAD is the definitive model for complex pressurized-pipe networks, such as
municipal water-distribution systems. You can use WaterCAD to perform a variety of
functions, including steady-state and extended-period simulations of pressure
networks with pumps, tanks, control valves, and more.
WaterCADs abilities also extend into public safety and long-term planning issues,
with extensive water quality features, automated fire protection analyses, comprehensive scenario management, and enterprise-wide data-sharing capabilities.
WaterCAD is available with your choice of a MicroStation integrated interface, StandAlone graphical user interface, and an AutoCAD integrated interface.
SewerCAD
SewerCAD is a powerful design and analysis tool for modeling sanitary sewage
collection and pumping systems. With SewerCAD, you can develop and compute
sanitary loads, track and combine loads from dry-weather and wet-weather sources.
You can also simulate the hydraulic response of the entire system (gravity collection
and pressure force mains), observe the effects of overflows and diversions, and even
automatically design selected portions of the system. Output covers everything from
customizable tables and detailed reports to plan and profile sheets.
A-1425
Software
StormCAD
StormCAD is a highly efficient model for the design and analysis of storm sewer
collection systems. From graphical layout and intelligent network connectivity to flexible reports and profiles, StormCAD covers all aspects of storm-sewer modeling.
Surface inlet networks are independent of pipe connectivity and inlet hydraulics
conform to FHWA HEC-22 methodologies. Gradually varied flow algorithms and a
variety of popular junction-loss methods are the foundation of StormCADs robust
gravity piping computations, which handle everything from surcharged pipes and
diversions to hydraulic jumps.
PondPack
PondPack is a comprehensive, Windows-based hydrologic modeling program that
analyzes a tremendous range of situations, from simple sites to complex networked
watersheds. PondPack analyzes pre- and post-developed watershed conditions and
estimates required storage ponds. PondPack performs interconnected pond routing,
and also computes outlet rating curves with tailwater effects, multiple outfalls, pond
infiltration, and pond-detention times.
PondPack builds customized reports organized by categories, automatically creating
section and page numbers, tables of contents, and indexes. You can quickly create an
executive summary for an entire watershed or build an elaborate drainage report
showing any or all report items. Graphical displays, such as watershed diagrams, rainfall curves, and hydrographs, are fully compatible with other Windows software.
FlowMaster
FlowMaster is an efficient program for the design and analysis of a wide variety of
hydraulic elements, such as pressure pipes, open channels, weirs, orifices, and inlets.
FlowMasters Hydraulics Toolbox can create rating tables and performance curves for
any variables, using popular friction methods. Inlet calculations follow the latest
FHWA guidelines, and weighting of irregular section roughness can be based on any
popular techniques.
A-1426
CulvertMaster
CulvertMaster helps engineers design new culverts and analyze existing culvert
hydraulics, from single-barrel crossings to complex multibarrel culverts with roadway
overtopping. CulvertMaster computations use HDS No. 5 methodologies, allowing
you to solve for whatever hydraulic variables you do not know, such as culvert size,
peak discharge, and headwater elevation. Output capabilities include comprehensive
detailed reports, rating tables, and performance curves.
HAMMER
HAMMER is the premier software in the world for analyzing hydraulic transients,
surge control devices, and water hammer effects. HAMMER models any hydraulic
element, transient source or surge protection devices, including:
Transients for flow, head, or entrained vapor
Pressurized pipelines and networks
Ingress of contaminants into pipe networks
Surcharged sewers or storage tunnels
Pump start and shut down scenarios
Flow shifting via pumps or valves
Power or pump failure
Rapid valve closure
Catastrophic pipe or pump breaks
HAMMER can easily import steady-state model results from industry-standard

models such as WaterCAD, WaterGEMS, EPANET, or EXTRAN (for line filling).
Users can also build their own models using the advanced graphical interface or
robust database connections.

Bentley Institute Press provides civil engineering professionals with affordable,
quality reference and textbooks dedicated to the practical application of engineering
theory to hydraulics and hydrology. Bentley Institute Press publications include:
A-1427

References and Textbooks:
Authored by industry-recognized experts, Bentley

Institute Press offers a complete line of reference
books for use in both academic and professional
settings.
Technical Journals:
With an eye towards computer technology, journals

like Current Methods address the latest innovations
in water-resources modeling and practical modeling
case studies, as well as offering credit towards
certification.
Independent Papers:
Bentley Institute Press also provides funding for

engineers to write case studies of their projects, with
potential publication in a variety of industry journals
and magazines.
Books from Bentley Institute Press:

Advanced Water Distribution Modeling and Management, first edition
Haestad, Walski, Chase, Savic, Grayman, Beckwith, and Koelle
Computer Applications in Hydraulic Engineering, fifth edition
Haestad, Walski, Barnard, Durrans, and Meadows
Floodplain Modeling Using HEC-RAS, first edition
Haestad, Dyhouse, Hatchett, and Benn
Proceedings of the First Annual Water Security Summit, first edition
Haestad
Stormwater Conveyance Modeling and Design, first edition
Haestad and Durrans
Wastewater Collection System Modeling and Design, first edition
Haestad, Walski, Barnard, Merritt, Harold, Walker, and Whitman
Water Distribution Modeling, first edition
Haestad, Walski, Chase, and Savic
To order or to receive additional information on these or any other Bentley Institute
Press titles, please call 800-727-6555 (U.S. and Canada) or +1-203-755-1666 (worldwide) or visit www.bentley.com/books.
Related Topics
A-1428
Software on page A-1423
Training on page A-1430
Internet Resources on page A-994
Training
The Bentley Institute manages professional training programs to ensure consistent,
high quality, user training for a variety of Bentley products and varying levels of
application experience. Bentley Institute training is developed to maximize your
productivity by using examples relevant to your day-to-day project efforts. Training is
developed concurrently with software applications to provide knowledge of the latest
tools and features. Additionally, all Bentley Institute faculty meet rigorous certification requirements.
The Bentley Institute offers complete training for Haestad Methods products.These
training programs are famous for efficiently and effectively teaching engineers how to
apply hydraulic theory and state-of-the-art software to real-world design situations.
Modelers can become certified in a variety of water-related fields, through an

assortment of teaching methods including:
JumpStart Seminars
Comprehensive Workshops
Publication-Based Programs
To obtain more information about Bentley Systems, Inc. certification programs or to

see upcoming events in a city near you, visit http://www.bentley.com.
Related Topics
Software on page A-1423
Bentley Institute Press on page A-1428
Internet Resources on page A-994
Accreditations
Bentley Systems has achieved the highest levels of accreditation from both the International Association for Continuing Education and Training (IACET) and the Professional Development Registry for Engineers and Surveyors (PDRES). In addition to
our own prestigious certifications, these endorsements enable modelers to earn
Continuing Education Units (CEUs) and Professional Development Hours (PDHs) for
their satisfactory participation in various training and educational programs.
A-1429
Training
A-1430
Appendix
Reference Tables
Mannings n Coefficients on page B-1433

Inlet Design Coefficients on page B-1436
Headloss Coefficients for Junctions on page B-1439
Roughness ValuesMannings Equation on page B-1441
Mannings n Coefficients
Table B-1: Mannings n Coefficient Table
Lined Channels
Concrete, with surfaces as indicated
Concrete, bottom float-finished, sides as

indicated
Gravel bottom, sides as indicated
Mannings n
Formed, no finish
0.013 0.017
Trowel finish
0.012 0.014
Float finish
0.013 0.015
Float finish, gravel on bottom
0.015 0.017
Gunite, good section
0.016 0.019
Gunite, wavy section
0.018 0.022
Dressed stone in mortar
0.015 0.017
Random stone in mortar
0.017 0.020
Cement rubble masonry
0.020 0.025
Cement rubble masonry, plastered
0.016 0.020
Dry rubble (riprap)
0.020 0.030
Formed concrete
0.017 0.020
B-1433
Mannings n Coefficients
Table B-1: Mannings n Coefficient Table (Contd)
Asphalt
Concrete-lined excavated rock
Random stone in mortar
0.020 0.023
Dry rubble (riprap)
0.023 0.033
Brick
0.014 0.017
Smooth
0.013
Rough
0.016
Wood, planed, clean
0.011 0.013
Good section
0.017 0.020
Irregular section
0.022 0.027
Unlined Channels
Earth, uniform section
Earth, fairly uniform section
Dragline excavated or dredged
Mannings n
Clean, recently completed
0.016 0.018
Clean, after weathering
0.018 0.020
With short grass, few weeds
0.022 0.027
In gravely soil, uniform section, clean
0.022 0.025
No vegetation
0.022 0.025
Grass, some weeds
0.025 0.030
Dense weeds or aquatic plants in deep

channels
0.030 0.035
Sides clean, gravel bottom
0.025 0.030
Sides clean, cobble bottom
0.030 0.040
No vegetation
0.028 0.033
Light brush on banks
0.035 0.050
Rock: Based on design section

Based on actual mean section
0.035
Smooth and uniform
0.035 0.040
Jagged and irregular
0.040 0.045
Channels not maintained, weeds and brush Dense weeds, high as flow depth
uncut
B-1434
0.08 0.12
Clean bottom, brush on sides
0.05 0.08
Clean bottom, brush on sides, highest stage

of flow
0.07 0.11
Reference Tables
Table B-1: Mannings n Coefficient Table (Contd)
Dense brush, high stage
Highway Channels and Swales with Maintained Vegetation
0.10 0.14
Mannings n
(Values shown are for velocities of 2 and 5 fps)

Depth of flow up to 0.7 ft.
Bermuda grass, Kentucky bluegrass, buffalo Mowed to 2 in.
grass
Good Stand, any grass
Fair stand, any grass
0.07 0.045
Length 4 to 6 in.
0.09 0.05
Length about 12 in.
0.18 0.09
Length about 24 in.
0.30 0.15
Length about 12 in.
0.14 0.08
Length about 24 in.
0.25 0.13
Depth flow 0.7 ft. to 1.5 ft.

Bermuda grass, Kentucky bluegrass, buffalo Mowed to 2 in.
grass
Good Stand, any grass
Fair stand, any grass
0.05 0.035
Length 4 to 6 in.
0.06 0.04
Length about 12 in.
0.12 0.07
Length about 24 in.
0.20 0.10
Length about 12 in.
0.10 0.06
Length about 24 in.
0.17 0.09
Gutters
Mannings n
Concrete gutter
Troweled finish
0.012
Asphalt pavement
Smooth texture
0.013
Rough texture
0.016
Smooth
0.013
Rough
0.015
Float finish
0.014
Broom finish
0.016
Concrete gutter with asphalt pavement
Concrete pavement
For gutters with small slope, where sediment may accumulate, increase all above values
of n by
0.002
B-1435
Inlet Design Coefficients

(Source: Searcy 1973.)
(Source: U.S. Soil Conservation Service 1986.)
1. The n values are a composite of information compiled by Engman (1986).

2. Includes species such as weeping lovegrass, bluegrass, buffalo grass, blue grama
grass, and native grass mixtures.
3. When selecting n, consider cover to a height of about 0.1 ft. This is the only part
of the plant cover that obstructs sheet flow.

Table B-2: Coefficients for Inlet Control Design Equations
Submerged
Unsubmerged
Chart
No.
1
Shape and
Material
Circular Concrete
Circular CMP
Circular
Rectangular Box
Rectangular Box
B-1436
Nomograph
Scale
Inlet edge
description
FORM
Square edge with

headwall
0.0098
0.0398
0.67
Groove end with

head wall
0.0018
0.0292
0.74
Groove end
projecting
0.0045
0.0317
0.69
Headwall
0.0078
0.0379
0.69
Mitered to slope
0.021
1.33
0.0463
0.75
Projecting
0.034
1.5
0.0553
0.54
Beveled ring, 45
bevels
0.0018
2.5
0.0300
0.74
Beveled ring, 33.7

bevels
0.0018
2.5
0.0243
0.83
30 to 75 wingwall
flares
0.026
0.0347
0.81
90 to 15 wingwall
flares
0.061
0.75
0.0400
0.8
0 wingwall flares
0.061
0.75
0.0423
0.82
45 Wingwall flare,
d=.0430
0.51
0.667
0.0309
0.80
Reference Tables
Table B-2: Coefficients for Inlet Control Design Equations (Contd)
Submerged
Unsubmerged
Chart
No.
10
11
12
13
Shape and
Material
Rectangular Box
Rectangular Box
Rectangular Box
Chamfers
Rectangular Box
Top Bevels
16-19 C M Boxes
Nomograph
Scale
Inlet edge
description
FORM
18-33.7 wingwall
flare, d=.0830
0.486
0.667
0.0249
0.83
90 headwall with
chamfers
0.515
0.667
0.0375
0.79
90 headwall with
45 bevels
0.495
0.667
0.0314
0.82
90 headwall with
33.7 bevels
0.486
0.667
0.0252
0.865
chamfers; 45
skewed headwall
0.545
0.667
0.0505
0.73
chamfers; 30
skewed headwall
0.533
0.667
0.0425
0.705
chamfers; 15
skewed headwall
0.522
0.667
0.0402
0.68
45 bevels;
skewed headwall
0.498
0.667
0.0327
0.75
45 non-offset
wingwall flares
0.497
0.667
0.0339
0.803
18.4 non-offset
wingwall flares
0.493
0.667
0.0361
0.806
18.4 non-offset
wingwall flares, 30
skewed barrel
0.495
0.667
0.0386
0.71
45 wingwall flares
offset
0.497
0.667
0.0302
0.835
33.7 wingwall
flares offset
0.495
0.667
0.0252
0.881
18.4 wingwall
flares offset
0.493
0.667
0.0227
0.887
90 headwall
0.0083
0.0379
0.69
Thick wall
projecting
0.0145
1.75
0.0419
0.64
B-1437

Submerged
Unsubmerged
Chart
No.
29
30
34
35
36
Shape and
Material
Horizontal Ellipse
Concrete
Vertical Ellipse
Concrete
Pipe Arch 18"

Corner Radius CM
Pipe Arch 18"

Corner Radius CM
Pipe Arch 31"

Corner Radius CM
40-42 Arch CM
B-1438
Nomograph
Scale
Inlet edge
description
FORM
Thin wall projecting
0.034
1.5
0.0496
0.57
Square edge with

headwall
0.01
0.0398
0.67
Groove end with

head wall
0.0018
2.5
0.0292
0.74
Groove end
projecting
0.0045
0.0317
0.69
Square edge with

headwall
0.01
0.0398
0.67
Groove end with

head wall
0.0018
2.5
0.0292
0.74
Groove end
projecting
0.0095
0.0317
0.69
0.0083
0.0379
0.69
90 headwall
Mitered to slope
0.03
0.0463
0.75
Projecting
0.034
1.5
0.0496
0.57
0.0300
1.5
0.0496
0.57
Projecting
No Bevels
0.0088
0.0368
0.68
33.7 bevels
0.003
0.0269
0.77
0.0300
1.5
0.0496
0.57
Projecting
No Bevels
0.0088
0.0368
0.68
33.7 bevels
0.003
0.0269
0.77
90 headwall
0.0083
0.0379
0.69
Mitered to slope
0.03
0.0463
0.75
Thin wall projecting
0.034
1.5
0.0496
0.57
Reference Tables
Submerged
Unsubmerged
Chart
No.
55
56
Shape and
Material
Circular
Elliptical Inlet Face
Nomograph
Scale
Inlet edge
description
FORM
Smooth tapered
inlet throat
0.534
0.555
0.0196
0.90
Rough tapered
inlet throat
0.519
0.64
0.0210
0.90
Tapered inlet
beveled edges
0.536
0.622
0.0368
0.83
Tapered inlet
square edges
0.5035
0.719
0.0478
0.8
Tapered inlet thin

edge projecting
0.547
0.8
0.0598
0.75
0.475
0.667
0.0179
0.97
57
Rectangular
Tapered inlet throat
58
Rectangular
Concrete
Side tapered less 2

favorable edges
0.56
0.667
0.0466
0.85
Side tapered
more favorable
edges
0.56
0.667
0.0378
0.87
Slope tapered
less favorable
edges
0.5
0.667
0.0466
0.65
Slope tapered
more favorable
edges
0.5
0.667
0.0378
0.71
59
Rectangular
Concrete
Headloss Coefficients for Junctions

These are typical headloss coefficients used in the standard method for estimating
headloss through manholes and junctions.
B-1439

Table B-3: Typical Headloss Coefficients
Type of Manhole
Trunkline only with no bend at the

junction
Diagram
Headloss
Coefficient
0.5
Trunkline only with 45 bend at the

junction
0.6
Trunkline only with 90 bend at the

junction
0.8
B-1440
Reference Tables
Table B-3: Typical Headloss Coefficients
Type of Manhole
Diagram
Headloss
Coefficient
Trunkline with one lateral

Small 0.6
Large 0.7
Two roughly equivalent entrance lines

with angle < 90 between lines
0.8
Two roughly equivalent entrance lines

with angle > 90 between lines
0.9
Three or more entrance lines
1.0
Roughness ValuesMannings Equation

Commonly used roughness values for different materials are:
B-1441

Table B-4: Mannings Coefficients n for Closed-Metal Conduits Flowing
Partly Full
Channel Type and Description
a. Brass, smooth
Min.
Normal
Max.
0.009
0.010
0.013
1. Lockbar and welded
0.010
0.012
0.014
2. Riveted and spiral
0.013
0.016
0.017
1. Coated
0.010
0.013
0.014
2. Uncoated
0.011
0.014
0.016
1. Black
0.012
0.014
0.015
2. Galvanized
0.013
0.016
0.017
1. Subdrain
0.017
0.019
0.021
2. Storm drain
0.021
0.024
0.030
b. Steel
c. Cast iron
d. Wrought iron
e. Corrugated metal
B-1442
Appendix
References
Ming Jin, Samuel Coran and Jack Cook (2004), New One-Dimensional Implicit
Numerical Dynamic Sewer and Storm Model, Haestad Methods Inc., Waterbury, CT
Ben C. Yen (2001), "Hydraulics of Sewer System", in Stormwater Collection Systems
Design Handbook, ed. Larry W. Mays, McGraw-Hill, New York
Danny L. Fread (1993), "Flow Routing", in Handbook of Hydrology, ed David R.
Maidment, McGraw-Hill, New York
Ming Jin and Danny L. Fread (2000) "Discussion on the Application of Relaxation
Scheme to Wave-Propagation Simulation in Open-Channel Networks", Journal of
Hydraulic Eng., ASCE, 126(1), 89-91.
Ming Jin and Danny L. Fread (1999) "One-dimensional modeling of mud/debris
unsteady flows", Journal of Hydraulic Eng., ASCE, 25(8), 827-834.
Ming Jin and Danny L. Fread (1997) "Dynamic flood routing with explicit and
implicit numerical solution schemes", Journal of Hydraulic Eng., ASCE, 123(3), 166173.
C-1443
C-1444
Glossary
Alternative:
A categorized data set that create scenarios when placed

together. Alternatives hold the input data in the form of
records. A record holds the data for a particular element
in your system.
Aquifer:
A sub-surface groundwater area used to model the

vertical movement of water infiltrating from the
subcatchments which lie above them. Aquifers also
permit the infiltration of groundwater into the
conveyance system, or exfiltration of surface water from
the conveyance system, depending on the hydraulic
gradient that exists.
Backflow:
The backing up of water through a conduit or channel in

the direction opposite to normal flow.
Basin:
An area having a common outlet for its surface runoff.
Batch Run:
A set of multiple scenarios that are computed together.

This is helpful if you want to queue a large number of
calculations, or manage a group of smaller calculations as
a set.
bmp:
File name extension for bitmap image files, which can be

used as background layers in SewerGEMS V8i.
Branch:
In Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, a series of connected

elements. The Bentley SewerGEMS V8i calculation
engine includes a heuristic routine that decomposes a
network into its component branches, and each branch is
solved independently using an implicit solver. Each
branch comprises a series of connected elements.
Elements with the same branch ID are solved together.
Calculation Options Profile: A set of calculation options associated with a specific

scenario.
Flow (Captured):
The portion of the inlet flow which actually drains into

the catch basin. The captured flow is dependent on the
inlet capacity of the catch basin.
D-1445
D-1446
Catalog Pipes:
User-defined re-usable data sets that define common

physical characteristics of pipes.
Catch basin:
The geographical area that "catches" the rainfall and

directs it towards a common discharge point within the
storm collection network.
Catchment:
The area drained by a stream, lake or other body of water

in a sewer or stormwater system.
Channel:
A channel refers to a channel that changes geometry from

the upstream cross section to the downstream cross
section. Channels can be used to model natural streams or
swales which are not prismatic in cross section. Channels
must have a cross section element at each end and
properties are interpolated along the channel.
CN:
SCS Curve Number
Collection:
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i uses the term Collection to

identify some fields where you enter a set of data instead
of a single value. To use this feature, click the field in
which the word Collection appears, then click the
Ellipsis () button to open a dialog box into which you
enter data.
Composite Hydrograph:
A graph of the total flow over time from multiple defined

fixed/unit loads, hydrographs, and pattern loads.
Conduit:
An open- or closed-section element through which water

moves. A conduit has a constant roughness and cross
section shape along its entire length. In Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i, a conduit can refer to any prismatic
channel or pipe that conveys flow. The cross section of a
conduit must remain constant from one end to the next.
Cross Section Node:
An element which is perpendicular to flow across a

channel.
DD:
Excess duration rainfall.
Diurnal Curve:
A pattern that relates to the changes in loads over the

course of the day, reflecting times when people are using
more or less water than average.
Drag:
Dragging is an action you perform with the mouse to

select items in the drawing pane. Click in the drawing
pane, hold down the mouse button, and move the mouse
to form a rectangle around the elements you want to
select. After you have formed the rectangle around the
items you want to select, let go of the mouse button.
dwh:
File name extension for the binary format file used by the
SewerGEMS V8i Stand-Alone mode only. The .dwh file
contains the drawing.
dxf:
File name extension for Data Exchange File format

image files, which can be used as background layers in
SewerGEMS V8i. Dxf files store vector data for
drawings typically produced in CAD programs.
Dynamic Manager:
A dialog box that can be displayed floating above the

workspace or attached (docked) to any one of the sides of
the workspace.
Dynamic selection set:
A selection created by running a query.
English:
E-Q-TWU.S. customary units, such as inch or acre
Element Symbology:
Refers to the way in which elements and their associated

labels are displayed in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i You use
the Element Symbology manager to manage element
annotations and color coding.
Element Table:
A read-only, predefined FlexTable that you can use to

review data about a specific element type. There is one
predefined table for every element available in Bentley
SewerGEMS V8i.
E-Q-TW:
Elevation-flow-tailwater rating curves
Extended Period Simulation:A calculation type where the model is analyzed over a
specified duration of time.
FlexTable:
A customizable table that lets you view input data and

results for all elements of a specific type in a tabular
format. You can use the standard set of FlexTables or
create your own FlexTables to compare data and create
reports.
Freeboard:
The difference between the top of dam elevation and the

water surface elevation.
gif:
File name extension for Graphic Image Format image

files, which can be used as background layers in
SewerGEMS V8i.
GIS:
Geographic information system
Global storm data:
In Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, project-wide storm data,
usually applied to catchments that do not use local

rainfall. Project-wide global storm data are typically
associated with Hydrology alternatives.
D-1447
D-1448
Gutter:
An open-section element that models overflow. Gutters

are used in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i only to model the
water which exceeds the capacity of in catch basin inlet
and must flow through a surface gutter to the next catch
basin. A Bentley SewerGEMS V8i gutter can only
receive water from a catch basin.
Hydrograph:
A graph of discharge versus time.
Hyetograph:
A graphical representation of rainfall intensity with

respect to time.
Hyperlink:
In Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, a link to an external file,

such as an image or movie file, for the purpose of
associating the file with a specific element.
Ia :
Initial abstraction
ICPM:
Interconnected Pond Modeling
IDF/I-D-F:
Intensity-Duration-Frequency
Implicit Engine:
One of two calculation engines available in Bentley

SewerGEMS V8i. The implicit engine uses a four-point
implicit finite difference solver which tends to be more
stable than an explicit solver. The implicit engine in
Bentley SewerGEMS V8i is based on the solver in the
National Weather Service FLDWAV model.
Infiltration:
Water that enters the system from the ground through

defective pipes, pipe joints, connections, or manhole
walls
Inflow:
Inflow is specified at a manhole or wet well as the total

amount of wet weather inflow. Together with the
infiltration along the pipes, the inflow forms the wet
weather part of the sewer load.
Inflow Collection:
A collection of any combination of fixed, hydrograph, or

pattern inflows for an element.
Inlet flow:
Flows added to the manholes, catch basins, ponds, and

wet wells in your model, including runoffs from
catchments, user input hydrographs, and flows from
other sources, such as pumps.
inp:
File name extension for SWMM v5 project files.
jpg:
File name extension for image files produced using the

Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) standard.
JPEG files, which can also have the file name extension
jpeg, can be used as background layers in SewerGEMS
V8i.
Junction chamber:
A structure in which flow can be mixed or split. In

combined sewers systems, flow can be split between that
going to treatment and that going to an overflow.
K e:
Entrance loss coefficient
Kr:
Reverse flow loss coefficient
Land Uses:
Categories of activities or land surface characteristics

that are assigned to catchment elements. Examples of
land use activities are residential, commercial, industrial,
and undeveloped.
Manhole:
Element that provides access to the system for inspection

and maintenance. Manholes are usually installed where
there is a change in horizontal (plan-view) pipe direction
or pipe slope, where several pipes join, or where the pipe
size changes.
mdb:
File name extension for SewerGEMS V8i database files.

The .mdb file contains all modeling data, and includes
everything needed to perform a calculation. This file is an
open access database format file and can be viewed and
edited.
MrSID:
File name extension for Multi-resolution Seamless Image

Database format raster image files, which can be used as
background layers in SewerGEMS V8i.
Orifice Coefficient:
For stormwater openings, an orifice coefficient of 0.60 is

often used.
Outfall:
The ultimate termination points in a network.
Overflow:
The flow lost when the water surface elevation at a

manhole or other type of node is above the rim elevation
or user-specified overtopping elevation.
Pattern:
A series of multipliers which describe how the base load

varies over time.
Pattern Load:
A single average base load and a series of dimensionless

multipliers used to delineate how the load varies over
time.
Pattern Setup:
In SewerGEMS V8i, a pattern setup allows you to match

unit sanitary (dry weather) loads with appropriate loading
patterns. Each scenario can use a different pattern setup,
thus allowing you to model different loading alternatives
for different extended period simulations.
png:
File name extension for Portable Network Graphic

format image files, which can be used as background
layers in SewerGEMS V8i.
D-1449
D-1450
Pollutograph:
A plot of time vs. concentration or mass rate.
Pond outlet structure:
A structure that allows flow to discharge from a pond.
Pressure junction:
A connection between two or more pressure pipes of

varying characteristics. Loads may enter a pressure
portion of a network through a pressure junction.
Pressure pipe:
In SewerGEMS V8i, a type of link element used to

connect node elements in pressure portions of a network.
Profile:
A graph that plots a particular attribute across a distance,

such as ground elevation along a section of piping. As
well as these side or sectional views of the ground
elevation, profiles can be used to show other
characteristics, such as hydraulic grade, pressure, and
constituent concentration.
Pump:
A structure in a wastewater system designed to add the

energy (head) necessary to overcome elevation
differences and head losses.
Q:
Flow
Query:
A SQL expression you build in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i

to filter a FlexTable or create a selection set.
Sanitary Flow Collection:
A collection of loads that contains any combination of

hydrograph, unit, or pattern loads.
Sanitary Load:
A load that results from human activity and are not

weather-dependent.
Scenario:
A set of input data (in the form of alternatives),

calculation options, results, and notes associated with a
set of calculations. Scenarios let you set up an unlimited
number of "What If?" situations for your model, and then
modify, compute, and review your system under those
conditions.
Selection Sets:
User-defined groups of network elements that let you

predefine a group of elements to manipulate together.
shp:
File name extension for shapefiles, which you can import

as background layers for your model.
SI:
International System of units or metric units.
Static selection set:
A selection set created by selecting a group of elements

in your model.
Storm data:
In Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, a single rainfall curve that

represents one rainfall event for a given recurrence
interval.
SWMM Engine:
One of two calculation engines available in Bentley

SewerGEMS V8i. The SWMM engine uses the solver
from the EPA Stormwater Management Model version 5.
This is an explicit solver which, while more prone to
stability problems, exactly matches the results from
SWMM 5.
Tc:
The time of concentration (Tc) is the time it takes for

runoff to travel from the hydraulically most distant part
of the watershed subarea to its outfall point. It is
computed by summing the times it takes the water to
travel through the different components of the subarea
drainage system.
tiff:
File name extension for Tagged Image File Format raster

image files, which can be used as background layers in
SewerGEMS V8i. The extension .tif is also used for these
types of files.
Unit Hydrograph:
A time versus flow curve that represents a one-inch

volume of rainfall for a given excess duration of rainfall,
DD, for a set watershed area.
Unit Sanitary Load:
Loading unit count representing the local count of

loading units for a specified unit dry weather load.
User data extensions:
A set of one or more attribute fields that you can define to

hold data to be stored in the model. User data extensions
allow you to add your own data fields to your project.
User Notifications:
Messages that appear after you compute your model.

These messages can help you troubleshoot errors in your
model.
Virtual Conduit:
Virtual conduits are a special compatibility element

included in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i to help modelers
achieve fidelity between the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i
model and other storm modeling solutions that model
pumps and control structures such as weirs, orifices, and
rating tables as network links. Virtual conduits are
displayed in your model as dashed lines.
Watershed:
A watershed is a collection of catchments which outfall

to the same point. In other words, for each storm in the
selected design storm collection, a hydrograph is
generated for each catchment. The sum of all those
hydrographs is the watershed hydrograph.
D-1451
D-1452
Wet Weather Load:
A load that is not related to rainfall activity, such as

groundwater infiltration (water leaking into a pipe
through cracks, joints, and other defects) and structure
inflow (surface water entering a structure through the
cover).
Wet well:
A boundary condition between the pressure and gravity

portions of a network. Wet wells serve as a collection
point for gravity systems, and as an HGL boundary node
for the pressure system. Dry loads can also enter the
sewer network at these locations.
A
active topology 110, 111, 319, 329, 333, 338, 345, 353, 358, 365, 373, 374, 378, 383, 401
active topology alternative 110
alternatives 89, 90
child 89, 90
merge 89
annotations
adding 124
deleting 125
editing 125
renaming 125
AutoCAD 219
commands 229
drawing synchronization 223
entities 228
rebuild figure labels 222
undo/redo 231, 232
AutoCAD mode 219
graphical layout 220
project files 223
toolbars 221
Autodesk 219
B
base alternative 89, 90
batch run 86
begins with 147
C
child
alternative 89, 90
scenario 83, 84
color coding
adding 127
deleting 128
editing 128
renaming 129
column headings
editing for FlexTables 144
composite travel time
definition 432
connection
synchronization 223, 224
contains 147
copying
Index-1453
FlexTables 151
custom AutoCAD entities 228
custom filter 147
customize
drawing 222
customizing
FlexTables 148
D
data
organization 89
default units 39
delete
elements 226
profile 135
deleting
FlexTables 142
displaying multiple projects 34
drawing
setup (AutoCAD mode) 221
synchronization (AutoCAD mode) 223
drawing scale 38
DWG 223
E
editing
FlexTables 143
numerous elements at once 145
editing column headings
FlexTables 144
editing units
FlexTables 144
element
deleting 226
moving 230
element label project files 41
element labeling settings 41
elements
globally editing data in numerous elements 145
entities
change into pipe 233
in AutoCAD 228
to pipes 233
entity conversion 232
explode elements (AutoCAD mode) 229
Index-1454
exporting
FlexTables 151
F
filter
resetting 147
filtering
criteria 147
FlexTables
copying data 151
customizing 148
deleting 142
editing 143
editing column headings 144
editing globally 145
editing units 144
exporting data 151
global editing 145
navigating in 144
ordering columns 146
printing 151
reports 151
saving as text 151
shortcut keys 144
sorting column order 146
G
general settings 35
global edit 145
global editing
FlexTables 145
global settings 35
graphical layout
AutoCAD 220
graphing
changing total time period 154
refresh 154
graphs
data 155
printing 155
I
import 234
initial conditions of networks 154
initial flow equals zero 154
Index-1455
L
label
rebuilding (AutoCAD mode) 222
layer 225
layout
AutoCAD 220
pipe using entity 232
layout settings 36
M
merge
merge
alternatives 89
move
elements 230
labels 230
moving toolbars 22
N
native AutoCAD entities converting 232
navigating in a FlexTables 144
O
object reference not set to an instance of an object 154
opening an existing project 34
opening managers 23
operation 145
options 35
ordering
FlexTable columns 146
organize data 89
P
parent scenario 84
pipe
layout using entity 232
print preview
FlexTables 151
printing
FlexTables 151
profile
editing 134
profiles
animating 132
creating 133
project
files 223
Index-1456
Project Properties dialog box 34

Q
quick filter 147
R
ranking
rebuild figure labels 222
redo 231, 232
refresh 154
Remove
Columns 150
reports
FlexTables 151
reset 147
FlexTable filter 147
Reset Workspace 23
S
save
as drawing *.dwg 224
saving FlexTables as text 151
scenario 86
base 84
batch run 86
Scenario Management 82
Example 78
select
layer 225
text style 226
setting options 35
setup 221
shortcut keys
FlexTables 144
snap menu (AutoCAD mode) 231
sorting
starting a new project 34
symbol
visibility (AutoCAD mode) 222
synchronize (AutoCAD mode) 223
T
Table
Properties 149
Setup 149
Index-1457
Symbols
Type 149
table
filtering 147
tables
column headings 144
editing FlexTables 143
units 144
Tc definition 431
text 230
style 226
theme folders
renaming 123
theme groups
deleting 123
time of concentration
definition 431
time of simulation 154
Tt definition 432
turning toolbars off 22
turning toolbars on 22
U
undo/redo operations in AutoCAD 231
units 39
V
visibility of symbols 222
W
WCD file 223
white
table columns 143
window color settings 36
Y
yellow
table cells 143
Z
zero flow at time 0 154
Symbols
%u 922
.bak files 1418, 1420
.csd files 1418
.dwh files 1418, 1419
Index-1458
A
.mdb files 1417, 1418
.pdf 9
.swg files 1417
A
about CivilStorm 1
about SewerGEMS 1
actions tab 552
active 839
active topology 837, 839, 1309, 1323, 1331, 1337, 1345, 1354, 1364, 1367, 1374, 1377, 1383,
1394, 1398, 1405, 1411, 1414

active topology alternative 837
active topology child alternative 838
Active Topology dialog box 837
actual and plan length 421
actual and plan length as a function of slope 422
Add Hyperlinks dialog box 530
Add To Selection Set dialog box 434
adding annotations 921
adding background layers 909
adding color coding 929
adding elements 394
adding fixed loads 607
adding storm events 658
adding treatment to a node 514
adding unit hydrographs 697
adding user defined hydrographs 608
Alternative Editor dialog box 837
Alternative Manager 835
alternatives 811, 832, 833, 1445
base 833
boundary condition 867
child 833
creating 834
defined 816
editing 834
hydrology 871
initial conditions 869
making elements inactive in 838
merge 832
overview 811, 832
physical 840
rainfall runoff 883
sanitary loading 891
types of 833
Index-1459
A
water quality 886
analysis
hydraulic 727, 729
analysis menu 22
animating profiles 937
Animation Control Manager 938
Animation Controls 947
annotation properties 953
Annotation Properties dialog box 924, 953
annotations 916, 917, 924, 953
%u 922
adding 921
deleting 922
displaying units 922
editing 923
renaming 923
antecedent runoff condition 1277
Apply Sanitary Load to Selection dialog box 650
applying a zone to a pump 336
aquifers 487, 1445
Aquifers dialog box 487
ArcCatalog 1071
ArcEdit 1070
ArcGIS
integration 1070
ArcGIS applications 1071
Arch 1153
ArcInfo 1070
ArcMap 1071
ArcObjects 1068
ArcView 1070
attributes
editing 416
required for ponds 379
attributes for calculation profiles 737
AutoCAD 1101, 1111, 1112
commands 1108, 1118
drawing synchronization 1116
entities 1108, 1117, 1118
importing WaterCAD 1109, 1121
integrating with CivilStorm 1113
proxies 1122
AutoCAD mode 17, 1101, 1111, 1112
graphical layout 1102, 1113
menus 1113
toolbars 1114
Autodesk 1101, 1111
Index-1460
B
automated scenario management 812
B
backflow 1445
Background Layer manager 906
background layers 906, 1421
adding 909
deleting 910
dxf files 915
editing 910
image compression 913
renaming 911
shapefiles 914
supported image types 906
turning on and off 912
working with folders 908
backup files 1418
backup project files 1420
base alternative 832
base alternatives 833
Base Calcuation Options 736
basin 1445
basket handle shape 1149
batch pipe split 415
batch run 829, 1445
Batch Run Editor dialog box 829
batch runs 829
Batch Split Pipe dialog box 414
Bend command 395
Bentley Hydrology 758
Bentley Institute Press 1428
Bentley SELECT 7
Bentley Systems 1423
about us 1423
accreditations 1430
addresses 11
contacting 11
Haestad Methods products 1423
program update 7
training 1430
Bentley Wastewater 19
Border Editor dialog box 1031
border properties for graphs 1031
border tool 392
boundaries 1198
Index-1461
C
external 1199
internal 1200
boundary condition alternative 867
branced networks 1127
branch 779, 1445
branch labeling 1138
branches 1138
broad-crested weir 1222
buffering point area percentage 1097, 1098
building a model 396
Bulletins 70/71 1250, 1254
bypass flow 1171
C
C values 1271
calculation detailed summary 775, 781
calculation errors 806
calculation executive summary 774
calculation options 806, 807, 899
Calculation Options Manager 735
Calculation Options manager 735
Calculation Options Profile 1445
calculation options tab 776
calculation profiles 735
attributes 737
calculation report 774
calculation summary 774
calculation summary, SWMM 795
calculation warnings 806
captured flow 1445
carryover 1171
Carter 1259
catalog pipes 463, 1446
catch basin 1446
catch basins 296
adding inflow-capture curve to 297
adding surface-depth area curves to 301
attributes 1348
inflow alternatives for 880
physical alternative for 844
sanitary loading alternative for 892
surface storage 1231
water quality alternatives for 887
Catchment Summary tab 778
catchments 368
Index-1462
C
adding a Tc method to 369
adding unit hydrographs to 697
assigning an RTK table to 705, 710, 711
attributes 1386, 1397
characteristics of 692
defining CN Area collections for 650, 693
defining geometry of 374
hydrograph methods for 368
rainfall runoff alternatives for 884
snowmelt 369
specifying initial pollutant buildup 516
Tc methods 370
catenary shape 1156
C-Depth Table 1322
certification 1430
change pipe width 1107
Change Series Title dialog box 1038
changing the drawing view 423
channels 1446
and cross section nodes 293
attributes 1327
defining roughness types for 468, 470
split in 412
when to use 404
Chart Options dialog box 993
Chart Tab 994
Export tab 1028
Print tab 1030
Series Tab 1019
Tools tab 1027
Chart Tools Gallery dialog box 1038
charts 1420
child alternative
creating active topology 838
child scenarios 827
Circular 173 1250
Circular 173 data 1254
circular channel shape 1148
circular unsubmerged orifice hydraulics 1218
CivilStorm 1424
about 1
CivilStorm 2005
features 6
what is it for? 5
Index-1463
C
CivilStorm project files 1418
clearing element selection 409
climatology 482
Climatology dialog box 482
CN 1446
runoff 1275
runoff volume 1276
CN Area Collection dialog box 652, 694
CN Area collections 650, 693
coefficients for inlet design 1436
Collection 265
collection 1446
collections
CN Area 650, 693
inflow 639
minor loss 283
sanitary flow 653
color coding 929
adding 929
deleting 930
editing 931
renaming 931
Color dialog box 1033
Color Editor dialog box 1033
Color Map Tables 934
Color-Coding Properties dialog box 932, 1062
column headings
combination inlet in sag 1182
combination inlet on grade 1176
commands (AutoCAD mode) 1108, 1118
Compact Database Enabled option 176
Component 265
components menu 24
Composite Action 555
Composite Condition 550
composite cross slope 1175
composite curve number equation 1279
composite gutter section 1187
composite hydrograph 1446
composite hydrograph data table window 632
Composite Hydrograph Window 631
composite hydrographs 631, 639
Composite Logical Action 552
composite outlet structures
defining 308
Composite Outlet Structures dialog box 310
Index-1464
C
Compress Database command 32
compressing large database files 32, 176
computing runoff 1292
Conditions List 552
Conditions tab 548
conditions tab 548
Conduit Control Structure dialog box 279
conduit control structures
depth-flow curves in 280
functional settings for 280
orifice settings in 280
weir settings in 281
conduit infiltration 604, 717
conduit shapes 1147
natural reach shapes 1161
conduits 1446
attributes 1310
defining a control structure in 277
defining as irregular channel 286
defining roughness type for 468, 470
when to use 404
connected impervious area equation 1279
connected impervious areas 1278
connecting elements 396, 397
connection
synchronization 1116
connections manager 235
connectivity
explicit 263
implicit 263
constant area 1229
Constant Flow 864
constructing a query 537, 969
contacting Bentley Systems
sales 11
technical support 11
continuity error 775
continuous patterns 612
continuously depressed gutter 1188
contour 1063, 1064
smoothing 1064, 1065
Contour Browser 1063, 1065
Contour Manager 1062
Contour Plot 1065
Contours 1062
contracted weirs 1221
Index-1465
C
Control Manager 542
Control Set dialog box 490
control sets 489, 490
control sets formats 492
Control Sets tab 556
control structures
defining in conduits 277
controls tab 543
copy 59
copying
FlexTables 974
corrupt files 1420
create a new Totalizing Flow Meter 451, 809
create Observed Data 990
Create Selection Set dialog box 432
creating
graph 982
creating a model 396
creating a query 535
creating alternatives 834
creating dynamic 432
creating global storm events 685
creating graphs 1420
creating profiles 1420
creating queries 537, 969
creating reports 976
creating sanitary flow collections 653
creating selection sets 431, 432
creating storm events 658
cross section nodes 1446
cross sectional shapes of link elements 286
cross sections 305
attributes 1368
controlling channel cross sections at 293
transitions types 1373
CulvertMaster 1428
culverts 1213
cumulative rainfall curve storms 1234
cumulative storm events 659
curb inlet in sag 1178
curb opening 1175, 1176
Curve 265
curve number
equation 1279
curved pipes 395
Index-1466
D
custom AutoCAD entities 1108, 1117, 1118
customize
drawing 1115
customizing
FlexTables 970
customizing graphs 1050
cyclic time vs. elevation curves 330
Cyclic Time-Elevation Curve dialog box 330
D
data
organization 832
data types for user data extensions 563
Database Utilities 32
DD 1446
decimal point 420
default units 182
defining CN Area collections 650, 693
defining composite outlet structures 308
defining geometry of link elements 285
defining patterns 612
defining pump settings 336
defining sanitary flow collections 653
defining user data extensions 558
deleting
FlexTables 964
deleting annotations 922
deleting background layers 910
deleting color coding 930
deleting elements 410
deleting groups of elements in a selection set 435
deleting profiles 943
depression storage equation 1293
Depth (Maximum Overtopping) 1323
depth vs. area curves 332
Depth Width Curve dialog box 289
depth-area curve 1229
depth-flow curves
in conduit control structures 280
design percent full 1319
design storms 1234
dialog boxes
rational rainfall curveI-D-F 1237
dimensionless rainfall curve settings 679
dimensionless rainfall curves 659
Index-1467
E
defining 680
Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph Curves Library Editor 716
Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph Dialog 711
directly connected impervious area 1293
disconnect 411
display format 421
Display Precision 420
display precision 419
displaying multiple projects 174
ditch 1188
diurnal curve 1446
diurnal curves 611
dockable managers 56
downstream node 396
dragging 1446
drawing
scale 181
setup (AutoCAD mode) 1114
synchronization (AutoCAD mode) 1116
drawing scale 181
dry bed 1143
dry weather 604
dry weather flow collections 653
DWG 1115
DXF file
exporting 226
DXF Properties dialog box 349, 432, 434, 680, 681, 915
dynamic inheritance 818
dynamic managers 1447
E
e, b, d coefficients 1234
equations 1237
Eagleson 1260
edit elements 1107
Edit Hyperlink dialog box 531
edit menu 21
editing
FlexTables 965
numerous elements at once 967
editing alternatives 834
editing annotations 923
editing attributes 1305
editing background layers 910
editing color coding 931
Index-1468
E
editing column headings
FlexTables 966
editing element attributes 416
editing scenarios 828
editing units
FlexTables 966
egg shape 1151
element
deleting 1107
modify 1107
moving 1108, 1119
relabel 419
element attributes 1305
element connectivity 396
element connectivity table 397
element label project files 184
element labeling settings 184
element properties 1104
Element Property Inferencing 583, 589
element relabeling 973
element symbology 1447
Element Symbology Manager 917
using folders in 920
element tables 976, 1447
elements 275
adding data to link elements 277
adding in the middle of a pipe 410
adding inflow-capture curve to a catchment 297
adding to your model 394
catch basins 296
catchments 368
clearing selection of 409
connecting 276, 396, 397
cross sections 305
defining cross sectional shapes of link elements 286
defining geometry of link elements 285
deleting 407
editing attributes 416
globally editing data in numerous elements 967
link 276
manholes 301
moving 407
outfalls 326
overview 275
ponds 378
pressure junctions 306
pumps 335
Index-1469
E
reporting on 977
selecting 407
selecting all 409
selecting all of the same type 409
viewing in selection sets 431
wet wells 331
Elevation (Maximum Tailwater) 1323
Elevation (Roadway Crest) 1322
elevation volume curves 1230
elevation vs. area 382
percent void space 384
elevation vs. area curves 385
Elevation vs. Area table 382
elevation vs. flow curves
adding to outfalls 328
elevation vs. volume 383
elevation vs. volume curves 387
Elevation vs. Volume table 383
Elevation-Area Curve dialog box 386
elevation-area curves 1230
Elevation-Flow Curve dialog box 329
Elevation-Volume Curve dialog box 388
ellipse shape 1150
engineering libraries 444, 447
adding a storm event in 661
adding unit sanitary loads in 626
overview 444
sharing on a network 448
working with 445
engineering libraries dialog box 447
English units 1447
Enhanced Pressure Contours 1066
entering additional data to link elements 277
entering data 416
entering SWMM data 476
entities
in AutoCAD 1108, 1117, 1118
enumerated user data extensions 568
Enumeration Editor dialog box 568
EPA SWMM 368, 695
input parameters 699
EPA SWMM runoff method 738, 758
EPS 727
analysis 727, 728, 729
EQT 321
EQT curves
Index-1470
F
adding to outfalls 328
equal length inlets 1182
equations
composite curve number 1279
connected impervious 1279
Green and Ampt 1294
Horton 1295
impervious areas 1293
peak discharge 1281
pervious area 1292
unconnected impervious 1279
error messages 257
errors 796
Espey/Winslow 1261
estimate storage 1282
explicit connectivity 263
explode elements (AutoCAD mode) 1119
export 226, 229
x/y coordinates 257
exporting
FlexTables 975
exporting data 226
to a DXF file 226
to SWMM 5 227
exporting data to
shapefile 229
exporting FlexTables 974
extended period analysis 727
extended period simulation 1447
external boundary conditions 1199
External Tool Manager 569
F
F1 9
FAA time of concentration 1262
feature class 1068
features of CivilStorm 2005 6
Federal Aviation Agency 1262
file menu 18
fill depth 1316
filter
resetting 969
filtering a FlexTable 968
Find 417
Find Logical Action dialog box 553
Index-1471
F
finding elements 417
fixed loads
adding 607
Fixed Point 421
FlexTable dialog box 961
FlexTable Setup dialog box 971
FlexTables 957, 1447
copying 974
copying data 974
creating 964
customizing 970
deleting 964
editing 965
editing column headings 966
editing globally 967
editing units 966
exporting 974
exporting data 975
filtering 968
global editing 967
navigating in 966
opening 963
ordering columns 967
printing 974, 975
renaming 965
reports 975
saving as text 975
shortcut keys 966
sorting column order 967
FlexTables Manager 958
folders in 960
FlexTables manager 958
flooding conditions 1144
fLoss rate 1294
flow control structures 1205
weirs 1205
flow divider 193
flow roughness 1166
FlowMaster 1427
folders
in Background Layers Manager 908
in Element Symbology Manager 920
in FlexTables Manager 960
format
unit 419
formulae
See equations.
Index-1472
G
fourth-quartile distribution 1252
Free Form 926
freeboard 1447
friction methods
Hazen-Williams 1308
Kutters 1308
Mannings 1308
frontal flow 1189
full flow capacity 1325
functional settings of conduit control structures 280
fundamental solution of gravity flow system 1123
G
GEMS datastore 1068
General 421
general settings 176
General Summary tab 778
generic unit hydrograph 1287
geocode 1069
geodatabase 1069
geodatabase support 260
geometric network 261
geometry
defining for a catchment or a pond 374
of link elements 285
polygon vertices 374
polyline vertices 285
GeoTable 1099
GIS 1447
GIS-ID 254, 256
global edit 967
global editing
FlexTables 967
global rainfall runoff alternatives 883
global settings 175
global storm event 1447
Global Storm Event Settings dialog box 686
global storm events 685
adding 685
gothic shape 1156
Gradient Editor dialog box 1032
graph
copying and pasting data 983, 987
data 987
new 982
Index-1473
H
Graph dialog box 984
Graph Manager 980
Graph Series Options dialog box 988
graph settings 988
graphical layout
AutoCAD 1102, 1113
graphing 982
changing total time period 982
refresh 982
graphs 979, 1420
customizing 1050
data 983
printing 982
grate 1176
grate inlet in sag 1177
grate inlet on grade 1171
gravity flow system 1123
gravity sewer systems
special hydraulic considerations of 1139
Green and Ampt
equations 1294
method 1294
groundwater flow formula 1393
group/cover type
A 1275
B 1275
C 1275
D 1275
gutter depression 1170, 1188
gutter flow 1168, 1185
Gutter Summary tab 780
gutter system
fundamental solution of 1166
gutter system hydraulics 1184
gutters 1448
theory 1166
when to use 404
H
Haestad Methods
program update 7
training 1430
Haestad Press 1428
Has Overtopping Weir? 1322
Index-1474
H
Hatch Brush Editor dialog box 1034
Hazen-Williams
friction method 1308
headloss 808
headloss coefficient
in minor loss collections 285
headloss methods
junctions 1201
HEC-22 1168
help menu 33
history of what-if analyses 812
horizontal 1178
horizontal variation of roughness 1164
horseshoe shape 1150
Horton
equations 1295
method 1295
hydraulic analysis 727
hydraulic boundaries 1198
external 1199
internal 1200
hydraulic review 571
hydraulic review tool 570
hydraulics
of gutter system 1184
hydrograph 1448
Hydrograph Curve dialog box 718
hydrograph methods 368
hydrographs
adding based on RTK method 701
methods 1283
SCS 1289
unit hydrographs 697
user defined 608
hydrographs in the Inflow Collection Editor 422
hydrographs vs. pattern loads 607
hydrology alternatives 871
hyetograph 1448
hyperlinks 528, 1448
adding 530
deleting 531
editing 531
Hyperlinks dialog box 528
Index-1475
I
ICPM 1448
I-D-F 1234, 1255
curves 1235
curves reading 1236
data 1235
e, b, d equations 1237
I-D-F e, b, d equations 1237
IDF storm events 659, 681
I-D-F tables 1237
image compression 913
Image Filter 912
Image Properties dialog box 912, 1421
i-models 589
impervious areas 1277
connected 1278
directly connected equation 1293
unconnected 1278
impliciit engine 757
implicit connectivity 263
implicit engine 757, 1448
Import
WaterCAD 1109, 1121
import 19, 265
Bentley Wastewater 195
WaterCAD 1109, 1121
importing data 192
inactive 839
inactive elements in alternatives 838
inclined 1178
Increment 1323
incremental storm events 659
independent papers 1429
individual elements
adding to your model 394
inferencing 589
infiltration 717, 718, 719, 864, 1448
Infiltration (Average) 864
infiltration method 738, 758
inflow 602, 633, 641, 1448
inflow alternatives
for catch basins 880
for catchments 881
for cross sections 882
for manholes 880
Index-1476
I
for outfalls 880
for ponds 881
for pressure junctions 882
for wet wells 882
inflow and infiltration
defining CN Area collections 650, 693
inflow collection 1448
Inflow Collection Editor 422, 639, 1448
inflow collections
defining 639
inflow control center 641
Inflow Control Center dialog box 641
inflow vs. capture curve 297
Inflow-Capture Curve dialog box 298
inflows 633, 641
inheritance 817, 819
dynamic 818
overriding 818
initial abstraction 1276, 1280
initial buildup collection 1392
Initial Buildup Collection dialog box 516
initial condition alternative
ponds 870
wet wells 870
initial conditions
specifying in Calculation Options 741
initial conditions alternative 869
initial conditions of networks 982
initial flow equals zero 982
inlet capacity 1168
inlet design coefficients 1436
inlet flow 1448
Inlet Transition Depth 762
inlets in sag 1177
inlets on grade 1170
in-line weirs 1206
input parameters for unit hydrograph runoff methods 695
InRoads 199, 228
integrating AutoCAD with CivilStorm 1113
intensity storm events 659
intensity-duration-frequency curves 681
internal boundaries 1200
culverts 1213
flow control structures 1205
manholes 1201
manholes and sewer junctions 1200
orifices 1212
Index-1477
J
internal control stuctures
rating curves as 1212
interpolate 589
interpolation 589
introduction 1
irregular channels 286
irregular closed section shape 1159
Irregular Cross Section Dialog Box
accessing 308
irregular open channel shape 1158
Irregular Weir Cross Section dialog box 325
irregular weirs 1222
J
junction chambers
attributes 1408
junction headloss methods 1201
K
Kerby/Hathaway 1262
Kirpich (PA) 1263
Kirpich (TN) 1264
knowledgebase 7
Kutters
L
land uses 502, 1392, 1449
Land Uses Collection dialog box 513
Land Uses dialog box 502
Land Use Buildup tab 504
Land Use tab 504
Land Use Washoff tab 509
LandXML 218, 219
layer 1069
layout
AutoCAD 1102, 1113
layout settings 177
layout tool 394
length and velocity 1265
Index-1478
M
lessons 10
library types 444
Like operator 539
line tool 392
link element
link elements 276
defining cross sectional shapes of 286
entering additional data to 277
LoadBuilder 603, 656, 1081
manager 1082
run summary 1093
wizard 1082
loading 601
adding fixed loads 607
CN Area collections 650, 693
defining inflow collections 639
hydrographs vs. pattern loads 607
methods for 602
patterns 610
types of loads 604
user defined hydrographs 608
local depression 1170
logical control 546
dialog box 544
manager 542
set editor 557
Logical controls 545
logical controls
overview 541
long term continuous simulations 230
looped networks 1127
low flow conditions 1143
LTCS 230
M
manholes 301, 1449
adding surface-depth area curves to 301
as internal boundaries 1200, 1201
attributes 1340
Index-1479
M
Mannings equation 1164
Mannings n coefficient table 1433
Mannings n vs. Depth curves 468
Mannings n vs. Flow curves 470
Mannings n-Depth Curve dialog box 469
Mannings n-Flow Curve dialog box 471
Mannings
median section 1188
merge 412
merge
alternatives 832
Merge nodes in close proximity 412
metadata 1069
methods of entering loads 602
minimum time of concentration 1258
Minor Loss Coefficients dialog box 448
minor loss collection 283
Minor Loss Collection dialog box 284
minor losses 1204
mixed flow 1141
model calculations
troubleshooting 806
ModelBuilder
connections manager 235
errors and warnings 257
preparing to use 234
supported formats 233
using 233
ModelBuilder Data Source Format Sample 264
ModelBuilder wizard 238, 239
modeling a split 412
modeling weirs in conduits 406
modified basket handle shape 1157
Modified Rational Method 1272
modified rational method 368, 695, 716
move
elements 1108, 1119
labels 1108, 1119
moving elements 409
moving rainfall from a catchment 406
moving toolbars 53
multiple elements
selecting 409
multiple projects
maximum number of 173
multi-select data sources 257
Index-1480
N
naive method 1301
named views 58
natural reach shapes 1161
navigating in a FlexTables 966
Network Navigator 437
network navigator 415
network review 415
New 589
New Logical Action dialog box 552
Node Summary tab 779
non-convergence 727
Number 421
O
Observed Data 990
online book 9
See also .pdf.
online help 9
open channel
when the water level exceeds the top elevation 293
opening an existing project 174
opening managers 54
operation 967
Operational Alternative 541
options 175
drawing 181
global 175
labeling 184
project 179
ProjectWise 185
setting 175
units 182
Options Dialog Box
ProjectWise settings 185
Oracle 266
ordering
organize data 832
orifice area unsubmerged hydraulics 1219
orifice coefficient 1449
orifice flow 1178, 1180, 1181
orifice hydraulics 1218, 1219
Index-1481
P
orifice orientation 1220
orifice settings
orifices 1212, 1217
outdoor ponds 381
outfalls 326
adding cyclic time vs. elevation curves to 330
adding elevation vs. flow curves to 328
adding EQT curves to 328
adding tidal curves to 327, 330
adding time vs. elevation curves to 327
attributes 1359
boundary condition alternative 867
output
tables 957
overbank segments 1165
overflow 305, 1144, 1449
overriding inheritance 818
overtopping 1223
P
Pan tool 423
panning 423
using a mousewheel to 423
parabola shape 1161
parent scenario 827
paste 59
pattern 1449
extended period analysis 729
pattern load 1449
pattern loads 610
pattern setup 1449
pattern setups 616
Pattern Setups dialog box 617
patterns 611
continuous 612
defining 612
stepwise 612
Patterns dialog box 613
pavement drainage 1168
peak discharge (Qp)
equation 1281
Index-1482
P
peak discharge rate 1270
percent connected impervious area 652, 694
percent unconnected impervious area 653, 695
physical alternatives 840
for channels 860
for conduits 851
for cross sections 846
for gutters 862
for junction chambers 850
for manholes 842
for outfalls 845
for pond outlet structures 846
for ponds 863
for pressure pipes 865
for pumps 841
for wet wells 849
physical characteristics of ponds 378
Pipe Catalog dialog box 463
pipe infilitration 717
pipe length 421
pipe volume 1230
pipe volumes 384
pipe-arch shape 1154
pipeline infiltration 717
pipes
modeling with curves 395
splitting 410
plane sweep 1302
Pointer dialog box 1037
pollutant buildup 516
Pollutant Results dialog box 502
pollutants 496
Pollutants dialog box 496
pollutograph 1450
Pollutograph Collection dialog box 501
Pollutograph dialog box 499
pollutographs 497
adding to a node 498
polygon vertices 374
polygonal elements
polyline vertices 285
Polyline Vertices dialog box 285
pond and swamp adjustment factor 1281
Index-1483
P
Pond Infiltration 864
pond infiltration 719
pond outlet structures
attributes 1366
composite 308
pond volume 385, 387
equation for calculating 385
pond volumes 1229
PondPack
upgrade 7
ponds 378
adding elevation vs. area curves to 385
adding elevation vs. volume curves to 387
attributes 1401
elevation vs. area 382
elevation vs. volume 383
initial condition alternative 870
outdoor ponds 381
overview 378
required attributes 379
required attributes for 380
storage estimates TR-55 1282
volume function for 1230
volume options for 378
power shape 1160
predefined queries 439, 532
pressure junctions 306
attributes 1413
pressure pipes
adding a minor loss collection to 283
attributes 1306
pressurized flow 1140
print preview
FlexTables 975
Print Preview Window 1060
printing
Index-1484
P
FlexTables 975
printing FlexTables 974
printing graphs 982
proejct queries 532
profile 1450
editing 942
profile setup 944
Profile Viewer dialog box 946
profiles 935
animating 937
creating 941
deleting 943
renaming 943
viewing 937
Profiles manager 936
project
files 1103, 1115
project files 1417, 1418
needed to send model to another user 1418, 1420
project inventory 977
project properties 174
Project Properties dialog box 174
projects 173
ProjectWise 19, 185
general guidelines for using 187
guidelines 187
using with CivilStorm 187
using with SewerGEMS 187
ProjectWise options 185
properties
editing 416
Property Editor 416, 1305
using Find Element 417
prototypes 441
creating 441
prototypes manager 442
proxies 1122
publications 1428
Pump Curve Definitions dialog box 337
Pump Curve dialog box 349, 353
pump curve types 345
pump definition types 1225
pump settings 336
pump station 361
pump types 349, 353
pumps 335
attributes 1375
Index-1485
Q
defining settings for 336
defining the suction-side node 1377
in SWMM 758
Q
Q 1450
Q/Qp method
defined 1284
quartile distributions 1253
queries 532, 537, 969
creating 535
in FlexTables 968
predefined 532
project 532
shared 532
using Like operator in 539
Queries Manager dialog box 533
Query Builder dialog box 537
R
rainfall 1234
24-hr. distributions 1244
antecedent runoff condition 1277
curves 1238
dimensionless depth and time curves 1247
dimensionless depth and time distribution 1244
dimensionless depth distribution 1244
duration 1238, 1252
gauged storms 1239
hydrographs 1242
intensity 1238
peak discharge 1279
runoff computations SCS/SBUH 1292
SCS 1234
SCS distributions 1244
synthetic curves 1249
synthetic distributions 1243
tables 1242
Rainfall Curve Dictionary 680
Rainfall Curve Dictionary dialog box 680
Rainfall Curve Import Setting dialog box 679
rainfall curves 658
Index-1486
R
definition 1239
gauged 1239
Rainfall derived infiltration and inflow 657
rainfall derived infiltration and inflow 603
rainfall runoff alternatives 883
for catchments 884
for ponds 885
for wet wells 886
global rainfall 883
ranking
rating curves 1212
Rational design storms 1234
Rational method 1270
flow equation 1270
Rational Method IDF Curve dialog box 681
Rational method storms 1234
RDII 603, 657
reconnect 411
rectangular channel shape 1158
rectangular weirs 1206, 1220
rectangular-rounded shape 1159
rectangular-triangular shape 1160
references and textbooks 1429
refresh 982
relabeling elements 419
relational database 1069
Remove
Columns 972
removing elements from selection sets 435
renaming
FlexTables 965
renaming annotations 923
renaming background layers 911
report
calculation 774
calculation summary 774
report menu 33
report options 978
reporting
on a group of elements in a selection set 435
reports 976
creating for elements 977
FlexTables 975
scenario 977
standard 976
reset
Index-1487
S
FlexTable filter 969
Reset Workspace 53
results files 1417, 1418
Roadway Cross Section Length 1322
Roadway Weir Coefficient 1322
roughness models 1163
implementations of 1164
roughness type
defining for conduits and channels 468, 470
rounding of numbers 420
RTK method 701
assembling RTK parameters 703
best use of 702
creating an RTK table 704
RTK methods
procedure for developing hydrographs for 1300
theory 1297
three processes of 1298
RTK table
assigning to a catchment 705, 710, 711
creating 704
RTK Tables dialog box 706, 708
RTK unit hydrograph method 368
rule based 542
runoff
curve number 1275
SCS equation 1273
runoff method 695
runoff volume 1276
equations 1276
S
sales 11
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor 654
sanitary flow collection 1450
sanitary flow collections
defining 653
sanitary load 1450
sanitary load control center 650
sanitary loading 602
unit sanitary loads 623
sanitary loading alternative 891
for manholes 891
Index-1488
S
for wet wells 892
save
as drawing *.DWG 1116
saving FlexTables as text 975
SBUH 1292
scaling background layer images 1421
scenario example 821
Scenario Management 825
Example 821
Scenario Manager 830
scenario summary 977
scenarios 811, 1450
advantages of using 812
attribute inheritance 819
base 827
batch run 829
calculation options for 899
creating new 827
editing 828
inheritance 817
local and inherited values in 818
overview 811, 814, 826
Scientific 421
SCS 368
peak discharge 1279
runoff 1273
soil groups 1275
SCS Curve Number 650, 693
SCS distributions by type 1244
SCS lag 1266
SCS rainfall distributions 1244
SCS Runoff
equation 1273
SCS Unit Hydrograph 1234
peak discharge equations 1290
SCS Unit Hydrograph method
defined 1289
sdb 228
SDE 262
section hydraulics 1146
conduit shapes 1147
Section Results dialog box 292
seed 21
select boundary polygon feature class 1097
Select in Drawing button
in Query Manager 534
select the point 1097
Index-1489
S
selecting all elements 409
selecting an element 409
selecting elements
all of the same type 409
selecting multiple elements 409
selection 839
Selection by Query dialog box 433
Selection Set Element Removal dialog box 435
selection sets 427, 428, 432, 434, 1450
adding a group of elements to 434
adding elements to 434
creating 431, 432
creating from queries 432
group-level operations 435
in FlexTables 962
removing elements from 435
viewing elements in 431
Selection Sets Manager 428
Selection tool 44
semi-circular shape 1155
semi-ellipse shape 1152
sending your model to another user 1418, 1420
Set Field Options dialog box 419
setting the outflow node for a catchment 406
setup 1114
sewer junctions 1200
SewerCAD 1426
SewerGEMS
about 1
features 1
what is it for? 1
SewerGEMS project files 1417
shapefile
defined 1069
Shapefile Properties dialog box 914
Shared Field Specification dialog box 568
shared queries 532
sharing engineering libraries on a network 448
sharp crested weirs 406
shortcut keys
FlexTables 966
SI 420, 1450
Simple Logical Action 552
single roughness value 1164
slot inlet in sag 1181
slotted-inlet on grade 1176
smoothing contours 1064
Index-1490
S
snap menu (AutoCAD mode) 1109, 1119
snowmelt 369
software
upgrades 7
Soil Conservation Service
See SCS.
soil groups 1275
solvers 757
sorting
spatial data 262
spatial database engine 262
specifying initial conditions 741
split 412
splitting pipes 410
St. Venant equation
application in branched and looped networks 1127
standard reports 976
starting a new project 174
Station-Elevation Curve dialog box 287
station-elevation curves 286
steady state analysis 727
steady-state analyses 727
steep reaches 1143
stepwise patterns 612
storage elements 378, 1228
storm event 1450
Storm Event dialog box 678
storm events 686
adding 658
adding global storm events 685
adding in engineering libraries 661
StormCAD 1427
storms
gauged 1239
Rational design 1234
SCS 1234
stormwater flow 603, 657
submerged orifice hydraulics 1218
submergence correction 1223
Submersible Pumps 357
subtypes 262
suction-side node
defining for pumps 1377
summary 795
supercritical 808
support 11
Index-1491
T
supported operating systems 5
suppressed weirs 1220
surface depth vs. area curve 301
Surface Depth-Area Curve Editor 302
surface system 1166
Surface-Depth Area Curve dialog box 302
sweeper inlet 1183
SWMM 758, 795
adding treatment to a node 514
aquifers 487
climatology 482
control sets 489, 490
control sets formats 492
input data 476
land uses 502
pollutants 496
treatment expressions 514
SWMM 5 exporting to 227
SWMM engine 757, 1451
differences with implicit engine 757
SWMM engine version 477
SWMM hydrology 479
symbol
visibility (AutoCAD mode) 1115
sync 257
synchronize (AutoCAD mode) 1116
synchronize existing model 237
synthetic curve 1235
synthetic rainfall curves 1249
synthetic rainfall distributions 1243
T
Table
Properties 971
Type 971
table
setup 971
tables 59
column headings 966
editing FlexTables 965
Mannings n coefficients 1433
units 966
tabular report 957
Tc 717
Index-1492
T
Tc Data Collection dialog box 370
Tc definition 1451
Tc methods 371
Tc methods for catchments 369
technical journals 1429
technical support 11
TeeChart Gallery dialog box 1050
text 1108, 1119
text height 181
multiplier 181
text tool 392
The 1430
theme folders
renaming 921
theme groups
deleting 921
theory 1123
branched and looped networks 1127
fundamental solution of gravity flow system 1123
gutters 1166
hydraulic boundaries 1198
hydrograph methods 1232
of RTK method 1297
roughness models 1163
section hydraulics 1146
special hydraulic conditions 1139
Thiessen polygon generation 1093
Thiessen Polygon Generation Theory 1301
third-quartile distribution 1252
This 627
tidal curves in outfalls 327, 330
time and date 940
Time Browser Options dialog box 730, 939
time of concentration 717, 1256
Carter 1259
definition 1451
Eagleson 1260
equation 1256
Espey/Winslow 1261
Federal Aviation Agency 1262
Kerby/Hathaway 1262
Kirpich (PA) 1263
Kirpich (TN) 1264
length and velocity 1265
minimum 1258
SCS lag 1266
TR-55 channel flow 1269
Index-1493
T
TR-55 shallow concentrated flow 1268
TR-55 sheet flow 1266
user-defined 1259
Time of Concentration methods 370
time of concentration methods 369
time of simulation 982
Time Settings dialog box 677
time versus depth rainfall
See rainfall curves.
Time vs. Depth storm events 678
time vs. elevation curves 327
Time vs. Intensity storm events 678
time-depth curve 1234
Time-Elevation Curve dialog box 327
toolbars 34
customizing 52
tools menu 30
total inflow vs. total captured flow 297
total N-R Iterations 775
Totalizing Flow Meter Editor 451, 809
Totalizing Flow Meter editor 451, 809
Totalizing Flow Meter manager 450, 808
Totalizing Flow Meter Manager Dialog 450, 808
TR-55
graphical peak discharge 1279
pond storage estimates 1282
TR-55 channel flow 1269
equations 1269
TR-55 shallow concentrated flow 1268
TR-55 sheet flow 1266
training 1430
transcritical flow 1141
transition flow 1181
transition of circular pipe to the slot 1140
transition types 1373
transitional flow 1178, 1182
trapezoidal channel shape 1148
trapezoidal weirs 1208
treatment
adding to a node 514
Treatment Collection dialog box 515
treatment collections 515
treatment expressions 514
TRex Wizard 574
TRex wizard 574
triangle shape 1157
triangular weirs 1209
Index-1494
U
troubleshooting 795, 806
knowledge database 7
turning background layers on and off 912
turning toolbars off 53
turning toolbars on 53
tutorials 10
See also lessons.
type
IA 1244
type I 1244
Type I pumps 1226
type I, Ia, II, and III rainfall distributions 1244
type II 1244
Type II pumps 1226
type III 1244
Type III pumps 1226
Type IV pumps 1227
types of loads 604
U
U.S. customary 420
unconnected impervious area equation 1279
unconnected impervious areas 1278
uniform gutter cross slope 1185
Unit 420
unit discharge 1280
unit hydrograph 368, 695, 1451
Unit Hydrograph Data dialog box 698
unit hydrograph methodology 1286
unit hydrographs 697
computations 1292
fLoss 1294
Green and Ampt 1294
Horton 1295
methods 1292
theory 1286
unit loading 622
unit of measurement 420
Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Load dialog box 627
unit sanitary load 1451
unit sanitary loading 622
unit sanitary loads 623
adding in engineering libraries 626
types of 623
units 182, 183
Index-1495
V
displaying in annotations 922
units and formatting 419
updating PondPack via the Web 7
upgrade
PondPack 7
upstream node 396
Use Weir C-Depth Table? 1322
user data extensions 558, 1451
data types 563
enumerated 568
User Data Extensions dialog box 560
User Defined Hydrograph dialog box 609
user defined hydrographs 608
User Defined Tailwater? 1323
User Notification Details dialog box 798
user notifications 795, 1451
User Notifications Manager 796
user-defined hydrograph 695
user-defined unit hydrograph 422
Using the Totalizing Flow Meter 808
V
Variable Speed Pump Battery 358
variable speed pumps 1227
vertical 1178
vertical variation of roughness 1166
vertices 285, 374
view
tabular 957
view associations 1105
view menu 27
viewing elements in a selection set 431
viewing profiles 937
virtual conduits 1451
virtual links 405
visibility of symbols 1115
V-notch weirs 1209, 1221
volume function 1229
volume options for ponds 378
W
warning messages 257
Index-1496
W
warnings 796
water level in an open channel 293
water quality alternatives 886
for catchments 888
for manholes 886
for outfalls 887
for ponds 889
for wet wells 889
WaterCAD 1426
custom AutoCAD entities 1108, 1117, 1118
WaterCAD in AutoCAD 1101, 1111
WaterGEMS 1426
watershed 1451
watershed area 1251
WCD file 1103, 1115
Web updates 7
weighted C values 1271
weir discharge coefficient 1206
weir flow 1178, 1179, 1181
weir settings
weirs 406, 1205, 1208, 1209
in-line 1206
irregular 1222
modeling in conduits 277
rectangular 1220
theory 1220
trapezoidal 1208
types of 1206, 1220
V-notch 1209, 1221
weirs in conduits 406
welcome dialog 173
wet weather load 1452
wet wells 331, 1380
adding depth vs. area curves to 332
attributes 1378
initial condition alternative 870
volume 1228
what is CivilStorm 2005? 5
what is SewerGEMS? 1
white
Index-1497
X
table columns 965
window color settings 177
Windows 2000 5
Windows versions supported 5
Windows XP 5
World Wide Web
See Web. 7
X
X/Y coordinates 257
Y
yellow
table cells 965
Z
Z Order 1109
zero flow at time 0 982
zip files
using to copy or move project files 1418, 1420
Zoom 425
Zoom Center 426
Zoom Center dialog box 426
zoom dependent visibility 928
Zoom Extents 424
Zoom Factor 426
Zoom In 424
Zoom Out 424
Zoom Previous
Zoom Next 425
Zoom Realtime 425
Zoom Window 424
zooming 423, 426
element tables
See also predefined FlexTables
Index-1498

SewerGEMS V8i User's Guide PDF

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

SewerGEMS V8i User's Guide PDF

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Chapter

Using Scenarios and Alternatives on page 9-811

Learn how to define calculation options, calculate your model, and

Introducing the Workspace on page 2-15

Presenting Your Results on page 10-905

Learn about the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i workspace, including

Learn how present results in graphs, profiles and reports.

Quick Start Lessons on page 3-65

Working in ArcGIS Mode on page 11-1067

Perform these tutorials to learn the basics of using Bentley

Learn how to use Bentley SewerGEMS V8i ArcGIS-specific features

Using Modelbuilder on page 5-233

Working in AutoCAD Mode on page 13-1111

Learn how to use ModelBuilder in ArcGIS mode or the Stand-Alone

Learn how to use Bentley SewerGEMS V8i in AutoCAD mode.

Starting a Project on page 4-173

Editing Attributes in the Property Editor on

Creating Your Model on page 6-275

Theory on page 14-1123

Learn about the theory behind Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.

Loading on page 7-601

Frequently Asked Questions on page 16-1417

Learn how to use Bentley SewerGEMS V8i data loading features to

Learn the answers to some common questions about using Bentley

Calculating Your Model on page 8-727

About Bentley Systems on page A-1423

Learn how to create and manage "what-if" scenarios.

Learn about other Haestad Methods products available from Bentley

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Users Guide

Getting Started on page 1-1

Using Scenarios and Alternatives on page 9-811

Introducing the Workspace on page 2-15

Presenting Your Results on page 10-905

Learn about the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i workspace, including menus,

Learn how to present results in graphs, profiles, and reports.

Quick Start Lessons on page 3-61

Working in AutoCAD Mode on page 13-1111

Perform these tutorials to learn the basics of using Bentley SewerGEMS

Learn how to use Bentley SewerGEMS V8i in AutoCAD mode.

Using Modelbuilder on page 5-233

Editing Attributes in the Property Editor on

Learn how to use ModelBuilder.

Starting a Project on page 4-175

Learn about the theory behind Bentley SewerGEMS V8i.

Creating Your Model on page 5-225

Frequently Asked Questions on page 16-1417

Learn the answers to some common questions about using Bentley

Loading on page 7-601

About Bentley Systems on page A-1423

Learn how to use Bentley SewerGEMS V8i data loading features to

Learn about other Haestad Methods products available from Bentley

Calculating Your Model on page 8-727

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Users Guide

Welcome to Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Help 1

Introducing the Workspace 15

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Users Guide

Quick Start Lessons 65

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Users Guide

Part 4: Generating Profiles 124

Starting a Project 173

Bentley SewerGEMS V8i Users Guide

Step 3: Data Source Table Names 197

Importing a Submodel 198